A  PRACTICAL   COURSE 


IN 


S  PAN  I  S  H. 

BY 

H.  M.  MONSANTO,  A.M., 

AND 

LOUIS  A.   LANGUELLIEE,  LL.D., 

REVISED  BY 

FREEMAN  M.   JOSSELYN 

UOCTEUR  DB  L'UNIVERSIT^  DE  PARIS 


NEW  YORK    •     CINCINNATI    •     CHICAGO 
AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


COPYHIGHT,    T875, 

BY  H    M    MONSANTO  AND  LOUIS  A.  LANGUELL1ER 

COPYRIGHT,  1903, 
BY  CLEMENCE   MONSANTO. 

COPYRIGHT,  1903, 
BY  AMERICAN   BOOK  COMPANY. 

w.  P.  13 


PREFACE. 


IN  preparing  the  present  work  it  has  been  the  aim  of  the  authors, 
while  excluding  nothing  of  practical  value  which  has  already  been 
placed  before  the  public,  to  combine  with  the  best  features  of  the 
most  approved  methods  the  results  of  their  own  experience.  While 
endeavoring  to  render  this  work  a  valuable  assistant  in  the  class-room, 
they  have  sought  at  the  same  time  to  adapt  it  to  the  purposes  of  pri- 
vate instruction,  and  in  so  doing  have  availed  themselves  to  a  great 
extent  of  the  admirable  plan  presented  in  Woodbury's  Practical 
Course  with  the  German  Language.  Accordingly  the  lessons  are 
arranged  in  the  following  order  :  — 

1.  THE  SUBJECTS  OP  THE  LESSON. 

2.  EXAMPLES,  accompanied  by  their  nearest  English  equivalents, 
and  made  to  illustrate  the  grammatical  and  idiomatic  principles  which 
are  involved  in  the  Lessons. 

3.  VOCABULARIES  placed  before  the  Exercises,  the  masculine  and 
feminine  names  being  grouped  separately,  and  other  parts  of  speeco 
arranged  alphabetically  for  convenience  of  reference. 

4.  SPANISH  EXERCISES.     The  sentences  in  Spanish  require  only 
the  application  of  the  instructions  contained  in  the  Lesson,  or  in  the 
preceding  ones,  for  their  translation  into  English. 

5.  ENGLISH  EXERCISES.     The  analogous  sentences  in  English  are 
presented  in  immediate  connection  with  the  preceding  ones  in  Span- 
ish.    The  principles  applied  in  the  Spanish  Exercises  are  thus  made 
a  most  convenient  and  effective  auxiliary  in  the  still  more  advanced 
and  difficult  work  of  translating  English  into  Spanish. 

6.  GRAMMATICAL  AND  IDIOMATIC  PRINCIPLES.     This  division  may 
be  employed  by  means  of  the  references  either  in  connection  with  the 
preceding  instructions,  or,  when  not  thus  required,  may  be  applied 
both  as  a  test  of  the  pupil's  previous  deductions,  and  at  the  same 
time  as  an  appropriate  and  impressive  review. 

The  rules  on  pronunciation  will,  it  is  hoped,  be  found  as  complete 
as  possible,  and  the  selection  of  sentences  in  the  Exercises  an  improve- 

3 


2fiO1 


4  PREFACE. 

meiit  oft  those  of  many  former  Methods.  The  conjugation  of  all  the 
irregular  verts 'in  general  use  will  bp  found  at  the  end  of  the  book, 
together  with  a  brief  sketch  on  the  formation  of  the  Spanish  language, 
and  also  a  complete  dictionary  of  all  the  words  used  in  the  different 
Exercises. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  book  does  not  contain  a  Second  Part  de- 
voted to  a  systematic  rearrangement  of  the  grammatical  facts  con- 
tained in  the  several  lessons.  Such  a  Second  Part  is,  we  believe, 
seldom  used  by  students,  and  we  have  been  careful,  as  far  as  possible, 
in  the  construction  of  our  lessons  to  insert  together  all  the  facts  per- 
taining to  each  part  of  the  subject.  So  the  course  of  our  book 
corresponds  very  nearly  to  that  which  would  be  adopted  in  a  system- 
atic grammar. 

While  respectfully  presenting  this  work  to  the  public,  the  authors 
indulge  the  hope  that  it  may  prove  a  welcome  auxiliary  to  the 
acquisition  of  the  Spanish  language. 

H.  M.  MONSANTO. 
LOUIS  A.  LANGUELLIER. 
NEW  YORK,  July,  1875. 


REVISER'S    NOTE. 

Since  the  publication  of  Monsanto  and  Languellier's  Spanish 
Course  in  1875,  the  advance  in  linguistics,  and  especially  the  revision 
of  Spanish  accentuation  by  the  Academy  in  1888,  make  a  regulation 
necessary.  For  while  there  are  many  Spanish  grammars  before  the 
public,  the  present  book  aims  to  make  the  basic  principles  of  Spanish 
grammar  familiar  to  the  student  by  constant  practice,  and  repetition 
in  Spanish.  To  this  end  the  English  statements  of  grammatical  facts 
have  been  reduced  to  the  smallest  compass  compatible  with  clearness, 
while  the  Spanish  examples  have  been  made  as  numerous  as  possible. 

In  the  revision,  the  editor  has  endeavored  to  preserve  the  original 
form  of  the  work,  only  recasting  such  grammatical  statements  as 
seemed  to  demand  it.  His  especial  care  has  been  to  present  the 
Spanish  text  in  accordance  with  the  latest  rules  for  orthography  and 
accent  —  rules  which  have  been  treated  at  some  length  in  the  intro- 
duction, and  which  involved  a  complete  recasting  of  that  part  of  the 
work. 

F.  M.  J.,  JR. 
MADRID,  June  17,  1902. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

INTRODUCTION 13 

§  1.   Letters  and  Sounds.  —  Alphabet       13 

§  2.    Pronunciation 14 

1.  Vowels 14 

2.  Diphthongs 14 

3.  Triphthongs        15 

4.  Consonants 15 

§  3.   Variations  in  pronunciation 18 

§  4.   Double  Letters       19 

§5.    Syllables 19 

§  6.   Accent 20 

§  7.   Punctuation       23 

§  8.    Capital  Letters 23 

§  9.   Exercises  in  Pronunciation 24 

LESSONS  : 

I.    Article,  different  Forms 26 

II.    Plural       .o  29 

III.  Contraction  of  Preposition  with  Article    ......  33 

IV.  Pronouns       »     „  36 

V.   Verbs  ser  and  estar 41 

VI.    Use  of  the  Prepositions  de  and  para 45 

VII.    The  Negative 48 

VIII.    Adjectives,  Formation  of  the  Feminine 53 

IX.    Place  of  Adjectives 58 

X.    Diminutive  and  Augmentative  Nouns 63 

XI.    Adjectives,  Comparative  and  Superlative  Relative      .     .  69 

XII.    Superlative  Absolute.     Adjectives  and  Adverbs     ...  76 

XIII.  Possessive  Adjectives 81 

XIV.  Possessive  Pronouns 86 

XV.    Demonstrative  Adjectives 91 

XVI.    Demonstrative  Pronouns 94 

XVII.    Auxiliary  Verb  haber 99 

XVIII.    Auxiliary  Verb  haber  (crnitimied) 103 

XIX.    Gerund 107 

XX.    Cardinal  Numbers       112 

XXI.    Ordinal  Numbers 117 

XXII.    Pronouns  in  Simple  Tenses 122 

5 


6       -  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

XXIII.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns 129 

XXIV.  Auxiliary  Verbs,  haber,  tener .  136 

XXV.    Idiomatic  Uses  of  tener 143 

XXVI.    Auxiliary  Verbs,  ser,  estar 149 

XXVII.    Haber  and  ser  used  as  Impersonal  Verbs 156 

XXVIII.    The  Time  of  the  Day,  etc 161 

XXIX.    Use  of  the  Article 165 

XXX.    Personal  Pronouns  with  Prepositions  and  Verbs    .     .     .  171 

XXXI.    The  Respective  Place  of  Pronouns 176 

XXXII.    Regular  Verbs,  Present  Indicative 180 

XXXIII.  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjug.,  Present  Indicative  183 

XXXIV.  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjug.,  Present  Indicative  188 
XXXV.    Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjug.,  Present  Indicative  193 

XXXVI.    Imperfect  Tense,  Indicative  Mood 199 

XXXVII.    The  Past  Definite  or  Preterit,  and  the  Past  Indefinite    .  203 

XXXVI II.    Irregularities  of  the  Preterit 209 

XXXIX.    The  Past  Anterior  and  the  Pluperfect  (Indicative)     .     .  215 

XL.    The  Future  and  Future  Anterior 218 

XLI.    Subjunctive  Mood.  Present 223 

XLII.    Imperative  Mood 229 

XLIII.    Subjunctive  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 234 

XLIV.    Conditional  Mood 241 

XLV.    Subjunctive  Future  and  Future  Perfect 248 

XLVI.    Infinitive  Mood 250 

XL VI I.    The  Infinitive  governed  by  Prepositions 258 

XLVIII.    The  Gerund  and  Present  Participle 261 

XLIX.    The  Past  Participle 266 

L.    The  Past  Participle  (continued) 271 

LI.    The  Passive  Verb 275 

LII.    Reflexive  Verbs 279 

LIII.    Reflexive  Verbs  (continued) 286 

LIV.    Periphrastic  Verbs 290 

LV.    Impersonal  Verbs       295 

LVI.    Government  of  Verbs 299 

LVII.    Government  of  Adjectives 302 

LVIII.    The  Adverb 306 

LIX.    The  Preposition 312 

LX.    Defective  Verbs 318 

LXI.    Agreement  of  the  Verb  with  its  Subject 320 

LXII.    Conjunctions  and  Interjections 323 

TABLE  OF  TERMINATIONS  OF  THE  THREE  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS  .  326 

LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  IRREGULAR  VERBS 328 

FORMATION  OF  THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 370 

GENERAL  VOCABULARY 373 

1.  Spanish-English    .     .     • 373 

2.  English -Spanish    .     .     .     .     , 386 


INDEX. 


The  heavy-face  figures  refer  to  the  LESSONS,  the  light-face  figures  to  the  RULES  ;  as, 
for  instance,  3.  1-3  denotes  Lesson  3,  Rules  1-3,  &c.  When  page  or  section  is  referred 
to,  p.  or  §  is  given  with  the  figures. 


A  or  An,  1.  3. 

A,  3.  1.  When  used  with  active  verbs, 
18.  3.  When  not  used  with  an  active 
verb,  18.  4 ;  20.  6 ;  23. 2.  When  used 
withelcual(/acMaZ,etc.),23.6.  When 
used  before  a  following  Infinitive,  46. 
p.  254,  2.  Used  after  volver,  48.  9 
in  fine.  Used  with  some  Periphrastic 
verbs,  54. 1-6.  Complement  of  another 
Preposition.  59.  p.  314.  Its  use,  59. 1. 

Ablative  absolute,  49.  5. 

Accent,  p.  20,  §  6. 

Accusative  case,  22.6;  23.  2-6; 
30.2;  31.1,2,4. 

Active  verb,  51.  1,  2.  Becoming  a 
Reflexive  Verb,  52.  1.  When  becom- 
ing an  Impersonal  Verb,  55.  2. 

Adjectives,  repeated  before  nouns,  1. 
4.  Plural  formed  as  with  nouns,  2  9. 
Formation  of  the  Feminine,  8.  1-5. 
Referring  to  two  nouns  in  the  singular, 
8.  6.  Referring  to  two  nouns  of  differ- 
ent genders,  8.  7.  Used  substantively, 
8.  Place  of  Adjectives,  9.  1-4.  Used 
also  as  nouns,  9.  5.  Comparative  and 
Superlative,  11,  12.  Government  of 
Adjectives,  57.  1-7.  Used  as  adverbs, 
58.  9. 

A  donde.    See  donde. 

Adverbs,  Comparative  and  Superlative, 
11.  12;  13.  9,  Rem.  3.  Different 
sorts  of  Adverbs,  58.  pp.  308,  309. 
Their  place,  58.  1.  Their  formation, 
58.  2.  Used  diminutively  or  augmen- 
tatively,  58.  8. 

Ago,  its  translation,  27-  P«  157. 

Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  sub- 
ject, 61. 

Al,  3. 

A  la,  3. 

Alas,  3. 

Algo,  when  used  with  tener,  25.  3. 

Algun.    See  alguno. 

Alguno  (algunos,  alguna,  algunas), 
4.  8 ;  7.  9,  and  Obs.  :  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 

Alll  esta  and  hay,  p.  158. 

Alos,  3. 

Alphabet,  p.  13,  §  1. 

An  or  A,  1.  3. 

Andar,  when  it  may  be  used  instead  of 
ir,  48.  4. 

Ante,  its  use,  59.  2. 

Aiios,  used  with  ^ener,  25.  4. 

Any,  4.  8. 


Aquel,  aquella ;  este,  esta;  ese,  esa. 
Their  different  meanings,  15,  16. 

Aquello,  eso  and  esto,  their  different 
meanings,  15,  16. 

Article,  Definite,  1.  Indefinite,  1.  3. 
13. 9,  Rem.  2.  Not  separated  from  the 
Demonstrative  or  Relative  Pronoun, 
16.  8.  When  omitted,  23.  7.  Its  use, 
29.  When  used  with  an  infinitive,  46. 
13,  14. 

Augjnentative  nouns  and  adjectives, 
9. 

Buen.    See  Bueno. 

Bueno,  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 

Can,  44.  7,  1. 

Cardinal  numbers,  20.  When  end- 
ing in  os  and  as,  20.  2  When  used 
with  y,  20.  3.  When  used  instead  of 
the  ordinal  numbers,  21.  4,  Obs.  ;  R. 
5,6. 

Ch,  p.  16,  §  3. 

Cien.    See  Ciento. 

Ciento,  when  becoming  cien,  20.  4. 
Used  with  mil,  20.  8. 

Collective  noun,  when  put  in  the  sin- 
gular or  in  the  plural,  61.  8. 

Collective  numbers,  21. 

Collective  partitive,  61.  8. 

Como,  when  governing  the  Infinitive 
mood,  47.  2. 

Compound  tenses,  in  Reflexive 
Verbs,  52. 

Comparative,  its  formation,  11. 1-9. 

Comparative  and  Superlative, 
11,  12. 

Compound  gerund,  48.  6,  8. 

Compound  nouns,  1.  5-6. 

Con,  when  used  before  a  following  In- 
finitive, 46,  p.  255,  8 ;  48.  5,  3,  Note. 
Complement  of  an  Adjective,  57.  4. 
Its  use,  59.  3. 

Conditional,  44. 

Conjunctions,  requiring  the  Subjunc- 
tive mood,  41.  5.  List  of  the  principal 
Conjunctions,  62. 

Conmigo,  30. 11. 

Conocer,  and  Saber,  14.  9. 

Consigo,  30. 11. 

Contigo,  30. 11. 

Consonants,  p.  15,  §  3. 

Contents,  pp.  v,  vi. 

Could,  44. 17,  2. 

Cual,  when  used  with  tal,  23.  7  O. 
Cual  and  que,  23.  9. 


INDEX. 


dial,  Interrogative  Pronoun,  23. 11. 

Cuando,  used  with  Subjunctive  future, 
45.1. 

Cuanto  (cuanta,  cuantos,  cuantas),  how 
translated,  23.  13. 

Cuyo,  its  uses,  23.  8.  As  an  Interroga- 
tive Pronoun,  23.  11. 

D,  when  suppressed  in  Reflexive  Verbs, 
52.7. 

Dative  case,  30.  2 ;  31. 1, 2,  4. 

Days  of  the  week,  20. 

De,  3.  1,  2;  6.  1-3  Used  with  the 
Definite  Article  before  pronouns,  14. 
4-6.  Used  with  ser,  14. 8.  Used  with 
tener,  25.  2.  When  used  before  a 
following  Infinitive,  46.  p.  254,  5,  9,  10, 
3,  11.  Used  after  a  Past  Participle, 
49-  7.  Used  with  some  Periphrastic 
Verbs,  54.  1,  5.  Preceded  by  a  verb, 
56. 1,  2  Complement  of  an  Adjective, 
57.  l-4»  7.  Complement  of  another 
Preposition,  59.  p.  314.  Its  use,  59. 4. 
Used  after  a  partitive  noun,  61.  8. 

"D6  and  de,  §  6, 10. 

Deber,  18.  2. 

Defective  verbs,  60. 

Definite  article,  1.  1,  21;  13.5,7. 
Used  with  de,  14.  4-6.  Used  with 
verbs  expressing  moral  or  physical 
properties,  25.  6  and  Obs.  When  used 
to  translate  on,  28.  3.  Its  use,  29. 

Del,  3. 1. 

De  la,  3. 1. 

De  las,  3. 1. 

De  los,  3. 1. 

Demonstrative  adjectives,  15. 
1-3.  Generally  precede  the  noun,  15. 
2.  Must  be  repeated  before  every  noun, 
15.3. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  16. 

Descriptive  Tense,  36.  3. 

Diminutive  nouns  and  adjectives, 
10. 

Diphthongs,  p.  14,  §  2.  2 ;  §  6.  5. 

Direct  obiect  pronouns,  30. 1-12; 
31.  1-2;  52.  1,24. 

Divisions  of  the  day,  20.  p,  113; 
28.  p.  162. 

Doble.  See  p.  118  (Multiplicative  Num- 
bers). 

Don,  9.  6. 

Dona,  9.  6. 

Donde,  when  preceded  by  a  (£  donde), 
and  by  en  (en  donde),  15.  4.  Used 
as  a  Relative  Pronoun,  23.  10.  When 
governing  the  Infinitive,  47.  2. 

Double  letters,  p.  19,  §  4. 

E  and  y,  18. 

El,  1.1.  Used  (by  euphony)  instead  of 
la,  1.2;  13.4. 

El  de  e*l  (or  de  ella,  de  ellos,  de  ellas). 
Used  instead  of  el  suyo,  la  sn,ya.  etc., 
13.5. 

El  (or  la,  los,  las,  lo)  de  V.,  14.  4. 

El,  4.  6;  13.5. 

El  and  el.  p.  20,  §  6.  10 ;  4.  6. 

El  cual  (la  cual,  etc.).  When  used  and 
how,  23.  6. 


Ella,  4.  6;  13.5. 

Ellas,  4.  6  ;  13.  5. 

Fllo,  used  instead  of  eso,  16.  9.  Cor 
responding  to  it,  16.  9. 

EUos,  4.  6;  13.5. 

El  suyo,  la  suya,  used  instead  of  vuestro, 
vuestra,  14.  3. 

En,  used  with  a  gerund,  19.  8  and  Obs. 
When  used  before  a  following  Infinitive, 
46.  p.  254,  R.  5.  Its  use  as  a  Preposi- 
tion, 59.  5. 

En  dpnde.    See  Donde. 

English-Spanish  Vocabulary,  p. 
386. 

Ese,  esa;  este,  esta;  aquel,  aquella; 
their  different  meanings,  15,  16. 

Eso,  esto  and  aquello,  their  differ- 
ence of  meaning,  16.  1,  3,  9. 

Estar,  used  with  a  Past  Participle, 
18.  1.  Used  with  a  gerund,  19.  3. 
Not  used  with  ser,  ir,  venir,  19.  4. 
Its  gerund  often  preceding  another 
gerund,  19. 9.  Used  instead  of  tener, 
25.  1,  Obs.  a,  6,  c.  Its  conjugation, 
26. 

Estar  and  ser,  5. 1-3.  Used  instead  of 
tener,  25. 1,  Obs.  a,  6,  c.  Their  con- 
jugations, 26. 

Este,  esta;  ese,  esa ;  aquel,  aquella; 
their  different  meanings,  15. 1 ;  16.  2. 

EstO,  eso,  and  aquello,  their  differ- 
ence of  meaning,  16.  1,  3-5. 

Exclamation-point  (j),  p.  23,  §  7,  2. 

Exclamatory  phrases,  62. 

Feminine  gender,  1. 1. 

Formation  of  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage, pp.  370-372, 

Fractional  numbers,  21. 

Future  anterior,  40.  6. 

Future  perfect,  43. 

Future  tense.  Its  formation,  40. 
1-4.  When  used  instead  of  the  Impera- 
tive, 40.  5.  Subjunctive  future,  43. 1. 

Genders,  1. 1  and  General  Obs. 

General  Vocabulary,  Spanish-Eng- 
lish, p.  373.  English-Spanish,  386. 

Genitive  case,  30. 12. 

Gerund.    See  Present  Participle. 

Government,  of  Verbs,  56.  Of  Ad- 
jectives, 57.  Of  Adverbs,  58.  6.  Of 
Prepositions,  59. 

Gran.    See  Grande. 

Grande,  9.  6,  Rem.  3  and  note. 

Haber,  17.  1>  2.  Cannot  be  separated 
from  the  principal  verb  R.  1.  Its  con- 
jugation, 24.  Used  as  Impersonal  Verb, 
27. 1,  and  translated  by  ago,  there 
to  be,  since,  this,  there,  etc., 
27.  2.  Expressing  an  action  or  a  state 
which  still  continues,  p.  157.  Express- 
ing measure  or  distance,  p.  157.  Used 
with  que  before  an  Infinitive,  27.  3. 
Used  impersonally,  55.  p.  298. 

Haber  and  tener,  17.  1.  Their  con- 
jugations, 24. 

Haber  de,  18.  2. 

Hacer,  when  used  instead  of  haber, 
27.  2,  Obs.  When  followed  by  an  In- 


INDEX. 


flnitive,  46.  12.  Used  impersonally, 
55.  p.  298. 

Hay  and  aili  esta,  p.  158. 

Hijosmios!  13.9. 

Holidays,  28.  p.  162. 

How,  exclamatory,  rendered  by  que, 
23.  12. 

Imperative  mood,  41.  1-7.  Used 
with  pronouns,  41.  p.  224,  3,  6.  Of 
Reflexive  Verbs,  52.  7. 

Imperative-affirmative,  31.  p.  177;  41. 
1-7.  -Negative,  31.  p.  177  ;  41.  5,  c,  6. 

Imperfect,  of  the  Indicative,  its  for- 
mation, 36,  p.  199 ;  its  use,  36.  1-3. 
General  Obs.  on  the  Imperfect  of  the 
Indicative,  37.  7.  Of  the  Subjunctive, 
its  three  forms,  43.  1 ;  its  use,  43.  2, 
4,5. 

Imperfect  conditionals,  44.  2. 

Impersonal  verbs,  55. 1-4.  Essen, 
tially  or  Accidentally  Impersonal  Verbs, 
55.  2.  Peculiarities  of  some  Imper- 
sonal Verbs,  55.  4. 

Indefinite  article,  1.  3.  When  omit- 
ted, 5.  4  and  Obs. ;  29. 8.  Exceptions, 
1-5. 

Indicative  mood,  Present,  32.  35. 
Imperfect,  36.  Preterite  or  Past  Defi- 
nite, 37.  Past  Anterior,  39.  Pluper- 
fect, 39,  Future  and  Future  Anterior, 
40. 

Indirect  object,  52. 1,  2,  4. 

Indirect  object  pronouns,  30.  1, 
2,9-12;  31.1-4. 

Infinitive  mood,  46, 47.  When  used 
as  a  noun,  46.  13 ;  with  or  without  the 
Article,  14.  Governed  by  Prepositions, 
47.  1 ;  by  the  conjunctions  como, 
que,  the  adverb  donde,  or  an  Inter- 
rogative Pronoun,  2 ;  rendered  by  the 
Present  Indicative  or  the  Subjunctive 
Mood,  3.  When  may  be  used  instead  of 
the  Gerund,  48.  3,  5,  Note.  When  used 
with  con,  48.  5,  2,  Note. 

Infinitive,  preceded  by  que  and  ha- 
ber,  27.  3. 

In  order  to,  46.  6. 

Interjections,  62. 

Interjectional  phrases,  62. 

Interrogation-point  (d),  P-  22,  §  7, 1. 

Interrogative  pronouns,  23.  When 
governing  the  Infinitive,  47-  2. 

Interrogative  sentence,  4.  7. 

Ir,  not  used  with  estar,  19.  4.  Used 
with  an  adverb,  35.  7.  Used  with 
por,  35.  7,  Obs.  Imperfect  Indica- 
tive, 36.  pp.  199,  200.  When  it  maybe 
used  instead  of  andar,  48.  4.  When 
it  may  be  used  instead  of  estar,  51.7. 

Irregular  verbs,  first  conjugation, 
33. 1-4 ;  second  conjugation,  34.  1-10  ; 
third  conjugation,  35.  1-9. 

Irregular  verbs,  list  of  the  principal 
Irregular  Verbs,  pp.  328-369. 

Irse,  53.  p.  288. 

It,  sometimes  not  rendered  in  Spanish, 
16.  10.  Different  ways  of  translating 
it,  22.  6. 


Its,  13.  6. 

Jamas,  used  with  no,  7.  3.  Jamas 
and  nunca,  3-5. 

La,  1.  1-2,  13.  4.  As  a  Pronoun  in 
Simple  Tenses,  22.  1-2.  In  compound 
tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with  the  Infini- 
tive and  Gerund,  22.  4  and  p.  124. 
Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124.  When 
translated  by  it,  22.  6.  Used  with 
Una  to  translate  one  o'clock,  28  1. 

Las,  2.  1 ;  13.  4.  As  a  Pronoun  in 
Simple  Tenses,  22.  1,  2.  In  Compound 
Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with  the  Infini- 
tive and  Gerund,  22.  4  and  p.  124. 
Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124.  When 
translated  by  them.  Used  with  a 
numeral  to  indicate  the  time  of  the  day. 
28.1. 

Le,  used  in  Simple  Tenses,  22. 1,  2.  In 
Compound  Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with 
the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22.  4  and 
p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124. 
When  translated  by  it,  22.  6.  Used 
with  a  pronoun  and  V.  or  W.,  30.  7. 

Les,  grammatical  translation  of  to  them. 
22.6. 

LI,  p.  17,  §  3. 

Lo,  1.  1,  2  and  Rem.  1,  2.  Used  with 
Possessive  Pronoun,  14.  7.  As  a  Pro- 
noun in  Simple  Tenses,  22.  1,  2.  In 
Compound  Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with 
the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22.  4  and 
p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124. 
Declinable  and  undeclinable,  p.  125; 
22.  5.  When  translated  by  it,  22.  6. 

Los,  2.  1;  13.  4.  As  a  Pronoun  in 
Simple  Tenses,  22. 1,  2.  In  Compound 
Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with  the  Infini- 
tive and  Gerund,  22.  4  and  p.  124. 
Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124.  When 
translated  by  them,  22.  6. 

Mai.    SeeMalo. 

Malo,  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 

M andar,  when  followed  by  an  Infinitive, 
46. 12. 

Mas  de,  20.  7. 

Masculine  gender,  1. 1. 

May,  44. 11, 1. 

Medio  (media),  used  to  indicate  the 
time  of  the  day,  28.  1. 

Medio  and  mitad,  21.  7. 

Menos,  used  to  indicate  the  time  of  the 
day,  28.  2. 

Menos  de,  20.  7. 

Mf  and  mi,  p.  20,  §  6,  1. 

Might,  11,  2,  3. 

Might  have,  44.  11,  7. 

Mil,  when  used  in  the  plural,  20.  5. 
Used  with  ciento,  20.  8. 

Mlo,  13.  9. 

Mismo,  misma,  used  with  a  Posses- 
sive Pronoun,  14.  2.  Used  with  a  Dem- 
onstrative Pronoun,  16.  5. 

Mitad  and  medio,  21.  7. 

Months  of  the  year,  21. 

Moods,  Indicative,  32-40.  Impera- 
tive, 41."  Pubjunctive,  42-45.  Infini- 
tive, 46-50- 


10 


INDEX. 


Multiplicative  numbers,  21. 

Nada  used  with  ni,  7.  6.  Meaning  not 
anything,  7.  Hj  Obs.  When  used  with 
tener,  25. 3. 

Nadie  used  with  ni,  7.  6.  Meaning  not 
anybody,  7.  H>  Obs. 

Narrative  tense,  37.  7. 

Negative,  7.  Double  negative, 
7 .  2.  Two  negatives  after  the  verb,  7.  7. 

Neuter  article,  1. 1  and  Rem.  1,  2. 

Neuter  gender,  1.  1  and  Rem.  1,  2. 

Neuter  verb,  when  becoming  a  Re- 
flexive Verb,  52.  1.  When  becoming 
Impersonal  Verb,  55.  2,  3. 

Ni  used  with  jamas,  nunca,  nada, 
nadie,  etc.,  7»  6.  Requiring  the 
plural,  61.  2. 

Ningun.    See  ningunp. 

Ninguno  (ningunos,  ninguna,  nin- 
gunas),  7.  9  and  Obs. ;  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 

No,  put  before  the  verb,  7.  1.  When 
omitted,  R.  2,  Obs.,  R.  3.  Used  by 
emphasis  with  an  affirmative  sentence, 
7.  8  and  Note.  Put  at  the  end  of  a 
sentence,  R.  10. 

Nos,  when  becoming  no,  30.  8. 

Not  anybody,  7. 11,  Obs. 

Not  anything,  7. 11,  Obs. 

Nouns  ending  in  o,  a,  cirn  or  tion, 
tad  or  dad.  See  1.  5,  General  Obs. 
Having  no  plural,  X.  9.  Having  no 
singular,  2.  9. 

Nos  and  nosotros,  4.  2. 

Nosotros  and  nos,  4.  2. 

Numbers.  See  Cardinal,  Ordinal, 
Collective,  Fractional, and  Mul- 
tiplicative numbers. 

Nunca  used  with  no,  7.  3.    Nunca 

^and  jamas,  R.  3,  Obs. 

N,  p.  17,  §  3. 

6,  when  requiring  the  Plural,  61.  2. 

Oandu,  18.  p.  104. 

Object  before  the  subject,  4.  5.  Pre- 
ceded by  a  cardinal  number,  20.  6. 

O'clock,  its  translation,  28.  1. 

On,  when  translated  in  Spanish  by  the 
Definite  Article,  28.  3. 

One,  1.  3. 

Ordinal  numbers,  21.  Agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun, 
21.  1.  When  used  without  the  Article, 
21.  4.  When  used  instead  of  a  Car- 
dinal Number,  21.5. 

Otro,  16.  4. 

Para,  6.  3.  When  used  before  a  follow- 
ing Infinitive,  46.  P-  254,  6.  Its  use, 
59.6. 

Para  siempre  used  with  jamds,  7.5. 

Participio  absolute,  30.  3. 

Participio  de  Preterite,  48.  6. 

Participio  pasivo,  49.  3. 

Participles  activos,  48. 1. 

Participios  de  presente,  48. 1. 

Participle.  See  Present  Parti- 
ciple and  Past  Participle. 

Passive  verb,  51. 1-7. 
\  Past  Anterior,  its  formation,  39.  1. 
jM.    Its  use,  R.  2  and  Obs.  1,  2. 


Past  Definite.    See  Preterite. 

Past  Indefinite,  37. 1,  5-7. 

Past  Participle,  ends  in  Regular  Con- 
jugation, viz.,  in  ado  for  the  first  con- 
jugation, and  in  ido  for  the  second  and 
third  conjugations,  17-  5;  49.  1.  Ir- 
regular Past  Participles,  18.  Agrees 
with  its  subject,  when  accompanied  by 
estar,  18.  1.  Always  formed  regu- 
larly in  the  Irregular  Verbs  of  first  con- 
jugation, 33.  3.  Irregular  Participle, 

49.  p.    269.      Having    sometimes    an 
active  meaning,  49.  p.  269.    Considered 
as  an  Adjective,  49.  2,  4.     Invariable 
when  joined  with  haber,  49.  3.    Used 
as  an  abbreviation  of  the  Gerund,  49. 5, 
6,  and  Note.     Preceded  by  a  preposi- 
tion, 49.  6,  and  Note.     Requiring  after 
them  de  or  por,  49.  7.     Having  an 
active  and  a  passive  meaning,  49.  8. 
Used  as  feminine  nouns,  49.  9.     Verbs 
having  two  past  participles,  one  regular 
and  one  irregular.    Their  different  uses, 

50.  p.  274  and  R.  1.     When  invariable, 

51.  5,  6.    Used  as  adjective  governs  de 
or  por,  57.  6- 

Perfect  of  the  subjunctive,  42. 12. 

Periphrastic  verbs,  54. 

Pero  and  sino,  18.  5. 

Personal  pronouns,  used  with  prepo- 
sitions, 30. 1-3,  9-11.  Used  with  verbs, 
30.  1-12.  Used  with  Reflexive  Verbs, 

52.  1,  2. 

Plural  of  nouns,  2 . 2-9.  Of  adjectives,  8, 
Used  with  verbs,  61.  1-3,  6. 

Pluperfect,  of  the  Indicative,  39.  3, 
and  Obs.  Of  the  Subjunctive,  43.  2, 
Obs.,  6;  44.9. 

Ponerse,  53.  2. 

Por,  used  with  ir,  35.  7,  Obs.  Used 
with  comenzar,  empezar,  and 
acabar,  46.  4.  Meaning  on  account 
of  or  because;  meaning  instead  of, 
47.  1.  Used  after  a  Past  Participle, 
49.  7.  Used  after  an  adjective,  57.4, 
Its  use,  59.  7. 

Por  siempre  used  with  jamds,  7-  5. 

Possessive  adjectives,  their  agree- 
ment, 13.  1.  Repeated  before  every 
noun,  2.  Not  used  after  a  noun,  13.  9. 

Possessive  pronouns,  14.  Their 
agreement,  14.  1.  Used  emphatically 
with  mismo,  misma,  propio,  pro- 
pia,  14.  2.  Used  with  fo,  14.  7. 

Postrer.    See  Postrero. 

Postrero,  9.  6,  Rem.  1 ;  21.  2. 

Potential,  46. 11. 

Preface,  pp.  iii,  iv. 

Prepositions,  30. 1-3,  7,  9, 10.  Must 
be  repeated  before  every  pronoun,  30. 
11.  Preceding  a  Past  Participle,  49  6, 
and  Note.  Following  a  verb,  56.  1,  2. 
Following  an  adjective,  57.  1-7.  Pre- 
ceded by  an  adverb,  58.  6.  Requiring 
de  after  them,  59  p.  314,  Requiring 
a  after  them,  F9.  p.  314. 

Prepositional  phrases,  requiring 
de  after  them,  59.  p.  314. 


INDEX. 


11 


Present  indicative,  31.  1-5.  Used 
instead  of  the  Future,  32.  2.  Used 
instead  of  the  Past  Tense,  32.  2.  Its 
formation  in  Regular  Verbs,  32.  4,  5 ; 
in  Irregular  Verbs  of  First  Conjugation, 
33. 1,2,4;  in  Irregular  Verbs  of  Second 
Conjugation,  34.  1-10 ;  in  Irregular 
Verbs  of  Third  Conjugation,  35.  1-9. 
When  used  concurrently  with  the  Pres- 
ent Subjunctive,  42.  0,  9.  May  govern 
the  Conditional,  44.  8.  When  used 
instead  of  the  Present  Indicative,  47. 3. 

Present  Participle,  or  Gerund, 
ends  (in  Regular  Verbs)  in  ando  for 
the  first  conjugation,  and  in  iendo  for 
the  second  and  third  conjugation,  19. 1. 
Present  Participle  of  verbs  ending  in 
eer  and  uir,  19. 2.  Used  with  estar, 
19.  3.  Its  use,  19.  5-7.  Used  with 
en,  19.  8,  and  Obs.  Used  with  the 
Present  Participle  of  estar,  19.  9. 
Used  instead  of  an  adverb,  conjunction, 
or  preposition,  19. 10.  Always  formed 
regularly  in  the  Irregular  Verbs  of 
First  Conjugation,  33.  3.  When  used 
after  another  verb,  46.  4  and  Note,  8 
and  Note.  Has  two  forms,  the  one  in 
ante  or  ente  and  the  second  in  ando 
or  iendo,  48-  1.  When  used  concur- 
rently with  the  Infinitive,  48.  3.  When 
translated  in  English  by  the  conjunc- 
tions as,  since,  if,  and  the  adverbs 
when,  while,  whilst,  48.  7,  and 
by  como,  luego,  que,  cuando, 
asl  que,  7,  Note.  Its  use,  48.  1-8. 
When  ending  in  endo,  48.  9.  Con- 
sidered as  an  adjective,  49.  2. 

Present  subjunctive,  its  formation, 
42.  p.  229.  Its  use,  42.  1-11.  When 
used  concurrently  with  the  Present 
Indicative,  42.  6,  9,  or  with  the  Imper- 
fect Subjunctive,  43.  3,  4. 

Preterite  or  past  definite,  itsforma- 
~~-timi,  37.  p.  203.  Its  nise,  37.  1-4,  7. 
Its  irregularities,  38.  1-5.  Used  with 
the  Past  Anterior,  39.  2,  Obs.  1.' 
When  requiring  the  subjunctive  mood, 
44.9. 

Preterite  perfecto,  42.  5,  a. 

Primer.    See  Primero. 

Primero,  when  becoming  primer,  21. 
2.  When  used  instead  of  unq,  21.  G. 

Prime- ,  when  used  instead  of  primer o, 
21.3. 

Pronombres  incllticos,  30.  l,  2, 
4-6,9;  31.2. 

Pronombres  indirectos,  30, 1,  2. 

Pronouns  left  out  in  conjugating  a 
verb,  4.  6.  Their  respective  places, 
31.  1-3.  Accompanying  Reflexive 
Verbs,  52.  p.  282;  object,  52.  5. 

Pronunciation,  p.  14,  §  2.  Exercises 
P-  22,  §  8. 

Propio,  propi a,  used  with  a  Possessive 
Pronoun,  14.  2. 

Punctuation,  p.  22.  §  7. 

Que  as  a  Relative  Pronoun  when  used  as 
a  subject,  23.  1.  When  used  as  an 


Accusative,  22.  2.  When  accompanied 
by  el  (or  la,  los,  las,  lo),  23.  3.  la 
never  suppressed,  23.  4.  May  precede 
the  person  or  object,  23. 4,  Obs.  When 
preferable  to  quien,  23. 5,  Obs.  Used 
as  an  exclamation,  23.  12.  Used  with 
haber  and  an  Infinitive,  27.  3.  Can 
never  be  understood,  and  must  be 
repeated  before  every  subordinate  verb, 
42.  4  and  Obs.  When  used  with  the 
Present  Indicative,  46.  1.  When  gov- 
erning the  Infinitive,  47.  2. 

Que  and  cual,  23.  9. 

Que,  Interrogative  Pronoun,  23. 11. 

Quedar,  when  may  be  used  instead  of 
ser,  51.7. 

Qu6  de,  when  used,  23. 13. 

Quien,  used  instead  of  que,  16.  7.  Re- 
lating only  to  persons,  23.  5. 

Quie"n,  Interrogative  Pronoun,  23,  11. 

Quienes.    See  Quien. 

Quitarse,  53.  2. 

Reciprocal  or  mutual  action, 
52.  6. 

Reflexive  verbs,  52.  1-9.  Being 
conjugated  with  two  Personal  Pronouns, 
52.1.  Essentially  Reflexive  Verbs  and 
Accidentally  Reflexive  Verbs,  52.  2,  8. 
Their  different  meaning,  52.8,9.  Verbs 
being  Reflexive  in  Spanish  and  not  in 
English,  52.  3.  Being  conjugated  with 
another  verb,  52.  p.  283  and  R.  4.  Ex- 
pressing a  reciprocal  or  mutual  action, 

52.  6.     Referring  to  parts  of  the  body, 

53.  p.  288,  and  R.  1.     Requiring  de 
after  them,  56.  2. 

Regular  verbs,  table  of  their  termina- 
tion, p.  328,  329.  See  Verbs. 

Relative  pronouns,  23.  When  re- 
quiring the  Subjunctive  Mood,  42.  9. 

S,  when  suppressed  in  Reflexive  Verbs. 
52.8. 

Saber  and  conocer,  14.  9. 

San.    See  Santo. 

Santo,  9.  0,  Rem.  2  and  Obs. 

Se,  31.  3,  4.  Used  with  a  passive  sen- 
tence, 51.  3. 

Se*  and  se,  p.  20,  §  6, 1. 

Seasons,  21. 

Senor,  9.  6. 

Senora,  9.  6. 

Ser,  used  to  express  possession,  14.  8. 
Used  without  adjective,  is  accompanied 
by  de,  14.  8.  Not  used  with  estar, 
19.  4.  Used  instead  of  tener,  25  1, 
Obs.  a,  &,  c.  Its  conjugation,  26. 
Used  as  Impersonal  Verb,  27.  1.  Im- 
perfect Indicative,  36.  pp.  199,  200. 
Used  with  Passive  Verbs,  51.  1. 

Ser  and  estar,  5.  1-3.  Used  instead  of 
tener,  25.  1,  Obs.  a,  6,  c.  Their  con- 
jugations, 26. 

Ser  de  mas  edad.  25.  4,  Obs. 

Should,  44. 11,2,  4. 

Should  have,  44.  7. 

Should  like  to,  44,  11,  5. 

Si,  when  used  in  the  subjunctive  (or  con- 
ditional), 44.  2-A ;  45.1. 


12 


INDEX. 


Singular,  when  the  subject  is  put  in 
the  singular,  61  4-8. 

Sino  and  pero,  18.  5. 

Solamente,  when  used  instead  of  sino, 
18.6. 

Some,  4.  8. 

Sf  and  si,  p.  20,  §  6,  1. 

Spanish-English  Vocabulary,  p. 
373 

Su.  13.  3,  6. 

Subject  or  nominative,  52.  1. 
When  subjects  are  not  of  the  same 
person,  61.  4.  Composed  of  two  In- 
finitives, 61.5. 

Subjunctive  mood,  42-45.  Pres- 
ent, 42.  Imperfect,  43.  Pluperfect, 
43.  Conditional,  44.  Potential,  44. 
11.  Future,  45.  Future  Perfect,  45. 
When  used  instead  of  the  Infinitive, 
47.  3.  Required  after  some  preposi- 
tions, 57.  2. 

Superlative  and  comparative,  11, 
12. 

Superlative  absolute,  its  formation, 
11.  1-9. 

Sus.    See  Su. 

Suyo,  33.9. 

Syllables,  p.  19,  §  5. 

Tal,  when  used  with  cual,  23.  7,  c. 

Tener,  9.  5 ;  17.  1,  3.  Its  conjugation, 
24.  Its  idiomatic  uses,  25.  1,  2-5, 7,  8. 

Tener  and  haber,  17. 1.  Their  con- 
jugations, 24. 

Tener  algo  malo,  25.  5. 

Tener  mas  edad,  25.  4,  Obs. 

Tener  que,  18.  2;  25.  8. 

Tercer.  See  Tercero. 

Tercero,  9.  6,  Rem.  1 ;  21.  2,  Obs. 

Tercio,  when  used  instead  of  tercero, 
21  3 

That  of ,  16.  6. 

That  which,  16.  7. 

Them,  how  to  translate  it,  22.  6. 

The  one  which,  16.  7. 

There  to  be,  how  translated,  27.  2. 

They,  sometimes  not  rendered  in  Span- 
ish, 16.  10. 

Those  of,  16.  6. 

Those  which,  16.  6. 

Time  of  the  day,  how  indicated,  28. 
1-2. 

To,  meaning  in  order  to,  46.  6. 

To  be  wrong,  25.  2,  Obs. 

Todos,  27.  p.  158. 

To  them,  how  to  translate  it,  22.  6. 

Transitive  verb,  51.  l,  2. 

Triphthongs,  p.  15,  §  2.  3. 

Triple.  See  p,  118  (Multiplicative  Num- 
bers) and  21.  8. 

Tu,  4. 1. 

Tuyo,  13.  9. 

U  and  o,  18. 

Un.    See  Uno. 

Uno,  una,  1.  3;  9.  6,  Rem.  1.  Their 
plural,  20.  1.  When  dropping  its  o,  1. 


3 ;  20.  4.  Una  used  with  la  to  indi- 
cate one  o'clock,  28.  1. 

Usted  (or  V.),  4.  3  and  Note,  R.  6 ;  13. 
,,  4.  Used  with  le,  30.  7. 

Ustedes  (VV.),  4.  3  and  Note,  R.  6; 
13.  3,  4.  Used  with  le,  30.  7. 

Venir,  not  used  with  estar,  19,  4. 

Venir  por,  35.  5,  Obs ,  R.  7,  Obs. 

Ver,  Imperfect  Indicative,  36.  pp.  199, 

Verbs,  conjugated  interrogatively,  4. 
4,  5.  Conjugated  without  pronouns, 
4.  6.  First  conjugation  ending  in  ar, 
second  conjugation  in  er,  third  in  ir, 
17.  4.  Present  Indicative,  32-35. 
Imperfect  Indicative,  36.  Past  Definite 
or  Preterite,  37.  Past  Indefinite,  37. 
Past  Anterior,  39.  Pluperfect  Indica- 
tive, 39.  Future  and  Future  Anterior, 
40.  Imperative  Mood,  41.  Subjunc- 
tive Mood,  42-45.  Infinitive  Mood, 
46,  47.  Gerund  or  Present  Participle, 
48.  Past  Participle,  49,  50  Passive 
Verb,  51.  Reflexive  Verbs,  52,  53. 
Periphrastic  Verbs,  54.  Impersonal 
Verbs,  55.  Government  of  Verbs,  56. 
Requiring  no  preposition  before  the 
following  Infinitive,  46.  p.  253.  R.  1, 
10,  1.  Requiring  a  before  the  follow- 
ing Infinitive,  46.  p.  254,  R.  3,  10,  2. 
Requiring  de  before  the  following  In- 
finitive, 46.  p.  254,  R.  2,  Note,  5  and 
Note,  9  and  Note,  10,  3,  11.  Requiring 
para  before  the  following  Infinitive, 
46.  p.  254,  R.  6.  Requiring  en  before 
the  following  Infinitive,  46.  p.  254,  R. 
7,  10,  4.  Requiring  con  before  a  fol- 
lowing Infinitive,  46.  p.  255,  R.  8, 10, 5. 
When  used  before  a  Gerund,  46.  4  and 
Note.  Having  a  different  meaning 
according  to  the  following  preposition, 
46.  9  and  Note.  Verbs  having  two 
Past  Participles,  one  regular,  the  other 
Irregular.  Their  different  use,  50. 
p.  274  and  R.  I.  Defective  verbs,  60. 
Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject, 
61. 1-8.  Table  of  Terminations  of  the 
three  Regular  Verbs,  p.  326,  327.  List 
of  the  principal  Irregular  Verbs,  pp. 
328-3G9. 

Vocabulary,  Spanish-English,  p.  373. 
English-Spanish,  p.  386. 

Volver  a,  48.  9,  in  fine. 

Vos,  4.  3  and  Note. 

Vosotros,  4.  3  and  Note ;  41.  6. 

Vowels,  p.  14,  §  2,  1. 

Voz  pasiva,  51. 

Vuestro,  vuestra,  13. 3. 

We,  4.2. 

Would,  44. 11,  2,  6. 

Y  and  e",  18.  When  used  with  Cardinal 
Numbers,  20.  3.  Used  to  indicate  the 
time  of  the  day,  28.  2. 

Ya,  E8.  10. 

You,  4.  3  and  Note. 


PRACTICAL  SPANISH  COURSE. 


INTRODUCTION. 


§  1.    Letters  and  Sounds. 
The  Alphabet.  El  Alfabeto. 

1.   The  Spanish  alphabet  as  given  by  the  Spanish  Academy 
contains  twenty-nine  letters  and  combinations  of  letters. 


ters. 

tion.         ters. 

tion.           ters.    f 

tion. 

a  a 

ah 

j     jota 

ho'ta 

r    ere 

aifray 

b   be 

bay 

k    ka 

Tcah 

rr  erre 

aifrray 

c    ce 

thay 

1     ele 

ai'lay 

s    ese 

ai'ssay 

ch  che 

chay 

11   elle 

atflyay 

t    te 

tay 

d  de 

day 

m  erne 

aVmay 

u    u 

00 

e   e 

ay 

n    ene 

aifnay 

v    ve 

vay 

f    efe 

ai'fay 

n    ene 

aihiyey 

x    ekis 

ay'keys 

g   ge 

hay 

0      0 

oh 

(ye 

yay 

h    hache 

ahrchey 

P    Pe 

pay 

y{y  griega 

eigreeay'ga 

i    i 

ee 

q    cu 

coo 

z    zeta 

thay*tah 

REMARK.  — The  letter  w  occurs  in  Spanish,  but  only  in  a  few  foreign 
words.     This  is  true  also  of  k.     Ex.  :  Wdshinyton,  Konigsberga^  etc. 

2.  All  these  letters  are  of  the  feminine  gender.     Ex. :  una  b, 
unajota,  etc. 

3.  They  are  divided,  as  in  English,  into  vowels  and  conso- 
nants. 

13 


14  INTRODUCTION. 

§  2.    The  Pronunciation.        La  Prommciacidn. 

The  Spanish  language  does  not  present  in  its  pronunciation 
the  same  difficulties  as  the  English  language  We  may  say,  in 
fact,  that  Spanish  is  pronounced  as  it  is  written,  and  written  as 
it  is  pronounced,  all  the  letters,  with  very  few  exceptions,  being 
sounded  in  the  words.  The  following  rules  on  the  way  of  pro- 
nouncing the  vowels  and  consonants,  together  with  those  refer- 
ring to  the  accentuation  of  the  words,  and  to  diphthongs  and 
triphthongs,  will,  we  trust,  enable  the  students  of  the  Spanish 
language  to  acquire  a  correct  pronunciation  in  a  comparatively 
limited  time. 

1.    Vowels.       Vocales. 

The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  y,  o,  u.     They  are  sounded  : 
a  like  a  in  ah  :  Malaga,  papa,  bata. 
5  like  ai  in  bail :  elemento,  padre,  come. 
i  like  ee  in  see :  mira,  libra,  ira. 
y  as  a  vowel  like  the  Spanish  i :  voy,  doy,  soy. 
0  like  o  in  no :  obra,  dorado,  mono. 
U  like  oo  in  food :  muro,  uno,  comun. 

NOTE.  —  Great  care  must  be  used  to  pronounce  the  Spanish  vowels  very 
purely,  and  not  to  glide  them  into  diphthongs,  as  are  most  English  vowels. 

REMARK.  —  Y  is  considered  a  vowel  when  it  stands  by  itself,  as  in 
y,  and;  at  the  end  of  a  word,  as  in  rey,  king,  or  of  a  syllable  immediately 
followed  by  a  consonant.  But,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  y  is  gener- 
ally considered  a  consonant,  as  in  ya,  already  ;  yerba,  herb.' 

The  custom  of  using  the  letter  i  instead  of  y  is,  however,  becoming  more 
general. 

2.  Diphthongs.       Diptongos. 

Besides  the  simple  sounds,  there  are  in  Spanish  compound 
sounds,  in  wh?ch  the  two  sounds  are  distinctly  heard  in  a  single 
emission  of  the  voice.  The  sounds  of  diphthongs  are  produced 
by  the  rapid  utterance  of  the  vowel  sounds  of  which  they  are 
composed. 

Spanish  vowels  are  divided  into  two  classes  —  strong  vowel*, 
a,  0,  e,  and  weak  vowels,  i,  U. 


CONSONANTS. 


15 


A  combination  of  a  strong  and  an  unaccented  weak  vowel,  or  of  a 
weak  and  strong,  may  form  a  diphthong,  in  which  the  two  sounds 
are  pronounced  in  one  syllable,  the  weak  receiving  little  stress. 

These  diphthongs  are  twelve  in  number : 


ai,  ay  : 
an: 

aire,  hay. 
pausa. 

ia 
ua 

diablo. 
fragua. 

oi,  oy  : 
ou: 

sois,  voy. 
bou. 

io 
uo 

precio. 
arduo. 

ei,  ey  : 
eu: 

veis,  ley. 
deuda. 

ie 
lie 

cielo. 
dueno. 

NOTE.  —  In  considering  the  combinations  given  in  the  second  column, 
they  have  been  included  among  the  diphthongs.  But  it  should  be  care- 
fully noted  that  the  weak  vowels  i  and  u  when  before  strong  vowels  are 
really  consonants  and  are  to  be  pronounced  as  y  and  w  respectively. 

If  in  the  above  combinations  the  weak  vowel  is  accented,  no 
diphthong  is  formed : 

continue,     continue.  hacia,     hacia.  ley,     lei. 

Two  weak  vowels  may  form  a  diphthong  if  the  second  be 
accented:  iu.  viuda.  ^,117:  ruido 

NOTE.  —  If  the  first  be  accented,  there  is  no  diphthong : 
fliiido,  Rm. 

3.    Triphthongs.        Triptongos. 

There  are  four  triphthongs  in  Spanish  : 
iai  :    preciais,  you  value. 
iei  :    vacie*is,  you  may  empty. 
nai,  nay  :    santiguais,  you  bless  ;  Paraguay. 
uei  or  uey:    averigueis,  you  may  search ;  buey,  ox. 


4.     Consonants. 


Consonantes. 


Many  of  the  consonants  sound  approximately  as  in  English. 

The  following  are  the  rules  referring  to  those  which  differ 
materially  in  the  two  languages. 

B  differs  somewhat  from  the  English  pronunciation.  In 
making  it  the  lips  are  not  pressed  together  and  the  air  is 


16  INTRODUCTION. 

allowed  to  pass  between  them  without  interruption.      At  the 
beginning  of  a  word  it  is  somewhat  more  like  the  English  b : 

haba,         Habana,         Cuba,         beber,         baile. 
REMARK.  — B  and  V  have  to-day  the  same  pronunciation  in  Spain. 

C  has  two  sounds  : 

1.  Before  the  vowels  e  and  i  (ce,  ci)  it  has  the  sound  of  the 
English  th.  in  thick,  thin,  etc.  : 

cena,         cima,         decente,         recibe,         dice. 

2.  Before  the  vowels  a,  0,  and  u  (ca,  co,  and  cw),  and  before 
consonants,  it  sounds  like  k  in  English  : 

cola,         cabo,         cuna,         criado,         clamor. 

CH  is  a  distinct  letter,  double  in  figure,  but  simple  in  value. 
It  has  the  same  sound  as  the  English  ch  in  church,  chair,  chin, 
etc.  :  macho,  mucho,  chupa,  rancho,  dicha. 

D  is  pronounced  like  the  English  th  in  then;  somewhat 
stronger  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  and  weaker  at  the  end : 

dado,         dedo,         hablado,         Madrid,         atado. 
G  has  two  sounds  : 

1.  Before  e  and  i,  it  sounds   like   a   strongly  pronounced 
English  h  (the  German  ch  in  acK). 

gente,         ingenio,         agilidad,        general,         gengibre. 

2.  Elsewhere  it  is  pronounced  like  g  in  go. 

gato,         gorro,         gloria,         grito,         digno. 

3.  To  preserve  the  latter  sound  of  g  before  e  and  i  the  vowel 
U  (gu)  must  be  inserted  before  these  vowels. 

guerra,         guia,         aguijar,         guirlanda,         guitarra. 

NOTE.  —  In  this  case  the  u  is  silent.  When,  however,  the  u  is  to  be 
pronounced  after  the  g,  and  before  the  letters  e  and  i,  a  diaeresis  (  "  )  must 
be  placed  over  the  u  (ii) : 

antigiiedad,         argiiir,         agiiero,        magiieto. 
H  is  always  mute  : 

hombre,         horca,          alharaca,         hora,  honor. 

hueso,  huevo,        hueco,  liuerto,        vihuela. 


CONSONANTS.  17 

J  is  pronounced  as  a  guttural  before  all  the  vowels,  that  is  to 
say,  like  the  Spanish  g  before  e  and  i : 

paja,        jabon,         caja,         cajita,         Jorge. 

REMARK.  —  It  will  be  remarked  that  this  guttural  sound  is  generally 
indicated  by  g  before  e  and  i,  and  by  3  before  a,  o,  and  u. 

LL  is  liquid,  arid  pronounced  as  in  the  English  word  William  : 
llaga,         calle,         Hover,         caballo,         polio. 

NOTE.  —  A  pronunciation  not  infrequently  heard  is  that  where  11  has 
the  value  of  English  y.  Thus  calle  becomes  caye,  polio  — poyo,  etc.  This 
is  not  to  be  followed. 

IF  has  a  liquid  sound,  and  is  pronounced  nearly  like  gn  in 
mignonette,  or  like  the  gn  in  French  : 

senor,         ensenar,         nino,         sueno,         anadir. 
NOTE.  —  The  mark  over  the  n  (~)  is  called  tilde  in  Spanish. 

ft  is  found  only  before  lie  and  ui,  and  has  the  sound  of  k 
(the  u  being  silent)  : 

parque,         aqui,         querido,         despique,         queja. 

REMARK.  —  Whenever  the  diphthongs  ua,  ue,  uo  ar°  ^receded  by  the 
sound  of  k,  and  the  u  is  pronounced,  the  accepted  orthography  is  cu. 
Thus  :  cuadro,  cuero,  acuoso. 

R  is  trilled  more  than  in  English,  but  with  less  force  between 
two  vowels  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word  : 

rosa,        pintura,         lirio,         cara,        perla. 

RR  is  more  strongly  trilled  than  is  r : 

carro,         perro,         guerra,         cerrajo,*        ferrocarril. 

S  has  always  the  hissing  sound,  like  ss  in  English,  as  in 
assembly : 

sabio,         famoso,         paseo,         pesadumbre,         rosa. 

S  is  never  followed  by  a  consonant  when  commencing  a  word,  as  in  the 
Latin  words  scientia,  Scipio ;  and,  in  order  to  avoid  this,  the  Spanish  write 
ciencia  (suppressing  the  s)  or  Escipi6n  (having  it  preceded  by  an  e). 

T  varies  sensibly  from  the  English  pronunciation.     The  tip 

2 


18  INTRODUCTION. 

of  the  tongue  must  be  brought  well  forward,  and  rest  against 
the  upper  teeth : 

tonto,         torto,         chiquito,         tirante,         titiritero. 
V  is  pronounced  like  the  Spanish  B. 

velo,        valor,         voluntad,         bravo,         ave. 

REMARK.  —  The  Spanish  Academy  now  recognizes  this  pronunciation, 
although  it  disapproves  of  it. 

W  has  the  sound  given  it  in  the  language  from  which  th* 
word  containing  it  is  taken  : 

Wagner  =  Vagner,         Washington  =  Uashington, 
X  sounds  like  cs  or  ks  in  English,  as  in  wax: 
axioma,         examinar,         reflexion,         exagerar,         exuberancia. 

OBSERVATIONS.  —  1.  The  x  had  formerly  the  sound  of  the  Spanish  j, 
or  g  before  e  and  i,  but  according  to  the  modern  orthography  the  x  is 
replaced  by  a  g  or  a  j  whenever  it  has  the  guttural  sound.  Thus,  the 
following  words  which  were  formerly  written  xefe,  xergdn,  baxeza,  baxar, 
baxo,  etc.,  are  written  to-day  jefe,  jergdn,  bajeza,  bajar,  bajo,  etc. 

2.  The  x  at  the  end  of  such  words  as  relox,  carcax,  almaradux,  etc., 
which  formerly  changed  the  x  into  j  for  the  plural,  as  relojes,  carcajes,  etc., 
is  now  replaced  by  a  j;  and  these  words  are  written  now  reloj,  carcaj, 
almaraduj,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  final  j  in  reloj  is  silent. 

Y  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable  is  a  consonant,  and 
is  more  strongly  pronounced  than  in  English.  It  approximates 
the  sound  of  j  as  in  Joe : 

yo,         yesca,         reyes,         arroyo,         haya. 

Z  is  pronounced  like  the  English  th  in  the  word  tJdn,  or  like 
the  Spanish  c  before  e  and  i.  This  letter  precedes  the  vowels 
a,  0,  and  u  (za,  zo,  and  zu)  : 

zapato,        tiz6n,        zumo,        zorra,        Mufioz. 

§  3.    Variations  in  Pronunciation. 

The  pronunciation  indicated  above  is  the  Castilian,  the 
accepted  national  idiom.  Dialectical  differences  in  pronuncia- 
tion are  not  uncommon  in  Spain  itself,  and  are  found  regularly 
in  the  Spanish-American  countries. 


DOUBLE   LETTERS.  19 

Such  variations  are  : 

C  before  e  and  i  =  S :    Garcia  =  Garsia. 

Z  =  S I  zozobra  =  sosobra,  Gomez  =  Gomes. 

Intervocalic  or  final  d  is  generally  silent :  nada  =  wa(a),  cow- 
pradoj  comprao. 

B  +  Tie  is  silent :  bueno  =  weno. 

Gu  +  a  or  0  =  W :  a^rwa  =  aww. 

S  is  much  weakened  or  disappears :  cowo  estfa  wstec?  =  como 
eta  ute. 

Ex  +  consonant  (other  than  h)  =  es :  excelente  =  escelente, 

LI  =  y :  po//o  =  poyo,  caballo  =  cabayo,  lleno  =  ^ewo. 

NOTE.  —  In  writing  j  is  generally  used  for  g,  before  e  and  i:  general 
becomes  jeneral. 

These  usages  are  not  to  be  followed  by  the  student  desirous 
of  speaking  pure  Spanish. 

§  4.    Double  Letters.        Duplicacidn  de  las  letras. 

The  Spanish  Academy,  conforming  to  the  pronunciation,  has 
suppressed  double  consonants  when  one  alone  is  pronounced. 
CO  and  nn  are  the  only  consonants  now  doubled,  and  that  only 
when  both  are  sounded,  as  in  the  words  acceso,  ennoblecer. 

REMARK.  —  Double  1  (II)  and  double  r  (rr)  are  to  be  considered  only  as 
letters  of  the  alphabet,  and  not  as  double  consonants. 

§  5.     Syllables.        Silabas. 

There  are  five  rules  in  Spanish  for  the  division  of  words  into 
syllables : 

1.  Whenever  a  single  consonant  is  found  between  two  vowels, 
it  is  joined  to  the  vowel  which  follows  it : 

a-mor,          a-la,          flu-xi6n,         co-fre,         mu-ne-ca. 

2.  The  letters  ch,  11,  and  rr,  because  simple  in  their  promm* 
ciation,  must  not  be  divided  : 

chi-co,         co-che,         CF  -lie,         ca-ba-llo,         pe-rra 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

3.  When  two  or  more  consonants  stand  between  vowels,  the 
last  consonant  goes  with  the  following  vowel.     The  others  are 
united  with  the  preceding  syllable  : 

es-pe-rar,         abs-te-ner,         in-sis-tir,         sub-ver-sion. 
EXCEPTION.  —  L  and  r  unite  with  any  preceding  consonant  except  s, 
forming  a  consonantal  diphthong: 

a-blan-dar,         ins-tru-ir,         ca-te-dri-lla,         es-tre-me-cer. 
OBSERVATION.  —  When  double  c  and  double  n  occur  in  a  word,  one  of 
these  letters  is  placed  in  each  syllable  : 

ac-cion,         en-uo-ble-ce. 

4.  In  compound  words  formed  from  prepositions  and  other 
parts  of  speech  the  preposition  forms  a  separate  syllable,  as  in : 

ab-ne-ga-cion,        des-a-gra-da-ble,        con-ca-vi-dad,         sub-ver-sion. 

5.  Vowels  forming  a  diphthong  or  triphthong  must  not  be 
separated  :  gra-cio-so,        guar-dia,        pre-ciais. 

§  6.     Accent.        Acento. 

1.  The  Spanish  word  of  more  than  one  syllable  receives  a 
greater  stress  on  one  of  these  syllables  than  on  the  others.     This 
is  called  the  tonic  accent,  and  varies,  falling  generally  on  any 
one  of  the  last  three  syllables. 

2.  In  writing  (or  printing)  this  tonic  accent  is  represented 
by  the  acute   accent  (').     This  sign   is  used   to  indicate  any 
deviation  from  the  accepted  rules  of  Spanish  accentuation. 

3.  These  rules  are  : 

All  words  ending  in  a  vowel  or  n  or  s  are  accented  on  the 
penult :    cab0j        cantan,        imagen,        vecinos,         crisis. 

All  words  ending  in  a  consonant  (except  n  or  s)  are  accented 
on  the  last  syllable  : 

general,         senor,         verdad,         alcatraz,         can  tar. 

4.  Any  deviation  from  the  above   must  nave  the  written 

papa,         cafe,          rincon,         atras,        linea. 
agil,  aziicar,      alferez,         item,          alcazar. 

NOTE.  —  Patronymics  are  regularly  accented  on  the  penult: 

Perez,         Sanchez,         Fernandez,         Rodriguez,        Jimenez. 


ACCENTS.  21 

5.  For  the  purposes  of  accentuation  a  diphthong  or  a  triph- 
thong is  always  considered  as  one  syllable. 

tragedia,       aire,       pausa,       arduo,       ruido,       envainan,        preciais. 

Thus  if  the  syllable  requiring  the  written  accent  be  a  diph- 
thong  or   triphthong,  such    accent  must   be  placed   upon    the 
accented  vowel  —  the  strong  vowel  in  combinations  of  a  strong 
and  weak,  or  the  second  in  combinations  of  two  weak  : 
despues,         pielago,         preciais,         Caucaso. 

Otherwise  there  is  no  diphthong,  and  each  vowel  represents  a 
syllable : 
Garcia,       serian,       reir,       leido,       rio,       fliiido,       continue,       Riu. 

6.  The  addition  of  the  plural  signs  does  not  change  the  tonic 
accent  of  a  word  : 

mujer,     mujeres.         empleo,     empleos.         mascara,     mascaras, 
action,    acciones.        canape,     canapes. 

EXCEPTION.  —  Begimen  becomes  regimenes,  and  oaracter,  caracteres. 

7.  Monosyllabic  preterit  forms  are  always  accented  : 

di,         fui,         fue,         rio,         vi,         vio. 

8.  When,  in  the  conjugation  of  verbs,  certain  forms  (gener- 
ally the  preterit)  bear  the  written  accent,  this  is  preserved,  even 
though  the  addition  of  personal  pronouns  would  bring  them 
under  the  regular  rule : 

fuime,         riose,         casose,         pareciome,         habianse. 

The  addition  of  one  or  more  pronouns  to  a  regularly  accented 
form  (and  which  in  consequence  bears  no  written  accent)  requires 
the  insertion  of  such  accent  to  indicate  the  new  pronunciation  : 
gustabanme,         exhortaronme,         dandomelo,         comanselos. 

9.  The  preposition  a  and  the  conjunctions  e,  <5,  u,  are  ac- 
cented arbitrarily. 

10.  The  written  accent  is  *  used  to  distinguish  two   words 
having  the  same  form.     A  list  follows  giving  some  of  the  prin- 
cipal cases : 


22  INTRODUCTION. 

de  (subj.  of  dar),  give.  de,  of. 

di  (pret.  of  dar),  gave.  di  (imperat.  of  decir),  say. 

bajo,  /  descend.  bajo,  low. 

c6mo,  1  eat.  como,  as. 

el,  he,  him.  el,  the. 

he,  behold.  he,  I  have. 

mi,  we.  mi,  ra?/. 

mas,  wore.  mas,  bid. 

se,  /  /biow  ;  be  thou.  se,  one's  se^f. 

si,  ?/es ;  one's  seZ/.  si,  if. 

solo,  OTifo/.  solo,  alone. 

son,  sound.  son,  are. 

sobre,  exceeds  (verb).  sobre,  over  (prep). 

suefto,  I  dream.  sueno,  dream  (noun). 

te,  tea.  te,  £te. 

tii,  thou.  tu,  2%. 

uno,  una,  unite  (verb).  uno,  una,  a,  one. 

11.  The  written  accent  is  marked  on  demonstrative  adjec- 
tives used  as  substantives : 

este,  esta,  this  one.  este,  this. 

ese,  esa,  that  one.  ese,  that. 

aquel,  aquella,  that  one.  aquel,  aquella,  that. 

NOTES.  — 1.  The  neuter  forms  esto,  eso,  aquello,  are  never  accented. 

2.  The  plural  of  the  above  pronouns  is  also  accented  in  accordance  with 
the  usage  in  the  singular : 

£stos,        aquellos,        ciiyos.  esos,        cuantos,        cuales. 

estas,        aquellas,       ciiyas.  esas,       cuantas,        quienes. 

12.  The  written  accent  is  marked  on  pronouns  and  adverbs 
used  interrogatively  or  emphatically,  even  in  indirect  questions. 

como,  how?  como,  as. 

cual,  which?  cual,  which. 

cuan,  how!  cuan,  as. 

cuando,  when?  cuando,  when. 

cuanto,  cuanta,  how  much ? I  cuan  to,  cuanta,  as  much. 

ciiyo,  whose?  cuyo,  whose. 

donde,  where  ?  donde,  where. 

que,  what?!  que,  what,  which. 

quien,  who? !  whom? !  quien,  who,  whom. 


PUNCTUATION.  23 

13.  Aun  is  unaccented  when  coming  before,  or  used  without, 
a  verb:  Aun  no  ha  llegado. 

It  is  accented  after  a  verb  : 

No  ha  llegado  aun. 

§  7.    Punctuation.        Funtuacidn. 

1.  Punctuation  is  in  Spanish  the  same  as  in  English.     How- 
ever, as  it  often  happens  in  the  Spanish  language,  that  punctua- 
tion alone  indicates  the  interrogative  sense  of  the  sentence,  and 
that,  if  the  period  be  long,  the  reader  is  informed  too  late  of  the 
interrogation,  the  Spanish  make  use  of  a  reversed  sign  of  inter- 
rogation ($)  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  besides  the  regular 
sign  (?)  at  the  end  of  the  same : 

i  Seran  perdidos  tantos  ejemplares        Are  all  those  examples  and  expe- 
y   escarmientos    como   presencia-  riences  which  we  daily  see,  and 

mos  cada  dia  para  persuadirte  a  which  ought  to  persuade  you  to 

mudar  de  vida    y   entrar  en   la  change  your  life  and  enter  the 

senda  del  honor  y  de  la  virtud  ?  path  of  honor  and  virtue,  to  be 

lost  on  you  ? 

2.  The  same  rule  is  observed  with  regard  to  the  exclamation- 
point,  and  an  inverted  sign(j)  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of  an 
exclamative  sentence  : 

j  Quanta  debio  ser  la  confusion  y  What  must  have  been  the  confusion 

el  sentimiento  de  los  que  creyen-  and  regrets  of  those  who  thought 

do  encontrar  el  oro  a  montones,  they  would  find  gold  in  large 

no  encontraron  sino  hambre,  pe-  quantities,  and  met  only  hunger, 

nalidades  y  peligros !  sufferings,  and  dangers  ! 

§  8.     Capital  Letters.        Letras  mayiisculas. 

The  use  of  capital  letters  is  the  same  in  Spanish  as  in  English, 
with  the  following  exceptions  : 

1.  No  adjective  of  nationality  occurring  in  the  middle  of  a 
phrase  can  begin  with  a  capital  letter  unless  used  substantively : 

El  ejercito  frances.         Una  Franccsa. 


24  INTRODUCTION. 

2.  To  is  always  written  with  a  small  letter,  except  at  the 
beginning  of  a  sentence  : 

Mi  hermano  y  yo, 

3.  The  names  of  months  and  days   are  written   in   small 
letters. 

§  9.    Exercises  in  Pronunciation. 

£1  Universe. 

I. 

Con  el  nomhre  de  universo  se  designa  cuanto  existe  en  el  mundo 
entero,  es  decir,  el  sol,  las  estrellas,  la  tierra,  cuanto  nuestra  vista 
akianza  en  las  profundidades  del  aire,  y  cuanto  hay  todavia  mas  alia 
de  lo  que  podemos  ver.  For  mas  pequenos  que  seamos,  y  por  mas 
debil  que  nuestra  vista  sea,  podemos  admirar  una  parte  de  este  in- 
menso  espectaculo.  El  sol,  en  medio  de  esos  mirnerosos  globos  que 
brillan,  en  toda  la  boveda  celeste,  es  entre  todas  las  obras  de  Dios  la 
que  se  presenta  con  mayor  lucimiento  y  majestad,  es  una  eterna  lum- 
brera  colocada  en  el  centro  del  mundo  para  esparcir  la  luz  por  todas 
partes,  y  a  una  distancia  que  no  nos  es  posible  determinar.  Es  como 
el  rey  de  los  astros. 

II. 

El  sol,  que  nos  parece  tan  pequeno,  d  causa  de  la  suma  distancia 
suya,  es,  segiin  los  astronomos,  mil  y  cuatrocientas  veces  mayor  que 
la  tierra. 

Su  figura  es  la  de  un  globo ;  y  el  calor  y  la  luz  que  el  esparce  en  el 
universo  nos  dan  a  conocer  que  su  materia  es  el  fuego  mismo  6  que 
esta  inflamada  de  continuo.  Le  vernos  parecer  todas  las  mananas  en 
el  oriente,  elevarse  en  el  cielo  hasta  medio  dia,  bajar  despues  y  desa- 
parecer  del  horizonte  por  el  occidente.  El  sol  no  muda  de  sitio,  y 
permanece  en  el  centro  del  mundo  para  dar  luz  d  cuanto  le  rodea.  Se 
han  notado  ciertas  manchas  sobre  este  cuerpo  tan  reluciente,  y  se  ha 
descubierto  que  el  giraba  sobre  si  mismo,  como  giraria  una  bala  atra- 
vesada  con  un  asador.  Estas  manchas  se  rlescubren  desde  luego  en 
una  estremidad  de  este  astro,  se  adelantan,  se  ven  despues  en  la  otra 
estremidad,  y  desaparecen  finalmente  por  detras  para  volver  a  parecer 
de  nuevo  de  alii  a  algun  tiempo.  Se  ha  observado  que  para  volver 
al  punto  de  que  ellas  partieron,  le  son  necesarios  veinte  y  siete  dicis, 
tiempo  necesario  al  sol  por  consiguiente  para  dar  una  vuelta  completa 


EXERCISES  IN   PRONUNCIATION.  28 

sobre  el  eje  suyo.  Se  valua  que  el  sol  dista  de  nosotros  treinta  y 
cuatro  millones  trescientas  cincuenta  y  siete  mil  cuatrocientas  y 
ochenta  leguas. 

III. 

Se  distinguen  estos  tan  numerosos  astros  en  estrellas  fijas,  porque 
no  las  vemos  mudar  de  lugar,  y  en  planetas  6  estrellas  errantes,  porque 
giran  en  mayor  6  menor  tiempo  alrededor  del  sol.  Se  presume  que 
las  estrellas  fijas  son  unos  globos  luminosos  se in ej antes  al  sol,  y  que 
dan  luz  a  varios  mundos  muy  remotos  para  que  nuestra  vista  pueda 
alcanzarlos  a  ver.  Si  las  estrellas  nos  parecen  mas  pequenas  que  el 
astro  que  nos  dispensa  el  dia,  nace  de  que  ellas  estan  infinitamente 
mas  apartadas  de  nosotros.  Juzgad  de  su  magnitud  e  inmensa  dis- 
tancia  por  la  que  esta  mas  inmediata  a  la  tierra,  y  que  se  llama  Sirio: 
se  cree  que  esta  estrella  fija  dista  de  nosotros  cuatrocientas  mil  veces 
mas  que  el  sol,  y  que  su  dianietro  6  anchura  es  de  treinta  y  tres  millo- 
nes de  leguas. 

Los  planetas  son  en  mimero  de  siete  y  se  diferencian  de  las  estrellas 
fijas,  a  causa  de  que  giran  alrededor  del  sol,  y  no  tienen  luz  de  si 
mismos:  aquella  con  que  brillan,  les  viene  del  sol.  Se  presume 
que  estos  inmensos  globos  son,  al  modo  de  la  tierra,  unos  mundoa 
habitados. 

IV. 

La  tierra  es  redonda  como  una  bola.  Sus  montanas  y  valles,  que 
nos  parecen  tan  considerables,  pueden  compararse,  cuando  mas,  con 
las  desigualdades  que  se  ven  en  la  cdscara  de  una  naranja,  y  que  no 
impiclen  que  este  fruto  tenga  una  figura  redonda. 

Ella  gira  sobre  si  misma  como  una  bola  que  estd  atravesada  con  un 
asador  de  hierro.  Este  movimiento,  que  se  llama  rotacion,  le  propor- 
ciona  alternativamente  el  dia  y  la  noche  ;  es  decir,  que  la  parte  que 
esta"  vuelta  hacia  el  sol  goza  de  la  luz,  mientras  que  la  parte  opuesta 
esta  en  la  obscuridad.  Pero,  como  la  tierra  da  esta  vuelta  sobre  si 
misma  en  veinte  y  cuatro  horas,  resulta  de  esto,  que  ella  tiene  en 
este  espacio  de  tiempo  el  dia  y  la  nocbe. 

La  tierra,  ademds  de  este  movimiento  de  todos  las  dias,  tiene  otro 
que  se  ejecuta  en  un  ano ;  ella  da  una  vuelta  inmensa  alrededor  del 
sol.  Este  ultimo  movimiento  produce  las  diferentes  estaciones  del 
ano. 


26 


LESSON    1. 


Leccidn  I.  Lesson  I. 

ARTICLES,    DIFFERENT   FORMS. 


El, 

La,  \tfie 

Lo, 


Un, 
Una, 


aw,  one. 


Ejemplos. 

El  hombre  tiene  el  libro. 
La  raujer  tiene  la  mesa, 
j  Quien  tiene  la  pliuna  ? 
El  padre  tiene  un  caballo. 
La  madre  tieue  una  casa. 
El  general  es  prudente. 
La  senora  es  amable. 


Examples. 

The  man  has  the  book. 
The  woman  has  the  table* 
Who  has  the  pen  ? 
The  father  has  a  horse. 
The  mother  has  a  house. 
The  general  is  prudent. 
The  lady  is  amiable. 


Vocabulario. 

El  amigo,  the  friend. 

El  caballo,  the  horse. 

El  caballero,  the  gentleman. 

El  dinero,  the  money. 

El  hermano,  the  brother. 

El  hi  jo,  the  son. 

El  jar  din,  the  garden. 

El  libro,  the  book. 


Vocabulary. 


El  nino,  the  child. 
El  panadero,  the  baker. 
El  tio,  the  uncle. 
La  casa,  the  house. 
La  hermana,  the  sister. 
La  hija,  the  daughter. 
La  Have,  the  key. 
Carlos,  Charles. 


Es,  is. 

Luisa,  Louisa. 
Mi,  my. 
Muy,  very. 
Pobre,  poor. 
Quien,  who,  whom. 
Tiene,  has. 
Y,  and. 


Exercise  1. 

1.  El  nino  tiene  un  libro.  2.  Carlos  es  mi  hermano.  3.  Luisa  es 
mi  hermana.  4.  i  Quien  tiene  la  Have  ?  5.  Mi  amigo  tiene  la  Have 
y  la  pluma.  6.  El  caballo  es  grande.  7.  Mi  tio  es  pobre.  8.  La 
casa  es  grande.  9.  El  panadero  tiene  un  hijo  y  una  hija.  10.  Mi 
amigo  tiene  una  casa  y  un  jardin.  11.  El  jardin  es  muy  grande 
12.  El  caballero  tiene  el  dinero. 


ARTICLES,   DIFFERENT    FORMS.  27 

Exercise  2. 

1.  My  house  is  very  large.  2.  My  brother  has  a  horse.  3.  The 
gentleman  has  a  house.  4.  The  baker  is  my  friend.  5.  The  general 
is  very  poor.  6.  Charles  has  my  pen.  7.  My  table  is  very  large. 
8.  My  uncle  is  very  prudent.  9.  The  daughter  has  a  house,  and  the 
son  has  a  garden.  10.  The  woman  is  very  amiable.  11.  My  brother 
is  a  child.  12.  The  book  is  very  large. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  There  are  three  genders  in  the  Spanish   language:   the 
masculine,  the  feminine,  and  the  neuter. 

The  definite  article  has  in  the  singular  a  distinct  form  for 
each  gender :  masculine  el ;  feminine,  la ;  neuter,  lo : 

El  padre,  the  father.       La  madre,  the  mother.       Lo  bueno,  the  good. 

KEMARKS.  —  1.  The  neuter  gender  is  only  applicable  to  adjectives 
(numeros  adjetivos)  taken  in  an  unlimited  or  indefinite  sense,  as:  lo  bueno, 
the  good  or  what  is  good  ;  lo  peor,  the  worst  or  what  is  worst ;  etc. 

This  NEUTER  GENDER,  which  has  no  plural,  is  therefore  never  applied 
to  persons  or  things,  but  only  to  adjectives  taken  substantively,  and  to  sub- 
stantives taken  adjectively  :  Todo  era  grande  en  San  Luis,  lo  rey,  lo  santo, 
lo  capitan,  everything  was  great  in  St.  Louis  (Louis  IX.),  the  king,  the 
saint,  the  captain. 

2.  The  neuter  article  is  not  placed  indifferently  before  all  adjectives 
taken   substantively.     Thus,  in    the   following   sentences:   El  malo  sera 
castigado,  the  wicked  shall  be  punished ;  El  azul  de  este  pano  es  demasia- 
do  oscuro,  the  blue  of  this  cloth  is  too  dark,  —  we  could  not  make  use  of 
the  neuter  article  lo,  because  those  adjectives  are  taken  substantively  and 
are  sufficiently  determinate.     It  is  evident,  in  fact,  that  in  the  first  sen- 
tence, the  word  hoxnbre,  man,  is  understood   before  malo,  wicked;  and 
in  the  second  sentence,  the  word  color,  color,  before  azul,  blue. 

2,  Although  the  article  el  belongs  only  to  the  masculine  gen- 
der, it  may  be  placed,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  before  feminine 
nouns  beginning  with  an  accented  a:  el  agua,  the  water;  el 
alma,  the  soul;  el  ala,  the  wing ;  el  dguila,  the  eagle ;  el  ave, 
the  bird.  It  must  be  observed,  however,  that  this  change  of 
article  is  only  admitted  in  the  singular,  and  that  we  must  say  in 
the  plural  las  aguas,  las  almas,  las  alas,  etc. 


28  LESSON   1. 

Adjectives  accompanying  the  singular  of  such  nouns  must  be 
placed  in  the  feminine  :  el  agua  <»3  fria,  the  water  is  cold ;  etc. 

The  same  rules  are  to  be  observed  in  reference  to  words  begin- 
ning with  an  h  followed  by  an  accented  a,  as:  el  hacha  es 
pesada,  the  axe  is  heavy  ;  las  hachas,  the  axes  ;  etc. 

Nouns  like  America,  America;  abeja,  bee;  alegria,  joy;  habitation, 
habitation;  etc.,  take  the  feminine  article  la,  because  the  first  a  is  not 
accented:  La  America,  la  habitacion,  etc. 

3,  The  indefinite  article  a,  an,  or  the  numeral  one,  is  ren- 
dered by  un  before  a  masculine  noun  (the  o  of  uno  being  dropped 
before  a  noun),  and  by  Una  before  a  feminine  noun  : 

Un  hermano,  a  brother.  Una  hermana,  a  sister. 

Un  libro,  a  book.  Una  mesa,  a  table. 

NOTE.  —  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  before  a  word  in  the  predi- 
cate expressing  condition,  quality,  or  character  : 

Soy  Americano.  /  am  an  American. 

Es  negociante.  He  is  a  trader. 

Son  generales.  They  are  generals. 

4,  Adjectives  should  always  be  repeated  before  the  nouns 
they  qualify  : 

El  padre  y  la  madre.  The  father  and  (the)  mother. 

La  casa  y  el  jardin.  The  house  and  (the)  garden. 

El  buen  lapiz  y  la  buena  pluma.       The  good  pencil  and  (the  good)  pen. 
NOTE.  —  Some  writers  do  not  always  observe  this  rule. 

GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  GENDERS. 

5,  Nouns  denoting  men,  or  their  rank,  titles,  and  professions 
are  masculine,  irrespective  of  ending : 

El  papa,  the  pope.  El  profeta,  the  prophet. 

El  cura,  the  priest.  El  alguacil,  the  constable. 

Those  denoting  women  or  their  condition  are  feminine : 
La  reina,  the  queen.  La  emperatriz,  the  empress. 

6*  The  gender  of  nouns  may  often  be  known  by  their  termi- 
nations (except  as  above)  : 

1 ,  Nouns  ending  in  0  are  masculine  : 

Except  mano,  hand;  nao,  vessel;  seo,  church. 


PLURAL.  29 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  a  are  generally  feminine : 

Except  dia,  day ;  mapa,  map. 

EXCEPTIONS.  —  Those  ending  in  -a  derived  from  the  Greek  neuter,  as 
clima,  climate ;  idioma,  idiom;  poema,  poem;  dilema,  dilemma;  diploma, 
diploma;  dogma,  dogma;  etc. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  -d,  -ion,  -timbre,  -ie  are  feminine : 

La  puridad,  the  purity.  La  cuestion,  the  question. 

La  libertad,  the  liberty.  La  nacion,  the  nation. 

La  virtud,  the  virtue.  La  serie,  the  series. 

La  lumbre,  the  fire. 

GENERAL  RULE  FOR  LATIN  SCHOLARS.  —  Nouns  derived  from  the  Latin 
generally  preserve  in  Spanish  the  same  gender  they  have  in  Latin,  except 
that  those  which  are  neuter  in  Latin  are  masculine  in  Spanish. 

4.  Compound  nouns  generally  take  the  gender  of  the  second 
word  if  the  same  is  in  the  singular.     Thus,  the  words  aguamiel. 
honey  and  water,  contrahaz,  wrong  side,  are  feminine ;  whilst 
archilaud,  a  kind  of  lute,  and  portafusil,  gunbeh,  are  masculine. 

5.  Compound  words  of  which  the   second   word  is  in  the 
plural  are  generally  masculine,  even  if  the  second  word  is  femi- 
nine,  as  cortaplumas,  ;?ew&m/e ;  mondadientes,  toothpick  ;  saca- 
botas,  bootjack;  etc. 

OBSERVATION  ON  OTHER  TERMINATIONS.  —  Nouns  having  other  termi- 
nations are  subject  to  so  many  exceptions  that  it  is  impossible  to  establish 
satisfactory  rules  in  regard  to  them. 

Thus,  mar,  sea,  is  of  both  genders,  but  words  compounded  with  mar 
are  always  feminine,  as  bajamar,  low  tide;  pleamar,  high  tide.  Mar, 
joined  to  a  proper  noun,  should  be  in  the  masculine,  as  el  mar  Baltico,  the 
Baltic  sea,  etc. 


Leccion  II.  Lesson  II. 

PLURAL. 

Los,  plural  of  e 
Las,  plural  of  la, 
Ejemplos.  Examples. 

El  caballo  es  grande.  The  horse  is  large. 

Los  caballos  son  grandes.  The  horses  are  large. 


30 


LESSON   2. 


Enrique  tiene  un  libro. 

Maria  tiene  dos  libros. 

Mi  tio  tieiie  tres  casas. 

El  general  tiene  cuatro  caballos. 

Las  senoras  son  araables. 

Los  ninos  tienen  dos  plumas. 

El  general  es  rico. 

Los  general  es  son  ricos. 

El  reloj  1  es  hermoso. 

Los  relojes  son  hermosos. 

El  Ingles  es  bueno. 

Los  Ingleses  son  buenos. 

El  paraguas  es  grande. 

Los  paraguas  son  grandes. 

El  juez  es  justo. 

Los  jueces  son  justos. 

Vocabulario. 
El  abanico,  the  fan. 
El  Americano,  the  American. 
El  centavo,  the  cent. 
El  cuarto,  the  room. 
El  Frances,  the  Frenchman. 
El  Ingles,  the  Englishman. 
El  lapiz,  the  pencil. 
El  muchacho,  the  boy. 
El  oro,  the  gold. 
El  pajaro,  the  bird. 
El  perro,  the  dog. 
El  sombrero,  the  hat. 
El  teatro,  the  theater. 
La  ciudad,  the  city. 
La  muchacha,  the  girl. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  Carlos  y  Enrique  son  los  amigos  de  mi  hermano.  2.  El  general 
tiene  tres  hermosos  caballos.  3.  Los  sombreros  son  negros.  4.  Los 
muchachos  tienen  dos  centavos.  5.  Las  senoras  tienen  un  abanico. 
6.  Los  Franceses  y  los  Ingleses  son  amigos.  7.  Los  pajaros  son  her- 
mosos. 8.  La  seiiora  tiene  dos  hijos  y  tres  hijas.  9.  Mi  amigo  tiene 
dos  hermanas.  10.  Los  Americanos  son  industriosos.  11.  Los  dos 


Henry  has  a  book. 
Mary  has  two  books. 
My  uncle  has  three  houses. 
The  general  has  four  horses. 
The  ladies  are  amiable. 
The  children  have  two  pens. 
The  general  is  rich. 
The  generals  are  rich. 
The  watch  is  fine. 
The  watches  are  fine. 
The  Englishman  is  good. 
The  Englishmen  are  good. 
The  umbrella  is  large. 
The  umbrellas  are  large. 
The  judge  is  just. 
The  judges  are  just. 

Vocabulary. 
Cuatro,  four. 
De,  of,  from. 
Dos,  two. 
Enrique,  Henry. 
Hermoso,  handsome,  fine. 
Industrioso,  industrious. 
Joven,  young. 
Juan,  John. 
Negro,  black. 
Pequeno,  small,  little. 
Son,  are. 
Tienen,  have. 
Tres,  three. 
Vigilante,  watchful. 
Ya, 


1  The  final  consonant  is  not  pronounced. 


PLURAL.  31 

amigos  son  pobres.  12.  Las  tres  muchachas  son  amables.  13.  Los 
perros  son  vigilantes.  14.  Los  lapices  son  de  oro.  15.  i  Quien  tiene 
los  libros  ?  16.  Juan  tiene  los  iibros  y  las  plumas.  17.  Las  hijas 
de  mi  amigo  son  jovenes.  18.  Los  cuartos  de  la  casa  son  pequenos. 
19.  Las  hijas  de  mi  tio  son  ya  grandes.  20.  Los  teatros  de  la  ciudad 
son  hermosos. 

Exercise  4. 

1.  The  two  horses  are  black.  2.  The  brothers  of  my  friend  are 
young.  3.  The  two  gentlemen  are  English.  4.  Henry  has  two  hand- 
some dogs.  5.  The  friends  of  my  brother  are  very  poor.  6.  The  city 
has  three  theaters.  7.  Charles  and  John  are  friends.  8.  The  Ameri- 
can has  two  brothers  and  three  sisters.  9.  My  uncle  has  four  houses. 
10.  The  two  Frenchmen  are  very  amiable.  11.  The  fans  of  the  ladies 
are  very  fine.  12.  The  English  have  handsome  horses.  13.  The  houses 
of  the  city  are  very  large.  14.  The  generals  are  very  prudent.  15.  The 
hats  are  black.  16.  The  boys  have  three  pencils.  17.  John  and  Henry 
are  small.  18.  The  rooms  of  my  house  are  large.  19.  The  bakers 
are  poor.  20.  Charles  has  two  pencils. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  plural  of  the  article  el  is  los,  and  that  of  the  article 
la  is  las. 

2,  Nouns  ending  in  an  unaccented  vowel  form  their  plural 
by  adding  s : 

El  hermano,  the  brother  ;  La  hermana,  the  sister. 

Los  hermanos,  the  brothers  ;  Las  hermanas,  the  sisters. 

3*  Nouns  ending  in  accented  e,  0,  U  (also  pie),  add  S : 
El  cafe,  the  coffee  ;  Los  cafes,  the  coffees. 

El  pie,  the  foot ;  Los  pies,  the  feet. 

El  fricando,  the  fricandeau  ;  Los  fricandos,  the  fricandeaus. 

El  tisii,  the  tissue  ;  Los  tisiis,  the  tissues. 

4i  Nouns  ending  in  a  consonant,  in  y,  or  in  accented  a,  i, 
form  their  plural  by  adding  es ; 

El  general,  the  general ;  Los  generales,  the  generals. 

La  mujer,  the  woman  ;  Las  mujeres,  the  women. 

El  aleli,  the  gilliflower  ;  Los  alelies,  the  gillijlowers. 

El  albala,  the  certificate  ;  Los  albalaes,  the  certificates. 

El  rey,  the  king  ;  Los  reyes,  the  kings. 

Papa,  papa  ;  mama",  mamma ;  sof&,  sofa,  take  s  for  the  plural. 


32  LESSON  2. 

5,  Nouns  ending  in  S,  of  which  the  last  syllable  is  unaccented^ 
remain  unchanged. 

Those  which  have  the  last  syllable  accented  add  es : 

El  lunes,  the  Monday  ;  Los  lunes,  the  Mondays. 

La  hipotesis,  the  hypothesis ;  Las  hipotesis,  the  hypotheses  (pi.). 

El  Frances,  the  Frenchman;  Los  Franceses,  the  Frenchmen. 

El  Ingles,  the  Englishman  ;  Los  Ingleses,  the  Englishmen. 

El  dios,  the  god  ;  Los  dioses,  the  gods. 

6.  Nouns  ending  in  z  change  this  letter  into  c,  and  add  es 
for  the  plural  : 

El  juez,  the  judge;  Losjueces,  the  judges. 

La  luz,  the  light ;  Las  luces,  the  lights. 

OBSERVATION.  —  Except  in  patronymics : 
Perez,  los  Perez.  .          Jimenez,  los  Jimenez. 

7»  Proper  nouns  follow  the  same  rules  as  common  nouns  : 
Los  Cervantes  y  los  Mendozas,     The  Cervantes  and  Mendozas. 

8.  Generally  only  the  second  part  of  a  compound  noun  is  put 
in  the  plural : 

El  ferrocarril,  the  railway  ;          Los  ferrocarriles,  the  railways. 

9.  Adjectives,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter,  agree  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify. 

The  plural  of  adjectives  is  formed  like  the  plural  of  nouns : 

El  muchacko  es  bueno,  The  boy  is  good. 

Los  muchachos  son  buenos,  The  boys  are  good. 

10»  In  Spanish,  as  well  as  in  English,  there  are  nouns  which 
are  only  used  in  the  singular,  and  others  which  have  no  singular, 
as  :  albricias,  presents  ;  angarillas,  cruet  stands  ;  viveres,  pro- 
visions, etc. 

NOTE.  —  There  are  a  few  words  which  have  or  have  ;^ot  any  singular 
according  to  their  meaning,  as  esposas,  handcuffs  ;  which  \s  not  the  plural 
of  esposa,  wife  ;  grilles,  irons  ;  which  is  not  the  plural  of  grille,  cricket  ; 
and  a  few  others. 


CONTRACTION   OF   PREPOSITION   WITH   ARTICLE. 


33 


Leccidn  III. 


Lesson  III. 


CONTRACTION    OF    PREPOSITION   WITH    ARTICLE. 

De,  of,  from.  A,  to,  at. 

Del,  masc.  sing.  *\  Al,  masc.  sing.  "\ 

De  la,  fern.  sing.  I  of  the,  A  la,  fern.  sing.  I  to  the, 

De  los,  masc.  pi.  [from  the.  A  los,  masc.  pi.  j  at  the. 

De  las,  fern.  pi.  J  A  las,  fern.  pi.   J 


Declinacidn. 

Masculine  Singular. 

El  hombre,  the  man. 

Del  hombre,  of  or  from  the  man. 

Al  hombre,  to  or  at  the  man. 

Feminine  Singular. 


Declension. 

Masculine  Plural. 

Los  hombres,  the  'men. 

De  los  hombres,  of  or  from  the  men. 

A  los  hombres,  to  or  at  the  men. 

Feminine  Plural. 


La  mujer,  the  woman.  Las  mujeres,  the  women. 

De  la  mujer,  of  or  from  the  woman.     De  las  mujeres,  of  or  from  the  women. 

A  la  mujer,  to  or  at  the  woman.  A  las  mujeres,  to  or  at  the  women. 


Ejemplos. 

El  sombrero  del  muchacho  es  nuevo. 

La  hermana  de  mi  amigo  es  pobre. 

El  padre  de  Juan  es  rico. 

Los  libros  de  los  muchachos  son  bueuos. 

Las  puertas  de  las  casas  son  grandes. 

Carlos  sale  de  la  casa. 

El  cazador  viene  del  bosque. 

La  lluvia  viene  de  las  nubes. 

El  rico  da  dinero  al  pobre. 

La  madre  escribe  a  la  hija. 

El  general  habla  a  los  soldados. 

La  senora  habla  a  las  muchachas» 

El  hombre  llama  a  la  puerta. 

Juan  habla  del  hombre  y  de  la  mujer. 

Enrique  escribe  al  padre  y  a  la  madre. 


Examples. 

The  boy's  hat  is  new. 
My  friend's  sister  is  poor. 
John's  father  is  rich. 
The  boys'  books  are  good. 
The  doors  of  the  houses  are  large. 
Charles  comes  out  of  the  house. 
The  hunter  comes  from  the  wood. 
The  rain  comes  from  the  clouds. 

( The  rich  man  gives  money  to  the 

(     poor  man. 

The  mother  writes  to  the  daughter. 
The  general  speaks  to  the  soldiers. 
The  lady  speaks  to  the  girls. 
The  man  knocks  at  the  door. 
John  speaks  of  the  man  and  woman. 
Henry  writes  to  the  father  and 
mother. 


34  LESSON  3. 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


El  arbol,  the  tree. 

El  bosque,  the  wood. 

El  buque,  the  vessel,  the  ship. 

El  carnicero,  the  butcher. 

El  carpintero,  the  carpenter. 

El  cazador,  the  hunter. 

El  comerciante,  the  merchant. 

El  consejo,  the  advice. 

El  dependiente,  the  clerk. 

El  dinero,  the  money. 

El  habitante,  the  inhabitant. 

El  medico,  the  physician. 

El  Norte,  the  North. 

El  padre,  the  father. 

El  principe,  the  prince. 


La  carne,  the  meat. 

La  cereza,  the  cherry. 

La  cocinera,  the  cook. 

La  madre,  the  mother. 

La  manzana,  the  apple. 

Con, 

Da, 

Dulce,  sweet. 

Escribe,  writes* 

Habil,  skillful. 

Nuevo,  new. 

Rico,  rich. 

Sale,  goes  out  or  comes  out. 

Verde,  green. 

Viene,  comes. 


Exercise  5* 

1.  El  medico  del  principe  es  mi  hermano.  2.  La  senora  de  la  casa 
es  mi  hermana.  3.  La  madre  da  un  consejo  a  la  hija.  4.  [  Quien  tiene 
el  libro  de  Carlos  ?  5.  El  hijo  del  panadero  tiene  el  libro  y  la  pluma 
de  Carlos.  6.  i  Quie'n  tiene  la  Have  de  la  casa  ?  7.  Mi  padre  tiene  la 
Have  de  la  casa  y  del  jardin.  8.  La  casa  del  padre  de  Juan  es  muy 
grande.  9.  Los  habitantes  de  la  ciudad  son  industriosos.  10.  El 
Ingles  es  el  padre  de  las  muchachas.  11.  Los  caballos  de  los  Fran- 
ceses son  hermosos.  12.  El  cazador  sale  del  bosque  con  los  perros. 
13.  Los  hermanos  del  general  son  pobres.  14.  El  dependiente  escribe 
al  comerciante.  15.  Los  muchachos  del  Frances  tienen  manzanas. 
16.  Las  cerezas  del  jardin  son  dulces.  17.  El  carnicero  vende  la  carne 
a  las  cocineras.  18.  El  buque  viene  del  Norte.  19.  Los  Americanos 
son  amigos  de  los  Franceses.  20.  La  hija  del  carpintero  escribe  a  las 
amigas  de  mi  madre.  21.  La  madre  del  carpintero  es  cocinera  en  la 
casa  del  comerciante.  22.  La  madre  del  medico  da  dinero  al  carni- 
cero. 23.  Los  buques  de  los  Americanos  son  nuevos.  24.  El  padre 
del  principe  es  rico.  25.  El  dependiente  da  cerezas  a  mi  hijo. 
26.  [  Quien  da  dinero  al  carpintero  ?  27.  El  comerciante  da  di- 
nero al  hermano  del  carpintero.  28.  Las  manzanas  del  Norte  son 
dulces. 


CONTRACTION    OF   PREPOSITION    WITH    ARTICLE.  35 

Exercise  6. 

1.  Charles's  brother  is  my  father's  clerk.  2.  Louisa  writes  to 
my  father  and  mother.  3.  The  horses  of  the  Englishmen  are  large. 
4.  The  apples  of  the  garden  are  sweet.  5.  Henry  writes  to  the  two 
friends.  6.  The  dog  comes  [out]  of  the  garden.  7.  The  sons  of  the 
physicians  are  clerks.  8.  The  generals  of  the  prince  are  very  prudent. 
9.  The  horses  of  the  general  are  black.  10.  Who  gives  money  to  the 
sons  of  the  Frenchman  'I  11.  My  father  gives  money  to  the  sons  and 
(to  the)  daughters  of  the  Frenchman  and  of  the  Englishman.  12.  The 
trees  of  the  forest  are  green.  13.  The  merchants  of  the  city  are  very 
rich.  14.  The  ship  of  Charles's  father  is  new.  15.  The  sailors 
of  the  vessel  are  skillful.  16.  My  friend's  sisters  are  very  young. 
17.  My  uncle  has  the  key  of  the  houses.  18.  Charles  and  Henry  are 
the  friends  of  the  two  Americans.  19.  Who  has  the  fans  of  the 
ladies?  20.  Louisa's  sisters  have  the  fans.  21.  The  advice  of  the 
physician  to  the  merchant  is  good.  22.  The  carpenter  is  the  brother 
of  the  butcher.  23.  The  mother  gives  money  to  the  cook  for  (para) 
the  butcher.  24.  The  dog  of  the  hunter  is  good.  25.  The  brothers 
of  the  clerk  are  rich. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1 ,  Of  the,  from  the,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  in  the  masculine 
singular  by  del  (instead  of  de  el),  while  to  the,  at  the,  also  in 
the  masculine  singular,  are  rendered  by  al  (instead  of  a  el): 

El  libro  del  muchacho,  The  boy's  book  (the  book  of  the  boy). 

El  general  habla  al  soldado,       The  general  speaks  to  the  soldier. 

2.  Nouns  undergo  in  Spanish  no  change  of  form  in  the  pos- 
sessive case,  possession  being  indicated  by  placing  the  name  of 
the  object  possessed  before  de,  of;  and  the  name  of  the  possessor 
after  it : 

El  libro  de  Carlos,  Charles's  book  (the  book  of  Charlei). 

La  pluma  de  la  muchacha,  The  girl's  pen  (the  pen  of  the  girl). 

La  casa  del  hijo  del  me-  The  physician's  son's  house  (the  house  of  the 
dico,  son  of  the  physician). 


36  LESSON  4. 

Leccion  IV.  Lesson  IV. 

PRONOUNS. 

Verb,  tener,  to  have. 

PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

Yo,    /  Nosotros,  nosotras,  nos,  we. 

Tii,    thou.  Vosotros,  vosotras,  vos  (listed,1  ustedes *),  you. 

El,      he.  Ellos,  they,  masc. 

Ella,  she.  Ellas,  they,  fern. 

Present  Tense  of  tener,  to  have. 
Affirmatively.  Interrogatively. 

Yo  ten  go,  I  have.  j  Tengo  yo  ?  have  I? 

Tii  tienes,  thou  hast.  j  Tienes  tii  ?  hast  thou  ? 

El  tiene,  he  has.  i  Tiene  el  ?  has  he  ? 

Ella  tiene,  she  has.  i  Tiene  ella  ?  has  she  ? 

Usted  tiene,  you  have.  i  Tiene  listed  ?  have  you  ? 

Nosotros  tenem  os,  we  have.  $  Tenemos  nosotros  ?  have  we  ? 

Vosotros  tenets,  you  have.  i  Teneis  vosotros  ?  have  you  ? 

Ellos  tienen,  they  (masc.)  have,  i  Tienen  ellos  ?  have  they  (masc.)  ? 

Ellas  tienen,  they  (fern.)  have,  i  Tienen  eilas  ?  have  they  (fern.)  ? 

Ustedes  tienen,  you  have.  i  Tienen  ustedes  ?  have  you  ? 

Ejemplos,  Examples. 

i  Tiene  el  hombre  dinero  ? ) 

*  ,.  ,,       ,      .  f  Has  the  man  money  ? 

i  Tiene  dinero  el  hombre  ? ) 

El  tiene  dinero  y  credito.  He  has  money  and  credit. 

i  Que  tiene  V.  ?  What  have  you  ? 

Tengo  oro  y  plata.  I  have  gold  and  silver. 

i  Que  tiene  la  mujer  ?  What  has  the  woman  ? 

Ella  tiene  manzanas  y  peras.  She  has  apples  and  pears. 

i  Que  tienen  VV.  ?  What  have  you  ? 

1  TTsted,  sing.,  ustedes,  pi.,  were  abbreviated  in  the  following  way  •  Vm- 
ymd.  or  yd.  (for  the  singular),  and  Vms-  Vmds-  or  Vds-  (for  the  plural)  ;  but 
at  present  usted  is  represented  by  V.,  and  ustedes  by  W. 


PRONOUNS. 


37 


Tenemos  pan  y  queso. 

i  Tienen  fusiles  los  soldados  ? 

Tie  nen  fnsiles  y  sables. 

i  Tengo  yo  vino  ? 

V.  tiene  poco  vino. 

i  Quien  tiene  las  plumas  ? 

Las  muchachas  tieneri  las  plumas. 


We  have  bread  and  cheese. 
Have  the  soldiers  any  guns  ? 
They  have  guns  and  sabers. 
Have  I  any  wine  ? 
You  have  little  wine. 
Who  has  the  pens  ? 
The  girls  have  the  pens. 


Interrogative  Form  used  Affirmatively. 

Tiene  V.  un  hermoso  caballo.  You  have  a  fine  horse. 

Tienen  los  Ingleses  rauchos  buques.  The  English  have  many  ships. 

Tiene  la  senora  dos  hijos.  The  lady  has  two  sons. 

Tiene  Carlos  un  lapiz  y  una  pluma.  Charles  has  a  pencil  and  a  pen. 


Vocabulary. 

Mucho,  a,  much. 
Muchos,  as,  many. 
No,  no. 
Pero,  but. 
Poco,  adv.,  little. 
Que,  what. 
Senor,  sir,  Mr. 
Si,  yes. 
Sobre,  on,  upon. 


Vocabulario. 

El  amigo,  the  friend. 

La  mesa,  the  table. 

El  credito,  the  credit. 

La  pera,  the  pear. 

El  fusil,  the  gun. 

La  plata,  the  silver. 

El  hombre,  the  man. 

Algo,  something,  an 

El  pan,  the  bread. 

Aqui,  here. 

El  polio,  the  chicken. 

Bueno,  good. 

El  queso,  the  cheese. 

Con,  with. 

El  sable,  the  saber. 

En,  in. 

El  vino,  the  wine. 

Hoy,  to-day. 

Exercise  7. 


1.  [Tiene  Y.  algo  sobre  la  mesa?  2.  Si,  senor,  tengo  un  libro 
sobre  la  mesa.  3.  j  Tiene  carne  el  carnicero  ?  4.  Tiene  carne  y  po- 
lios. 5.  i  Tiene  el  Ingle's  una  casa  en  la  ciudad  ?  6.  El  tiene  dos  casas 
aqui.  7.  i  Tienen  W.  mucho  dinero  ?  8.  Tenemos  poco  dinero,  pero 
mucho  credito.  9.  £  Que  tiene  la  hija  del  panadero  1  10.  Ella  tiene 
manzanas  y  peras.  11.  £  Que  tierien  los  muchachos  ?  12.  Tienen 
cerezas.  13.  [  A  quien  escribe  Carlos  ?  14.  J^l  escribe  d  mi  amigo. 
15.  i  Habla  V.  a  los  muchachos  ?  16.  No,  senor,  mi  hermano  habla 
d  los  muchachos  y  a  las  muchachas.  17.  i  Con  quien  sale  V.? 
18.  Con  mi  padre  y  mi  madre.  19.  j,  Tiene  el  general  un  hijo  ? 
20.  fil  tiene  un  hijo  y  dos  hijas.  21.  Los  comerciantes  tienen 
buenos  dependientes.  22.  [  Que  da  V.  al  pobre  hombre  ?  23.  Pan 
y  dinero.  24.  Los  cazadores  tienen  buenos  perros.  25.  £  Tienen 
buenos  fusiles  ?  26.  Si,  tienen. 


38  LESSON  4. 

Exercise  8. 

1.  Have  the  generals  good  horses  1  2.  They  have  very  good 
horses.  3.  Has  the  Englishman  much  money  ?  4.  He  has  very  little. 
5.  Have  the  merchants  much  wine  ?  6.  They  have  very  little  wine. 
7.  Are  you  Charles's  friend  1  8.  No,  Charles  is  my  brother's  friend. 
9.  Have  you  (any)  chickens  to-day  ?  10.  Yes,  sir,  we  have  chickens 
and  meat.  11.  The  English  have  many  ships,  and  the  French 
have  many  soldiers.  12.  My  brother  has  a  horse,  and  I  have  a  dog. 
13.  We  have  a  very  fine  theater  in  the  city.  14.  Has  my  brother 
(any)  books  on  the  table  ?  15.  Yes,  sir,  he  has  books,  pens,  and 
pencils  on  the  table.  16.  Do  you  go  out  to-day  1  17.  No,  sir,  but  my 
brother  goes  out  with  my  sister.  18.  What  do  you  give  to  Charles  1 
19.  A  handsome  hat.  20.  The  baker's  sons  have  a  room  in  my  house. 
21.  To  whom  do  you  write  1  22.  To  Henry's  brother.  23.  We 
have  two  dogs  in  the  garden.  24.  Have  the  children  a  book  1 
25.  They  have  two. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  pronoun  til,  thou,  is  used  more  frequently  in  Spanish 
than  in  English.  It  indicates  familiarity,  affection,  intimacy, 
and  is  therefore  frequently  used  among  relations,  intimate  friends, 
and  older  persons  when  addressing  children,  etc. : 

i  Que  tienes  tti,  Juanito  ?  What  have  you,  Johnny  ? 

2 1  We  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  nos  and  nosotros,  masc. ; 
nosotras,  fern. ;  but  nos  is  used  in  the  nominative  case  only  by 
sovereigns,  dignitaries,  and  tribunals  in  Church  and  State,  in 
their  official  capacity  : 

Nos,  D.  N.,  Obispo  de  N.  .  .          We,  D.  N.,  Bishop  of  N.  .  . 
Nos  los  Inquisitores.  .  .  We  the  Inquisitors.  .  . 

NOTE.  —  In  the  usual  style,  nosotros,  masc.,  nosotras,  fern.,  is  always  used, 

3.  You  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  VOS,  VOSOtros,  masc.,  VOSO- 
tras,  fern.  ;  and  also  by  listed  (or  V.)  for  the  singular  of  both 
genders,  and  ustedes  (or  VV.)  for  the  plural. 

Vos  is  used  only  in  elevated  style,  or  when  addressing  the 
Deity,  saints,  kings,  and  sovereigns  when  the  title  of  Majesty 
is  omitted  : 


PRONOUNS.  39 

De  vos  espero  alivio,  Senor,  From  thee  I  expect  relief,  0  Lord. 

A  vos  elevo  mis  siiplicas,  Rey  y  To  thee  I  raise  my  prayers,  King  and 

Senor,  Lord. 

Vos,  Senor,  podeis  remediar  ini  Thou,  0  Lord,  canst  relieve  my  misery. 

desgracia, 

Vosotros  is  used  by  orators  and  speakers  when  addressing 
their  auditors. 

Usted  (V.  or  Vd.)  in  the  singular,  and  ustedes  (W.,  Vs., 
or  Vds.)  in  the  plural  is  the  only  form  of  direct  address  that  a 
stranger  is  likely  to  use.  It  is  the  universal  conversational 
expression,  since  vosotros  is  never  used,  and  tu  marks  a  decided 
intimacy. 

Usted  is  a  contraction  of  vnestra  merced,  your  grace,  and 
requires  the  verb  to  be  in  the  third  person  singular,  as  ustedes 
requires  the  third  person  plural : 

listed  tiene,  you  (sing.)  have.  TTstedes  tienen,  you  (plur.)  have. 

Usted  es,  you  (sing.)  are.  Ustedes  son,  you  (plur.)  are. 

Usted  da,  you  (sing.)  give.  Ustedes  dan,  you  (plur.)  give. 

NOTK.  —  We  use,  in  fact,  the  same  form  of  expressing  ourselves  in  Eng- 
lish when  we  say,  speaking  to  a  judge,  an  archbishop,  etc.  :  Your  Honor 
knows  .  .  .  ;  your  Grace  is  ...  \  etc.,  instead  of  the  plain  and  usual:  You 
know  .  .  .  ;  you  are  .  .  .  ;  etc. 

4.  Verbs  are  conjugated  interrogatively  by  placing  the  verb 
before  its  subject.  This  takes  place  in  all  cases  of  interrogation, 
as  is  the  case  with  to  have,  to  be,  to  will,  etc.  : 

i  Tengo  yo  ?  Have  I? 

I  Tiene  el  hombre  ?  Has  the  man  ? 

i  Sabe  el  padre  ?  Does  the  father  know  (lit.  knows  the  father]  ? 

I  Van  los  muchachos  ?  Do  the  boys  go  ? 

i  Que  dice  la  senora  ?  What  does  the  lady  say  ? 

i  Que  decian  los  hombres  ?  What  did  the  men  say  ? 

i  Sabe  V.  cuando  viene  mi  Do  you  know  when  my  father  comes  (lit. 

padre  ?  when  comes  my  father)  ? 

5*  In  interrogative  sentences  it  is  considered  an  elegant  way 
of  expressing  one's  self,  to  place  the  object  before  the  subject 
when  the  latter  is  not  a  pronoun  : 


40  LESSON  4. 

j  Tiene  dinero  el  hombre  ?        Has  the  man  any  money? 
j  Es  bueno  el  vino  ?  fs  the  wine  good  ? 

6*  Each  person  of  the  verb  having  generally  in  Spanish,  as 
in  Latin,  a  different  termination,  the  accompanying  pronouns 
may  be  and  are  generally  left  out  in  conversation,  and  even  in 
the  conjugation,  when  the  sentence  is  otherwise  sufficiently  clear. 
But  listed  and  ustedes  should  not  be  left  out,  however,  as  they 
accompany  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular  and  third  per- 
son plural,  as  well  as  el,  he;  ella,  she ;  and  ellos  (masc.),  ellas 
(fern.),  they,  and  as  their  omission  might  create  confusion  : 

Tengo,  /  have.  Tenemos,  we  have. 

Tienes,  thou  hast.  Tienen,  they  have. 

Sale,  he  or  she  goes  out.  Salen,  they  go  out. 

OBSERVATION.  —  In  interrogative  sentences  it  is  also  better  to  preserve 
the  pronouns. 

7.  As  a  sentence  may  be  construed  in  different  ways  in  Span- 
ish, as  will  be  seen  hereafter,  the  interrogative  form  may  often 
be  found  in  affirmative  sentences : 

Tiene  V.  razon,  You  are  right. 

Es  V.  muy  bueno,  You  are  very  kind. 

Habla  V.  muy  bien,  You  speak  very  well. 

8.  Some  or  any  before  nouns  is  generally  not  expressed  in 
Spanish : 

j  Tiene  V.  vino  ?  Have  you  (any)  wine? 

No  tenemos  queso,  We  have  n't  (any)  cheese. 

OBSERVATION.  —  When  some  or  any  stands  alone,  algnno,  alguna, 
algunos,  algunas  is  used: 

Tengo  alguno,  I  have  some  (vino). 

Tiene  algunas,  He  has  some  (peras). 


VERBS   SER   AND   ESTAR. 


41 


Leccion  V. 


Lesson  T. 


Verbs  ser  and  estar,  to  be. 


Present  Tense  of  ser,  to  be. 


Affirmatively. 


Interrogatively. 


Yo  soy, 
Tu  eres, 
El  es, 
Ella  es, 
listed  es, 
Nosotros  somos, 
Vosotros  sois, 
Ellos  son, 
Ellas  son, 
Ustedes  son, 

I  am. 
thou  art. 
he  is. 
she  is. 
you  are. 
we  are. 
you  are. 
they  (masc.  )  are. 
they  (fern.)  are. 
you  are. 

I  Soy  yo  ? 
j  Eres  tii  ? 
i  Es  el? 
i  Es  ella  ? 
i  Es  usted  ? 
i  Somos  nosotros  ? 
i  Sois  vosotros  ? 
I  Son  ellos  ? 
i  Son  ellas  ? 
j  Son  ustedes  ? 

am  I? 
art  thou  ? 
is  he? 
is  she  ? 
are  you  ? 
are  we  ? 
are  you  ? 
are  they  (masc.  )  \ 
are  they  (fern.)  ? 
are  you  ? 

Ejemplos. 

La  vida  es  corta. 

Somos  mortales. 

Mi  padre  es  medico. 

Mis  hermanos  son  pintores. 

Carlos  es  bueno. 

Juan  y  Enrique  son  malos. 

El  profesor  es  muy  docto. 

V.  es  muy  alto. 

Los  muchachos  son  pequenos. 

Maria  es  mi  hermana. 

La  madre  es  vieja. 

El  padre  es  ciego. 

La  muchacha  es  bonita. 

La  leche  es  blanca1. 

El  plomo  es  pesado. 

El  reloj  es  de  oro. 

Los  candeleros  son  de  plata. 

El  dinero  es  mio. 


Examples. 

Life  is  short. 

We  are  mortal. 

My  father  is  a  physician. 

My  brothers  are  painters. 

Charles  is  good. 

John  and  Henry  are  bad. 

The  professor  is  very  learned. 

You  are  very  tall. 

The  boys  are  small. 

Mary  is  my  sister. 

The  mother  is  old. 

The  father  is  blind. 

The  girl  is  pretty. 

Milk  is  white. 

Lead  is  heavy. 

The  watch  is  of  gold. 

The  candlesticks  are  of  silver. 

The  money  is  mine. 


See  L.  8. 


42 


LESSON   5. 


La  casa  es  del  medico. 
Este  vino  es  de  Espana. 
La  flor  es  para  mi  hermana. 
La  maquina  es  para  copiar  cartas. 
i  Quien  es  V.  ? 

El  amor  de  Dios  es  el  principio  de 
la  sabiduria. 


The  house  belongs  to  the  physician. 
This  wine  is  from  Spain. 
Ihe  flower  is  for  my  sister. 
The  machine  is  to  copy  letters. 
Who  are  you  ? 

The  love  of  God  is  the  beginning 
of  wisdom. 


Present  Tense  of  estar,  to  be. 


Affirmatively. 


Interrogatively. 


Yo  estoy, 
Tu  estas, 
El  esta, 
Ella  esta, 
listed  esta, 
Nosotros  estamos, 
Vosotros  estais, 
Ellos  estan, 
Ellas  estan, 
Ustedes  estan, 

I  am. 
thou  art. 
he  is. 
she  is. 
you  are. 
we  are. 
you  are. 
they  (masc.)  are. 
they  (fern.)  are. 
you  are. 

i  Estoy  yo  ? 
i  Estas  tii  ? 
i  Esta  el  ? 
i  Esta  ella  ? 
i  Esta  listed  ? 
i  Estamos  nosotros  ? 
i  Estais  vosotros  ? 
i  Estan  ellos  ? 
i  Estan  ellas  ? 
i  Estan  ustedes  ? 

am  I? 
art  thou  ? 
is  he? 
is  she  ? 
are  you  ? 
are  we  ? 
are  you  ? 
are  they  (masc.)  ? 
are  they  (fern.)  ? 
are  you  ? 

Ejemplos. 

Mi  hermana  esta  triste. 

Yo  estoy  muy  contento. 

El  cafe  esta  frio. 

La  carne  esta  asada. 

Los  muchachos  estan  en  la  calle. 

Mi  amigo  esta  en  Paris. 

Carlos  esta  enfermo. 

i  Donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ? 

El  sombrero  esta  de  moda. 


Examples. 

My  sister  is  sad. 

I  am  very  pleased. 

The  coffee  is  cold. 

The  meat  is  roasted. 

The  boys  are  in  the  street. 

My  friend  is  in  Paris. 

Charles  is  sick. 

Where  is  my  hat  ? 

The  hat  is  in  the  fashion. 


Ser  and  estar  compared. 


Ser  bueno,  to  be  good. 

Ser  malo,  to  be  bad  (wicked). 

Ser  vivo,  to  be  lively. 

Ser  cansado?  to  be  tiresome. 


Estar  bueno,  to  be  well  (in  health). 
Estar  malo,  to  be  ill  (sick). 
Estar  vivo,  to  be  alive. 
Estar  cansado?  to  be  tired, 


VERBS   SER   AND    ESTAR. 


43 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  abogado,  the  lawyer. 
El  campo,  the  country. 
La  calle,  the  street. 
La  puerta,  the  door. 
Agrio,  sour. 
Ahora,  now. 


Bueno,  good,  well. 
Cerrado,  closed,  shut. 
Contento,  pleased,  satisfied. 
Donde,  where. 
Gracias,  thank  you. 
Joven,  young. 

Exercise  9. 


Lejos,/ar. 
Londres,  London. 
Malo,  bad,  ill. 
Nadie,  nobody,  no  one. 
Triste,  sad. 
iSabe  V.?  do  you  know? 


1.  Los  dos  hermanos  de  Carlos  estan  ahora  en  Paris.  2.  £  Quien 
es  V.  ?  3.  Soy  el  hijo  del  medico.  4.  [  Donde  estan  los  libros  ? 
5.  Estan  sobre  la  mesa  en  mi  cuarto.  6.  j,  Es  V.  medico  1  7.  No, 
senor,  soy  abogado.  8.  £  Es  bueno  el  vino  ?  9.  Esta  agrio.  10.  Las 
muchachas  estan  en  el  jardin,  y  los  muchachos  estan  en  la  calle. 
11.  La  hija  del  panadero  es  muy  joven.  12.  Juan  y  Maria  estan  en 
la  casa  del  general.  13.  Mi  casa  esta  muy  lejos  de  aqui.  14.  Los  dos 
medicos  son  Franceses.  15.  j  Es  V.  Americano  ?  16.  No,  senor,  soy 
Ingles.  17.  i  Es  V.  de  Londres  ?  18,  Si,  senor,  soy  de  Londres,  y 
mi  padre  es  de  Liverpool.  19.  Los  dos  hijos  del  carpintero  estan  muy 
malos.  20.  j  Donde  esta  Juan  ?  21.  Esta  con  mi  hermano.  22.  El 
cafe  es  bueno,  pero  esta  frio.  23.  [  Estan  VV.  contentos  ?  24.  Esta- 
mos  muy  contentos  ahora.  25.  [  Quien  esta  en  mi  cuarto  1  26.  Nadie, 
el  cuarto  esta  cerrado.  27.  La  hija  del  general  es  muy  amable. 
28.  i  Con  quien  esta  mi  madre  ?  29.  Ella  esta  con  mis  (my)  dos 
herrnanas.  30.  Los  cazadores  estan  en  el  bosque. 


Exercise  10. 

1.  Do  you  know  where  the  book  is  (where  is  the  book)  1  2.  The 
book  is  on  the  table.  3.  Where  is  the  father  now  ?  4.  He  is  in 
London.  5.  Is  he  well '?  6.  He  is  very  well,  thank  you.  7.  Are 
the  Americans  and  the  English  friends  ?  8.  They  are  friends  now. 
9.  Who  are  you?  10.  I  am  Charles's  friend.  11.  Where  is  he? 
12.  He  is  in  the  country.  13.  The  two  sons  of  the  physician  are 
small,  but  they  are  very  bad.  14.  Here  is  my  book.  15.  Is  the  cheese 
good  ?  16.  The  cheese  and  the  bread  are  very  good.  17.  Is  the  baker 
an  American  ?  18.  No,  sir,  he  is  a  Frenchman.  19.  The  two 
hunters  are  brothers.  20.  Are  you  pleased  here  1  21.  Yes,  we  have 
money,  and  we  are  pleased.  22.  My  brother's  friend  is  a  lawyer. 


44  LESSON  5. 

23.  Who  is  at  the  door  ?  24.  A  boy  with  apples.  25.  John  and 
Henry  are  in  the  city.  26.  Where  are  the  chickens  ?  27.  The 
chickens  are  now  in  the  garden.  28.  The  wine  is  sour  and  bad. 
29.  Who  is  sad?  30.  Nobody  is  sad  here. 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  Although  the  two  Spanish  verbs  ser  and  estar  are  both 
rendered  in  English  by  the  verb  to  be,  they  cannot  be  used 
indifferently  one  for  the  other ;  each  has  its  distinct  meaning. 

Ser  is  used  when  the  attribute  of  the  subject  is  inherent, 
essential,  or  lasting,  while  estar  is  to  be  used  when  the  attribute 
is  only  accidental  or  temporary. 

The  usage  will  be  shown  iu  the  following  examples : 

Es  general,  He  is  a  general. 

Es  profesor,  He  is  a  professor. 

Es  bonita,  She  is  pretty. 

Son  grandes,  They  are  tall. 

La  miel  es  dulce,  Honey  is  sweet. 

Es  tarde,  It  is  late. 

Esta  bueno,  He  is  well. 

El  agua  esta  caliente,  The  water  is  warm. 

Estamos  de  priesa,  We  are  in  a  hurry. 

El  nino  es  feo,  The  child  is  homely. 

El  nino  esta  cansado,  The  child  is  tired. 

La  muchacha  es  buena,  The  girl  is  good. 

La  muchacha  esta  buena,  The  girl  is  well. 

La  mujer  es  alegre,  The  woman  is  of  a  jolly  nature. 

La  inujer  esta  alegre,  The  woman  feels  jolly. 

NOTE.  —  Position,  even  though  permanent,  is  indicated  by  estar  (which 
here  has  its  original  Latin  meaning,  stare  =  to  stand). 

Esta  en  Francia,  He  is  in  France. 

Mi  casa  esta  en  el  campo,  My  house  is  in  the  country. 

Madrid  esta  en  Espana,  Madrid  is  in  Spain. 

NOTE  2.  —  A  predicate  noun  requires  ser. 


VERBS   T)E  AND   PARA. 


45 


2t    Ser  is  used  to  express  possession,  origin,  destination,  apt- 
ness, in  combination  with  certain  prepositions : 


Este  jardin  es  de  mi  ti'o, 
Este  vino  es  de  Francia, 
El  libro  es  para  V., 
fil  no  es  para  trabajar, 


This  garden  is  my  uncle's. 
This  wine  is  from  France. 
The  look  is  for  you. 
He  is  not  fit  to  work. 


3.   Estar  is  used  to  express  occupation,  intention,  or  willing- 
ness, and  futurity,  in  combination  with  certain  prepositions  : 


Hoy  estoy  de  guardia, 
Yo  estoy  para  salir, 
La  casa  esta  por  acabar, 


To-day  I  am  on  duty. 

I  intend  to  go  out. 

The  house  is  not  yet  finished. 


lecci&n  VI. 


Lesson  YL 


USE   OF   THE   PREPOSITIONS   DE   AND   PARA. 


Ejemplos. 

Pablo  tiene  un  reloj  de  oro.      j 

Tenemos  dos  mesas  de  marmol. 
i  Tienen  VV.  plumas  de  acero  ? 
Tenemos  plumas  de  oro  y  de  acero. 
Adolfo  tiene  un  chaleco  de  seda. 
El  medico  tiene  una  casa  de  madera. 
Los  muchachos  tienen  un  tintero  ) 
de  plomo.  ) 

Tenemos  una  maquina  de  lavar. 
Compania  de  Reloj  es  de  Nueva  York. 
Carruages  de  prim  era  clase. 
Una  bomba  de  vapor. 
Agua  de  Florida. 
Un  maestro  de  escuela. 
Una  maquina  de  coser. 


Examples. 

Paul  has  a  gold  watch  (a  watch  of 

gold). 

We  have  two  marble  tables. 
Have  you  any  steel  pens  ? 
We  have  gold  and  steel  pens. 
Adolphus  has  a  silk  waistcoat. 
The  physician  has  a  wooden  house. 

The  boys  have  a  leaden  inkstand. 

We  have  a  washing  machine. 
New  York  Watch  Company. 
First-class  carriages. 
A  fire  engine. 
Florida  water. 
A  schoolmaster. 
A  sewing  machine. 
Dining  room  tables  (tables  for  din- 
ing rooms). 


46 


LESSON  6. 


Tiutepara  el  pelo. 
Polvos  para  insectos. 
Efectos  para  marineros. 

Vocabulario. 
El  algod6n,  the  cotton. 
El  almacen,  the  store. 
El  arce,  the  maple. 
El  aziicar,  the  sugar. 
El  billar,  the  billiard. 
El  cuchillo,  the  knife. 
El  extinguidor,  the  extinguisher. 
El  fabricante,  the  manufacturer. 
El  fuego,  the  fire. 
El  hierro,  the  iron. 
El  instruments,  the  instrument. 
El  joyero,  the  jeweler. 
El  pedazo,  the  piece. 
El  plomo,  the  lead. 
El  tiempo,  the  time. 
El  tintero,  the  inkstand. 
El  vapor,  the  steam. 
El  vidrio,1  the  glass. 


Hair  dye  (dye  for  the  hair). 
Insect  powders  (powder  for  insects). 
Sailors'  goods  (goods  for  sailors). 

Vocabulary. 
La  caja,  the  safe,  the  box. 
La  cana,2  the  cane. 
La  caoba,  the  mahogany. 
La  cerveza,  the  beer. 
La  hacienda,  the  estate. 
La  seda,  the  silk. 
Alii,  there. 
Celebre,  celebrated. 
Champafia,  Champagne. 
Desde,  since. 
Escribo,  /  write. 
Para,  for. 
i  Quiere  V.  T     Will  you  have  ?    Do 

you  wish  ? 

Quiero,  /  wish,  I  will  have. 
Senor,  sir. 

Senora,  madam,  Mrs. 
Vende,  sells. 


Exercise  11. 

1.  i  Qu6  vino  tiene  V.  en  la  casa  ?  2.  Tengo  vino  de  Champana. 
3.  Las  plumas  de  acero  de  Spencer  son  muy  celebres.  4.  Tenemos 
una  caja  de  hierro  en  el  almacen.  5.  Tenemos  tambien  un  extingui- 
dor de  fuego.  6.  [  Tienen  W.  una  mesa  de  billar  1  7.  Tenemos  dos. 
8.  Mi  hermano  vende  instrumentos  para  joyeros.  9.  j  Y  que  vende 
V.  1  10.  Soy  fabricante  de  mesas  para  comedor.  11.  Mi  hermano 
es  depend iente  en  la  Compafiia  de  Manhattan.  12.  £  Tienen  W.  una 
maquina  de  vapor  en  la  hacienda  ?  13.  Si,  seiior,  tenemos  una  desde 
mucho  tiempo  (a  long  time).  14.  [Quiere  V.  un  paraguas  de  seda 
6  de  algodon  ?  15.  Quiero  uno  de  seda.  16.  El  padre  de  Enrique 
tiene  una  casa  de  campo.  17.  Mi  hermana  tiene  un  traje  de  seda. 
18.  Tenemos  una  mesa  de  caoba.  19.  £  Quiere  V.  aziicar  de  cana  ? 
20.  Quiero  azucar  de  arce. 

1  Vidrio,  glass,  refers  only  to  the  substance  called  glass,  while  vaso  is 
used  for  a  glass  to  drink  from. 

9  Cana,  cane,  does  not  refer  to  a  walking  stick,  which  is  un  bast6n. 


DE  AND   PARA.  £7 


Exercise  12. 

1.  What  will  you  have  ?  2.  I  wish  a  piece  of  bread.  3.  Do  you 
write  with  a  gold  pen  1  4.  No,  sir,  I  write  with  a  steel  pen.  5.  In 
what  company  are  you  (a)  clerk  ?  6.  In  the  New  York  Watch  Corn- 
pan  y.  7.  What  does  your  (su)  brother  sell  ?  8.  He  sells  silk  hats. 
9.  Have  you  a  glass  inkstand  ?  10.  No,  sir,  I  have  a  leaden  ink- 
stand. 11.  What  knife  will  you  have  ?  12.  I  wish  a  butcher's  knife. 
13.  What  hat  has  Henry  ?  14.  He  has  a  hunter's  hat.  15.  Does  the 
merchant  sell  wine?  16.  He  sells  wine  and  beer.  17.  With  whom 
are  the  hunters  in  the  wood  1  18.  They  are  there  with  the  young 
soldier.  19.  Have  the  ladies  a  fan  ?  20.  They  have  two  fans. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made  is  indicated  by  the 
preposition  de,  of,  from,  between  the  name  of  the  thing  and  that 
of  the  material : 

Un  sonibrero  de  seda,         A  silk  hat  (lit.  a  hat  of  silk). 
Un  reloj  de  oro,  A  gold  watch  (a  watch  of  gold). 

2,  The  word  representing  the  nature,  species,  locality  or  qual- 
ity of  a  thing,  which  in  English  is  placed  first,  comes  second  in 
Spanish,  and  is  joined  to  the  first  noun  by  de,  of,  from : 

Un  traje  de  verano,  A  summer  dress. 

Agua  de  lluvia,  Rain  water. 

Vino  de  Burdeos,  Bordeaux  wine,  claret. 

Cana  de  azucar,  Sugar  cane. 

3,  The  word  representing  a  particular  use,  appendage,  pur- 
pose, physical  or  moral  property,  place  where  things  are  kept, 
etc.,  comes  second  in  Spanish,  and  is  generally  joined  to  the  first 
noun  by  the  prepositions  para,  for  ;  or  de,  of,  jrom  : 

Maquina  para  gas,  .      Gas  machine. 
Jaulas  para  pajaros,  Bird  cages. 

Estante  para  sombreros,  Hai  stand. 

Maquinas  de  coser,  Sewing  machine*. 


48  LESSON  7. 


Leccion  VII.  Lesson  TIL 


THE   NEGATIVE. 


No  tener,  not  to  have. 


Negatively. 

Yo  110  tengo  (no  tengo),  I  have  not. 

Tii  no  tienes,  thou  hast  not. 

El  no  tiene,  he  has  not. 

Ella  no  tiene,  she  has  not. 

listed  no  tiene,  you  have  not. 

Nosotros  no  tenemos,  we  have  not. 

Vosotros  no  teneis,  you  have  not. 

Ellos  no  tienen,  they  (masc.)  have  not. 

Ellas  no  tienen,  they  (feru.)  have  not. 

Ustedes  no  tienen,  you  have  not. 


Negatively  and  Interrogatively. 

i  No  tengo  yo  ?  have  I  not  ? 

i  No  tienes  tii  ?  hast  thou  not  f 

i  No  tiene  el  ?  has  he  not  ? 

I  No  tiene  ella  ?  has  she  not  ? 

i  No  tiene  usted  ?  have  you  not  ? 

i  No  tenemos  nosotros  ?  have  we  not  ? 

i  No  teneis  vosotros  ?  have  you  not  ? 

i  No  tienen  ellos  ?  have  they  (masc.)  not? 

i  No  tienen  ellas  ?  .      have  they  (fern.)  not  ? 

I  No  tienen  ustedes  ?  have  you  not  ? 


THE  NEGATIVE. 


49 


Ser  and  estar,  to  be. 


Negatively. 
Yo  no  soy, 
Yo  no  estoy, 
etc. 


I  am  not. 
etc. 


Negatively  and  Interrogatively. 

i  No  soy  yo  ?     ) 

\T  ™  f  a 

j  No  estoy  yo  ? ) 

etc.  etc. 


Negative  with 


Jama's,  never,  ever. 
Nada,  nothing,  not  anything. 
Nadie,  nobody,  not  anybody. 
Ni,  neither ',  nor. 

Yo  no  tengo  nada,  or  nada  tengo.    < 

Yo  no  quiero  ninguno,  or  ninguno  ) 

quiero.  ) 

$1  no  esta  jarnas  en  casa,  or  jamas  ) 

esta  el  en  casa.  ) 

El  no  tiene  nunca  dinero,  or  nun-  ) 

ca  tiene  el  dinero.  ) 

No  sale  nadie,  or  nadie  sale. 
No  tengo  ni  pan  ni  queso,  or  ni ) 

pan  ni  queso  tengo.  ) 

Ejemplos. 

a  Es  pobre  el  hombre  ? 

No  es  pobre,  es  rico. 

i  No  tiene  V.  dinero  ? 

Ni  dinero  ni  credito  tengo. 

i  No  quiere  V.  pan  ? 

Nada  quiero  hoy. 

i  No  sale  mi  padre  hoy  ? 

£l  no  sale. 

Luisa  no  es  amable.  * 

i  Vende  sombreros  el  comerciante  ? 

El  no  vende  ningunos. 

i  Que  tiene  V.  en  la  caja  ? 

Nada  tengo. 

Nadie  sabe  la  leccion. 

Isabel  no  es  dichosa. 

Ni  libros  ni  plumas  tengo. 


Ninguno,  (sing.)  )  no  one,  none^  no, 
Ningunos,  (pi.)    j      not  any. 
Nunca,  never. 


I  have  nothing  ;  I  don't  have  any- 
thing. 

I  don't  wish  any. 
He  is  never  at  home. 

He  never  has  any  money. 

Nobody  goes  out. 

I  have  neither  bread  nor  cheese. 

Examples. 

Is  the  man  poor  ? 

He  is  not  poor,  he  is  rich. 

Have  you  no  money  ? 

I  have  neither  money  nor  credit. 

Don't  you  wish  any  bread  ? 

I  don't  wish  anything  to-day. 

Does  not  my  father  go  out  to-day  ? 

He  does  not  go  out. 

Louisa  is  not  amiable. 

Does  the  merchant  sell  hats  ? 

He  does  not  sell  any. 

What  have  you  in  the  box  ? 

I  have  nothing. 

Nobody  knows  the  lesson. 

Isabel  is  not  happy. 

I  have  neither  books  nor  pens. 


50 


LESSON   7. 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  aceite,  the  oil. 

La  lampara,  the  lamp. 

La  leccidn,  the  lesson. 

La  luz,  the  light. 

Aba  jo,  downstairs. 

Alguno,  some,  any,  some 

one,  any  one,  somebody, 

anybody. 
Aquello,  thatt  that  thing. 


Compra  V.  ?  do  you  buy  ? 

Compro,  /  buy. 

Esto,  this,  this  thing. 

Jamas,  never,  ever. 

Listo,  ready. 

Nada,  nothing,  not  anything. 

Nadie,  nobody,  not  anybody. 

Ni,  neither,  nor. 

Ninguno,  not  any,  none,  no. 


Nunca,  never. 
i  Porque  ?  why  ? 
Porque,  because. 
i  Sabe  V.  1  do  you 

know  ? 

Yo  se,  I  know. 
Sin,  without. 
Todavia,  yet. 
Vendo,  I  sell. 


Exercise  13* 

1.  l  Tiene  V.  dinero  hoy  ?  2.  Tengo  dinero,  pero  no  tengo  pan  en 
la  casa.  3.  [  Esta  raalo  el  muchacho  ?  4.  No  esta  malo  boy,  esta 
muy  bueno.  5.  [  Esta  aqui  el  panadero  ?  6.  El  panadero  no  esta 
aqui,  pero  el  carnicero  esta  aqui.  7.  j  Es  Y.  el  amigo  de  Carlos  1 
8.  No,  senor,  soy  el  amigo  de  Enrique.  9.  j,  Quiere  V.  un  pedazo  de 
pan  con  queso  ?  10.  Quiero  pan,  pero  sin  queso.  11.  i  Quiere  V.  el 
dinero  ?  12.  Todavia  no.  13.  [  Donde  esta  Juan  1  14.  No  esta  aqui, 
esta  abajo.  15.  i  No  esta  la  casa  del  general  en  la  calle  de  Madrid  1 
16.  El  general  no  tiene  casa  aqui.  17.  (,  Quiere  V.  esto  6  aquello  1 
18.  Quiero  esto,  pero  no  aquello.  19.  [  Tienen  pan  los  muchachos  ? 
20.  Tienen  pan,  pero  no  tienen  carne.  21.  £  No  tiene  V.  oro  ?  22.  No 
tengo  oro,  pero  tengo  plata.  23.  i  Porque  no  esta  V.  en  el  jardin 
con  los  muchachos  1  24.  Porque  no  quiero.  25.  £  Es  rico  el  medico  ] 
26.  No  es  rico,  pero  tiene  una  casa  en  Nueva  York.  27.  [Porque' 
no  tiene  V.  luz  en  el  cuarto  ?  28.  Porque  no  tengo  aceite  para 
mi  lampara.  29.  [  Compra  V.  vino  6  cerveza  ?  30.  No  compro  ni 
vino  ni  cerveza ;  no  compro  nada.  31.  Nunca  sabe  V.  la  leccion. 
32.  i  Tiene  alguno  mi  libro  ?  33.  Nadie  tiene  el  libro. 

Exercise  14. 

1.  Have  you  a  silk  umbrella?  2.  I  have  two  umbrellas,  but  not 
of  silk.  3.  Are  you  a  physician  ?  4.  No,  sir,  I  am  a  merchant. 
5.  Have  you  not  a  store  in  Broadway  ?  6.  No,  sir,  my  store  is  not  in 
Broadway.  7.  Are  you  not  ready  ?  8.  No,  sir,  not  yet.  9.  The 
Frenchman  and  the  Englishman  are  not  friends.  10.  Have  the  sol- 
diers any  guns?  11.  They  have  no  guns,  but  they  have  sabers. 


THE   NEGATIVE.  51 

12.  The  wine  is  not  good  ;  do  you  know  why  ?  13.  I  don't  know 
why.  14.  Have  you  a  theater  in  the  city  1  15.  We  have  no  theater  yet. 
16.  Who  is  in  the  garden  ]  17.  Nobody  is  in  the  garden.  18.  Have 
you  anything  for  my  brother  }  19.  I  have  nothing  to-day.  20.  Has 
John  any  friends  1  21.  He  has  neither  friends  nor  money.  22.  Do 
you  know  the  lesson  to-day  ]  23.  Nobody  knows  the  lesson. 
24.  Why  not  ?  25.  Because  we  are  sick.  26.  Are  the  boys  in  the 
room  1  27.  The  boys  are  not  in  the  room,  but  the  girls  are  there. 
28.  What  do  you  sell  to  Henry  1  29.  I  don't  sell  anything  to  any- 
body. 30.  The  trees  of  the  garden  are  not  green.  31.  Is  Charles 
with  any  one  in  the  room  ]  32.  No,  sir,  with  no  one. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  In  negative  sentences,  no  is  placed  before  the  verb : 

Yo  no  tengo,  1  have  not. 

i  No  quiere  el  ?  Does  he  not  wish  ? 

l  No  han  llegado  ?  Have  they  not  arrived? 

El  no  quiere,  He  does  not  wish. 

2.  The  Spaniards  use  a  double  negative  to  render  the  nega- 
tion stronger: 

No  quiero  nada,  I  wish  for  nothing.     I  don't  wish  anything. 

No  tengo  ninguno,         /  have  none. 

No  le  hablo  nunca,         /  never  speak  to  him. 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  adverb  no  is,  however,  omitted  when  we  place 
another  negative  before  the  verb,  or  when  the  verb  is  not  expressed  (a 
literary  construction)  : 

Nada  quiero.  Ninguno  tengo.  Nadie. 

3*  Jamas  and  nunca  have  the  same  meaning  in  the  nega- 
tive, and  are  generally  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence, 
without  the  adverb  no : 

Jamas  vi  tal  cosa  or  nunca  vi  tal  cosa,         I  never  saw  such  a  thing. 

4,  Jamas  is  often  used  with  siempre,  ever,  and  nunca,  never, 
io  strengthen  them : 


52  LESSON   7. 

Nunca  jamas  lo  dire,  /  shall  never  tell  it. 

For  siempre  jamas   me    acordare        1  shall  remember  him  for  ever  and 
de  el,  ever. 

NOTE.  —  Jamas,  when  not  accompanied  by  no,  and  not  at  the  beginning 
of  the  sentence,  means  ever  : 

i  Ha  visto  V.  jamas  tal  cosa  ?        Have  you  ever  seen  such  a  thing  ? 

5.  Nadie,  no  one,  and  nada,  nothing,  are  used  with  the  nega- 
tive meaning  either  before  the  verb,  after  it  in  combination  with 
no,  or  when  used  alone  : 

Nadie  veo,  I  see  no  one.    I  don't  see  anybody. 

i  No  ve  V.  nada  ?  Do  you  see  nothing  ?  Don't  you  see  anything. 

Nada,  Nothing. 

NOTE.  —  Nadie,  nada,  jamas  (also  ninguno  and  nunca)  are  used  in  the 
positive  sense  after  verbs  when  a  negative  idea  is  implied  : 

j  Ha  visto  V.  nada  ?          Did  you  see  anything  ? 
\  Yo  hablar  a  nadie  !         1  speak  to  anybody  ! 
Sin  ver  a  nadie,  Without  seeing  anybody. 

6.  Although  no  is  used  to  form  the  negative,  it  is  sometimes 
used  redundantly  in  positive  sentences :       * 

Mejor  es  el  trabajo  que  no  la  ociosidad,       Labor  is  preferable  to  idleness. 
No  partire  hasta  que  no  llegue  V.  1  shall  not  leave  until  you  come. 

7 1  Ninguno  (ninguna,  ningunos,  ningunas)  may  be  used 
alone,  or  with  a  noun.  In  the  former  case  it  means  none,  no 
one,  etc.,  in  the  latter,  no  (not  any). 

No  tengo  ninguno,  ,          I}Mven<t 

Ninguno  tengo,  ) 

0  (          Have  you  no  book  ? 

i  No  tiene  V.  ningun  hbro  ?  ^  _         ,.  _     _  a 

(          Have  n  t  you  any  book  ? 

OBSERVATION.  —  When  a  noun  is  expressed,  ninguno  may  be  omitted : 

No  tengo  dinero,         /  have  n't  any  money. 
No  tiene  libros,  He  has  n't  any  books. 

NOTE.  —  Ninguno  drops  the  last  letter  before  a  masculine  singular 
noun. 

No  quiere  ningun  dinero,         He  does  n't  want  any  money. 


ADJECTIVES.      FORMATION   OF   THE    FEMININE.  53 

8.  No,  connected  with  a  pronoun,  an  adverb,  and  even  with 
other  parts  of  speech,  is  generally  placed  last,  when  used  with- 
out a  verb : 

Yo  no,  not  7.  A  si  no,  not  so. 

Eso  no,  not  that.  Todavia  no,  not  yet. 

Hoy  no,  not  to-day. 

9.  Algnno  (alguna,  algunos,  algunas),  meaning  some,  any, 
some  one,  any  one,  somebody,  anybody,  drops  the  last  letter  (like 
ningnno)1  before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  singular,  and  may 
either  come  in  the  sentence  or  be  omitted : 

Tiene  V.  algun  dinero  ?  or  ) 

i  Tiene  V.  dinero  ?  Ham  y™  any  mmey? 

OBSERVATION. — The  student  should  be  careful  never  to  translate  not 
anything  by  no  algot  nor  not  anybody  by  no  alguno,  —  a  mistake  wnich 
is  very  common  among  beginners.  Nada,  nadie,  or  ninguno  must  be  used 
in  these  cases. 


Leccion  VIII.  Lesson  VIII. 

ADJECTIVES.       FORMATION   OF   THE   FEMININE. 

EjernploB.  Examples. 

El  muchacho  es  bueno.  The  boy  is  good. 

La  muchaeha  es  bueua.  The  girl  is  good. 

£1  caballo  es  hermoso.  The  horse  is  fine. 

La  casa  es  hermosa.  The  house  is  fine. 

El  hijo  es  feo.  The  son  is  ugly. 

La  hija  es  bonita.  The  daughter  is  pretty. 

El  caballero  es  Frances.  The  gentleman  is  French. 

La  senora  es  Inglesa.  The  lady  is  English. 

ttonio  es  holgazan.  S  Anthony  is  lazy. 

Cristina  es  holgazana.  Christina  is  lazy. 

Jose  es  trabajador.  Joseph  is  industrious. 

Juana  es  trabajadora.  Jane  is  industrious. 

1  Ningun  and  algun  then  require  the  written  accent  as  the  stress  falls 
on  the  last  syllable. 


54 


LESSON  8. 


El  padre  es  grave. 
La  mad  re  es  alegre. 
El  aziicar  es  dulce. 
La  yerba  es  verde. 

El  trabajo  es  facil. 
La  flor  es  azul. 
Fernando  es  joven. 
Julia  es  cortes. 


The  father  is  grave. 
The  mother  is  lively,, 
The  sugar  is  sweet. 
The  grass  is  green. 

The  work  is  easy. 
The  flower  is  blue. 
Ferdinand  is  young. 
Julia  is  polite. 


Agreement  of  Adjectives. 

l  Es  Guillermo  bueno  6  malo  ?  Is  William  good  or  bad  ? 

Is  Isabel  good  or  bad  ? 
The  uncle  and  the  father  are  old. 
The  aunt  and  the  mother  are  old. 


i  Es  Isabel  buena  6  mala  ? 
El  tio  y  el  padre  son  viejos. 
La  tia  y  la  madre  son  viejas. 
El  tio  y  la  tia  son  ricos. 


The  uncle  and  aunt  are  rich. 


El  pobre. 

El  pobre  viejo. 

La  pobre  vieja. 

Un  ciego.  —  Una  ciega. 

El  sabio  es  prudente. 


Adjectives  used  Substantively. 

The  poor  man. 

The  poor  old  man. 

The  poor  old  woman. 

A  blind  man.  —  A  blind  woman. 

The  wise  man  is  prudent. 


El  grande.  —  La  grande. 


The  large  one  (masc.).  —  The  large  one  (fern.). 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  cafe,  the  coffee. 

El  conde,  the  count. 

El  criado,  the  servant,  m. 

El  primo,  the  cousin,  m. 

El  rey,  the  king. 

El  te,  the  tea. 

El  trabajo,  the  work. 

El  traje,  the  dress. 

La  condesa,  the  countess. 

La  criada,  the  servant  girl. 

La  isla,  the  island. 

La  legumbre,  the  vegetable. 


La  mujer,  the  woman,  wife. 
La  prima,  the  cousin,  f. 
La  reina,  the  queen. 
La  torre,  the  tower. 
Agradable,  agreeable. 
Alegre,  lively. 
Aleman,  German. 
Alto,  high,  tall. 
Bonito,  pretty. 
Ciego,  blind. 
Dificil,  difficult. 
Enfermo,  sick,  ill. 


Facil,  easy. 
Feliz,  happy. 
Feo,  ugly,  homely. 
Fiel,  faithful. 
Infeliz,  unhappy. 
Orgulloso,  proud. 
Sabio,  wise. 
Sordo,  deaf. 
Timido,  timid. 
Valiente,  brave. 
Viejo,  old. 
Touto,  stupid. 


Exercise  15. 

1.  El  hijo  de  Juan  es  muy  tonto.     2.   Las  dos  hijas  del  panadero 
son  muy  bonitas.    3.  El  padre  del  comerciante  es  todavia  muy  joven. 


ADJECTIVES.      FORMATION    OF   THE    FEMININE.  55 

4.  Los  soldados  del  principe  son  muy  valientes.  5.  Mi  leccion  es 
muy  dificil.  6.  El  primo  y  la  priraa  son  feos.  7.  La  mujer  (wife) 
de  Pedro  es  sorda.  8.  El  pobre  vie  jo  esta  malo.  9.  i  Que  pedazo 
quiere  V.  ?  —  Qiriero  el  grande.  10.  Las  dos  senoras  son  Alemanas. 
11.  Los  caballos  de  mi  tio  son  negros.  12.  La  torre  es  muy  alta. 
13.  El  conde  es  orgulloso,  pero  la  condesa  es  muy  ainable.  14.  El  her- 
mano  de  Luisa  es  muy  feliz.  15.  Las  dos  muchachas  son  hermanas. 
16.  i  Cuantos  criados  tierie  V.  ?  17.  Tengo  dos  criados  y  tres  criadas. 
18.  Mi  hermana  tiene  un  hermoso  traje  de  seda.  19.  El  rey  de  la 
isla  es  viejo,  pero  la  reina  es  joven.  20.  El  general  tiene  una  her- 
mosa  casa  en  el  campo.  21.  i  Es  bueno  el  cafe  1  22.  El  cafe  es  bueno, 
pero  el  te  es  malo.  23.  [  Que  vende  la  mujer  1  24.  Vende  buenas 
manzanas.  25.  j  Porque  esta  V.  triste  1  26.  Porque  mi  padre  esta 
enfermo.  27.  La  ciudad  es  pequena,  pero  muy  agradable.  28.  El 
perro  es  fiel.  29.  [  Estaii  VV.  contentas,  senoras  ?  30.  Estamoa  muy 
contentas  ahora.  31.  Las  cerezas  no  son  dulces. 


Exercise  16* 

1.  Are  the  horses  good  1  2.  They  are  good,  but  small.  3.  Have 
you  (plur.)  flowers  in  the  two  gardens  ?  4.  We  have  flowers  in  the 
little  one,  and  vegetables  in  the  large  one.  5.  Why  are  you  so  sad, 
madam  ?  6.  Because  the  children  are  sick.  7.  The  French  women 
are  lively  and  amiable.  8.  The  houses  of  New  York  are  high. 
9.  The  English  women  are  handsome.  10.  The  general's  sister  is 
happy,  but  his  (su)  brother  is  unhappy.  11.  The  father,  mother,  and 
children  are  sick.  12.  The  houses  of  the  city  are  large.  13.  Are 
the  two  ladies  American  1  14.  No,  sir,  they  are  German.  15.  Is  the 
woman  blind  1  16.  She  is  deaf.  17.  Is  the  baker's  daughter  pretty  1 
18.  She  is  very  homely,  but  very  amiable.  19.  My  work  is  easy,  but 
my  brother's  work  is  very  difficult.  20.  Louisa  and  Mary  are  cousins. 
21.  Mary  is  very  lively,  but  Louisa  is  very  timid.  22.  Charles's 
father  is  wise  and  prudent.  23.  Henry's  brother  is  very  rich,  but  he 
is  not  proud.  24.  Julia  and  Mary  are  the  good  friends  of  my  sister. 
25.  Have  you  (plur.)  wine  in  the  house  ?  26.  We  have  no  wine,  but 
we  have  very  good  beer. 


56  LESSON  8. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Adjectives  agree  in  Spanish,  as  in  almost  all  other  lan- 
guages, in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  which  they 
qualify. 

Adjectives  ending  in  o  form  their  feminine  by  changing  o 
into  a,  as : 

Bueno  (m.)t  buena  (/.),  good  ;         Malo  (m.),  mala  (/.),  bad; 
Alto  (m.),  alta  (/.),  high;  etc. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  nouns  having  a  feminine : 

Tin  panadero,  a  baker  ;  una  pauadera,  a  (female)  baker,  or  a  baker's  wife. 

Uu  criado,  a  (male)  servant;  una  criada,  a  (female)  servant. 

Un  tio,  an  uncle ;  una  tia,  an  aunt. 

Mi  primo,  my  (male]  cousin  ;  mi  prima,  my  (female)  cousin. 

Mi  hermano,  my  brother  ;  mi  hermana,  my  sister. 

Un  viudo,    a  widower  ;  una  viuda,  a  ividow. 

Un  cocinero,  a  (male)  cook ;  una  cocinera,  a  (female)  cook. 

OBSERVATIONS.  —  Augmentatives  and  diminutives  ending  in  ete  or  ote 
also  change  the  last  letter  into  a  for  the  feminine  : 

Regordete  (m. ),  regordeta  (/. ),  small  and  stout ; 
Altote  (m.),  altota  (/.),  very  tall ;  etc. 

2,    Adjectives  ending  in  -an  and  -on  add  an  a  for  the  feminine : 
Holgazan,  m.,idle;  holgazana, /.  Har6n,  m.,  lazy;  harona,/. 

EXCEPTIONS. — Kuin,  contemptible;  comiin,  common;  and  all  adjectives 
ending  in  en,  as  joven,  young  ;  remain  unchanged. 

3*  Adjectives  referring  to  the  nationality  and  ending  with  a 
consonant  add  a  for  the  feminine : 


Frances,  m., 

French  ; 

francesa,  /. 

Ingles,  m., 

English  ; 

inglesa,  /. 

Aleman,  m., 

German; 

alemana,  /. 

Irlandes,  m., 

Irish  ; 

irlandesa,  /. 

Espanol,  m., 

Spanish  ; 

espanola,  /. 

NOTE.  —  Among  the  adjectives  of  this  last  class,  some  are  found  that 
terminate  in  a,  and  do  not  undergo  any  change  in  the  feminine,  as  persa, 
Persian;  moscovita,  Muscovite;  etc. 


ADJECTIVES.      FORMATION   OF   THE   FEMININE.  57 

4*    Adjectives  ending  in  or  also  add  a  for  the  feminine : 

Trabajador,  m.,  industrious,  diligent;        trabajadora, /. 
Traidor,  m.,        treacherous;  traidora, /. 

NOTE.  —  Comparatives  in  or  do  not  change :  la  mayor  parte,  the  greater 
part.  La  puerta  interior,  the  inner  door. 

5.  Those  adjectives  which  end  in  the  masculine  with  any 
other  letter  do  not  change  in  the  feminine  : 

Un  hombre  cortes,  a  polite  man  ;  una  mujer  cortes,  a  polite  woman. 
Un  hombre  grave,  a  grave  man  ;  una  materia  grave,  a  grave  matter. 
El  trabajo  es  facil,  the  work  is  easy  ;  la  cosa  es  facil,  the  thing  is  easy. 

6.  When  an  adjective  relates  to  two  or  more  nouns  in  the 
singular,  it  must  be  put  in  the  plural : 

El  padre  y  el  hijo  son  buenos,         The  father  and  son  are  good. 

7.  An  adjective  qualifying  two  or  more  nouns  of  different 
genders  is  put  in  the  masculine  plural : 

El  padre  y  la  madre  son  ricos,        The  father  and  mother  are  rich. 

OBSERVATION.  —  When,  however,  the  adjective  stands  near  a  feminine 
noun  in  the  plural  it  must  agree  with  the  feminine  noun,  but  such  con- 
structions must  be  avoided  as  much  as  possible,  and  it  is  preferable  to 
qualify  each  noun  by  an  adjective  having  a  corresponding  meaning,  or 
select  an  adjective  having  but  one  termination  for  both  genders  : 

Los  caudales  y  la  hacienda  eran  The  capital  and  the  property  were 
grandes,  large. 

El  general  tiene  un  valor  mara-  The  general  has  (a)  wonderful  brav- 
villoso  y  una  constancia  por-  ery  and  persistence  (is  wonder  - 

tentosa,  fully  brave  and  persistent). 

8.  Adjectives  are  often  used  substantively  either  in  the  sin- 
gular or  plural : 

El  bueno  y  el  malo,  The  good  and  the  bad  one. 

Los  ricos  y  los  pobres,  The  rich  and  the  poor. 


LESSON   9. 


Leccion  IX. 


Lesson  IX. 


PLACE    OF   ADJECTIVES. 


Ejemplos. 


Examples. 


Adjectives  preceding  the  Noun. 

Mateo  es  un  buen  muchacho. 

Carolina  es  una  herinosa  muchacha. 

j  Que  ex  eel  en  te  vino  ! 

i  Donde  esta  la  joven  Agata  ? 

Tengo  un  bonito  libro. 

El  pulpero  tiene  dulce  miel. 

Mi  aniigo  tiene  un  gran  caballo. 

Domingo  es  mi  grande  amigo. 


Matthew  is  a  good  boy. 
Caroline  is  a  handsome  girl. 
What  an  excellent  wine  ! 
Where  is  young  Agatha  ? 
I  have  a  pretty  book. 
The  grocer  has  sweet  honey. 
My  friend  has  a  famous  horse,  m. 
Dominic  is  my  great  (good)  friend. 


Adjectives  following  the  Noun. 


Tcnemos  un  caballo  bianco. 

Tengo  un  libro  frances. 

Aprendo  la  lengua  espanola. 

Tengo  una  mesa  redonda. 

El  juez  es  un  hombre  justo. 

Vivo  en  la  calle  nueva. 

Pedro  es  un  hombre  viejo. 

Octavio  es  un  muchacho  feo. 

El  comerciante  es  un  hombre  muy  rico. 


Vocabulario. 

El  animal,  the  animal. 

El  buque,  the  ship,  the  vessel. 

El  capitan,  the  captain. 

El  discipulo,  thet  pupil. 

El  oficial,  the  officer. 

El  pano,  the  cloth. 

El  puerto,  the  port. 

El  rio,  the  river. 

El  sastre,  the  tailor. 

El  tomo,  the  volume. 

La  escuela,  the  school. 


We  have  a  white  horse. 

I  have  a  French  book. 

I  learn  the  Spanish  language. 

I  have  a  round  table. 

The  judge  is  a  just  man. 

I  live  in  the  new  street. 

Peter  is  an  old  man. 

Octavius  is  a  homely  boy. 

The  merchant  is  a  very  rich  man. 

Vocabulary. 


Blanco,  white. 

Buenos  dias,  good  morning,  good  day. 

Colorado,  red. 

Dichoso,  happy. 

Era,  was. 

Excelente,  excellent. 

Espanol,  Spanish,  Spaniard. 

Inglaterra,  England. 

Inteligente,  intelligent. 

Misrao,  same. 

Obediente,  obedient. 


PLACE  OF  ADJECTIVES.  59 


La  historia,  the  history. 
La  rosa,  the  rose. 
La  vaca,  the  cow. 
Azul,  blue. 


Primero,  first. 
Huso,  Russian. 
Si,  if. 
TJtil,  useful. 


0,  or. 

Exercise  17. 

1.  [  Tienen  ustedes  una  vaca  ?  2.  Si,  tenemos  una  vaca  negra  y 
blanca.  3.  El  perro  es  un  animal  fiel  y  util.  4.  Don  Juan,  es  un 
hombre  muy  amable.  5.  Los  dos  niiios  estan  enfermos,  la  pobre 
madre  esta  muy  triste.  6.  La  seiiora  con  el  traje  negro  es  la  hermana 
del  oficial  ingles.  7.  j,  Quiere  V.  pan  bianco  6  pan  negro  1  8.  No  qui- 
ero  pan.  9.  El  hijo  del  general  es  un  joven  inteligente.  10.  [  Sabe 
V.  si  el  comerciante  tierie  pafio  azul  ?  11.  El  no  tiene  paiio  azul, 
pero  tiene  excelente  paiio  negro.  12.  [  Tiene  V.  el  primer  tomo  cle  la 
Historia  de  Inglaterra  ?  13.  Tengo  los  dos  primeros  tomos.  14.  El 
hermano  de  Maria  es  muy  rico,  tiene  dos  casas  grandes  y  hermosas 
en  la  calle  nueva.  15.  i  Donde  esta  el  buque  ruso  ?  16.  Esta  en 
el  puerto  nuevo.  17.  [Buenos  dias,  senora,  donde  esta  la  criada? 
18.  Esta  en  el  cuarto  grande.  19.  \.  Quien  es  el  primer  discipulo  de 
la  escuela]  20.  Yo  no  se  quien  es  el  primero.  21.  El  sastre  tiene 
un  hijo  ciego.  22.  El  capitan  es  un  buen  soldado.  23.  El  padre  de 
Enrique  es  dichoso,  porque  tiene  un  hijo  obediente.  24.  Napoleon 
era  un  gran  general.  25.  i  Donde  esta  el  Rio  Colorado  ?  26.  Yo 
no  se. 

Exercise  18. 

1.  The  English  drink  (beben)  beer,  good  wine,  and  excellent  tea. 
2.  We  have  good  friends  in  the  city.  3.  Mary's  mother  is  already  an 
old  woman.  4.  The  general  is  a  prudent  soldier.  5.  The  two  Eng- 
lish captains  have  large  ships.  6.  We  have  white  roses  in  the  gar- 
den. 7.  The  children  are  sick  because  they  eat  (comeri)  green  apples. 
8.  Louisa's  mother  is  an  unhappy  woman.  9.  The  butcher  has  good 
meat  to-day.  10.  Have  you  French  or  English  money?  11.  We 
have  neither  French  nor  English  money,  we  have  American  gold. 
12.  The  lesson  of  to-day  is  a  difficult  lesson.  13.  Paris  is  a  large  city. 

14.  The  count  is  a  proud  man,  but  the  countess  is  an  amiable  lady. 

15.  The  island  of  Cuba  is  a  fine  island.     16.     Do  you  sell  French 
wines  ?     17.  I  sell  French  and  Spanish  wines.     18.  My  uncle  has  a 
fine  estate  in  Cuba.     19.  The  sons  and  daughters  of  the  merchant  are 


60  LESSON   9. 

small.  20.  Who  is  the  tall  gentleman  in  the  garden  1  21.  The  gen- 
tleman with  the  white  hat  is  my  uncle.  22.  Are  you  the  brother  of 
the  Russian  captain  ?  23.  No,  sir,  I  am  the  cousin  of  the  Q-erman 
captain.  24.  Has  the  captain  a  new  ship  ?  25.  No,  sir,  he  has  the 
same  old  ship. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Adjectives  in  Spanish,  as  in  French,  are  placed  either 
before  the  noun  which  they  qualify,  or  after  it ;  but  not  in  such 
a  way  as  to  leave  their  position  to  the  discretion  of  the  speaker 
or  writer.  Their  normal  position  is  after  the  noun,  but  this  may 
be  modified  by  usage  or  euphony.  Therefore  no  absolute  rules 
can  be  given.  As  a  matter  of  euphony  it  will  be  noticed  that  a 
long  adjective  often  follows  a  short  noun,  and  a  short  adjective 
precedes  a  long  noun  : 

El  orden  admirable,  The  wonderful  arrangement. 

La  rancia  ensenauza,  The  out-of-date  instruction. 

The  following  rules  may,  however,  be  followed  in  most  cases. 
2»    Adjectives  generally  placed  before  the  noun  are  : 

1.  The  numeral  adjectives  when  accompanied  by  the  article  : 
El  primer  toino,  the  first  volume.         La  tercera  casa,  the  third  house. 

2.  Adjectives  expressing  a  quality  pertaining  to  the  very 
nature  of  the  noun  which  they  qualify: 

Tin  poderoso  emperador,  A  powerful  emperor. 

Un  rico  banquero,  A  rich  banker. 

Dulce  miel,  Sweet  honey. 

Amarga  adelfa,  Bitter  oleander. 

NOTE.  —  Should  we  say  miel  dulce,  adelfa  amarga,  it  might  imply  that 
there  exist  honey  and  oleander  of  a  different  taste. 

3.  Adjectives  when  used  figuratively  : 

Tin  delicioso  viaje,         A  delightful  journey. 
Una  negra  acci6n,         A  dark  deed. 


PLACE    OF   ADJECTIVES.  61 

4.    Adjectives  used  emphatically  or  in  exclamatory  sentences : 
j  Admirable  accion  !         Admirable  action  ! 

3*    In  most  other  cases  adjectives  are  placed  after  the  noun. 
They  are  more  specially  so : 

1.  When  the  adjective  denotes  color,  nationality,  shape,  and 
taste  : 

Un  caballo  bianco,  a  white  horse.         Un  libro  ingles,  an  English  book. 
Una  mesa  redonda,  a  round  table.         Vino  agrio,  sour  wine. 

2.  When  the  adjective  has  the  form  of  the  past  participle  of 
a  verb  : 

Una  ventana  cerrada,         A  dosed  window. 
Una  puerta  abierta,  An  open  door. 

3.  When  the  adjective  may  be  used  substaritively : 

Un  hombre  justo,  )       .  Un  hombre  malvado, )    , 

TT    .    <  \  A  just  man.  >\A  wicked  man. 

Un  justo,  )  Un  malvado,  ) 

4.  When  the  adjective  does  not  express  a  special  or  essential 
property  pertaining  to  the  noun : 

Una  calle  ancha,  A  "broad  street. 

Un  hombre  feo,  An  ugly  man. 

Una  casa  vieja,  An  old  house. 

5.  When  two  or  more  adjectives  qualify  the  same  noun,  it  is 
preferable  to  place  them  after  the  noun  : 

Es  un  hombre  sabio,  justo  y  pode-         He  is  a  wise,  just,   and  powerful 
roso,  man. 

4.  Certain  adjectives  have  different  meanings  according  to 
their  place  before  or  after  the  noun  : 

Una  cierta  cosa,  A  certain  thing. 

Una  cosa  cierta,  A  sure  thing. 

Un  pobre  hombre,  A  poor  man  (poor  in  wits). 

Un  hombre  pobre,  A  poor  man  (poor  in  money).  x\ 

5,  The  Spaniards  use  the  same  word  to  designate  Englishman 
and  English,  Frenchman  and  French,   Spaniard  and  Spanish, 


62  LESSON   9. 

etc. ;  but  they  write  the  word  with  a  capital  letter  when  used 
substantively,  and  with  a  small  letter  in  other  cases : 

Un  Espanol,  a  Spaniard;         un  libro  espanol,  a  Spanish  book. 
Un  Ingles,  an  Englishman  ;    un  buque  ingles,  an  English  ship. 

6.  The  Spaniards  use  instead  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.,  Don,  m.,  and 
Dona,/.,  before  Christian  names,  and  el  Senor,  m.,  la  Senora,/., 

before  family  names : 

Don  Juan,  Mr.  John.  El  Sehor  Hernandez,  Mr.  Hernandez. 

Dona  Maria,  Mrs.  Mary.          La  Senora  Smith,  Mrs.  Smith. 
El  Sr-  !>•  Carlos  Marty,  Mr.  Charles  Marty. 

REMARKS  ON  CERTAIN  ADJECTIVES.  —  1.  Alguno,  any  one,  anybody, 
some  one,  somebody ;  bueno,  good ;  malo,  bad,  ill ;  ninguno,  none,  no  one, 
nobody ;  postrero,  last;  primero,  first;  tercero,  third;  uno,  a,  an,  one} 
drop  the  o  before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  singular  : 

Buen  amo,  good  master.        El  primer  hombre,  the  first  man. 
Ningiin  libro,  no  book.  Un  habil  medico,  a  skillful  physician  ;  etc. 

But  if  they  come  after  the  noun  they  preserve  the  o  : 

Un  hombre  malo,  a  bad  man.         Libro  tercero,  third  book  ;  etc. 

The  o  is  also  preserved  whenever  the  noun  referring  to  the  adjective  is 
not  expressed  : 

Es  bueno,  He  is  good. 

El  primero  de  todos,  The  first  of  all. 

Uno  de  estos  senores,          One  of  these  gentlemen  ;  etc. 

2.  Santo,  saint,  drops  the  last  syllable  before  proper  names  of  saints  : 
San  Pedro,  St.  Peter ;         San  Juan,  St.  John  ;  etc. 

OBSERVATION.  —  If  the  name  of  the  saint  begins  with  To  or  Do,  the  full 
form  is  used  : 

Santo  Domingo,  St.  Dominic  ;        Santo  Tomas,  St.  Thomas. 

However,  when  speaking  of  the  island  of  St.  Thomas,  we  say,  la  isla  de 
San  Tomas. 


DIMINUTIVE    AND   AUGMENTATIVE   NOUNS. 


63 


3.  Grande  drops  the  last  syllable  before  a  noun  beginning  with  a 
consonant,  whenever  it  means  great  in  merit  or  qualities,  celebrated  or 
famous  : 

Una  gran  mujer,         A  distinguished  woman. 

Un  gran  poeta,  A  great  poet. 

Un  gran  caballo,         An  excellent  or  famous  horse. 

NOTE.  —  If  the  noun  begins  with  a  vowel  or  an  h,  grande  or  gran  may 
be  used  indiscriminately. 

Grande  preserves  the  last  syllable  if  it  only  expresses  extent  or  dimension, 
and  is  then  placed  preferably  after  the  noun  : 

Un  campo  grande,  a  large  field. 

The  large  theater  in  Bordeaux  is  a 


Una  casa  grande,  a  large  house. 
El  teatro  grande  de  Burdeos  es 


un  gran  teatro, 


splendid  theater. 


Leccion  X. 


Lesson  X. 


DIMINUTIVE    AND   AUGMENTATIVE   NOUNS. 


Ejemplos. 

Juanito  tiene  un  perrito. 

i  Que  bonita  casita  ! 

I  Donde  esta  mi  hermanita  ? 

Esta  con  la  mujercita. 

El  caballito  de  mi  hermanito  es  un 
bonito  animalito. 

Dos  lamparitas  ardian  en  el  cuar- 
tito. 

Hay  pececitos  en  el  rio. 

El  pobrecito  esta  malo. 

El  hombrecillo  quiere  dinero. 

Yo  no  quiero  ese  perrillo. 

Mi  mesa  es  muy  chiquita. 

Tenemos  un  jardincito  en  el  cam- 
po. 

£1  senorito    y  la    senorita    estan 
aqui. 

Enrique   es   un  muchachon  y  su 
padre  un  hombronazo. 

La  hermana  de  Pedro  es  una  mu-  ) 
jerona.  \ 


Examples. 

Johnny  has  a  little  dog. 

What  a  pretty  little  house  ! 

Where  is  my  little  sister  ? 

She  is  with  the  little  woman. 

My  little  brother's  little  horse  is  a 
pretty  little  animal. 

Two  small  lamps  were  burning  in  the 
little  room. 

There  are  little  fishes  in  the  river. 

The  poor  little  fellow  is  sick. 

The  miserable  little  man  wants  money, 

I  don't  wish  that  ugly  little  dog. 

My  table  is  very  small. 

We  have  a  little  garden  in  the  coun- 
try. 

The  young  gentleman  and  the  young 
lady  are  here. 

Henry  is  a  big  fat  boy  and  his  father 
a  big  strong  man. 

Peter's  sister  is  a  big  stout  woman. 


64 


LESSON   10. 


Vocabulario. 

El  autor,  the  author. 

El  bastonazo,  the  blow  (with  a  stick), 

El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 

El  Iadr6n,  the  thief. 

El  pajaro,  the  bird. 

El  patio,  the  yard. 

El  picaro,  the  rogue. 

El  pueblo,  the  town,  village. 

El  ricachon,  the  very  rich  man. 

El  talento,  the  talent. 

Los  contornos,  the  suburbs. 

La  boca,  the  mouth. 

La  callejuela,  the  lane. 

La  cara,  the  face. 

La  cruz,  the  cross. 


Vocabulary. 

La  especulacion,  the  speculation. 

La  flor,  the  flower. 

La  legua,  the  league. 

La  mano,  the  hand. 

Lapelea,  the  fight. 

La  pieza,  the  piece. 

La  punalada,  the  stab  (with  a  poniard) 

Aqui,  here. 

Arriba,  upstairs. 

Chiquito,  little. 

Ignorante,  ignorant, 

Solo,  alone. 

Su, -his,  her. 

Todo,  all. 

Vive,  lives. 


Exercise  19. 

1.  La  hermanita  de  Carlos  esta  mala.  2.  [  Que  tiene  el  muchacbito  ? 
3.  El  no  tiene  nada.  4.  El  comerciante  tiene  una  casita  de  campo  en 
los  contornos  de  la  ciudad.  5.  [  Donde  esta  Juanito  ?  6.  Esta  en  el 
jardin  con  su  amiguito.  7.  [  Donde  estan  las  dos  senoritas  ?  8.  Estan 
en  el  cuartito  arriba.  9.  [  Estaba  Y.  (were  you)  solo  en  el  cuarto  ? 
10.  Si,  sefior,  yo  estaba  (was)  solito.  11.  [  Quien  es  el  hombrecito  ? 
12.  Es  el  hermano  de  Luisita.  13.  Maria  tiene  una  crucecita  de  oro. 
14.  Los  arboles  del  jardin  son  todavia  chiquititos.  15.  El  amigo  de 
Enrique  es  un  picaron.  16.  Y  Enrique  es  un  ladronzuelo.  17.  El 
perro  recibio  (received)  dos  bastonazos.  18.  Mi  amigo  recibio  dos 
punaladas  en  la  pelea.  19.  El  general  es  un  hombrachon.  20.  Los 
dos  jovencitos  son  primos.  21.  Tenemos  tres  pajaritos  en  el  jardin. 
22.  i  Quiere  V.  un  pedazito  de  carne  ?  23.  Si,  senor,  con  mucho 
gusto.  24.  Pedro  vive  en  una  callejuela  de  la  ciudad.  25.  [  Porque 
no  compra  el  ricach6n  una  casa  grande  ?  26.  Porque  tiene  todo  su 
dinero  en  grandes  especulaciones.  27.  La  hermana  del  panadero  es 
una  mujercilla  muy  fea.  28.  Los  pollitos  estan  en  el  patio. 

Exercise  20. 

1.  The  little  boy  and  the  little  girl  are  sick.  2.  The  little  tailor 
is  very  ignorant.  3.  The  brothers  Ramirez  have  two  small  houfees  in 
the  city.  4.  Who  is  in  the  little  garden  1  5.  Louisa  and  myilittle 


DIMINUTIVE   AND   AUGMENTATIVE   NOUNS.  65 

friend.  6.  The  merchant's  sons  have  two  small  horses.  7.  The  little 
child  has  a  pretty  little  face.  8.  There  are  (hay)  many  birds  on  (en) 
the  small  island.  9.  With  whom  were  you  in  Paris  1  10.  With  my 
little  brother.  11.  Charles  has  an  ugly  little  dog.  12.  The  general's 
brother  is  a  very  rich  man.  13.  Little  John  and  little  Louisa  are  in 
the  country  now  (desde)  two  days.  14.  Here  is  a  pretty  little  book 
for  you.  15.  What  a  pretty  little  flower !  16.  Is  Henry  an  author  ? 
17.  Yes,  but  a  miserable  author  without  talent.  18.  Mary  has  a 
pretty  little  mouth  and  pretty  little  hands.  19.  Julia  is  a  pretty 
young  lady.  20.  The  baker  is  a  big  stout  man,  but  his  sister  is  a 
very  small  woman.  21.  My  aunt  has  a  very,  very  small  dog.  22.  The 
banker's  children  are  yet  very  small.  23.  Where  do  you  live  now  ? 
24.  In  a  very  pretty  little  town  not  far  from  here.  25.  Charles  re- 
ceived (recibio)  a  short  letter  from  his  friend.  26.  The  captain  of  the 
small  vessel  is  an  ugly  little  man.  27.  Have  you  a  table  in  your 
room  ?  28.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  very  small  table. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Spanish  language  abounds  in  diminutives  and  aug* 
mentatives. 

2.  The  diminutives  serve  to  decrease  or  soften  the  significa- 
tion of  the  word  from  which  they  are  derived. 

Those  most  in  use  end  in  ico,  illo,  cillo,  ito,  cito,  uelo,  zuelo. 
and  ejo,  for  the  masculine,  as :  hombrecico,  hornbrecillo,  horn- 
brecito,  hombrezuelo,  little  man;  and  in  ica,  ilia,  cilia,  ita, 
cita,  zuela,  eta,  eja,  for  the  feminine,  as :  mujercilla,  mujer- 
cita,  mujercica,  mujerzuela,  little  woman ;  etc. 

1.  Diminutives  ending  in   uelo  always  denote  contempt  or 
irony. 

2.  Diminutives  ending  in  illo  and  cillo  often  express  contempt, 
pity,  or  ugliness  ;  while  those  in  ito  generally  express  ajfectiw 
gentleness,  or  beauty : 

Mujercilla,  Contemptible  little  woman. 

Pobrecillo,  Poor  little  fellow. 

Hijito  mio,  My  dear  little  son. 

Pobrecito,  Poor  good  little  fellow. 

5 


66  LESSON   10. 

NOTE.  —  Some  Spanish  words  have  the  termination  of  the  diminutive, 
without  being  diminutive,  as  : 

Acerico,  needle  cushion.         Anzuelo,  fishhook,  etc. 

3.  The  diminutives  ito,  ita,  may  be  used  with  different  parts 
of  speech  to  give  a  special  expression  to  the  words : 

Vengo  solito,         /  come  quite  alone. 

4.  Diminutives  in  etc,  ejo,  etc.,  are  comparatively  little  used. 

3,  The  augmentative*  serve  to  increase  the  signification  of  th«, 
words  from  which  they  are  derived.     They  end  in  on,  achon, 
azo,  onazo,  or  ote  for  the  masculine ;  and  in  ona,  aza,  onaza,  or 
Ota  for  the  feminine,  as  : 

Hombron,  hombrachon,  hombronazo  (from  hombre,  man),  big,  strong  man. 
Grandon,  grandote,  grandazo,  grandonazo  (from  grande,  large),  very  large. 
Mujerona,  mujeraza,  mujeronaza  (from  mujer,  woman),  large,  strong  woman. 

1.  There  are    many  words,  however,  ending  in  azo,  which 
express   an   action,  motion,  or   result,  and   are,    therefore,   not 
augmentatives : 

Fusil,  rifle,  gun  ;        fusilazo,  a  shot  from  a  rifle. 
Pistola,  pistol ;  pistoletazo,  a  shot  from  a  pistol. 

Canon,  gun;  canonazo,  a  shot  from  a  gun. 

2.  Words  which  express  a  blow  struck  with  a  blunt  instrument 
or  object  also  end  in  azo,  as  bastonazo  or  garrotazo,  blow  with  a 
stick;  while  those  expressing  a  wound  made  by  a  sharp  instru- 
ment or  weapon  end  in  ada,  as : 

Punalada,  stab  with  a  dagger;          lanzada,  a  wound  from  a  lance  ;  etc. 

EXCEPTIONS.  —  Hacha,  ax  ;  machete,  cutlass  ;  and  sable,  saber  ;  form, 
however,  hachazo,  machetazo,  and  sablazo. 

4.  FORMATION   OF  DIMINUTIVES  AND   AUGMENTATIVES.  —  1. 
Words  ending  in  0  or  a  drop  the  last  letter  and  add  ito,  ita; 
ico,  ica ;  illo,  ilia ;  according  to  their  gender : 

Herman-ito,  herman-ico,  herman-illo,  little  brother ;  from  hermano,  brother. 
Cas-ita,  cas-ica.  cas-illa,  little  house;  from  casa,  house. 


DIMINUTIVE   AND   AUGMENTATIVE   NOUNS.  67 

NOTE.  —  Words  ending  in  go  besides  dropping  the  o,  insert  a  u  aftei 
the  g  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  this  letter  : 

Un  amigo,  a  friend  ;        un  amiguito,  a  little  friend. 

Those  ending  in  co  change  the  c  into  qu,  also  to  preserve  the  hard  sound 
»f  the  c  : 

Un  barco,  a  ship  ;        un  barquito,  a  little  ship. 

A  few  words  ending  in  o  and  a,  after  dropping  the  last  letter,  add,  how- 
ever, the  termination  ecico,  ecillo,  etc. : 

Un  huevo,  an  egg ;          un  huevecillo,  a  small  egg. 
Una  mano,  a  hand;        una  manecita,  a  small  hand. 

2.  Monosyllables  ending  with  a  consonant  form  their  dimin- 
utive by  adding  ecito,  ecico,  ecillo,  or  ezuelo : 

Una  flor,  a  flower  ;  una  florecita,  a  little  flower. 

Una  cruz,  a  cross  ;  una  crucecita,  a  little  cross. 

Un  pez,  a  fish  ;  un  pececito,  a  little  fish. 

Un  rey,  a  king  ;  un  reyezuelo,  a  king  (with  a  small  kingdom). 

NOTE.  —  Observe  that  cruz  and  pez  change  the  z  into  c. 

3.  Words  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  with  a  consonant 
form  their  diminutive  by  adding  ito,  ico,  illo,  ejo : 

Un  papel,  apn^er  ;        un  papelito,  a  small  paper. 
Un  reloj,  a  watch;          un  relojito,  a  small  watch. 

4.  Words  of  two  syllables  ending  with  an  e,  arid  those  of 
several  syllables  ending  with  an  n  or  a  z,  add  cito,  cico,  cillo, 
or  zuelo : 

Un  sastre,  a  tailor ;  un  sastrecillo,  a  little  tailor. 

Una  nube,  a  cloud  ;  una  nu  bee  ilia,  a  little  cloud. 

Un  capitan,  a  captain;  un  capitancillo,  a  little  captain. 

Un  autor,  an  author  ;  un  autorzuelo,  an  insignificant  author. 

Una  mujer,  a  woman  ;  una  mujercita,  a  little  woman. 

EXCEPTIONS.  —  Juanito,  from  Juan,  John ;  volcanejo,  from  volca"n,  vol- 
cano ;  and  all  words  ending  in  in,  form  an  exception  to  this  rule,  the 
latter  adding  ito,  etc.  Thus  : 

Jardin,  garden  ;        ruin,  worthless  ; 
Rocin,jade;  seisin,  seraph; 

form  in  the  Diminutive  jardinito,  rocinito,  ruinito,  and  aeraftnito.     Jar 
dincito  is,  however,  often  used. 


68  LESSON   10. 

5.  Diminutives  may  be  yet  decreased  in  the  following  way : 

From  chico,  small :  chiqtiillo  or  clr'^uito,  chiquitillo,  chiquitito,  chiqui- 
tuelo,  chiquitilluelo,  chiquitillito,  chiquirritin,  chiquirritito,  chiquirritillo, 
chiquirrituelo,  etc. 

The  English  would  say  in  such  cases,  very,  very  small. 

Even  augmentatives  may  be  decreased  in  the  same  way : 
Picaron,  big  rogue;        piearonzillo  or  picaronzuelo,  little  rogue ;  etc. 

6.  Many  diminutives  as  well  as  augmentatives  drop  or  pre- 
serve the  letter  i  in  the  diphthong  ie : 

Un  ciego,  a  blind  man;       un  cieguecillo,  or  ceguecillo,  a  little  blind  man* 
Un  diente,  a  tooth  ;  un  dientecillo  or  dentecillo,  a  small  tooth. 

Una  piedra,  a  stone  ;  una  piedrezuela  or  pedrezuela,  a  small  stone. 

7.  Other  words  change  the  diphthong  lie  into  0  or  remain 
unchanged : 

Un  buey,  an  ox;  un  bueyecillo  or  buyecillo,  a  small  ox. 

Un  hueso,  a  bone  ;        un  huesecillo  or  osecillo,  a  small  bone. 

8.  There  are  words  in  Spanish  with  diminutive  and  augmen- 
tative terminations,  which  may  have  been  used  formerly  as  such, 
but  which  at  present  have  a  determined  signification : 

Maton,  bravo,  cutthroat.  Islilla,  side. 

Cegato,  shortsighted.  Peluquin,  wig. 

Espadm,  sword  of  the  state;  etc.,  etc. 

9.  Augmentatives  are  formed  by  adding  the  terminations  given 
in  Rule  2  to  the  word,  when  the  same  ends  with  a  consonant : 

Leon,  lion;        leonazo,  big  lion;  etc. 

When  the  words  end,  however,  with  a  vowel,  the  latter  is 
dropped  before  adding  the  given  termination : 

Gigante,  giant ;        gigantazo,  large  giant. 
Libro,  book  ;  librote,  large  book. 

GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS.  —  The  words  pequeno,  small,  and 
grande,  large,  may  be  used  at  all  times  with  the  noun,  but  in 
many  cases  they  would  not  answer  to  the  genius  of  the  Spanish 
language,  which  would  require  the  diminutive  or  augmentative. 
This  is  specially  the  case  with  the  diminutives. 


ADJECTIVES.     COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.     69 

The  pronunciation  of  diminutives  or  augraentatives  is  gen- 
erally different  from  that  of  the  word  from  which  they  are  de- 
rived, and  the  written  accent  of  the  primitive  word  is  left  out  in 
the  derived  word,  as  : 

jfrbol,  tree  ;  arbolito,  small  tree. 

Pajaro,  bird  ;        pajarito,  small  bird  ;  etc. 

5.    Verb  tener,  to  have. 

The  verb  tener  is  often  rendered  in  English  by  to  be  some- 
thing the  matter  : 

i  Que  tiene  V.  ?  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  nada,         Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 


Leccion  XI.  Lesson  XL 

ADJECTIVES.       COMPARATIVE    AND    SUPERLATIVE    RELATIVE. 

Adjectives  compared  regularly : 
Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 


Hermoso,  m.  )  hand-      mas  hermoso,  )  hand-     el  mas  hermoso,  )  the  hand- 
Hermosa,  f.    )  some;      mas  hermosa,  )  somer ;    lamas  hermosa,  )  somest. 
Prudente,m.  | 
Prudente, 


;e,m.  )         ,       mas  prudente,  )  more       el  masprudente,  |  the  most 
e,  f.    )  ™         '  mas  prudente,  )  prudent ;la  mas  prudente,  )  prudent. 

Rico,  m.         )     .  mas  rico,          )     .  el  mas  rico,          )  the 

_,.       .  \rwh;  ,      .  \rwher;  .        ,      .  ?•    .  , 

Rica,  f.  )  mas  rica,          )  la  mas  rica,          )  richest. 

TJ tiles,  pi.  useful;          masutiles,  more  useful;   losmasiitiles,m.  )  the  most 

las  mas  utiles,  f.   j  useful. 
.Facil,  n.  easy  ;  mas  facil,  easier  ;  lo  mas  facil,  the  easiest  thing. 

Adjectives  compared  irregularly: 

Bueno,  good;  mejor,  better;  optimo,  best. 

Malo,  bad;  peor,  worse;  pesimo,  worst. 

Grande,  great,  large ;    mayor,  greater,  larger;  maximo,  greatest,  largest. 


TO 


LESSON   11. 


Pequeho,  small ;  menor,  less,  smaller ;  minimo,    smallest. 

Bajo,  low;  inferior,  lower;  infimo,  lowest. 

Alto,  high;  superior,  higher";  supremo, 

Adverbs : 


Bien,  well; 
Mai,  bad,  badly  ; 
Poco,  little; 
Mucho,  much; 

mejor,  better; 
peor,  worse; 
men  os,  less; 
mas,  more; 

lo  mejor,  the  best. 
lo  peor,  the  worst. 
lo  nienos,  the  least. 
lo  mas,  the  most. 

Comparative  of  Inferiority : 


the  least  hard. 


Duro,  m.  )  .      _    menos  duro,  )  el  menos  duro,  ) 

.     }  Aard;  >  less  hard;  >  t 

Dura,  f.    )  menos  dura,  )  la  menos  dura,  ) 

Fuertes,  pi.  strong  ;  menos  fuertes,  less  strong;  los  menos  fuertes,  m.  )  the  least 

las  menos  fuertes,  f.   )  strong. 
Bien,  well ;  menos  bien,  less  well ;          lo  menos  bien,  the  least  welL 

menos. ..que...,         less  or  fewer... than... 
No  tan  to,  m...como... 
No  tanta,  /....como... 


not  so  much     no  tantos,  ra....como...  )  not  so  many 
...as...         notantas,/. como...  }       ...as... 


no  tan. ..como...,         not  so. ..as... 


Comparative  of  Equality : 


Tan  to,  m.  ...como 


£  as  much. ..as... 
lanta,  /.....como...  ) 

tan.,  como... 

Cuanto  mas tan  to  mas... 

Cuantos  mas tantos  in  as. . 

Cuanta  mas tanta  mas... 

Cuantas  mas tantas  mas.. 

Cuanto  menos tanto  menos 

Cuanto  mas tanto  menos 


tantos,  m,  ...como...  j 
tantas, /.....como...  ! 
as. ..as....       so  ..as.... 


as  many., 


•  the  more  ...the  more . . . 

the  less... the  less... 
the  more... the  less... 


Cuanto  menos tanto  mas the  less. ..the  more... 


Ejemplos. 

Carlos  es  rico,  Juan  es  mas  rico  ;  pero 
Enrique  es  el  mas  rico  de  los  tres 
herrnanos. 

Luisa  es  mas  joveri  que  Maria. 

Nueva  York  es  mas  grande  que  Paris. 

Juan  habla  bien,  pero  su  hermano 
habla  mejor. 


Examples. 

Charles  is  rich,  John  is  richer ; 

but  Henry  is  the  richest  of  the 

three  brothers. 

Louisa  is  younger  than  Mary. 
New  York  is  larger  than  Paris. 
John  speaks  well,  but  his  brother 

speaks  better. 


ADJECTIVES.    COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.    71 


Soy  mas  viejo  que  V. 

Julia  es  la  menos  bonita  de  las  her- 

manas. 

Tenemos  menos  dinero  que  el. 
No  tengo  tanto  tiempo  como  V. 
Ellas  no  tienen  tantas  amigas   como 

nosotras. 

Yo  no  hablo  tan  bien  como  V. 
El   medico  no  es  tan  viejo  como  el 

abogado. 

Soy  tan  alto  como  V. 
Tengo  tantas  plumas  como  lapices. 
Cuaiito  mas  virtuosos  sou  los  hombres, 

tanto  mas  felices  son. 
Cuanto  mas  sale,   tanto  menos  estu- 

dia. 
Cuantos  mas  amigos  tenga  V.  tanto 

mas  poderoso  sera. 


I  am  older  than  you. 

Julia  is  the  least  pretty  of  the 

sisters. 

We  have  less  money  than  he. 
I  have  not  as  much  time  as  you. 
They  have  not  so  many  friends 

as  we. 

I  do  not  speak  as  well  as  you. 
The  physician  is  not  so  old  as 

the  lawyer. 
I  am  as  tall  as  you. 
I  have  as  many  pens  as  pencils. 
The  more  virtuous  men  are,  the 

happier  they  are. 
The  more  he  goes  out  the  less  he 

learns. 
The  more  friends  you  have  the 

more  powerful  you  wfll  be. 


Vocabulario. 

El  amo,  the  master. 

El  banquero,  the  banker. 

El  merito,  the  merit. 

El  regimiento,  the  regiment. 

La  clase,  the  class. 

La  suerte,  the  luck. 

La  escuela,  the  school. 

La  fruta,  the  fruit. 

La  parte,  the  part. 


Vocabulary. 


Atento,  attentive. 
Berne  V.,  give  me. 
Dulce,  sweet. 
Eduardo,  Edward. 
Estudioso,  studious. 
Felipe,  Philip. 
Fresco,  cool. 
Frio,  cold. 
Fuerte,  strong. 


Gana,  earns. 
Gasta,  spends. 
Habla,  speaks. 
Otro,  other. 
Pasado,  past,  last. 
Soberbio,  haughty. 
Temprano,  early. 
Tonto,  foolish. 
Todo,  all. 


Exercise  21. 

1.  Carlos  es  mas  rico  y  Felipe  mas  pobre  que  Juan.  2.  El  hijo  es 
mas  joven  que  la  hija.  3.  El  amo  no  tiene  tantos  amigos  como  el 
criado.  4.  El  hermano  es  tan  habil  como  la  hermana,  y  la  madre  no 
menos  que  el  padre.  5.  El  tiene  mas  suerte  que  merito.  6.  El  prfn- 
cipe  no  es  tan  soberbio  como  el  conde.  7.  El  comerciante  no  tiene 
tanto  dinero  como  el  banquero,  pero  tiene  mas  amigos  que  este 
(the  latter).  8.  Mi  hermano  es  mas  estudioso  y  mas  atento  que  yo. 


72  LESSON    11. 

9.  i  Tiene  V.  un  buen  Quarto  ?  10.  Tengo  el  cuarto  mas  frio  en  la 
casa.  11.  Tenemos  la  casa  mas  grande  de  la  ciudad.  12.  Maria  es 
mas  amable  que  Luisa.  13.  Julia  es  rnenos  atenta  que  mi  hermana. 
14.  Mi  amigo  tiene  la  casa  mas  hermosa  de  la  calle.  15.  Deme  V. 
algo  mejor.  16.  No  tengo  nada  mejor.  17.  Eduardo  es  mas  peque- 
no  que  su  hermano,  pero  es  mas  fuerte  que  el.  18.  Maria  es  la  mejor 
amiga  de  mi  hermana.  19.  Carlos  y  Enrique  son  los  mas  grandes, 
pero  los  menos  atentos  de  la  clase.  20.  Cuanto  menos  dinero  gana, 
tanto  masgasta.  21.  i  Es  la  bija  tan  grande  como  el  padre  ?  22.  Es 
menos  grande  que  el  padre,  pero  es  mas  grande  que  la  niadre.  23.  La 
bija  no  es  tan  amable  como  la  mad  re.  24.  Las  manzanas  no  son 
menos  dulces  que  las  peras.  25.  El  hermano  de  Felipe  es  el  hombre 
mas  rico  de  la  ciudad.  26.  [  Habla  V.  espanol  tan  bien  como  su  her- 
mano 1  27.  l£l  habla  mejor  que  yo. 


Exercise  22. 

1.  The  more  money  he  earns  the  less  he  spends.  2.  Charles  is  a 
bad  boy,  but  Henry  is  the  worst  boy  in  the  school.  3.  The  son  is  as 
rich  as  the  father;  he  has  four  houses  in  the  best  part  of  the  city. 
4.  Is  Edward  attentive  1  5.  He  is  more  attentive  than  the  other 
boys.  6.  Are  you  well  now  1  7.  I  am  better  in  the  country  than  in 
the  city.  8.  My  mother  is  not  so  old  as  my  aunt.  9.  Philip  is  the 
youngest  officer  of  the  regiment.  10.  He  is  not  less  brave  than  the 
old  officers.  11.  I  have  as  many  books  as  iny  brother.  12.  The 
small  room  is  cooler  than  the  large  one.  13.  The  green  apples  are 
not  so  sweet  as  the  others.  14.  We  have  not  so  much  fruit  this  (este) 
year  as  last  year.  15.  Henry,  Peter,  and  John  are  three  good  boys, 
but  John  is  the  best  of  all.  16.  The  dog  is  the  most  faithful  of  all 
animals.  17.  Is  your  daughter  young  1  18.  She  is  younger  than 
my  son.  19.  Have  you  any  flowers  in  the  garden  ?  20.  We  have 
the  most  beautiful  flowers  in  the  city.  21.  The  new  theater  is  much 
larger  than  the  old  theater.  22.  The  French  baker  has  the  best  bread 
here.  23.  Will  you  have  a  piece  of  bread  1  24.  Give  me  the  small- 
est piece.  25.  We  are  less  rich  than  the  English,  but  we  are  as 
happy  as  they.  26.  Do  you  go  out  earlier  than  I  ?  27.  Yes,  much 
earlier.  28.  Here  is  the  largest  house  in  the  city. 


ADJECTIVES.     COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.    73 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  comparative  is  usually  formed  in  Spanish  by  means 
of  adverbs,  and  not,  as  in  many  cases  in  English,  by  a  change  of 
termination : 

V.  es  mas  rico  que  yo,         You  are  richer  than  I. 

,?,  The  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  placing  mas, 
more,  before  the  positive,  and  que,  than,  after  it : 

Es  mas  habil  que  su  hermano,         He  is  more  skillful  than  his  brother. 
fil  tiene  mas  libros  que  yo,  He  has  more  books  than  L 

3*  The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  formed  by  placing  menos, 
less,  fewer,  before  the  positive,  and  que,  than,  after  it : 

Es  menos  prudente  que  V.,         He  is  less  prudent  than  you. 
Tengo  menos  libros  que  V.,         /  have  fewer  books  than  you. 

NOTE.  —  De  is  used  in  place  of  que  before  numerals.  Quiero  mas  de 
once  naranjas,  /  want  more  than  eleven  oranges. 

1.  If  the  comparison  refers,  however,  to  a  verb  different  from 
the  first  one,  de  lo  que  takes  the  place  of  que : 

El  tiene  menos  dinero  de  lo  que  V.  cree,         He  has  less  'money  than  you 

think. 

2.  If  the  comparison  depends  on  a  noun,  del  que  (de  la  que, 
de  los  que,  de  las  que)  is  used  in  place  of  que,  varying  with  the 
gender  of  the  noun : 

Tenia  mas  soldados  de  los  que  creia,         He  had  more  soldiers  than  he 

thought. 

3.  If  the  comparative  of  inferiority  is  expressed  by  no. .  .tanto 
(or  tanta,  tantos,  tantas),  or  by  no... tan,  then  the  second  part 
of  the  comparative  is  rendered  by  como : 


74  LESSON   11. 

El  no  tiene  tanto  dinero  corno  V.,  He  has  not  so  much  money  as  you, 

Ellos  no  tienen  tanta  plata  como  nosotros,   They  have  not  as  much  silver  as  we. 
El  no  es  tan  joven  como  yo,  He  is  not  so  young  as  I  am. 

it  The  comparative  of  equality  is  expressed  by  tanto  (or 
tanta,  tantos,  tantas,  according  to  the  gender  and  number  of 
the  noun)  and  como,  as ;  or  by  tan... como  with  an  adjective 
or  an  adverb : 

El  hijo  es  tan  docto  como  el  padre,          The  son  is  as  learned  as  the  father. 
El  obra  con  tanta  prudencia  como         He  acts  with  as  much  prudence  as 
valor,  courage. 

1.  Not  less  than  is  always  translated  by  no...menos  que...  : 

Yo  no  trabajo  meiios  que  V.,         I  do  not  work  less  than  you. 

2.  In  regard  to  verbs,  as  much  as  is  rendered  either  by  tanto 
como  or  by  tanto  cuanto : 

Pago  tanto  como  or  tanto  cuanto  vale,         I  pay  as  much  as  it  is  worth. 

OBSERVATION.  —  From  the  above  examples  it  will  be  seen  that  menos  is 
always  invariable,  whilst  tanto  and  cuanto  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer. 

Cuanto,  the  same  as  tanto,  drops  the  last  syllable  before  an  adjective  or 
adverb  and  becomes  cuan. 

5.  When  several  nouns  or  adjectives  follow  each  other,  it  is 
sufficient  to  use  the  words  mas,  menos,  tan,  or  tanto  before  the 
first  adjective  only : 

Enrique  es  mas  joven,  timido  y  ere-         Henry  is  younger,  more  timid,  and 
dulo  que  su  hermano,  more  credulous  than  his  brother. 

NOTE.  —  It  would  not  be  a  mistake,  however,  to  repeat  the  adverb  be- 
fore every  adjective  in  order  to  give  more  expression  to  the  sentence. 

6*  The  superlative  relative  which  generally  ends  in  English 
in  est  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  adverbs  mas  or  menos  joined 
to  the  positive  and  accompanied  by  the  definite  article,  a  posses- 
sive adjective,  or  a  personal  pronoun : 

El  mas  hermoso  libro  or  ) 

,    _  >  The  handsomest  book. 

El  libro  mas  hermoso,      ) 

El  muchacho  menos  obediente,         The  least  obedient  boy. 
Su  mas  interesante  obra,  His  most  interesting  work. 


ADJECTIVES.    COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.  75 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  superlative  relative  of  those  adjectives  which  are 
placed  before  the  noun  may  come  ill  the  superlative  before  or  after  the 
noun: 

El  mas  bonito  muchacho  or  ) 

_-.         .     .         ,    .  Hie  prettiest  boy. 

JLl  muchacho  mas  bonito,        ) 

But  in  the  case  of  those  adjectives  which  are  placed  after  the  noun,  the 
superlative  must  also  come  last : 

El  clima  mas  frio,         The  coldest  climate, 

7i  When  the  superlative  relative  is  an  adverb  modifying  the 
verb,  it  is  expressed  by  the  adverbs  mas  or  menos  without  the 
definite  article : 

j  Que  estrella  luce  mas  ?  Which  star  shines  the  most  ? 

Yo  creo  que  Venus  luce  mas,         /  think  Venus  shines  the  most. 

OBSERVATION.  —  These  superlative  relatives  do  not  properly  belong  to 
the  Spanish  language,  although  they  are  always  considered  as  comparatives, 
and  they  require  a  cultivated  ear  to  be  used  correctly. 

8.  The  comparatives  'of  the  adjectives  bueno,  good ;  malo, 
bad;   grande,  large;   pequeiio,  little,  small;   bajo,   low;   alto, 
high  ;  which  is  irregular,  may  also  be  formed  regularly  by  means 
of  the  adverb  mas,  more : 

Bueno,  good  ;  mas  bueno,  better. 

Grande,  large  ;         mas  grande,  larger. 

OBSERVATION.  —  When  speaking,  however,  of  the  differences  of  ages  of 
two  persons,  mayor  and  menor  must  be  used  : 

La  hija  mayor,  the  eldest  daughter  ;         el  hijo  menor,  the  youngest  son. 

Inferior  and  menor  are  never  used  when  speaking  of  physical  size,  that 
is,  of  the  volume  or  size  of  the  objects. 

9.  Cuanto  mas. . .tanto. . .,  the  more. . .the. . .;  cuanto  menos. . . 
tan  to...,  the  less...  the... ,  used  adjectively,  must  agree  in  gender 
and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer : 

Cuantas  mas  reflexion es  hace,  tan-         The  more  he  reflects  (he  makes  reflec- 
tas  mas  faltas  comete,  tions),  the  more  mistakes  he  makes. 

NOTE.  —  Instead  of  cuanto  mas...,  mientras  mas  may  be  used. 


76  LESSON   12. 


Leccion  XII.  Lesson  XII. 

SUPERLATIVE    ABSOLUTE.       ADJECTIVES   AND    ADVERBS. 
Formation  of  the  Superlative  Absolute* 

Pequeno,  small ;  pequenisim-o,  7??,.,  a,/,  or  ) 

>  very  small,  smallest* 
rnuy  pequen-o,  m.,  a,  /.,    )       * 

Prudente,  prudent ;        prudentisinio,  very  prudent. 
Feliz,  happy;  felicisimo,  very  happy. 

Cortes,  polite;  cortesisimo,  very  polite. 

Adjectives  ending  in  co  and  go : 

Rico,  rich  ;  riquisimo,  very  rich. 

Vago,  vague  ;  vaguisimo,  very  vague. 

Adjectives  ending  in  ble : 

Amable,  amiable ;  araabilisimo,  or  muy  amable,  very  amiable. 

Afable,  affable ;  afabilisimo,  or  muy  afable,  very  affable. 

Adjectives  ending  in  iente : 

Ardiente,  ardent;  ardeutisimo,  very  ardent* 

Ferviente,  fervent ;  ferventisimo,  very  fervent. 

Luciente,  shining;  lucentisimo,  very  shining. 

Valiente,  brave  ;  valentisimo,  very  brave. 

Adjectives  ending  in  io  : 

Limpio,  clean;  limpisimo,  very  clean. 

Sucio,  dirty ;  sucisimo,  very  dirty. 

Irregular  Superlatives. 

Acre,  bitter  ;  acerrimo,  very  bitter. 

Amigo,  friendly  ;  araicisimo,  very  friendly. 

Antiguo,  ancient ;  antiquisimo,  very  ancient. 

Aspero,  harsh  ;  asperisirno  or  asperrimo,  very  harsh 

Benefico,  benevolent  ;  beneficentisimo,  very  benevolent. 


AJUECTIVKS.      SUI'ERLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 


77 


Bueno,  good  ; 
Celebre,  celebrated  ; 
Fiel,  faithful ; 
Fuerte,  strong; 
Integro,  upright; 
Libre,  free  ; 

Magnifico,  magnificent; 
Misero,  miserable; 
Pobre,  poor  ; 
Sagrado,  sacred; 
Salubre,  healthy  ; 
Sabio,  wise; 
Venefico,  poisonous  ; 


Dulcemente,  sweetly; 
Sabiamente,  wisely  ; 
Amablemente,  amiably ; 


bonisimo,  very  good. 
celeberrimo,  very  celebrated, 
tidelisimo,  very  faithful. 
fortisimo,  very  strong. 
integenlmo,  very  upright. 
liberrirno,  very  free. 
magnificen  tisimo, 
miserrimo,  very  miserable. 
pauperrimo,  pobrisimo,  very  poor. 
sacratisimo,  very  sacred. 
saluberrimo,  very  healthy. 
sapientisimo,  very  wise. 
veneficentisimo,  very  poisonous. 

Adverbs. 

dulcisimamente,  very  or  most  sweetly. 
muy  sabiamente,  very  wisely. 
amabilisimamente,  most  amiably. 


Ejemplos. 

Pedro  es  rico,  pero  Juan  es  riquisimo. 

Paris  es  una  ciudad  muy  hermosa. 

El  comerciaate  es  honradisimo. 

La  inadre  de  Maria  es  viejisima. 

La  torre  es  altisima. 

El  maestro  es  sapientisimo. 

El  caballero  es  cortesisimo. 

El  general  es  prudentisiino. 

La  senora  es  hermosisima. 

Es  segurisimo. 

El  camino  es  larguisimo. 

P]l  clirna  es  friisimo. 

Luisa  es  amabilisima. 

Mi  hermana  dibuja  hermosisimamente. 

£l  obra  prudentisimamente. 

Vocabulario. 

El  amor,  the  love. 

El  camino,  the  road. 

El  clima,  the  climate. 

El  comportamiento,  the  behavior. 


Examples. 

Peter  is  rich,  but  John  is  very  rich 

Paris  is  a  very  handsome  city. 

The  merchant  is  very  honest. 

Mary's  mother  is  very  old. 

The  tower  is  very  high. 

The  teacher  is  very  wise. 

The  gentleman  is  very  polite. 

The  general  is  very  prudent. 

The  lady  is  very  handsome. 

It  is  very  sure. 

The  road  is  very  long. 

The  climate  is  very  cold. 

Louisa  is  very  amiable. 

My  sister  draws  most  beautifully, 

He  acts  very  prudently. 

Vocabulary. 

Contento,  satisfied. 
Femenil,  effeminate. 
Filial,  filial. 
Gloriosamente,  gloriously. 


78 


LESSON    12. 


El  Ie6n,  the  lion. 
El  maestro,  the  teacher. 
El  pozo,  the  well. 
La  acci6n,  the  action. 
La  aldea,  the  village. 
La  comedia,  the  comedy. 
La  hormiga,  the  ant. 
La  iglesia,  the  church. 
La  lluvia,  the  rain. 
Afable,  a/able. 
Agrio,  sour. 
Benefico,  benevolent. 
Comun,  ordinary ,  low. 


Honrado,  honest. 
Inteligente,  intelligent. 
Interesante,  interesting. 
Largo,  long. 
Lejos,  far. 
Paternal,  paternal. 
Pio,  pious. 
Profundo,  deep. 
Sabiamente,  wisely. 
Salubre,  healthy. 
Sucio,  dirty. 
Valiente,  brave. 


Exercise  23. 

1.  Los  dos  hermanos  del  general  son  riquisimos,  pero  el  general  es 
muy  pobre.  2.  La  torre  de  la  iglesia  es  altisima.  3.  Luisa  y  Maria 
son  amabilisimas.  4.  Los  caminos  estan  malisimos  desde  la  lluvia. 
5.  El  oficial  es  un  valentisimo  soldado.  6.  El  clima  de  la  isla  es 
saluberrimo.  7.  El  hombrecito  tiene  una  casa  grandisima.  8.  La 
hermana  de  Juan  es  hermosisima.  9.  Las  comedias  de  Moratin  son 
muy  hermosas.  10.  Socrates  era  sapientisimo.  11.  Las  primas  de 
Enrique  son  muy  pias.  12.  Las  calles  de  la  ciudad  son  larguisimas. 
13.  El  panadero  tiene  una  hija  muy  bonita.  14.  Las  horinigas  son 
pequemsimas.  15.  Juan  es  muy  feme.nil.  16.  El  maestro  habla  muy 
sabiamente.  17.  Su  (his)  amor  es  muy  filial.  18.  El  principe  es  muy 
benefico.  19.  El  vino  del  comerciante  no  es  bueno;  esta  muy^agrio. 

20.  Los  habitarites  de  la  aldea  son  muy  industriosos  y  muy  afables. 

21.  El  padre  y  la  madre  de  Pedro  son  viejisimos.     22.  Las  dos  senoras 
son  muy  jovenes.     23.  El  soldado  murio  (died)  muy  gloriosamente. 
24.   Su   comportamiento   es  muy  comiin.     25.    El  monumento  es 
antiquisimo. 

Exercise  24. 

1.  The  merchant  is  a  very  honest  man.  2.  My  father  is  very 
benevolent.  3.  My  brother's  friends  are  very  poor.  4.  His  action  is 
very  paternal.  5.  His  love  is  very  filial.  6.  The  banker's  house  is 
very  large.  7.  New  York  is  a  very  rich  city.  8.  The  physician  has 
very  good  sons.  9.  The  climate  of  the  island  is  very  cold.  10.  The 
lion  is  very  strong.  11.  Henry's  sister  is  very  amiable,  but  his  cousin 


ADJECTIVES.      SUPERLATIVE   ABSOLUTE.  79 

(fern.)  is  more  affable.  12.  The  apples  are  very  sweet.  13.  The 
rooms  in  (de)  the  house  are  very  small.  14.  The  river  is  very  deep. 
15.  The  trees  in  the  (del)  garden  are  very  green.  16.  The  two  boys 
are  very  sick.  17.  We  have  now  a  very  good  servant.  18.  The  water 
in  the  well  is  very  cold.  19.  Mary's  brothers  are  very  intelligent. 
20.  I  am- very  happy  to-day.  21.  The  two  Frenchmen  are  very  far 
from  here.  22.  The  soldiers  of  the  general  are  very  brave.  23.  The 
streets  are  now  very  dirty.  24.  My  book  is  very  interesting. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  superlative  absolute  is  either  formed  by  placing  the 
adverb  muy,  very,  before  the  positive,  or  by  adding  to  the  same 
the  termination  isimo  (isima,  isimos,  isimas,  according  to  the 
gender  and  number  of  the  noun  to  which  the  adjective  refers)  if 
it  ends  with  a  consonant. 

If  the  positive  ends  with  a  vowel,  however,  this  last  letter  is 
dropped  and  the  same  terminations  added  : 

Grande,  large ;         muy  grande,  or  grandisirno,  very  large. 
Cortes,  polite;         muy  cortes,  or  cortesisimo,  very  polite. 

2.  Adjectives  ending  in  CO  and  go  form  their  superlative  in 
quisimo  and  guisimo  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  c  and  g, 
which  they  have  in  the  positive  : 

Rico,  rich;  riquisimo,  very  rich. 

Vago,  vague  ;         vaguisimo,  very  vague. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  ble  change  this  last  syllable  into 
bilisimo : 

Amable,  amiable;         amabilisimo,  very  amiable. 
Afable,  a/able  ;  afabilisimo,  very  a/able. 

4*    Adjectives  ending  in  iente  drop  the  i  in  the  superlative, 
and  change  the  termination  iente  into  entisimo : 
Ardiente,  ardent ;        ardentisimo,  very  ardent. 
Valiente,  brave  ;  valentisimo,  very  brave. 

5,  Adjectives  ending  in  io  drop  these  two  letters  to  avoid  the 
repetition  of  the  i,  and  add  isimo : 

Limpio,  clean  ;         limpisimo,  very  clean. 


80  LESSON   12. 

EXCEPTIONS. — The  adjectives  frlo,  cold,  and  pio,  picnts,  make,  how- 
ever, friiflimo  and  piisimo  in  the  superlative. 

• 

6,  The  superlative  absolute  of  adverbs  ending  in  mente  is 
also  formed  by  placing  the  adverb  muy,  very,  before  them,  or  by 
changing  the  termination  entente  or  amente  into  isimamente  * 

Dulcemente,  sweetly  ;  dulcisimamente,  very  or  most  sweetly. 

Amablemente,  amiably  ;         amabilisimamente,  very  or  most  amiably. 

7»  It  must  be  observed  that  the  superlative  formed  with  the 
termination  isimo  is  stronger  than  that  formed  with  the  adverb 
muy,  very.  Riquisimo  expresses,  therefore,  a  higher  degree 
than  muy  rico,  very  rich.  Elegance  requires  also  the  termina- 
tion isimo  instead  of  the  adverb  muy  when  the  superlative  is 
preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  un,  uno,  Una.  Therefore,  es 
un  valentisimo  soldado,  he  is  a  very  brave  soldier,  is  preferable 
to  es  un  muy  valiente  soldado. 

8,  Certain  adjectives  and  adverbs  do  not  admit  of  the  termi- 
nation of  the  superlative.  This  is  more  especially  the  case  with 
those  ending  with  1,  i,  n,  and  a  few  with  r,  as  : 

Paternal,  paternal ;  maternal,  maternal;  filial,  filial;  femenil,  effemi- 
nate; igual,  equal;  varonil,  manly;  turqui,  dark  blue;  ruin,  low;  co- 
rn un,  ordinary. 

In  case  of  doubt  the  student  will,  therefore,  adopt  preferably 
the  adverb,  muy. 

9t  Some  adjectives  form  their  superlative  most  irregularly, 
as  is  seen  by  the  list  given  above. 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


81 


Leccidn  XIII. 


Lesson  XIII. 


PREPOSITIVE. 

Singular. 

Masculine.       Feminine. 

Mi, 

Tu, 

Su, 

Nnestro,  nuestra, 

Vuestro,  vuestra, 

Su, 

POSTPOSITIVE. 

Mio,  mia, 

Tuyo,  tuya, 

Suyo,  suya, 

Nuestro,  nuestra, 

Vuestro,  vuestra, 

Suyo,  suya, 

Ejemplos. 

Mi  padre  es  bueno. 
Mi  madre  es  buena. 
Tu  hermano  es  pequeno. 
Tu  hermana  es  pequena. 
Su  hermano  es  alto. 
Su  hermana  es  alta. 
Nuestro  tio  es  bueno. 
Nuestra  tia  es  buena. 
Su  amigo  es  joven.  \ 

Su  amigo  de  V.  es  joven.  > 
El  amigo  de  V.  es  joven.  ) 
Su  casa  es  grande. 
Su  casa  de  ellos  es  grande. 
Mis  amigos  son  felices. 
Sus  hermanos  son  ricos. 
Sus  libros  estan  aqui. 
Sus  libros  de  V.  estan  aqui. 
Los  libros  de  V.  estan  aqui. 


POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVES. 


Plural. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

mis ;  my. 

tus ;  thy. 

sus ;  his,  her,  its. 

nuestros,  nuestras ;         our. 

su,     vuestros,  vuestras,  sus;  your. 

sus;  their,  your. 

mios,  mias ;  my. 

tuyos,  tuyas ;  thy. 

suyos,  suyas ;  his,  her,  its. 

nuestros,  nuestras ;  our. 

vuestros,  vuestras ;  your. 

suyos,  suyas;  their,  your. 

Examples. 

My  father  is  good. 
My  mother  is  good. 
Thy  brother  is  small. 
Thy  sister  is  small. 
His  or  her  brother  is  tall. 
His  or  her  sister  is  tall. 
Our  uncle  is  good. 
Our  aunt  is  good. 

Your  friend  is  young. 

Their  house  is  large. 

My  friends  are  happy. 

His  (her  or  their)  brothers  are  rich. 

Your  books  are  here. 


82 


LESSON  13. 


Mi  hermano  y  mi  hermana  son  jo-  ) 
veries.  ) 

Su  tio,  su  tia,  y  sus  priraos   estaii 
malos. 

Aqui  esta  uno  de  mis  amigos. 

El  perro  esta  con  su  amo. 

El  arbol  pierde  sus  hojas. 

Deme  V.  la  mano. 

£l  tiene  su  sombrero  en  la  mano. 

El  soldado  ha  perdido  el  brazo. 


My  brother  and  sister  are  young. 

His  (or  her)  uncle,  aunt,  and  cous- 
ins are  sick. 

Here  is  one  of  rny  friends. 
The  dog  is  with  its  master. 
The  tree  loses  its  leaves. 

Give  me  your  hand. 

He  has  his  hat  in  his  hand. 

The  soldier  has  lost  his  arm. 


Su,  his,  her,  your,  their. 

Su  libro  or  el  libro  de  £1.  His  book. 

Su  libro  or  el  libro  de  ella. 
Su  (or  el)  libro  de,V.,  sing. 
Su  (or  el)  libro  de  VV.,  pi. 
Su  (or  el)  libro  de  ellos,  masc. 
Su  (or  el)  libro  de  ellas,/em. 
Sus  libros  or  los  libros  de  el,  His  books, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 


Adios,  padre  mio. 
Si,  madre  mia. 
No,  hijo  mio. 
Son  amigos  nuestros* 
Son  enemigos  snyos. 
Un  amigo  mio. 
Un  criado  nuestro. 
Un  amigo  suyo. 

Vocabulario. 

El  bast6n,  the  cane. 

El  bollo,  the  cake. 

El  condiscipulo,  the  fellow -scholar. 

El  discipulo,  the  scholar,  pupil. 

El  ejemplo,  the  example. 

El  marido,  the  husband. 

El  padrino,  the  godfather. 

El  papel,  the  paper. 

El  privilegio,  the  privilege. 

La  familia,  the  family. 

La  leche,  the  milk. 

La  libertad,  the  liberty. 


Her  book. 
Your  book. 

Their  book. 


Good-by,  father. 
Yes,  mother. 
No,  my  son. 
They  are  our  friends. 
They  are  his  enemies. 
A  friend  of  mine. 
A  servant  of  ours. 
A  friend  of  his. 

Vocabulary. 

La  madrina,  the  godmother. 
La  pizarra,  the  slate. 
La  propiedad,  the  property. 
La  rienda,  the  bridle. 
La  silla,  the  saddle. 
Al  contrario,  on  the  contrary. 
Caliente,  warm. 
En  casa,  at  home. 
Mas,  more. 
Sagrado,  sacred. 
Siguen,  follow. 
Tambien,  too.  also. 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES.  83 

Exercise  25. 

1.  Mi  hermano  y  mi  nermana  estan  en  casa.  2.  Mis  padres  (par- 
ents) estan  en  el  jardfn,  3.  Nuestras  casas  son  hermosas.  4.  i  Quien 
tiene  mi  papel,  mi  pluma  y  mis  lapices  '?  5.  No  tenemos  ni  el  papel, 
ni  la  pluma  ni  los  lapices  de  V.  6.  La  mujer  de  nuestro  medico  es 
la  hermaria  de  mi  banquero.  7.  i  Tienen  los  discipulos  sus  libros  f 
8.  Tienen  sus  libros  y  sus  pizarras.  9.  El  marido  de  mi  prima  esta  en 
Paris.  10.  i  Buenos  df as,  tia,  donde  estan  mis  primos  1  11.  Estan  en 
el  jardm.  12.  i  Donde  estas,  hijo  info  ?  13.  Estoyaqui  en  el  cuarto. 
14.  Mi  amigo  es  pobre,  pero  un  hermano  suyo  es  muy  rico.  15.  Nues- 
tro tfo  quiere  comprar  la  casa  de  mi  amigo.  16.  [  Donde  esta  su  padre 
de  V.  ahora?  17.  Yo  no  se  donde  esta.  18.  Los  sombreros  de  W. 
son  muy  pequenos.  19.  Nuestro  cuarto  esta  caliente.  20.  Las  casas 
de  ellos  son  muy  grandes.  21.  i  Es  V.  mi  amigo  1  22.  Si,  senor,  soy 
el  amigo  de  V.  y  de  toda  su  familia.  23.  Los  primos  de  Juan  son  los 
condiscfpulos  de  mi  hermano.  24.  [  Quien  quiere  un  pedazo  de  mi 
bollo  ?  25.  Yo,  deme  V.  un  pedacito.  26.  [  Que  tiene  V.  en  la  mano  f 
27.  Tengo  un  bastoncito.  28.  Los  hijos  siguen  el  ejemplo  de  su 
padre.  29.  Nuestra  libertad,  nuestra  propiedad  y  nuestros  privilegios 
son  sagrados.  30.  Adios,  amigo  mfo. 

Exercise  26. 

L  Where  is  your  cousin  (/.)  1  2.  She  is  with  her  husband.  3.  Where 
is  your  slate  ]  4.  My  sjate  is  on  the  table.  5.  Who  is  your  godfather  ? 

6.  Mr.   Harris  is  my  godfather,  and   his   sister  is  my  godmother. 

7.  Who  is  in  your  father's  room  ?     8.  A  friend  of  his.     9.  Give  me 
your  hand,  my  friend.     10.   Is  Henry  the  friend  of  your  brothers  ? 
11.  He  is  their  friend.     12.  Is  your  physician  tall  or  little?     13.  Our 
physician  is  very  tall.     14.  Who  is  upstairs  in  our  room  ?     15.  No- 
body is  in  your  room,   but  some   one  is  in  your  brother's  room. 
16.  With  whom  are  your  children  ?     17.  They  are  with  their  mother. 
18.  Is  your  father  at  home  ?     19.  He  is  in  his  store  (tiendd).     20.  Are 
the  little  boys  with  their  aunt?     21.  They  are  with  their  uncle  and 
aunt.     22.  My  sister's  friend  (/".)  is  very  amiable,  and  her  brothers  too. 
23.   Our  physician  is  already  an  old  man.     24.  Will  you  have  more 
milk  in  your  coffee  ?     25.  On  the  contrary,  give  me  more    coffee. 
26.  Who  is  in  the  garden  1     27.  My  father  and  mother.     28.  Have 
you  the  saddle  of  my  horse  ?     29.  I  have  its  bridle,  but  riot  its  saddle* 


84  LESSON   13. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  Possessive  adjectives  do  not  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  antecedent  or  possessor,  as  in  English,  but  with  the 
object  possessed.     Every  possessive  adjective  must,  therefore, 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers. 
Mi  libro,  my  book.        Nuestra  mesa,  our  table.        Mis  amigos,  my  friends. 

2.  The  possessive  adjective    must    be   repeated  with  every 
noun,  unless  it  refers  to  the  same  person  or  object : 

Mi  padre,  mi  madre,  y  mi  hermana        My  father,  mother,  and  sister  are 

estan  malos,  sick. 

Senor  mio  y  amigo,  Sir  and  friend. 

3.  The  possessive  adjective  vuestro,   masc.  sing.,  vuestra, 
fern,  sing.,  vuestros,  masc.  pi.,  vuestras,  fern.  pL,  your,  is  only 
used  in  the  elevated  style,  or  when  addressing  the  divinity,  the 
saints,  or  persons  in  elevated  situation : 

Principe,  imploro  vuestro  amparo,         Prince,  I  implore  your  protection. 

In  place  of  vuestro  the  Spaniards  use  in  the  usual  style  the 
possessive  adjective  su,  which  also  means  his,  her,  their.  Vues- 
tro may,  in  fact,  be  compared  with  the  personal  pronoun  VOSO- 
tros,  instead  of  which  we  use  usted,  sing.,  and  ustedes,  pl.9  with 
the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural.  In  the  same 
way,  instead  of  vuestro,  the  Spaniards  use  the  possessive  adjec- 
tive in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural. 

Su  sombrero,  your  hat,  is  therefore  used  instead  of  vuestro 
sombrero  ;  but  as  it  might  also  be  translated  by  his  hat,  her  hat, 
their  hat,  the  expression  de  V.  is  added  after  the  noun,  and  we 
would  therefore  have  to  say  SU  sombrero  de  V.  This  addition 
of  de  V.,  or  de  VV.  may,  however,  be  left  out  when  the  sense 
of  the  sentence  sufficiently  indicates  to  what  person  SU  refers : 

i  Tiene  V.  su  sombrero  ?        Have  you  your  hat  ? 

REMARK.  —  The  omission  of  de  usted  when  addressing  respectable  per- 
sons is,  however,  considered  vulgar  and  impolite. 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES.  85 

4.  Instead  of  SU  or  sus,  el,  la,  los,  or  las  may  be  used  with 
de  listed,  de  ustedes : 

El  libro  de  V.,  your  book.  La  mesa  de  V.,  your  table. 

Los  libros  de  V.,  your  books.         Las  mesas  de  V.,  your  tables. 

5 1  In  order  to  avoid  the  ambiguity  which  might  arise  from 
the  use  of  SU  and  SUS,  the  definite  article  is  used  with  de  61,  de 
ella,  de  ellos,  de  ellas : 

El  libro  de  el,  his  book.  La  casa  de  ellos,  their  (m.)  house. 

El  libro  de  ella,  her  book.         La  casa  de  ellas,  their  (f. )  house. 

6.  The  possessive  its  must  be  rendered  by  SU  or  SUS  accord- 
ing to  the  number  of  the  following  noun : 

Mi  padre  tiene  un  hermoso  caballo,         My  father  has  a  pretty  horse,  its 

su  color  es  negro,  color  is  black. 

El  arbol  pierde  sus  hojas,  The  tree  loses  its  leaves. 

7.  The  definite  article  is  substituted  in  Spanish  for  the  pos- 
sessive adjective  whenever  the  sense  of  the  sentence  sufficiently 
indicates  who  the  possessor  is.     Tins  is  more  especially  the  case, 
when  parts  of  the  body  are  mentioned  : 

Tengo  algo  en  el  ojo,  /  have  something  in  my  eye. 

Que  tiene  V.  en  la  mano,          What  have  you  (got)  in  your  hand. 

8»  Whenever  addressing  a  relative  or  friend,  the  Spaniards 
use  the  noun  alone,  as  in  English,  or  with  the  possessive  after 
the  same : 

Buenos  dias,  padre  (or  padre  mio),         Good  morning,  father. 
Hijo  (or  liijo  mio),  ven  aqui,  Son,  come  here. 

9.  The  possessive  adjectives  mi,  tu,  SU,  etc.,  when  coming 
after  the  noun  are  replaced  by  mio,  tuyo,  suyo,  masc.  sing.  ; 
mios,  tuyos,  suyos,  masc.  pi. ;  mia,  tuya,  suya,  fern.  sing. ; 
mias,  tuyas,  suyas,  fern.  pi. : 

\  Padre  mio  !  my  father  !        Madre  mia,  my  mother;  etc. 

These  adjectives  are  placed  after  the  noun : 

1.  In  the  vocative:  jhijos  mios!  my  sons!  If,  however,  an 
adjective  or  a  participle  precedes  the  noun,  both  forms  may  be 

used : 

Mi  querido  padre  or  querido  padre  mio,         My  dear  father. 


«t>  LESSON  14. 

2.  When  an  article  precedes  the  noun  ? 

El  caballo  tuyo  es  mayor  que  el  mio,     Thy  (your)  horse  is  larger  than  mine. 
Un  criado  mio  or  uno  de  mis  criados,     A  servant  of  mine. 

3.  When  an  adverb  precedes  the  noun: 

Tan  amigos  nuestros  se  mostraron,         They  showed  themselves  so  muck  om 

friends. 


Leccitfn  XIV.  Lesson  XIV. 

POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.          Feminine.       Masculine.  Feminine. 

El  mio,       la  mia,        los  mios,       las  mias,       mine,  my  own. 

El  tuyo,      latuya,       lostuyos,      lastuyas,      thine,  thy  own. 

El  suyo,      la  suya,       los  suyos,      las  suyas,      his,  hers,  its. 

Elnuestro,  lanuestra,  los  nuestros,  lasnuestras,  ours,  our  own. 

Elvuestro,  lavuestra,  los  vuestros,  las  vuestras,  ) 

Eltuyo,      lasuya,      lossuyos,      lassuyas, 

El  suyo,      la  suya,       los  suyos,      las  suyas,      theirs,  their  own. 

Eldeel,  lade  el,  losdeel,  lasdeel,  his. 

El  de  ella,  la  de  ella,        los  de  ella,  las  de  ella,        hers. 
Eldenosotros,  ladenosotros,  losdenosotros,  lasdenosotros,  ours. 

Eldeusted,  ladeusted,      losdeusted,  lasdeusted,1     ) 

El  de  ustedes,  ladeustedes,  los  de  ustedes,  las  de  ustedes,2) 

El  de  ellos,  la  de  ellos,       los  de  ellos,  las  de  ellos,3  >      . 

El  de  ellas,  la  de  ellas,       los  de  ellas,  las  de  ellas,4 ) 

Declension. 

Masculine  Singular.  Feminine  Singular. 

El  mio,         mine ;  la  mia,          mine. 

Del  mio,       of  mine ;  de  la  mia,    of  mine. 

Al  mio,         to  mine ;  a  la  mia,      to  mine. 

1  Singular.         9  Plural.         3  Masculine.         4  Feminine. 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


87 


Masculine  Plural. 

Los  mios,  mine  ; 

De  los  mios,  of  mine  ; 

A  los  mios,  to  mine  ; 
ETC.,  etc., 

Ejemplos. 

Mi  padre  y  el  tuyo  son  amigos. 
Tu  hermano  y  cl  mio  estan  aqui. 
Tengo  el  libro  de  V.  y  el  mio. 
Mi  lapiz  y  el  de  V.  son  de  oro. 
Su  amigo  de  V.  y  el  nuestro  son  altos. 
Su  caballo  de  V.  y  el  de  ellos  son 

negros, 
Mi  casa  y  la  suya  (la   de  el)  son 

nuevas. 
Su  pluma  (la  pluma  de   el)   y  la 

nuestra  son  de  acero. 
Mis  libros  y  los  suyos  son  hermosos. 
Nuestros  araigos  y  los  de  V.  estan 

en  Francia. 
Nuestras  sillas  y  las  de  ellos  son  de 

caoba. 
i  Tiene  el  mi  lapiz  ?  —  Tiene  el  suyo. 

i  Tiene   ella  mi  libro  ?  —  Tiene    el 

suyo. 
i  Tiene  V.  mi  pluma  ?  —  Tengo  la 

mia, 
i  Tiene   ella  su  aguja  ?  —  Tiene   la 

suya. 

Hablo  de  mi  padre  y  del  suyo  (del 

deV.). 

Escribo  a  mi  madre  y  a  la  de  V. 
El  habla  de  mis  hermanos  y  de  los 

suyos. 
Escribimos  a  nuestros   amigos  y  a 

los  de  ellos. 
Quiero  lo  mio. 
Cada  uno  quiere  lo  suyo. 


Feminine  Plural 
las  mi  as,         mine. 
de  las  mias,   of  mine. 
a  las  mias,     to  mine. 

ETC.,  etc. 

Examples. 

My  father  and  thine  are  friends. 
Thy  brother  and  mine  are  here. 
I  have  your  book  and  mine. 
My  pencil  and  yours  are  of  gold. 
Your  friend  and  ours  are  tall. 
Your  horse  and  theirs  are  black. 

My  house  and  his  are  new. 
His  pen  and  ours  are  of  steel. 

My  books  and  his  are  handsome. 
Our  friends  and  yours  are  in  France. 

Our  chairs  and  theirs  are  of  ma- 
hogany. 

Has  he  my  pencil  ?  —  He  has  his 
own. 

Has  she  my  book  ?  —  She  has  her 
own. 

Have  you  my  pen  ?  —  I  have 
mine. 

Has  she  her  needle  ?  —  She  has 
her  own. 

I  speak  of  my  father  and  of  yours. 

I  write  to  my  mother  and  to  yours. 
He  speaks  of  my  brothers  and  of 

his. 
We  write  to  our  friends  and  to 

theirs. 

I  wish  for  what  is  mine. 
Every  one  wishes  for  what  is  his. 


88 


LESSON   14, 


Vocabulario. 

£1  baile,  the  ball. 

El  cocinero,  the  cook. 

El  guante,  the  glove. 

El  maestro,  the  teacher. 

El  prof  esor,  the  professor. 

La  escritura,  the  writing. 

La  familia,  the  family.          [where. 

En  algnna  parte,  somewhere,  any- 

A  lo  menoB,  at  least. 

Alto,  tall. 

Como,  how. 


Vocabulary. 

i  "onoce  V.  ?  Z>0  2/<ra  Arwow  ?  are  you 

acquainted  with. 

Conozco,  I  know, I  am  acquainted  with. 
i  De  quien  1  whose  ? 
i  Escribe  V.  ]  do  you  write  ? 
Escribo,  I  write. 
I  Habla  V.  1  do  you  speak? 
Hablo,  I  speak. 
Magnifico,  splendid. 
Otra  cosa,  something  else. 
Que,  which. 


Exercise  27. 

1.  i  Tiene  V.  mi  libro  ?  2.  No,  senor,  no  tengo  el  de  Y.  3.  i  Como 
son  los  caballos  ?  4.  El  mio  es  negro,  y  el  de  el  es  bianco.  5.  Los 
hermanos  de  V.  son  altos,  y  los  mios  son  pequenos.  6.  Los  Ingleses 
ricos  tienen  cocineros  franceses,  los  de  ellos  no  son  tan  buenos. 
7.  La  familia  de  su  madre  de  V.  es  rica,  pero  la  familia  de  la  mia 
es  pobre.  8.  j  Conoce  V.  los  jardines  de  los  Ingleses  ?  9.  Conozco 
sus  jardines  y  sus  casas.  10.  Nuestros  jardines  son  hermosos,  pero 
los  de  ellos  son  magnificos.  11.  $  Habla  Y.  de  mi  casa?  12.  No 
hablo  de  la  suya,  hablo  de  la  mia.  13.  [  Quiere  V.  un  pedazo  de 
bollo  ?  14.  Si,  deme  V.  un  pedazo  del  suyo.  15.  i  Para  quien  son 
las  manzanas,  para  su  hermano  de  Y.  6  para  el  mio  ?  16.  Las  man- 
zanas  son  para  el  mio,  tengo  otra  cosa  para  el  de  Y.  17.  $  Escribe  Y. 
a  mis  amigos  1  18.  Escribo  d  los  mios,  d  los  de  Y.,  y  d  los  de  el. 
19.  i  Quien  tiene  nuestros  libros  1  20.  El  profesor  tiene  los  de  Y.  y 
los  nuestros.  21.  La  hermana  de  Y.  es  joven,  y  la  mia  tambien. 
22.  La  madre  de  Y.,  y  la  de  el  estdn  en  el  jardin.  23.  [  Tiene  Y.  mi 
lapiz?  24.  No,  senor,  tengo  el  mio,  el  de  V.  esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

25.  Don  Carlos  Marty  es  mi  maestro  de  escritura,  quien  es  el  de  Y.  1 

26.  Es  tambien  el  mio.     27.  Enrique  es  el  amigo  de  Y.,  pero  no  es  el 
mio.     28.  [  De  quien  es  la  casa  1     29.  La  casa  pequena  es  mia,  y  la 
grande  es  de  mi  hermana.     30.  La  casa  es  pequena,  pero  d  lo  menos 
es  mia. 

Exercise  28. 

1,  Who  has  my  piece  of  cake  ?  2.  I  have  mine,  but  not  yours. 
3.  Where  are  your  gloves  ?  4.  Mine  are  here ;  where  are  yours  ? 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS.  89 

5.  Mine  are  somewhere  in  the  room.  6.  Do  you  wish  the  large  or 
the  small  hat  1  7.  I  wish  mine.  8.  Have  I  your  hat  ]  9.  No,  you 
have  your  own.  10.  You  have  no  inkstand,  will  you  have  mine  ? 
11.  No,  thank  you,  I  don't  wish  yours.  12.  Is  your  house  large? 
13.  Our  house  is  very  large.  14.  My  book  is  French,  yours  is 
English,  and  his  is  German.  15.  Do  you  speak  of  our  friends? 
16.  I  speak  of  yours  and  of  mine.  17.  Who  is  in  our  room  ? 
18.  Your  brother  is  in  yours,  and  my  sister  is  in  mine.  19.  Mr. 
Smith's  children  (hijos)  are  taller  than  ours.  20.  My  brother's  house 
is  large,  but  mine  is  larger.  21.  The  large  book  is  mine,  and  the 
small  one  is  his.  22.  Which  pens  are  the  better,  yours  or  mine  1 
23.  Mine  are  the  best.  24.  My  sister  and  yours  are  at  (en)  the  ball. 
25.  Is  the  slate  yours  ?  26.  The  slate  is  mine,  but  the  pencil  is  not 
mine.  27.  Do  you  write  to  your  father  ?  28.  I  write  to  mine  and  to 
yours.  29.  Have  you  two  tables  in  your  room  ?  30.  I  have  one 
table  in  my  room,  but  my  brother  has  three  tables  in  his.  31.  Are 
the  tables  his  ?  32.  Two  are  his,  and  one  is  mine.  33.  All  the  books 
are  ours. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

It  The  possessive  pronouns,  like  the  possessive  adjectives, 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  object  possessed,  and  not, 
as  in  English,  with  the  possessor. 

Mi  hermano  y  el  suyo,  My  brother  and  his  (or  hers). 

Mi  madre  y  la  suya,  My  mother  and  his  (or  hers). 

Mis  libros  y  los  suyos,  My  books  and  his  (or  hers). 

Nuestras  amigas  y  las  suyas,  My  friends  (fern.)  and  his  (or  hers). 

2.  More  expression  can  be  given  to  these  pronouns  by  adding 
to  them  the  words  mismo,  masc.,  misma,  fern.,  very  same;  and 
propio,  masc.,  propia,  fern.,  own  : 

El  mio  mismo,          My  own. 

La  suya  misma,         His  (her  your)  own. 

El  suyo  propio,         His  (her  or  your)  own. 

3*  Instead  of  el  vuestro,  la  vuestra,  los  vuestros,  las  vuestras, 
the  Spaniards  use  el  suyo,  m.  s.,  la  suya,  f.  $.,  which  really 


90  LESSON    14. 

mean  his  or  hers,  when  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  is  suffi- 
ciently clear : 

Hablo  de  mi  padre  y  del  suyo,         /  speak  of  my  father  and  of  yours. 
Quiero  mi  pluma,  y  la  suya,  I  want  my  pen  and  yours. 

4.  When,  however,  the  sentence  is  not  sufficiently  clear,  el 
(la,  los,  las,  lo)  de  V.  is  used  for  yours  : 

Mi  libro  y  el  de  V. ,         My  book  and  yours,  sing. 
Mi  casa  y  la  de  V  V.,       My  house  and  yours,  pi. 

5,  In  the  same  way,  if  we  wish  to  indicate  clearly  the  differ- 
ence between  his,  hers,  or  theirs,  we  use  el  de  el,  el  de  ella,  el 
de  ellos,  and  el  de  ellas,  instead  of  el  suyo,  la  suya,  etc.  •. 

Aqui  esta  mi  casa  y  alia  esta  la  de        Here  is  my  house  and  there  is 

ellos,  theirs. 

La  mesa  es  de  41,  The  table  is  his. 

6*    The  definite  article  may  also  be  used  with  the  preposition 
de  before  nosotros,  etc.,  instead  of  el  nuestro,  la  nuestra,  etc. : 
Los  libros  de  ellos  y  los  de  nosotros,         Their  books  and  ours. 

7«    The  possessive  pronouns  are  also  used  with  the  neuter 
article  lo,  and  mean  the  property  of,  what  belongs  to,  etc. : 
f  Thine  and  mine  (tuum  et  meum). 
Lo  tuyo  y  lo  mio,      <  Thy  property  and  mine. 

'  What  belongs  to  thee  and  to  me. 

8.  The  verb  ser,  to  be,  with  or  without  the  adjective  mio,  m., 
mia,/.;  tuyo,  m.,  tuya,/. ;  suyo,  m.,  suya,//  and  nuestro, 
m.,  nuestra,/.,  is  frequently  used  to  express  possession.     When 
used  without  the  adjective,  it  is  accompanied  by  the  preposi- 
tion de : 

El  libro  es  mio,  The  look  is  mine. 

La  casa  es  suya,  The  house  is  his  (hers  or  yours), 

El  caballo  es  nuestro,  The  horse  is  ours. 

El  libro  es  de  mi  hermano,  The  book  is  my  brother's. 

9.  ^Conoce  V.  ?  (from  conocer),  and  ^sabe  V.  ?  (from  saber) 
both  mean  do  you  know  ?  but  conocer  means  rather  to  know  by 


DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


91 


the  senses,  while  saber  means  more  properly  to  know  by  the 
mind,  to  be  versed  in.  Conocer,  besides,  is  applied  to  persons 
and  things,  while  saber  is  said  only  of  things,  and  may  precede 
another  verb : 

Yo  couozco  al  hombre,1          I  know  the  man. 

i  Conoce  V.  mi  casa  ?  Do  you  know  my  house  ? 

i  Sabe  V.  su  leccion  ?  Do  you  know  your  lesson  ? 

i  Sabe  V.  leer  ?  Do  you  know  how. to  read  ? 

Conozco  or  se  el  ingles,          /  know  the  English  language. 


Leccion  XV. 


Lesson  XV. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    ADJECTIVES. 


Singular. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

Este,  esta,  this ; 
Ese,  esa,  that  ; 
Aquel,  aquella,  that; 


Plural. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

estos,         estas,        these. 
esos,  esas,         those. 

aquellos,    aquellas,  those. 


Ejemplos. 

Este  hombre  es  rico. 
Esta  mujer  es  joven. 
Ese  libro  y  esa  plnma  son  mios. 
Aquel  soldado  es  valiente. 
Aquella  mujer  es  pobre. 
Estos  hombres  son  ricos. 
Estas  mujeres  son  jovenes. 
Aquellos  muchachos  son  jovenes. 

Adverbs  and  Adjectives  of  Quantity 


Examples. 

This  man  is  rich. 

This  woman  is  young. 

That  book  and  that  pen  are  mine. 

That  soldier  is  brave. 

That  woma'n  is  poor. 

These  men  are  rich. 

These  women  are  young. 

Those  boys  are  young. 


Cuanto,  m.,  cuanta,  f.,  how  much. 
Poco,  m.,  poca,  f.,  little. 
Tanto,  m.,  tanta,  f.,  so  much,  as  much. 
Mucho,  m.,  mucha,  f.,  much. 
Demasiado,  m.,   demasiada,    f.,  too 

much,  too. 

Unos  cuantos,  algunos,  some. 
Bastante,  s.,  bastantes,  pi. .enough. 


Cuantos,  m.,  cuantas,  f.,  how  many. 
Pocos,  m.,  pocas,  f.,  few.       [many. 
Tantos,   m.,  t  ant  as,  f.,  so  many,  as 
Muchos,  m.,  muchas,  f.,  many. 
Demasiados,  m.,  demasiadas,  f.,  too 

many,  too. 
Unos  pocos,  a  few. 


1  See  page  106,  3. 


92  LESSON   15. 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 

La  experiencia,  the  experience,  i  Ahi,  there. 


El  baiil,  the  trunk. 
Elclavel,  the  pink. 
El  pais,  the  country. 
La  carta,  the  letter. 


La  fiesta,  the  holy  day. 
La  ropa,  the  clothes. 
A  casa,  to  the  house. 


Exercise  29. 


Londres,  London. 

i  Va  V.  1  are  you  going  $ 

Voy,  1  am  going. 


1.  jQuien  es  esta  senora?  2.  Esta  seiiora  es  mi  madre,  y  este 
caballero  es  mi  padre.  3.  [  A  donde  va  V.  esta  manana  1  4.  Voy  a 
casa  de  mi  primo.  5.  [  Quiere  V.  esta  rosa  6  aquel  clavel  ?  6.  No 
quiero  ninguna  flor.  7.  Este  muchachito  es  mi  hermano,  y  esta 
muchachita  es  mi  hermana.  8.  El  general  es  el  padre  de  estos  mu- 
chachos.  9.  i  Son  bonitas  aquellas  senoritas  ?  10.  Son  jovenes,  pero 
no  son  muy  bonitas.  11.  j  Habla  frances  aquel  hombre  ?  12.  Habla 
ingles,  pero  no  habla  frances.  13.  Ese  Ingles  es  el  amigo  de  aquel 
Frances.  14.  Aquel  oficial  es  hermano  de  esta  senora.  15.  El  capi- 
tan  de  este  buque  es  joven,  pero  tiene  mucha  experiencia.  16.  [  Es 
pobre  esta  mujer?  17.  Esta  mujer  es  pobre,  pero  aquella  mujer 
es  rica.  18.  [  Son  franceses  esos  muchachos  1  19.  Son  alemanes. 
20.  [Que  tiene  V.  en  aquellos  baules?  21.  Tengo  todos  mis  libros 
en  el  pequeno  baul,  y  mi  ropa  en  el  grande.  22.  [  Son  para  V. 
estas  cartas  ?  23.  No,  senor,  son  para  mi  padre.  24.  i  Quien  vive 
en  esa  casa  ?  25.  El  padre  de  esos  muchachos  vive  ahi.  26.  Este 
hombre  es  el  padre  de  aquellos  muchachos,  y  esta  mujer  es  la  madre 
de  aquellas  muchachas.  27.  Esta  senora  es  de  Paris,  y  su  prima  de 
Londres. 

Exercise  30. 

1.  Is  this  book  yours  ?  2.  This  book  is  mine,  but  that  book  is  my 
brother's.  3.  Who  is  that  little  boy  1  4.  He  is  (the)  son  of  that 
lady.  5.  This  gentleman  and  that  lady  are  French.  6.  Are  you  the 
brother  of  these  ladies  ?  7.  I  am  their  cousin.  8.  Give  me  a  piece 
of  that  cake.  9.  That  cake  is  not  mine.  10.  This  book  and  pencil 
are  for  your  brother.  11.  This  house  is  higher  than  that  church. 
12.  Where  are  you  going  this  afternoon  1  13.  I  don't  know  yet. 
14.  These  flowers  are  very  beautiful.  15.  Are  these  two  gentlemen 
brothers  ?  16.  They  are  not  brothers,  they  are  friends.  17.  Do  you 
know  that  country  ?  18.  I  know  all  those  countries.  19.  Is  this 
gentleman  the  husband  of  that  lady  ?  20.  No,  he  is  her  brother. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    ADJECTIVES.  93 

21.  This  house  is  too  small  for  us.  22.  How  many  children  has  that 
man  1  23.  He  has  three  or  four.  24.  Have  you  money  enough 
(enough  money)  ?  25.  I  have  not  much,  but  I  have  enough. 
26.  Have  you  much  money  1  27.  I  have  very  little.  28.  You 
speak  too  much. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Este,  m.,  esta,/.,  designate  the  person  or  object  nearer  to 
the  speaker ;  ese,  m.,  esa,  /.,  the  person  or  object  nearer  to 
the  person  spoken  to  ;  while  aquel,  m.,  aquella,  /*.,  designate  the 
person  or  object  equally  distant  and  quite  reihote  from  the 
speaker  and  the  person  who  is  addressed  : 

Este  hombre.  —  Ese  libro.  —  Aquel  This  man.  —  That  book.  —  That 

lapiz.  pencil. 

Esta  mujer.  —  Esa  pluma.  —  Aquella  This  woman.  —  That  pen.  —  That 

cosa.  thing. 

The  same  rule  is  applicable  to  the  plural  of  these  demonstra- 
tive adjectives: 

Estos  hombres.  —  Esos  libros.  —  Aquellos  These  men.  —  Those  looks.  — 
lapices.  Those  pencils. 

Estas  mujeres.  —  Esas  plumas.  —  Aquellas  These  women. —  These  pens. — 
cosas.  Those  things. 

2*  Although  the  demonstrative  adjectives  precede  tbe  nouns, 
they  are  placed  sometimes  after  them  to  express  contemptj, 
anger,  or  irony : 

Al  picaro  ese  le  hare  yo  castigar,         /  will  have  this  rogue  punished. 

3,  The  demonstrative    adjective    must    be    repeated   before 
every  noun : 

Este  hombre,  esta  mujer  y  este  muchacho  This  man,  woman,  and  child 
estan  males,  are  sick. 

4,  Donde,  where,  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  a  when  the 
verb  expresses  motion,  and  by  en  when  it  expresses  position  or 
situation.     A  donde  and  en  donde  correspond  in  fact  to  the 

English  whither  and  wherein : 
i 

i  A  donde  va  V.  ?  Where  are  you  going  to  ? 

i  En  d6nde  esta  V.  ?         Where  are  you  * 


94  LESSON    16. 

Lcccion  XVI.  Lesson  XVI. 

k. 

DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.  Masculine. 

iSste,  this  one,  the  latter  ;  estos,  these,  the  latter. 

Ese,  that  one  ;  esos,  those. 

Aquel,  that  one,  the  former  ;  aquellos,  those,  the  former. 

Feminine.  Feminine. 

Esta,  this  one,  the  latter  ;  estas,  these,  the  latter. 

Esa,  that  one ;  esas,  those. 

Aquella,  that  one,  the  former  ;    aquellas,  those,  the  former. 

Neuter. 
Esto,  this  (this  thing). 

f Duello,  }that(thatthin^ 
El,  la,  los,  las,  lo,  as  Pronouns. 

El  de,  —  la  de,  That  of. 

Los  de,  —  las  de,  Those  of. 

El  or  la  de  hierro,  The  iron  one  (that  of  iron). 

Los  or  las  de  oro,  The  gold  ones  (those  of  gold). 

El  or  la  que  yo  tengo,  The  one  I  have  (that  which  I  have). 

Los  or  las  que  yo  tengo,  Those  I  have  (those  which  I  have). 

El  que,  la  que,  los  que,  las  que,  lo  que. 

El  que  esta  aqui,  The  one  who  is  here  (he  who  is  here). 

La  que  esta  alii,  The  one  who  is  there  (she  who  is  there). 

Los  que  dicen  eso,  Those  who  say  that  (they  who  say  that). 

Las  que  hablan,  Those  (fern.)  who  speak  (they  (fern.}  who  speak). 

Lo  que  yo  tengo,  What  I  have  (that  which  I  have). 

Es  bueno,  it  is  good.  Son  buenos,  they  are  good. 

Es  muy  hermoso,  it  is  very  pretty.  Son  muy  hennosos,  they  are  very  pretty. 

Es  mi  libro,  it  is  my  book.  Son  mios,  they  are  mine. 

i  Que  es  ?  what  is  it?  j  Esta  listo  ?  is  it  ready  ? 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS 


95 


Ejemplos. 

Mi  lapiz  y  el  de  mi  hermano. 

Mis  lapices  y  los  de  mi  hermano. 
Mi  pluma  y  la  de  mi  hermana. 
Mis  plumas  y  las  de  mi  hermana. 
Mis  libros  y  los  de  mi  amigo. 
Mis  casas  y  las  de  mi  hermano. 


iSste  es  grande,  aquel  es  pequeno, 

m.  sing. 
Esta  es  grande,  aquella  es  pequena, 

/.  sing. 
Estos  son  buenos,  aquellos  son  ma- 

los,  m.  pi. 
lllstas  son  buenas,  aquellas  son  ma- 

las,  f.pl. 
Esto  es  mio,  aquello  es  suyo. 


j  Que   libro  quiere  V.  ?  —  l5ste  6 

aquel. 
I  Que  pluma  quiere  V.  ?  —  l^sta  6 

aquella. 
i  Que  libros  quiere  V.  ?  —  Estos  6 

aquellos. 
I  Que  plumas  quiere  V.  ?  —  ISstas 

6  aquellas. 
i  Que  quiere  V.  ?  —  Eso. 

4  Que  cuchillo  vende  V.  ?  —  El  de 

hierro. 
j  Que  casas  compra  V.  ?  —  Las  de 

madera. 

Esto  es  bueno,  aquello  es  malo. 
Deme  V.  eso. 
Lo  que  tengo  es  bueno. 


Examples. 

My  pencil  and  my  brother's  (that  of 

my  brother). 
My  pencils  and  my  brother's  (those 

of  my  brother). 
My  pen  and  my  sister's  (that  of  my. 

sister). 
My  pens  and  my  sister's  (those  of 

my  sister). 
My  books  and  my  friend's  (those  of 

my  friend). 
My  houses  and  my  brother's  (those 

of  my  brother). 

This  one  is  large,  that  one  is  small 
This  one  is  large,  that  one  is  small. 
These  are  good,  those  are  bad. 
These  are  good,  those  are  bad. 

This  (thing)  is  mine,  that  (thing)  is 
his. 

What  (which)  book  will  you  have  ? 

—  This  one  or  that  one. 

What  (which)  pen  will  you  have  ? 

—  This  one  or  that  one. 

What  (which)  books  will  you  have  ? 

—  These  or  those. 

What  (which)  pens  will  you  have? 

—  These  or  those. 

What  will  you  have  ?  —  That. 

What  knife  do  you  sell  ?  —  The  iron 

one. 
What  houses  do  you  buy  ?  —  The 

wooden  ones. 
This  is  good,  that  is  bad. 
Give  me  that. 
What  I  have  is  good. 


96 


LESSON   16. 


j  Que  es  eso  ? 

i  Quie*n  es  ?  —  Soy  yo. 

I  Quien  habla?  —  Es  ella. 

El  es  Ingles. 

Ellas  son  Francesas. 

Su  hermano  es  sastre. 

i  V.  tiene  dinero,  no  es  verdad  ? 
i  El  esta  malo,  no  es  verdad  ? 
i  Y.  habla  ingles,  no  es  verdad  ? 
i  Y.  quiere  comprar  la  casa,  no  es 

verdad  ? 

i  V.  puede  venir,  no  es  verdad  ? 
i  V.  salio,  no  es  verdad  ? 

Vocabulario. 

El  baiil,  the  trunk. 
El  papel,  the  paper. 
Elpaquete,  the  package. 
El  pulpero,  the  grocer. 
El  vaso,  the  glass. 
La  plata,  the  silver. 
Las  tijeras,  the  scissors. 
Ayer,  yesterday. 


What  is  that  ? 

Who  is  it  ?— It  is  L 

Who  speaks  ?  —  It  is  she. 

He  is  English. 

They  (fern.)  are  French. 

His  brother  is  a  tailor. 

You  have  money,  have  you  not  ? 
He  is  sick,  is  he  not  ? 
You  speak  English,  do  you  not  ? 
You  wish  to  buy  the  house,  do  you 

not? 

You  can  come,  can  you  not  ? 
You  went  out,  did  you  not  ? 

Vocabulary. 

De  este  modo,  in  this  way. 

Demasiado,  too,  too  much,  too  many. 

Dice,  says. 

i  Hace  V.  1  do  you  do  ? 

Julio,  Julius. 

Limpio,  clean. 

Por  supuesto,  of  course. 


Exercise  31. 

1.  i  Tiene  V.  mis  tijeras  ?  2.  Tengo  las  de  su  hermana.  3.  i  Quiere 
V.  este  pedazo  de  pan  6  aquel  ?  4.  Deme  V.  ese.  5.  i  Donde  estan 
mis  libros  1  6.  Los  de  V.  estan  en  mi  cuarto,  pero  los  de  su  hermano 
estan  aqui.  7.  j  Quiere  Y.  el  reloj  de  oro  6  el  de  plata  ?  8.  Quiero 
el  de  oro,  por  supuesto.  9.  Carlos  y  Eduardo  ya  tienen  sus  baules,  el 
de  Carlos  es  muy  grande,  pero  el  de  Eduardo  es  demasiado  pequeno. 
10.  Deme  V.  otra  pluma,  la  que  tengo  es  muy  mala.  11.  fil  que  dice 
esoj  es  un  hombre  malo.  12.  [  Tiene  V.  la  pluma  de  Enrique  1 
13.  Tengo  la  de  Julio.  14.  Aqui  estd  el  libro  de  mi  hermano  y  el 
info  ;  este  es  mas  bonito  que  aquel.  15.  Las  manzanas  de  hoy  son 
mejores  que  las  de  ayer.  16.  j  Quiere  Y.  este  vaso  6  aquel  ?  17.  Deme 
V.  el  que  Y.  tiene  ;  el  que  esta  alii  no  esta  lirnpio.  18.  [  Sabe  Y.  lo 
que  tengo  1  19.  Yo  se  muy  bien  lo  que  Y.  tiene.  20.  i  Que  quiere 
V.  aqui  ?  21.  Yo  quiero  lo  que  es  inio.  22.  i  Que  es  eso  ?  23.  Es 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS.  97 

un  pedazo  de  papel.  24.  Estos  dos  hombres  son  hermanos,  el  que 
tiene  el  sombrero  negro  habla  frances.  25.  j  Quien  esta  d  la  puerta  ? 
26.  Es  un  muchacho  con  un  paquete.  27.  j  Es  un  paquete  grande  ? 
28.  No,  es  un  paquete  muy  pequeno.  29.  j  Es  aquello  para  V.  ?  30. 
No,  es  para  mi  hermano. 

Exercise  32. 

1.  I  have  two  pencils;  this  one  is  for  you  and  that  one  for  your 
sister.  2.  These  gentlemen  are  French,  and  those  are  English ;  the 
latter  are  rich,  but  the  former  are  poor.  3.  Are  the  apples  good  1 
4.  Those  of  our  grocer  are  very  good.  5.  Is  this  package  for  you  1 
6.  No ;  not  this  one,  but  that  one.  7.  What  pen  will  you  have  1 
8.  Give  me  the  gold  one.  9.  My  house  is  small,  but  my  brother's  is 
much  smaller.  10.  Give  me  that.  11.  I  want  this,  but  not  that. 
12.  Is  this  well  1  13.  This  is  well,  but  that  is  not  so  well.  14.  Are 
those  gentlemen  English  1  15.  They  are  French.  16.  Who  is  at  the 
door  ?  is  it  Edward  1  17.  No,  sir,  it  is  Henry.  18.  What  is  that  ? 
19.  It  is  a  little  box.  20.  For  whom  is  that  ?  21.  It  is  for  your 
brother.  22.  Is  it  good  ?  23.  It  is  not  good.  24.  How  do  you  do 
that  1  25.  In  this  way  ;  it  is  very  easy.  26.  Do  you  speak  English 
or  French  1  27.  I  speak  English,  but  not  French.  28.  Who  is  the 
man  at  the  door  ?  29.  It  is  not  a  man,  it  is  a  woman.  30.  Will 
you  have  this  or  that  1  31.  I  don't  wish  anything.  32.  Who  is  it  ? 
33.  It  is  I. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  In  the  foregoing  lesson  the  difference  between  este,  ese, 
and  aquel  has  been  sufficiently  explained.     The  same  rule  (L. 
15,  R.  1)  is  applicable  to  the  neuter  esto,  eso,  and  aquello,  that 
is  to  say,  that  esto  refers  to  the  object  nearer  to  the  speaker  ; 
eso  to  the  object  nearer  to  the  person  spoken  to,  and  aquello 
the  object  equally  distant  from  the  speaker  and  the  person  who 
is  addressed  : 

Esto  es  bueno,  eso  es  malo  ;  This  (thing)  is  good,  that  one  is  bad;  lut 

pero  aquello  es  peor,  that  one  there  is  worse. 

2.  When  there  are  two  objects  in  the  sentence  to  which  ref- 

7 


y«  LESSON   16. 

ere  nee  is  to  be  made,  aquel  is  used  for  the  first  one  mentioned, 
and  este  for  the  last  mentioned. 

The  same  rule  is  applicable  to  the  feminine,  the  plural,  and 
the  neuter  : 

Carlos  era  grande,   Federico  ambi-         Charles  was  great,  Frederic  ambi- 
cioso  ;    este   (Federico)   valiente,  tious ;  the  latter  brave,  the  former 

aquel  (Carlos)  poderoso,  powerful. 

80  Esto  is  also  used  when  referring  to  something  which  the 
speaker  has  already  mentioned ;  and  eso  when  referring  to 
something  mentioned  by  the  person  who  is  addressed  : 

Esto  que  yo  digo,  es  cierto,  What  I  say  is  certain. 

Eso  que  V.  dice,  no  es  verdad,          What  you  say  is  not  true. 

4.  When  a  fourth  object  is  referred  to,  the  adjective  otro, 
other ,  is  added  to  the  adjective,  or  to  the  pronoun  : 

Aquel  otro  libro,  That  other  book. 

Aquel  otro,  That  other  one. 

5.  The   word  mismo  is  often  added  to  the  demonstrative 
pronouns  to  call  attention  more  especially  to  them : 

fete  mismo,  This  very  or  same  one. 

Aquel  mismo,  That  very  or  same  one. 

6.  That  of  is  rendered  by  el  de  or  la  de,  and  those  of  by  los 

de  or  las  de,  according  to  the  gender  of  the  noun  referred  to. 
The  English  formation  of  the  possessive  does  not  exist  in 
Spanish  : 

Mi  libro  y  el  de  mi  amigo,  My  look  and  my  friend's. 

Nuestra  casa  y  la  de  nuestros  amigos,  Our  house  and  our  friends'. 

Mis  amigos  y  los  de  V.  My  friends  and  yours. 

Sus  libros  de  V.  y  los  de  Juan,  Your  books  and  John's. 

7.  That  which,  the  one  which,  are  rendered  by  el  que  or  la 
que,  and  those  which,  by  los  que  or  las  que. 

Quien,  who,  may  be  used  instead  of  que  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence  when  speaking  of  a  person  : 

Ull  qne  or  el  quien  habla  mal  de         He  who  (whoever)  speaks  ill  of  his 
su   prdjimo,    no   sera  admitido  neighbor  shall  not  be  admitted  in 

en  mi  casa,  my  house. 


AUXILIARY    VERB   HABER.  99 

8t    The  article  and  the   demonstrative  or  relative   pronoun 
should  never  be  separated  in  Spanish,  and  when  this  separation 
takes  place  in  English  a  different  construction  must  be  adopted  : 
Yerran  los  que  dicen  eso,  Those  are  mistaken  who  say  that. 

9.  Ello  is  often  used  for  eso,  and  corresponds  also  to  the 
pronoun  it: 

Hablaraos  de  ello,  We  speak  of  it. 

10.  The   pronoun    it   and    its    corresponding    they   for  the 
plural,  when  the  subjects  of  a  sentence,  are  generally  suppressed 
in  Spanish : 

Es  bueno,  it  is  good  ;         Son  buenos,  they  are  good. 
Esta  aqui,  it  is  here  ;        Estan  alii,  they  are  there. 


Leccion  XVII.  Lesson  XVII. 

AUXILIARY   VERB  HABER,    to  have. 

Yo  he,  I  have. 

Tii  has,  thou  hast. 

El  ha,  he  has. 

Ella  ha,  she  has. 

V.  ha,  you  have. 

Nosotros  hemos,  we  have. 

Vosotros  habeis,  you  have. 

Ellos  (m.)  han,  they  have. 

Ellas  (/. )  han,  they  have. 

VV.  han,  you  have. 

Regular  Verbs. 
Verbs  of  the  1  st  Conjugation,  ending  in  ar : 

Hablar,  hablado,  to  speak,  spoken. 

Cortar,  cortado,  to  cut,  cut. 

Tomar,  tornado,  to  take,  taken. 

Comprar,  comprado,  to  buy,  bought. 

Verbs  of  the  2d  Conjugation,  ending  in  er : 

Comer,  comido,  to  eat,  eaten. 

Beber,  bebido,  to  drink,  drunk. 

Vender,  vendido,  to  sell,  sold. 

Temer,  ternido,  to  fear,  feared. 


100 


LESSON 


Verbs  of  the  3d  Conjugation,  ending  in  ir : 

Recibir,  recibido,      to  receive,  received. 

Subir,  subido,  to  ascend,  to  go  up  ;  ascended,  gone  up, 

Partir,  partido,         to  divide,  divided. 


Ejemplos. 

I  A  quien  ha  hablado  V.  ? 

He  hablado  a  este  hombre. 

Mi  hermano  ha  vendido  su  casa. 

Los  muchachos  han  comido  el  pan. 

i  Han  recibido  VV.  diuero  ? 

Hemos  recibido  un  poco. 

j  Donde  ha  estado  V.  ? 

He  estado  en  la  casa. 

i  Quien  ha  tornado  mi  sombrero  ? 

Nadie  ha  tornado  su  sombrero. 

Hemos  sido  muy  felices. 

i  Quien  ha  salido  ? 

Nadie  ha  salido. 

No  he  coinprado  nada. 

He  dado  un  pedazo  de  pan  al  pobre. 


Examples. 

To  whom  have  you  spoken  ? 
I  have  spoken  to  this  man. 
My  brother  has  sold  his  house. 
The  boys  have  eaten  the  bread. 
Have  you  received  any  money  ? 
We  have  received  a  little. 
Where  have  you  been  ? 
I  have  been  in  the  house. 
Who  has  taken  my  hat  ? 
Nobody  has  taken  your  hat. 
We  have  been  very  happy. 
Who  has  gone  out  ? 
Nobody  has  gone  out. 
I  have  not  bought  anything. 
I  have  given  a  piece  of  bread  to  the 
poor  man. 


Vocabulario. 

El  cajdn,  the  drawer. 

El  campo,  the  country.1 

El  pafs,  the  country.1 

El  panuelo,  the  handkerchief. 

El  duro,  the  dollar. 

El  tiempo,  the  time. 

La  cosa,  the  thing. 

Las  mercancias,  the  goods. 

La  sopa,  the  soup. 

Aprender,  to  learn. 

Castigar,  to  punish. 

Dar,  to  give. 

Desobediente,  disobedient. 


Vocabulary. 

Estar,  to  be. 

Europa,  Europe. 

Hallar,  to  find. 

Male,  unwell. 

Otro,  another. 

Perder,  to  lose. 

Porque,  because. 

Salir,  to  go  out. 

Ser,  to  be. 

Tener,  to  have. 

Todo  el  mundo,  everybody. 

Varies,  as,  several. 

Vivir,  to  live. 


1  Campo  refers  to  the  country  contrasted  with  the  city,  while  pais  means 
L  tract  of  land  inhabited  by  a  nation. 


AUXILIARY    VERB   II A  BUR.  101 

Exercise  3S.  , 

1.  Los  muchachos  ban  comido  todas  las  manzanas  del  jardm. 
2.  i  Ha  dado  V.  el  cafe  al  caballero  ?  3.  No,  seiiora,  pero  he  dado 
el  te  a  la  senora.  4.  [  Ha  comprado  Y.  una  mesa  ?  5.  Si,  senor,  he 
comprado  una  mesa  de  caoba.  6.  £  En  donde  ha  hallado  Y.  esto  ? 
7.  En  nuestro  jardm.  8.  i  Quien  ha  tornado  dinero  de  mi  cajon  ? 
9.  Su  bermano  de  Y.  ha  tornado  dinero  y  papeles.  10.  i  Que  sopa  han 
tenido  YY.  1  11.  Henios  tenido  una  sopa  muy  buena.  12.  j  Que 
han  comprado  YY.  hoy  ?  13.  Hemos  comprado  muchisimas  cosas. 
14.  [  Que  ha  perdido  su  hermana  de  Y.?  15.  Ha  perdido  su  panuelo. 
16.  i  Han  comprado  YY.  manzanas  ?  17.  No,  senor,  hemos  com- 
prado peras.  18.  i  Ha  recibido  Y.  algo  de  su  padre  ?  19.  He  reci- 
bido  varias  cosas.  20.  £  Ha  estado  V.  malo  1  21.  Si,  senor,  he 
estado  bastante  malo.  22.  i  Quien  ha  estado  en  la  casa  1  23.  Nadie 
ha  estado  en  la  casa,  pero  alguno  ha  estado  en  el  jardin.  24.  [  Tor- 
que no  ha  comprado  Y.  la  casa  del  medico,  Y.  que  es  tan  rico  ? 
25.  Nunca  he  sido  rico.  26.  £  Ha  aprendido  Y.  su  leccion.  ?  27.  To- 
davia  no,  no  he  tenido  tiempo.  28.  i  De  quien  ha  hablado  Y.? 
29.  He  hablado  de  mis  buenos  amigos.  30.  Mi  hermano  ha  vendido 
su  caballo,  pero  ha  comprado  otro  mas  grande. 

Exercise  34. 

1.  The  soldier  has  given  an  apple  to  the  child.  2.  My  sister  has 
received  two  letters  from  Paris.  3.  The  children  have  been  in  the 
garden  with  their  little  friends.  4.  Have  the  boys  eaten  the  cheese  1 
5.  They  have  eaten  the  bread.  6.  Has  the  general  bought  a  house  ? 
7.  He  has  bought  a  bouse  in  our  street.  8.  Have  you  had  any 
money  ?  9.  I  have  had  two  dollars.  10.  Where  have  you  been, 
John  1  11.  I  have  been  in  the  country.  12.  Have  you  bought  your 
silk  dress  in  that  large  store  ?  13.  I  have  bought  no  dress.  14.  Who 
has  been  sick  at  your  house  ?  15.  Everybody  has  been  sick. 
16.  Charles  has  been  disobedient  and  he  has  been  punished.  17.  Tbe 
merchant  has  received  many  goods  from  Europe.  18.  Have  you 
found  anything  in  the  drawer  ?  19.  I  have  not  found  anything  in 
it  (en  el).  20.  Why  has  not  your  brother  gone  out?  21.  Because 
he  has  not  been  well.  22.  Have  you  brought  anything  for  the  chil- 
dren ?  23.  Yes,  I  have  brought  something  useful  for  them  (ellos). 
24.  Have  you  lived  in  that  country  ?  25.  No,  sir,  I  have  never  beeix 


102  LESSON   17. 

in  that  ^ouij.ry.  ;26.  Haye  /ou  eaten  enough,  my  friend  1  27.  Yes 
sir,  I  have  eaten  and  drunk  enough.  28.  Has  your  father  gone  out  \ 
29.  He  has  not  gone  out  yet.  30.  The  soldiers  have  received  less 
bread  than  meat. 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

It  The  verb  to  have  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  two  different 
verbs,  tener  and  haber. 

Tener,  of  which  we  have  already  spoken  (L.  IV.,  p.  36),  is 
used  as  an  active  verb  to  indicate  a  material  or  immaterial  pos- 
session, and  generally  means  to  possess,  to  hold,  as  : 

Yo  tengo  dinero,  /  have  money.  El  tiene  tiempo,  he  has  time. 

El  tiene  un  hasten,  he  has  a  stick.         Tenemos  pan,  we  have  bread. 

Haber  is  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb  preceding  the  past  parti- 
ciple as : 

He  recibido  dinero,  1  have  received  money. 

Hemos  comido  pan,          We  have  eaten  bread. 

Haber  cannot  be  separated  from  the  principal  verb  as  is  the 
case  in  English  in  interrogative  sentences.  Thus  :  Have  you 
given  f  must  be  rendered  by  £  ha  dado  V.  ?  and  has  he  come  ? 
by  ^  ha  venido  el  ? 

2.  Haber  was  formerly  used  as  an  active  verb,  and  had  then 
the  following  Imperative  : 

He  tu,  thou  shalt  have  ;  habed,  you  shall  have. 

It  may  be  used  even  now  in  sentences  with  the  infinitive  : 

Aprovechare  cuantos  medios  yo  puedo  /  will  use  all  the  means  I  may 

haber,  have. 

El  empleo  cuanta  influencia  pudo  ha-  He  used  all  the  influence  he  could 

ber.  command  (have). 

3,  The  verb  tener  may  be  used  sometimes  as  auxiliary,  and 
the  sense  of  the  sentence  would   be  but  slightly  altered.     Ju 


AUXILIARY   VERB   II A  BE R.  103 

this  case  the  participle  would  have  to  agree  in  gender  and  num- 
ber with  the  noun : 

Tengo  escritas  las  cartas,  /  have  the  letters  (all)  written. 

Tenemos  el  dinero  contado,          We  have  the  money  counted. 
This  way  of  expressing  one's  self  ought,  however,  to  be  avoided  by  all 
those  not  perfectly  familiar  with  the  language,  as  it  might  lead  to  mistakes 
in  style. 

4.    All  verbs  in  Spanish  end  in  ar,  er,  or  ir. 

Verbs  ending  in  ar  belong  to  the  1st  Conjugation,  as  : 
A  mar,  to  love  ;         dar,  to  give  ;         hablar,  to  speak. 

Verbs  ending  in  er  belong  to  the  2d  Conjugation,  as : 
Comer,  to  eat ;         beber,  to  drink;          correr,  to  run  ;          tener,  to  have. 

Verbs  ending  in  ir  belong  to  the  3d  Conjugation,  as : 
Recibir,  to  receive;       huir,  to  flee  ;       dividir,  to  divide;       salir,  to  go  out. 

5*  All  regular  verbs  of  the  1st  Conjugation  end  in  the  past 
participle  in  ado,  and  those  of  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations  in 
ido.  The  same  may  be  said  of  nearly  all  the  irregular  verbs  in 
the  three  conjugations  :  amar,  amado  ;  coger,  cogido  ;  atribuir^ 
atribuido;  etc. 


Leccion  XVIII.  Lesson  XVIII. 

VERB  HABER,  to  have  (continued.) 

Irregular  Participles. 

Abrir,  to  open  ;  abierto,  opened. 

Cubrir,  to  cover  ;  cubierto,  covered. 

Decir,  to  say,  to  tell;  dicho,  said,  told. 

Escribir,  to  write  ;  escrito,  written. 

Hacer,  to  make,  to  do;  hecho,  made,  done. 

Imprimir,  to  print ;  impreso,  printed. 

Morir,  to  die  ;  muerto,  died. 

Poner,  to  put ;  puesto,  put. 

Solver,  to  loosen  ;  suelto,  loosed. 

Ver,  to  see  ;  visto,  seen. 

Volver.  to  return. ;  vuelto,  returned. 


104 


LESSON   18. 


Haber  de  and  tener  que  : 


I  Que*  he  de  hacer  ?  ) 

i  Que  tengo  que  hacer  ?    ) 

V.  ha  de  estudiar,          ) 

V.  tiene  que  estudiar,   J 

i  Que  hemos  de  decir  ?      1 

i  Que  tenemos  que  decir  ? ) 

W.  han  de  decir  la  verdad,          ) 

W.  tienen  que  decir  la  verdad,    ) 


What  am  I  to  do? 
You  must  study. 
What  are  we  to  say  1 
You  must  tell  the  truth. 


Preposition  &  and  Active  Verbs: 


$  X.  quien  ha  visto  V.  ? 
He  visto  d  su  padre  de  V. 
Amo  d  mis  amigos, 
Juan  ha  perdido  d  su  padre, 
El  medico  cura  al  enfermo, 


Whom  have  you  seen  ? 

I  have  seen  your  father. 

I  love  my  friends. 

John  has  lost  his  father. 

The  physician  cures  the  patient. 


Fero  and  sino: 


No  tengo  oro,  pero  tengo  plata, 
No  tengo  oro,  sino  plata, 
131  es  joven,  pero  es  muy  prudente, 
No  tenemos  hermanos,  sino  hermanas, 
No  hablo  ingles,  sino  espahol, 
^1  no  habla  ingles,   pero  habla   es- 
paaol, 

6  and  ti,  or;  Y  and 


I  have  not  gold,  but  I  have  silver. 
1  have  not  gold,  but  silver. 
He  is  young,  but  he  is  very  prudent. 
We  have  no  brothers,  but  sisters. 
1  dont  speak  English,  but  Spanish, 
He  does  not  speak  English,  but  he 


,  and: 


^1  6  yo, 

Uno  li  otro  (before  o), 

Tio  y  sobrino, 

Verano  e  invierno,  )  before  i 

Padre  e  hijo,  )  or  hi. 


Vocabulario. 


He  or  I. 

One  or  the  other. 
Uncle  and  nephew. 
Summer  and  winter. 
Father  and  son, 

Vocabulary. 


El  criado,  the  servant. 
El  dueno,  the  owner. 
El  maestro,  the  teacher. 
El  rincon,  the  corner. 
El  teatro,  the  theater. 
El  viaje,  the  journey. 
La  batalla,  the  battle. 
La  carta,  the  letter. 
La  manana,  the  morning. 


La  nieve,  the  snow. 
La  tierra,  the  earth. 
La  ventana,  the  window. 
Alguien,    alguno,   some- 
body, anybody. 
Asi,  thus. 
Con,  with. 
Desde,  since. 
Dos,  two. 


Enfermo,  ill,  sick. 
Escribir,  3.  to  write. 
Espana,  f.,  Spain. 
Europa,  f.,  Europe. 
Francia,  f.,  France. 
Italia,  f.,  Italy. 
Sino,  but. 
Tres,  three. 
Viajar,  1.  to  travel 


AUXILIARY   VERB  HABER.  105 

Exercise  35. 

1.  i  Quie*n  ha  abierto  la  ventana  ?  2.  Creo  que  es  el  criado.  3.  [A 
quien  ha  visto  V.  en  el  teatro '?  4.  He  visto  a  todos  mis  amigos. 
5.  i  Quien  ha  dicho  eso  ?  6.  El  panadero  ha  dicho  eso  a  mi  hermano. 
7.  i  Como  ha  hecho  V.  eso  ?  8.  Asi.  9.  [  Ha  escrito  V.  d  su  padre  ? 
10.  No,  senor,  no  he  escrito  todavia  a  nadie.  11.  [Ha  vuelto  su 
familia  del  campo  ?  12.  Toda  la  familia  ha  vuelto  d  la  ciudad  desde 
tres  dias.  13.  i  Quien  ha  muertd  en  esa  casa  ?  14.  Nadie  ha  muerto, 
pero  todo  el  mundo  esta  enfermo.  15.  [  Donde  ha  puesto  V.  mi  bas- 
ton  ?  16.  Esta  en  el  rincon.  17.  [A  quien  ha  hablado  Y.  en  aquella 
casa  ?  18.  He  hablado  al  dueno  de  la  casa.  19.  [Ha  conocido  V.  a 
mi  padre  ?  20.  He  conocido  a  su  padre  y  d  su  madre  de  V.  en  Fran- 
cia.  21.  [  Han  comprado  W.  buenas  manzanas  ?  22.  Las  manzanas 
que  hemos  comprado  no  son  muy  buenas.  23.  [  Ha  visto  V.  a  mi 
hermana  ?  24.  No  he  visto  d  nadie.  25.  j  Que  tiene  V.  que  hacer  ? 
26.  Tengo  muchisimo  que  hacer.  27.  i  Tiene  Y.  oro  6  papel  ? 

28.  No  tengo  oro,  pero  tengo  papel.     29.  Este  caballero  no  habla 
sino  ingle's. 

Exercise  30. 

1.  Have  you  seen  anybody  in  the  garden  ?  2.  I  have  seen  Mr. 
Rojas  and  his  son.  3.  Why  have  you  said  that  ?  4.  I  have  not  said 
anything,  1  have  not  spoken.  5.  Is  the  door  open  ?  6.  The  door  and 
the  window  are  closed,  7.  Have  you  written  to  your  father  ?  8.  I 
have  written  to  my  father,  mother,  and  sisters.  9.  Who  has  put  my 
cane  in  the  other  room  ?  10.  I  don't  know,  no  one  has  been  here 
since  this  morning.  11.  Has  your  friend  returned  from  Europe? 
12.  He  has  riot  returned  yet.  13.  Is  this  gentleman  your  brother  ? 
14,  He  is  not  my  brother,  but  my  cousin.  15.  Where  must  you  go 
this  afternoon  1  16.  I  have  to  go  out  with  my  father.  17.  The  gen- 
eral has  died  in  the  battle.  18.  Where  have  the  children  been  this 
morning  ?  19.  They  have  been  in  the  house.  20.  With  what  have 
you  written  that  ?  21.  I  have  written  all  that  with  a  pencil.  22.  Do 
you  know  what  the  teacher  has  said  ?  23.  I  know  very  well  what 
he  has  said.  24.  Is  your  uncle  rich  1  25.  He  has  been  rich,  but  he 
is  poor  now.  26.  Have  the  children  written  their  letters  ?  27.  They 
have  written  two  or  three  letters.  28.  Do  you  know  this  gentleman  ? 

29.  I  know  his  brother. 


lUb 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  past  participle  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  its 
subject  when  accompanied  by  the  verbs  estar,  ser,  to  be. 

It  remains  invariable  when  used  with  the  auxiliary  haber, 
to  have. 

He  cornido.  —  Hemos  comido,  I  have  eaten.  —  We  have  eaten. 

Ellos  (or  ellas)  ban  comido,  They  have  eaten. 

La  carta  esta  escrita,  The  letter  is  written. 

Las  oartas  estan  escritas,  The  letters  are  written. 

Los  caminos  estan  cubiertos  de  nieve,  The  roads  are  covered  with  snow. 

2.  The  verb  haber  is  also  used  to  express  obligation,  and  is 
then  followed  by  the  preposition  de  and  the  Infinitive  of  the 
principal  verb.     The  verb  tener  followed  by  qiie  is  used  in  the 
same  way,  and  both  verbs  correspond  then  to  the  English  verb 
must.     The  active  verb  deber  has  also  the  same  meaning  : 

He  de  ir  a  la  ciudad,         -\ 

Tengo  que  ir  a  la  ciudad,  >  /  must  go  to  the  city. 

Debo  ir  a  la  ciudad, 

3.  The  object  of  an  active  verb   requires  the  preposition   a 
before  it  when  this  object  is  a  person,  a  rational  animal,  or  a 
thing  personified : 

Veo  d  un  bombre,  /  see  a  man. 

Vemos  al  hombre,  We  see  the  man. 

Conocemos  d  estos  caballeros,  We  know  these  gentlemen. 

I A  quien  conoce  V.  ?  Whom  do  you  know  ? 

4.  The  preposition  a,  which  is  not  translated    in   English, 
must,  however,  be  left  out  in  Spanish  after  an  active  verb  and 
a  person,   if  by   the  addition  of  this  preposition  the  sentence 
should  not  be  clearly  expressed  : 

Envio  el  hijo  al  padre  (not :  envio  al  bijo  al  /    send    the    son    to    the 

padre),  father. 

Han  robado  un  nino,  They  have  stolen  a  child. 

Han  robado  d  un  nino  would  mean  They  have  robbed  a  child. 

Quiero  un  criado,  "         "  /  want  a  servant. 

Quiero  d  un  criado,  "         "  /  love  a  servant. 


I 


GERUND.  107 

5»  Pero  and  sino  are  both  rendered  by  but.  Pero  is  used 
when  a  verb  is  expressed  in  the  second  part  of  the  sentence, 
while  sino  is  used  when  the  first  part  of  the  sentence  is  nega- 
tive and  no  verb  is  expressed  in  the  second  part. 

Sino  has  also  the  meaning  of  except,  and  is  used  with  the 
negative  : 

Hablo  frances,  pero  no  hablo  ingles,         /  speak  French,  but  I  do  not  speak 

English. 

No  hablo  frances,  sino  ingles,  I  don't  speak  French,  but  English. 

El  no  habla  sino  aleman,  He    speaks   nothing    but   (except) 

German. 

6,    Solamente,  only,  but,  may  be  used  instead  of  sino  in  the 

affirmative  : 

No  tengo  oro,  tengo  solamente  papel,         I  have  no  gold,  1  have  only  paper. 
NOTE.  —  Instead  of  solamente,  solo  may  be  used. 


Lecclon  XIX.  Lesson  XIX. 

THE   GERUND. 

1st  Conjugation: 

Amar  ;  amando,  to  love ;  loving. 

Hablar;  hablando,  to  speak ;  speakings 

Comprar  ;  comprando,  to  buy ;  buying. 

Tomar  ;  tomando,  to  take  ;  taking. 

2d  Conjugation: 

Comer ;  comiendo,  to  eat,  to  dine  ;  eating,  dining. 

Beber  ;  bebiendo,  to  drink  ;  drinking. 

Hacer  ;  haciendo,  to  do,  to  make ;  doing,  making. 

Perder  ;  perdiendo,  to  lose ;  losing. 

3d  Conjugation: 

Reeibir ;  recibiendo,  to  receive  ;  receiving. 

Salir;  saliendo,  to  go  out :  going  out. 

Partir  ;  partiendo,  to  divide  ;  dividing. 

Subir  \  subiendo,  to  ascend,  to  go  up ;  ascending,  going  up. 


108 


LESSON  19. 


Verbs  in  eer  and  uir : 


Leer  ;  leyendo, 
Instruir;  instruyendo, 


to  read  ;  reading. 

to  instruct ;  instructing* 

Irregular  Verbs. 

Decir  ;  diciendo,  to  say,  to  tell ;  saying,  telling. 

Dormir ;  durmiendo,  to  sleep  ;  sleeping. 

Morir ;  muriendo,  to  die  ;  dying. 

Pedir;  pidiendo,  to  ask  for;  asking  for. 

Poder  ;  pudiendo,  to  be  able,  can ;  being  able. 

Sentir  ;  sintiendo,  to  feel,  to  hear  ;  feeling,  hearing. 

Venir ;  viniendo,  to  come  ;  coming. 

Ejemplos. 


i  De  quo*  esta  V.  hablando  ? 

Estoy  hablando  del  tiempo. 

Los  muchachos  estan  jugando. 

j  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ? 

Estoy  escribiendo  una  carta. 

i  Que  estan  diciendo  estos  hombres  ? 

No  estan  hablando. 

Mi  madre  esta  durmiendo. 

Los  ninos  vienen  llorando. 

He  estado  leyendo  todo  el  dia. 

Aprendo  estudiando  y  leyendo. 

i  Que  estan  VV.  leyendo  ? 

Estamoa  leyendo  un  libro  frances. 


Examples. 

Of  what  are  you  speaking  f 

I  am  speaking  of  the  weather, 

The  boys  are  playing. 

What  are  you  doing  ? 

I  am  writing  a  letter. 

What  are  these  men  saying  ? 

They  are  not  speaking. 

My  mother  is  sleeping. 

The  children  are  coming  crying. 

I  have  been  reading  the  whole  day, 

I  learn  by  studying  and  reading. 

What  are  you  reading  ? 

We  are  reading  a  French  book. 


Vocabulario. 

El  albanil,  the  mason. 
El  barco,  the  vessel. 
El  capitan,  the  captain. 
El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 
El  vaso,  the  glass. 
La  f  onda,  the  hotel. 
La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 
La  noche,  the  night. 
Abierto,  opened. 
Alemania,  f.,  Germany. 
Almorzar,  1.  to  breakfast. 
Bebo,  I  drink. 


Vocabulary. 


Cantar,  1 .  to  sing. 
Concluir,  3.  to  finish. 
Conocer,  2.  to  know. 
Correr,  2.  to  run. 
Estudiar,  1.  to  study. 
Hasta,  until. 
Importante,  important. 
Jugar,  1.  to  play. 
Lie  gar,  1.  to  arrive. 
Llorar,  1.  to  cry,  to  weep. 
Mandar,  1.  to  send. 


Muchas  gracias,  /(oi 

we)  thank  you. 
Nosotros,  us. 
Pasar,  1.  to  pass. 
Por,  through,  by. 
Prestar,  1.  to  lend. 
Tarde,  late. 
Tomar,  1.  to  take. 
Va,  goes. 

Venir,  3.  to  come, 
Ya,  already. 


GERUND.  109 

Exercise  37. 

1.  [  Que  estan  haciendo  los  muchachos  en  el  cuarto  ?  2.  Estan 
jugando  con  sus  amiguitos.  3.  i  Quien  esta  cantando  en  la  calle  ? 
4.  Una  pobre  ruujer  esta  cantando.  5.  Mi  hermano  esta  leyendo,  y 
mi  hermana  esta  escribiendo.  6.  i  Ha  hablado  V.  al  capitan  ]  7.  Yo 
no  he  hablado  d  nadie,  he  estado  en  mi  cuarto  hasta  ahora.  8.  j  A 
quien  ha  prestado  V.  dinero  ?  9.  He  prestado  dinero  a  su  hermano 
de  V.  10.  i  Sabe  V.  si  el  general  esta  en  casa  1  11.  Esta  en  su 
cuarto,  pero  esta  durmiendo.  12.  El  muchacho  va  corriendo  por  las 
calles.  13.  i  De  que  esta  V.  hablando  ?  14.  Estoy  hablando  de  una 
cosa  muy  importante.  15.  i  Quiere  V.  comer  hoy  con  nosotros  ? 
16.  Con  mucho  gusto.  17.  i  En  que  pais  ha  vivido  Y.  ?  18.  He 
vivido  dos  anos  en  Francia,  y  tres  anos  en  Aleniariia.  19.  i  Cuantas 
cartas  han  escrito  YV.  ?  20.  Hemos  escrito  dos  6  tres.  21.  j,  Quiere 
Y.  tomar  un  vaso  de  vino  ?  22.  Muchas  gracias,  yo  no  bebo  vino. 
23.  [  Que  ha  dicho  el  medico  ?  24.  No  se  lo  que  ha  dicho,  porque  ha 
hablado  con  mi  hermano.  25.  [  Porque  esta  llorando  ese  muchacho  ? 
26.  El  llora  por  nada.  27.  He  estado  escribiendo  desde  esta  manana, 
y  todavia  no  he  concluido  mis  cartas.  28.  i  Donde  ha  pasado  Y.  la 
noche  ?  29.  He  pasado  la  noche  en  la  fonda,  no  conociendo  a  nadie 
aqui.  30.  [  Porque  no  ha  venido  Y.  a  mi  casa  ?  31.  Porque  no  sabia 
(/  did  not  know)  donde  Y.  vivia  (lived). 

Exercise  38. 

1.  Where  are  the  children  ?  2.  They  are  playing  in  the  garden. 
3.  Have  they  studied  their  lessons  ?  4.  They  have  been  studying  all 
the- morning.  5.  With  whom  were  you  (estaba  V.)  speaking  in  the 
garden  ?  6.  I  was  speaking  with  a  French  gentleman.  7.  Were  you 
sleeping  this  afternoon  1  8.  No,  I  was  writing  in  my  room.  9.  Who 
is  crying  in  the  other  room  ?  10.  The  little  boy  is  crying.  11.  What 
is  your  brother  doing  now  1  12.  I  don't  know  where  he  is  now. 
13.  Where  are  you  going  to  1  14.  I  am  going  home.  15.  Why  have 
you  eaten  my  bread  ?  16.  Because  I  had  (habia)  not  eaten  anything 
since  this  morning.  17.  Has  your  father  gone  out  ?  18.  No,  sir,  he 
is  in  the  house  ;  he  is  breakfasting.  19.  The  masons  are  building  a 
splendid  house  in  our  street.  20.  What  was  (estaba)  that  man  say- 
ing ?  21.  He  was  speaking  of  the  weather.  22.  Why  are  you  run- 
ning ?  23.  Because  it  is  already  late.  24.  Have  you  sent  the  money 


11U  LESSON   19. 

to  the  tailor  ?  25.  Not  yet,  I  have  not  received  my  money.  26.  This 
poor  boy  has  lost  his  father  and  mother.  27.  Do  you  know  if  the 
vessel  has  arrived  ?  28.  Yes,  sir,  k  has  arrived ;  I  have  spoken  to 
the  captain.  29.  Who  has  been  in  my  room  this  morning  ?  30.  Your 
brothers  and  sisters  have  been  here  and  have  opened  your  room. 
31.  What  is  that  man  asking  for  1  32.  He  is  asking  for  money. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  gerund  ends  in  Spanish  in  ando,  for  the  1st  Conju- 
gation ;  and  in  iendo  for  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations.     These 
terminations  are  added  to  the  present  of  the  infinitive  after  sup- 
pressing the  terminations  ar,  er,  and  ir. 

This  is  the  case  in  regular  verbs  and  also  in  most  of  the  ir- 
regular verbs  :  the  termination  never  changes,  but  the  radical 
part  of  a  few  irregular  verbs  undergoes  a  slight  change  : 

Hablar,  hahlando  ;  to  speak,  speaking. 

Comer,  comiendo  ;  to  eat,  eating. 

Escribir,  escribiendo  ;  to  write,  writing. 

Pedir,  pidiendo  ;  to  ask  for,  asking  for. 

'  .  Dormir,  durmiendo ;  to  sleep,  sleeping. 

2.  Verbs  ending  in  eer  and  uir  change  the  i  into  y : 

Leer,  leyendo  ;  to  read,  reading. 

Instruir,  instruyendo ;      to  instruct,  instructing. 

3.  The  gerund  used  with  the  verb  estar,  to  be,  corresponds  to 
the  progressive  form  in  English,  and  expresses  the  action  of  the 
verb  as  continuing  and  unfinished : 

Estoy  leyendo,  I  am  reading. 

i  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ?  W. hat  are  you  doing  ? 

Esta  lloviendo,  It  is  raining. 

131  estaba  escribiendo,  He  was  writing. 

He  estado  leyendo  todo  el  di'a,  I  have  been  reading  the  whole  day. 

4.  The  verb  estar  is  not  used  with  the  gerund  of  the  verbs 
ser,  to  be  ;  ir,  to  go  ;  venir,  to  come.     Thus  we  would  not  say: 
estoy  yendo,  /  am  going,  but  voy,  /  go ;  nor  esta  viniendo, 
he  is  coming,  but  viene,  he  comes  ;  etc. 


GERUND.  Ill 

5.  When  other  verbs  are  used  as  auxiliaries  of  the  gerund, 
they  sufficiently  explain  themselves  : 

El  nino  sigue  durmiendo,          The  child  continues  sleeping. 
El  viene  corriendo,  He  comes  running. 

6.  The  gerund  indicates  a  certain  continuation  of  the  action  : 
Andan  entrando  y  saliendo,         They  continue  coming  in  and  going  out. 

7.  The  gerund  is  also  used  to  express  the  way  in  which  a 
thing  happens  : 

La  tos  se  cura  sudando,         Coughing  is  cured  by  perspiring. 
Se  aprende  estudiando,          One  learns  by  studying. 

8t  It  is  also  used  with  the  preposition  en,  in;  and  refers 
then  to  the  action  of  the  other  verb  : 

En  acabando  ira,          When  he  has  finished  he  will  go. 

OBSERVATION.  — The  preposition,  may,  however,  be  left  out  in  most 
cases,  without  altering  the  sense  of  the  sentence. 

9i  The  gerund  of  the  verb  estar  often  precedes  that  of  an- 
other verb : 

Estando  comiendo,  recibi6  la  carta,          Whilst  he  was  dining  he  received 

the  letter. 

10.  The  gerund  is  used  very  frequently  in  Spanish  for  the 
sake  of  brevity  and  euphony,  and  in  cases  where  the  English 
use  adverbs,  conjunctions,  and  prepositions,  as :  when,  as, 
while,  whilst,  since,  if,  by,  etc. : 

Habla  durmiendo,  He  talks  while  he  sleeps. 

Se  aprende  leyendo,  One  learns  by  reading. 

Siendo  asi,  no  quiero  ir,  Since  it  is  so,  I  shall  not  go. 

Dandole  yo  licencia,  saldra,  If  I  give  him  permission,  he  will  go  out. 

Viendo  que  su  hermano  no  When  he  saw  that  his  brother  was  not  com- 
venia,  se  fue.  ing,  he  went  away. 


112 


LESSON  20. 


leccion  XX. 


Lesson  XX. 


CARDINAL    NUMBERS. 

The  Cardinal  Numbers  are: 


Uno,  m.,  una,/. 

Dos, 

Tres, 

Cuatro, 

Cinco, 

Seis, 

Siete, 

Ocho, 

Nueve, 

Diez, 

Once, 

Doce, 

Trece, 

Catorce, 

Quince, 

Diez  y  seis,1 

Diez  y  siete, 

Diez  y  ocho, 

Diez  y  nueve, 

Veinte, 

Veiute  y  uno, 

Veinte  y  dos, 

Veinte  y  tres, 

Veinte  y  cuatro, 
Veinte  y  cinco, 
Veinte  y  seis, 
Veinte  y  siete, 
Veinte  y  ocho, 
Veinte  y  nueve, 
Treinta, 
Treinta  y  uno, 
Cuarenta, 
Cincuenta, 


One. 
Two. 
Three. 
Four. 

Five. 

Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 
Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one. 

Twenty-two. 

Twenty-three. 

Twenty-four. 

Twenty-five. 

Twenty-six. 

Twenty-seven. 

Twenty-eight. 

Twenty-nine. 

Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 


1  These  numhers  are  also  written  in  one  word,  as  :  Dieciseis,  veintiuno, 
treintainno,  etc. 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 


113 


Sesenta, 

Setenta, 

Ochenta, 

Noventa, 

Ciento,1 

Ciento  y  uno, 

Ciento  y  diez, 

Doscientos  (-as,  /. ), 

Trescientos  (-as,  /. ), 

Cuatrocientos  (-as,/.), 

Quinientos  (-as,/.), 

Seiscientos  (-as,/.), 

Setecientos  (-as,/.), 

Ochocientos  (-as,/.), 

Novecientos  (-as,/.), 

Mil, 

Mil  y  ciento, 

Mil  y  doscientos  (-as,  /.), 

Dos  mil, 

Cien l  mil, 

Doscientos  (-as,/.)  mil, 

Un  millon, 

Dos  millones, 

Cero, 


Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

One  hundred. 

One  hundred  and  one. 

One  hundred  and  ten. 

Two  hundred. 

Three  hundred. 

Four  hundred. 

Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 

Seven  hundred. 

Fight  hundred. 

Nine  hundred. 

One  thousand. 

One  thousand  one  hundred. 

One  thousand  two  hundred. 

Two  thousand. 

One  hundred  thousand. 

Two  hundred  thousand. 

One  million. 

Two  millions. 

Zero  or  cipher. 


Dfas  de  la  semana. 


Domingo, 

Lanes, 

Martes, 

Miercoles, 

Jueves, 

Viernes, 

Sabado, 


Sunday. 
Monday. 
Tuesday. 


Thursday. 

Friday. 

Saturday. 


El  domingo, 

Los  lunes, 

El  martes  por  la  manana, 

El  miercoles  por  la  noche, 

El  jueves  proximo,    ) 

El  jueves  que  viene,  ) 

El  sabado  pasado, 


Days  of  the  week. 

On  Sunday. 


On  Mondays. 
Tuesday  morning. 


Next  Thursday. 
Last  Saturday. 


Divisiones  del  dia. 

La  manana, 
El  dia, 
La  tarde, 


Divisions  of  the  day. 

The  morning. 
The  day. 
The  afternoon. 


1  Ciento  drops  tbe  syllable  to  before  a  noun.     Cien  hombres,  One  hun- 
dred men. 

8 


114 


LESSON  20. 


La  nocha, 

Mariana  por  la  manana, 

Manana  por  la  noche, 

De  dia, 

Por  la  noche,  de  noehe, 

Buenos  dias, 

Bueiias  tardes, 

Buenas  noches, 

Vocabulario. 

El  ano,  the  year. 
El  banco,  the  bank. 
El  bocoy,  the  hogshead. 
El  correo,  the  post  office. 
El  dia,  the  day. 
El  hotel,  the  hotel. 
El  mes,  the  month. 
El  minuto,  the  minute. 
El  saco,  the  lag. 
La  biblioteca,  the  library. 
La  caballeria,  the  cavalry. 
La  caballeriza,  the  stable. 
La  carne  de  vaca,  the  beef. 
La  estacion,  the  season. 
La  hora,  the  hour. 
La  libra,  the  pound. 
La  persona,  the  person. 
La  semana,  the  week. 


The  evening,  the  night. 

To-morrow  morning. 

To-morrow  evening. 

In  daytime. 

In  the  evening,  at  night. 

Good  morning,  good  day. 

Good  afternoon. 

Good  evening,  good  night. 

Vocabulary. 

La  tripulacion,  the  crew. 

Anoche,  last  night. 

Como,  about  how. 

Con  tar,  to  count. 

Contiene,  contains. 

Convidar,  to  invite. 

Cuando,  when. 

En  casa,  at  home. 

Lo  siento,  /  am  sorry  for  it. 

Mas,  more. 

Matar,  to  kill. 

i  Puede  V.  ?  can  you  ? 

Puedo,  /  can. 

Necesitar,  to  need. 

Nosotros,  us. 

Publico,  public. 

Solamente,  only. 

Unos  pocos,  a  few. 


Exercise  39. 

1.  He  comprado  doscientos  bocoyes  de  azucar  y  trescientos  sacos  de 
cafe*.  2.  I  Que  ban  comprado  VV.  hoy  1  3.  Hemos  comprado  diez 
polios  y  cinctienta  libras  de  carne  de  vaca.  4.  i  Cuanto  dinero  ha 
recibido  Y.  ?  5.  He  recibido  cuatrocientos  noventa  y  nueve  duros. 
6.  I  Y  porque  no  quinientos  ?  7.  Porque  hemos  pagado  un  duro  en 
el  correo.  8.  Un  rnes  tiene  veirite  y  ocho,  veinte  y  nueve,  treinta,  6 
treinta  y  un  dias.  9.  El  dia  tiene  veinte  y  cuatro  horas ;  la  bora 
tiene  sesenta  minutos.  10.  Un  ano  tiene  trescientos  sesenta  y  cinco, 
6  trescientos  sesenta  y  seis  dias.,  11.  i  Cuando  va  Y.  a  casa  de  su  her- 
mano?  12.  Yoy  los  miercoles.  13.  El  general  tenia  (had)  cincuenta 
mil  hombres  de  infanteria  y  diez  mil  hombres  de  caballeria.  14.  Esta 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS.  115 

aldea  no  tiene  sino  dos  calles.  "15.  El  prmcipe  tiene  mas  de  cincuenta 
caballos  en  sus  caballerizas.v' 16.  i  Cuando  esta  Y.  en  casa  ?  17.  Estoy 
en  casa  por  la  manana  y  por  la  noche.  18.  Hemos  matado  mas  de  veinte 
pajaros  en  el  jardm.  19.  Una  semana  tiene  siete  dias,  ciento  sesenta 
y  ocho  boras,  y  diez  mil  y  ochenta  minutos.  20.  Un  ano  tiene  cin- 
cuenta y  dos  semanas,  doce  meses,  y  cuatro  estaciones.  21.  [  Ha 
contado  V.  todo  el  dinero  ?  22.  He  contado  ties  mil  duros  en  oro,  y 
dos  mil  duros  en  papel.  23.  [  A  cuantas  personas  ha  convidado  V. 
para  el  domingo  ?  24.  No  he  convidado  todavia  a  nadie.  25.  £  Ha 
perdido  soldados  el  general?  26.  Ha  perdido  dos  mil  de  sus  mejorea 
soldados.  27.  j  Cuanto  dinero  quiere  V.  ?  28.  Deme  V.  doscientos 
y  cincuenta  duros.  29.  [  Es  bastante  ?  30.  Es  bastante  con  los 
ochenta  duros  que  ya  tengo.^ 

Exercise  40. 

1.  Our  city  has  now  twenty  thousand  inhabitants  ;  in  1860,  it  had 
(tema)  only  a  few  houses,  and  about  five  hundred  inhabitants.  2.  The 
vessel  has  a  crew  of  twenty-two  men.  3.  Charles's  father  is  one  of 
the  richest  men  in  (de)  our  town  ;  he  has  at  least  two  millions  of  dol- 
lars. 4.  Have  you  bought  apples  or  pears  1  5.  I  bought  a  hundred 
apples,  but  no  pears.  6.  Washington  was  born  (naci6)  in  1732,  and 
died  (murid)  in  1799.  7.  Where  are  you  going  on  Monday  next  1 
8.  I  don't  know  yet.  9.  I  go  to  school  on  Mondays,  Tuesdays,  Wed- 
nesdays, Thursdays,  and  Fridays  ;  on  Saturdays  I  go  to  the  country, 
and  on  Sundays  to  church.  10.  Do  you  work  in  daytime  or  in 
the  evening  ?  11.  I  always  work  in  the  evening.  12.  Can  you  come 
to-morrow  morning  1  <  13.  No,  but  I  can  come  to-morrow  evening. 
14.  Have  you  any  money  for  us  ?  15.  I  have  twenty-five  dollars  for 
you,  and  fifty  dollars  for  your  brother.  16.  It  is  not  enough  ;  I  need 
twelve  dollars  more.  17.  I  am  sorry  for  it,  but  I  have  not  one  dollar 
more.  18.  Mr.  Felix  Konda  has  more  than  twenty  houses  in  the 
city.  19.  This  hotel  has  more  than  two  hundred  rooms.  20.  We 
have  a  hotel  in  our  city  which  (que)  contains  three  hundred.  21 .  How 
many  dollars  do  you  need  to  (para)  buy  that  horse  ?  22.  I  need  one 
hundred  and  twenty  dollars,  having  already  one  hundred  and  eighty 
dollars  in  the  bank.  23.  My  father  has  given  five  hundred  pounds 
of  meat  to  the  poor.  24.  There  are  (hay)  more  than  twenty  thou- 
sand volumes  in  our  Public  Library.  25.  There  were  Qiabia)  at  least 
four  thousand  persons  at  (en)  the  theater  last  night. 


116  LESSON  20. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Uno,  one,  a,  an,  has  for  feminine  Una.  Both  add  8  in  the 
plural  when  used  substantively  : 

Los  unos  y  los  otros,  m..  )  _ 

,  ,  >  The  ones  and  the  others. 

Las  unas  y  las  otras,  /.,    J 

2»  From  dos,  two,  up  to  ciento,  hundred,  the  numbers  are 
plural  and  common  to  both  genders ;  but  from  doscientos,  two 
hundred,  to  novecientos,  nine  hundred,  the  termination  OS  is 
changed  into  as  for  the  feminine  : 

Tres  hombres  y  cuatro  mujeres,  Three  men  and  four  women. 

Doscientos  hombres  y  trescientas  Two  hundred  men  and  three  hundred 

mujeres,  women. 

3.  The  conjunction  y,  and,  is  placed  only  before  the   last 
number  : 

Doscientos  noventa  y  ocho,         Two  hundred  and  ninety-eight. 

4.  Giento  drops  the  last  syllable  before  a   noun.     [In  the 
same  way  uno  drops  also  the  0  before  a  noun.] 

Cien  hombres  y  cien  mujeres,      One  hundred  men  and  one  hundred  women. 
Veinte  y  un  muchachos,  Twenty-one  boys. 

5.  Although  mil,  one  thousand,  has  neither  gender  nor  num- 
ber, it  may  be  used  in  certain  cases  in  the  plural,  as  in  English, 
and  is  then  a  noun  : 

Este  hombre  ha  gastado  muchos  miles,  This  man  has  spent  many  thousands. 

6.  The  preposition  a  is  left  out  after  an  active  verb  when  the 
object  of  the  sentence  is  preceded  by  a  cardinal  number : 

He  visto  veinte  hombres  (not  a  veinte  hombres),      /  have  seen  twenty  men. 
7»    More  than,  less  than,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  mas  de, 
and  menos  de  before  a  cardinal  number : 

Mas  de  cien  duros,         More  than  a  hundred  dollars. 
Menos  de  tres  dias,        Less  than  three  days. 

8t  JZleven  hundred,  twelve  hundred,  thirteen  hundred,  etc., 
cannot  be  expressed  as  in  English,  but  must  be  translated : 

Mil  y  ciento,  One  thousand  one  hundred. 

Mil  y  doscientos,          One  thousand  two  hundred. 
Mil  y  trescientos,         One  thousand  three  hundred. 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 


117 


Leccidn  XXL 


Lesson  XXL 


ORDINAL    NUMBERS. 


Primero  (primo), 

Segundo, 

Tercero, 

Cuarto, 

Quinto, 

Sexto  (sesto), 

Septimo  (setimo), 

Octavo, 

Noveno  or  nono, 

Decimo, 

Undecimo, 

Duodecimo, 

Decimo  tercio,1 

Decimo  cuarto, 

Decimo  quinto, 

Decimo  sesto, 

Decimo  septimo, 

Decimo  octavo, 

Decimo  nono, 

Vige"simo, 

Vigesimo  primo, 

Vigesimo  segundo, 

Vigesimo  tercero, 

Trigesimo, 

Cuadragesimo, 

Quincuagesimo, 

Sexagesimo, 

Septuagesimo, 

Octogesimo, 

Nonagesimo, 

Centesimo, 

Centesimo  primo, 

Centesimo  undecimo, 

Ducentesimo, 


First. 

Second. 

Third. 

Fourth. 

Fifth. 

Sixth. 

Seventh. 

Eighth. 

Ninth. 

Tenth. 

Eleventh. 

Twelfth. 

Thirteenth. 

Fourteenth. 

Fifteenth. 

Sixteenth. 

Seventeenth. 

Eighteenth. 

Nineteenth. 

Twentieth. 

Twenty-first. 

Twenty -second. 

Twenty -third. 

Thirtieth. 

Fortieth. 

Fiftieth. 

Sixtieth. 

Seventieth.   , 

Eightieth. 

Ninetieth. 

Hundredth, 

Hundred  and  first. 

Hundred  and  eleventh. 

Two  hundredth. 


1  These  numbers  are  also  written  in  one  word,  as  dfoimotercio,  deci- 
moonarto,  etc. 


118 


LESSON  21. 


Trecentesimo, 

TAree  hundredth. 

Cuadragentesimo, 

Four  hundredth. 

Quingentesimo, 

Five  hundredth. 

Seiscentesimo, 

Six  hundredth. 

Septengentesimo, 

Seven  hundredth. 

Octogentesimo, 

Eight  hundredth. 

Nonageiitesiiuo, 

Nine  hundredth. 

Milesimo, 

Thousandth. 

Dos  milesimo, 

Two  thousandth. 

Diez  milesimo, 

Ten  thousandth. 

Millonesimo, 

Millionth. 

Ntimeros  fraccionarios. 

Fractional  numbers. 

La  mitad,             The  half. 

Un  decimo,                     One  tenth. 

Un  medio,            One  half. 

Un  onzavo,                     One  eleventh. 

Uno  y  medio,  ) 
T,               i  .     r  0ft£  owa  «  half. 
Una  y  media,  ) 

Un  dozavo,                     One  twelfth. 
Un  trezavo,                    One  thirteenth. 

Un  tercio,            One  third. 

Dos  catorzavos,              Two  fourteenths. 

Dos  tercios,         Two  thirds. 

Ocho  quinzavos,            Eight  fifteenths. 

Un  cuarto,           One  fourth. 

Un  dieziseisavo,             One  sixteenth. 

Tres  cuartos,        Three  fourths. 

Un  diezisietavo,             One  seventeenth. 

Un  quinto,           One  fifth. 

etc.                                 etc. 

Un  sexto,            Cfoe  s&tfA. 

Un  veintavo,                 One  twentieth. 

Un  septimo,         0T&6  seventh. 

Once  treintavos,            Eleven  thirtieths. 

Un  octavo,  or  ) 
Unochavo       f  «**•* 

Un  centavo,  or  }            ^      -L      j    j^ 
TT          ,  ,  .                      One  hundredth. 
Un  centesimo,  ) 

Un  noveno,         0?id  ni^A. 

Un  milesimo,                  One  thousandth. 

Collective  Numbers. 


Un  par, 
Una  docena, 


A  pair. 
A  dozen. 


Una  quincena, 
Una  sesentena, 


Multiplicative  Numbers. 


Simple,  Single. 

Doble,  Double. 

Triple,  Treble. 

Cuadruplo  or  cuadruple,  Quadruple. 
Quintuple  or  quintuple,   Fivefold. 

Una  vez,  once. 
Dos  veces,  twice. 
Tres  veces,  three  times. 


Sextuple, 

Septuplo, 

Octuplo, 

Decuplo, 

Centuplo, 


Fifteen. 
Sixty. 


Sixfold. 

Sevenfold. 

Eightfold. 

Tenfold. 

A  hundredfold. 


Esta  vez,  this  time. 
Aquella  vez,  that  time. 
Todas  las  veces,  every  time. 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 


119 


Varias  veces,  several  times. 
Algunas  veces,  sometimes. 
La  primera  vez,  the  first  time. 
La  ultima  vez,  the  last  time. 

Meses  del  ano. 


Cada  vez,  each  time. 
Muchas  veces,  many  times. 
Otra  vez,  another  time. 
La  proxima  vez,  next  time. 

Months  of  the  year. 


Enero, 

January. 

Julio, 

July. 

Febrero, 

February. 

Agosto, 

August. 

Marzo, 

March. 

Setiembre, 

September. 

Abril, 

April. 

Octubre, 

October. 

Mayo, 

May. 

Noviembre, 

November. 

Junio, 

June. 

Dicieinbre, 

December. 

Las   estaciones. 

La  primavera,  the  spring. 

El  verano  or  el  estio,  the  summer. 

Ejemplos. 

* 
i  A  cuantos  estambs  ? 

i  A  como  estamos  (hoy)  ? 

i  Que"  dia  del  mes  teuemos  ?  1 

Hoy  es  el  primero. 

Manana  es  ei  cinco. 

Estamos  a  dos  de  Febrero. 

Naci  el  quince  de  Mayo. 

El  vapor  sale  el  diez  de  este  mes. 

i  Que  tomo  tiene  V.  ? 
Tengo  el  primer  tomo. 
Enrique  es  el  quinto  en  la  cl 

"tfocabulario. 

El  almuerzo,  the  breakfast. 

El  capitulo,  the  chapter. 

El  cuaderno,  the  copybook. 

El  emperador,  the  emperor. 

El  huevo,  the  egg. 

El  ingenio,  the  genius. 

El  jamon,  the  ham. 

£1  pavo,  the  turkey. 

311  periodico,  the  newspaper. 


lase. 


The  seasons. 

El  otono,  the  autumn,  the  fall. 
El  invierno,  the  winter. 

Examples. 


What  day  of  the  month  is  it  T 

To-day  is  the  first. 

To-morrow  is  the  fifth. 

It  is  the  second  of  February. 

I  was  born  on  the  fifteenth  of  May. 

The  steamer  leaves  on  the  tenth  of 

this  month. 

Which  volume  have  you  ? 
I  have  the  first  volume. 
Henry  is  the  fifth  in  the  class. 

Vocabulary. 


El  vapor,  the  steamer. 
La  onza,  the  ounce. 
La  parte,  the  part. 
Asi,  therefore. 
Cada,  each. 
Comer,  to  eat. 
Corto,  short. 
Cuando,  when. 
Dar,  to  give. 


Despues  de,  after. 
Leer,  to  read. 
Pedro,  Peter. 
Pertenece,  belongs. 
Karo,  rare. 
Busia,  Russia. 
Sale,  leaves. 
Siempre,  always. 
Viene,  comes. 


120  LESSON   21. 

Exercise  41. 

1.  Febrero  es  el  segundo  mes  del  ano.  2.  Enrique  y  Eduardo  son 
los  dos  primeros  discipulos  de  la  clase.  3.  [  Cuando  ha  escrito  V.  a 
su  padre  ?  '  4.  He  escrito  la  primera  vez  el  tres  de  enero  de  mil  ocho- 
cientos  sesenta  y  cinco,  y  la  segunda  vez  en  el  mes  de  mayo  del  mismo 
ano.  5.  i  Ha  dado  V.  libros  a  los  muchachos  de  la  primera  clase  ? 
6.  He  dado  libros  y  cuadernos  a  los  de  la  segunda  clase.  7.  El  mes 
de  Julio  tiene  tantos  dias  como  el  mes  de  agosto.  8.  £  Cuando  ha 
recibido  Y.  sus  cartas  ?  9.  He  recibido  una  el  dos  de  abril,  y  la  otra 
el  cinco  de  setiembre.  10.  Hemos  tenido  mucha  lluvia  el  treinta  de 
octubre.  11.  [  Que  pan  han  coinprado  VV.  ?  12.  Hernos  comprado 
cinco  libras  y  media  de  pan  frances.  13.  Cada  soldado  ha  recibido 
media  libra  de  carne.  14.  Estaremos  (we  shall  be)  en  nuestra  casa 
nueva  el  primero  de  mayo  proximo.  15.  El  muchachito  ha  dado  la 
mitad  de  su  almuerzo  al  pobre.  16.  He  comprado  una  docena  de 
polios,  y  mi  hermano  ha  comprado  media  docena  de  pavos.  17.  $  A 
cuantos  estamos  ?  18.  Estamos  a  once  6  doce.  19.  Carlos  Quinto 
fue  (was)  un  gran  emperador.  20.  £  Cuantas  veces  ha  sido  V.  el  pri- 
mero en  su  clase  ?  21.  He  sido  dos  veces  el  primero  ;  tres  veces,  el 
segundo ;  y  cuarto  veces,  el  tercero.  22.  £  No  ha  sido  V.  nunca  el 
ultimo  ?  23.  No,  senor,  mi  primo  es  siempre  el  ultimo.  24.  [  Que 
mes  viene  despues  del  mes  de  abril  1  25.  El  mes  de  mayo,  por 
supuesto.  26.  $  Es  frio  el  invierno  en  este  pais  ?  27.  El  invierno  es 
frio,  pero  corto. 

Exercise  42. 

1.  Have  you  read  the  newspaper  of  the  first  of  December  ?  2.  No, 
but  I  read  that  of  the  thirtieth  of  November.  3.  My  brother  will  be 
(estard)  here  in  July  or  (in)  August.  4.  What  day  of  the  month  is 
it  ?  5.  It  is  the  thirteenth.  6.  One  half  and  one  third  are  (hacen) 
five  sixths.  7.  This  poor  woman  is  sick  for  the  third  time  this 
month.  8.  The  Seventh  Regiment  is  a  fine  regiment.  9.  How  many 
chapters  have  you  read  1  10.  I  have  read  the  first  two  (two  first). 
11.  December  is  the  last  month  of  the  year.  12.  That  child  is  in  his 
sixth  year.  13.  Have  you  been  sick  here  ?  14.  I  have  been  very 
sick  the  first  month,  but  I  am  very  well  now.  15.  A  half  ounce  is 
the  thirty-second  part  of  a  pound  ;  therefore,  eight  ounces  are  the 
half,  and  four  ounces  the  fourth  part  of  a  pound.  16.  One  third  of 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 


121 


the  money  belongs  to  the  father ;  one  sixth,  to  the  children  ;  and  one 
half,  to  the  mother.    17.  I  have  bought  a  dozen  hams  and  sixty  eggs. 

18.  Peter  the  First,  emperor  of  Russia,  had  (tenta)  a  rare  genius. 

19.  When  does  the  steamer  leave  ?    20.  It  leaves  on  the  twenty- third 
of  this  month.    21.  How  many  times  have  you  been  in  Paris  ?    22.  I 
have  been  once  in  Paris,  and  twice  in  London.     23.  Has  your  father 
bought  another  horse  ?    24.  He  bought  three  horses.     25.  When  are 
you  going  to  the  country  ?    26.  I  go  in  the  month  of  June.    27.  Give 
me  the  half  of  your  bread.    28.  I  cannot,  I  have  eaten  all  the  bread. 
29.  Where  is  your  house  ]    30.  My  house  is  the  seventh  house  after 
the  church. 


Gramatica. 


Grammar. 


1.    Ordinal  numbers  are  considered  as  adjectives,  and  agree 
in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer : 


Este  muchacho  es  el  primero, 
Estas  muchachas  son  las  primeras, 
La  quinta  avenida, 


This  boy  is  the  first. 
These  girls  are  the  first. 
The  fifth  avenue. 


2,  Primero,  first,  tercero,  third,  and  postrero,  last,  drop  the 
0  in  the  singular  when  they  precede  a  masculine  noun,  or  its 
adjective : 

El  primer  horabre,  The  first  man. 

El  postrer  discipulo,  The  last  scholar. 

El  tercer  buen  emperador,         The  third  good  emperor. 

3.  Primo  is  used  instead  of  primero,  after  another  ordinal 
number: 

Vige*simo  primo,  Twenty-first. 

!•  Ordinal  numbers  are  used  in  Spanish  as  in  English  after 
the  names  of  sovereigns,  but  without  the  article: 

Fernando  segundo,          Ferdinand  the  Second. 
Felipe  cuarto,  Philip  the  Fourth. 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  Spaniards  generally  use,  as  being  shorter,  the  car- 
dinal numbers  after  the  names  of  sovereigns  when  their  order  of  succession 
exceeds  ten.  Thus,  they  prefer  to  say  : 

Luis  Catorce,  Louis  the  Fourteenth.       Carlos  Doce,  Charles  the  Twelfth. 


122  LESSON  22. 

5.  After  the  number  eleven  the  cardinal  or  ordinal  numbers 
may  be  used  with  equal  propriety  to  indicate  the  divisions  of  a 
book  or  other  works : 

Capitulo  quince  or  de"cimo  quinto,         Fifteenth  chapter. 
Pagina  veinte  or  vigesima,  Twentieth  page. 

6.  In  Spanish  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used  by  abbreviation 
before  the  names  of  months.    Primero,  first,  forms,  however,  an 
exception,  and  must  be  used  instead  of  uno : 

El  primero  de  enero,  The  first  of  January. 

El  cinco  6  seis  de  mayo,        The  fifth  or  sixth  of  May. 

7«  Mitad  is  synonymous  with  medio,  half;  but  medio  is  an 
adjective,  while  mitad  is  a  noun. 

Medio  and  the  other  fractions  take  the  feminine  form  when 
speaking  of  libra,  pound,  vara,  yard^  etc.,  even  if  these  nouns 
are  not  expressed : 

Media  libra  de  aziicar,  A  half  pound  of  sugar. 

Una  cuarta  de  arroz,  A  quarter  pound  of  rice. 

Media  vara  de  pano,  Half  a  yard  of  cloth. 

Tres  cuartas  de  muselina,  Three  fourths  of  a  yard  of  muslin. 

8i  While  the  names  of  months  regularly  begin  with  small 
letters,  there  is  much  variation  in  this  usage. 


Leccidn  XXII.  Lesson  XXII. 

10,  LE,  LA,  LOS,  LAS,  AS  PRONOUNS   IN   SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Yo  lo  (or  la)  tengo,  I  have  it. 

Tii  lo  (or  la)  tienes,  thou  hast  it. 

El  lo  (or  la)  tiene,  he  has  it. 

Ella  lo  (or  la)  tiene,  she  has  it. 

Nosotros  lo  (or  la)  tenemos,  we  have  it. 

Vosotros  lo  (or  la)  teneis,  you  have  it. 

Ellos  lo  (or  la)  tienen,  they  (masc.)  have  it. 

Ellas  lo  (or  la)  tienen,  they  (fern.)  have  it. 


PRONOUNS   IN    SIMPLE    TENSES. 


123 


Yo  no  lo  (or  la)  tengo, 
Tii  no  lo  (or  la)  tienes, 
El  no  lo  (or  la)  tiene, 
Ella  no  lo  (or  la)  tiene, 
Nosotros  no  lo  (or  la)  tenemos, 
Yosotros  no  lo  (or  la)  tenets, 
Ellos  no  lo  (or  la)  tienen, 
Ellas  no  lo  (or  la)  tienen, 

i  Lo  (or  la)  tengo  yo  ? 
etc. 

i  No  lo  (or  la)  tengo  yo  ? 
etc. 

Yo  los  (or  las)  tengo, 
Tu  los  (or  las)  tienes, 
Id  los  (or  las)  tiene, 
Ella  los  (or  las)  tiene, 
Nosotros  los  (or  las)  tenemos, 
Vosotros  los  (or  las)  teneis, 
Ellos  los  (or  las)  tienen, 
Ellas  los  (or  las)  tienen, 

Yo  no  los  (or  las)  tengo, 
Tii  no  los  (or  las)  tienes, 
El  no  los  (or  las)  tiene, 
Ella  no  los  (or  las)  tiene, 
Nosotros  no  los  (or  las)  tenemos, 
Vosotros  no  los  (or  las)  teneis, 
Ellos  no  los  (or  las)  tienen, 
Ellas  no  los  (or  las)  tienen, 

i  Los  (or  las)  tengo  yo  ? 
etc. 

i  No  los  (or  las)  tengo  yo  ? 
etc. 


I  have  it  not. 

thou  hast  it  not 

he,  has  it  not. 

she  has  it  not. 

we  have  it  not. 

you  have  it  not. 

they  (masc. )  have  it  not. 

they  (fern.)  have  it  not. 

have  lit? 
etc. 

have  I  it  not  f 
etc. 

I  have  them. 

thou  hast  them. 

he  has  them. 

she  has  them. 

we  have  them. 

you  have  them. 

they  (masc. )  have  them. 

they  (fern. )  have  them. 

I  have  them  not. 

thou  hast  them  not. 

he  has  them  not. 

she"  has  them  not. 

ive  have  them  not. 

you  have  them  not. 

they  (masc. )  have  them  not. 

they  (fern.)  have  them  not. 

have  I  them  f 
etc. 

have  I  them  not  \ 
etc. 


Lo,  le,  la,  los,  las,  as  Pronouns  in  Compound  Tenses. 


Yo  lo  (or  la)  he  tenido, 
etc. 


I  have  had  it. 
etc. 


124:  LESSON  22. 

i  Lo  (or  la)  he  tenido  yo  ?  have  I  had  it  ? 

etc.  etc. 

V 

Yo  no  lo  (or  la)  he  tenido,  /  have  not  had  it. 

etc.  etc. 

I  No  lo  (or  la)  he  tenido  yo  ?  have  I  not  had  it  t 

etc.  etc. 

Yo  los  (or  las)  he  tenido,  /  have  had  them. 

etc.  etc. 

Yo  no  los  (or  las)  he  tenido,  /  have  not  had  them. 

etc.  etc. 

l  Los  (or  las)  he  tenido  yo  ?  have  I  had  them  ? 

etc.  etc. 

i  No  los  (or  las)  he  tenido  yo  ?  have  I  not  had  them  f 

etc.  etc. 

Lo,  le,  la,  los,  las,  joined  with  the  Infinitive  and  the  Gerund* 

Tenerlo,  tenerla,  to  have  it. 

Tenerlos,  tenerlas,  to  have  them. 

Teniendolo,  teniendola,  having  it. 

Teniendolos,  teniendolas,  having  them. 

Lo,  le,  la,  los,  las,  placed  after  the  Verb. 

Tengolo,  tengola,  /  have  it. 

Tengolos,  tengolas,  I  have  them. 


Ejemplos.  Examples. 

i  Quien  tiene  mi  libro  ?  Who  has  my  book  ? 

Yo  lo  tengo.  I  have  it. 

j  Ha  visto  V.  mi  lapiz  ?  Have  you  seen  my  pencil  ? 

Lo  he  visto.  I  have  seen  it. 

I  Tiene  V.  mis  plumas  ?  Have  you  my  pens  ? 

Las  tengo.  I  have  them. 

l  Ha  tenido  V.  mis  plumas  ?  Have  you  had  my  pens  ? 

Las  he  tenido.  I  have  had  them. 

j  Vende  V.  su  casa  ?  Do  you  sell  your  house  ? 

La  vendo.  I  sell  it. 

i  Quien  ha  tornado  mis  papeles  ?  Who  has  taken  rny  papers  ? 


PRONOUNS  IN   SIMPLE   TENSES. 


125 


Nadie  los  ha  tornado. 

j  Lo  tiene  su  amigo  de  V.  ? 

El  no  lo  tiene. 

j  Los  tienen  sus  amigos  ? 

Ellos  no  los  tienen. 

j  Lo  tiene  la  senora  ? 

Ella  no  lo  tiene. 

a  Los  tienen  las  senoritas  ? 

Ellas  no  los  tienen. 

j  Quien  los  tiene  ? 

Nadie  los  tiene. 

i  A  quien  lo  da  V.  ? 

Lo  doy  a  mi  amigo. 

j  Lo  sabe  V.  ? 

Lo  se. 

Tomelo  V. 

No  lo  tome  V. 


Nobody  has  taken  them. 

Has  your  friend  it  ? 

He  has  it  not. 

Have  your  friends  them  ? 

They  have  them  not. 

Has  the  lady  it  ? 

She  has  it  not. 

Have  the  young  ladies  them  ? 

They  have  them  not. 

Who  has  them  ? 

Nobody  has  them. 

To  whom  do  you  give  it  ? 

I  give  it  to  my  friend. 

Do  you  know  it  ? 

I  know  it. 

Take  it. 

Do  not  take  it  ? 


Lo,  Declinable  and  Undeclinable. 


\  Esta  V.  mala,  senora  ? 

Lo  estoy. 

i  Es  V.  la  enferma  ? 

La  soy. 

i  Estan  VV.  satisfechos  ? 

Lo  estamos. 

i  Son  VV.  los  hijos  del  Senor  Pable  ? 

Los  somos. 

i  Son  VV.  las  hijas  de  Maria  ? 

Las  somos. 

Vocabulario. 

El  armario,  the  closet. 

El  boton,  the  button. 

El  zapato,  the  shoe. 

El  zapatero,  the  shoemaker. 

La  bodega,  the  cellar. 

La  cama,  the  bed. 

La  cocina,  the  kitchen. 

La  gallina,  the  fowl,  the  chicken. 

La  lavandera,  the  washerwoman. 

La  manana,  the  morning. 

La  sabana,  the  sheet. 

Ann,  even. 


Are  you  sick,  madam  ? 

I  am  (so). 

Are  you  the  patient  (fern.)  ? 

I  am  (she). 

Are  you  pleased  ? 

We  are  (so). 

Are  you  the  sons  of  Mr.  Paul  ? 

We  are  (they). 

Are  you  the  daughters  of  Mary ! 

We  are  (they). 

Vocabulary. 
Ausente,  absent. 
Bien,  well. 
Donde,  where. 
Demasiado,  too,  too  much. 
Necesitar,  to  need. 
No... mas,  no... more. 
Tampoco,  not  either,  neither. 
Tarde,  late. 
Traer,  to  bring. 
i  Ve  V.  1  do  you  see  f 
Veo,  1  see. 
i  Vende  V.  1  do  you  sell  ? 


126  LESSON  22. 

Exercise  43. 

1.  i  Carlos,  tiene  V.  mis  botones  de  oro  ?  2.  Yo  no  los  tengo  ;  su 
hermano  de  V.  los  tiene.  3.  [  Porque  los  ha  tornado  el  ?  4.  Yo  no 
lo  se.  5.  [Eduardo,  sabe  V.  su  leccion?  6.  Yo  no  la  se  muy  bien. 
7.  [  Ha  visto  V.  el  caballo  de  mi  tio  1  8.  i  Que  caballo  ?  9.  Su  ca- 
ballo  bianco.  10.  Lo  he  visto  esta  mafiana.  11.  [  Tiene  su  hermanc 
todavia  su  casa  ?  12.  No  la  tiene  mas ;  la  ha  vendido.  13.  i  Iklt 
tenido  V.  mi  libro  ?  14.  No  lo  he  tenido  ;  V.  lo  ha  tenido  V.  mismo 
15.  i  Tiene  su  hermana  de  V.  mis  cuadernos  ?  16.  Si,  ella  los  tien<f 
ensucuarto.  17.  i  Donde  tienen  W.  sus  galliuas  ?  18.  Lastenemofe 
en  el  patio.  19.  [  No  las  tienen  VV.  en  el  jardin  ?  20.  No,  no  las 
tenemos  alii  desde  que  tenemos  flores  y  legumbres.  21.  i  Quien  tiene 
sus  zapatos  de  V.  1  22.  El  zapatero  los  tiene.  23.  i  Tiene  el  tambieil 
los  mios  ?  24.  &\  no  los  tiene.  25.  [  Quien  los  tiene  1  26.  Yo  no  se 
quien  los  tiene.  27.  Nadie  los  tiene,  estan  en  el  cuartito.  28.  [  Tiene 
V.  mis  plumas  1  29.  Las  he  tenido,  pero  no  las  tengo  ahora.  30.  \.  Las 
tiene  su  hermano  ?  31.  No  las  tiene  tampoco.  32.  ?,  Ha  visto  V.  4 
Carlos  ?  33.  Le  he  visto  en  el  jardin.  34.  i  Ha  traido  la  lavandera 
la  ropa  ?  35.  Todavia  no.  36.  i  Porque  no  la  ha  traido  ?  37.  Por- 
que  la  ha  recibido  demasiado  tarde.  38.  [  Esta  Y.  malo  1  39.  Lo 
estoy  siempre.  40.  j  Estan  VV.  malos  1  41 .  Lo  estamos. 

Exercise  44. 

1.  Has  the  cook  the  vegetables  ?  2.  She  has  them.  3.  Has  she. 
(got)  them  in  the  kitchen  1  4.  No,  sir,  she  has  them  in  the  closet. 
5.  Where  have  you  your  wine  ?  6.  We  have  it  in  the  cellar.  7.  Th'fc 
sheets  are  on  the  bed.  8.  Yes,  madam,  I  know  it.  9.  Have  you 
my  knife  ?  10.  I  have  it  not.  11.  Has  your  brother  it  ?  12.  Yes, 
sir,  he  has  it.  13.  Do  you  sell  your  house  ?  14.  I  do  not  sell  it. 
15.  Where  is  the  little  boy  1  16.  He  is  in  the  garden.  17.  Do  you 
see  my  hat  ?  18.  I  don't  see  it.  19.  Are  you  sick  ?  20.  I  am  (so). 
21.  Have  you  had  my  book  ?  22.  I  have  had  it  this  morning,  but  I 
do  not  have  it  now,  23.  Have  you  found  your  copybook  ?  24.  I 
have  found  it  in  your  room.  2,5.  Do  you  wish  it  ?  26.  I  don't  wish 
it.  27.  Where  have  you  bought  this  sugar  ?  28.  I  have  bought  it  at 
(en)  vour  store.  29.  Have  you  seen  my  father  ?  30.  I  have  seen 
him  this  morning.  31.  Have  you  the  money  to-day  ?  32.  No,  sir, 
I  have  it  not.  33.  Do  you  see  those  men  ?  34.  Yes,  sir,  I  see  them. 


PRONOUNS   IN   SIMPLE   TENSES. 


127 


35.  Is  your  sister  absent  ?  36.  She  is  not  (so),  she  is  in  my  mother's 
room.  37.  Why  have  you  taken  my  books  ?  38.  I  have  not  taken 
them;  I  have  not  even  seen  them.  39.  If  you  want  my  book,  take 
it.  40.  I  don't  want  it.  41.  Do  you  need  this  piece  of  paper? 
42  Yes,  I  need  it  ;  do  not  take  it. 


Gramatica. 


Grammar. 


1  •  Lo,  le,  masc.y  la,  fern.,  meaning  it,  him,  her,  or  so,  and  los, 
masc.,  la,stfem.,  meaning  them,  they,  are  generally  placed  before 
the  verb,  except  in  the  imperative  affirmative,  the  infinitive,  and 
the  gerund. 

In  these  three  cases  the  pronouns  are  placed  after  the  verb 
and  joined  to  it  so  as  to  form  one  word  : 

Yo  lo  tengo,  1  have  it. 

]h  lo  dice, 

Los  compramos, 

j  Quien  los  quiere  ? 

Yo  no  los  quiero, 

Yo  le  vendo  mi  caballo, 

Ella  lo  sabe, 

i  Esta  el  malo  ? 

Loesta, 

Tomelo  V., 

No  lo  tome  V., 

Vendala  V., 

Traigalos  V., 

Delas  V., 

Nolasde  V., 

Sabiendolo,  lo  hare, 

Vendiendolo,  tendre  dinero, 

No  quiero  verlo, 

No  puedo  hacerlo, 

Se  decirlo, 


We  buy  them. 

Who  wants  them. 

I  don't  wish  them. 

I  sell  him  (or  her)  my  horse, 

She  knows  it. 

Is  he  sick  ? 

He  is. 

Take  it. 

Do  not  take  it. 

Sell  it  (fern.). 

Bring  them. 

Give  them  (fern.). 

Do  not  give  them. 

Knowwg  it,  I  will  do  it. 

By  selling  it,  I  will  have  money. 

I  do  not  wish  to  see  it. 

I  cannot  do  it. 

I  know  how  to  say  it. 


2.  The  same  pronouns  may  also  be  placed  after  the  verb, 
forming  one  word  with  it.  But,  in  this  case,  the  personal  pro- 
noun must  be  left  out. 

This  way  of  expressing  one's  self,  although  rarely   used  in 


128  LESSON  22. 

conversation,  is  considered  elegant  in  writing,  and  is,  therefore, 
often  used  by  good  writers : 

Tengolo,  I  have  it. 

Diolo  a  su  hermano,     He  gave  it  to  his  brother. 

Vendiolas  ayer,  He  sold  them  (fern.)  yesterday. 

Compr61os  todos,          He  bought  them  all. 

Vile  ayer,  /  saw  him  yesterday. 

NOTE.  —  This  order  is  more  often  found  in  connection  with  the  imper- 
fect and  past  definite  tenses,  especially  when  these  come  at  the  beginning 
of  the  phrase. 

3.  These  pronouns,  when  used  with  compound  tenses,  are 
placed  before  the  auxiliary: 

Yo  lo  he  tenido,  /  have  had  it. 

Los  nemos  visto,  We  have  seen  them. 

fil  lo  ha  comprado,         He  has  bought  it. 

!•  In  sentences  containing  an  infinitive  besides  the  principal 
verb,  the  same  pronouns  may  be  placed  either  after  the  infini 
tive  or  before  the  principal  verb.  The  better  usage  is,  however, 
to  put  the  pronoun  with  the  verb  with  which  it  belongs : 

Yo  quiero  comprurlo  or  )  f  ^  fe         ^ 
Yo  lo  quiero  comprar,    ) 

^11  ha  querido  venderlo  or  ) 

*t ,    ,T          . ,  }  He  has  wished  to  sell  it. 

El  lo  ha  querido  vender,     ) 

5.  Lo  remains  invariable  when  it  can  be  translated  by  so, 
either  expressed  or  understood : 

a  Es  V.  viuda  ? —  Lo  soy,  Are  you  a  widow?  I  am  (so), 

i  Estan  W.  enfermos  ? — Lo  estamos,     Are  you  sick? — We  are  (so). 
i  Podemos  entrar  ?  —  V  V.  lo  pueden,     May  we  come  in  f —  You  may  (do  so)c 

But  lo  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  which  it  repre- 
sents, when  the  noun  is  used  in  a  determinate  sense,  i.  e.  when 
accompanied  by  the  article,  or  a  possessive  or  demonstrative 
adjective : 

i  Es  V.  la  viuda  ?  —  La  soy,  Are  you  the  widow?  I  am  (she), 

i  Son  V V.  los  hijos  de  Manuel  ?  —        Are  you  the  sons  of  Manuel  ?  —  We 
Los  somos,  are  (they). 

6.     Observations  on  lo,  le,  and  la. 

Opinions  are  divided  about  the  rendering  of  the  pronoun  it,  when  refer- 
ring to  a  masculine  noun,  and  used  as  direct  object. 


RELATIVE    AND   INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS.  129 

Some  grammarians  do  not  admit  that  lo  should  be  used  when  referring 
to  a  noun,  and  are  in  favor  of  le.     According  to  them  we  should  say  : 
j  Tiene  V.  el  libro  ?  —  Si,  yo  le  tengo,    Have  you  the  book  ? —  Yes,  I  have  it. 
Lo  should  be  used  only  when  referring  to  the  complement  of  a  verb,  as : 
j  Sabe  V.  que  su  hermano  esta  aqui  ?          Do  you  know  that  your  brother  is 

—  Si,  yo  lo  se,  here  ?  —  Yes,  I  know  it. 

This  opinion  is  opposed  by  others,  who  consider  le  as  the  dative  case, 
either  masculine  or  feminine,  and,  therefore,  use  lo  for  it  or  him. 
Yo  lo  veo,  /  see  it 

Yo  le  vendo  mi  caballo,          I  sell  him  (or  her)  my  horse. 

We  have  adopted  the  last  rule,  which  appears  to  us  to  have  most  fol- 
lowers, but  would  add,  that  in  presence  of  conflicting  opinions,  we  consider 
that  either  le  or  lo  may  be  used  with  equal  propriety.  A  statement  often 
made  is:  that  le  is  used  for  persons  and  lo  for  things. 

According  to  the  rule  laid  down  by  us,  los,  las  must  be  used  in  the 
accusative  case  for  them  ;  and  les  in  the  dative  case  for  to  them.  We  find, 
however,  la  and  las  used  in  the  dative  feminine  instead  of  le  and  les  by 
classic  authors,  but  the  Academia  Espanola  does  not  approve  of  this 


Leccidn  XXIII.  Lesson  XXIII. 

RELATIVE   AND    INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Relative. 

due,  who,  whom,  which,  that. 
ftuien,  sing.,   quienes,  pi.,  who,  whom,   whoever,  whomsoever, 

he  who. 

El  cual  or  cual,  who,  which,  that  which,  which  ones. 
Cuyo,  m.  s.,  cuya,  f.  s.,  cuyos,  m.  pi.,  cuyas,  f.  pi.,  whose,  of 
which. 

Cual  declined. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.          Feminine.  Masculine.  Feminine. 

El  cual,      la  cual,        los  cuales,         las  cuales,  who,  whom, 

which,  which  one,  which  ones. 
Del  cual,    de  la  cual,    de  los  cuales,    de  las  cuales,  of  whom, 

from  whom,  whose,  of  which  one,  of  which  ones. 
Al  cual,      a  la  cual,      a  los  cuales,      a  las  cuales,  to  whom, 

to  which,  to  which  one,  to  which  ones. 
9 


130 


LESSON   23. 


Interrogative. 

ftuien?  ftuienes?  who?    Cual?  Cuales?  which?  which  one? 
Que ?  what?  which  ?          Ciiyo?  Cuya?  Ciiyos?  Ciiyas?  whose? 


Ejemplos. 
El  cabajlero  que  vive  aqui,  es  Frances. 

El  hombre  a  quien  ha  bio  es  pobre. 

I  De  quien  habla  V.  ? 

El  libro  que  el  tiene,  es  mio. 

i  Que  quiere  V.  ? 

;  Que  bonito  es  ! 

Pedro  es  el  que  lo  ha  dicho. 

He  encontrado  a  Pedro,  el  cual  me 

dio  una  carta. 
Este  es  el  hombre  al  cual  V.  debe 

dinero. 

Yo  se  cual  es  la  causa  de  esto. 
i  Cual  de  los  dos  habla  mejor  ? 
El  hombre,  cuyo  hijo  esta  aqui. 
La  casa,  cuyas  ven tanas  vemos. 

i  A  cual  de  mis  amigos  ha  dado  V. 

el  libro  ? 

i  De  quien  (or  cuyo)  es  este  perro  ? 
i  De  quien  (or  cuyas)  son  estas  tijeras  ? 
i  Quien  es  esa  mujer  ? 
I  Quienes  son  aquellos  hombres  ? 


Vocabulario. 


Examples. 

The  gentleman  who  lives  here  is  a 

Frenchman.  , 

The  man  to  whom  I  speak  is  poor. 
Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 
The  book  which  he  has  is  mine. 
What  do  you  wish  ? 
How  pretty  it  is  ! 
Peter  is  the  one  who  said  it. 
I  met  Peter,  who  gave  me  a  letter. 

This  is  the  man  to  whom  you  owe 

money. 

I  know  what  is  the  cause  of  this. 
Which  of  the  two  speaks  better  ? 
The  man  whose  son  is  here. 
The  house  of  which  we  see  the 

windows. 
To  which  of  my  friends  have  you 

given  the  book  ? 
Whose  dog  is  this  ? 
Whose  scissors  are  these  ? 
Who  is  that  woman  ? 
Who  are  these  men  ? 


Vocabulary. 


El  padrino,  the  godfather. 
El  puente,  the  bridge. 
La  fruta,  the  fruit. 
La  prima,  the  cousin  (f.). 
La  tia,  the  aunt. 
La  vida,  the  life. 
Aqui,  here. 
Bien,  good. 
Canta,  sings. 
Contento,  pleased. 
Cortado,  cut. 
Dado,  given. 


Debe,  owes. 
Deseamos,  we  wish. 
Dicho,  said. 
Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
Ensena,  teaches. 
Gana,  earns. 
Hablan,  they  speak. 
Hecho,  done. 
Inteligente,  intelligent. 
Loco,  insane. 
Llora,  weeps. 
Muerto,  died  (past  part). 


Muri6,  died  (preter.). 
Necesito,  I  need. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Parecen,  seem. 


Puesto,  put. 
Hie,  laughs. 
Sabe,  knows. 
Tan,  so. 

Trabaja,  works. 
Via  jar,  1.  to  travel. 
Visto,  seen. 


RELATIVE   AND   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  131 

Exercise  45. 

1.  Juan  es  un  hombre  que  sabe  mucho.  2.  Es  una  cosa  de  que 
hablan  mucho.  3.  Mi  hermano,  mi  tia  y  mis  primas  que  han  venido 
ayer,  estan  en  mi  casa.  4.  He  visto  al  muchacho  que  V.  ensena. 
5.  6l  es  quien  ha  dicho  esto.  6.  He  estado  en  el  campo,  lo  que  me 
Jba  hecho  mucho  bien.  7.  Me  ha  pagado,  con  lo  que  estoy  contento. 
8.  He  visto  a  Pedro,  el  cual  me  ha  dicho  muchas  cosas.  9.  Estos 
hombres  parecen  locos :  cual  (one)  llora,  cual  canta  y  cual  rie. 
10.  Estas  frutas  son  tales  cuales  (such  as)  las  deseamos.  11.  £l  es 
a  quien  V.  debe  la  vida.  12.  El  hombre,  cuya  mujer  ha  muerto,  esta 
muy  triste.  13.  £l  que  no  trabaja,  no  gana  dinero.  14.  He  estado  en 
la  casa  en  la  cual  he  visto  a  su  padre  de  V.  15.  Veo  la  casa  cuyas 
ven tanas  son  tan  grandes.  16.  El  conierciante  cuya  familia  esta  aqui, 
es  muy  rico.  17.  [  A  cual  de  mis  amigos  ha  dado  V.  el  libro  1  18.  No 
lo  he  dada  a  ninguno.  19.  La  casa  que  tiene  mi  padre  es  muy 
grande.  20.  Aqui  esta  el  cuarto  en  el  cual  murio.  21.  £  Con  que  ha 
hecho  V.  esto  ]  22.  Con  un  lapiz.  23.  i  Tiene  V.  lo  que  V.  necesita  1 
24.  Si,  senor,  tengo  todo  lo  que  necesito.  25.  La  casa  que  V.  tiene, 
es  mas  pequena  que  la  que  yo  tengo. 

Exercise  46. 

1.  The  gentleman  to  whom  you  have  written  has  not  received  your 
letter.  2.  Is  it  you  who  have  written  this  letter  ?  3.  It  is  I. 
4.  Here  is  the  knife  with  which  I  have  cut  the  bread.  5.  I  have 
-found  an  umbrella,  it  is  probably  the  one  you  have  lost.  6.  Here  is 
the  book  of  which  you  have  spoken.  7.  The  bridge  on  which  we  are 
is  the  largest  in  the  city.  8.  The  trunk  in  which  I  have  put  my 
clothes  is  not  large  enough  (enough  large)  for  me.  9.  How  intelligent 
that  child  is  (is  that  child)  !  10.  The  house  which  you  have  is  not. 
as  large  as  the  house  which  your  brother  has.  11.  The  gentleman 
whose  sister  you  have  seen  is  a  friend  of  my  father.  12.  Have  you 
all  that  you  want  1  13.  No,  1  want  many  things  yet.  14.  The  month 
in  which  we  are  is  the  coldest  of  the  year.  15.  The  boy  for  (para) 
whom  I  have  bought  this  book  is  sick.  16.  Have  you  seen  the  trunk 
with  which  I  have  been  traveling  1  17.  No,  where  is  it  1  18.  It  is 
in  the  room  in  which  I  slept.  19.  The  gentleman  of  whom  I  received 
this  book  is  my  godfather.  20.  Whose  apples  are  these  ?  21.  They 
are  mine.  22.  Which  horse  have  you  bought  ?  23.  I  bought  the  one 
you  saw  yesterday.  24.  Here  are  all  the  books  which  we  have. 


132  LESSON   23. 

25.  Your  brother  is  in  the  room.  26.  In  which  one  ?  27.  In  the 
large  one.  28.  Of  what  are  you  speaking  ?  29.  I  am  speaking  of 
many  things.  30.  We  are  speaking  of  my  aunt. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  due,  as  a  subject  or  nominative,  is  used  for  persons  as 
well  as  for  things,  and  may  refer  to  several  nouns  of  different 
number  and  gender : 

Es  un  hombre  que  sahe  mucho,  He  is  a  man  who  knows  much. 

Es  una  cosa  de  que  hahlan  mucho,  It  is  a  thing  of  which  they  speak  a 

great  deal. 

Su  hermano,  sus  tias  y  sus  hermanas        His  brother,  his  aunts,  and  his 
que  han  veriido  aver,  se  van  hoy,  sisters,  who  came  yesterday,  are 


2.  due,  relating  to  an  accusative,  does  not  require  the  prepo- 
sition a,  even  when  referring  to  a  person  : 

He  visto  al  irino  que  V.  ensena  (not        I  have   seen   the  child  that  you 
a  que  V.  ensena),  teach. 

3.  The  relative  que  is  accompanied  by  the  article  el,  la,  los, 
las,  lo,  according  to  gender  and  number. 

a.    To  avoid  ambiguity  when  the  relative  is  separated  from 
the  noun: 

Pidio  la  libertad  de  su  hijo,  la  que         Hebegged  for  the  liberty  of  his  son, 
consiguio,  and  obtained  it  (lit.  which  he  ob- 


b.  When  the  relative  que  serves  to  complete  the  action  of 
the  verb : 

Pedro  es  el  que  lo  ha  dicho,         Peter  is  the  one  who  said  so. 

c.  When  the  relative  que  refers  to  a  whole  sentence : 

He  estado  en  el  campo,  lo  que  me  ha        I  have  been  in  the  country,  which 
hecho  mucho  hien,  has  done  me  much  good. 

d.  When  the  relative  is  accompanied  by  a  preposition  and 
refers  to  a  thing  : 

Me  ha  pagado,  con  lo  que  estoy        He  has  paid  me,  and  1  am  pleased  with 
con  ten  to,  it  (lit.  with  which  I  am  pleased). 


RELATIVE   AND   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  133 

4.  due  is  never  suppressed  like    its  corresponding  English 
pronoun,   but  must  be  repeated   before   every  verb   that   fol- 
lows it : 

La  casa  que  tenemos,  The  house  (which)  we  have. 

El  libro  que  el  tiene,  The  book  (which]  he  has. 

El  caballo  que  yo  vendi  y  que  volvi  The  horse  which  I  have  sold  and 

a  coniprar,  bought  again. 

OBSERVATION.  —  In  a  relative  clause  (after  que)  there  is  usually  inver- 
sion of  the  subject : 

La  cancion  que  cantaba  Maria,         The  song  which  Mary  sang. 

La  herida  que  tenia  el  soldado,         The  wound  which  the  soldier  had. 

5.  ftuien,  quienes,  for  both  genders,  relate  only  to  persons : 

fil  es  £  quien  debo  la  vida,        It  is  to  him  I  owe  my  life. 

OBSERVATION.  —  When  the  relative  pronoun  follows  immediately  the 
noun  to  which  it  relates,  it  is  preferable  to  use  que,  even  when  referring  to 
persons.  It  would  be  better,  therefore,  to  say  : 

fiste  es  el  hombre  que  me  dio  el  libro, 
instead  of 

Quien  me  dio  el  libro,         This  is  the  man  who  gave  me  the  book, 
But  we  must  say : 

iSste  es  el  hombre  a  quien  V.  debe         This  is  the  man  to  whom  you  owe 
la  vida,  your  life, 

since  quien  must  be  used  with  a  preposition  in  speaking  of  people. 

6.  The  relatives  el  cual,  la  ciial,  lo  cual,  los  cuales,  las 

cuales,  have  but  one  termination  for  the  different  genders,  and 
relate  as  well  to  persons  as  to  things.  In  the  accusative  they 
take  the  preposition  a  when  they  relate  to  persons  : 

He  encontrado  a  Pedro  con  su  mujer,  /  met  Peter  with  his  wife,  and  he 

el  cual  me  ha  contado  muchas  co-  (who)  told  me  many  things. 
sas. 

ISste  es  el  hombre  al  cual  V.  debe  This  is  the  man  to  whom  you  must 

entregar  la  carta,  deliver  the  letter. 


134  LESSON  23. 

!•    The  article  is  omitted : 

a.    When  the  relative  is  separated  from  the  noun  by  a  verb 

and  completes  the  action  of  another  verb : 

La  prision  le  habia  abierto  los  ojos,  The  prison  had  opened  his  eyes,  and 
y  conocio  cual  era  la  verdadera  he  knew  which  was  the  real  cause 

causa  de  su  desgracia.  —  PADRE  of  his  misfortunes. 

DE   ISLA. 

I.    When  the  pronoun  may  be  used  as  partitive : 

Estos  hombres  parecen  locos  :  cual  These  men  appear  to  le  insane :  one 
llora,  cual  canta,  y  cual  rie,  iveeps,  another  sings  and  still  an- 

other laughs. 

Es  dificil  decir  cual  de  los  dos  canta  It  is  difficult  to  say  which  of  the  two 
mejor.  sings  better. 

c.   Cual  is  also  used  instead  of  the  comparative,    with  tal, 
both  words  agreeing  in  number  with  the  noun : 
Estas  frutas  son  tales  las  deseamos,  or  )        These  fruits  are  just  as  we  wish 


,  or) 
',       ) 


Estas  frutas  son  cuales  las  deseamos,       )  them. 

8.  Cuyo  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  which  it 
precedes : 

La  amiga  cuyo  hermano  esta  enferrao,  The  friend  whose  brother  is  sick. 

El  hombre  cuya  mujer  ha  niuerto,  The  man  whose  wife  has  died. 

El    principe    cuyos    caballos     hemos  The  prince  whose  horses  we  have 

visto,  seen. 

Ciceron,   de   cuyo  grande   orador  he  Cieero,  the  great  orator,  whose 

leido  las  obras,  works  I  have  read. 

9.  ftue  and  cual  may  in  many  cases  be  used  with  equal  pro* 
priety  when  accompanied  by  prepositions : 

He  estado  en  la  casa  en  que  (or  en  /  have  been  in  the  house  in  which 

la  cual)  murio,  (where)  he  died. 

iSste  es  el  cuehillo  con  que  (or  con  This  is  the  knife  with  which  he 

el  cual)  mato  la  gallina,  killed  the  hen. 

10.  Donde  is  used  also  in  Spanish,  when  the  relative  which 
may  be  replaced  in  English  by  the  adverb  where : 

He  estado  en  el  pueblo  en  donde  era        I  have  been  in  the  village  where  the 
la  feria,  fair  was. 


RELATIVE   AND   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


135 


11.  The  relative  pronouns  qne,  cual,  quien,  cuyo  are  also 
used  as  interrogative  pronouns  (que,  cual,  quien,  ciiyo,  taking 
then  an  accent),  and  mean  : 

Que,  which,  what.  Quien,  who,  whom. 

Cual,  which,  which  one.  Cuyo,  whose. 


Examples. 


i  jC  cual  de  mis  amigos  ha  dado  V. 

el  libro  ? 

$  Que  profesion  tiene  V.  ? 
i  Cual  es  su  merito  ? 
i  Cuales  son  sus  amigos  ? 
i  Que  hay  en  la  mesa  ? 
i  De  quien  habla  V.  ? 
i  Quien  es  aquel  ? 
i  Quienes  son  aqnellos  hombres  ? 
i  Quien  es  esa  mujer  ? 
i  A  quien  escribes  esa  carta  ? 


To  which  of  my  friends  have  you 

given  the  book  ? 
What  is  your  profession  ? 
What  (which)  is  his  merit  ? 
Which  are  his  friends  ? 
What  is  there  on  the  table  t 
Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 
Who  is  that  ? 
Who  are  those  men  ? 
Who  is  that  woman  ? 
To  whom  do  you  write  that  letter  ? 


OBSERVATION.  —  The  expressions  : 

I  Cuyo  es  este  perro  ?  Whose  dog  is  this  ? 

I  Ciiyas  son  estas  tijeras  ?         Whose  are  these  scissors? 

although  of  frequent  use,  are  hardly  correct,  and  it  is  preferable  to  use  de 
quien,  etc. ,  as  i  de  quien  es  este  perro  ?  i  de  quien  son  estas  tijeras  1  etc. 

12.  due  is  also  used  as  an  exclamation  corresponding  to  the 
English  how: 

i  Que  bonito  es  eso  !        How  pretty  that  is  ! 
\  Que  feliz  es  V.  !  How  happy  you  are  ! 

13.  ftn6  de  may  also  be  used  for  cuanto,  cuanta,  cudntos, 
cuantas,  how  much!  how  many  : 

\  Quo"  de  cosas  or  cuantas  cosas  podria        How  many  things  I  could  say  / 
decir  I 


136  LESSON  24. 

Leccidn  XXIV.  Lesson  XXIY. 

VERBOS   AUXILIARES,         AUXILIARY   VERBS. 

Haber,  to  have. 
MODO   INFINITIVO,        INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Haber,  to  have. 

Haber  habido,  to  have  had. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 

Habiendo,  having. 

Habiendo  habido,  having  had. 

Participio  pasivo,  past  participle. 
Habido,  had. 

TIEMPOS  SIMPLES,  Simple  Tenses. 

MODO  INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Presente,  present. 

Yo  he,  /  have. 

Tii  has,  thou  hast. 

El  ha,  he  has. 

Ella  ha,  she  has. 

Nosotros  hemos,  we  have. 

Vosotros  habeis,  you  have. 

Ellos  han,  they  (masc.)  have. 

Ellas  han,  they  (fern.)  have. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Habia,  /  had  (I  was  having 1 1  used  to  have) 

Habias,  thou  hadst. 

Habia,  he  had  or  she  had. 

Habiamos,  we  had. 

Habiais,  you  had. 

Habian,  they  had. 

Preterite  perfecto  definido,  preterit. 

Hube,  I  had  (did  have). 

Hubiste,  thou  hadst. 

Hubo,  he  had. 

Hubimos,  we  had. 

Hubisteis,  you  had. 

Hubieron,  they  had. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


137 


Future,  future. 


Habr4, 

Habras, 

Habra, 

Habremos, 

Habreis, 

Habran, 


Habria, 

Habrias, 

Habria, 

Habriamos, 

Habriais, 

Habrian, 


I  shall  or  will  have, 
thou  shalt  or  wilt  have, 
he  shall  or  will  have, 
we  shall  or  will  have, 
you  shall  or  will  have, 
they  shall  or  will  have. 


Condicional,  conditional. 


I  should  (or  would)  have. 
thou  shouldst  have, 
he  should  have, 
we  should  have. 


they  should  have. 


MODO  SUBJUNTIVO,         SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Haya, 

Hayas, 

Haya, 

Hayamos, 

Hayais, 

Hayan, 


Hubiera,  hubiese  ; 


Presente,  present. 

/  may  have. 
thou  mayest  have* 
he  may  have. 
we  may  have. 
you  may  have. 
they  may  have. 

Lnperfecto,  imperfect. 


Hubieras,  hubieses  ; 
Hubiera,  hubiese  ; 
Hubieramos,  hubiesemos  ; 
Hubierais,  hubieseis; 
Hubieran,  hubiesen  ; 


/  (might,  could,  would,  or)  should 

have. 

thou  shouldst  have. 
he  should  have. 
we  should  have. 


they  should  have. 


Future,  future. 

(Cuando  or  Si)  Hubiere,       (when  or  if)  I  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubieres,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have. 

Hubiere,  he  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubiereraos,  we  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubiereis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubieren,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


138  LESSON   24. 

TIEMPOS  COMPUESTOS,  Compound  Tense*. 

MODO  INDICATIVO,         INDICATIVE  MOO& 

Perfecto,  perfect. 

He  habido,  I  have  had. 

Has  habido,  thou  hast  had. 

Ha  habido,  he  has  had. 

Hemos  habido,  we  have  had. 

Habeis  habido,  you  have  had. 

Han  habido,  they  have  had. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 

Habia  habido,  /  had  had. 

Habias  habido,  thou  hadst  had. 

Habia  habido,  he  had  had. 

Habi'amos  habido,  we  had  had. 

Habiais  habido,  you  had  had. 

Habian  habido,  they  had  had. 

Preterito  anterior,  past  anterwrc 

Hube  habido,  /  had  had. 

Hubiste  habido,  thou  hadst  had 

Hubo  habido,  he  had  had. 

Hubimos  habido,  we  had  had. 

Hubisteis  habido,  you  had  had. 

Hubieron  habido,  they  had  had. 

Futuro  anterior,  future  anterior. 

Habre*  habido,  /  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habras  habido,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have  had* 

Habra  habido,  he  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habremos  habido,  we  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habreis  habido,  you  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habran  habido,  they  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Condicional  anterior,  conditional  anterior. 

Habria  habido,  I  should  (or  would)  have  had. 

Habrias  habido,  thou  shouldst  have  had. 

Habria  habido,  he  should  have  had. 

Habriamos  habido,  we  should  have  had. 

Habriais  habido,  you  should  have  had. 

Habrian  habido,  they  should  have  had. 


AUXILIARY   VERBS.  139 

MODO   SUBJUNTIVO,         SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Perfecto,  perfect. 

Haya  habido,  /  may  have  had. 

Hayas  habido,  thou  mayest  have  had. 

Haya  habido,  he  may  have  had. 

Hayamos  habido,  we  may  have  had. 

Hayais  habido,  you  may  have  had. 

Hay  an  habido,  they  may  have  had. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 

Hubiera,  or  hubiese  habido,  /  might,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
Hubieras,  or  hubieses  habido,  thou  mightest,  couldst,  shouldst  or 

wouldst  have  had. 
Hubiera,  or  hubiese  habido,  he  might,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
Hubieramos,  or  hubiesernos  habido,         we  'might,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
Hubierais,  or  hubieseis  habido,  you  might,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
Hubieran,  or  hubiesen  habido,  they  might,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 

Future,  future. 

(Si)  Hubiere  habido,  (if)  I  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Hubieres  habido,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have  had. 

Hubiere  habido,  he  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Hubieremos  habido,  we  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Hubiereis  habido,  you  shall  or  ivill  have  had. 

Hubieren  habido,  they  shall  or  will  have  had. 
NOTE.  —  The  imperative  of  haber  is  extremely  rare.     The  forms  are 
he,  and  habed. 


Tener,  to  have. 
MODO   INFINITIVO,         INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Tener,  to  have. 

Haber  tenido,  to  have  had. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 

Teniendo,  having. 

Habiendo  tenido,  having  had. 


140 


LESSON  24. 


Participio  pasivo,  past  participle. 

Tenido,  had. 

TIEMPOS  SIMPLES,  Simple  Tenses. 

MODO   INDICATIVO,  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Presente,  present. 

Tengo,               /  have.  Tenemos,           we  have. 

Tienes,               thou  hast.  Teneis,               you  have. 

Tiene,                he  has.  Tienen,              they  have. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Tenia,  /  had  (I  was  having,  I  used  to  have). 

Tenias,  thou  hadst. 

Tenia,  he  had. 

Teniamos,  we  had. 

Teniais,  you  had. 

Tenian,  they  had. 

Preterite  perfecto  definido,  preterite. 

Tuve,  /  had  ( did  have) . 

Tuviste,  thou  hadst. 

Tuvo,  he  had. 

Tuvimos,  we  had. 

Tuvisteis,  you  had. 

Tuvieron,  they  had. 

Future,  future. 

Tendre,  /  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have. 

Tendra,  he  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendremos,  we  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendreis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendran,  they' shall  or  will  have. 

Condicional,  conditional. 

Tendria,  I  should  (or  would)  have. 

Tendrias,  thou  shouldst  have. 

Tendria,  he  should  have. 

Tendriamos,  we  should  have. 

Tendriais,  you  should  have. 

Tendrian,  they  should  have. 

Imperative,  imperative. 

Ten  tii,  have  (have  thou). 

Tened,  have  (have  you). 


AUXILIARY    VERBS 


141 


MODO   SUBJUNT1VO,         SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Tenga, 

Tengas, 

Tenga, 

Tengamos, 

Tengais, 

Tengan, 


Tuviera,  tuviese  ; 
Tuvieras,  tuvieses ; 
Tuviera,  tuviese  ; 
Tuvieramos,  tuviesemos 
Tuvierais,  tuvieseis  ; 
Tuvieran,  tuviesen; 


Presente,  present. 

I  may  have, 
thou  mayest  have, 
he  may  have, 
we  may  have, 
you  may  have, 
they  may  have. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

I  (might,  could,  would  or)  should  have. 

thou  shouldst  have. 

he  should  have. 

we  should  have. 

you  should  have. 

they  should  have. 


(Ouando  or  Si)  Tuviere, 
Tuvieres, 
Tuviere, 
Tuvieremos, 
Tuviereis, 
Tuvieren, 


Future,  future. 

(when  or  if)  I  shall  or  will  have. 

thou  shalt  or  wilt  have, 
he  shall  or  will  have, 
we  shall  or  will  have, 
you  shall  or  will  have, 
they  shall  or  will  have. 


TIEMPOS  COMPUESTOS,  Compound  Tenses. 
MODO   INDICATIVO,         INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 

He  tenido,  /  have  had, 

etc.  etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 

Habia  tenido,  /  had  had, 

etc.  etc. 

Preterite  anterior,  past  anterior. 
Hube  tenido,  /  had  had, 

etc.  etc. 

Future  anterior,  future  anterior. 

Habre  tenido,  /  shall  or  will  have  had, 

etc.  etc. 


LESSON   24. 


UODO   SUBJUNTIVO,        SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  verfect. 

Haya  tenido,  /  may  have  had, 

etc.  etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 

Hubiera,  or  hubiese  tenido,          /  might,  could,  should  or  would  have  hadt 
etc.  etc. 

Future,  future. 

(Si)  Hubiere  tenido,  (if)  /  shall  or  will  have  had, 

etc. 


Vocabulario. 
El  buey,  the  ox. 
El  valor,  the  courage. 
La  esperanza,  the  hope. 
La  fortuna,  the  fortune. 
La  hacienda,  the  estate. 
La  noche,  the  night. 
La  paciencia,  the  patience. 
La  suerte,  the  fate. 


etc. 


Vocabulary. 


La  vez,  the  time. 
Acabar,  1.  to  finish. 
Almorzar,  \.to  breakfast. 
Bastante,  enough. 
Dejar,  1.  to  leave. 
Escrito,  written. 
Eso,  that. 
Guardar,  1.  to  keep. 

Exercise  47. 


Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
Heredar,  1.  to  inherit, 
Llegar,  1.  to  arrive. 
Mismo,  same. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Tener,  2.  to  hold}tohave. 
Todavia,  yet. 
Visto,  seen. 


1.  Tengo  un  hermano  en  Paris.  2.  [  Han  recibido  W.  cartas  hoy  ? 
3.  Si,  senor,  hemos  recibido  una  carta  de  nuestro  padre.  4.  [  Ha  visto 
V.  al  Presidente  ?  5.  Le  he  visto  varias  veces.  6.  [  Cuando  tendrd 
V.  dinero  ?  7.  Tendre  cien  duros  manana.  8.  [  Que  tenia  su  her- 
mano en  su  cuarto  1  9.  No  tenia  nada.  10.  Tenga  V.  paciencia, 
amigo  mio.  11.  [  Quien  tendra  el  valor  de  (to)  hacer  eso  ?  12.  Todos 
tendremos  ese  valor.  13.  [Tenian  los  muchachos  sus  libros  estii 
manana?  14.  No  los  tenian.  15.  [Cuando  habra  acabado  V.'? 
16.  Habre  acabado  en  una  hora.  17.  [  Tenian  W.  ainigos  en  aquella 
ciudad  ?  18.  Teniamos  varios.  19.  [Quien  ha  heredado  de  la  for- 
tuna del  general  ?  20.  El  general  no  ha  dejado  mnguna.  21.  [Ten- 
dran  W.  libros  franceses  el  ines  que  viene  (next  month)  ?  22.  Ya 
tenemos  muchos  libros  franceses  e  ingleses.  23.  [  Porque  no  habia 
escrito  V.  a  su  padre  ?  24.  Porque  yo  habia  escrito  a  mi  hermano. 
25.  i  Habfa  hablado  V.  a"  este  hombre  ?  26.  Yo  le  habia  hablado  dos 
6  tres  veces.  27.  [  Ha  almorzado  todo  el  mundo  ?  28.  El  caballero 
aleroan  no  ha  almorzado  todavia.  29.  [  Con  que  dinero  ha  comprado 
V.  esto  r(  30.  Con  ninguno,  no  lo  he  pagado  todavia.  31.  [  Tendria 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF    TENER.  143 

V.  el  ralor  de  salir  solo  1  32.  No,  yo  no  tendrfa  ese  valor.  33.  [  Tiene 
V.  las  Haves  de  la  casa  ?  34.  Las  tendre  esta  tarde.  35.  [  Ha  visto 
V.  al  senor  Palacio  ?  36.  Le  he  visto  en  su  almacen.  37.  El  padre 
de  Carlos  ha  perdido  toda  su  fortuna.  38.  Si  V.  no  es  prudente,  V. 
tendra  la  misnia  suerte.  39.  [  Ha  hallado  V.  algo  ?  40.  He  hallado 
una  Have  de  reloj.  41.  Es  mia. 

Exercise  48. 

1.  Why  have  you  not  spoken  to  the  gentleman?  2.  I  have  not 
seen  him.  3.  Shall  you  have  finished  your  work  this  evening  ?  4.  I 
shall  have  finished  it  in  two  hours.  5.  Had  (imperf.)  you  many 
horses  when  you  were  (estaba)  in  the  country  ?  6.  I  had  four,  and 
my  brother  had  five.  7.  Have  patience,  my  friend,  you  will  have 
the  money  to-morrow.  8.  Have  you  money  enough  for  the  voyage  ? 
9.  I  have  not  much,  but  I  have  enough.  10.  Had  you  lost  all 
hope  ?  11.  I  had  lost  all  my  money ;  and,  with  my  money,  all  hope. 
12.  The  mother  has  given  good  advice  to  her  daughter.  13.  We  had 
bought  many  oxen  for  our  estate.  14.  How  long  have  you  been  in 
that  country  ?  15.  I  have  been  there  five  years.  16.  Have  you 
written  all  your  letters  1  17.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  had  time.  18.  Has 
your  brother  written  his  ?  19.  He  has  not  written  them  either. 
20.  Have  the  children  gone  to  (a  la)  school  ?  21.  No,  madam,  they 
are  breakfasting.  22.  Has  your  father  sold  his  houses  ?  23.  He  has 
sold  the  large  one,  and  he  has  kept  the  small  one.  24.  Do  you  know 
if  the  gentleman  has  gone  out  ?  25.  He  had  gone  out  when  I  was 
upstairs.  26.  What  did  you  hold  (tenia)  in  your  hand?  27.  I 
held  (tenia)  the  key  of  the  garden.  28.  Have  you  spoken  to  your 
father  about  (de)  that  ?  29.  Not  yet,  my  father  is  not  in  (en  la) 
town.  30.  I  have  heard  that  the  vessel  has  arrived. 


Leceion  XXV.  lesson  XXV. 

IDIOMATIC   USES   OF   TENEB. 

Tener  calor,  to  be  warm. 

Tener  frio,  to  be  cold. 

Tener  hambre,  to  be  hungry. 

Tener  sed,  to  be  thirsty. 

Tener  sueno,  to  be  sleepy. 


144 


LESSON  25. 


1 


Tener  vergiienza, 

Teuer  miedo, 

Tener  gana, 

Tener  raz6n, 

No  tener  razon, 

Estar  errado, 

Hacer  nml, 

Tener  algo, 

No  tener  nada, 

Tener  diez  anos, 

Tener  los  ojos  negros. 

Tener  diez  pies  de  largo, 

Tener  diez  pies  de  ancho, 

Teuer  diez  pies  de  prof  undo, 

Tener  cien  pies  de  alto, 

Tener  las  inanos  frias, 

Tener  algo  que  hacer, 

Tener  los  ojos  malos, 

Tener  el  dedo  malo, 

Ejemplos. 

i  Tiene  V.  calor  ? 

No  tengo  calor,  tengo  frio. 

a  Quien  tiene  harnbre  ? 

Tenemos  hambre  y  sed. 

i  Tenia  V.  vergiienza  ? 

Si,  senor,  yo  tenia  vergiienza. 

Teniamos  sueno. 

Tendremos  frio  en  el  cuarto. 

El  clima  de  aquel  pais  es  muy  frio. 

El  cuarto  estd  frio. 

j  No  tiene  V.  vergiienza  ? 

Tengo  vergiienza  de  hablar. 

j  Quien  tiene  sueno  ? 

Todos  tenemos  sueno. 

i  De  quien  tiene  V.  miedo  ? 

Tengo  miedo  de  este  hombre. 

j  Tiene  V.  gana  de  salir  ? 

No  tengo  gana. 

j  Quien  tiene  razon  ? 

Yo  tengo  razon  y  V.  esta  errado. 


to  be  ashamed, 
to  be  afraid, 
to  have  a  mind, 
to  be  right. 

to  be  wrong. 

to  have  something  the  mattei 

to  have  nothing  the  matter. 

to  be  ten  years  old. 

to  have  black  eyes. 

to  be  ten  feet  long. 

to  be  ten  feet  wide. 

to  be  ten  feet  deep. 

to  be  a  hundred  feet  high. 

to  have  cold  hands. 

to  have  something  to  do. 

to  have  sore  eyes. 

to  have  a  sore  finger. 

Examples. 

Are  you  warm  ? 

I  am  not  warm,  I  am  cold. 

Who  is  hungry  ? 

We  are  hungry  and  thirsty. 

Were  you  ashamed  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  was  ashamed. 

We  were  sleepy. 

We  shall  be  cold  in  the  room. 

The  climate  of  that  country  is  very 

cold. 

The  room  is  cold. 
Are  you  not  ashamed  ? 
I  am  ashamed  to  speak. 
Who  is  sleepy  ? 
We  are  all  sleepy. 
Of  whom  are  you  afraid  ? 
I  am  afraid  of  this  man. 
Have  you  a  mind  to  go  out  ? 
I  have  no  mind  (to  go  out). 
Who  is  right  ? 
I  am  right  and  you  are  wrong. 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF    TEffER. 


145 


i  Tengo  yo  razon  de  comprar  esta 

casa  ? 

V.  hace  mal  de  comprarla. 
j  Que  tiene  Y.,  amigo  mio  ? 

Nada  tengo. 

;  Qu6  tiene  el  ? 

fil  no  tiene  nada. 

i  Que  edad  tiene  V.  ?          ) 

i  Cuantos  anos  tiene  Y.  ?  J 

Tengo  veinte  anos. 

i  Que  edad  tenia  el  ? 

Tenia  cincuenta  anos. 

Mi  hermano  tendra  manana  diez  y 

ocho  anos. 

Esta  senora  tiene  los  ojos  azules. 
La  mesa  tiene  seis  pies  de  largo. 
i  Tiene  V.  las  manos  frias  ? 
Tengo  las  manos  y  los  pies  frios. 
i  Que  tiene  V.  que  hacer  ? 
Tengo  que  escribir  dos  cartas, 

Vocabulario. 

El  bosque,  the  wood. 

El  comedor,  the  dining  room. 

El  dolor  de  cabeza,  the  headache. 

El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 

El  ojo,  the  eye. 

El  pelo,  the  hair. 

El  pie,  the  foot. 

La  cerveza,  the  leer. 

La  conducta,  the  conduct. 

La  edad,  the  age. 

La  noche,  the  night. 

Asf,  so. 


Am  I  right  in  buying  that  house  ? 

You  are  wrong  in  buying  it. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you,  my 

friend  ? 

Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 
What  is  the  matter  with  him  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  him. 

How  old  are  you  ? 

I  am  twenty. 
How  old  was  he  ? 
He  was  fifty. 

My  brother  will  be  eighteen  to- 
morrow. 

This  lady  has  blue  eyes. 
The  table  is  six  feet  long. 
Are  your  hands  cold  ? 
My  hands  and  feet  are  cold. 
What  have  you  to  do  ? 
I  have  two  letters  to  write. 

Vocabulary. 

Azul,  blue. 
Bailar,  1 .  to  dance. 
Bailo,  I  dance. 
Bajar,  1.  to  come  down. 
Buenas  noches,  good  night. 
Conmigo,  with  me. 
Decir,  3.  to  tell,  to  say. 
Llorar,  1.  to  cry,  to  weep. 
Rubio,/6m*,  blond. 
Tr  aba  jar,  1.  to  work. 
Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Ya  no,  no  longer. 


Exercise  49. 

1.  Teniamos  frio  en  nuestro  cuarto  y  hemos  bajado  aqui.  2.  [  Tiene 
Y.  miedo  del  perro  1  3.  No,  senor,  no  tengo  miedo  de  el  (him). 
4.  i  Tiene  hambre  el  muchacho  ?  5.  No  tiene  hambre  ;  tiene  suefio. 
6.  Siempre  tiene  hambre.  7.  El  tiempo  esta  frio  hoy.  8.  i  De  quien 


146  LESSON   25. 

tiene  V.  miedo  ?  9.  No  tengo  miedo  de  nadie.  10.  [  Quien  tiene 
razon.  su  hennana  6V.?  11.  Es  ella  que  esta  errada.  12.  i  No  tiene 
V.  vergiienza  de  bailar  a  (at)  su  edad  ?  13.  Yo  no  bailo  desde  mucho 
tiempo.  14.  [Tiene  V.  gana  de  ir  al  teatro  esta  noche  ?  15.  Si, 
si  V.  quiere  venir  conmigo.  16.  Con  mucho  gusto.  17.  i  Tiene  V. 
hambre  todavia  ?  18.  Yo  no  tengo  hambre,  pero  tengo  todavia  sed  ; 
tiene  V.  vino  en  la  casa?  19.  No  tengo  vino,  pero  tengo  cerveza. 

20.  i  Los   inuchachos   estan   en  el  bosque,  no  tienen  ellos  miedo  ? 

21.  Estan   con   los  criados   de   su  padre.     22.  £  Que  tienes,  Julia  ? 

23.  Tengo  dolor  de  cabeza.     24.  Esta  casa  tiene  sesenta  pies  de  alto, 
no  es  asi  ?    25.  Tiene  a  lo  inenos  ochenta  pies.    26.  [  Que  edad  tiene 
ese  muchacho  ?     27.  Tendra  seis  anos  en  un  mes.     28.  j  Tiene  Y.  las 
man os  frias  1     29.  No  tengo  las  manos  frias,  pero  tengo  los  pies  frios. 

30.  Emilio  tiene  los  ojos  negros  y  el  pelo  rubio.     31.  [  Tiene  Y.  algo 
que  hacer  ?     32.  Tengo  que  acabar  mis  cartas.     33.  i  Porque  ha  llo- 
rado  Y.  ?    34.  No  he  llorado,  tengo  los  ojos  malos.    35.  Y  yo  tambien. 

Exercise  50. 

1.  Who  is  wrong  ?  2.  Nobody  is  wrong.  3.  Have  you  a  mind  to 
go  to  the  ball  ?  4.  Yes,  I  have  a  mind  to  go.  5.  Have  you  time  to 
(de)  write  a  letter  for  (para)  my  brother  ?  6.  I  have  no  time  now, 
but  I  shall  have  time  this  evening.  7.  Is  not  your  brother  ashamed 
of  his  conduct  ?  8.  He  is  ashamed  of  nothing.  9.  You  have  no 
money,  and  you  have  not  the  courage  to  (de)  work.  10.  You  are 
wrong  to  say  that,  I  have  worked  five  days  this  week.  11.  I  have  a 
mind  to  write  to  iny  father.  12.  I  have  already  written  to  mine. 
13.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  to-day  1  14.  Nothing  is  the  matter 
with  me.  15.  What  has  your  brother  to  do  ?  16.  He  has  a  great 
deal  (muchisimo)  to  do.  17.  How  old  is  he  now  ?  18.  He  is  twenty- 
five.  19.  Is  anything  the  matter  with  your  sister?  20.  She  has  a 
headache.  21.  Is  Clara  pretty  ?  22.  She  is  very  pretty;  she  has  blue 
eyes  and  black  hair.  23.  How  old  were  you  at  (en)  that  time? 

24.  I  was  five  years  old.     25.  Are  your  feet  cold  ?     26.  My  feet  are 
always  cold.     27.  Is  your  dining  room  very  large  ?     28.  It  is  thirty 
feet  long  and  twenty  feet  wide.     29.  What  is  the  matter  with  that 
child  ?     30.  I   don't   know   what  (lo  que)  is  the  matter  with  him. 

31.  Of  what  were  you  afraid  ?    32.  We  were  not  afraid,  but  the  ladies 
were  afraid.     33.  Good  night,  I  am  going  (me  voy)  home,  I  have 
never  been  "so  (tanto)  sleepy. 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF    TENER.  147 

Gramatica.  Grammar 

1.  The  verb  tener,  to  have,  is  used  in  Spanish  instead  of  the 
verb  to  be,  with  the  words  calor,  warm,  warmth,  heat,  frio,  cold, 
hambre,  hunger,  sed,  thirst,  sueno,  deep,  vergiienza,  shame, 
miedo,  fear,  razdn,  right,  etc.,   used   substantively,  so  that  in 
order  to  express :  I  am  warm,  he  is  thirsty,  we  are  ashamed, 
etc.,   the   Spaniards  say  :    /  have  heat,   he  has  thirst,  ice  have 
shame,  etc.     It  follows,  therefore,  that  the  verb  to  be  has  to  be 
rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  verb 
tener,  to  have : 

Tengo  hambre,  I  am  hungry. 

Teni'a  or  tuve  hambre,  /  was  hungry. 

Tendre  hambre,  I  shall  be  hungry. 

Tendiia  hambre,  /  would  be  hungry. 

Que  yo  tenga  hambre,  That  I  may  be  hungry. 

Que  yo  tuviese  hambre,  That  I  might  be  hungry. 

He  tenido  hambre,  etc.,  I  have  been  hungry,  etc. 

OBSERVATION.  —  a.  The  verbs  ser  or  estar,  to  be,  are,  however,  used  in 
Spanish  with  the  word  frio,  cold,  when  the  English  verb  is  not  used  in  the 
sense  of  to  feel,  to  experience.  Thus,  we  should  not  say  :  el  hielo  tiene 
frio,  but  el  hielo  es  frio,  ice  is  cold  ;  nor  el  dia  tiene  frio,  but  el  dia  esta 
frio,  the  day  is  cold. 

Instead  of  calor,  the  Spaniards  use  in  the  same  cases  the  adjectives 
caliente,  calido,  etc.  La  sopa  esta  caliente  (and  not  la  sopa  tiene  calor), 
the  soup  is  warm. 

b.  The  adjectives  hambriento,  hungry,  famished,  sediento,  thirsty,  dry,. 
vergonzoso  ashamed,  bashful,  miedoso,  timid,  timorous,  afraid,  are  used 
as  in  English  with  the  verb  to  be,  estar  or  ser  : 

Estamos  hambrientos,          We  are  famished. 
fil  es  miedoso,  He  is  afraid. 

2,  Tener  vergiienza,  tener  miedo,  tener  razon,  tener  gana, 

etc.,  require  the  preposition  de  to  follow  them  when  coming 
before  a  verb : 

Tengo  gana  de  escribir,  /  have  a  mind  to  write. 

Tenemos  miedo  de  salir,  We  are  afraid  to  go  out. 

V.  tiene  razon  de  hacer  eso,        You  are  right  to  do  that. 


148  LESSON  25. 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  Spaniards  have  no  equivalent  for  to  be  wrong,  and 
are  therefore  obliged  to  use  : 

No  tener  razon,         Not  to  be  right. 
Estar  errado,  To  be  mistaken. 

Hacer  mal,  To  do  wrong. 

3*  The  verb  tener  is  used  idiomatically  in  Spanish  with  the 
words  algo,  something,  anything,  arid  nada,  nothing,  not  any- 
thing;  and,  when  thus  connected,  it  has  often  the  meaning  of 
to  be  something  the  matter  with,  to  ail: 

i  Que  tiene  V.  ?  What  is  the  matter  with  you? 

Tengo  algo,  Something  is  the  matter  with  me. 

( Is  anything  the  matter  with  him  ? 
i  Tiene  el  algo  ?  \  _.  jr.        .,  ,  .     , 

(  Does  anything  ail  him  ? 

6l  no  tiene  nada,  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  him. 

1.  The  verb  tener  is  also  used  in  Spanish  to  express  the  age ; 
and,  in  inquiring  about  the  age  of  a  person,  they  say  : 

2  Que  edad  tiene...  ?  What  age  has...? 

I  Cuantos  anos  tiene . . .  ?        How  many  years  has. . .  ? 

The  word  anos,  years,  must  not  be  left  out  either  in  the  ques- 
tion or  in  the  answer,  unless  expressed  in  the  first  part  of  the 
sentence : 

i  Cuantos  anos  tiene  V.  ?  How  old  are  you? 

Tengo  veinte  anos  y  mi  hermano  diez        /  am  twenty  and  my  brother 

y  ocho,  eighteen. 

OBSERVATION.  — Tener  mas  edad,  ser  de  ma's  edad  is  used  for  older, 
when  comparing  the  age  of  persons  who  are  not  really  old: 

Este  nino  tiene  mas  edad  que  aquel,        This  child  is  older  than  that  one. 

5.  Tener  algo  malo  means  to  have  a  pain,  a  sore,  or  ache 
somewhere,  and  is  used  in  Spanish  with  the  definite  article : 

Tengo  el  ojo  malo,  I  have  a  sore  eye. 

Tenemos  los  pies  malos,  We  have  sore  feet. 

IL1  tiene  la  rodilla  mala,  He  has  a  sore  knee. 

6,  The  definite  article  is  also  used  before  verbs  expressing 
moral  or  physical  properties : 

Tiene  los  ojos  azules,  He  has  blue  eyes. 

Tienen  los  pies  grandes,         They  have  large  feet. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS.  149 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  same  article  is  used  in  the  singular,  when  speak- 
ing of  several  persons,  if  the  property  spoken  of  is  single  in  each  person: 

El  tiene  la  nailz  larga,  He  has  a  long  nose. 

Ellos  tienen  la  nariz  larga,          They  have  long  noses. 

7»    In  speaking  of  the  dimensions   or  size   of  objects,   the 

Spanish  use  the  verb  tener,  to  have  : 

Este  arbol  tiene  cien  pies  de  alto,  This  tree  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 

La  ualle  tiene  cincuenta  pies  de  ancho,        The  street  is  fifty  feet  wide. 

8.    The  verb  tener  is  used  before  an  infinitive  with  the  con- 
junction que  when  obligation  or  necessity  is  expressed : 

Tengo  que  escrihir  cartas,         1  have  letters  to  write. 
Tenemos  que  salir,  We  have  to  go  out. 


Leccidn  XXVI.  Lesson  XXVI. 

VERBOS   AUXILIARES.  AUXILIARY    VERBS. 

Ser,  to  be. 
MODO  INFINITIVO,        INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Ser,  to  be. 

Haber  sido,  to  have  been. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 

Siendo,  being. 

Habiendo  sido,  having  been, 

Participio  pasivo,  past  participle. 
Sido,  been. 

TIEMPOS  SIMPLES,  Simple  Tenses. 
Presente,  present. 

Soy,  I  am. 

Eres,  thou  art. 

Es,  he  (or  she)  is. 

Somos,  we  are. 

Sois,  you  are. 

Son.  they  are. 


150  LESSON   26. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Era,  I  was  (I  used  to  be). 

Eras,  thou  wast. 

Era,  he  was. 

frames,  we  were. 

Erais,  you  were. 

Eran,  they  were. 

Preterite  perfecto  definido,  preterite. 

Fui,  /  was. 

Fuiste,  thou  wast. 

Fue,  he  was. 

Fuimos,  we  were. 

Fuisteis,  you  were. 

Fueron,  they  were. 

Future,  future. 

Sere,  /  shall  or  will  be. 

Seras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Sera,  he  shall  or  will  be. 

Seremos,  we  shall  or  will  be. 

Sereis,  you  shall  or  will  be. 

Seran,  they  shall  or  will  be. 

Condicional,  conditional. 

Seria,  I  should  (or  ivould)  be. 

Serias,  thou  shouldst  be. 

Seria,  he  should  be. 

Seriamos,  we  should  be. 

Serials,  you  should  be. 

Serian ,  they  should  be. 

Imperative,  imperative. 

Se  tu,  be  (be  thou). 

Sed,  be  (be  you). 

MODO   SUBJUNTIVO,  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Presente,  present. 

Sea,  /  may  be. 

Seas,  thou  mayest  be. 

Sea,  he  may  be. 

Seamos,  we  may  be. 

Soais,  you  may  be. 

Sean,  they  may  be. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS.  151 

Imperfecto,    imperfect. 

Fuera,  fuese  ;  /  (mighty  could,  would,  or)  should  be. 

Fueras,  fueses  ;  thou  shouldst  be. 

Fuera,  fuese  ;  he  should  be. 

Fueramos,  fuesemos  ;  we  should  be. 

Fuerais,  fueseis ;  you  should  be. 

Fueran,  fuesen  ;  they  should  be. 

Futuro,  future. 

(Cuando  or  Si)  Fuere,        (when  or  if)  I  shall  or  will  be. 

Fueres,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Fuere,  he  shall  or  will  be. 

Fueremos,  we  shall  or  will  be. 

Fuereis,  you  shall  or  will  be. 

Fueren,  they  shall  or  will  be. 

TIEMPOS  COMPUESTOS,  Compound  Tenses. 
MODO   INDICATIVO,         INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 

He  sido,  /  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

* 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 

Habia  sido,  /  had  been. 

etc.  etc. 

.     Preterite  anterior,  past  anterior. 

Hube  sido,  /  had  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Futuro  anterior,  future  anterior. 

Habre  sido,  /  shall  or  will  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

MODO   SUBJUNTIVO,         SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Perfecto    perfect. 

Haya  sido,  /  may  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 


152  LESSON   26. 

Pluscuamperfecto  pluperfect. 

Hubiera,  or  hubiese  sido,  /  migLt,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Future,  future. 

(Si)  Hubiere  sido,  (if)  I  shall  or  will  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 


Estar,  to  be. 

MODO   INFINITIVO,  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Estar,  to  be. 

Haber  estado,  to  have  been. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 

Estando,  being. 

Habiendo  estado,  having  been. 

Participio  pasivo,  past  participle. 

Estado,  been. 

TIEMPOS  SIMPLES,  Simple  Senses.               • 

MODO   INDICATIVO,  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Presente,  present. 

Yo  estoy,  lam. 

Tu  estas,  thou  art. 

lh  or  ella  esta,  he  or  she  is. 

Nosotros  estamos,  we  are. 

Vosotros  estais,  you  are. 

Ellos  or  ellas  estan,  they  are. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Estaba,  I  was  (I  used  to  be) 

Estabas,  thou  wast. 

Estaba,  he  or  she  was. 

Estabamos,  we  were. 

Estabais,  you  were. 

Estaban,  they  were. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS.  153 

Preterite  perfectq  definido,  preterite. 

Estuve,  /  was. 

Estuviste,  thou  wast. 

Estuvo,  he  was. 

Estuvirnos,  we  were. 

Estuvisteis,  you  were. 

Estuvieron,  they  were. 

Future,  future. 

Estare,  /  shall  or  will  be. 

Estaras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Estara,  he  shall  or  will  be. 

Estaremos,  we  shall  or  will  be. 

Estareis,  you  shall  or  will  be. 

Estaran,  they  shall  or  will  be. 

Condicional,  conditional. 

Estaria,  I  should  (or  would)  be. 

Estarias,  thou  shouldst  be. 

Estaria,  he  should  bt,. 

Estariamos,  we  should  be. 

Estariais,  you  should  be. 

Estarian,  they  should  be. 

Imperative,  imperative. 

Esta  tii,  be  (be  thou). 

Estad,  be  (be  you). 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO,  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Presente,  present. 

Este,  /  may  be. 

Estes,  thou  mayest  be. 

Este,  he  may  be. 

Estemos,  we  may  be. 

Este"is,  you  may  be. 

Esten,  they  may  be. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Estuviera,  estuviese  ;        /  (might,  could,  would,  or)  should  be. 

etc.  etc. 


154  LESSON  26, 

Future,  future. 
(Cuando  or  Si)  Estuviere,         (when  or  if)  /  shall  or  will  be. 

Estuvieres,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Estuviere,  he  shall  or  will  be. 

Estuvieremos,  we  shall  or  will  be. 

Estuviereis,  you  shall  or  will  be. 

Estuvieren,  they  shall  or  will  be. 

TIEMPOS  COMPUESTOS,   Compound  Tenses. 
MODO   INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 

He  estado,  I  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Habia  estado,  /  had  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Preterite  anterior,  past  anterior. 
Hube  estado,  1  had  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Future  anterior,  future  anterior. 
Habre  estado,  /  shall  or  will  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO,        SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 

Haya  estado,  /  may  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Hubiera,  or  hubiese  estado,  /  (might,  could,  should,  or) 

would  have  been. 
etc.  etc. 

Future,  future. 

(Si)  Hubiere  estado,  (if)  I  shall  or  will  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


155 


Vocabulario. 

El  carpintero,  the  carpenter. 
El  enf  ermo,  the  patient. 
El  parque,  the  park. 
El  precio,  the  price. 
La  batalla,  the  battle. 
Amado,  loved. 
Carolina,  Caroline. 
Comprado,  bought. 
Conocido,  known. 
Creo,  I  believe. 
Demolido,  pulled  down. 
Excepto,  i 


Vocabulary. 

Francia,  f.  France. 
Hasta,  till,  until,  as  far. 
Herido,  wounded. 
Impaciente,  impatient. 
Ir,  3.  to  go. 

Mucho  tiempo,  long  time. 
Pero,  but. 
Pocos,  few. 
Posible,  possible. 
Pues,  for,  as. 
Tarde,  late. 
Vendido,  sold. 


Exercise  51. 

1.  ^Esta  su  padre  en  casa?  2.  No  esta  ahora,  pero  estara  esta 
noche.  3.  i  Donde  estaba  V.  esta  mailana  ?  4.  Estuve  en  mi  cuarto 
todo  el  tiempo.  5.  [  Quien  estaba  con  V.?  6.  Mis  dos  hermanos 
estaban  conmigo.  7.  Esta  manzana  no  es  tan  buena  como  las  otras. 
8.  Si  V.  esta  aqui  manana  temprano,  tendra  V.  dinero.  9.  [  Cuando 
estara  V.  en  casa?  10.  Estare  temprano  esta  noche.  11.  Seamos 
amigos.  12.  j  No  es  V.  el  amigo  de  ese  hombre  ?  13.  Yo  era  sn 
amigo,  pero  ya  no  lo  soy.  14.  j  Estaria  V.  contento  si  su  hermana 
estuviese  (were)  aqui  ?  15.  Estaria  lo  mas  contento.  16.  V.  sera 
siempre  el  misirio,  amigo  mio ;  V.  es  demasiado  impaciente.  17.  Lo 
se.  18.  i  Donde  estaba  V.  cuando  V.  era  joven  ?  19.  Estuve  en 
Francia  hasta  la  edad  de  veinte  anos.  20.  [  Ha  estado  V.  hoy  en  la 
calle?  21.  He  estado  en  la  casa  todo  el  dia.  22.  i  Quien  estara  en 
su  casa  esta  noche  ?  23.  No  se  todavia.  24.  j  Estara  ahi  la  senorita 
Luisa  ?  25.  Si,  sefior,  y  la  senorita  Carolina  tambien.  26.  i  Es  boni- 
ta  la  senorita  Carolina?  27.  Ha  sido  muy  bonita,  pero  ya  no  es 
joven.  28.  [  Quiere  V.  ser  mi  amigo  ?  29.  Sere  su  amigo,  si  V.  es  el 
mio.  30.  i  Que  edad  tenia  V.  cuando  estaba  en  Inglaterra  ?  31.  Yo 
teiiia  doce  anos,  y  mi  hermano  quince.  32.  [  Es  V.  pobre  ?  33.  No 
soy  ni  rico  ni  pobre.  34.  Estos  dos  hombres  eran  muy  buenos 
amigos,  pero  ahora  son  enemigos.  35.  £  Estara  aqui  el  carpintero 
manana  ?  36.  Estara,  pero  tarde.  37.  i  Es  habil  este  medico  ? 
38.  Lo  es.  39.  [  Esta  V.  mala,  seiiora  ?  40.  Lo  estoy  un  poco 
41.  Este  autor  todavia  no  es  conocido  ;  pero  lo  sera  un  dia,  puetj 
tiene  muclio  talento. 


156  LESSON   27. 

Exercise  52. 

1.  Are  you  sick,  my  little  friend  ?  2.  1  am  not,  but  my  brother  is. 
3.  Is  this  hat  yours  or  your  brother's  ?  4.  It  is  neither  his  nor  mine. 
5.  Are  the  horses  sold  1  6.  All  the  horses  are  sold  except  one.  7.  Is 
Charles's  mother  old  1  8.  She  is,  but  she  is  pretty  yet.  9.  Are  you 
the  lady  of  the  house  ?  10.  I  am  not ;  I  am  her  sister.  11.  Are  those 
gentlemen  friends  I  12.  They  have  been,  for  a  long  while.  13.  Is 
your  letter  written  ?  14.  It  will  be  written  very  soon.  15.  Do  you 
know  if  the  patient  is  better?  16.  He  was  (imperf.)  much  better 
this  morning.  17.  G-ood  morning,  sir  ;  is  your  brother  at  home  ? 
18.  I  believe  that  he  is.  19.  When  will  you  be  ready  to  (para)  go 
with  me  1  20.  I  will  be  ready  in  a  few  minutes.  21.  This  child  is 
loved  by  (de)  every  body.  22.  These  books  have  been  bought  in 
Paris.  23.  When  will  you  be  the  first  in  your  class  1  24.  I  am 
always  the  first.  25.  Where  were  (imperf.)  you  this  morning  ?  26.  I 
was  in  the  park  with  my  two  sisters.  27.  Is  the  park  far  from  here  1 
28.  It  is  not  very  far.  29.  Are  those  two  men  friends  yet  ?  30.  They 
were  (imperf.)  friends,  but  I  don't  know  if  they  are  now.  31.  The 
general  was  (pret.)  wounded  in  the  battle.  32.  Three  houses  have 
been  pulled  down  in  our  street.  33.  How  is  that  possible  ?  34.  It 
is  very  possible.  35.  The  boys  were  (imperf.)  playing  in  the  yard 
when  I  was  (pret.)  at  their  house.  36.  The  goods  have  been  sold  at 
a  very  good  price. 

OBSERVATION.  —  All  the  rules  on  the  verbs  ser  and  estar,  to  be,  having 
been  given  in  Lesson  V.,  we  refer  the  student  to  the  same,  and  would 
recommend  a  review  of  the  important  rules  therein  contained. 


Leccion  XXVII.  Lesson  XXVII. 

HABER  AND  8KB  USED  AS  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

Haber,  there  to  be. 
Hay,  there  is,  there  are,  it  is. 

a  la,  i  there  was,  there  were. 

Hubo,  ) 

Habra,  there  shall  or  will  be. 

Habria,  there  should  or  would  be. 

Hubiera  or  hubiese,  there  should  or  would  be. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS   HABER   AND   SER 


157 


Ha  habido, 

Habia  habido, 

Habra  habido, 

Habri'a  habido, 

Hubiera  or  hubiese  habido, 

i  Hay  ? 
i  Habia  ? ) 

1  Hubo  ? 

2  Ha  habido  ? 
No  hay, 

No  habia,  ) 

Nohubo,  } 

No  ha  habido, 

No  habia  habido, 

i  Que  hay  ? 

I  Que  hay  de  nuevo  ? 

Ejemplos. 

Hay  una  carta  para  V. 
I  Hay  pan  en  la  oasa  ? 
No  hay. 

i  Habia  mucho  pescado  en  la  plaza  ? 
Habia  mucho. 
Hay  diez  mil. 
i  Habra  un  baile  manana  ? 
Ha  habido  uno  ayer. 


there  has  been,  there  have  been, 
there  had  been, 
there  shall  or  will  have  been, 
there  should  or  would  have  been, 
there  should  or  would  have  been. 

is  there  ?  are  there  ?  is  it  ? 
was  there  ?  were  there  ? 

X 

has  (or  have)  there  been  ? 
there  is  not,  there  are  not. 

there  was  not,  there  were  not. 

there  has  (or  have)  not  been, 
there  had  not  been, 
what  is  the  matter  ?  what  is  there  ? 
what  is  the  news  ? 

Examples. 

There  is  a  letter  for  you. 
Is  there  any  bread  in  the  house  ? 
There  is  none. 

Was  there  much  fish  in  the  market  ? 
There  was  much. 
There  are  ten  thousand. 
Will  there  be  a  ball  to-morrow  ? 
There  was  one  yesterday. 


Haber  translated  by  AGO: 

Mi  hermano  llego  tres  dias  ha,        )  ,, 

„,       ,,  &  ..     ,    >  My  brother  arrived  three  days  ago. 

Tres  dias  ha  que  mi  hermano  llego,  ) 

Murio  mucho  tiempo  ha,  He  died  a  long  time  ago. 

Haber  expressing  an  ACTION,  or  a  STATE  WHICH  STILL  CONTINUES  : 
Dos  afios  ha  que  esta  malo,  He  has  been  sick  these  two  years. 

Mucho  tiempo  ha  que  estoy  aqui,      /  have  been  here  a  long  while, 
i  Cuanto  (tiempo)  ha  que  Y.  esta 

aqui  ?  How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 

Haber  used  to  express  MEASURE  OF  DISTANCES  : 
j  Cuanto  hay  de  Paris  a  Londres  ?     How  far  is  it  from  Paris  to  London? 
No  hay  lejos,  It  is  not  far. 

Hay  cinco  minutos  de  aqui  a  la     It  is  five  minutes'  walk  from  here  to 

the  church. 


158 


LESSON  27. 


Ser  used  IMPERSONALLY  : 


Es  verdad  que  es  pobre, 
Es  inutil  decir  eso, 
Sera  tiempo  de  ir  alia, 


It  is  true  that  he  is  poor. 
It  is  useless  to  say  that. 
It  will  be  time  to  go  there. 


Hay  and  alii  esta  compared: 


Hay  un  horabre  a  la  puerta, 

Alii  esta  el  hoinbre  que  vende  pan, 


Todos, 

Todos  los  dias,  every  day. 
Todos  los  meses,  every  month. 
Todas  las  mananas,  every  morning. 
Todas  las  tardes,  every  afternoon. 
Todas  las  noches,  every  evening. 
Todas  las  seraanas,  every  week. 
Todos  los  anos,  every  year. 
Todos  los  limes,  every  Monday. 

Vocabulario. 

El  Aleman,  the  German. 

El  baile,  the  ball. 

El  conocido,  the  acquaintance. 

El  estrangero,  the  foreigner. 

El  ferro  carril,  the  railroad. 

El  incendio,  the  conflagration. 

El  parque,  the  park. 

El  periddico,  the  newspaper. 

El  duro,  the  dollar. 

La  gente,  the  people. 

La  milla,  the  mile. 

La  persona,  the  person. 


There  is  a  man  at  the  door. 
There  is  the  man  (pointing  out}  who 
sells  bread. 

every : 

Todo  el  dia,  the  whole  day. 
Todo  el  raes,  the  whole  month. 
Toda  la  mafiana,  the  whole  morning. 
Toda  la  tarde,  the  whole  afternoon. 
Toda  la  noche,  the  whole  night. 
Toda  la  seinana,  the  whole  week. 
Todo  el  ano,  the  whole  year. 
Todo  el  mundo,  everybody. 

Vocabulary. 

La  semana  que  viene,  next  week. 

La  vez,  the  time. 

Cerca  de,  nearly. 

Esperar,  1.  to  wait. 

Hecho,  done. 

Inutil,  useless. 

Muerto,  died. 

Tambien,  also,  too. 

Todo,  all,  everything. 

Quiere,  wishes. 

Ultimo,  last. 

Ver,  2.  to  see. 


Exercise  53. 

1.  j  Hay  cartas  para  mi  (me)  hoy  1  2.  Hay  una  para  V.,  y  doa 
para  su  hermano.  3.  j  Habia  nmcha  gente  en  el  baile  ?  4.  Habia 
mas  que  la  ultima  vez.  5.  j  Cuanto  hay  de  aqui  a  la  ciudacl '?  6.  Hay 
muy  lejos,  pero  ahora  tenemos  un  ferro  carril.  7.  [  Cuanto  tiempo 
ha  que  ha  muerto  el  general  1  8.  Habra  un  ano  maiiana.  9.  i  Quien 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS  HABER  AND  SER.       159 

estaba  en  el  baile  ?  10.  Habfa  nmchos  de  nuestros  conocidos.  11.  Es; 
inutil  decir  eso,  todo  el  mundo  lo  sabe.  12.  <?  Hay  mucho  tiempo  que 
V.  esta  aquf  esperando  ?  13.  Hay  a  lo  menos  dos  horas.  14.  <?  Qu6 
ha  hecho.  V.  todo  el  tiempo  1  15.  He  leido  los  periodicos.  16.  [  Que 
ha  habido  en  Boston  ?  17.  Ha  habido  un  incendio  muy  grande. 
18.  i  Cuantos  centavos  hay  en  un  duro  ?  19.  V.  sabe  muy  bien  que 
hay  cien  (centavos).  20.  i  Que  hay  de  nuevo  en  la  ciudad  ?  21.  No 
hay  nada  de  particular.  22.  i  Cuanto  hay  de  Berlin  a  Viena  ? 

23.  Hay  cerca  de  cien  millas.    24.  i  Cuanto  tiempo  ha  que  el  esta  en 
America  ]     25.  No  se  cuanto  tiempo  hay. 

Exercise  54. 

1.  Is  there  any  one  upstairs  ?  2.  There  is  nobody  upstairs,  but 
there  is  somebody  downstairs.  3.  How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 
4.  I  have  been  here  these  three  hours.  5.  Do  you  know  if  there 
were  (imperf.)  any  letters  for  me  (mt)?  6.  There  were  none  this 
morning.  7.  Is  there  anybody  at  the  door  ?  8.  There  is  nobody. 
9.  There  are  some  very  pretty  birds  in  the  park.  10.  Was  there 
anything  for  you  ?  11.  There  was  nothing  for  me  (mi)  ;  all  was  for 
my  brother.  12.  Were  there  many  people  at  the  theater  ?  13.  There 
were  more  than  two  thousand  persons.  14.  Are  there  many  foreign- 
ers in  that  country  ?  15.  Yes,  there  are  many  Germans,  Spaniards, 
and  .Frenchmen.  16.  Has  your  brother  arrived  ?  17.  He  arrived 
(lleyo)  three  days  ago.  18.  There  are  many  persons  (muchos)  who 
think  (piensan)  that  I  am  rich,  but  I  am  not.  19.  What  is  the  mat- 
ter, my  friend  ?  20.  I  don't  know  what  the  matter  is.  21.  If  you 
are  a  good  boy,  there  will  be  something  for  you  too.  22.  Is  there 
anything  to  be  done  (que  hacer)  ?  23.  There  is  nothing  to  be  done. 

24.  There   will   be   a   great   ball   at    (en)  the  theater  next  week. 

25.  There  is  one  every  week.    26.  What  is  the  news  to-day  ?     27.  I 
don't  know  (of)  anything.     28.  There  is  a  man  at  the  door  who 
wishes  to  see  you  (verle  d  V.). 


160  LESSON  27. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  verbs  haber  and  ser  are  often  used  as  impersonal 
verbs,  and  are  then  only  used  in  the  third  person  singular,  even 
when  referring  to  a  plural : 

Hay  un  hombre  a  la  puerta,  There  is  a  man  at  the  door. 

Hay  dos  hombres  abajo,  There  are  two  men  downstairs. 

Habia  alguno  anlba,  There  was  somebody  upstairs. 

Habia  mucha  gente  en  el  teatro,  There  were  many  people  at  the  theater. 

NOTE.  —  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  forms  of  haber  are  used  with  a 
noun,  expressing  the  idea  of  there  is,  etc.  Ser  may  be  followed  by  a  noun 
or  adjective,  and  expresses  the  English  it  is,  etc.: 

Es  lastima,  It  is  a  pity. 

Hay  mucha  gente,         There  are  many  people. 

2.  Haber  is  used  to  denote  distance  : 

i  Cuanto  hay  de  aqui  a  la  ciudad  ?  How  far  is  it  from  here  to  the  city? 

Hay  dos  millas.  It  is  two  miles. 

3.  Haber  may  be  used  in  expressions  of  time  and  can  be 
translated  by  ago,  since,  etc. : 

Hemos  comprado  esta  casa  dos  anos  We  bought  this  house  two  years 

ha,  ago. 

Mucho  tiempo  ha  que  no  he  visto  a  su  /  have  not  seen  your  brother  for 

hermano,  (since)  a  long  time. 

NOTE.  —  In  this  sense  it  will  be  noted  that  the  form  of  the  verb  is 
ha  not  hay,  and  that  it  follows  the  expression  of  time. 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  verb  hacer,  when  referring  to  time,  may  be  used 
instead  of  haber.  The  former  precedes  the  expression  of  time. 

Compro  la  casa  hace  dos  meses,         /  bought  the  house  two  months  ago. 

4i  Haber  used  impersonally  governs  the  infinitive  with  que, 
and  not  with  a  preposition. 

Hoy  hay  mucho  que  hacer,  There  is  much  to  do  to-day. 

Mahana  habra  mucho  que  hacer,         There  will  be  much  to  do  to-morrow. 
Habia  que  ir,  It  was  necessary  to  go. 


THE   TIME   OF   THE  DAY,   ETC. 


1G1 


Leccion  XXVIII. 


lesson  XXVIII. 


THE    TIME    OF    THE    DAY,    ETC. 


Ejemplos. 

l  Que  hora  es  ? 

Es  la  una. 

Son  las  dos. 

Son  las  tres. 

Son  las  doce. 

Es  la  una  y  media. 

Son  las  dos  y  cuarto. 

Son  las  tres  menos  cuarto. 

Son  las  doce  del  dfa. 

Es  mediodia. 

Son  las  doce  de  la  noche. 

Es  medianoche. 

Las  cuatro  de  la  manana. 

Las  tres  de  la  tarde. 

Las  siete  de  la  noche. 

i  $L  que  hora  ? 

A.  la  una. 

A.  las  dos  menos  cuarto. 

A  las  dos  menos  veinte. 

Son  mas  de  las  cinco. 

Son  menos  de  las  seis. 

Son  las  siete  en  punto.  • 

Ya  son  las  diez. 

No  son  todavia  las  once. 

No  es  mas  que  la  una  y  media. 

Van  a  dar  las  tres. 

Son  cerca  de  las  cuatro. 

Son  las  siete  dadas. 

Las  once  estan  dando. 

Han  dado  las  tres. 

Faltan  algunos  minutos. 

Eran  las  tres. 

Seran  las  cuatro. 


Examples. 

What  time  is  it  ?    What  o'clock  is  it  ? 

It  is  one  o'clock. 

It  is  two  o'clock. 

It  is  three  o'clock. 

It  is  twelve  o'clock. 

It  is  half  past  one. 

It  is  a  quarter  past  two. 

It  is  a  quarter  to  three. 

It  is  twelve  o'clock  in  the  day. 

It  is  noon  (midday). 

It  is  twelve  o'clock  in  the  night. 

It  is  midnight. 

Four  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon. 

Seven  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

At  what  o'clock  ? 

At  one  o'clock. 

At  a  quarter  to  two. 

At  twenty  minutes  to  two. 

It  is  more  than  five  o'clock. 

It  is  less  than  six  o'clock. 

It  is  precisely  seven  o'clock. 

It  is  already  ten  o'clock. 

It  is  not  yet  eleven  o'clock. 

It  is  only  half  past  one. 

It  is  going  to  strike  three  o'clock. 

It  is  nearly  four  o'clock. 

It  is  past  seven  o'clock. 

It  is  striking  eleven  o'clock. 

It  has  struck  three  o'clock. 

It  wants  a  few  minutes. 

It  was  three  o'clock. 

It  will  be  four  o'clock. 

11 


162 


LESSON    28. 


Divisions  of  Time. 


Un  ano, 

Un  mes, 

Una  semana, 

Una  hora, 

Una  media  hora, 

Un  cuarto  de  hora, 

Tres  euartos  de  hora, 

Una  hora  y  media, 

Un  siglo, 

Un  minuto, 

Quince  dias, 

Un  segundo, 

Un  rato  or  un  momeuto, 

Un  instante, 

Una  hora  y  cuarto, 

El  ano  que  viene  (proximo), 

El  ano  pasado, 

La  semana  que  viene, 

La  semana  pasada, 


a  year. 

a  month. 

a  week. 

an  hour. 

half  an  hour. 

a  quarter  of  an  hour. 

three  quarters  of  an  hour. 

an  hour  and  a  half. 

a  century. 

a  minute. 

a  fortnight. 

a  second. 

a  moment. 

an  instant. 

an  hour  and  a  quarter. 

next  year. 

last  year. 


last  week. 


El  dia, 

El  amariecer, 

La  manana, 

El  mediodia, 

La  tarde, 

La  noche, 

Un  dia  de  trabajo, 

La  vispera, 

La  salida  del  sol, 

La  puesta  del  sol, 

El  anochecer, 

Medianoche, 

Un  dia  de  fiesta, 

Una  Jornada, 


Divisions  of  the  Day. 

the  day. 

the  dawn,  break  of  day. 

the  morning. 


the  afternoon. 

the  evening,  the  night. 

a  workday. 

the  eve. 

sunrise. 

sunset. 

nightfall. 

midnight. 

a  holiday. 

a  day's  work. 


Holidays. 

El  dia  de  ano  nuevo,  New  Year's  Day. 

El  dia  de  reyes,  Twelfth  Day. 

El  martes  de  carnestolendas,       Shrove  Tuesday. 


THE   TIME  OF   THE   DAY,    ETC. 


163 


El  miercoles  de  ceniza, 

El  domingo  de  ramos, 

Pascua  de  resurreccion, 

Dia  de  todos  los  santos, 

El  dia  de  San  Miguel, 

Navidad, 

La  nochebuena, 

La  cuaresma, 

La  seni  an  a  santa, 

Viernes  santo, 

Pentecostes, 

Las  vacaciones  or  las  fiestas, 


Ash  Wednesday. 

Palm  Sunday. 

Easter. 

All  Saints'  Day. 

Michaelmas. 

Christmas. 

Christmas  eve. 

Lent. 

Holy  week. 

Good  Friday. 

Whitsuntide. 

Vacations,  the  holidays. 


Vocabulario. 

El  concierto,  the  concert. 
El  fin,  the  end. 
A  menudo,  often. 
Antes  de,  before. 
Cansado,  tired. 
Cerca,  near. 


Vocabulary. 


Cerrado,  closed. 
i  Come  V. "?  do  you  dine  ? 
Comemos,  we  dine. 
Conmigo,  with  me. 
Encontrara,  will  find. 
Entre,  between. 


Jamas,  ever. 

Llega,  arrives. 

i  Sale  V.  ?  do  you  go  out  f 

Tr  aba  jar,  1.  to  work. 

Volver,  2.  to  return. 

Vuelva  V.,  return. 


Exercise  55. 

1.  i  Que  hora  es,  amigo  1  2.  Es  temprano  todavia.  3.  [  Son  ya  las 
siete  ?  4.  Todavia  no,  no  son  mas  de  las  seis  y  media.  5.  [  A  que 
hora  estara  V.  en  casa  esta  noche  ?  6.  Estare  entre  las  siete  y  las 
ocho.  7.  i  Esta  lejos  de  aqui  la  casa  de  su  tio  ?  8.  Esta  cerquita. 
9.  i  Cuanto  tiempo  hay  que  V.  esta  aqui  ?  10.  A  lo  menos  tres 
cuartos  de  hora.  11.  [A  que  hora  sale  V.  de  la  escuela  ?  12.  A  las 
doce  en  pun  to.  13.  [  Estaran  VV.  aqui  temprano  1  14.  Estaremos 
aqui  a  las  siete.  15.  i  Puede  V.  volver  en  media  hora  ?  16.  No, 
seiior,  no  puedo  volver.  17.  Eran  las  nueve  cuando  yo  estaba  en  el 
almacen.  18.  i  Cuantas  vacaciones  tendran  W.  al  fin  del  ano  ? 
19.  Tendremos  tres  meses.  20.  i  A  que  hora  llega  la  gente  ?  21.  Todo 
el  mundo  estara  aqui  antes  de  las  ocho.  22.  Si  V.  no  esta  aqui  a  me- 
dianoche,  encontrara  la  puerta  cerrada.  23.  Estare  aqui  a  las  once. 
24.  [  Cudntas  semanas  hay  todavia  antes  de  la  sernana  santa  1  25. 
Hay  todavia  tres  semanas.  26.  Vuelva  V.  d  la  una  y  media  6  a  las 
dos.  27.  [  Va  V.  d  la  iglesia  todos  los  domingos  ?  28.  Voy  dos  ve- 
ces.  29.  i  Cuantas  boras  hay  en  un  dia  ?  30.  Hay  veinte  y  cuatro. 


164  LESSON   28. 

Exercise  56. 

1.  What  time  is  it  by  (por)  your  watch  1  2.  It  is  only  ten  o'clock 
by  mine.  3.  Were  (imperf.)  you  here  last  year  1  4.  No,  I  was  in  the 
country.  5.  How  many  minutes  are  there  in  one  hour  1  6.  There 
are  sixty.  7.  Will  you  be  here  at  seven  o'clock  1  8.  No,  not  at 
seven,  but  at  half  past  seven.  9.  When  will  you  be  ready  ?  10.  In 
half  an  hour.  11.  At  what  time  are  you  going  to  the  concert] 
12.  At  half  past  eight :  will  you  be  there  ?  13.  I  shall  be  there  at  a 
quarter  past  nine.  14.  We  have  worked  until  three  o'clock  in  the 
morning,  and  we  are  very  tired.  15.  Have  you  ever  seen  the  rising 
of  the  sun  1  16.  Very  often  when  I  was  in  the  country.  17.  What 
a  beautiful  sunset !  18.  Is  your  father  in  town  ?  19.  He  is  still  in 
the  country.  20.  We  have  no  vacation  on  (el)  New  Year's  clay. 
21.  Why  not  ?  22.  We  never  have  any  on  that  day.  23.  Will  you 
go  out  with  me  ?  24.  At  what  time  ?  25.  At  a  qaarter  to  four. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  To  indicate  the  hour   or  the  time,  the  Spaniards  do  not 
use  the  words  o'clock.     They  use  the  article  la  before  Una  (one 
o'clock)  and  las  before  the  other  hours  : 

La  una,         one  o'clock;  Las  dos,         two  o'clock ;  etc. 

The  word  hora,  hour,  being  understood,  and  being  feminine, 
the  adjective  half  is  translated  by  media,  feminine  of  medio. 

2.  To  express  subdivisions  of  the  hour,  the  latter  is  divided 
into  two  parts.     The  first  comprises  the  first  half  of  the  hour  to 
and  including  the  half  hour.     These  fractions  are  added  to  the 
hour,  and  are  connected  by  y : 

Son  las  dos  y  diez  minutos,  It  is  ten  minutes  past  two. 

Son  las  cuatro  y  cuarto,  It  is  a  quarter  past  four. 

Es  la  una  y  veinte  y  cinco,  It  is  twenty-five  minutes  past  one. 

Son  las  once  y  media,  It  is  half  past  eleven. 

The  other  twenty-nine  minutes  are  subtracted  from  the  fol- 
lowing hour  by  menos  : 

La  una  menos  veinte,  Twenty  minutes  of  one. 

Son  las  cinco  menos  cuarto,        It  is  quarter  of  five. 


USE    OF   THE   ARTICLE.  165 

3«  The  preposition  on,  which  in  English  is  placed  before 
days  of  the  week,  days  of  the  month,  and  a  few  holidays,  is 
rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  definite  article  : 

El  dia  de  ano  nuevo,         On  New  Year's  day, 
El  domingo,  On  Sunday. 

Los  limes,  On  Mondays. 


leccion  XXIX.  lesson  XXIX. 

USE    OF    THE   ARTICLE. 

The  definite  article  is  used  in  Spanish  : 

1.  Before  masculine  and  feminine  geographical  names : 

La  Francia  es  mas  grande  que  la  France  is  larger  than  Italy. 

Italia, 

El   Canada  esta   al    Norte    de    los  Canada    is  north  of   the    United 

Estados  Uuidos  de  America,  States  of  America. 

La  Irian  da  es  una  isla,  Ireland  is  an  island. 

Los  Alpes  y  los  Pirineos  son  muy  The  Alps  and   the  Pyrenees  are 

altos,  very  high. 

El  Vesuvio  es  un  volcan,  Vesuvius  is  a  volcano. 

El  Danubio  es  un  rio  grande,  The  Danube  is  a  large  river. 

2.  Before  names  of  days  and  seasons : 

El  domingo  es  un  dia  de  descanso,  Sunday  is  a  day  of  rest. 

El  sabado  es  el  ultimo   dia  de   la  Saturday  is  the  last  day  of  the 

semana,  week. 

El  invierno  es  muy  Mo  en  este  pais,  Winter  is  very  cold  in  this  country. 

La  semana  que  viene,  Next  week. 

3.  Before  abstract  nouns,  or  nouns  used  in  a  general  sense : 

La  juventud  es  imprudente,  Youth  is  imprudent. 

La  virtud  es  amable,  Virtue  is  amiable. 

La  esperanza  sostiene  al  hombre,  Hope  sustains  man. 


166 


LESSON   129. 


El  010  y  el  plomo  son  metales, 
El  bianco  y  el  negro  son  colores, 
El  fuego  y  el  agua  son  elementos, 
La  geografia  es  la  descripcion  de  la 

tierra, 

El  aziicar  es  dulce, 
La  miisica  y  la  dansa  son  hermanas, 
El  catolicismo  y  el  protestantismo, 
El  hombre  es  mortal, 
El  tiempo  es  precioso, 
Los  sombreros  redondos  son  de  moda, 


Gold  and  lead  are  metals. 
White  and  black  are  colors. 
'Fire  and  water  are  elements. 
Geography  is  the  description  of  the 

earth. 

Sugar  is  sweet. 

Music  and  dancing  are  sisters. 
(Catholicism  and  Protestantism. 
Man  is  'mortal. 
Time  is  precious. 
Hound  hats  are  in  fashion. 


4.    Before  adjectives,  or  other  parts  of  speech,  used  substan- 


lively . 


Los  ricos  y  los  pobres, 
El  comer  y  el  beber. 
El  si  y  el  no, 
El  pro  y  el  contra, 
El  bien  y  el  inal, 


The  rich  and  the  poor. 
Eating  and  drinking. 
Yes  and  no. 
Pro  and  con. 
Good  and  evil. 


5.    Before  titles  prefixed  to  names  : 

El  emperador  Don  Pedro,  Emperor  Don  Pedro. 


El  rey  Luis  Catorce. 
El  principe  Poniatowski, 
El  presidente  Lincoln, 
El  general  Washington, 
El  seiior  May, 


King  Louis  the  Fourteenth. 
Prince  Poniatowski. 
President  Lincoln. 
General  Washington. 
Mr.  May. 


6.  Before  proper  names  preceded  by  adjectives : 

El  pequeno  Juan,  Little  John. 

La  vieja  Maria,  Old  Mary. 

7.  Before  nouns  specifying  quantity  or  measure  : 

Tres  duros  la  libra,  Three  dollars  a  pound. 

Un  duro  la  vara,  One  dollar  a  yard. 

8.  Before  the  four  cardinal  points  : 

El  Norte,  North. 

El  Sur,  sud  or  mediodia,  South. 

El  Este  or  Oriente,  East. 

El  Oeste,  Poniente  or  Occidente,  ll'est. 


USE    OF   THE   ARTICLE. 


167 


Countries. 


Paises. 


Europa, 

Asia, 

Africa, 

America, 

Australia, 

Espana, 

Francia, 

Inglaterra, 

Turquia, 

Grecia, 


Europe. 

Asia. 

Africa. 

America. 

Australia. 

Spain. 

France. 

England. 

Turkey. 

Greece. 


Alemania, 
Holanda, 
Prusia, 

Germany 
Holland. 
Prussia. 

Belgica, 
Sajouia, 
Ungria, 
Austria, 

Belgium. 
Saxony. 
Hungary. 
Austria. 

Italia, 
Suecia, 

Italy. 
Sweden. 

Suiza, 

Switzerland. 

Cities. 

Madrid,  Madrid. 

Paris,  Paris. 

Londres,  London. 

National  Names. 


Ciudades. 

Lisboa,  Lisbon. 

Estocolmo,        Stockholm. 
Bruselas,  Brussels. 

Nombres  de  Naciones. 


Espanol, 

Frances, 

Ingles, 

Holandes, 

Aleman, 

Prusiano, 


Spaniard. 

Frenchman. 

Englishman. 

Dutch. 

German. 

Prussian. 


Kuso, 

Austria  co, 

Suizo, 

Turco, 

Griego, 

Sueco, 


Russian. 

Austrian. 

Swiss. 

Turk. 

Greek. 

Swede. 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  coronel,  the  colonel. 

El  dibujo,  the  drawing. 

El  hierro,  the  iron. 

El  invierno,  the  winter. 

El  tigre,  the  tiger. 

La  caridad,  the  charity. 

La  danza,  the  dancing. 

La  docena,  the  dozen. 

La  fe,  the  faith. 

La  miisica,  the  music. 

La  novela,  the  novel. 

La  ocasi6n,  the  occasion. 

La  paz,  the  peace. 

La  pintura,  the  painting. 

La  primavera,  the  spring. 

La  tierra,  the  earth. 

La  verdad,  the  truth. 


La  virtud,  the  virtue. 
Admitido,  admitted. 
Aprender,  2.  to  learn. 
Aprendido,  learned. 
Bajo,  under. 
Conocido,  known. 
Consultado,  consulted. 
Cuanto,  how  much. 
Durado,  lasted. 
En  casa,  at  (the  house  of). 
Estudiado,  studied. 
Estudiamos,  we  study. 
[  Estudian  VV.  ?  do  you 

study  ? 

Eterno,  eternal. 
Feliz,  happy. 
Inter esante,  interesting. 


Ir,  3. 

i  Le  gusta  a  V.  1  do  you 
like? 

Me  gusta,  /  like,  I  am 
fond  of. 

Leido,  read. 

Peligroso,  dangerous. 

i  Piensa  V.  1  do  you  in- 
tend ? 

Pobre,  poor. 

Pr6ximo,  next. 

Servido,  served. 

Teologal,  theological. 

Trasparente,  transpa- 
rent. 


168  LESSON  29. 

Exercise  57. 

1.  i  Ha  conocido  V.  al  general  Piedras  ?  2.  He  conocido  d  su  hijo, 
el  doctor  Piedras.  3.  j  Cuantas  veces  ha  visto  V.  al  presidents 
Grant  ?  4.  Le  lie  visto  varias  veces  en  Washington.  5.  Este  sol- 
dado  ha  servido  con  el  coronel  Martin.  6.  [  Que  ha  aprendido  V.  en 
esta  escuela  1  7.  He  aprendido  la  geografia  y  la  historia.  8.  El 
pobre  Carlos  ha  muerto  en  Cuba.  9.  La  verdad  es  eterna.  10.  La 
fortuna  es  inconstante.  11.  Los  inviernos  son  muy  frios  en  este  pais. 
12.  [Quiere  Y.  un  pedazo  de  jamon  ?  13.  No,  gracias,  no  me  gusta 
el  jamon.  14.  [  Que  color  le  gusta  a  V.  1  15.  Me  gusta  el  azul. 
16.  i  Ha  escrito  V.  al  doctor  Nelson  ?  17.  He  escrito  al  profesor 
Ventura.  18.  i  Es  este  joven,  hijo  del  abogado  Arroyo?  19.  El 
senor  Arroyo  no  tiene  hijo.  20.  i  Que  estudian  W.  ?  21.  Estu- 
diamos  el  frances  y  el  ingles.  22.  j  Por  cuanto  ha  vendido  V.  su 
vino  ?  23.  He  vendido  todo  a  cuatro  duros  la  docena.  24.  Londres 
es  la  capital  de  Inglaterra.  25.  Este  muchacho  tiene  los  ojos  negros, 
y  su  hermana  los  tiene  azules.  26.  El  comer  demasiado  es  peligroso. 
27.  EL  emperador  Napoleon  Primero  murio  (died)  a  la  edad  de  cin- 
cuenta  y  dos  anos.  28.  Los  ricos  no  son  siempre  mas  felices  que  los 
pobres.  29.  [  Ha  leido  V.  muchas  novelas  en  ingles  ?  30.  Si,  senor, 
las  novelas  inglesas  son  muy  interesantes. 

Exercise  58. 

1.  G-lass  is  transparent.  2.  Faith,  hope,  and  charity  are  the  three 
theological  virtues.  3.  Peace  has  never  lasted  long  on  the  earth. 
4.  We  were  (imperf.)  yesterday  at  Captain  Martin's.  5.  Were  your 
brothers  there  1  6.  Yes,  they  were  there  too.  7.  Under  what  generals 
have  you  served  ?  8.  I  served  (servi)  under  Generals  Grant  and  Sher- 
man. 9.  When  do  you  intend  to  go  to  Italy  1  10.  This  winter  or  next 
spring.  11.  Iron  is  more  useful  than  gold.  12.  Poor  little  Charles 
is  sick.  13.  Will  you  have  some  beef?  14.  No,  I  don't  like  beef. 
15.  Have  you  seen  any  tigers  in  that  country  ?  16.  No,  never  ;  there 
are  none.  17.  Have  you  studied  history  ?  18.  I  have  studied  history 
and  geography.  19.  Where  is  your  sister  now  ?  20.  She  is  in  France. 
21.  Have  you  ever  been  in  Europe?  22.  Yes,  I  have  been  in  the 
South  of  Europe.  23.  We  have  consulted  Doctor  Hener  on  (en)  this 
occasion.  24.  Dogs  are  not  admitted  in  the  park.  25.  Will  you 
have  some  apples,  my  little  friend  ?  26.  Yes,  sir  ;  have  you  any  ? 


USE   OF   THE   ARTICLE.  169 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  definite  article  is  placed  before  a  noun  used  in  a 
definite  or  individual  sense  : 

El  pobre  ha  muerto,         The  poor  man  has  died. 

2,  The  definite  article  may  be  used  before  a  whole  sentence, 
when  the  latter  serves  as  the  subject  of  another  sentence  : 

Mucho  me  alegra  el  que  venga  V. ,         /  am  very  glad  that  you  come. 

3,  When  several  nouns   follow   each    other,    the   article  is 
placed  before  each  one  of  them. 

Cuando  la  justicia,  la  fidelidad,  el  When  justice,  fidelity,  honor,  corn- 
honor,  la  compasion,  la  vergiien-  passion,  modesty,  and  all  feel- 
za,   y  todos  los  sentimieutos  que  ings  which  can  move  a  generous 
pueden  mover  un   corazon  geiie-  heart,  etc. 
roso,  etc.     JOVELLANOS. 
EXCEPTION.  —  Nouns  closely  connected  in  sense  may  omit  all  but  the 

first  article. 

4,  The  definite  article  is  generally  used  with  the  name  of  a 
country ;  except  when  the  latter  is  preceded  by  a  preposition : 
La  Inglaterra  tenia  posesiones  en        England  used  to  have  possessions  in 

Francia,  France. 

OBSERVATION.  —  Countries  out  of  Europe,  and  in  fact  remote  countries, 
preserve  the  definite  article  even  when  accompanied  by  prepositions. 

5,  The  definite  article  is  placed  before  titles  or  other  desig- 
nations preceding  proper  names : 

El  Exmo  (excelentisimo)  senor  duque  de...      His  Excellency  the  duke  of... 

If  the  word  su  precedes  the  honorific  designation,  the  article 
is  placed  before  the  title : 

Su  Excelencia,  el  duque  de...         His  Excellency  the  duke  of... 
EXCEPTION.  —  Don  and  Dona  omit  the  article,  as  do  titles  used  in  direct 
address  (the  vocative)  : 

Don  Sancho,  Dona  Luz 

Buenas  tardes,  senor  Blanco,         Good  afternoon,  Mr.   White. 

6*    The  definite  article  is  likewise  placed  before  the  names  of 
a  few  Italian  poets  and  painters  : 

El  Petrarca,  Petrarch.         El  Ariosto,  Ariosto.         El  Dante,  Dante. 


170  LESSON  29. 

7.  In  describing   the   characteristic   features    of  persons  or 
things,  the  definite  article  is  also  used  : 

Carlos  tiene  los  ojos  negros,         Charles  has  blade  eyes. 
Luis  tiene  la  nariz  grande,  Lewis  has  a  large  nose. 

8.  A  few  cities  also  take  the  definite  article  : 

La  Habana,  Havana.         La  Coruna,  Gorunna.         El  Ferol,  Ferol. 

Exceptions. 

The  definite  article  (and  in  some  cases  the  indefinite  article) 
is  omitted  : 

1.  When  the  name  of  the  country  figures  as  the  place  of 
origin,  or  is  preceded  by  a  preposition  : 

He  recibido  una  carta  de  Francia,  I  have  received  a  letter  from  France. 

Mi  hermano  esta  en  Alemania,  My  brother  is  in  Germany. 

La  reina  de  Inglaterra  es  viuda,  The  queen  of  England  is  a  widow. 

Este  vino  es  de  Espana,  This  wine  is  from  Spain. 

2.  Before  names  of  countries  the  capital  of  which  has  the 
same  name  as  the  country  itself : 

Napoles,         Naples.  Mejico,         Mexico. 

3.  Before  a  few  locutions,  as: 

Voy  a  casa  —  a  misa  —  a  palacio,         /  am  going  home  —  to  mass  —  to 

etc.  the  palace,  etc. 

Voy  a  casa  de  mi  amigo,  /  am  going  to  my  friend's  house.  * 

4.  With  a  substantive  in  apposition  with  a  preceding  sub- 
stantive : 

Juan,  hermano  de  Enrique,  John,  the  brother  of  Henry. 

Paris,  capital  de  Francia,  Paris,  the  capital  of  France. 

Alejandro,  emperador  de  Rusia,  Alexander,  the  emperor  of  Russia. 

Hablamos  de  Pedro,  liombre  de  gran  We  speak  of  Peter,  a  man  of  great 

talento,  talent. 

5.  Before  titles  of  books,  headings  of  chapters,  etc. : 

Vida  de  Cervantes,  The  Life  of  Cervantes. 

Historia  de  Roma,  A  History  of  Rome. 

Capitulo  tercero,  Third  Chapter. 


PERSONAL    PRONOUNS    WITH    PREPOSITIONS   AND    VERBS.       171 


Leccion  XXX.  Lesson  XXX. 

OBJECT  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS,  AND  WITH  VERBS. 

Disjunctive. 
With  Prepositions. 

Nosotros,  in.,  nosotras,  f.,  us. 

Vosotros,  m.,  vosotras,  f.,  V.  sing.,  W.  pi.,  you. 

him.      Ellos.  in.  )    , 

„„        „     Y  them. 


Mi, 

Ti, 

El, 

Ella, 

Ello, 

Si, 


me. 
thee. 


her.      Ellas,  f.  > 

it. 

one's  self,  himself,  herself,  themselves,  itself. 


Conjunctive. 
With  Verbs. 

Me,  me,  to  me.  Nos,  us,  to  us. 

Te,  thee,  to  thee.  Os,  you,  to  you. 

Le,  la,  you,  to  you.  Les,  las,  you,  to  you. 

Le,  him,  her,  to  him,  to  her.  Les,  them,  to  them. 

Lo,  la,  le,  it,  him,  her.  Los,  las,  them. 

Se,  one's  self,  himself,  herself,  themselves,  itself,  each  other. 


Ejemplos. 
Esta  carta  es  para  mi. 
Yo  hablo  de  el  y  de  ella. 
Juan  va  con  nosotros. 
Tengo  algo  para  ellos. 
Yo  hablo  de  ello\ 
Cada  uno  para  sj. 
Pienso  -en  el. 

fil  me  ama  y  yo  le  amo. 

Yo  la  veo,  pero  ella  no  me  ve. 

jQueleda  V.  ?— Nada. 


i  Que  les  da  V.  ? 
Yo  les  doy  dinero. 
Yo  no  quiero  verle. 
El  quiere  vernos. 
El  nos  quiere  ver, 


Examples. 

This  letter  is  for  me. 

I  speak  of  him  and  of  her. 

John  goes  with  us. 

I  have  something  for  them. 

I  speak  of  it. 

Every  one  for  himself. 

I  think  of  him. 

He  loves  me  and  I  love  him. 

I  see  her,  but  she  does  not  see  me. 

What  do  you  give  him  (or  her)  ?  — 

Nothing. 

What  do  you  give  them  ? 
I  give  them  money. 
I  do  not  wish  to  see  him. 

He  wishes  to  see  us. 


172  LESSON  30. 

Viendolos  alii,  les  hable.  Seeing  them  there,  I  spoke  to  them 

I  Quiere  V.  comprarlo  ?  Will  you  buy  it  ? 

Yo  no  quiero  comprarlo.  I  will  not  buy  it. 

Demelo.  Give  it  to  me. 

i  Los  ha  visto  V.  ?  Have  you  seen  them  ? 

No  los  he  visto.  I  have  not  seen  them. 

El  no  rne  ha  hablado.  He  has  not  spoken  to  me. 

Ellos  no  pueden  verse.  They  cannot  see  each  other. 

Yo  le  veo  a  V.  I  see  you. 

Conmigo,         with  me. 

Contigo,  with  thee. 

Consigo,  with  one's  self  (himself,  herself,  itself,  or  themselves). 

Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


El  sombrerero,  the  hatter. 
El  tio,  the  uncle. 
Los  vestidos,  the  clothes. 
Aqui  tiene  V. ,  here  is. 
Comido,  eaten. 
Cortar,  1.  to  cut. 
Dado,  given. 
Debo,  I  owe. 


Dice,  says. 
Dicho,  said. 
Doy,  I  give. 
Enviado,  sent. 
Enviar,  1 .  to  send. 
i  Habla  V.?  singJcfo  you 
i  Hablan  VV.1?  pi. )  speak  ? 
Hallado,  found. 

Exercise  59. 


Irse,  3.  to  go  away. 
i'NQcesit&V.ldoyouneed  ? 
Pide,  asks  for. 
Prestar,  1.  to  lend. 
Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Sin,  without. 
Sin  embargo,  however. 
Visto,  seen. 


1.  [  Quien  tiene  dinero  para  mi  ?  2.  Tengo  dinero  para  Y.,  pero  no 
para  su  hermano.  3.  j  Para  quien  es  eso  ?  4.  Para  V.,  si  V.  quiere. 
5.  i  Va  V.  al  parque  con  los  muchachos  (children)^.  6.  Voy,  pero  sin 
ellos.  7.  [Va  V.  al  teatro  con  su  hermana  ?  8.  Voy  con  ella.  9.  i  Es 
el  libro  para  mi  6  para  mi  hermano  ?  10.  No  es  ni  para  V.  ni  para 
el.  11.  i  De  quien  habla  V.  ?  12.  De  el  y  de  ella.  13.  i  Con  quien 
hablan  VV.  ?  14.  Con  ellas.  15.  i  Quien  era  rey  de  Francia  en 
1700  ?  16.  Era  (it  was)  Luis  Catorce,  hijo  de  Luis  Trece.  17.  [  Que 
le  da  V.  a  este  hombre  ?  18.  Le  doy  algo  bueno.  19.  [  Conoce  V.  a 
esta  senora  ?  20.  La  conozco  muy  bien.  21.  i  Los  ve  V.  ?  22.  Los 
veo,  pero  no  les  hablo.  23.  £  Me  ha  visto  V.  1  24.  No  he  visto  a  V., 
pero  he  visto  a  su  padre.  25.  i  Cuando  ha  escrito  V.  a  su  tio  1  26.  Le 
he  escrito  esta  manana.  27.  i  Quien  le  da  a  V.  dinero  ?  28.  Carlos 
nos  da  un  duro.  29.  i  Ha  hallado  V.  sus  libros  ?  30.  Los  he  hallado 
en  el  cuarto  de  Pedro.  31.  i  Que  quiere  V.  enviar  a  su  amigo  ? 
32.  Quiero  enviarle  el  dinero  que  me  pide.  33.  j  Ha  dicbo  V.  algo  a 
este  hombre  1  34.  No  le  he  dicho  nada. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS   WITH   PREPOSITIONS  AND   VERBS.       173 

Exercise  60. 

i.  What  does  that  man  tell  you  ?  2.  He  tells  me  that  he  wishes  to 
speak  to  you.  3.  Has  the  tailor  sent  me  my  clothes  ?  4.  He  has  not 
sent  them  yet.  5.  Have  you  seen  Mrs.  Norris  ?  6.  I  saw  (have 
seen)  her  this  morning.  7.  Can  you  lend  me  twenty  dollars  ?  8.  I 
lent  (have  lent)  you  ten  dollars  yesterday  ;  why  do  you  want  twenty 
dollars  now  1  9.  I  owe  money  to  my  hatter,  and  I  wish  to  pay  him. 
10.  I  have  no  money  to-day.  11.  Will  you  cut  me  some  bread  1 
12.  Yes,  if  you  will  lend  me  your  knife.  13.  To  whom  have  you 
written  1  14.  I  have  written  to  him  and  to  her.  15.  Give  me  some- 
thing for  this  poor  man.  16.  I  have  given  him  something  already. 
17.  I  have  never  seen  my  uncle  ;  I  have  written  several  times  to  him, 
however.  18.  To  whom  will  you  give  this  beautiful  book  ?  19.  To 
him.  20.  Have  you  nothing  for  her]  21.  Yes,  I  have  something 
for  her  too.  22.  How  do  you  know  that  ?  23.  I  know  it,  because  he 
has  said  so.  24.  Have  you  eaten  all  the  apples  ?  25.  Charles  has 
eaten  them.  26.  Do  you  know  that  gentleman  1  27.  I  don't  know 
him  very  well.  28.  Do  you  speak  German  ]  29.  I  speak  it  a  little, 
but  my  brother  speaks  it  better  than  I.  30.  Will  you  go  out  with 
me?  31.  I  cannot  go  out  now,  I  have  something  to  (que)  do. 
32.  Where  has  your  brother  bought  his  handkerchiefs  1  33.  He  has 
bought  them  in  Paris.  34.  Have  you  learned  your  lesson  ?  35.  I 
have  learned  it,  but  I  don't  know  it  very  well. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

It    The    object    personal    pronouns    are   divided    into    two 
classes,  the  disjunctive  and  the  conjunctive.     The  former  are 
used  when  accompanied  by  a  Spanish  preposition : 
A  mi,  to  me.  Para  el,  for  him. 

The  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used  in  close  connection  with 
a  verb,  and  without  a  Spanish  preposition. 

Me  ama,  he  loves  me.  La  veo,  /  see  her. 

2.  The  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used  as  either  the  direct  or 
the  indirect  objects  of  a  verb.  Their  form,  however,  is  the 
same,  except  for  the  pronouns  of  the  third  person. 

Me  ama,  he  loves  me.  Me  habla,  he  speaks  to  me. 

La  veo,  /  see  her.  Le  doy,  /  give  to  him. 


174  LESSON   30. 

3.  Used  with  an  infinitive,  an  affirmative  imperative,  or 
a  gerund,  the  conjunctive  pronouns  follow  the  verb,  and  are 
united  with  it: 

Vino  ayer  a*  verme,  He  came  to  see  me  yesterday. 

Dadme,  give  me.  Hablandoles,  in  speaking  to  them. 

NOTE.  — The  third  person  forms  of  the  present  subjunctive  when  used 
as  an  affirmative  imperative  come  under  the  above  rule  : 

Delo,  give  it.  Diganlo,  let  them  say  it. 

4.  Elsewhere  the   conjunctive   pronouns  precede  the  verb, 
and  are  not  united  to  it : 

La  conozco,  /  know  her.  Los  ve,  he  sees  them. 

NOTE.  —  Instances  are  not  uncommon  where  this  usage  is  disregarded, 
especially  in  connection  with  an  imperfect  or  preterite  form  of  the  verb  at 
the  beginning  of  a  phrase: 

Sen  tose,  he  sat  down.  Llevome,  he  took  me  away. 

Llam abase,  he  was  named. 

5*  When  there  are  two  verbs  in  the  phrase,  the  pronoun  is 
better  put  with  the  verb  to  which  it  logically  belongs : 

El  quiere  verme,          He  wants  to  see  me. 
NOTE.  —  There  is  much  divergence  in  this  usage. 

6.  The  conjunctive  pronouns  are  placed  before  the  auxiliary 
in  compound  tenses : 

Le  he  visto,  /  have  seen  him. 

Lo  hemos  comprado,          We  have  bought  it. 

7.  The  pronoun  le  generally  accompanies  the  noun  in  the 
third  person,  and  consequently  V.  and  VV.     (See  p.  36.) 

Yo  le  doy  a  V.  (rather  than  Yo  doy  a  V.),        /  give  you. 

Yo  le  doy  a  su  hermano,  /  give  (to)  your  brother. 

8.  When  the   pronoun  nos  is  joined  with  the  first  person 
plural  of  a  verb,  the  latter  drops  the  s :  Unimonos,  we  unite, 
instead  of  unimosnos. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS    WITH   PREPOSITIONS    AND    VERBS.       175 

9.  The  disjunctive  pronouns  may  be  added  to  the  conjunctive 
to  give  more  emphasis  to  the  sentence : 

A  mi  me  vio,         he  saw  me. 

It  is  more  especially  the  case : 

1.  When  the  verb  governs  more  than  one  object : 

Le  amo  a  el,  a  su  herraano,  y  a  su         /  love  him,  his  brother,  and  his 
hermana,  sister. 

2.  When  the  object  pronouns  are  emphasized  by  the  word 
self  or  selves  : 

Te  vi  a  ti  mismo,         /  saw  thee. 

10»  When  the  object  precedes  the  verb,  the  conjunctive  pro- 
noun is  often  redundantly  used : 

Los  mas  bellos  edificios,  los  he  visto  /  have  seen  the  finest  buildings  in 

en  Italia,  Italy. 

A  los   Franceses  les    han    costado  The  wars  of  the  French  have  cost 

mucho  sangre  sus  guerras,  them  much  blood. 

lit  When  mi,  ti,  si,  are  governed  by  the  preposition  con, 
with,  they  form  conmigo,  with  me ;  contigo,  with,  thee ;  con- 
sigo,  with  himself,  herself,  itself,  them  ;  and  admit  no  change  for 
either  gender  or  number. 

12.  The  preposition  must  be  repeated  before  every  pronoun  : 

Este  dinero  es  para  ti,  para  el  y  para         This  money  is  for  you  (thee),  for 
ella,  him,  and  for  her. 

13.  The  genitive  case  takes  the  place  of  the  nominative  in 
exclamations  : 

j  Desdichado  de  mi  !        /,  unfortunate  creature  / 


176 


LESSON   31. 


Leecidn  XXXI. 


Lesson  XXXL 


THE    RESPECTIVE    PLACES    OF    PRONOUNS. 


Me  lo  (le  or  la),  it  to  me. 
Te  lo,  it  to  thee. 
Se  lo,  it  to  him  or  her. 
Nos  lo,  it  to  us. 

Osl0'        \ 

Selo  (4V.),  / 

Se  lo  (&  ellos  or  ellas),  it  to 
them. 


\  to  you. 


Me  los  (las),  them  to  me. 
Te  los,  them  to  thee. 
Se  los,  them  to  him  or  her. 
Nos  los,  them  to  us. 

Oslos,  ) 

01       /x  TT  \    r  them  to  you. 
Se  lOS  (a  V.),  ) 

Se  los  (a  ellos  or  ellas),  them 
to  them. 


Ejemplos. 

El  me  lo  da. 

Ella  nos  lo  ha  dicho. 

i  Quien  se  lo  da  a  V.  ? 

Ellos  ine  lo  dan, 

i  Quiere  V.  darmelos  ?     ) 

i  Me  los  quiere  V.  dar  ?  j 

Quiero  prestarselos  a  V. 

Se  los  quiero  priestar  a  V. 

Yo  se  los  doy  a  V. 

Yo  se  lo  doy  a  ellos. 


Examples. 

He  gives  it  to  me. 
She  has  said  it  to  us. 
Who  gives  it  to  you  ? 
They  give  it  to  me. 

Will  you  give  them  to  me  ? 

!•         I  will  lend  them  to  you. 

I  give  them  to  you. 
I  give  it  to  them. 


Imperative  affirmative. 


Demelos  V. 
Deselo  V. 
Prestemelos  V. 
Presteselo  V. 
Comanselos  VV. 


Give  them  to  me. 
Give  it  to  him. 
Lend  them  to  me. 
Lend  it  to  him. 
Eat  them. 


PLACES    OF   PRONOUNS. 


177 


Imperative  negative. 


No  me  lo  de  V. 
No  nos  lo  de  V. 
No  me  los  mande  V. 
No  se  los  mande  V. 


Do  not  give  it  to  me. 
Do  not  give  it  to  us. 
Do  not  send  them  to  me. 
Do  not  send  them  to  him. 


Vocabulario. 

El  correo,  the  mail. 

El  cortaplumas,  the  penknife. 

El  crimen,  the  crime. 

El  jardinero,  the  gardener. 

La  muneca,  the  doll. 

i  Ama  V.  1  do  you  love  ? 

Amo,  I  love. 

Desea,  wishes. 

De  V.,  give. 

Devolver,  2.  to  return. 

Dice,  says,  tells. 

Diga  V. ,  say,  tell. 

Doy,  I  give. 

Guillermo,   William. 

Hablado, ; 


Vocabulary. 

Hay,  there  is. 
Llegado,  arrived. 
Mandar,  1.  to  send. 
Mande  V. ,  send. 
Matar,  1.  to  kill. 
Mismo,  same. 
Necesita,  needs. 
Perdido,  lost. 
Quieren,  wish. 
Recibido,  received. 
Kobar,  1.  to  steal,  to  rob. 
Traido,  brought. 
Traiga  V.,  bring. 
Ve,  sees. 
Vende,  sells. 


Exercise  61. 

1.  [  Quiere  V.  enviar  esta  carta  a  su  hermano  ?  2.  Yo  quiero  envia"r- 
sela.  3.  i  Cuando  puede  V.  enviarsela  1  4.  Se  la  puedo  enviar  manana 
por  la  manana.  5.  [  Cuando  puede  V.  escribir  a  su  tio  ?  6.  Puedo 
escribirle  ahora,  si  V.  lo  quiere.  7.  i  A  quien  quiere  V.  dar  este 
libro  ?  8.  Quiero  darselo  a  mi  hermanita.  9.  [  Quien  le  ha  dado  esto 
a  V.  ?  10.  Guillermo  me  lo  ha  dado.  11.  i  Como  sabe  V.  que  Juan 
esta  aqui?  12.  Mi  hermano  me  lo  ha  dicho.  13.  Si  V.  tiene  mi 
libro,  demelo.  14.  Yo  se  lo  he  dado  a  su  hermano.  15.  Los 
muchachos  quieren  sus  libros,  deselos  Y.  16.  Se  los  he  dado  ya. 
17.  Hay  un  libro  en  mi  cuarto,  traigamelo  Y.  18.  Este  joven 
necesita  un  cortaplumas  ;  £  tiene  Y.  uno  ?  19.  El  mio  esta  sobre  la 

12 


178  LESSON  31. 

mesa ;  Y.  puede  prestarselo.  20.  Este  dinero  es  para  ti,  para  el ,  y  para 
ella.  21.  Robar  a  un  honibre  y  matarle  son  dos  crimenes.  22.  £  A 
quien  ama  V.  ?  23.  Le  amo  a  el,  a  su  hermano,  y  a  su  hermana. 

24.  i  Puede  Y.  decirme  quien  es  el  que  ha  hecho  esto  ?    25.  No  puedo 
decirselo  a  Y.  ;  porque  yo  inismo  no  lo  se.     26.  No  le  de  Y.  nada  a 
ese  hombre,  ya  ha  estado  aqui  esta  manana.     27.  No  es  el  inismo. 
28.  Si  Y.  tiene  cartas  para  mi,  rnandemelas  Y.  a  mi  casa.     29,  No 
puedo  mandarselas,  porque   no   tengo   nadie  con   quieri  mandarlas. 

30.  La  sefiora  Castro  quiere  saber  si  Y.  puede  darle  su  dinero  hoy. 

31.  No  puedo  darselo  hoy,  porque  todavia  no  lo  he  recibido.    32.  Hay 
aqui  un  hombre  que  desea  verle  a  Y.     33.  No  tengo  tiempo  ahora, 
tengo  que  escribirle  d  mi  hermana.     34.  £  Sabe  V.  si  ha  llegado  el 
correo  1    35.  Ha  llegado  esta  manana. 

Exercise  62. 

1.  Who  can  give  me  money  for  that  ?  2.  Your  brother  can  give  you 
some  ;  I  have  none.  3.  Who  gave  (has  given)  that  doll  to  Mary  1 
4.  Her  mother  has  given  it  to  her.  5.  Can  you  lend  me  some 
money  ?  6.  I  can  lend  you  five  dollars  ;  when  can  you  return  them 
to  me  ?  7.  I  don't  know  yet  when  I  shall  be  able  (podrtf)  to  return 
them.  8.  If  you  cannot  tell  me,  I  cannot  lend  you  anything.  9.  What 
will  you  send  to  your  brother  ?  10.  I  will  send  him  two  letters 
which  I  have  received  for  him.  11.  Bring  me  the  book  which  is  on 
the  little  table.  12.  What  has  that  man  said  to  you  ?  13.  He  has  riot 
said  anything  to  me ;  he  has  spoken  to  my  cousin  (masc.).  14.  Have 
you  told  (to)  your  friend  that  his  father  was  (imperf.)  here  ?  15.  I 
have  not  seen  him  yet.  16.  Can  the  gardener  send  us  some  flowers  ? 
17.  He  can  send  you  some  roses  if  you  wish  (it).  18.  If  you  see 
your  sister  tell  her  that  I  have  received  some  French  books.  19.  She 
knows  it  already.  20.  You  do  not  need  your  knife  now  ;  lend  it  to  me. 
21.  I  don't  wish  to  lend  it  to  you.  22.  Can  I  see  Mr.  Bravo  ? 
23.  You  cannot  see  him  now.  24.  Does  our  baker  sell  you  any  bread  ? 

25.  He  does  not  sell  us  any.    26.  Do  you  know  if  the  tailor  has  sent 
my  coat  ?     27.  He  has  not  sent  it  yet.     28.   What  have  you  brought 
us  to-day?     29.  I  have  not  brought  anything  for  you,  but  I  have 
something  for  the  children.     30.  Why  don't  you  tell  (to)  your  uncle 
that  you  have  lost  your  money  ?     31.  I  am  afraid  to  tell  it  to  him, 

32.  My  friend  has  given  me  this  pencil,  and  I  give  it  to  you. 


PLACES   OF   PRONOUNS.  179 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  When  a  verb  governs  two  personal  pronouns,  the  indirect 
object  must  precede  the  direct  whenever  the  latter  is  a  pronoun 
of  the  third  person  : 

El  me  lo  da,       he  gives  it  to  me.  Damelo,      give  it  to  me. 

2*    If  the  conjunctive  pronouns  are  in  the  first  and  second 
person,  the  direct  must  precede  the  indirect : 
Rendeterne,  Surrender  to  me. 

3.  The  pronoun  se  precedes  all  the  other  object  pronouns, 
whether  these  are  placed  before  or  after  the  verb  : 

Se  me  escape,  He  escaped  from  me. 

slo  V.,  Give  it  to  him. 


4.  When  both  pronouns  are  in  the  third  per son ,  the  indirect 
object  pronoun,  whether  singular  or  plural,  is  changed  into  se, 
and  we  say  therefore : 

Se  lo,     it  to  him,  her,  or  them.         Se  los,     them  to  him,  her,  or  them. 

To  all  these  pronouns  we  may  add  the  disjunctive  pronouns  to 
give  more  expression  or  precision  to  the  sentence  : 

Se  lo  dire  a  el  —  a  ella  —  /  will  tell  it  to  him  —  to  her  —  to 

a  ellos  —  a  ellas,  them,  masc.  —  to  them.  fem. 


180 


LESSON   32. 


Leccidn  XXXIL 


Lesson  XXXIL 


REGULAR   VERBS. 
Present  Tenses  of  the  Indicative  Mood. 

1st  Conjugation.  2d  Conjugation.  3d  Conjugation. 

Habl-ar,  to  speak.  Com-er,  to  eat.  Recib-ir,  to  receive. 
Habl-ando,  speaking.  Com-iendo,  eating.  Recib-iendo,  receiving. 
Habl-ado,  spoken.  Com-ido,  eaten.  Recib-ido,  received. 

Terminations  of  the  Present  Idincative. 

Habl-o,        I  speak.  Com-o,        I  eat.  Recib-o,        I  receive. 

Habl-as,      thou  speakest.  Com-es,       thou  eatest.  Recib-es,       thou  receives^. 

Habl-a,        he  speaks.  Com-e,        he  eats.        Recib-e,        he  receives. 

Habl-amos,  we  speak.  Com-emos,  we  eat.         Recib-imos,  we  receive. 

Habl-als,     you  speak.  Corn-eis,     you  eat.       Recib-is,       you  receive. 

Habl-an,      they  speak.  Com-en,      they  eat.      Recib-en,      they  receive. 


Vocabulario. 

El  agua,  f.,  the  water. 
El  almacen,  the  store. 
El  baile,  the  ball. 
El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 
El  pano,  the  doth. 
Las  tijeras,  the  scissors. 
Griego,  Greek. 
Latin,  Latin. 
Pues,  as. 


Aprender,  2.1  to  learn, 
Bailar,  1.  to  dance. 
Cantar,  1.  to  sing. 
Comprender,  2.  to  un 

derstand. 
Deber,  2.  to  owe. 
Estudiar,  1.  to  study. 
Gastar,  1.  to  spend. 


Exercise  63. 


Vocabulary. 

Mandar,  1.  to  send. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Kecibir,  3.  to  receive. 
Residir,  3.    to  reside. 
Tocar,  1.  to  play  on. 
Vender,  2.  to  sell. 
Via  jar,  1.  to  travel. 
Vivir,  3.  to  live. 


1.  i  Quien  ha  tornado  mi  libro  ?  2.  Yo  no  se  quien  lo  ha  tornado. 
3.  i  A  qu6  bora  comen  W.  ?  4.  Comemos  a  las  seis  y  media  los 

1  The  number  put  after  each  Spanish  verb  given  in  this  vocabulary,  or 
in  the  following  vocabularies,  indicates  the  conjugation  to  which  that  verb 
belongs. 


REGULAR    VERBS.  181 

dias  de  la  semaria ;  pero  los  domingos,  comemos  d  las  dos.  5.  £  Donde 
estd  su  hermano  ahora?  6.  Esta  viajando  en  Europa.  7.  Necesito 
zapatos  ;  donde  compra  V.  los  suyos  ?  8.  Cornpro  mis  zapatos  en 
Broadway.  9.  [  Quien  vive  en  aquella  casa  ?  10.  El  sefior  Robinson 
vive  alii  con  su  familia.  11.  i  Toca  V.  el  piano  ?  12.  No  toco  ningun 
instrument©,  pero  canto  un  poco.  13.  i  Cantan  tambien  BUS  her- 
manas  ?  14.  Ellas  cautan  uiuy  bien.  15.  i  Con  que  cortan  VV.  este 
pafio  ?  16.  Lo  cortamos  con  las  tijeras  grandes.  17.  [Cuando  recibe 
V.  su  dinero  ?  18.  Lo  recibo  todos  los  meses,  y  asi  pago  lo  que 
debo.  19.  [  Quiere  V.  beber  algo  ?  20.  No,  gracias,  he  bebido  ya. 
21.  i  Cuando  llega  su  padre  ?  22.  No  se,  el  no  ha  escrito.  23.  [  Va 
Y.  al  baile  esta  noche  ?  24.  No,  seiior,  yo  nunca  bailo.  25.  i  Quiere 
V.  comprar  libros  franceses  ?  nuestro  amigo  ha  recibido  muchisimos. 
26.  No  puedo  comprar  ninguno  ahora,  he  gastado  todo  mi  dinero  el 
mes  pasado.  27.  [  Habla  Y.  francos  ?  28.  Hablo  un  poco  ;  pero  mi 
hermano  lo  habla  niuy  bien,  pues  ha  residido  mucho  tiempo  en 
Paris.  29.  i  Y  donde  vive  ahora  ?  30.  ]U  esta  en  Alemania,  donde 
esta  estudiando  el  aleman.  31.  [En  donde  ha  aprendido  Y.  el 
italiano  1  32.  Yo  no  hablo  italiano,  lo  comprendo  un  poco. 
33.  i  Quiere  Y.  venderme  su  caballo  negro  ?  34.  Ya  lo  he  vendido, 
pero  todavia  no  he  recibido  el  diuero. 

Exercise  64. 

1.  Who  lives  now  in  your  old  house  ?  2.  Nobody  lives  there  now. 
3.  Does  your  brother  speak  Spanish  ?  4.  We  all  speak  (speak  all) 
Spanish  in  the  family.  5.  What  do  you  study  in  your  school  ?  6.  I 
study  Latin  and  Greek.  7.  Do  you  know  if  your  friend  has  received 
any  money  ?  8.  Yes,  he  receives  his  money  every  Monday.  9.  At 
what  time  does  your  father  dine  ?  10.  He  dines  at  six  o'clock. 
11.  Have  you  bought  anything  for  us  ?  12.  Yes,  I  have  bought 
apples  and  pears  for  you.  13.  What  are  you  eating  1  14.  I  am  eat- 
ing bread  and  cheese.  15.  And  what  are  you  drinking  ?  16.  I  am 
drinking  water  ;  T  never  drink  wine  or  beer.  17.  Does  your  sister 
sing  ?  18.  She  sings  and  dances  very  well.  19.  Will  you  cut  me  a 
piece  of  bread  ]  20.  With  much  pleasure  ;  give  me  your  knife. 
21.  Here  it  is,  but  I  don't  know  if  it  cuts  well.  22.  Have  you  spent 
all  your  money  ?  23.  Not  yet,  I  have  spent  only  five  dollars.  24.  Will 
you  buy  a  handsome  little  dog  1  25.  I  don't  spend  my  money  in 
dogs.  26.  Do  you  learn  French  ?  27.  We  learn  French  and  Italian. 


182  LESSON   32. 

28.  Do  you  speak  Italian  well?  29.  We  don't  speak  it,  but  we 
understand  it.  30.  What  do  they  se1!  in  that  store '?  31.  They  sell 
sugar,  coffee,  and  tea.  32.  Do  you  receive  your  wine  from  France  ? 
33.  We  receive  some  from  France  and  some  from  Germany. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  present  of  the  indicative  expresses  in  Spanish,  as  well 
as  in  the  other  languages,  whatever  exists,  happens,  or  is  being 
done:  Yo  soy,  lam;  til  escribes,  thou  writest ;  llueve,  it  is 
raining  ;  etc. 

2.  The  present  of  the  indicative  is  also  very  frequently  used 
instead  of  the  future  tense  to  express  a  proximate  futurity  : 

Mi  amigo  viene  al  instante,         My  friend  will  come  in  a  moment. 
Partimos  manana,  We  shall  leave  to-morrow. 

3*  The  same  tense  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  past 
tense,  especially  in  a  narrative,  to  give  it  more  animation,  and 
to  place  it  vividly,  as  it  were,  before  the  reader : 

Oye  el  general  que  el  enemigo  ha  The  general  heard  (hears)  that  the 

echado  el  puente,  y  al  punto  da  enemy  had  (lias)  built  the  bridge, 

la  senal  de  la  pelea,  se  arma,  sube  and  he  immediately  gave  (gives) 

a  caballo  y  sale  al  f rente  de  sus  orders  for  the  battle,  armed  (arms) 

tropas  a  encontrar  los  Franceses.  himself,    mounted   (mounts)   his 

QUINTANA.  horse,  and  sallied  (sallies)  forth 

to  meet  the  French. 

4*  The  root  or  the  stem  of  the  verb  is  obtained  by  dropping 
the  last  two  letters  which  form  the  endings  proper  to  the  con- 
jugation to  which  the  verb  belongs,  namely  :  ar,  for  the  first 
conjugation;  er,  for  the  second  conjugation;  and  ir,  for  the 
third  conjugation. 

To  this  stem  are  added,  to  form  the  present  of  the  indicative 
of  the  regular  verbs,  and  of  many  irregular  verbs,  the  following 
terminations : 

For  the  1st  Conjugation  :  o,  as,  a,  amos,  a~is,  an. 
For  the  2d  Conjugation :  o,  es,  e,  emos,  eis,  en. 
For  the  3d  Conjugation  :  o,  es,  e,  imos,  is,  en. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  183 

S»    The  present  of  the  indicative  of  certain  regular  verbs. 

In  those  verbs  ending  in  the 

a.  Present  infinitive  in  cer  and  cir,  the  c  is  replaced  by  a  Z 
before  o  and  a  to  preserve  the  sound  of  the  consonant  in  the  stem : 

Veneer,    to  conquer.  Venzo,  I  conquer. 

Resarcir,  to  compensate.         Eesarza,  he  compensates. 

b.  Present  infinitive  in  ger  and  gir,  change  g  into  j  before  0 
and  a  for  the  sanie  reason  as  above  : 

Coger,    to  take.  Co  jo,  /  take. 

Exigir,  to  exact.         Exijo,  /  exact. 

C.    Present  infinitive  in  quir,  change  qu  into  c  before  o  and  a : 
Delinquir,  to  offend.         Delinco,  /  offend. 

d.  Present  infinitive  in  gllir,  drop  u  before  0  and  a : 

Extinguir,  to  extinguish.         Extingo,  /  extinguish. 

e.  Present  infinitive  in  uir  (except  as  above  in  guir  and 
quir)  insert  y  when  u  is  accented  : 

Atribuir,    to  attribute.  Atribuyo,  /  attribute. 

Atribuye,  he  attributes. 

Constituir,  to  constitute.  Constituyo,  /  constitute. 

Destruir,      to  destroy.  Destruyo,  /  destroy. 

Distribuir,  to  distribute.  Distribuyo,  /  distribute. 

Huir,  tojlee.  Huyo,  1  flee. 

Argiiir,        to  argue.  Arguyo,  /  am,  arguing. 


leccion  XXXIII.  Lesson  XXXIII. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS  OP    THE    1st   CONJUGATION. 
Present  Tense  of  the  Indicative  Mood. 

1.  Calentar,  to  warm.  2.  Empezar,  to  begin. 

Caliento,  I  warm.  Empiezo,  I  begin. 

Calientas,  thou  warmest.  Empiezas,  thou  beginnest. 

Calienta,  he  warms.  Empieza,  he  begins. 

Calentamos,  we  ivarm.  Empezamos,  we'begin. 

Calentais,  you  warm.  Empezais,  you  begin. 

Calientan,  they  warm.  Empiezan,  they  begin. 


184 


LESSON   33. 


Principal  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  1st  conjugation  which  take  an  i  before 
the  e  and  are  conjugated  like  caleutar  and  empezar. 


Apretar,  to  squeeze. 
Arrendar,  to  hire. 
Asentar,  to  place. 
Atravesar,  to  cross. 
Gegar,  to  blind. 
Cerrar,  to  shut. 
Comenzar,  to  commence. 
Concertar,  to  agree. 
Conf esar,  to  confess. 
Despertar,  to  awake. 
Desterrar,  to  banish. 
Empedrar,  to  pave. 
Encerrar,  to  lock  up. 
Encomendar,  to  recommend. 
Enmendar,  to  correct. 
Enterrar,  to  bury. 
Escarmentar,  to  take  warning. 

3.  Almorzar,  to  breakfast. 
Almuerzo,  I  breakfast. 
Alrauerzas,  thou  breakfastest. 
Almuerza,  he  breakfasts. 
Almorzamos,  we  breakfast. 
Almorzais,  you  breakfast. 
Almuerzan,  they  breakfast. 


Fregar,  to  rub. 
Gobernar,  to  govern. 
Helar,  to  freeze. 
Herrar,  to  shoe. 
Mentar,  to  mention. 
Negar,  to  deny. 
Nevar,  to  snow. 
Pensar,  to  think. 
Quebrar,  to  break. 
Recomendar,  to  recommend. 
Eeventar,  to  burst. 
Segar,  to  cut  down. 
Sembrar,  to  sow. 
Sentar,  to  set. 
Temblar,  to  tremble. 
Tentar,  to  tempt. 
Tropezar,  to  stumble. 

4.  Contar,  to  count. 
Cuento,  I  count. 
Cuentas,  thou  countest. 
Cuenta,  he  counts. 
Contamos,  we  count. 
Centals,  you  count. 
Cuentan,  they  count. 


Principal  Irregular  Verbs  of  the 
ue  and  are  conjugated 

Acordar,  to  remind. 
Amolar,  to  grind. 
Apostar,  to  bet. 
Aprobar,  to  approve. 
Avergonzar,  to  shame. 
Consolar,  to  console. 
Desollar,  to  skin. 
Encontrar,  to  meet. 
Forzar,  to  force. 
Hollar,  to  tread. 
Mostrar,  to  show. 
Poblar,  to  people. 


1st  conjugation  which  change  the  o  into 
like  almorzar  and  contar. 

Probar,  to  prove. 
Renovar,  to  renew. 
Kodar,  to  roll. 
Soldar,  to  solder. 
Soltar,  to  let  loose. 
Sonar,  to  sound. 
Sonar,  to  dream. 
Tostar,  to  toast. 
Trocar,  to  barter. 
Tronar,  to  thunder. 
Volar,  to  fly. 
Volcar,  to  overturn. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


185 


5.  Dar,  to  give. 
Doy,  I  give. 
Das,  thou  givest. 
Da,   he  gives. 
Damos,  we  give. 
Dais,  you  give. 
Dan,  they  give. 

Vocabulario. 

El  aire,  the  air. 
El  estado,  the  state. 
El  labrador,  the  farmer. 
El  trabajo,  the  work. 
La  cocinera,  the  cook. 
La  funcidn,  the  ceremony. 
La  ignorancia,  the  ignorance. 
Despues,  afterwards. 
Imposible,  impossible. 
Temprano,  early. 
Anadir,  3.  to  add. 
Apostar,  1.  to  bet. 
Aprobar,  1.  to  approve. 
Calentar,  1.  to  warm. 
Cerrar,  1.  to  shut. 
Confesar,  1.  to  confess. 
Consolar,  1.  to  console. 


6.  Jugar,  to  play. 
Juego,  I  play. 
Juegas,  thouplayest. 
Juega,  he  plays. 
Jugamos,  we  play. 
Jugais,  you  play. 
Juegan,  they  play. 

Vocabulary. 

Creer,  2.  to  believe. 
Encerrar,  1.  to  lock  up. 
Encontrar,  1.  to  meet. 
Enterrar,  1.  to  bury. 
Helar,  1.  to  freeze. 
Ir,  3.  to  go. 
Mostrar,  1.  to  show. 
Fasar,  1.  to  pass. 
Pensar,  1.  to  think. 
Poblar,  1.  to  people. 
Probar,  1,  to  prove. 
Becomendar,  1.  to  recommend. 
Sembrar,  1.  to  sow. 
Sonar,  1.  to  dream. 
Temblar,  1.  to  tremble. 
Volar,  1.  to  fly. 


Exercise  65. 

1.  [  Quo*  piensa  V.  de  eso  ?  2.  No  se  que  pensar.  3.  [  A  que  bora 
almuerzan  W.  ?  4.  Almorzamos  a  las  siete  de  la  manana.  5.  [  D6nde 
estan  los  muchachos  1  6.  Estan  jugando  en  el  jardm.  7.  [  Cuanto 
dinero  da  V.  a  este  hombre  ?  8.  Yo  le  doy  cien  duros.  9.  [  A  que 
bora  empieza  la  funcion  ?  10.  Creo  que  erapieza  muy  temprano. 
11.  [  Porque  tiembla  ese  muchacbo  ?  12.  Porque  tiene  miedo. 

13.  El  principe  gobierna  sus  estados  con  moderacion   y  justicia. 

14.  i  Cuanto  quiere  V.  apostar  que  puedo  hacer  eso  ?     15.  Yo  nunca 
apuesto  dinero.    16.  [Como  pasan  VV.  el  tiempo  1    17.  Almorzamos 
temprano,  despues  estudiamos;  a  la  una  salimos ;  a  las  seis  comemos, 
y  jugamos  basta  las  diez.     18.  Confieso  que  no   se  nada  de   eso. 
19.   [  C6mo  piensan   VV.   hacer  eso  1    20.    Pensamos  bacerlo  asi. 
21.  Los  pdjaros  pueblan  los  aires.     22.  Apuesto  que  V.  no  encuentra 


186  LESSON  33. 

la  casa  de  mi  hermano  y  que  yo  encuentro  la  de  su  hermano  de  V. 
23.  Yo  no  apruebo  lo  que  V.  ha  hecho.  24.  Esos  hombres  muestran 
mucba  ignorancia.  25.  Esta  mujer  encierra  todo  el  dinero  que 
tiene.  26.  [  Tiene  Y.  algo  que  anadir  ?  27.  Si,  senor,  le  recomiendo 
a  Y.  mis  bermanos  y  bermanas.  28.  j  Ha  cerrado  V.  las  puertas  1 
29.  La  criada  las  cierra  todas  las  nocbes.  30.  Esta  belando. 

Exercise  66. 

1.  I  meet  your  brotber  every  day  in  our  street  2.  Wbere  does 
your  brother  breakfast  1  3.  He  never  breakfasts  (breakfasts  never) 
with  us.  4.  What  do  you  give  to  the  children  ?  5.  I  give  them 
apples  and  cakes.  6.  Why  do  you  not  commence  your  work  now  1 
7.  I  cannot  commence  now ;  I  have  some  letters  to  write.  8.  The 
general  has  been  buried  this  morning.  9.  Do  you  think  that  your 
brother  will  be  here  to-night  ?  10.  I  don't  think  so.  11.  I  recom- 
mend you  to  go  to-morrow  to  the  house  of  that  lady.  12.  Do  you 
approve  the  conduct  of  your  brother  ?  13.  I  do  not  approve  of  it  ;  it 
is  impossible  to  approve  it.  14.  Do  you  dream  sometimes  ?  15.  I 
never  dream.  16.  What  does  this  prove?  17.  It  does  not  prove 
anything.  18.  You  show  your  ignorance  when  you  speak  so.  19.  The 
birds  fly  in  the  air.  20.  Who  warms  my  coffee  'I  21.  The  cook 
warms  it.  22.  He  bets  that  I  cannot  do  this,  and  I  bet  that  I  can. 
23.  We  give  all  our  money  to  that  poor  man.  24.  That  poor  woman 
cannot  console  herself  (se).  25.  Will  you  play  with  me?  26.  I 
never  play  when  I  have  to  study.  27.  The  farmers  sow  their  fields 
in  this  season.  28.  Why  do  you  tremble  ?  29.  I  do  not  tremble ; 
you  tremble  yourself.  30.  It  was  freezing. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  There  are  in  Spanish  verbs  several  kinds  of  irregularities; 
but  as  they  are  limited  in  most  cases  to  certain  moods,  tenses, 
and  persons,  and  almost  always  occur  in  the  same  places,  they 
have  a  certain  regularity  in  their  irregularity,  which  facilitates 
the  task  of  the  student. 

It  has  been  shown  by  the  conjugation  given  above  that  the 
irregularity  in  the  present  indicative  occurs  in  tbe  1st,  2d,  and 
3d  person  singular,  and  tbe  3d  person  plural.  It  will  be  shown 
hereafter  in  other  tenses  that  the  irregularities  of  verbs  of  the 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  187 

1st  conjugation  are  the  same  throughout  the  whole  conjugation 
excepting  four  verbs  which  will  be  mentioned  in  their  appro- 
priate place. 

2.  A  large  number  of  the  Spanish  verbs  are  irregular  only 
when  the  vowel  of  the  stem  is  accented.     Consequently  when 
this  change  is  mastered,  they  present  no  further  difficulty. 

Verbs  like  calentar  and  empezar,  whose  stem  vowel  is  e, 
insert  i  before  the  e  in  the  1st,  2d?  and  3d  persons  singular,  and 
in  the  3d  person  plural  of  the  indicative,  while  verbs  like 
almorzar  and  contar,  whose  stem  vowel  is  o,  replace  the  o  by 
Tie  in  the  same  persons. 

Jugar  and  dar  stand  alone,  no  other  verbs  being  conjugated 
like  them,  unless  we  except  estar,  to  be,  which  has  in  the  pres- 
ent indicative  the  same  terminations  as  dar. 

3.  The  gerund  and  the  past  participle  of  the  irregular  verbs 
of  the  1st  conjugation  are  formed  regularly,  as : 

Calent-ar,  to  warm;       calent-ando,  warming;       calent-ado,  warmed. 
Empez-ar,  to  begin  ;        empez-ando,  beginning  ;      empez-ado,  begun. 
Almorz-ar,  to  breakfast;  almorz-ando,  breakfasting;  almorz-ado,  breakfasted. 
Cont-ar,      to  count;        cont-ando,      counting;        cont-ado,      counted. 
D-ar,  to  give ;         d-ando,  giving ;  d-ado.  given. 

Jug-ar,        to  play ;        jug-ando,       playing;         jug-ado,       played. 

4.  The  verb  errar,  to  err,  may  be  added  to  the  list  of  the 
irregular  verbs  already  given. 

This  verb  inserts  an  initial  y  in  the  same  tenses  and  persons 
where  calentar,  to  warm,  inserts  an  i : 

Yerro,       /  err.  err  ar,      to  err. 

Yerras,      thou  errest. 

Yerra,       he  errs.  err  ando,  erring. 

Erramos,  we  err. 

Errais,      you  err.  err  ado,    erred. 

Yerran,     they  err. 

5i  Since  the  present  subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  first  per- 
son of  the  present  indicative,  the  above  changes  will  be  found 
there  as  well.  The  same  is  true  of  the  imperative,  and  it  is  only 
in  these  three  tenses  that  the  stem  vowel  receives  the  accent. 


188 


LESSON   34. 


Leccion  XXXIV. 


lesson  XXXIV, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  2d  CONJUGATION. 


„  (  to  know. 

1.   Conocer  I  .   .  .  ,  7     .  _ 

(  to  be  acquainted  with. 

Conozco,  I  know. 
Couoces,  ihou  knowest. 
Conoce,  he  knows. 
Conocemos,  we  know. 
Conoceis,  you  know. 
Conocen,  they  know. 


2.  Nacer,  to  be  born. 
Nazco,  1  am  born. 
Naces,  thou  art  born. 
Nace,  he  is  born. 
Nacemos,  we  are  born. 
Naceis,  you  are  born. 
Nacen,  they  are  born. 


3.   Perder,  to  lose. 
Pierdo,  I  lose. 
Pierdes,  thou  losest. 
Pierde,  he  loses. 
Perdemos,  we  lose 
Perdeis,  you  lose. 
Pierden,  they  lose. 


4.  Encender,  to  light. 
Enciendo,  I  light. 
Euciendes,  thou  lightest. 
Enciende,  he  lights. 
Encendemos,  we  light. 
Encendeis,  you  light. 
Encienden,  they  light. 


5.  Hacer,  to  make,  to  do;  haciendo,  making,  doing  ;    hecho,  made,  done. 

6.  Caer,  to  fall;  cayendo,  falling  ;  caido,  fallen. 
Hago,  /  make  or  do.                                Caigo,  I  fall. 

Haces,  thou  makest  or  doest.  Caes,  thou  f oiliest. 

Hace,  he  makes  or  does.  Cae,  he  falls. 

Hacemos,  we  make  or  do.  Caemos,  we  fall. 

Haceis,  youma.ke  or  do.  Gaels,  you  fall. 

Hacen,  they  make  or  do.  Caen,  they  falL 


7.  Poner,  to  put ; 

8.  Querer,  to  wish,  to  be  willing  t 
Pongo,  I  put. 

Pones,  thou  puttest. 
Pone,  he  puts. 
Ponemos,  we  put. 
Poneis,  you  put. 
Ponen,  they  put. 


poniendo,  putting  ;       puesto,  put. 
queriendo,  wishing ;    querido,  wished. 

Quiero,  /  wish,  I  am  willing, 

Quieres,  thou  wishest,  etc. 

Quiere,  he  wishes,  etc. 

Queremos,  we  wish,  etc. 

Quereis,  you  wish,  etc. 

Quieren,  they  wish,  etc. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  189 

9.  Saber,  to  know,  to  know  how  to  ;  sabiendo,  knowing  ;  sabido,  known. 

10.  Poder,  to  be  able  ;  pudiendo,  being  able  ;  podido,  been  able. 

Se,  /  know.  Puedo,  /  am  able,  I  can. 

Sabes,  thou  knowest.  Puedes,  thou  art  able,  etc. 

Sabe,  he  knows.  Puede,  he  is  able,  etc. 

Sabemos,  we  know.  Podemos,  we  are  able,  etc. 

Sabeis,  you  know.  Podeis,  you  are  able,  etc. 

Saben,  they  know.  Pueden,  they  are  able,  etc. 

11.  Cocer,  to  boil;  cociendo,  boiling;  cocido,  boiled. 

12.  Traer,  to  bring;  trayendo,  bringing;  traido,  brought. 

Cuezo,  /  boil.  Traigo,  /  bring. 

Cueces,  thou  boilest.  Traes,  thou  bringest. 

Cuece,  he  boils.  Trae,  he  brings. 

Cocemos,  we  boil.  Traenios,  we  bring. 

Coceis,  you  boil.  Traeis,  you  bring. 

Cuecen,  they  boil.  Traen,  they  bring. 

13.  Caber,  to  be  contained  ;  cabiendo,  being  contained  ;  cabido,  been  contained. 

14.  Valer,  to  be  worth  ;      valiendo,  being  worth  ;        valido,  been  worth. 
Quepo,  /  am  contained.  Valgo,  /  am  worth. 
Cabes,  thou  art  contained.                         Vales,  thou  art  worth. 
Cabe,  he  is  contained.  Vale,  he  is  worth. 
Cabemos,  we  are  contained.                       Valemos,  we  are  worth. 
Cabeis,  you  are  contained.                          Valeis,  you  are  worth. 
Caben,  they  are  contained.                         Valen,  they  are  worth. 

15.  Ver,  to  see  ;  viendo,  seeing  ;  visto,  seen. 

16.  Absolver,  to  absolve  ;        absolviendo,  absolving  ;      absuelto,  absolved. 

Veo,  I  see.  Absuelvo,  I  absolve. 

Ves,  thou  seest.  Absuelves,  thou  absolvest. 

Ve,  he  sees.  Absuelve,  he  absolves. 

Vemos,  we  see.  Absolvemos,  we  absolve. 

Veis,  you  see.  Absolveis,  you  absolve. 

Ven,  they  see.  Absuelven,  they  absolve. 

17.  Volver,  to  return  ;  volviendo,  returning  ;  vuelto,  returned. 

18.  Morder,  to  bite;  mordiendo,  biting ;  mordido,  bitten. 

Vuelvo,  /  return.  Muerdo,  1  bite. 

Vuelves,  thou  returnest.  Muerdes,  thou  bitest. 

Vuelve,  he  returns.  Muerde,  he  bites. 

Volvemos,  we  return.  Mordernos,  we  bite. 

Volveis,  you  return.  Mordeis,  you  bite. 

Vnelven,  they  return.  Muerden,  they  bite. 


190 


LESSON    34. 


19.  Oler,  to  smell ; 
Huelo,  I  smell. 
Hueles,  thou  smellest. 
Huele,  he  smells. 


oliendo,  smelling  ;  olido,  smelt. 

Olemos,  ice  smell. 
Oleis,  you  smell. 
Huelen,  they  smell. 


Vocabulario. 

El  haul,  the  trunk. 
El  diente,  the  tooth. 
El  gas,  the  gas. 
El  negocio,  the  business. 
El  olor,  the  smell. 
El  pueblo,  the  town. 
El  saco,  the  bag. 
La  estrella,  the  star. 
La  luna,  the  moon. 
La  nuez,  the  nut. 
La  ropa,  the  clothes. 
La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 
Algunas  veces,  sometimes. 
A  lo  menos,  at  least. 
Desde,  since. 
Durante,  during. 


Vocabulary. 

Generalmente,  generally. 
Mariana,  to-morrow. 
Pasado  manana,  the  day  after  to- 
morrow. 

Ventajoso,  profitable. 
Devolver,  2.  to  return  (give  back). 
Disponer,  2.  to  dispose. 
Encender,  2.  to  light. 
Llover,  2.  to  rain. 
Morder,2.  to  bite. 
Perder,  2,  to  lose. 
Proponer,  2.  to  propose. 
Traer,  2.  to  bring. 
Valer,  2.  to  be  worth. 
Ver,  2.  to  see. 


Exercise  67. 

1.  [  Sabe  V.  si  el  perro  muerde  ?  2.  No  puede  morder,  es  demasia- 
do  viejo,  y  no  tiene  dientes.  3.  [  Cuanto  puede  valer  este  reloj  ? 
4.  Si  es  de  oro,  vale  a  lo  menos  cien  duros.  5.  [  Ye  Y.  a  menudo  a  la 
senora  Marti  ?  6.  La  veo  todas  las  semanas.  7.  £  Como  hace  V.  esto  ? 
8.  Lo  hago  asi.  9.  j,  Pueden  V  V.  hacer  esto  tan  bien  como  nosotros  ? 
10.  Podemos  hacerlo  mejor.  11.  [  Que  quieren  VV.  1  12.  Queremos 
dinero  para  ir  al  teatro.  13.  V.  sabe  muy  bien  que  el  teatro  esta 
cerrado.  14.  [  Que  pone  V.  en  el  baiil  1  15.  Pongo  mi  ropa  en  el 
baiil  grande,  y  mis  libros  en  el  pequeno.  16.  j,  Cuando  piensa  V. 
volver  del  campo  ?  17.  Yuelvo  manana  6  pasado  manana.  18.  j  Co- 
iioce  V.  a  este  caballero  1  19.  Le  conozco  desde  muchos  anos. 
20.  j  Que  mal  olor  hay  en  este  cnarto!  21.  Yo  no  huelo  nada. 
22.  [  Ha  perdido  Y.  algo  ?  23.  Nunca  pierdo  nada.  24.  [  Que  me 
propone  Y.  1  25.  Le  propongo  algo  de  muy  ventajoso  para  Y. 
26.  [  Sabe  Y.  lo  que  quieren  estos  muchachos  1  27.  Yo  no  se  lo  que 
quieren.  28.  [  Que  trae  Y.  en  aquel  saco  ?  29.  Traigo  manzanas  y 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 

nueces.  30.  Durante  la  noche  vemos  la  luna  y  las  estrellas.  31.  [  Qne 
iKiceii  VV.  los  domingos  por  la  tarde  ?  32.  Salimos  general  men  te. 
33.  i  A  quie'n  conocen  V  V.  en  el  pueblo  ?  34.  Conocemos  a  casi  todo 
el  mundo.  35.  Mi  ainigo  no  sale  todavia. 

Exercise  68. 

1.  Will  you  do  this  for  me  ?  2.  I  don't  know  how  to  do  it,  I  have 
never  learned.  3.  Does  the  dog  bite  ?  4.  He  barks,  but  he  never 
bites.  5 .  Is  that  book  worth  anything  ?  6.  It  is  not  worth  any- 
thing. 7.  Whom  do  you  know  here  ?  8.  I  do  not  know  anybody. 
9.  Can  you  do  what  I  do  I  10.  I  cannot  do  it.  11.  At  what  time  do 
you  light  the  gas  ?  12.  I  light  it  at  six  o'clock.  13.  Why  do  you 
not  return  the  money  to  that  man  ?  14.  Because  I  have  no  money 
now.  15.  Does  it  rain  ?  16.  It  rains  a  little.  17.  Our  brothers 
return  to-morrow  from  the  city.  18.  Can  your  brother  go  with  me  ? 
19.  He  cannot  go  now,  but  I  can  go  with  you  if  you  wish.  20.  Where 
do  you  put  your  books  ?  21.  I  put  them  in  the  small  room.  22.  What 
do  you  wish  here  ]  23.  I  wish  to  see  your  father.  Where  is  he  ? 
24.  I  don't  know  where  he  is.  25.  Can  you  bring  me  my  books  to- 
morrow ?  26.  I  bring  them  now  in  my  bag.  27.  Do  you  see  Mr. 
Brown  very  often  ?  28.  I  see  him  every  Thursday.  29.  Do  you 
know  this  lady  ?  30.  Yes,  I  see  her  sometimes  at  her  house.  31.  Of 
how  much  money  can  you  dispose  for  this  business  ?  32.  I  can  dis- 
pose of  three  hundred  dollars,  but  not  of  one  cent  more.  33.  Edward 
will  not  come  with  us  because  it  rains.  34.  Do  you  know  that  I 
wish  to  be  obeyed  ]  35.  I  don't  obey  any  one  here. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  Perder,  to  lose,  and  the  following  verbs  whose  stem  vowel 
is  e  insert  an  i  before  the  e  in  the  three  persons  singular  and 
also  in  the  3d  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the  indicative. 

Ascender,  to  ascend.  Entender,  to  understand. 

Atender,  to  mind.  Extender,  to  spread. 

Cerner,  to  sift.  Heder,  to  smell  badly. 

Condescender,  to  condescend.  Render,  to  split. 

Contender,  to  contend.  Reverter,  to  overflow. 

Defender,  to  defend.  Tender,  to  stretch. 

Desatender,  to  disregard.  Trascender,  to  transcend. 

Descender,  to  descend.  Verter,  to  spill. 

Encender,  to  light.  And  their  compounds. 


192  LESSON   34. 

NOTE.  —  This  irregularity  in  the  accented  stem  vowel  should  be  com- 
pared to  that  in  the  first  conjugation  (p.  187,  §  2)  and  occurs  in  the  same 
place. 

2»  Volver,  to  return,  and  the  following  verbs,  change  the  o 
of  the  radical  into  ue  in  the  three  persons  singular,  and  also  in 
the  3d  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the  indicative,  like 
almorzar,  to  breakfast,  of  the  1st  conjugation : 

Absolver,  to  absolve.  Doler,  to  ache.  Hem  order,  to  sting. 

Conmover,  to  aject.  Envoi ver,  to  involve.  Resolver,  to  resolve. 

Demoler,  to  demolish.  Llover,  to  rain.  Revolver,  to  revolve. 

Desenvolver,  to  unfold.         Moler,  to  grind.  Soler,  to  be  wont. 

Devolver,  to  give  back.  Morder,  to  bite.  Solver,  to  loose. 

Disolver,  to  dissolve.  Mover,  to  move.  Torcer,  to  twist. 

And  other  of  their  compounds. 
NOTE.  —  Compare  note  to  §  1. 

3*  Verbs  ending  in  acer,  ecer,  and  ocer  like  nacer,  to  be 
born,  empobrecer,  to  grow  poor,  conocer,  to  know,  insert  a  z 
before  the  c  in  the  1st  person  singular  of  the  present  of  the 
indicative : 

Nazco,  I  am  lorn;        empobrezco,  I grow  poor  ;        couozco,  I  know. 

4 1  The  verbs  mecer,  to  stir,  to  rock  (which  is  a  regular 
verb),  empecer,  to  hurt,  coeer,  to  boil  (and  compounds),  yacer, 
to  lie,  and  hacer,  to  make,  to  do,  and  its  compounds,  as  des- 
hacer,  to  undo,  rehacer,  to  do  over,  contrahacer,  to  imitate, 
etc.,  form  an  exception  to  the  above  rule  : 

Mezo,  I  stir  ;  hago,  I  make,  I  do. 

5,  Cocer,   to  boil,  recocer,   to  boil  again,  and  escocer,  to 
smart,  differ  from  the  verbs  given  above  ending  in  acer,  ecer, 
and  ocer  ;  and  instead  of  inserting  a  z  before  the  c  like  conocer, 
they  change  the  accented  o  into  ue  like  volver,  to  return,  and 
replace  the  c  by  a  Z  : 

Cuezo,  I  boil.  Escuezo,  I  smart. 

6.  The  following  verbs  have  the  same  irregularity  as  ponerf 
to  put : 

Anteponer,  to  place  before.  Deponer,  to  depose. 

Cumpouer,  to  repair.  Descomponer,  to  discompose. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  193 

Disponer,  to  dispose.  Proponer,  to  propose. 

Exponer,  to  expose.  Reponer,  to  replace. 

Imponer,  to  impose.  Sobreponer,  to  place  over. 

Indisponer,  to  indispose.  Suponer,  to  suppose. 

Oponer,  to  oppose.  Trasponer,  to  transpose. 
Posponer,  to  postpone. 

7.    The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  traer,  to  bring  : 

Abstraer,  to  abstract.  Distraer,  to  distract.         Substraer,  )  , 

?  to  suotract. 
Atraer,  to  attract.  Estraer,  to  extract.  Sustraer,    ) 

Coiitraer,  to  contract.          Retraer,  to  retract. 

Detraer,  to  detract.  Retrotraer,  to  refer  to  former  times. 

8«  Equivaler,  to  be  equal  to,  is  conjugated  like  valer,  to  be 
worth. 

9.  The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  tener,  to  have, 
which  is  also  an  irregular  verb  : 

Contener,  to  contain.  Mantener,  to  maintain.         Sostener,  to  sustain. 

Detener,  to  detain.  Obtener,  to  obtain. 

Entretener,  to  entertain.      Retener,  to  retain. 

10i  Caber  corresponds  also  to  the  English  verb  to  contain,  to 
hold;  but  in  order  to  use  caber  in  the  sense  of  these  verbs,  the 
English  accusative  must  become  the  Spanish  nominative,  while 
the  preposition  en  must  also  be  used  : 

En  este  teatro  cabe  mas  gente  que         This  theatre  contains  more  people 
eii  aquel,  than  that  one. 


Leccidn  XXXV.  lesson  XXXV. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS    OF   THE   3d   CONJUGATION. 
Present  of  the  Indicative. 

1.  Conducir,  to  conduct ;     conduciendo,  conducting  ;     conducido,  conducted. 

2.  Lucir,  to  shine  ;  luciendo,  shining  ;  lucido,  shone. 

Conduzco,  I  conduct.  Luzco,  I  shine. 

Conduces,  thou  conductest.  Luces,  thou  shinest. 

Conduce,  he  conducts.  Luce,  he  shines. 

Conducimos,  we  conduct.  Lucimos,  we  shine. 

Conducis,  you  conduct.  Lucis,  you  shine. 

Conducen,  they  conduct.  Lucen,  they  shine. 


194 


LESSON   35. 


3.  Seutir,  to  feel; 

4.  Divertir,  to  amuse  ; 

Siento,  I  feel. 
Sientes,  thoufeelest. 
Siente,  he  feels. 
Sentimos,  we  feel. 
Sentis,  you  feel. 
Sienten,  they  feel. 


sintiendo,  feeling  ;  sentido,  felt. 

divertiendo,  amusing;  divertido,  amused. 

Divierto,  I  amuse. 

Diviertes,  thou  amusest. 

Divierte,  he  amuses. 

Divertimos,  we  amuse. 

Divertis,  you  amuse. 

Divierten,  they  amuse. 


5.  Dormir, 

6.  Morir ,  to  die  ; 

Duermo,  I  sleep. 
Duermes,  thou  sleepest. 
Duerme,  he  sleeps. 
Dormimos,  we  sleep. 
Dormis,  you  sleep. 
Duermen,  they  sleep. 


durmiendo, 
muriendo,  dying  ; 

Mnero,  I  die. 

Mueres,  thou  diest. 

Muere,  he  dies. 

Morimos,  we  die. 

Moris,  you  dit. 

Mueren,  they  die. 


dormido,  slept. 
muerto,  dead. 


7.  Pedir,  to  ask  for  ;  pidiendo,  asking  for  ;  pedido,  asked  for. 

8    Medir,  to  measure ;  midiendo,  measuring  ;  medido,  measured. 

Pido,  I  ask  for.  Mido,  I  measure. 

Pides,  thou  askestfor.  Mides,  thou  measurest. 

Pide,  he  asks  for.  Mide,  he  measures. 

Pedimos,  we  ask  for.  Medimos,  we  measure. 

Pedis,  you  ask  for.  Medis,  you  measure. 

Piden,  they  ask  for.  Miden,  they  measure. 


9.  Venir,  to  come  ; 

10.  Decir,  to  say,  to  tell ; 
Vengo,  I  come. 
Vienes,  thou  comest. 
Viene,  he  comes. 
Venimos,  we  come. 
Venis,  you  come. 
Vienen,  they  come. 

11.  Salir,  to  go  out  ; 

12.  Ir,  to  go  ; 

Salgo,  /  go  out. 
Sales,  thou  goest  out. 
Sale,  he  goes  out. 
Salimos,  we  go  out. 
Salis,  you  go  out. 
Salen,  they  go  out. 


viniendo,  coming  ;  venido,  come. 

diciendo,  saying  ;  dicho,  said. 

Digo,  I  say. 

Dices,  thou  sayest. 

Dice,  he  says. 

Decimos,  we  say. 

Decis,  you  say. 

Dicen,  they  say. 


saliendo,  going  out ; 
yendo,  going 


salido,  gone  out. 

ido,  gone. 
Voy,  I  go. 
Vas,  thou  goest. 
Va,  he  goes. 
Vamos,  we  go. 
Vais,  you  go. 
Van,  they  go. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


195 


13.   Oir,  to  hear  ; 
Oigo,  I  hear. 
Oyes,  thou  hearest. 
Oye,  he  hears. 

Vocabularlo. 


oyendo,  hearing  ; 

Oimos,  we  hear. 
Ois,  you  hear. 
Oyen,  they  hear. 


oido,  heard. 


El  canto,  the  singing. 
El  cuento,  the  tale. 
El  estudiante,  the  student. 
La  aventura,  the  adventure. 
Indiferente,  indifferent. 
Por  cierto,  certainly. 
Telemaco,  Telemachus. 
Aborrecer,  2.  to  hate. 
Bendecir,  3.  to  bless. 
Cantar,  1.  to  sing. 
Complacer,  2.  to  please. 
Conducir,  3.  to  conduct,  to  take. 
Desde  que,  since. 
Diver tir,  3.  to  amuse. 


Vocabulary. 
Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
Esperar,  1.  to  wait,  to  hope. 
Ganar,  1.  to  earn. 
Ir,  3.  to  go. 

Mantener,  2.  to  support. 
Medir,  3.  to  measure. 
Morir,  3.  to  die. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 
Podrir,  3.  to  rot. 

Provenir,  3.  to  come  from  (to  origi- 
nate). 

Kepetir,  3.  to  repeat. 
Traducir,  3.  to  translate. 


Exercise  69. 

1.  i  A  que  bora  sale  V.  todos  los  dias  1  2.  Salgo  generalmente  a 
las  diez  6  a  las  diez  y  media.  3.  i  Que  dice  este  hombre  ?  4.  No  se 
lo  que  dice,  babla  aleraan.  5.  [  Que  libro  traducen  VV.  del  francos 
al  espanol  1  6.  Traducimos  las  averituras  de  Telemaco.  7.  £  Va  V. 
al  concierto  esta  noche  1  8.  No,  senor,  voy  al  teatro.  9.  [,  Donde 
esta  Juan  1  10.  Todavia  esta  durmiendo.  11.  [  Oye  V.  lo  que  digo  ? 
12.  Oigo  muy  bien,  pero  no  puedo  hacer  lo  que  V.  quiere,  porque 
tengo  que  salir  abora  mismo  (this  very  minute).  13.  £  A  donde  van 
estos  muchacbos  ?  14.  Van  a  la  escuela.  15.  [  Quiere  V.  ir  por  pan  ? 
16.  Si,  senor,  quiero  ir.  17.  Los  estudiantes  van  cantando  por  las 
calles.  18.  Todas  las  manzanas  que  V.  ha  comprado,  estan  podridas. 
19.  i  Como  puede  V.  decir  tal  cosa  ?  20.  Lo  digo  porque  lo  se. 
21.  [  A  donde  conduce  V.  a  este  muchacbo  ?  22.  Le  conduzco  a  casa 
de  su  tio.  23.  [  Cuanto  pide  V.  por  este  caballo  1  24.  No  pido  sino 
lo  que  vale.  25.  El  viejo  Andres  nos  divierte  todas  las  nocbes  con 
sus  cuentos.  26.  Dice  el  medico  que  mueren  mucbos  ninos  en  este 
mes.  27.  [  Duerme  V.  1  28.  No,  senor,  no  duernio,  oigo  todo  lo  que 
V.  dice.  29.  [  Ha  medido  V.  el  pano  1  30.  Voy  a  medirlo  abora. 
31.  i  Porque  aborrece  V.  a  este  hombre  ?  32.  Yo  no  le  aborrezco,  el 
me  es  indiferente.  33.  [  Porque  no  me  obedece  V. "?  34.  Yo  le 


L96  LESSON   35. 

obedezco  a  V>,  y  hago  todo  lo  que  puedo  para  complacerle  a  V. 
35.  Este  pobre  hombre  no  puede  mantener  a  su  familia  con  lo  que 
gana.  36.  Yo  mantengo  a  mis  hermanitas  desde  que  mi  padre  ha 
niuerto. 

Exercise  70. 

1.  How  do  you  sleep  now  ?  2.  I  sleep  much  better,  thank  you. 
3.  What  does  your  mother  tell  your  brother  ?  4.  She  tells  him  that 
he  cannot  go  out  without  a  hat.  5.  Do  you  hear  the  music  from 
here  1  6.  We  hear  the  music  and  the  singing  from  our  room.  7.  What 
do  you  wish  to-day  1  8.  I  have  come  to  (a)  see  if  you  need  any- 
thing. 9.  Yes  ;  I  need  coffee,  sugar,  and  tea.  10.  Do  you  ( pi.)  go  to 
(the)  church  every  Sunday  ?  11.  We  go  twice  on  (los)  Sundays,  and 
also  sometimes  in  the  week.  12.  Do  you  go  out  to-day  ?  13.  I  never 
go  out  when  it  rains.  14.  Why  don't  you  measure  the  cloth  ?  15.  I 
have  measured  it  already.  16.  Who  takes  your  little  sister  to  school  ? 
17.  I  take  her  sometimes,  but  she  generally  goes  (goes  generally) 
alone.  18.  Why  don't  you  ask  that  man  for  your  money  ?  19.  He 
says  that  he  has  no  money  now,  and  that  I  must  wait  till  next  month. 
20.  Will  you  go  for  some  bread  for  me  1  21.  I  cannot  go  now ;  will 
you  wait  a  few  minutes  ?  22.  Certainly,  you  may  go  in  a  half  hour 
if  you  wish.  23.  Are  the  children  still  sleeping  ?  24.  Yes,  they  are 
all  sleeping  yet.  25.  Why  don't  you  tell  (to)  your  tailor  that  you 
cannot  pay  him  now  ?  26.  Who  says  that  I  cannot  pay  him  ?  I  can, 
but  I  will  not,  because  he  owes  money  to  my  brother  and  will  not  pay 
him.  27.  Can  you  translate  this  ?  28.  I  don't  translate  very  well 
yet.  29.  Will  you  repeat  what  he  has  said  ]  30.  Why  don't  you 
repeat  it  yourself?  31.  I  don't  understand  German.  32.  Where  does 
it  come  from  ?  33.  It  conies  from  the  old  house.  34.  The  father 
blesses  his  children.  35.  I  am  going  this  evening  to  the  city,  but  I 
don't  know  yet  if  my  friends  can  go  with  me. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  following  verbs  conjugated  like  sentir,  to  feel,  and 
divertir,  to  amuse,  whose  stem  vowel  is  e,  have  in  the  present 
of  the  indicative  the  same  irregularities  as  the  verb  empezar 
(p.  187,  §  2),  to  begin,  of  the  1st  conjugation,  that  is,  they 
insert  an  i  before  the  e  in  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  persons  singular, 
and  in  the  3d  person  plural  of  said  tense : 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


197 


Adherir,  to  adhere.  Desmentir,  to  belie.  Mentir,  to  lie. 

Adquirir,  to  acquire.  Diferir,  to  differ.  Pervertir,  to  pervert. 

Advertir,  to  notice.  Digerir,  to  digest.  Preferir,  to  prefer. 

Arrepentirse  (reflex. )  to  repent.    Disentir,  to  dissent.  Presentir,  to  foresee. 

Asentir,  to  consent.  Divertir,  to  amuse.  Proferir,  to  utter. 

Conferir,  to  confer.  Herir,  to  wound.  Referir,  to  refer. 

Consentir,  to  consent.  Hervir,  to  boil.  Requerir,  to  notify. 

Convertir,  to  convert.  Inferir,  to  infer.  Sugerir,  to  suggest. 

Deferir,  to  defer.  Ingerir,  to  interfere.  Trasferir,  to  move. 

OBSERVATION.  —  The  same  verbs  change  the  e  into  an  i  in  the  Present 
Participle,  as  ;  sintiendo,  feeling  ;  advirtiendo,  noticing  ;  etc. 

2.  Pedir,  to  ask  for,  and  medir,  to  measure,  and  the  follow- 
ing verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is  e,  change  the  e  into  i  in  the  1st, 
2d,  and  3d  persons  singular,  the  3d  person  plural,  and  the 
gerund : 

Elegir,  to  elect. 

Embestir,  to  attack. 

Envestir,  to  invest. 

Expedir,  to  forward. 

Freir,  to  fry. 

Gemir,  to  groan. 

Impedir,  to  prevent. 

Investir,  to  invest. 

Perseguir,  to  pursue. 

Proseguir,  to  continue. 


Regir,  to  rule. 
Reir,  to  laugh. 
Rendir,  to  surrender. 
Renir,  to  fight,  to  scold. 
Repetir,  to  repeat. 
Seguir,  to  follow. 
Servir,  to  serve. 
Sonreir,  to  smile. 
Tenir,  to  dye. 
Vestir,  to  dress. 


Cenir,  to  gird. 
Colegir,  to  collect. 
Competir,  to  compete. 
Concebir,  to  conceive. 
Conseguir,  to  obtain. 
Constrenir,  to  force. 
Corregir,  to  correct. 
Derretir,  to  melt. 
Deservir,  to  harm. 
Despedir,  to  dismiss. 
Destenir,  to  discolor. 

3.  Dormir,  to  sleep,  and  morir,  to  die,  change  the  o  of  the 
stem  into  ne  in  the  same  cases  as  the  verb  almorzar  (p.  187 
§  2)  of  the  1st  conjugation. 

The  o  is  also  changed  into  a  U  in  the  gerund : 

Durmiendo,  sleeping.  Muriendo,  dying. 

!•  Verbs  ending  in  ucir,  like  conducir,  to  conduct,  to  take  ; 
lucir,  to  shine,  etc.,  have  in  the  present  of  the  indicative  the 
same  irregularity  as  the  verbs  of  the  2d  conjugation  ending  in 
acer,  ecer,  and  ocer  (p.  192  §  3),  that  is,  they  insert  a  Z  before 
the  c  in  the  first  person  singular  of  said  tense  : 

Conduzco,  I  conduct.  Luzco,  I  shine. 


198  LESSON   35. 

5.  The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  venir,  to  come,  oi 
which  they  are  compounds : 

A  venir,  to  happen.  Provenir,  to  originate. 

Contravenir,  to  transgress.  Reconvenir,  to  charge. 

Convenir,  to  agree.  Revenirse,  to  return. 

Desconvenir,  to  disagree.  Sobrevenir,  to  come  between. 

Desaveriir,  to  disagree.  Subvenir,  to  aid. 

Intervenir,  to  interfere.  Supervenir,  to  supervene. 
Pre venir,  to  arrange  beforehand. 

OBSERVATION.  —  Venir  por  means  to  come  for ,  to  fetch. 

6.  The  following  compounds  of  decir  have  the  same  irregu- 
larities in  the  present  indicative  as  has  the  simple  verb : 

Antedecir,  to  predict.  Interdecir,  to  interdict. 

Ben  decir,  to  bless.  Maldecir,  to  curse. 

Contradecir,  to  contradict.  Predecir,  to  foretell. 

Desdecir,  to  retract.  Rebendecir,  to  bless  again. 
Entredecir,  to  prohibit. 

7.  Although   the   meaning   of  ir  is  to  go,  this  verb  accom- 
panied by  an  adverb  corresponds  also  to  the  verb   andar,  to 
walk  : 

Voy  despacio,  I  walk  slowly.  Voy  deprisa,  /  walk  quickly. 

OBSERVATION.  —  When  accompanied  by  the  preposition  por  the  verb  ir 
is  used  instead  of  buscar,  to  fetch  : 

'Voy  por  pan,  I  go  for  bread,  I  fetch  bread. 

8t  The  verb  asir,  to  seize,  makes  asgo  in  the  1st  person  sin- 
gular of  the  present  of  the  indicative,  but  this  verb  is  hardly 
ever  used,  except  metaphorically. 

9.  The  verb  podrir,  to  rot,  of  which  the  present  of  the 
indicative  is : 

Pudro;  /  rot.  Podrimos,  we  rot. 

Pud  res,  thou  r  attest.  Podris,  you  rot. 

Pudre,  he  rots.  Pudren,  they  rot. 

and  the  gerund  pudriendo,  rotting,  is  hardly  ever  used  except 
in  the  infinitive  and  the  past  participle  podrido,  rotten.  The 
regular  verb  pudrir  has  taken  its  place  in  all  other  cases. 


THE   IMPERFECT    TENSE,   INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


19P 


Leecion  XXXVI. 


Lesson  XXXVI. 


THE    IMPERFECT   TENSE,    INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

The  imperfect  indicative  is  formed  by  adding  the  following 
terminations  to  the  stem  of  the  verbs  : 


For  the  1st  Conjugation : 
-aba 
•abas 
-aba 
-abamos 
-abais 
-aban 


For  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations: 
-ia 
•las 
•la 

-iamos 
-fais 
-fan 


NOTE.  —  The  verbs  ser,  2.  to  be,  ver,  2.  to  see,  and  ir,  3.  to  go,  are  the 
only  verbs  that  form  an  exception  to  the  rule,  which  refers  to  all  other 
regular  and  irregular  verbs. 

1st  Conjugation. 

Habl-aba,  /  spoke  or  /  was  speaking. 

Habl-abas,  thou  spokest  or  thou  wast  speaking. 

Habl-aba,  he  spoke  or  he  was  speaking. 

Habl- abamos,  we  spoke  or  we  were  speaking. 

Habl- abais,  you  spoke  or  you  were  speaking. 

Habl-aban,  they  spoke  or  they  were  speaking. 

2d  Conjugation. 

Vend-ia,  /  sold  or  /  was  selling. 

Vend-ias,  thou  soldest  or  thou  wast  selling. 

Vend-ia,  he  sold  or  he  was  selling. 

Vend-iamos,  we  sold  or  we  were  selling. 

Vend-iais,  you  sold  or  you  were  selling. 

Vend-ian,  they  sold  or  they  were  selling. 

3d  Conjugation. 

Ven-ia,  /  came  or  /  was  coming. 

Ven-ias,  thou  earnest  or  thou  wast  coming. 

Ven-ia,  he  came  or  he  was  coming. 

Ven -iamos,  we  came  or  we  were  coming. 

Ven-iais,  you  came  or  you  were  coming. 

Ven-iau,  they  came  or  they  were  coming. 


200 


1.   Iba, 

Ibas 
Iba, 


Ibais, 
Iban, 

2.  Vei'a, 
Veias, 
Veia, 
Veiamos, 
Veiais, 
Veian, 

3.  Era, 
Eras, 
Era, 
frames, 
Erais, 
Eran, 


LESSON  36. 

Exceptions. 

I  went  or  /  was  going. 

thou  wentest  or  thou  wast  going, 

he  went  or  he  was  going. 

we  went  or  we  were  going. 

you  went  or  you  were  going. 

they  went  or  they  were  going. 


thou  sawest  or  thou  wast  seeing, 
he  saw  or  he  was  seeing, 
we  saw  or  we  were  seeing, 
you  saw  or  you  were  seeing. 


I  was. 
thou  wast, 
he  was. 
we  were, 
you  were, 
they  were. 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  enemigo,  the  enemy. 

El  escritorio,  the  office. 

El  modo,  the  way. 

El  negocio,  the  business. 

El  oso,  the  bear. 

El  paraguas,  the  umbrella. 

El  tiempo,  the  time. 

La  elegancia, 


La  fortaleza.  the  fortress. 
La  limonada,  the  lemonade. 
La  luz,  the  light. 
La  puerta,  the  door. 
Caro,  dear. 
Diferente,  different. 
Creer,  2.  to  believe. 
Entrar,  1.  to  enter. 


Gastar,  1.  to  spend. 
Llamar,  1.  to  call. 
Llegar,  1.  to  arrive. 
Mandar,  1.  to  send. 
Mirar,  1.  to  look  at. 
Ocupar,  1.  to  occupy. 
Tocar,  1.  to  play  on. 
Vestir,  3.  to  dress. 


Exercise  71. 

1.  Yo  sabia  que  su  bermano  de  V.  estaba  malo  la  semana  pasada, 
pero  yo  creia  que  el  estaba  bueno  abora.  2.  £  Estaba  V.  en  Francia 
en  aquel  tiempo  ?  3.  Si,  seiior,  yo  estaba  alii  desde  dos  anos.  4.  £  Que 
hacia  V.  entonces  ?  5.  Yo  estudiaba  para  ser  medico.  6.  £  Como 
estaban  vestidas  las  dos  senoras  ?  7.  Estaban  vestidas  con  mucha 
elegancia.  8.  Yo  no  sabia  lo  que  querian  estos  bombres.  9.  Querian 
entrar  en  la  casa  para  robar.  10.  Hablabamos  muy  bien  el  frances 
cuando  eramos  jovenes.  11.  [  Que  hacia  su  hermano  de  V.  cuando 


IMPERFECT   TENSE,    INDICATIVE   MOOD.  201 

estaba  en  Inglaterra  1  12.  No  hacfa  nada,  pero  gastaba  mucho  dinero. 
13.  [  Cudnto  recibia  por  mes  1  14.  Mi  padre  le  mandaba  doscientos 
duros  todos  los  meses.  15.  i  Que  estaban  VV.  mirando  en  la  calle  ? 

16.  Estabamos   mirando  a  un    hombre  que   hacfa   bailar  un  oso. 

17.  i  Que  le  decia  a  V.  aquella  senora  ?     18.  Me  decia  que  esperaba  a 
su  marido  y  a  sus  hijos  esta  noche.     19.  (A  quien  conocian  VV.  en 
aquella   ciudad  ?     20.  No   conociamos  d  nadie.     21.  i  Que   querian 
estos  caballeros  ?     22.  Querian  verle  a  V.     23.  Juan  queria  comprar 
mi  caballito,  pero  no  tenia  bastante  dinero.     24.  i  A  que  bora  iba  V. 
a  casa  del  medico  ?    25.  Yo  iba  todas  las  maiianas  a  las  diez  y  media. 
26.  i  A  quie*n  veia  V.  en  su  casa  ?    27.  Yo  veia  a  su  senora  y  a  sus 
hijos.    28.  [  Que  vendia  aquella  mujer  ?    29.  Ella  vendia  muy  buenas 
peras.     30.  j  A  quien  daba  V.  todo  su  dinero  ?     31.  Yo  no  lo  daba  a 
nadie,  yo  lo  prestaba  a  mi  primo  que  hacia  muy  buenos  negocios. 

32.  Nuestros  soldados   ocupaban  todas   las  fortalezas  del   enemigo. 

33.  i  A  qu£  hora  almorzaban  VV.  ?    34.  Almorzdbamos  muy  tem- 
prano,  pero  comiamos  muy  tarde. 

Exercise  72. 

1.  Who  was  the  man  at  the  door  ?  2.  It  was  not  a  man,  it  was  a 
little  boy.  3.  What  did  he  want  ?  4.  He  wished  to  know  if  Mr. 
Charles  Marti  lived  in  this  house,  as  (pues)  he  had  a  letter  for  him. 
5.  Was  not  the  gentleman  in  his  room  1  6.  He  was  there  this  morn- 
ing, but  he  has  gone  out.  7.  Did  you  not  know  that  my  brother  had 
arrived  ?  8.  I  did  not  know  it.  9.  Were  you  acquainted  with  Mr. 
Arroyo?  10.  I  knew  him  very  well  when  he  was  young.  11.  He 
was  very  poor  then,  but  now  he  is  very  rich.  12.  Why  did  you  not 
wish  to  buy  that  house  ?  13.  Because  it  was  too  dear,  and  I  had  not 
money  enough.  14.  With  whom  were  you  in  Paris  ?  15.  I  was 
there  with  my  mother  and  sisters.  16.  Do  you  know  what  Charles 
was  telling  me  ?  17.  I  could  see  that  he  was  speaking  to  you,  but  I 
could  not  hear  a  word.  18.  He  was  telling  me  that  he  knew  who 
had  stolen  your  umbrella.  19.  Where  were  you  going  this  morning  ? 
20.  I  was  going  to  my  office  ;  I  go  there  now  very  early.  21.  To 
whom  were  you  writing  this  morning  ]  22.  I  was  writing  to  all  my 
friends.  23.  Could  you  see  any  one  in  the  house  ?  24.  I  could  see 
no  one,  because  there  was  no  light  in  the  room.  25.  Who  was  play- 
ing on  the  piano  ?  26.  My  sisters  were  playing,  and  rny  brothers 
were  singing.  27.  Where  were  you  when  I  was  calling  you  1  28.  I 


202  LESSON   36. 

was  in  the  garden  with  the  children.  29.  My  friend  used  to  come 
every  day,  but  I  don't  know  where  he  is  now.  30.  What  did  you 
drink  when  you  were  sick  2  31.  I  drank  lemonade. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1*  The  use  of  the  imperfect,  past  definite,  and  past  indefi- 
nite, which  in  many  cases  would  have  but  one  form  in  English, 
presents  one  of  the  greatest  difficulties  met  by  those  learning 
the  Spanish  language.  The  following  rules  are  calculated  to 
facilitate  the  task  of  the  student.  Practice,  reading,  and  rea- 
soning must  also  be  depended  upon  as  the  best  auxiliaries  for 
the  correct  use  of  the  imperfect  tense. 

1.  The  imperfect  is  used  to  express  an  action  or  event  which 
has  already  occurred,  but  which  was  existing  or  going  on  when 
another  action  or  event  took  place  : 

131  estudiaba  cuando  entraron,         He  was  studying  when  they  entered. 

2.  This  tense  is  also  used  to  express  what  was  customary  or 
habitual  at  a  certain  past  time,  and  in  that  case  may  generally 
be  rendered  in  English  by  prefixing  "  used  to  "  to  the  infinitive 
mood,  as : 

Cuando  viviamos  en  el  campo,  estu-          When  we  lived  (used  to  live)  in 
diabainos  mucho,  the  country  we  studied  (used  to 

study)  a  greed  deal. 

OBSERVATION.  —  We  should  not  use  the  imperfect,  however,  in  speak- 
ing of  an  accidental  occurrence: 

Sin  embargo,  una  vez,  jugamos  todo         Once,  however,  we  played  the  whole 
el  dia,  day. 

3.  The  imperfect  is  also  used  to  describe  the  qualities  of  per- 
sons or  things,  and  the  state,  place,  or  disposition  in  which  they 
were  in  past  time. 

This  tense  may,  therefore,  be  called  the  descriptive  tense  of 
Spanish  : 
Las  muchachas  estaban  vestidas  de         The  girls  were  dressed  in  white,  and 

bianco,  y  teuton  flores  en  los  ca-  had  flowers  in  their  hair. 

bellos, 


THE   PAST   DEFINITE   AND   INDEFINITE. 


leccion  XXXVII. 


Lesson  XXXVII. 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE  OR  PRETERIT,  AND   THE  PAST  INDEFINITE. 

1,    The  terminations  of  the  past  definite  are  the  following 
for  most  verbs  : 


For  the  1st  Conjugation, 
-e 

-aste 
-6 

-amos 
-asteis 
-aron 


For  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations, 
-f 

-iste 
-16 

-imos 
-isteis 
-ieron 


1st  Conjugation. 
Hablar,  to  speak. 

Habl-e,  1  spoke  or  /  did  speak. 

Habl-aste,  thou  spokest  or  thou  didst  speak. 

Habl-6,  he  spoke  or  he  did  speak. 

Habl-amos,  we  spoke  or  we  did  speak. 

Habl-asteis,  you  spoke  or  you  did  speak. 

Habl-aron,  they  spoke  or  they  did  speak. 

Amar,  to  love. 

Am-6,  /  loved  or  /  did  love. 

Am-aste,  thou  lovedst  or  thou  didst  love. 

Am-6,  he  loved  or  he  did  love. 

Am-amos,  we  loved  or  we  did  love. 

Am -asteis,  you  loved  or  you  did  love. 

Am -aron.  they  loved  or  they  did  love. 

2d  Conjugation. 
Vender,  to  sell. 

Vend-1,  /  sold  or  /  did  sell. 

Vend-iste,  thou  soldest  or  thou  didst  selL 

Vend-i6,  he  sold  or  he  did  sell. 

Vend-imos,  we  sold  or  we  did  sell. 

Vend-isteis,         you  sold  or  you  did  sell. 
Vend -ieron,          they  sold  or  they  did  sell. 


204 


Com-f, 

Com-iste, 

Com -16, 

Com-imos, 

Com-isteis, 

Coin-ieron, 


LESSON  37. 

Comer,  to  eat. 

I  ate  o.  /  did  eat. 

thou  atest  or  thou  didst  eat. 

he  ate  or  he  did  eat. 

we  ate  or  we  did  eat. 

you  ate  or  you  did  eat. 

they  ate  or  they  did  eat. 


3d  Conjugation. 
Kecibir,  to  receive. 

Recib-1,  I  received  or  I  did  receive. 

Recib-iste,  thou  receivedst  or  thou  didst  receive. 

Recib-i6,  he  received  or  he  did  receive. 

Recib-imos,  we  received  or  we  did  receive. 

Recib-isteis,  you  received  or  you  did  receive. 

Recib-ieron,  they  received  or  they  did  receive. 

Salir,  to  go  out. 

Sal-i,  /  went  out  or  /  did  go  out. 

Sal-iste,  thou  wentest  out  or  thou  didst  go  out. 

Sal-i6,  he  went  out  or  he  did  go  out. 

Sal-imos,  we  went  out  or  we  did  go  out. 

Sal-isteis,  you  went  out  or  you  did  go  out. 

Sal-ieron,  they  went  out  or  they  did  go  out. 

Past  Indefinite. 

He  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido,  /  have  spoken  —  sold  —  received,  etc. 

etc., 

Has  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido,  thou  hast  spoken  —  sold  —  received, 

etc. ,  etc. 

Ha  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido,  he  has  spoken  —  sold  —  received,  etc. 

etc., 

Hemos  hablado  —  vendido  —  recib-  we  have  spoken  —  sold  —  received, 

ido,  etc.,  etc. 

Habeis  hablado  —  vendido  —  recib-  you  have  spoken  —  sold  —  received, 

ido,  etc.,  etc. 

Han  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido,  they  have  spoken —  sold  —  received, 

etc.,  etc. 


THE    PAST   DEFINITE   AND   INDEFINITE.  205 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


El  bosque,  the  wood. 

El  embajador,  the  ambassador. 

El  enemigo,  the  enemy. 

El  Iadr6n,  the  thief. 

El  lugar,  the  place. 

El  veneno,  the  poison. 

La  deuda,  the  debt. 

La  fonda,  the  hotel. 

La  posteridad,  the  posterity. 

Cansado,  tired. 

Colon,  Columbus. 

Dios,  m.,  God. 

Romano,  Roman. 

Abrir,  3.  to  open. 

Aconsejar,  to  advise. 


Andar,  1.  to  walk. 
Asegurar,  1.  to  assure. 
Comprender,  2.  to  understand. 
Derrotar,  1.  to  defeat. 
Entrar,  1.  to  enter. 
Esperar,  1.  to  expect. 
Ofrecer,  2.  to  offer. 
Pelear,  1.  to  fight. 
Perder,  2.  to  lose. 
Preguntar,  1.  to  ask. 
Presentar,  1.  to  introduce. 
Promoter,  2.  to  promise. 
Besponder,  2.  to  answer. 
Salir,  3.  to  leave,  to  go  out. 
Veneer,  2.  to  conquer. 


Exercise  73. 

1.  Don  Juan  me  pregunto  si  Y.  estaba  en  su  cuarto.  2. 
respondio  Y.  ]  3.  Respondi  que  yo  no  sabia,  pero  que  el  podia  subir 
a  ver.  4.  El  general  presento  los  oficiales  al  principe.  5.  Mi  padre 
vendi6  su  casa  al  tio  de  Y.  6.  [  Sabe  Y.  lo  que  pago  por  ella  ? 
7.  Pago  mucho  menos  de  lo  que  valia.  8.  [  Cuanto  dinero  recibieron 
VY.  1  9.  Recibimos  como  trescientos  duros.  10.  Dios  prometio  a 
Abrahan  una  grande  posteridad.  11.  [  Conoce  Y.  a  este  caballero  ? 
12.  Le  he  conocido  en  Paris.  13.  [  Cuando  vio  Y.  a  Carlito  ?  14.  Le 
vi  el  mes  pasado  en  Boston  donde  estaba  con  su  padre.  15.  [A  qu^ 
hora  comieron  YY.  aver  ?  16.  Comimos  a  la  misma  hora  que  los 
otros  dias.  17.  [  Con  quien  hablo  Y.  en  el  escritorio  ?  18.  Hable 
con  el  dependiente  del  banquero.  19.  [  Han  escrito  YY.  sus  cartas  ? 
20.  Las  escribimos  anoche ;  i  sabe  Y.  si  ha  salido  el  vapor  ?  21.  Salio ' 
ayer  a  las  cuatro  de  la  tarde.  22.  [  Quie*n  bebio  el  vino  ?  23.  Yo  no 
se  quien  bebio  el  vino,  pero  se  muy  bien  quien  comio  los  bollos. 

24.  Los  enemigos  perdieron   diez  mil  hombres  en  aquella  batalla. 

25.  Jose  (Joseph)  me  aseguro  que  el  habia  pagado  todas  sus  deudas, 
pero  yo  le  respondi  que  no  lo  creia.     26.    Cuando  Anibal  vi6  a  los 
einbaj adores  romanos,  tomo   veneno.     27.  El  enfermo  queria  salir 
esta  manana,  pero  el  medico  no  lo  permitio.     28.    Los  muchachos 
abrieron  la  puerta  del  jardm  y  entraron  en  el.     29.    Colon  descubrid 
la  America  en  el  afio  1492.     30.  El  pobre  Felipe  perdio  todo  su  dinero 


206  LESSON   37. 

en  aquella  especulacion.  31.  Los  ladrones  entraron  en  aquella  casa 
y  robarori  todo  lo  que  hallaron.  32.  Trabajamos  muchisimo  hoy,  y 
estamos  muy  cansados.  33.  $A  quien  vieron  VV.  en  el  teatro? 
34.  Vimos  a  todos  nuestros  amigos.  35.  Los  Romanes  vencieron  a 
todas  las  naciones  del  mundo. 

Exercise  74. 

1.  Why  did  you  not  write  to  yon?  brother  ?  2.  I  wrote  to  him 
but  he  did  not  answer  me.  3.  Did  you  see  Mr.  Martin  ?  4.  I  did 
not  see  him,  I  was  not  in  the  city  when  he  was  here.  5.  The  general 
lost  the  battle,  but  his  soldiers  fought  with  much  courage.  6.  Have 
you  studied  your  lessons  ?  7.  We  studied  them  last  night.  8.  Did 
you  go  out  with  your  sister  when  she  was  here  ?  9.  We  went  out 
every  day.  10.  Who  took  my  book  ?  11.  Nobody  took  it ;  it  is  in 
the  same  place  yet.  12.  Did  you  receive  what  you  were  expecting  ? 
13.  We  have  not  received  anything  yet.  14.  Did  you  understand 
that  man  ?  15.  I  understood  everything,  although  he  spoke  French. 
16.  Did  you  ever  study  French  ?  17.  I  spoke  it  very  well  when  I 
was  younger.  18.  Did  your  brother  sell  his  horses  1  19.  He  sold 
two  of  them,  and  he  sent  the  other  to  the  country.  20.  Why  did  he 
not  lend  it  to  you  ?  21.  Because  I  have  a  horse  myself.  22.  Why 
did  not  your  sister  dance  at  the  ball  1  23.  Because  she  was  not  very 
well,  and  she  only  stayed  (se  quedd)  half  an  hour.  24.  Does  she  know 
how  to  dance  1  25.  She  learned  all  the  new  dances  during  the  win- 
ter. 26.  The  thieves  killed  a  poor  man  in  the  forest.  27.  Our 
soldiers  defeated  the  enemy  and  took  their  principal  cities.  28.  That 
little  boy  ate  too  much  last  night  ;  and  to-day  he  is  sick.  29.  My 
brother  saw  your  mother  when  he  was  in  England  ;  did  she  reside 
a  long  time  in  that  country  1  30.  She  resided  there  for  two  years. 
31.  The  man  killed  the  dog  because  he  bit  his  little  boy.  32  Where 
did  you  breakfast  this  morning  ?  33.  I  breakfasted  in  the  French 
hotel  where  you  saw  me  last  week.  34.  Did  you  drink  anything  at 
his  house  ?  35.  He  did  not  offer  us  anything. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  past  definite  or  preterit  and  the  past  indefinite  are 
used  in  all  those  cases  of  past  time  where  the  imperfect  cannot 


THE   PAST   DEFINITE   AND   INDEFINITE.  207 

be  used.  The  preterit,  however,  is  used  more  especially  to  ex- 
press an  action  which  took  place  but  once,  and  when  the  time  at 
which  the  action  took  place  has  entirely  elapsed. 

The  preterit  is,  therefore,  especially  used  in  narrative  style, 
and  is  also  designated  as  the  preterito  historico  : 
Pedro  el  Cruel  no  respeto  las  leyes,         Peter  the  Cruel  did  not  respect  the 

y  se  porto  mal  con  sus  aliados.  laws,    and    acted    dishonorably 

towards  his  allies. 

2»  The  preterit  may,  however,  be  used  when  there  is  con- 
tinuation of  time ;  but,  in  this  case,  the  action  must  have  taken 
place  at  a  remote  period,  and  the  time  must  be  designated  : 

Roma  fue  por  mas  de  dos  siglos  la        Rome  was  for  more  than  two  centu- 
senora  del  orbe,  ries  the  mistress  of  the  world. 

3.  The  same  tense  is  also  very  often  used  to  express  cus- 
tomary and  repeated  actions  or  qualities,  when  it  is  intended  to 
express  the  time  rather  than  the  action.     When  we  say : 

Napoleon,  era  (imperf. )  gran,  guerrero,        Napoleon  was  a  great  warrior , 
we  express  the  quality,  but  when  we  say : 

Napole6n  fue  (preterit)  gran  guerrero, 
we  think  of  tbe  time  in  whicb  he  was  living. 

4,  The  preterit  may  be  rendered   in   English  according  to 
the  meaning  of  the  sentence  by  its  corresponding  form,  or  by 
the  auxiliary  did,  which  lias  no  equivalent  in  Spanish  : 

Comimos  ayer  en  su  casa,         We  dined  yesterday  at  Ms  house. 
No  sail  anoche,  /  did  not  go  out  last  night. 

5.  The  past  indefinite  is  used  to  express  a  past  action  when 
the  time  at  which  it  took  place  belongs  to  a  period  of  time 
(day,  week,  month,  year,  etc.)  not  entirely  elapsed  : 

Hoy  he  estado  en  la  iglesia,  I  have  been  to  church  to-day. 

No  he  ido  al  teatro  este  ano,  I  have  not  been  to  the  theater  this  year. 

6,  The  past  indefinite  is  also  used  to  express  an  action  but 
lately  performed : 

He  leido  los  papelas,         I  have  read  the  papers. 


208  LESSON  37. 

It  is  furthermore  used  to  express  the  successes  or  merits  of  a 
person  when  we  wish  to  give  more  expression  to  the  sentence  : 

Napoleon  ha  conquistado  en  poco        Napoleon  (has)  conquered  in  a  short 
tiempo  Italia  y  Alemania,  time  Italy  and  Germany. 

7»    General  Observations  on  the  imperfect,  preterit)  and  past 
indefinite. 

The  imperfect  can  seldom  be  rendered  in  English  by  the  past  tense  which 
takes  did  as  an  auxiliary  except  when  in  interrogative  sentences  did  is 
used  as  an  auxiliary  to  used  to,  either  expressed  or  understood. 

The  preterit  never  corresponds  like  the  imperfect  to  the  English  imper- 
fect, composed  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  gerund,  nor  can  it  be  rendered  by 
a  verb  preceded  by  used  to. 

The  three  tenses  above  mentioned  offer  in  their  application  a  certain 
difficulty,  as  they  are  sometimes  obligatory,  and  sometimes  optional;  or,  in 
other  words,  their  use  is  sometimes  a  question  of  grammar,  and  sometimes 
only  a  question  of  style. 

When  several  sentences  concur  to  the  same  end,  as  in  the  following  nar- 
rative, it  is  not  always  an  easy  matter  to  determine  whether  the  student 
should  use  the  imperfect  or  another  tense,  the  preterit  for  instance,  as  he 
has  to  take  into  consideration  not  only  the  special  shade  of  meaning  of  each 
verb,  but  also  the  general  tenor  of  the  other  sentences  forming  the  whole  of  the 
narration.  As  already  stated,  the  imperfect  is  used  as  a  descriptive  tense, 
while  the  preterit  is  only  used  as  a  narrative  tense. 

All  the  imperfects  of  the  following  Spanish  translation  are  printed  in 

italics. 

Era  poco  mas  de  mediodia  cuando  It  was  a  little  more  than  midday 

entraron  los  Espanoles  en  su  alo-  when  the  Spaniards  entered  their 

jamiento,  y  hallaron  prevenido  un  lodgings,  and  found  a  delicate 

banquete  regalado  y  esplendido  and  splendid  banquet  prepared  for 

para  Cortes  y  los  cabos  de  su  Cortes  and  the  captains  of  his 

ejercito,  con  grande  abundancia  army,  and  at  the  same  time  a 

de  bastimentos  menos  delicados  great  abundance  of  less  delicate 

para  el  resto  de  la  gente,  y  mu-  provisions  for  the  remainder  of 

chos  Indios  de  servicio  que  su-  the  people,  while  many  Indians, 

ministraban  los  man j ares  y  las  attending  to  the  service,  brought  iv, 

bebidas  con  igual  silencio  y  pun-  the  eatables  and  beverages  with 

tualidad.  Por  la  tarde  vino  Mon-  equal  silence  and  punctuality. 


IRREGULARITIES   OF   THE   PRETERIT. 


209 


tezuma  con  la  misma  pom  pa  y 
acorapanamiento,  a  visitar  a 
Cortes,  que,  avisado  poco  antes, 
salio  a  recibirle  hasta  el  patio 
principal,  con  todo  el  obsequio 
debido  a  semejante  favor.  Acom- 
panole  hasta  la  puerta  de  su 
cuarto,  donde  le  hizo  una  profunda 
reverencia,  y  el  paso  a  tomar  su 
asiento  con  despejo  y  gravedad. 
Man  do  luego  que  acercasen  otro  a 
Cortes:  hizo  sena  para  que  se 
apartasen  a  la  pared  los  caballeros 
que  andaban  cerca  de  su  persona, 
y  Cortes  advirtio  lo  mismo  a  los 
capitanes  que  le  asistian. 


Llegaron  los  interpretes,  y  cuando 
se  prevenia  Cortes  para  dar  prin- 
cipio  a  su  oracion,  le  detuvo  Mote- 
zuma,  dando  a  entender  que  tenta 
q>:e  hablar  antes  de  oir,  y  se  refiere 
<jue  discurrio  en  esta  sustancia : 


Montezwna  came  in  the  afternoon 
with  the  same  pomp  and  retinue 
to  visit  Cortes,  and  the  latter  hav- 
ing been  informed  of  this  some  time 
before,  came  out  to  receive  him  as 
far  as  the  principal  court,  with  all 
the  courtesy  due  to  such  a  favor. 
Cortes  accompanied  him  as  far 
as  the  door  of  his  room,  where  he 
made  a  deep  bow  to  him,  and 
Montezuma  passed  on  and  took  his 
seat  with  ease  and  gravity.  He 
then  ordered  that  they  should  bring 
forward  another  seat  for  Cortes, 
and  made  a  sign  to  the  nobles  who 
walked  near  his  person  to  with- 
draw as  far  as  the  wall,  while 
Cortes  did  the  same  to  the  captains 
who  followed  him. 

The  interpreters  then  arrived,  and  a* 
Cortes  was  preparing  to  commence 
his  discourse,  Montezuma  stopped 
him,  giving  him  to  understand 
that  he  had  to  speak  before  he 
would  listen,  and  it  is  related  thai 
he  spoke  thus  : 


leccidn  XXXVIII. 


Lesson  XXXVIII. 


IRREGULARITIES   OF    THE   PRETERIT. 
I. 


1    Tener,  2.  to  have. 
Tuve,  I  had  (did  have). 
Tuviste,  thou  hadst. 
Tuvo,  he  had. 
Tuvimos,  we  had. 
Tuvisteis,  you  had. 
Tuvieron.  they  had. 


2.  Estar,  1.  to  be. 
Estuver  /  was. 
Estuviste,  thou  wast. 
Estuvo,  he  was. 
Estuviraos,  we  were. 
Estuvisteis,  you  were. 
Estuvieron,  they  were. 


210 


LESSON  38. 


3,  Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
Hice,  /  made  or  /  did  make. 
Hiciste,  than  'modest. 
Hizo,  he  made. 
Hicimos,  we  made. 
Hicisteis,  you  made. 
Hicieron,  they  made. 


4.  Querer,  2.  to  wish,  to  be  willing. 
Qaise,  /  wished  or  /  did  wish. 
Quisiste,  thou  wishedst. 
Qtiiso,  he  wished. 
Quisiraos,  we  wished. 
Quisisteis,  you  wished. 
Quisieron,  they  wished. 


5.  Poder,  2.  to  be  able. 
Pude,  /  was  able  or  /  could, 
Pudiste,  thou  wast  able. 
Pudo,  he  was  able. 
Pudimos,  we  were  able. 
Pudisteis,  you  were  able. 
Pudieron,  they  were  able. 


6.  Poner,  2.  to  put. 
Puse,  I  put  or  I  did  put 
Pusiste,  thou  didst  put. 
Puso,  he  put. 
Pusimos,  we  put. 
Pusisteis,  you  put. 
Pusieron,  they  put. 


7.  Saber,  2.  to  know. 
Supe,  /  knew  or  /  did  know. 
Supiste,  thou  didst  know. 
Supo,  he  knew. 
Supimos,  we  knew. 
Supisteis,  you  knew. 
Supieron,  they  knew. 


8.  Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell 
Dije,  /  said  or  /  did  say. 
Dijiste,  thou  saidst. 
Dijo,  he  said. 
Dijiraos,  we  said. 
Dijisteis,  you  said. 
Dijeron,  they  said. 


9.  Haber,  2.  to  have  (auxiliary  and 

impersonal). 
Hube,  I  had  (did  have). 
Hubiste,  thou  hadst. 
Hubo,  he  had. 
Hubimos,  we  had. 
Hubisteis,  you  had. 
Hubieron,  they  had. 


10.  Andar,  1.  to  walk. 
And  live,  /  walked  or  /  did  walk 
Anduviste,  thou  didst  walk. 
Anduvo,  he  walked. 
Anduvimos,  we  walked. 
Anduvisteis,  you  walked. 
Anduvieron,  they  walked. 


11.  Caber,  2,  to  be  contained. 
Cupe,  /  was  contained. 
Cupiste,  thou  wast  contained. 
Cnpo,  he  was  contained. 
Cupimos,  we  were  contained. 
Cupisteis,  you  were  contained. 
Cupieron,  they  were  contained. 


12.  Traer,  2.  to  bring. 
Traje,  /  brought  or  /  did  bring 
Trajiste,  thou  didst  bring. 
Trajo,  he  brought. 
Trajimos,  we  brought. 
Trajisteis,  you  brought. 
Traje ron,  they  brought. 


IRREGULARITIES    OF   THE   PRETERIT. 


13.  Conducir,  3.  to  conduct,  to  take. 
Condnje,  I  conducted  or  1  did  conduct. 
Condujiste,  thou  didst  conduct. 
Condujo,  he  conducted. 
Oondujimos,  we  conducted. 
Condujisteis,  you  conducted. 
Condujeron,  they  conducted. 


14.  Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Vine,  /  came  or  /  did  come. 
Veniste,  thou  earnest. 
Vino,  he  came. 
Venimos,  we  came. 
Venisteis,  you  came. 
Vinieron,  they  came. 


1.  Dar,  1.  to  give. 
Di,  I  gave. 
Diste,  thou  gavest. 
Dio,  he  gave. 
Dim os,  we  gave. 
Disteis,  you  gave. 
Dieron,  they  gave. 


2.  Ser,  2.  to  fie,  and  IT,  to  go. 
Fin,  /  was;  I  went  or  /  did  go. 
Fuiste,  thou  wast ;  thou  wentest. 
Fue,  he  was  ;  he  went. 
Fuimos,  we  were ;  we  went. 
Fuisteis,  you,  were ;  you  went. 
Fueron,  they  were  ;  they  went. 


UL 


1.  Sentir,  3.  to  feel. 
Senti,  I  felt  or  /  did  feel. 
Sentiste,  thoufeltest. 
Siritio,    he  felt. 
Sentimos,  we  felt. 
Sentisteis,  you  felt. 
Sintieron,  they  felt. 


2.  Pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 
Pedi,  /  asked  or  /  did  ask  for, 
Pediste,  thou  didst  ask  for. 
Pidio,  he  asked  for. 
Pedimos,  we  asked  for. 
Pedisteis,  you  asked  for. 
Pidieron,  they  asked  for. 


3.  Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
Dormi,  I  slept. 
Dormiste,  thou  didst  sleep. 
Durmi6,  he  slept. 
Dormimos,  we  slept. 
Dormisteis,  you  slept. 
Durmieron,  they  slept. 


4.  Morir,  3.  to  die. 
Mori,  /  died  or  /  did  die 
Moriste,  thou  diedst. 
Mario,  he  died. 
Morimos,  we  died. 
Moristeis,  you  died. 
Muriei  on,  they  died. 


212  LESSON  38. 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


£1  Arabe,  the  Arab. 

El  cartero,  the  postman. 

El  cielo,  the  heaven. 

El  huracan,  the  hurricane. 

El  instante,  the  instant. 

El  Bomano,  the  Roman. 

La  muerte,  the  death. 

La  nacidn,  the  nation. 

Afuera,  out. 

A  pie,  on  foot. 

Cansado,  tired. 

Despues,  afterwards,  then. 

Dios,  in.,  God. 

En  seguida,  immediately, 

Galileo,  Galileo. 


Hast  a,  till,  until,  as  far  a& 
Indomable,  indomitable. 
Mismo,  very,  self. 
Ocupado,  busy. 
R6mulo,  Romulus. 
Asolar,'  1.  to  devastate. 
Caer,  2.  to  fall. 
Consolar,  1.  to  comfort. 
Dejar,  1.  to  leave. 
Derribar,  1.  to  upset. 
Echar  (1.)  a  pique,  to  founder, 
Nacer,  2,  to  be  born. 
Presentar,  1.  to  present. 
Sentir,  3.  tofeel9  to  regret, 
Someter,  2.  to  subdue. 


Exercise  75. 

1.  i  D6nde  estuvo  V.  esta  maiiana  ?  2.  Estuve  todo  el  tiempo  en 
mi  cuarto.  3.  [  Durmio  bien  el  enfermo  ?  4.  Durmio  hasta  las  cinco 
esta  manana,  y  despues  estuvo  mejor.  5.  En  el  ano  de  1846  bubo  en 
la  Habana  un  terrible  buracan  que  ecbo  a  pique  mucbos  barcos,  derribo 
casas  y  asold  mucbas  baciendas.  6.  Mi  amigo  vino  con  nosotros  basta 
la  puerta,  pero  no  quiso  entrar.  7.  Tuvimos  muy  buen  tiempo  en 
nuestro  viaje.  8.  i  Porque  no  habld  V.  con  mi  padre  ?  9.  No  pude 
hablarle,  estaba  tan  ocupado  que  me  dijo  que  no  podia  oirme. 
10.  i  Supieron  W.  sus  lecciones  hoy?  11.  Las  supimos  muy  bien. 
12.  i  Quien  le  did  a  V.  tanto  dinero  ?  13.  Pedi  cien  duros  a*  mi  padre, 
y  otros  cien  duros  a  mi  tio,  y  me  los  dieron  en  seguida.  14.  £  Sabe 
V.  ddnde  puse  mi  bastdn  ?  15.  V.  lo  ba  dejado  en  el  otro  cuarto. 
16.  i  Quien  trajo  esto  aqui  ?  17.  No  se,  pero  creo  que  es  el  bombre 
que  vino  anocbe.  18.  j  Ha  venido  el  cartero  ?  19.  En  este  mismo 
instante  ;  ahi  tiene  V.  las  cartas.  20.  i  Quien  fue  el  primer  rey  de 
Roma  ?  21.  Rdmulo  fue  el  primero.  22.  [  Creyd  V.  esto  ?  23.  Si,  lo 
crei,  y  todo  el  mundo  lo  creyd  tambien.  24.  El  general  murid  en  la 
batalla.  25.  j,  Estuvo  V.  anocbe  en  el  teatro  1  26.  No,  senor  ;  estuve 
en  el  concierto.  27.  Los  hermanos  Rodriguez  estuvieron  aqui  ayer, 
sentimos  mucbisimo  haber  (having)  estado  afuera.  28.  [  Oyd  V.  lo 
que  dijo  este  bombre  ?  29.  Oi  todo  lo  que  dijo.  30.  El  caballero 
que  vino  ayer  esta  todavia  durmiendo ;  nos  dijo  que  venia  muy  can- 


REGULARITIES   OF   THE   PRETERIT.  2 13 

sado  del  viaje.  31.  Newton  nacio  en  el  mismo  ano  en  que  murio 
Galileo.  32.  j  Porque  no  quiso  V.  ir  al  parque  con  los  otros  cabal- 
ieros  ?  33.  Porque  no  quisieron  ir  a  pie.  34.  Mi  padre  vino  en  este 
pais  cuando  tenia  veinte  anos.  35.  El  banquero  dio  un  baile  la 
semana  pasada. 

Exercise  76. 

1.  What  did  that  man  tell  you  ?  2.  He  told  me  that  he  had  no 
money,  and  that  he  could  not  pay  you.  3.  The  Arabs  were  always 
an  indomitable  nation;  the  Romans  themselves  could  not  subdue 
them.  4.  Louis  XIV.  was  a  great  king.  5.  He  read  the  letter  and 
gave  it  to  his  father.  6.  The  general  presented  his  sons  to  the  king. 
7.  They  gave  all  their  money  to  the  poor.  8.  My  brother  went  first 
to  France  and  then  to  England.  9.  The  rain  fell  for  (durante)  three 
days.  10.  He  brought  a  great  deal  of  money,  and  bought  many  things 
for  his  friends.  11.  He  took,  his  friend  by  the  hand  and  presented 
him  to  his  father.  12.  God  made  the  heaven  and  the  earth.  13.  We 
had  very  bad  weather  in  the  country.  14.  He  put  the  money  on  the 
table  and  went  out.  15.  Several  generals  died  in  that  battle.  16.  We 
felt  the  cold  more  this  year  than  last  year.  17.  What  did  your  sister 
do  when  she  heard  of  the  death  of  her  best  friend  ?  18.  She  wept  a 
great  deal,  and  we  could  not  comfort  her.  19.  The  children  went  to 
the  park  with  their  father.  20.  We  could  not  do  that,  and  nobody 
in  the  house  could  do  it.  21.  Why  could  you  not  write  to  him  ? 
22.  Because  I  did  not  know  what  to  write.  23.  The  boy  came  and 
brought  this  letter  for  you.  24.  My  father  gave  us  money  and  we 
went  to  the  theater.  25.  Why  did  you  not  come  earlier?  26.  We 
could  not  come  because  we  were  very  busy.  27.  What  did  you  do  in 
the  city  1  28.  We  bought  all  the  things  that  we  needed.  29.  Napo- 
leon was  a  great  general.  30.  Did  you  ask  him  for  the  money  ? 

31.  I  only  asked  him  for  twenty  dollars,  and  he  gave  them  to  ine. 

32.  We  were  very  well  received  by  your  family. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  As  seen  above,  the  verbs  tener,  2.  to  have;  estar,  1. 
to  be  ;  hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do  ;  querer,  2.  to  wish,  to  be  willing  ; 
poder,  2.  to  be  able;  poner,  2.  to  put;  saber,  2.  to  know; 
decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell;  haber,  2.  to  have  (auxiliary  and  im- 


214  LESSON   38, 

personal);  andar,  1.  to  walk ;  caber,  2.  to  be  contained;  traer, 
2.  to  bring  ;  conducir,  3.  to  conduct,  to  take ;  and  venir,  3.  to 
come;  have  the  same  terminations  for  the  preterit,  namely: 
-e        -iste        -o        -imos        -isteis        -ieron, 

the  accent  in  the  first  and  third  persons  singular  being  on  the 
stem  instead  of  on  the  ending. 

2.  The  verb  dar,  1.  to  give,  unlike  the  other  verbs  of  the  1st 
conjugation,   takes,   for    the    preterit,   the  terminations    of  the 
regular  verbs  of  the  2d  and  3d  conjugations,  namely  : 

-i        -iste        -16        -imos        -isteis        -ieron. 

3.  The  verbs  ser,  2.  to  be,  and  ir,  3.  to  go,  as  shown,  have 
the  same  preterit,  namely : 

f-ui        f-uiste        f-ue        f-uimos        f-uisteis        f-ueron. 

4.  Verbs  like  pedir,  3.  to  ask  for ;  sentir,  3.  to  feel,  to  re- 
gret, etc.,  which  in  the  gerund  change  the  e  into  i  (pidiendo, 
sintiendo,  etc.),  change  also  the  same  letter  in  the  3d  person 
singular  and  3d  person  plural  of  the  preterit  (pidio,  pidieron; 
sintio,  sintieron,  etc.). 

Verbs  like  dormir,  3.  to  sleep ;  morir,  3.  to  die;  etc.,  which 
in  the  gerund  change  the  o  into  u  (durmiendo,  nmriendo, 
etc.),  change  also  the  same  letter  in  the  3d  person  singular  and 
3d  person  plural  of  the  preterit  (durmio,  durmieron ;  murid, 
murieron,  etc.). 

5.  Verbs  ending  in  the  infinitive   in   car,  change   in   the 
preterit  c  into  qu  before  e:  tocar,  1.  to  touch;  toque,  I  touched 
or  /  did  touch  ;  etc. 

Verbs  ending  in  gar  insert  a  U  before  the  e  in  the  same 
tense  :  jugar,  1.  to  play;  jugue,  I  played  or  I  did  play  ;  etc. 

Verbs  ending  in  eer  change  the  i  of  the  third  person  endings 
into  y  before  e :  creer,  2.  to  believe  ;  creyeron,  they  believed  ;  etc. 

Verbs  ending  in  nir  change  the  i  of  the  third  person  endings 
into  y  before  e:  huir,  3.  to  flee  ;  huyeron,  they  fled  ;  etc. 

OBSERVATION. —  The  changes  above  given  also  take  place  in  other  tenses 
and,  in  the  two  last  cases,  also  before  the  letters  a  and  o. 


THE  PAST  ANTERIOR  AND  THE  PLUPERFECT. 


215 


Leccidn  XXXIX. 


Lesson  XXXIX. 


THE    PAST   ANTERIOR   AND    THE    PLUPERFECT. 
Past  Anterior. 


Ifube  hablado,  /  had  spoken. 
Hubiste  hablado,  thou  hadst  spoken. 
Hubo  hablado,  he  had  spoken. 
Hubimos  hablado,  we  had  spoken. 
Hubisteis  hablado,  you  had  spoken. 
Hubieron  hablado,  they  had  spoken. 

Vocabulario. 

El  heredero,  the  heir. 

El  nombre,  the  name. 

El  periddico,  the  newspaper. 

El  vapor,  the  steamer. 

La  noticia,  the  news. 

La  palabra,  the  word. 

La  urbanidad,  the  urbanity. 

Abler  to,  opened. 

A  caballo,  on  horseback. 

Amistoso,  friendly. 

Apenas,  hardly,  no  sooner. 

Ann,  yet. 

Gnando,  when. 

Despues  que,  after. 

Que,  when. 

Triste,  sad. 


>  as  soon  as. 


Pluperfect. 

Habia  hablado,  /  had  spoken. 
Habias  hablado,  thou  hadst  spoken. 
Habia  hablado,  he  had  spoken. 
Habiamos  hablado,  we  had  spoken. 
Habiais  hablado,  you  had  spoken. 
Habian  hablado,  they  had  spoken. 

Vocabulary. 

Tan  pronto  coxno,  ^ 
Luego  que, 
Asi  que, 

Al  punto  que,       ) 
Ya,  already. 
Comer,  2.  to  dine. 
Consultar,  1.  to  consult. 
Contener,  2.  to  contain. 
Entregar,  1.  to  hand. 
Llevar,  1.  to  take. 
Merecer,  2,  to  deserve. 
Montar,  1.  to  mount. 
Olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 
Pronunciar,  1.  to  pronounce. 
Toxnar,  1.  to  take. 
Visitar,  1.  to  visit. 


Exercise  77. 

1.  i  Que  hizo  V.  cuando  hubo  almorzado  ?  2.  Tan  pronto  como 
hube  almorzado,  volvi  a  mi  escritorio.  3.  Asi  que  me  hubo  visto, 
me  did  el  dinero.  4.  Apenas  me  hubo  dicho  estas  palabras,  cuando 
salid.  5.  Luego  que  hubo  leido  la  carta,  montd  a  caballo  y  salid  de 
la  ciudad.  6.  [  Ddnde  habia  olvidado  V.  su  bastdn  ?  7.  Yo  no  habia 
olvidado  mi  bastdn,  habia  olvidado  mi  paraguas,  lo  que  era  peor, 
pues  comenzd  a  Hover  muchisimo.  8.  Cuando  hubo  visitado  la  casa, 
dijo  que  no  queria  comprarla.  9.  Yo  habia  salido  cuando  entraron 
los  ladrones  en  mi  cuarto.  10.  Cuando  hubieron  abierto  la  puerta, 


216  LESSON   39. 

vieron  que  no  habia  nada  que  robar.  11.  Guillermo  no  habia  apren- 
dido  su  leccidn,  y  habia  sido  castigado  como  lo  merecia.  12.  Despues 
que  hubo  visto  a  su  amigo,  estuvo  ma's  satisfecho.  13.  i  Habia  re- 
cibido  su  padre  la  carta  cuando  salid  ?  14.  Aiin  no  la  habia  recibido. 
15.  Cuando  hubo  comido,  tomd  su  sombrero  y  dijo  que  tenia  que 
salir.  16.  Me  entregd  el  dinero  tan  pronto  como  lo  hubo  recibido. 

17.  Cuando    hubo   vendido    su    casa,    compro    otra    mas    grande. 

18.  Cuando  le  hube  dicho   mi  nombre,  me  recibid  con   la  mayor 
urbariidad.     19.  Al  punto  que  me  hubo  visto,  rne  saludo  muy  cor- 
tesmente.      20.    Me   presto   el  libro   asi  que   le   hube  dado  otro. 

21.  Despues  que  hubo  llegado,  me  escribid  una  carta  muy  amistosa. 

22.  Luego  que  hubo  muerto  el  general,  vendieron  los  herederos  la 
casa.     23.  Ya  habia  yo  leido   la  carta  cuando   llegd  mi  hermano. 
24.  i  Habia  hablado  V.  al  medico?     25.  Si,  yo  le  habia  consultado 
varias  voces. 


Exercise  78. 

1.  When  he  had  said  what  he  had  to  say,  he  left  (sali6  de)  the 
house.  2.  As  soon  as  the  father  had  read  what  the  letter  of  his  son 
contained,  he  handed  it  to  me.  3.  Hardly  had  he  said  that  when  his 
friend  entered.  4.  What  did  you  do  when  you  had  dined  ?  5.  I 
went  to  my  friend's,  who  took  me  to  the  theater.  6.  When  I  had 
written  my  letters  I  went  out.  7.  As  soon  as  I  had  finished  my 
work  I  gave  it  to  him.  8.  After  he  had  visited  the  city  he  returned 
to  the  country.  9.  We  had  hardly  breakfasted  when  we  heard  the 
news.  10.  Had  you  seen  my  lawyer?  11.  I  had  seen  yours  and 
mine.  12.  The  children  had  told  me  that  you  had  gone  out.  13.  I 
wished  to  go  out,  but  I  had  no  umbrella  and  it  was  raining. 
14.  When  they  heard  that  I  had  received  good  news  they  all  came  to 
(a)  see  me.  15.  When  they  had  read  the  newspapers  they  wrote  their 
letters.  16.  After  they  had  seen  our  house  they  wished  to  buy  it, 
but  my  father  would  not  sell  it.  17.  The  steamers  had  arrived,  but 
we  had  not  received  any  letters.  18.  The  father  had  died  without 
seeing  (ver)  his  sons.  19.  Why  had  you  opened  the  door  1  20.  Be- 
cause I  was  too  warm  with  the  door  closed.  21.  Mr.  Martin  had  not 
arrived  this  morning  when  I  was  at  his  house.  22.  Had  you  not 
heard  that  he  was  yet  in  Boston  ?  23.  I  had  not  heard  anything. 
24.  To  whom  had  you  spoken  ?  25.  I  had  spoken  to  the  servants. 


THE  PAST  ANTERIOR  AND  THE  PLUPERFECT.    217 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  past  anterior  is  formed  from  the  preterit  of  the 
auxiliary  haber,  to  have,  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb ; 
while  the  pluperfect  of  the  indicative  is  composed  of  the  imper- 
fect indicative  of  the  same  auxiliary,  and  the  past  participle  of 
the  verb  : 

Cuando  hube  reconocido  (past  ante-  When  I  had  perceived  my  error,  I 
rior)  mi  error,  me  avergonze  de  lo  was  ashamed  of  what  I  had 

que  habia  hecho  (pluperfect).  done. 

2«  The  past  anterior  generally  expresses  that  an  action  took 
place  immediately  before  another  past  action  or  event. 

This  tense  is  principally  used  after  one  of  the  conjunctions ; 
despues  que,  after;  luego  que,  asi  que,  al  memento  que,  al 
punto  que,  as  soon  as;  apenas,  hardly,  scarcely,  no  sooner. 

Despues  que  —  asi  que  —  cuando  After  —  as  soon  as  —  when  he  had 

hubo  comido,  salio,  dined,  he  went  out. 

Se  embarco  luego  que  hubo  recibido  He  embarked  as  soon  as  he  had  re- 
el pasaporte,  ceived  the  passport. 

OBSERVATIONS.  —  1.  As  seen  by  the  examples  given,  the  verb  of  the 
principal  sentence  must  be  in  the  preterit  when  the  tense  of  the  subordi- 
nate sentence  is  in  the  anterior. 

2.  The  conjunctions  and  conjunctive  locutions  above  given  do  not  neces- 
sarily require  the  verb  to  be  put  in  the  past  anterior  tense ;  they  may  be 
frequently  used  with  other  tenses  : 

Asi  que  hemos  comido,  vamos  a  pa-  As  soon  as  we  have  dined  we  go  and 

sear,  take  a  walk. 

Apenas  tuvo  el  dinero  cuando  me  He  hardly  had  the  money  when  he 

pago,  paid  me. 

3,    The  pluperfect  marks  an  action  or  event  not  only  as  past 
in  itself,  but  also  past  with  regard  to  some  other  past  action  or 
event  : 
Habiamos  pensado  que  V.  vendria         We  had  thought  that  you  would 

temprano,  come  early. 

OBSERVATION.  —  Nearly  all  the  rules  given  for  the  imperfect  may  be 
applied  to  the  pluperfect. 


218  LESSON   40. 


Leccion  XL.  Lesson  XL* 

THE   FUTURE   AND    FUTURE   ANTERIOR. 
Regular  Verbs. 

1st  Conjuqation. 
j   j 

Amar,  to  love.  Hablar,  to  speak. 

Amar-e,  I  shall  or  will  love.  Hablar- e,  I  shall  or  will  speak. 

Amar-ds,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  love.  Hablar-a"s,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  speak. 

Amar-d,  he  shall  or  will  love.  Hablar-6,  he  shall  or  will  speak. 

Amar-emos,  we  shall  or  will  love.  Hablar-emos,  we  shall  or  will  speak. 

Amar-eis,  you  shall  or  will  love.  Hablar-eis,  you  shall  or  will  speak. 

Amar-an,  they  shall  or  will  love.  Hablar-an,  they  shall  or  will  speak. 

2d  Conjugation. 

Comer,  to  eat.  Beber,  to  drink. 

Coiner-e,  I  shall  or  will  eat.  Beber-e,  I  shall  or  will  drink. 

Comer-as,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  eat.  Beber-as,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  drink. 

Comer-a,  he  shall  or  will  eat.  Beber-d,  he  shall  or  will  drink. 

Comer-emos,  we  shall  or  will  eat.  Beber-emos,  we  shall  or  will  drink. 

Comer-e'is,  you  shall  or  will  eat.  Beber-6is,  you  shall  or  will  drink. 

Comer-an,  they  shall  or  will  eat.  Beber-a"n,  they  shall  or  will  drink. 

3d  Conjugation. 

Eecibir,  to  receive.  Partir,  to  depart. 

Reeibir-e,  /  shall  or  will  receive.  Partir-e,  /  shall  or  will  depart. 

Recibir-a"s,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  receive.  Partir-a"s,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  depart. 

Recibir-a",  he  shall  or  will  receive.  Partir-d,  he  shall  or  will  depart. 

Recibir-emos,  we  shall  or  will  receive.  Partir-emos,  we  shall  or  will  depart 

Recibir-6is,  yon  shall  or  will  receive.  Partir-eis,  you  shall  or  will  depart. 

Recibir-a"n,  they  shall  or  win  receive.  Partir-&n,  they  shall  or  will  depart. 

Irregular  Features. 

1.    Hacer,  2.  to  do,  to  make.  2.    Poder,  2.  to  be  able. 

Hare,  /  shall  or  will  do.  Podr£,  /  shall  or  will  be  able. 

Haras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  do.  Podras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be  able. 

Hard,  he  shall  or  will  do.  Podra,  he  shall  or  wi?l  be  able. 

Haremos,  we  shall  or  will  do.  Podremos,  we  shall  or  will  be  able, 

Hareis,  you  shall  or  will  do.  Podreis,  you  shall  or  will  be  able. 

Haran,  they  shall  or  will  do.  Podvdn,  they  shall  or  will  be  able. 


THE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  ANTERIOR. 


219 


3.  Poner,  2.  to  put. 
Poudre,  /  shall  or  will  put. 
Pondras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  put. 
Pondra,  he  shall  or  will  put. 
Pondremos,  we  shall  or  will  put. 
Pondreis,  you  shall  or  will  put. 
Pondran,  they  shall  or  will  put. 

5.  Saber,  2.  to  know. 
Sabre,  I  shall  or  will  know. 
Sabras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  know. 
Sabra,  he  shall  or  will  know. 
Sabremos,  we  shall  or  will  know. 
Sabreis,  you  shall  or  will  know. 
Sabran,  they  shall  or  will  know. 

7.  Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Vendre,  /  shall  or  will  come. 
Vendras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  come. 
Vendra,  lie  shall  or  will  come, 
Vendremos,  we  shall  or  will  come. 
Vendreis,  you  shall  or  will  come. 
Vendran,  they  shall  or  will  come. 

9  Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Saldre,  /  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  go  out. 
Saldra,  he  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldremos,  we  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldreis,  you  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldran,  they  shall  or  will  go  out. 

11.  Tener,  2.  to  have. 
Tendre,  /  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have. 
Tendra,  he  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendreinos,  we  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendreis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendran,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


4.  Querer,  2.  to  wish,  to  be  willing. 
Querre,  /  shall  or  will  wish. 
Querras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  wish. 
Querra,  he  shall  or  will  wish. 
Querreinos,  we  shall  or  will  wish. 
Querreis,  you  shall  or  will  wish. 
Querrau,  they  shall  or  will  wish. 

6.  Valer,  2.  to  be  worth. 
Valdre,  I  shall  or  will  be  worth. 
Valdras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be  worth. 
Valdra,  he  shall  or  will  be  worth. 
Valdremos,  we  shall  or  will  be  worth. 
Valdreis,  you  shall  or  will  be  worth. 
Valdran,  they  shall  or  will  be  worth. 

8.  Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 
Dire,  /  shall  or  will  say. 
Diras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  say. 
Dira,  he  shall  or  will  say. 
Diremos,  we  shall  or  will  say. 
Direis,  you  shall  or  will  say. 
Diran,  they  shall  or  will  say. 

10.   Caber,  to  be  contained. 
Cabre,  /  shall  be  contained. 
Cabras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be  contained. 
Cabra,  he  shall  or  will  be  contained. 
Cabremos,  we  shall  oTwill  be  contained. 
Cabreis,  you  shall  or  will  be  contained. 
Cabran,  they  shall  or  will  be  contained. 

12.  Haber,  2.  to  have. 
Habre,  /  shall  or  will  have. 
Habras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have. 
Habra,  he  shall  or  will  have. 
Habremos,  we  shall  or  will  have, 
Habreis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 
Habran,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


NOTE.  —  The  verb  ir,  3.  to  go,  although  one  of  the  most  irregular  verbs 
in  Spanish,  forms  its  future  regularly. 


220  LESSON  40. 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


El  merito,  the  merit. 
El  negocio,  the  business. 
La  procesion,  the  procession. 
Asi  que,  so  that. 
Junio,  m.,  June. 
Kecesario,  necessary. 


Pronto,  soon. 
Segtin,  according  to. 
Siempre,  always. 
Acabar,  1.  to  finish. 
Asegurar,  1.  to  assure. 
Enriquecer,  2.  to  enrich. 


Exercise  79. 


Pasar,  1.  to  pass. 
Pensar,  1.  to  think. 
Perdonar,  1.  to  for  give 
Prometer,2.  topromise. 
Tratar,  1.  to  treat. 
Veneer,  2.  to  conquer. 


1.  i  Cuando  vendra  V.  a  vernos  ?  2.  Iremos  un  dia  de  estos, 
cuando  no  estemos  tan  ocupados.  3.  £  Corno  lo  sabra  V.  ?  4.  Mi 
herniano  me  lo  dira.  5.  Vere  muy  pronto  si  V.  sabra  sus  lecciones. 
6.  Le  aseguro  a  V.  que  las  sabre.  7.  El  panadero  vino  esta  manana 
y  dijo  que  no  podra  volver  hoy.  8.  j  Cuando  tendra  V.  el  dinero  ? 
9.  Lo  tendre  esta  tarde.  10.  j  A  quo*  hora  comeremos  hoy  ]  11.  Come- 
remos  muy  temprano.  12.  [  Cuando  habra  acabado  Y.  su  trabajo  1 
13.  Lo  habre  acabado  manana  por  la  manana.  14.  [  Que  bebera  V.? 
15.  Bebere  agua  si  V.  no  tiene  vino.  16.  Hoy  recibiremos  todo  lo 
que  necesitamos.  17.  [Que  haran  VV.  si  no  tienen  dinero  1 
18.  Haremos  lo  que  siempre  hemos  hecho.  19.  £  Vendra  su  her- 
niano de  V.  hoy?  20.  Vendra  si  tiene  tiempo.  21.  [Que  dira  su 
padre  si  sabe  esto  ?  22.  Dira  que  V.  ha  hecho  muy  mal  en  no  con- 
sultarle.  23.  j  Cuando  saldran  los  muchachos  ?  24.  No  saldran  hoy, 
pues  el  tiempo  esta  malisimo.  25.  [  No  ira  V.  al  concierto  de  la 
senorita  Abel  1  26.  No  podre  ir,  pues  no  estare  en  la  ciudad.  27.  Dios 
nos  tratara  segiin  nuestros  meritos.  28.  V.  no  habra  acabado  su 
trabajo  manana,  porque  V.  no  trabaja  bastante  ;  y  yo  habre  acabado 
el  mio,  porque  trabajo  sin  perder  (losing)  un  momento.  29.  j  Cree  V. 
que  Juan  hara  lo  que  le  he  dicho  ?  30.  El  no  querra  hacerlo.  31.  Mis 
hermanas  ban  ido  al  campo,  pero  volveran  la  semana  que  viene. 
32.  Espero  que  mi  amigo  me  perdonara.  33.  V.  podra  salir  tan  pronto 
como  habra  acabado  lo  que  tiene  que  hacer.  34.  £  Que  diran  VV 
a  estos  hombres '?  35.  No  les  hablaremos. 

Exercise  80. 

1.  When  will  you  receive  letters  from  your  family  ?  2.  I  shall  re- 
ceive one  to-morrow.  3.  This  business  will  enrich  us  all.  4.  Will 
you  write  to  me  1  5.  1  will  write  to  you  every  week.  6.  When  will 
you  go  out  with  the  children  1  7.  I  will  go  out  this  afternoon 


THE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  ANTERIOR.        221 

8.  They  will  conquer  or  die.  9.  Will  you  be  able  to  do  it  without  me  ^ 
10.  I  don't  know  if  I  shall  be  able  to  do  it.  11.  How  much  money 
will  you  give  to  your  brother  ?  12.  I  will  give  him  enough  for  his 
journey.  13.  Will  it  be  necessary  to  tell  him  anything  ?  14.  It  will 
be  better  (valdrd  mds)  not  to  say  anything.  15.  If  we  go  to  his  house, 
he  will  treat  us  well.  16.  Do  you  think  that  I  shall  be  able  to  speak 
Spanish  in  two  years  ?  17.  You  will  speak  pretty  well,  if  you  are  will- 
ing to  study.  18.  When  will  the  procession  pass  1  19.  It  will  pass 
at  three  o'clock.  20.  I  will  go  and  (a)  see  them  as  soon  as  I  shall 
have  finished  this  work.  21.  If  we  go  out  now,  our  teacher  will  see 
us.  22.  When  will  your  cousin  go  to  the  country  ?  23.  He  will  go  in 
the  month  of  June.  24.  When  will  you  send  me  the  book  that  you 
promised  me  ?  25.  I  will  send  it  to  you  to-morrow  morning. 
26.  Shall  you  be  at  home  this  afternoon  ?  27.  Yes,  sir,  I  shall  be 
(there).  28.  My  friend  has  not  received  any  letter,  so  that  he  will 
not  be  able  to  tell  you  anything.  29.  Will  it  be  necessary  to  go  to 
your  house  this  evening  1  30.  It  will  not  be  necessary.  31.  How 
much  money  shall  you  receive?  32.  I  don't  know  how  much  I  shall 
receive.  33.  Have  the  boys  finished  their  lessons  ?  34.  They  will 
soon  have  done  (finished).  35.  I  know  what  he  has  said,  but  I  shall 
not  say  a  word. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  future  of  regular  verbs  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
to  the  present  infinitive  the  following  terminations: 

-e        -as        -a        -emos        -eis        -an 

The  termination  of  the  future  is  the  same  for  all  verbs, 
whether  regular  or  irregular,  the  stem  alone  being  changed  foi 
the  latter. 

2.  The  verb  satisfacer,    2.   to  satisfy,    is   conjugated   like 
hacer,   2.   to  do,   to   make;    the  f  being,    however,    preserved 
through  the  conjugation:  satisfago,  I  satisfy,  satisfare,  I  shall 
or  will  satisfy,  etc. 

3.  Caber,  2.  to  contain,  to  be  contained,  has  the  same  irregu- 
larity as  poder,   2.  to  be  able,  and  makes  cabre,  etc.,  in  the 
future. 


222  LESSON  40. 

4,  All  the  other  verbs  which  form  their  future  irregularly, 
have  been  given  above.  Their  derivatives  are  conjugated  in 
the  same  way. 

Thus  :  componer,  2.  to  mend,  deponer,  2.  to  lay  down,  dis- 
poner,  2.  to  dispose,  oponer,  2.  to  oppose,  etc.,  are  conjugated 
in  the  future  like  poner,  2.  to  put. 

Contener,  2.  to  contain,  detener,  2.  to  detain,  obtener,  2.  to 
obtain,  etc.,  are  conjugated  like  tener,  2.  to  have. 

Equi  valer,  2.  to  be  equivalent,  is  conjugated  like  valer,  2.  to 
be  worth. 

OBSERVATION.  —  Valer  ma's,  lit. :  to  be  worth  more,  is  often  rendered  in 
English  by  to  be  better. 

Avenir,  3.  to  happen,  convenir,  3.  to  agree,  intervenir,  3.  to 

interfere,  etc.,  form  their  future  like  venir,  3.  to  come. 

Predecir,  3.  to  foretell,  contradecir,  3.  to  contradict,  desdecir, 
3.  to  deny,  form  their  future  like  decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 

Bendecir,  3.  to  bless,  and  maldecir,  3.  to  curse,  of  which  the 
past  participle  is  bendecido  (or  bendito),  and  also  maldito, 
form,  however,  their  future  regularly : 

Bendecire*,  I  shall  or  will  bless.  Bendeciremos,  we  shall  or  will  bless. 

Bendeciras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  bless.       Bendecireis,  you  shall  or  will  bless. 
Bendecira,  he  shall  or  will  bless.  Bendeciran,  they  shall  or  will  bless. 

5*    The  future  is  often  used  in  Spanish  instead  of  the  im- 
perative : 
Iras  a  la  plaza  y  compraras  un  polio,       Go  to  the  market  and  buy  a  chicken. 

6.  The  future  anterior  is  formed  from  the  past  participle  of 
the  verb  conjugated  with  the  future  of  the  auxiliary  haber, 
to  have  ; 

Habre  acabado  esta  noehe,        i  shall  have  finished  to-night. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  223 


Lecclon  ILL  Lesson  ILL 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 

It    The  present  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  the  follow 
ing  endings  to  the  stein  of  the  first  person  present  indicative  : 
For  the  1st  Conjugation.  For  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations. 

•6  -emos  -a  -amos 

•es          -eis  -as          -ais 

-e          -en  -a          -an 

1st  Conjugation. 
Hablar,  to  speak. 

Que  yo  habl-e,  that  I  may  speak. 

Que  tii  habl-es,  that  thou  mayest  speak. 

Que  el  habl-e,  that  he  may  speak. 

Que  nosotros  habl-emos,  that  we  may  speak. 

Que  vosotros  habl-eis,  that  you  may  speak. 

Que  ellos  habl-en,  that  they  may  speak. 

2d  Conjugation. 
Vender,  to  sell. 

Que  yo  vend-a,  that  I  may  sett. 

Que  tii  vend-as,  that  thou  mayest  sell. 

Que  el  vend-a,  that  he  may  sell. 

Que  nosotros  vend-amos,  that  we  may  sell. 

Que  vosotros  vend-als,  that  you  may  sell. 

Que  elloa  vend-an,  that  they  may  selL 

3d  Conjugation. 
Kecibir,  to  receive. 

Que  yo  recib-a,  that  I  may  receive. 

Que  tii  recib-as,  that  thou  mayest  receive, 

Que  el  recib-a,  that  he  may  receive. 

Que  nosotros  recil>amos,  that  we  may  receive. 

Que  vosotros  recib-ais,  that  you  may  receive. 

Que  ellos  recib-an,  that  they  may  receive. 


224 


LESSON   41. 


Que  yo  sea, 
etc. 


Exceptions. 
Ser,  2.  to  be. 

that  I  may  fa 
etc. 

Estar,  1.  to  be. 

Que  yo  este,  that  I  may  be. 

etc.  etc. 

Haber,  2.  (auxiliary)  to  kave. 
Que  yo  haya,  that  I  may  have, 

etc.  etc. 

Bar,  1.  to  give. 

Que  yo  de,  that  I  may  give. 

etc.  etc. 

Saber,  2.  to  know. 

Que  yo  sepa,  that  I  may  know 

etc.  etc. 

Ir,  3.  to  go. 

Que  yo  vaya,  that  I  may  go. 

etc.  etc. 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  carbon,  the  coal. 
El  ejercito,  the  army. 
El  empleo,  the  employment. 
El  invierno,  the  winter. 
El  momenta,  the  moment. 
La  lengua,  the  language. 
La  lena,  the  wood. 
A  menos  quo,  unless. 
Aunque,  although. 
Con  tal  que,  provided. 
Contrario,  contrary. 
Desgraciado,  unfortunate. 


Hasta  que,  until. 
Listo,  ready. 
Menester,  necessary. 
Natural,  natural. 
Por  mas... que,  however. 
Satisfecho,  satisfied. 
Sorprendido,  surprised. 
Tonto,  foolish. 
Buscar,  1.  to  look  for. 
Convenir,  3.  to  be  proper, 
Convidar,  1.  to  invite. 
Desear,  1.  to  desire. 


Esperar,  1.  to  wait. 
Marchar,  1.  to  march 
Preferir,  3.  to  prefer. 
Preparar,  1.  to  prepare, 
Pretender,  2.  to  pretend 
Querer,  2.  to  grant. 
Sentir,  3.  to  regret. 
Suplicar,  1.  to  entreat* 
Temer,  2.  to  fear. 
Ver,  2.  to  see. 


Exercise  81. 

1.  l  Que  quiere  V.  que  yo  haga  ?  2.  Quiero  que  V.  escriba  a  su 
amigo  y  que  le  diga  que  venga.  3.  Me  alegro  (/  am  glad)  que  V.  este 
satisfecho  de  mi  trabajo.  4.  Estoy  sorprendido  de  que  V.  no  sepa 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  225 

nada  de  eso.  5.  Es  necesario  que  salgamos  temprano,  pues  debemos 
llegar  a  la  ciudad  antes  de  la  noche.  6.  Siento  que  V.  110  tenga  el 
dinero  que  V.  me  prometio.  7.  Es  posible  que  las  cartas  lleguen  hoy. 
8.  Es  de  desear  que  acabemos  hoy.  9.  Es  mejor  que  V.  no  le  diga 
nada.  10.  No  coiiviene  que  V.  hable  tanto.  11.  Deseo  que  V.  vaya 
en  seguida  a  su  casa.  12.  Dios  quiera  que  no  lleguemos  demasiado 
tarde.  13.  i  Cree  V.  que  el  pueda  venir  la  semana  que  viene  1  14.  No 
creo  que  lo  pueda.  15.  Es  tiempo  que  acabe  el  invierno,  pues  ya  no 
tenemos  carbon  ni  leiia.  16.  Si  es  verdad  (true)  que  su  padre  llegue 
mafiana,  sera  menester  prepararle  un  cuarto.  17.  Derae  V.  una 
leccionque  sea  mas  facil.  18.  i  Cuando  quiere  V.  que  yo  le  devuelva 
el  dinero  ?  19.  Devuelvamelo  tan  pronto  como  V.  pueda.  20.  He 
suplicado  a  mi  amigo  que  venga  a  mi  casa,  pero  el  prefiere  ir  a  la 
fonda.  21.  Este  hombre  pretende  que  le  den  uu  empleo.  22.  Que 
venga  si  quiere.  23.  Queremos  que  W.  trabajen  mas.  24.  El 
maestro  desea  que  aprendamos  la  lengua  inglesa.  25.  Tememos  que 
este  hombre  sea  nuestro  enemigo.  26.  No  apruebo  que  V.  saiga  todas 
las  noches.  27.  Puede  ser  que  el  vaya  a  Paris.  28.  Quiero  que  V. 
me  diga  lo  que  sea  la  verdad.  29.  Quiero  un  maestro  que  no  sea 
demasiado  joven.  30.  Nuestro  padre  no  quiere  que  durmamos  tan 
tarde.  31.  No  encuentro  a  ninguno  que  pueda  prestarme  el  dinero  que 
necesito.  32.  Don  Juan  Morales  es  el  mejor  hombre  que  conozca. 
33.  £ste  es  el  mejor  vino  que  haya  bebido.  34.  El  me  dara  dinero 
hasta  que  yo  haya  encontrado  un  buen  empleo.  35.  Lo  hare  aunque 
no  sepa  muy  bien  hacerlo. 

Exercise  82. 

1.  Captain  Henry  is  the  bravest  officer  I  know  in  the  army.  2.  It 
is  the  best  bread  we  have  had  this  year.  3.  Here  is,  I  think,  the  last 
book  he  has  written.  4.  I  am  surprised  that  your  brother  should 
come  at  (en)  this  moment.  5.  He  wishes  ine  to  return  to-morrow,  but 
I  don't  think  that  I  shall  be  able  to  do  it.  6.  It  is  unfortunate  that 
you  should  have  lost  all  your  money.  7.  It  is  better  for  you  to 
arrive  in  the  morning.  8.  Is  it  true  that  he  has  said  that  ?  9.  I  don't 
think  he  has  said  it.  10.  At  what  time  do  you  think  he  will  be 
here  1  11.  I  don't  think  he  can  be  here  before  eleven.  12.  It  is  im- 
possible for  me  to  go  out  so  early.  13.  Although  he  is  poor  he  has 
more  friends  than  you.  14.  Do  you  think  that  I  am  foolish  enough 
to  believe  that  ?  15.  Is  it  possible  that  you  should  have  spent  so  much 

15 


226  LESSON   41. 

money  1  16.  My  father  wishes  me  to  go  to  the  country  with  him. 
17.  We  wish  you  to  study  your  lessons.  18.  The  general  wishes  that 
every  soldier  be  ready  to  march.  19.  Grod  grant  that  he  may  live 
long(muchos  anos)\  20.  I  wish  him  to  come  and  to  bring  the  money. 

21.  It  is  very  natural  that  he  should  think  that  I  am  his  friend. 

22.  It  is  well  (bueno)  that  he  should  know  it.     23.  I  am  looking  for  a 
man  who  may  be  willing  to  lend  me  some   money.     24.  See  that 
everything  is  ready.     25.  I  do  not  believe  it,  although  he  may  say 
the  (lo)  contrary.     26.  Wait  till  he  comes.     27.  I  shall  go  out  unless 
it  rains.     28.  We  will  wait  for  you,  provided  you  do  not  come  too 
late.     29.  However  rich  he  may  be,  he  is  unhappy.     30.  Unless  he 
invites  me,  I  shall  not  go  to  his  house.     31.  I  will  buy  that  house 
when  I  have  money  enough.     32.  He  says  he  will  come,  provided 
they  send  him  a  carriage.  33.  I  do  not  wish  you  to  speak  so. 

Dramatic  a .  Grammar. 

1.  The  subjunctive  mood  in  Spanish  is  usually  found  in  a 
dependent  clause,  and  expresses  doubt  or  uncertainty  as  to  the 
facts  or  the  result.  The  necessity  for  its  use  is  oftenest  indicated 
by  the  idea  in  the  principal  clause,  but  this  is  not  always  the 
case.  The  principal  cases  of  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  are: 
after  words  expressing  — 

a.  Command,,  request,  etc.  : 

Mando  que  venga,  I  order  him  to  come. 

Ije  pido  a  V.  que  saiga,  /  beg  you  to  go  out. 

Qtiiero  que  VV.  trabajen,        I  wish  that  you  should  work. 

b.  Suggestion,  permission,  approval,  prohibition : 

Propongo  que  V.  venga,  /  suggest  that  you  come. 

Permito  que  el  se  vaya,  I  allow  him  to  go  away. 

Tengo  a  bien  que  V.  permanezca,  /  approve  of  your  staying. 

Prohibo  que  lo  hagan,  I  forbid  their  doing  it. 

c.  JZmotion  (such  as  desire,  joy,  surprise,  fear,  etc.): 

Deseo  que  V.  venga,  /  want  you  to  come. 

Temo  que  el  caiga,  /  am  afraid  he  will  fall. 

Me  alegro  que  haga  sol,  /  am  glad  that  the  sun  is  shining. 

Sienten  que  V.  hay  a  venido,  They  are  sorry  that  you  came. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 
d.   Doubt,  denial,  etc. : 


227 


Pudo  que  sea  el, 
Negamos  que  sepan, 
i  Cree  V.  que  el  este  malo  ? 
No  pienso  que  sea  verdad, 


/  doubt  if  it  be  he. 
We  deny  that  they  know. 
Do  you  think  that  he  is  ill  ? 
I  don't  think  it  is  true. 


2.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  in  Spanish  after  an  imper- 
sonal verb  expressing  an  idea  of  volition,  doubt,  necessity,  contin- 
gency, uncertainty,  etc.  (See  Rule  I.),  as : 


Es  propio  (conveniente  or  a  proposito), 

Es  de  desear  que  venga, 

Conviene, 

Es  bueno, 

Es  inalo, 

Es  necesario,  ) 

Es  menester,  j 

Es  lastiraa, 

Es  sorprendente, 

Es  facil, 

Es  imposible  que  el  no  sepa, 


Es  tierapo, 
Es  suficiente. 
Es  natural, 
etc. 


Basta, 


It  is  proper. 

It  is  desirable  for  him  to  come. 

It  becomes. 

It  is  proper  or  well. 

It  is  wrong. 

It  is  necessary. 

It  is  a  pity. 

It  is  surprising. 

It  is  easy  or  possible. 

It  is  impossible  that  he  does  not 

know. 
It  is  time. 
It  is  sufficient. 
It  is  natural, 
etc. 


3*    The  subjunctive  is  also  used  when  the  verb  of  the  second 
proposition  expresses  some  contingent  or  future  effect: 


Lo  comprare  cuando  tenga  dinero, 
Le  hablare  asi  que  le  vea, 
Lo  hare  antes  que  el  venga, 


/  will  buy  it  when  I  have  money. 
I  will  speak  to  him  when  I  see  him. 
I  will  do  it  before  he  comes. 


4.  A  relative  pronoun,  either  used  alone  or  preceded  by  a 
noun,  and  any  of  the  words  solo,  alone,  ninguno,  no,  none,  no 
one,  pocos,  few,  cualquiera,  whatever,  quienquiera,  whoever, 
nadie,  nobody,  no  one,  linico,  only  thing,  primero,  first,  ultimo, 
last,  mas,  more,  mejor,  lest,  requires  the  subjunctive  when  there 
is  an  idea  of  uncertainty : 


228  LESSON   41. 

Busco  d  un  hombre  que  quiera  pres-  lam  looking  for  a  man  willing  to 

tarme  dinero,  lend  me  money. 

Esto  es,  creo,  lo  unico  que  le  per-  This  is,  I  think,  the  only  thiig  be- 

tenezca,  longing  to  him. 

Hay  pocos  que  lo  sepan,  There  are  few  who  know  it. 

Quienquiera    que    lo    vea,    pensard  Whoever  sees  it  will  think  as  I  do. 

como  yo, 

Cualquiera  que  sea  su  fortuna,   el  Whatever  be  his  fortune,  he  will 

morira  pobre,  die  poor. 

5,  A  few  conjunctive   expressions   require    the   subjunctive 
mood  when  they  express  a  doubt  or  uncertainty.     Such  are : 

A  fin  que,  in  order  that.  Hasta  que,  until. 

A  menos  que,  unless.  Lejos  de  que,  far  from. 

Antes  que,  before.  Por  poco  que,  however  little. 

Aunque,  although.  Por  nmcho  que,  \  , 

_  >  however. 

Aun  cuando,  although.  Por  mas  que,      ) 

Bien  que,  though.  Para  que,  in  order  that. 

En  caso  que,  in  case  that.  Siempre  que,  whenever. 

Con  tal  que,  provided  that.  Supuesto  que,  supposing  that. 

Dado  que,  granting.  \  Ojala  !  would  to  God! 

6,  The  perfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  pres- 
ent of  the  subjunctive  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  2.  to  have,  and 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb  : 

Que  yo  haya  hablado,         That  I  may  have  spoken. 
Que  hayamos  salido,  That  we  may  have  gone  out. 

OBSERVATION.  —  All  the  general  rules  given  on  the  use  of  the  present 
subjunctive  apply  to  the  perfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

7»  The  present  subjunctive  is  generally  used  when  the 
preceding  verb  is  in  the  present  or  future  indicative,  and  in  the 
imperative. 

Le  ruego  que  venga,  /  beg  him  to  come. 

Le  rogare  que  venga,  /  will  beg  him  to  come. 

Ruegale  V.  que  venga,  Beg  him  to  come. 

Quiero  que  VV.  trabajen,  I  wish  that  you  should  work. 

Es  posible  que  yo  vaya,  /  may  possibly  go. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD.  229 


Leccion  XLII.  Lesson  XLII. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

1,  The  imperative  is  formed  by  adding  the  following  ter- 
minations to  the  stem  of  the  verbs  : 

1st  Conjugation.  2d  Conjugation.  3d  Conjugation. 

-a  -e  -e 

-ad  -ed  -id 

1st  Conjugation.  2d  Conjugation. 

Habl-a,  speak  (thou).  Com-e,  eat  (thou). 

Habl-ad,         speak  (ye).  Com-ed,         eat  (ye). 

3d  Conjugation. 

Recib-e,  receive  (thou). 

Recib-id,         receive  (ye). 

2t  The  present  subjunctive  is  used  for  the  imperative  in  the 
first  and  third  persons  (for  the  formation  of  these  forms  see 
Lesson  XLI.)  : 

1st  Conjugation. 
Hablar,  1.  to  speak.  Comprar,  1.  to  buy.  Cantar,  1.  to  sing. 


Yo  habl-o  I  speak  -   \  Hab1"6  V*  ^^  ^  habl"en  VV'  (pL)>  Sp6ak  ^you^ 
'    (  Habl-emos,  let  us  speak. 


Yocompr-o  I  buy   [  ComPr"e  V'  (sin^  or  comPr-en  VV.  G^X  *uy  (you), 
'    (  Corapr-emos,  let  us  buy. 

Yo  cant-o  I  sinq  -      I  Cant"6  V"  (singm)  °T  Cant"en  VV*  (pL)>  sing  (you^ 
I  Cant-emos,  let  us  sing. 

2d  and  3d  Conjugations. 

Coiner,  2.  to  eat.  Beber,  2.  to  drink.  Vender,  2.  to  sell. 

Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell.          Venir,  3.  to  come.  Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 

Yo  com-o  Teat-        |  C°m"a  V>  ^^  °T  com'an  VV'  (PL)>  eat 
\  Cora-amos,  let  us  eat. 

b"a  V'  ^^^  °r  beb-an  YV*  f^-)»  drink 


Yo  beb-o   I  drink  • 

Beb-amos,  let  us  drink. 


230  LESSON  42. 

Yo  vend-o  I  sell  •      \  Vend'a  V-  (sin(J-)  "r  vend-an  VV.  (^.),  sell  (you). 
(  Vend-amos,  let  us  sell. 

SDig-a  V.  (ring.),  say  or  tell  (you). 
Dig-an  VV.  (pi.),  say  or  tell  (you). 
Dig-amos,  let  us  say  or  tell. 

,T  (  Veng-a  V.  (sing.)  or  veng-an  VV.  (pi.),  come  (you). 

Yo  veng-o,  /  come  ;    <  ,,  _  ' 

(  Veng-amos,  let  us  come. 

Yo  sal-o  I  go  out;    \  ^°*  V'  <***•>  °T  "* 

\  Salg-amos,  let  us  go  out. 

RULE.  —  The  0  of  the  1st  person  of  the  present  indicative  is 
changed  into  e  and  en  for  the  1st  conjugation,  and  into  a  and 
an  for  the  2d  and  3d  conjugations. 

Exceptions. 

(  Sea  V.  (sing.)  or  sean  VV.  (pi.),  be  (you). 
Ser,  2.  to  06  f  \  0  ,          , 

(  Searaos,  let  us  be. 

_  x  (  Este  V.  (sing.)  or  esten  VV.  (pi.)  be  (you). 

xiiStar.  1.  to  oe  ;  <  „  .  .  .       7 

C  Estemos,  let  us  be. 

(  De  V.  (sing.)  or  den  VV.  (pi.  ),  give  (you). 
Dar,  1.  to  aive  :  <  „  , 

(  Demos,  ^^  us  give. 

(  Sepa  V.  (sing.)  or  sepan  VV.  (»Z.  ),  know  (you). 
Saber,  2.  to  know  ;      <  .,  r 

(  Sepamos,  tec  ^5*  know. 


^  (  Vaya  V.  (sm0.)  or  vayan  VV.  (^.),  ^ 

(  Vayamos,  (contract,  vamos),  let  us  go. 


Imperative  with  Pronouns. 

Traigame  V.  esto,  Bring  me  this. 

No  se  lo  de  V.,  Do  not  give  it  to  him. 

Vendanos  V.  su  caballo,  Sell  us  your  horse. 

Prestemelo  V.,  Lend  it  to  me. 

Biisquelos  V.,  Look  for  them. 

No  lo  corte  V. ,  Do  not  cut  it. 

Vengan  VV.  esta  noche,  Come  this  evening. 

No  salgan  VV.  ahora,  Do  not  go  out  now. 

Digaraelo  V.,  Tell  it  to  me. 

No  se  lo  diga  V.  a  nadie,  Do  not  tell  it  to  anybody. 

Salgamos  un  rato,  Let  us  go  out  for  a  moment. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


231 


Ven  aqui,  Juanito, 

Vuelva  V.  esta  noche, 

No  hablen  VV.  tanto, 

Trabajemos, 

No  hagas  eso, 

Conformate  con  tu  suerte, 

Ponga  V.  el  libro  sobre  la  mesa, 

Digale  V.  a  Juan  que  su  padre  ha 

llegado, 
Hablad  a  este  hombre, 


Come  here,  Johnny. 

Return  this  evening. 

Do  not  speak  so  much. 

Let  us  work. 

Do  not  do  that. 

Be  satisfied  with  your  lot. 

Put  the  book  on  the  table. 

Tell   John   that  his   father  has 

arrived. 
Speak  to  that  man. 


Vocabulario. 

El  asunto,  the  matter. 

El  boticario,  the  drug- 
gist. 

El  coche,  the  coach. 

El  correo,  the  post,  the 
mail. 

El  estado,  the  condition. 

El  favor,  the  favor. 

El  ruido,  the  noise. 

Eltemor,  the  fear. 

La  canci6n,  the  song. 

La  patria,  the  country. 


La  verdad.  the  truth. 
La  virtud,  the  virtue. 
Alto,  loud. 
Enfadado,  angry. 
Ligero,  quick. 
Pronto,  quickly. 
Quieto,  quiet. 
Turbulento,  boisterous. 
Amar,  1.  to  love. 
Abrir,  3,  to  open. 
Cantar,  1.  to  sing. 
Correr,  2,  to  run. 


Vocabulary. 

Emplear,  1.  to  employ. 
Encender,  2.  to  light. 
Llevar,  1.  to  take. 
Obedecer,  2.  to  obey. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 
Pagar,  1 .  to  pay. 
Practicar,  1.  to  practise- 
Prestar,  1.  to  lend. 
Salir,  3.  to  leave. 
Saltar,  1.  to  jump. 
Tomar,  1.  to  take. 


Exercise  83. 

1.  No  tenga  V.  miedo,  el  perro  no  muerde.  2.  Eraplee  V.  bien  el 
tiempo.  3.  Amemos  nuestra  patria.  4.  Sepa  V.  sus  lecciones  mana- 
na.  5.  No  digas  todo  lo  que  haces,  pero  hagas  todo  lo  que  dices. 
6.  Este  V.  quieto.  7.  Mandeme  V.  mis  libros  por  el  muchacho. 
8.  Seamos  amigos.  9.  Deme  V.  esto,  lo  necesito.  10.  Pregunte  Y.  si 
el  Senor  Martinez  esta  en  casa.  11.  Yaya  V.  a  casa  del  Senor  Guti- 
errez y  digale  que  le  quiero  ver.  12.  Saiga  V.  de  aqui  y  no  vuelva 
mas.  13.  Venga  V.  pronto,  yo  le  necesito  a  V.  14.  Digame  V.  quien 
ha  hecho  esto.  15.  Hagame  Y.  el  favor  de  (to)  decirme  ddnde  vive  el 
medico.  16.  Hay  uno  que  vive  en  esta  casa.  17.  Sepa  Y.  que  soy  el 
mejor  amigo  que  Y.  tiene.  18.  Tome  Y.  este  dinero  y  deselo  a  este 
pobre.  19.  Hable  Y.  sin  temor,  y  diga  la  verdad.  20.  Muchachos, 


232  LESSON  42. 

no  jueguen  en  la  calle.  21.  Corra  V.  pronto  y  traigame  mi  paraguas, 
22.  Hable  V.  a  ese  horabre,  y  pregiintele  lo  que  quiere.  23.  Hablele  V, 
mismo,  yo  no  hablo  trances.  24.  Tome  V.  un  coche,  si  V.  no  quiere 
ir  a  pie.  25.  No  hagas  eso,  amiguito.  26.  Deme  V.  la  inano ;  muy 
bien,  ahora  salte  V.  27.  No  me  hable  V.,  estoy  enfadado  con  V. 
28.  Digamos  sienipre  la  verdad.  29.  Piense  V.  en  (of)  inf.  30.  Es- 
cribaine  V.  de  Paris.  31.  Creame,  ainigo,  la  cosa  no  es  asi.  32.  Sal- 
gamos,  ya  es  tarde.  33.  Denos  V.  nuestro  dinero,  lo  necesitamos. 
34.  Lleve  V.  esa  carta  al  correo ;  ya  es  tiempo.  35.  Vamonos  tern- 
piano.  36.  No  venga  V.  tan  tarde  inanana,  pues  teugo  que  salir. 


Exercise  84. 

1.  Take  this  key,  open  my  room,  and  bring  me  my  stick.  2.  Let 
us  write  our  letters,  the  mail  leaves  to-night.  3.  Come  early  to-mor- 
row morning,  we  have  a  great  deal  to  do.  4.  Do  not  go  out  without 
me.  5.  Write  to  us  every  week  from  Paris.  6.  Give  something  to 
that  poor  man  ;  he  is  hungry.  7.  Be  my  friend.  8.  Go  out,  I  don't 
need  you  here.  9.  Don't  speak  to  that  man,  he  is  not  your  friend. 
10.  Take  this  letter  to  your  father,  and  tell  him  that  I  wish  to  see 
him.  11.  Speak  louder,  I  cannot  hear  you.  12.  Do  me  the  favor  to 
(de)  give  me  a  piece  of  bread.  13.  Call  that  gentleman,  he  has  forgot- 
ten something.  14.  Give  me  something  to  (que)  drink,  I  am  very 
thirsty.  15.  Ask  that  woman  if  Mr.  Zamora  is  at  home.  16.  Do  not 
run  so  fast,  it  is  not  late.  17.  Do  not  believe  what  that  man  says,  he 
never  tells  the  truth.  18.  Light  the  gas ;  we  don't  see  anything  here. 
19.  Shut  the  door  ;  we  do  not  wish  to  be  seen.  20.  Don't  buy  that 
house,  it  is  in  very  poor  (mal)  condition.  21.  Take  this  and  give  it 
to  your  sister.  22.  Do  not  make  so  much  noise,  your  little  brother  is 
sleeping.  23.  Tell  me  all  that  you  know  about  (de)  this  matter 

24.  Write  to  this  merchant  and  tell  him  that  we  need  blue  cloth* 

25.  Go  to  the  druggist's,  but  return  quickly.     26.  If  you  do  not  need 
your  book,  lend  it  to  me.     27.  I  will  tell  you  something,  but  do  not 
tell  it  to  anybody.     28.  Obey  your  masters.     29.  Let  us  love  and 
practise  virtue.     30.  Let  us  see  who  is  at  the  door.     31.  Here  is  a 
•dollar;  take  it  and  pay  that  man.     32.  Do  not  be  so  boisterous,  your 
mother  is  not  well.     33.  Come  here,  I  have  something  to  tell  you. 
34.  Do  not  give  her  that,  she  is  too  small  yet.     35.  Let  us  sing  a 
Spanish  song. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD.  233 

Gramatiea.  Grammar. 

1,  The  regular  second  person  forms  of  the  imperative  are 
little  used,  since  the  polite   form  of  address   (almost  uni- 
versal) requires  the  use  of  the  third  person  forms  of  the  present 
subjunctive.     It  will  be  noticed  that  the  first  person  plural  is 
also  from  the  present  subjunctive,  and  is  not  a  true  imperative 
form. 

2.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative  is  the  same 
as  the  third  person  singular  of  the  present  indicative  (see  Les- 
sons XXXII.  to  XXXV.). 

NOTE.  —  Exceptions  to  the  above  rule  are :   decir,  habor,  ir,  poner, 
salir,  tener,  venir. 

3*    The  second  person  plural  is  made  from  the  infinitive  by 
changing  the  final  r  to  d.     There  are  no  exceptions  to  this  rule. 

4.  The  subject  pronoun  may  be  expressed  or  omitted  with 
the  true  imperative  forms.     Usted  or  ustedes  are,  however,  gen- 
erally expressed.     When  used,  the  subject  pronouns  generally 
follow  the  verb. 

NOTE.  —  If  two  or  more  imperatives  occur  in  the  same  sentence,  it  is 
sufficient  that  the  pronoun  should  accompany  the  first  imperative  : 

Vaya  V.  a  mi  cuarto,  y  traigame  mi        Go  to  my  room  and  bring  me  my 
libro,  book. 

5.  The  negative  imperative  of  the  second  person  is  expressed 
by  means  of  the  subjunctive  : 

No  hables,  do  not  speak.  No  lo  hagais,  do  not  do  it. 

No  vengas,  do  not  come. 

6.  The  second  person  singular  is  generally  used  in  proverbs, 
maxims,  etc.  : 

Ama  a  tu  projimo  como  a  ti  mismo,         Love  thy  neighbor  as  thyself. 

7.  For  rules  referring  to  the  place  of  the  pronouns  accom- 
panying the  imperative  see  L.  22,  30,  31.     The  student  will 
have  to  bear  in  mind,  however,  that  the  pronouns  listed  and 
ustedes  are  always  placed  last  in  the  imperative. 


234 


LESSON  43. 


Leccion  XLIII. 


Lesson  XLIII. 


IMPEKFECT   AND    PLUPERFECT    SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Regular  Verbs. 

1st  Conjugation. 
Que  yo  habl-ara  or  habl-ase,  that  /  might  or  should  speak. 


that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  speak, 
that  he  might  or  should  speak. 


Que  tu  habl-aras  or  habl-ases, 

Que  el  habl-ara  or  habl-ase, 

Que  nosotros  habl-dramos  or  habl-     that  we  might  or  should  speak. 

asemos, 
Que  vosotros   habl-arais    or    habl-    that  you  might  or  should  speak. 

aseis, 
Que  ellos  habl-aran  or  habl-asen,         that  they  might  or  should  speak. 

2d  Conjugation. 
Vender,  to  sell. 


Que  yo  vend-iera  or  vend-iese, 
Que  tu  vend-ieras  or  vend-ieses, 
Que  el  vend-iera  or  vend-iese, 
Que  nosotros  vend-ieramos  or  vend- 

iesemos, 
Que  vosotros  vend-ierais  or  vend- 

ieseis, 
Que  ellos  vend-ieran  or  vend-iesen, 


that  /  might  or  should  sell, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  sell, 
that  he  might  or  should  sell, 
that  we  might  or  should  sell. 

that  you  might  or  should  sell, 
that  they  might  or  should  sell. 


3d  Conjugation. 
Eecibir,  to  receive. 


Que  yo  recib-iera  or  recib-iese, 
Que  tu  recib-ieras  or  recib-ieses, 
Que  el  recib-iera  or  recib-iese, 
Que  nosotros  recib-ie*ramos  or  recib- 

igsemos, 
Que   vosotros  recib-ierais  or  recib- 

ieseis, 
Que  ellos  recib-ieran  or  recib-iesen, 


that  /  might  or  should  receive, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  receive. 
that  he  might  or  should  receive, 
that  we  might  or  should  receive. 

that  you  might  or  should  receive, 
that  they  might  or  jhould  receive. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


235 


Que  yo  tuviera  or  tuviese, 

Que  tii  tuvieras  or  tuvieses, 

Que  el  tuviera  or  tuviese, 

QUB   nosotros    tuvieramos   or   tuvie- 

semos, 

Que  vosotros  tuvierais  or  tuvieseis, 
Que  ellos  tuvieran  or  tuviesen, 


Irregular  Verbs. 

Tener,  2.  to  have. 

that  I  might  or  should  have, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  have, 
that  he  might  or  should  have, 
that  we  might  or  should  have. 


that  you  might  or  should  have, 
that  they  might  or  should  have. 


Haber,  2.  (auxiliary)  to  have. 


Que  yo  hubiera  or  hubiese, 

Que  tii  hubieras  or  hubieses, 

Que  el  hubiera  or  hubiese, 

Que  nosotros  hubieramos   or  hubie- 

semos, 

Que  vosotros  hubierais  or  hubieseis, 
Que  ellos  hubieran  or  hubiese n, 

Estar,  1. 

Que  yo  estuviera  or  estuviese, 
Que  tii  estuvieras  or  estuvieses, 
Que  el  estuviera  or  estuviese, 
Que   nosotros  estuvieramos  or  estu- 

viesemos, 

Que  vosotros  estuvierais  or  estuvieseis, 
Que  ellos  estuvieran  or  estuviesen, 


that  I  might  or  should  have, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  have, 
that  he  might  or  should  have, 
that  we  might  or  should  have. 

that  you  might  or  should  have, 
that  they  might  or  should  have. 

to  be. 

that  I  might  or  should  be. 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  be. 
that  he  might  or  should  be. 
that  we  might  or  should  be. 

that  you  might  or  should  be. 
that  they  might  or  should  be. 


Que  yo  fuera  or  fuese, 

Que  tii  fueras  or  fueses, 

Que  el  fuera  or  fuese, 

Que  nosotros  fueramos  or  fuesemos, 

Que  vosotros  fuerais  or  fueseis, 

Que  ellos  fueran  or  fuesen, 


Ser,  2.  to  be. 

that  I  might  or  should  be. 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  be 
that  he  might  or  should  be. 
that  we  might  or  should  be. 
that  you  might  or  should  be. 
that  they  might  or  should  be. 


Bar,  1.  to  give. 


Que  yo  diera  or  diese, 
etc. 


that  I  might  or  should  give, 
etc. 


236  LESSON  43. 

Andar,  1.  to  walk. 

Que  yo  anduviera  or  anduviese,  that  I  might  or  should  walk. 

etc.  etc. 

Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 

Que  yo  hiciera  or  hiciese,  that  I  might  or  should  do. 

etc.  etc. 

Caer,  2.  to  fall. 

Que  yo  cayera  or  cayese,  that  I  might,  or  should  fall. 

etc.  etc. 

Poder,  2.  to  be  able. 

Que  yo  pudiera  or  pudiese,  that  I  might  or  should  be  able. 

etc.  etc. 

Poner,  2.  to  put. 

Que  yo  pusiera  or  pusiese,  that  I  might  or  should  put. 

etc.  e£c. 

Querer,  2.  to  be  willing. 

Que  yo  quisiera  or»quisiese,  that  1  might  or  should  be  willing 

etc.  e£c. 


Saber,  2. 

Que  yo  supiera  or  supiese,  that  I  might  or  should  know. 

etc.  etc. 

Traer,  2.  to  bring. 

Que  yo  trajera  or  trajese,  that  I  might  or  should  bring. 

etc.  etc. 

Conducir,  3.  to  conduct,  to  take. 

Que  yo  condujera  or  condujese,  that  I  might  or  should  conduct. 

etc.  eZc. 

Pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 

Que  yo  pidiera  or  pidiese,  £/iat  I  might  or  should  ask  for. 

etc.  e*c. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE.          237 
Venir,  3.  to  come. 


Que  yo  viniera  or  viniese, 
etc. 


that  I  might  or  should  come, 
etc. 


Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 


Que  yo  dijera  or  dijese, 
,  etc. 


that  I  might  or  should  say. 
etc. 


Que  yo  fuera  or  fuese, 
etc. 


Ir,  3.  to  go. 


that  1  might  or  should  go. 
etc. 


Vocabulario. 

El  articulo,  the  article. 
El  asunto,  the  business. 
El  espejo,  the  mirror. 
El  gasto,  the  expense. 
El  idioma,  the  language. 
El  lugar,  the  spot. 
El  medio,  the  means,  the  way. 
Aprobar,  1.  to  approve. 
Arreglar,  1.  to  arrange. 
Convidar,  1.  to  invite. 
Dedicar,  1.  to  devote. 
Devolver,  2.  to  give  back. 
Dudar,  1.  to  doubt. 


Vocabulary. 

Encontrar,  1.  to  meet. 
Enganar,  1.  to  deceive. 
Fabricar,  1.  to  manufacture. 
Llorar,  1.  to  weep,  to  cry. 
Permitir,  3.  to  allow. 
Recomendar,  1.  to  recommend. 
Suplicar,  1.  to  entreat. 
Suponer,  2,  to  suppose. 
A  crddito,  on  credit. 
En  seguida,  immediately. 
En  tiempo  pasado,  formerly. 
Por  precision,  by  necessity. 
Teorico,  theoretical. 


Exercise  85.      « 

1.  Mi  maestro  queria  que  yo  aprendiese  una  leccion  mas  larga. 
2.  i  Que  queria  V.  que  el  hiciera  sin  diriero  ?  3.  Que  comprase  las 
mercancias  a  credito.  4.  Estos  dos  caballeros  querian  que  yo  les 
vendiese  mi  caballo.  5.  Yo  no  creia  que  fuese  tan  tarde.  6.  £  Temia 
V.  que  el  saliese  sin  nosotros  ?  7.  Lo  linico  que  yo  temia  era  que  el 
no  nos  esperase.  8.  Era  el  unico  almacen  donde  pudieramos  hallar 
este  articulo.  9.  6l  queria  que  yo  le  dijera  lo  que  yo  debia,  antes 
que  me  diera  el  dinero.  10.  i  Dudaba  V.  que  el  viniera  como  lo 


238  LESSON  43. 

habia  prometido  ?  11.  i  Aprobaba  Y.  que  e*l  me  hablase  asi  ? 
12.  Era  menester  que  gastasemos  muchisimo  dinero  para  arreglar 
nuestra  casa.  13.  Yo  no  creia  que  Y.  enganase  a  sus  amigos. 
14.  Era  el  unico  medio  que  nos  quedase,  pues  nuestros  asuntos  no 
permitian  que  hicieramos  nuevos  gastos.  15.  Cuando  sail  para 
Francia,  mi  padre  me  recomendo  que  viviese  con  personas  que  no 
hablasen  otro  idioma  mas  que  el  frances  y  con  quienes  tuviese  que 
hablarlo  por  precision,  bien  6  mal.  16.  Tambien  que  leyese  algunos 
buenos  autores,  y  hecho  todo  esto  por  algun  tiempo,  me  dedicase 
entonces  al  estudio  teorico.  17.  |  Quien  hubiera  pensado  que  nos 
encontrariamos  en  un  lugar  como  este,  despues  de  tanto  tiempo  que 
no  nos  hemos  visto  !  18.  Yo  le  habia  escrito  a  fin  de  que  viniera. 
19.  He  comido  mucho,  y  mas  de  lo  que  hubiera  debido.  20.  Yo  iba 
todas  las  mananas  a  su  casa  para  que  me  diera  una  leccion  de  espanol. 
21.  Cantaban  aunque  tuviesen  gana  de  llorar.  22.  fil  deseaba  que 
yo  fuese  en  seguida  a  su  casa.  23,  Yo  le  habia  suplicado  que  viniese 
temprano,  pero  llego  el  ultimo  de  todos.  24.  Aquel  hombre  pretendia 
que  le  pagasen  mucho  mas  de  lo  que  habia  ganado.  25.  1^1  estaba 
muy  sorprendido  de  que  no  supiesemos  nada  de  esto. 


Exercise  86. 

1.  What  did  you  wish  me  to  do  ?  2.  I  wished  that  you  should 
write  to  your  friend,  and  that  you  should  tell  him  to  return.  3.  I 
was  surprised  that  he  had  not  sent  me  the  money.  4.  It  was  to  be 
desired  that  they  should  finish  in  time.  5.  When  did  he  wish  us  to 
return  the  money  ?  6.  He  wished  that  you  should  return  it  as  soon 
as  possible.  7.  I  did  not  think  that  he  was  so  ill.  8.  Our  teacher 
wished  that  we  would  come  earlier  to  school.  9.  We  were  afraid 
that  it  would  rain  the  whole  day.  10.  He  was  looking  for  a  man 
who  would  lend  him  money.  11.  I  went  to  his  house,  although  I 
was  very  tired.  12.  Our  father  did  not  wish  that  we  should  go  out 
so  late.  13.  He  was  the  best  friend  I  had  in  the  city.  14.  It  was 
the  best  wine  that  I  had  ever  drunk.  15.  It  was  very  unfortunate 
that  he  had  lost  all  his  money.  16.  Although  he  was  poor,  he  had 
many  friends.  17.  It  was  very  natural  that  he  should  speak  so. 

18.  He  could  not  spend  so  much  money,  however  rich  he  might  be. 

19.  I  would  not  go  to  his  house  unless  he  invited  me.     20.  He  said 
he  would  come  (vendria)  provided  you  would  send  him  a  carriage. 


IMPERFECT    AND    PLUPERFECT    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


239 


21.  The  Venetians  were  formerly  the  only  people  who  manufactured 
and  sold  mirrors.  22.  I  was  afraid  he  would  come  without  his 
brother.  23.  I  did  not  think  that  you  were  so  foolish.  24.  It  was 
necessary  for  us  to  go  every  evening  to  his  house.  25.  We  did  not 
think  that  it  was  so  late.  26.  Mr.  Martin  did  not  wish  me  to  go  out 
without  him.  27.  He  was  the  only  one  who  spoke  Spanish.  28.  We 
did  not  suppose  he  would  arrive  in  time.  29.  My  mother  wished  us 
to  sing  for  her. 


Gramatica. 


Grammar. 


1,    The  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  has  two  forms: 
The  first  ending  in : 

-ra       -ras       -ra       -ramos       -rais       -ran 
and  the  second  in : 

-se        -see        -se        -semos        -seis        -sen 

While  the  true  endings  are  -ara  and  -ase,  -iera  and  -iese, 
to  facilitate  the  construction  the  forms  may  be  made  from  the 
3d  person  plural  of  the  past  definite  by  changing  the  termina- 
tion ron  into  the  terminations  given  above. 


Tuvie-ron,  they  had  ; 
Hubie-ron,  iheyhad; 
Estuvie-ron,  they  were  ; 
Fue-ron,  they  were; 
Habla-ron,  they  spoke  ; 
Comie-ron,  they  ate  ; 


Examples. 

( tuvie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
1  tuvie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

ihubie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
hubie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

(  estuvie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
(  estuvie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

(  fue-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramcs,  -rais,  -ran. 
1  fue-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

(  habla-ra,  ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
I  habla-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

!comie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
comie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 


240  LESSON   43. 

.„    ., .  (  recibie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 

Recibie-ron,  they  received ;       <       ... 

(  recibie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

(  pudie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
Pudie-ron,  they  were  able  ;       <  r   , . 

(  pudie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

(  supie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos.  -rais,  -ran. 
Supie-ron,  they  knew ;  i  -     . 

I  supie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

c  dije-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
Diie-ron.  they  said;  <  ... 

I  dije-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

(  vinie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
Vmie-ron,  they  came ;  4    .   . 

(  vmie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

etc.  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  graphic  accent  must  be  inserted  in  these  forms  in  accord- 
ance with  the  usage  on  pp.  234-235. 

2,  The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  used  when  the  verb  of  the 
1st  proposition  which  requires  a  subjunctive  after  it,  is  in  one 
of  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative : 

Yo  queria  -\  1  wished  -s 

Yo  desee  I  que  el  viniera  /  desired,  \  that  he  would 

Yo  he  solicitado      f     6  viniese.  /  have  entreated   f        come. 

Yo  habia  solicitado-'  /  had  entreated    * 

OBSERVATION.  —  All  the  general  rules  given  on  the  use  of  the  present 
subjunctive  apply  to  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

3*  The  present  subjunctive  may,  however,  be  used  after  the 
past  indefinite,  when  the  time  of  the  action  is  not  definitely 
stated : 

Le  he  suplicado  que  venga  a  mi  /  have  entreated  him  to  come  to  my 

casa.  house. 

4,  The  present  or  tbe  imperfect  subjunctive  may  be  used 
when  the  verb  of  the  1st  proposition  is  in  the  futuro  perfecto  : 

131  habra  pretendido  que  le  dejen  He  will  have  pretended  that  they 

(dejaran  6  dejasen)  libre.  should  let  him  free. 

5.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  used  instead  of  the  present 
when  followed  by  a  conditional  clause : 

i  Cree  V.  que  me  lo  diesen,  si  les          Do  you  think  they  would  give  it  to 
^idiera?  me,  if  I  should  ask  them. 


CONDITIONAL    MOOD. 


241 


6.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  imperfect 
subjunctive  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  to  have;  and  the  past  parti- 
ciple of  the  verb : 


Que  yo  hubiera  or  hubiese  hablado  ; 
Que  el  hubiera  or  hubiese  salido  ; 


that  I  might  have  spoken, 
that  I  might  have  gone  out 


Leccidn  XLIV. 


Lesson  XIIV. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 


Yo  hablar-fa, 
Tu  hablar-ias, 
El  hablar-fa, 
Nosotros  hablar-iamos, 
Vosotros  bablar-iais, 
Ellos  hablar-ian, 


/  should  or  would  speak. 
Thou  shouldst  or  wouldst  speak. 
He  should  or  would  speak. 
We  should  or  would  speak. 
You  should  or  would  speak. 
They  should  or  would  speak. 


Yo  comer-ia, 
Tu  comer-ias, 
El  comer-ia, 
Nosotros  comer-iamos, 
Vosotros  comer-iais, 
Ellos  comer-fan, 


/  should  or  would  eat. 
Thou  shouldst  or  wouldst  eat. 
He  should  or  would  eat. 
We  should  or  would  eat. 
You  should  or  would  eat. 
They  should  or  would  eat. 


Yo  recibir-fa, 
Tu  recibir-ias, 
El  recibir-fa, 
Nosotros  recibir-famos, 
Vosotros  recibir-fais, 
Ellos  recibir-fan, 

Yo  daria, 
etc. 


I  should  or  would  receive. 
Thou  shouldst  or  wouldst  receive. 
He  should  or  would  receive. 
We  should  or  would  receive. 
You  should  or  would  receive. 
They  should  or  would  receive. 

I  should  or  would  give, 
etc. 


Yo  tendria, 
etc. 


I  should  or  would  have, 
etc. 


242 


LESSON  44. 


Yo  habria, 
etc. 

Yo  estaria, 
etc. 

Yo  seria, 
etc. 

Yo  haria, 
etc. 

Yo  sabria, 
etc. 

Yo  pondria, 
etc. 

Yo  podria, 
etc. 

Yo  querria, 
etc. 

Yo  valdria, 
etc. 

Yo  diria, 
etc. 

Yo  saldria, 
etc. 

Yo  vendria, 
etc. 


/  should  or  would  have, 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  be. 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  be. 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  make  (or  do) 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  know, 
etc. 

1  should  or  would  put. 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  be  able, 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  be  willing, 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  be  worth, 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  say. 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  go  out. 
etc. 

I  should  or  would  come, 
etc. 


Ejemplos.  Examples. 

• 
i  Quien  diria  que  este  hombre  es  tan        Who  would  say  that  that  man  is 

rico  ?  so  rich  ? 

j  Que  haria  V.  si  V.  fuese  rico  ?  What  would  you  do  if  you  were 

rich  ? 

Yo  compraria  una  casa  grande.  I  would  buy  a  large  house. 

Si  yo  supiera  hacerlo,  lo  haria.  If  I  knew  how  to  do  it,  I  would 

do  it. 
Yo  escribiria  en  ingles  si  pudiera.  I  would  write  in  English  if  1  could 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 


243 


Yo  daria  mucho  para  saber  la  ver- 

dad. 

i  Que  le  escribiria  V.  ? 
Yo  le  escribiria  todo  lo  que  he  oido. 
jCuanto  dinero  necesitaria  V.  ? 
Yo  necesitaria  a  lo  menos  cien  duros. 

i  Estaria  V.  aqui  si  V.  pudiera  salir  ? 

Yo  saldria  en  seguida. 

V.  deberia  venir  conmigo. 

Yo  quisiera  saber  donde   esta    mi 

hermano. 
Deberiamos  haber  salido  mas  tem- 

prano. 

Vocabulario. 

El  concepto,  the  opinion. 

El  motive,  the  motive. 

El  precio,  the  price. 

El  socorro,  the  assistance. 

El  viento,  the  wind. 

La  clase,  the  class. 

La  cosa,  the  matter  of  importance. 

La  deuda,  the  debt. 

La  fresa,  the  strawberry. 

La  mentira,  the  falsehood. 

La  recompensa,  the  recompense. 

Las  seftas,  the  direction. 

Cansado,  tired. 

Hast  a,  until,  as  far  as. 

Haragan,  lazy. 


I  would  give  much  to  know  the 

truth. 

What  would  you  write  to  him  ? 
I  would  write  all  I  have  heard. 
How  much  money  would  you  need  ? 
I  would  need  at  least  one  hundred 

dollars. 
Would  you  be  here  if  you  could 

go  out  ? 

I  would  go  out  immediately. 
You  ought  to  come  with  me. 
I  should  like  to  know  where  my 

brother  is. 
We  ought  to  have  gone  out  sooner. 

Vocabulary, 
i  Ojald !  would  to  God! 
For  cierto,  certainly. 
Adelantar,  1.  to  be  fast. 
Cambiar  1,  to  exchange. 
Descubrir,  3.  to  discover. 
Dirigir,  3.  to  direct. 
Examinar,  1.  to  examine. 
For  mar,  1.  to  form. 
Jugar,  1.  to  play. 
Marchar,  1.  to  go. 
Molestar,  1.  to  trouble. 
Qbligar,  1.  to  oblige. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Pegar,  1.  to  strike. 
Bepetir,  3.  to  repeat. 


Exercise  87. 

1.  Yo  aprenderia  el  frances  si  tuviera  tiempo  de  estudiar.  2.  Col6n 
t  prometi6  una  recompensa  al  primero  que  descubriera  la  tierra.  3.  Si 
V.  fuera  al  campo  este  aiio,  yo  iria  tambien.  4.  Los  muchachos  ha- 
brian  comido  todas  las  fresas  del  jardin  si  no  hubieran  temido  ser  casti- 
gados.  5.  Y.  podria  saber  la  verdad  si  V.  qnisiera.  6.  Yo  le  habria 
mandado  su  carta  si  hubiera  sabido  donde  V.  vivia.  7.  j,  Quema  V. 
nacerme  un  favor  I  8.  Con  mucho  gusto;  [  que  desea  V.?  9.  Quisiera 


244  LESSON  44. 

que  V.  me  llevase  esta  carta  al  correo.  10.  Nada  mas  facil,  deme  V, 
la  carta.  11.  £  Podria  V.  hacer  eso  sin  mi  ?  12.  Podria  hacerlo  si  no 
estuviese  tan  cansado.  13.  Lloveria  si  no  hiciera  tanto  viento. 
14.  Seria  bueno  que  V.  fuese  a  verle.  15.  Si  hubieramos  recibido  el 
dinero  que  esperabamos,  habriamos  salido  con  el  vapor  frarices.  16.  Si 
V.  supiera  lo  que  el  ha  dicho  de  su  amigo,  V.  no  estaria  satisfecho. 
17.  i  Cree  V.  que  si  el  no  viniese,  iria  yo  a  verle  ?  18.  \  Ojala  no 
hubiera  yo  perdido  mi  dinero  !  19.  Si  lloviese  esta  tarde,  y  no  pu- 
dieramos  ir  al  campo,  iriamos  al  teatro  esta  noche.  20.  Este  hombre 
tendria  mas  dinero,  si  lo  hubiese  querido.  21.  Aunque  fuesemos 
ricos,  no  pagariamos  el  precio  que  nos  pide.  22.  Beberiamos  si 
tuviesemos  mejor  agua.  23.  El  S.  D.  Pedro  Molina  me  dijo  que 
dejaria  a  V.  sus  senas  para  dirigirle  sus  cartas  en  Paris,  y  con  este 
motivo  me  he  tornado  la  libertad  de  molestar  a  V.  24.  Yo  no  cam- 
biaria  mi  caballo  por  el  suyo.  25.  Quisiera  que  V.  examinase  mi  reloj, 
pues  no  marcha  bien.  26.  j,  Marchaba  bien,  antes  ?  27.  Adelantaba 
un  poco,  pero  no  era  cosa ;  cinco  minutos  cada  veinticuatro  boras. 
28.  [  Porque  no  me  escribio  V.  cuando  estaba  eu  Pans  ?  29.  Yo  le 
habria  escrito,  si  no  hubiese  pensado  que  V.  habia  salido  de  la 
ciudad.  30.  Si  tnvieramos  tiempo,  iriamos  con  V.  hasta  la  ciudad. 

Exercise  88. 

1.  What  would  you  do,  if  you  were  invited  to  that  ball  ?  2.  I 
should  certainly  not  go.  3.  I  should  tell  a  falsehood  if  I  said  that. 
4.  Would  you  like  to  go  with  me  ?  5.  I  would  go,  if  I  had  time. 
6.  That  poor  man  would  have  died  without  assistance,  if  I  had  not 
come  in  time.  7.  Would  you  have  received  my  letter  in  time,  if  I 
had  written  to  you  ?  8.  No,  your  letter  would  have  arrived  too  late. 
9.  What  would  you  have  done,  if  he  had  struck  you  1  10.  He  never 
would  have  struck  me;  he  is  afraid  of  me.  11.  Would  you  repeat 
what  he  said  ?  12.  I  would  repeat  it,  if  you  wished.  13.  We  would 
buy  that  house,  if  it  were  not  too  small  for  us.  14.  Would  you  buy 
mine  1  15.  I  would  buy  it,  if  you  sold  it.  16.  You  would  be  now  in 
the  first  class,  if  you  had  not  been  so  lazy.  17.  I  should  like  to  see 
your  brother;  where  is  he  now  1  18.  He  must  be  in  his  room,  if  he 
has  not  gone  out.  19.  You  ought  to  have  spoken  to  that  man  when 
he  was  here.  20.  Were  you  not  afraid  that  he  would  go  out  without 
you  ?  21.  Yes,  I  was  afraid  he  would  forget  me.  22.  I  should  wish 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 


245 


them  to  be  here  to-inorrow  morning  early.  23.  It  would  be  necessary 
for  him  to  give  me  at  least  two  hundred  dollars.  24.  I  wish  that  I 
had  never  known  him.  25.  Had  I  seen  the  new  comedy,  I  would 
have  told  you  how  it  was.  26.  If  you  always  worked  as  much  as 
to-day,  you  would  soon  be  rich.  27.  What  opinion  would  you  have 
formed  of  me,  if  I  had  done  what  they  wished  me  to  do  ?  28.  That 
young  man  would  not  pay  his  debts,  if  he  were  not  obliged.  29.  If 
I  had  thought  that  you  were  sick,  I  would  not  have  gone  out.  30.  I 
would  not  speak  to  that  man,  although  he  were  rich. 


Gramatica. 


Grammar. 


!•  The  conditional  tense  is  regularly  formed  by  adding  the 
endings : 

-fa,        -fas,        -fa,        -famos,        -fail,        -fan, 

to  the  whole  infinitive,  taken  as  stem : 

Hablaria,  1  should  or  would  speak. 

Comeria,  /  should  or  would  eat. 

Recibiria,  /  should  or  would  receive. 
etc.  etc. 

This  conditional  has  therefore  all  the  irregularities  of  the 
future. 

2*  The  conditional  is  used  after  a  past  tense  to  express  an 
idea  which  would  be  in  the  future,  if  the  principal  verb  were 
present : 

Dijo  que  lo  compraria,         he  said  he  would  buy  it. 

(Dice  que  lo  comprara,         he  says  he  will  buy  it.) 

Pensaba  que  vendria,  /  used  to  think  that  he  would  come. 

(Pienso  que  vendra,  /  think  he  will  come. ) 

3.  It  is  used  to  express  a  conclusion  after  a  condition  with 
implied  negation : 

Si  tuviese  (tuviera)  dinero,  compraria      If  he  had  money,  he  would  buy  the 

la  casa,  house. 

Me  iria,  si  viniera,  If  he  should  come,  I  should  go  away. 

NOTE.  —  The  condition  may  be  replaced  by  some  equivalent  expression, 
or  omitted  altogether. 


246  LESSON   44. 

Haciendo  eso,  V.  tendria  razon,  In,  doing  that,  you  would  be  right 

i.  e.,  if  you  did  that,  etc. 

No  lo  diria,  /  would  rit  say  that  (if  I  thought  as 

you  do}. 

4.  The  first  form  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (-ra)  may  be 
used  iu  conditional  sentences  instead  of  the  conditional.     Thus 
we  may  say  : 

Si  tuviese  dinero,  compraria  la  casaA 

Si  tuviera  dinero,  compraria  la  easa,  f 

«.  .      .        ,.  ,  >  If  I  had  money,  I  would  buy  the  house. 

Si  tuviese  dinero,  comprara  la  casa,  I 

Si  tuviera  dinero,  comprara  la  casa,  ) 

NOTE.  —  The  second  form  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (-se)  can  only 
be  used  in  the  condition. 

5.  The  conditional  may  be  used  to  express  past  probability : 

Tendria  V.  frio,         you  must  have  been  cold. 

6.  The  past  conditional  is   formed   from  the   conditional  of 
haber,  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb. 

1§1  habria  hablado,         he  would  have  spoken. 

7.    Potential  Mood. 

1 .  May  and  can  may  be  translated  either  by  the  present  in- 
dicative or  by  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  verb  poder,  2.  to  be 
able;  and  also  by  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  verb  used  in  the 
sentence : 

Puedo  venir,  /  can  come. 

Se  puede  que  venga,  /  may  come. 

Deme  V.  el   dinero  para  que  pueda  Give  me  the  money,  that  I  may 

pagar  lo  que  debo  or  Deme  V.  el  pay  what  I  owe. 

dinero  para  que  pague  lo  que  debo, 

2.  Could,  might,  should,  would. 

Could  is  rendered  by  the  conditional  of  the  verb  poder,  when 
a  condition  is  implied,  and  by  the  imperfect  or  preterit  of  the 
same  verb  when  it  implies  power : 

Yo  podria  ir  si  quisiera,         /  could  go  if  I  wished. 

Yo  no  podia  ir  solo,  J 

/  /  could  not  (was  not  able  to)  qo  alone. 

Yo  no  pude  ir  solo,   ) 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD.  247 

3.  Might  is  translated  by  the  conditional  of  the  verb  podei 
when  power  is  implied  : 

1S1  podria  venir  si  quisiera,         He  might  come  if  he  wished. 

When  implying  possibility  it  is  expressed  in  the  same  way  as 
may: 

Se  puede  que  venga,         He  may  or  might  come. 

4.  Should,  implying  duty,  or  meaning  ought  to,  is  rendered 
by  the  conditional  of  the  verb  deber  : 

V.  deberia  venir  conraigo,  You  ought  to  come  with  me. 

Deberiau  obedecer,  They  should  obey. 

5.  Should  like  to  is  rendered  by  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
or  conditional  of  the  verb  querer : 

Quisiera  or  querria  verle,         /  should  like  to  see  him. 

6.  Would,  implying  willingness,  is  rendered  by  the  imper- 
fect indicative  or  preterit  of  the  verb  querer : 

No  queria  (or  no  quiso)  hablar,         He  would  not  speak. 

7.  Might  have  and  should  have  are  in  most  cases  translated 
by   the   conditional   of   the  verbs  poder  and  deber  with  the 
infinitive  of  haber : 

El  podria  haber  venido,  He  might  have  come. 

Ill  deberia  haber  venido,         He  should  have  come. 

The  imperfect  subjunctive  may  be  used  in  exclamations: 

i  Quien  rue  diera  a  coiiocer  !        /  should  like  to  know  I 


248 


LESSON   45. 


Leceion  XLV. 


Lesson  XLV. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT. 


1.  Haber,  2'.  —  2.  Tener,  2.  to  have. 


Hubiere  —  tuviere, 
Hubieres  —  tuvieres, 
Hubiere  —  tuviere, 
Hubieremos  —  tuviereraos, 
Hubiereis  —  tuviereis, 
Hubieren  —  tuvieren, 


/  shall  or  will  have, 
thou  shalt  or  wilt  have, 
he  shall  or  will  have, 
we  shall  or  will  have, 
you  shall  or  will  have, 
they  shall  or  will  have. 


3.  Estar,  1.  —  4   Ser,  2.  to  be. 

Estuviere  —  fuere, 
Estuvieres  —  fueres, 
Estuviere  —  fuere, 
Estuvieremos  —  fuerernos, 
Estuviereis  —  fuereis, 
Estuvieren  —  fueren, 


/  shall  or  will  be. 
thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 
he  shall  or  will  be. 
we  shall  or  will  be. 
you  shall  or  will  be. 
they  shall  or  will  be. 


5.  Hablar,  1.  to  speak.        6.  Comer,  2.  to  eat.        7.  Recibir,  3.  to  receive. 


Hablare  —  comiere  —  recibiere, 
Hablares  —  comieres — recibieres, 
Hablare  —  comiere  —  recibiere, 
Hablaremos  —  coraieremos  —  re- 

cibieremos, 
Hablareis  —  comiereis  —  recibie- 

reis, 
Hablaren  —  comieren  —  recibie- 

ren, 

Vocabulario. 

El  alojamiento,  the  lodging. 

El  invierno,  the  winter. 

El  lugar,  the  place. 

La  amistad,  the  friendship. 

La  noticia,  the  news. 

Frio,  cold. 

Acabar,  1.  to  finish. 


I  shall  or  will  speak  —  eat  —  receive, 
thou  shalt  or  wilt  speak  —  eat  —  receive, 
he  shall  or  will  speak  —  eat  —  receive, 
we  shall  or  will  speak  —  eat  —  receive. 

you  shall  or  will  speak  —  eat  —  receive. 

they  shall  or   will  speak  —  eat  —  re- 
ceive. 

Vocabulary. 

Aeons e jar,  1.  to  advise. 
Acontecer,  2.  to  happen. 
Encontrar,  1.  to  find,  to  meet. 
Mandar,  1.  to  order. 
Olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 
Padecer,  2.  to  suffer. 
Prescribir,  3.  to  prescribe. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT.    249 

Exercise  89. 

1.  Si  el  proximo  invierno  fuere  tan  frio  como  el  ultimo,  los  pobres 
padeceran  muchisimo.  2.  [  Ira  V.  a  pasar  el  domingo  conmigo  en  el 
campo  1  3.  Si  yo  hubiere  acabado  lo  que  tengo  que  hacer,  ire  con 
mucho  gusto.  4.  Tu  padre  me  ha  dicho  que  si  tu  estudiares  bien,  te 
dar&  un  bonito  reloj.  5.  No  saldre  manana,  si  el  tiempo  fuere  tan 
malo  como  hoy.  6.  Si  viere  Y.  a  su  padre  manana,  no  olvide  lo  que  le 
he  dicho.  7.  Llevaremos  a  su  hermano  con  nosotros,  si  fuere  posible. 

8.  Comprare  la  casa  en  que  vivo,  cuando  tuviere  dinero.     9.  Si  al- 
morzare  temprano  manana,  ire  a  ver  a  mi  amigo.     10.  No  olvidare- 
mos  nada  de  lo  que  la  amistad  prescribiere. 

Exercise  90. 

1.  They  have  promised  to  tell  me  all  that  shall  happen  while  I  shall 
be  (am)  absent.  2.  Tell  your  friend  when  you  (shall)  meet  him,  that 
I  have  good  news  for  him.  3.  If  you  breakfast  to-morrow  at  (en)  the 
same  place,  bring  me  the  umbrella  which  I  forgot  there.  4.  You 
must  do,  my  friend,  all  that  your  father  (shall)  commands  you. 
5.  The  physician  has  advised  my  brother  to  go  to  the  country,  if  the 
weather  is  not  any  better.  6.  If  you  are  unwell  in  the  country,  come 
back  to  the  city.  7.  If  we  should  have  money  next  month,  we  will 
send  you  some.  8.  When  I  find  a  good  teacher,  I  will  learn  Spanish. 

9.  We  will  write  to  you  if  we  should  be  satisfied  with  (de)  our  new 
lodging.     10.  We  will  go  out,  when  we  have  dined. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  future  of  the  subjunctive,  of  which  the  termina- 
tions are 

-re,       -res,        -re,        -remos,        -reis,        -ren, 

expresses  a  positive  future  conditional  action,  and  is  therefore 
used  in  conditional  phrases  with  si,  if,  to  denote  a  future  time. 
It  is  also  used  with  cuando,  when,  and  other  relatives,  when 
future  time  is  expressed. 

The  rules  given  for  the  use  of  the  present  of  the  subjunctive 
are  applicable  to  the  future  of  the  subjunctive  when  the  sense 
is  conditional  or  future.  The  future  of  the  subjunctive  is  not 


250 


LESSON   46. 


of  frequent  use,  and  occurs  in  the  sentence  to  give  more  energy 
and  precision  to  the  idea  expresped. 

The  future  perfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  formed  from  the 
future  of  the  subjunctive  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  to  have;  and 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb. 


Leceion  XLVI. 


Lesson  XLVI. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


1,    Government  of  the  infinitive  without  preposition: 
Some  of  the  principal  verbs  requiring  no  preposition  before  the 
following  infinitive  : 


Aconsejar,  1.  to  advise. 
Acostumbrar,  1.  to  accustom. 
Afirmar,  1.  to  affirm. 
Concebir,  3.  to  conceive. 
Confesar,  1.  to  confess. 
Contar,  1.  to  relate. 
Creer,  2.  to  believe. 
Deber,  2.  to  owe,  must. 
Declarar,  1.  to  declare. 
Dejar,  1.  to  let,  to  leave. 
Desear,  1 .  to  desire. 
Esperar,  I.  to  hope. 
Gustar,  to  please,  to  like. 
Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
Imaginar,  1.  to  imagine. 
Intent ar,  1.  to  intend. 
Mandar,  1.  to  order. 
Manifestar,  1.  to  manifest. 
etc.  etc. 

Ejemplos. 
Deseo  tener  dinero. 
El  afivma  haber  dicho  la  verdad. 
Temo  ver  a  mi  amigo. 
Veo  venir  mucha  gente. 
Ose  decirle  la  verdad. 
Oigo  llamar  a  la  puerta. 


Necesitar,  1 .  to  need. 
Negar,  1.  to  deny. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Parecer,  2.  to  appear. 
Pensar,  1.  to  think,  to  intend. 
Poder,  2.  to  be  able. 
Preferir,    3.  to  prefer. 
Presumir,  3.  to  presume. 
Pretender,  2.  to  pretend. 
Prohibir,  3.  to  forbid. 
Prometer,  2.  to  promise. 
Protestar,  1.  to  protest. 
Querer,  2.  to  be  milling. 
Sentir,  3.  to  feel,  to  regret. 
Soler,  2.  to  be  accustomed. 
Temer,  2.  to  fear. 
Ver,  2.  to  see. 


etc. 


etc. 


Examples. 
I  wish  to  have  money. 
He  affirms  that  he  has  told  the  truth. 
I  fear  to  see  my  friend. 
I  see  many  people  coming. 
I  dared  to  tell  him  the  truth. 
I  hear    (some   one)   knocking  at  the 
door. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 


251 


2*    Government  of  the  infinitive  with  the  preposition  a  : 
Some  of  the  principal  verbs  requiring  the  preposition  &  before  the  follow 
ing  infinitive : 


Animar,  1.  to  encourage. 
Aprender,  2.  to  learn. 
Aspirar,  1.  to  aspire. 
Ayudar,  1.  to  help. 
Comenzar,  1.  to  commence. 
Condenar,  1.  to  condemn. 
Consentir,  3.  to  consent. 
Convidar,  1.  to  invite. 
Echar,  1.  to  begin. 
Empezar,  1.  to  begin. 
Enseilar,  1.  to  teach. 

Ejemplos. 

Autorizo  a  V.  d  hablar. 
121  vino  d  visitarme. 
Sali  d  ver  los  soldados. 
1S1  me  ensena  d  cantar. 
Nos  convido  d  comer  con  el. 


Habituar,  1.  to  accustom. 
Inclinar,  1.  to  incline. 
Invitar,  1.  to  invite. 
Obligar,  1.  to  oblige. 
Pasar,  1.  to  pass. 
Principiar,  1.  to  begin. 
Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Tender,  2.  to  aim. 
Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Volver,  2.  to  return. 

v< 

Examples. 

I  authorize  you  to  speak. 
He  came  to  visit  me. 
I  went  out  to  see  the  soldiers. 
He  teaches  me  to  sing. 
He  invited  us  to  dine  with  hirn. 


3«    Government  of  the  infinitive  with  the  preposition  de  \ 

Some  of  the  verbs  requiring  the  preposition  de   before  the  following 
infinitive  : 


Cesar,  1.  to  cease. 
Dejar,  1.  to  leave. 
Disuadir,  3.  to  dissuade. 
Encargar,  1.  to  commission. 
Excusar,  1  .  to  excuse. 


Eximir,  3.  to  free. 
Jurar,  1.  to  swear. 
Babiar,  1  .  to  rage. 
Tratar,  1.  to  try. 


Ejemplos.  Examples. 

Ceso  de  venir  aqui.  He  ceased  coming  here. 

Me  encargo  de  darle  a  V.  esta  carta.     He  requested  me  to  give  you  this 

letter. 

4,  Government  of  the  infinitive  with  the  preposition  para  : 
Lo  hago  para  complacerle  a  V.         I  do  it  to  please  you. 
Trahajo  para  ganar  dinero.  I  work  to  earn  money. 

5.  Government  of  the  infinitive  with  the  preposition  en: 
Le  ocnpo  en  escrihir  una  carta.         I  employ  him  to  write  a  letter. 
Persiste  en  querer  salir.  He  insists  on  going  out. 


252 


LESSON  46. 


6*    Government  of  the  infinitive  with  the  preposition  con: 

Le  entretengo  con  leerle  algo  in-        I  amuse  him  by  reading  something 
teresante.  interesting  to  him. 

7.    The  infinitive  used  with  the  article: 


Mucho  temo  el  verle  venir. 

El  perfecto  tocar  de  este  musico 

me  encanta. 
No  es  tan  facil  el  escribir  un  buen 

poem  a. 

Al  verle,  me  fui. 
Al  salir,  recibio  una  carta. 
Enferm6  del  mucho  beber. 
Al  ir  a  verle,  le  encontre. 


I  much  fear  to  see  him  come. 

The  perfect  playing  of  this  musician 

delights  me. 
It  is  not  so  easy  to   write  a  good 

poem. 

On  seeing  him  I  went  away. 
On  going  out,  he  received  a  letter. 
He  became  sick  from  much  drinking. 
In  going  to  see  him,  I  met  him. 


Vocabulario. 

El  centavo,  the  cent. 

El  paseo,  the  walk. 

El  viaje,  the  journey. 

La  autorizaci6n,  the  authorization. 

La  dificultad,  the  difficulty. 

La  intenci6n,  the  intention. 

La  pagina,  the  page. 

La  traducci6n,  the  translation. 

Bajo,  low. 

Dispuesto,  disposed. 

Inocente,  innocent. 

Seguro,  sure. 

Tal,  such  as. 

Acostumbrar,  1.  to  accustom. 

Acusar,  1.  to  accuse. 

Autorizar,  1.  to  authorize. 

Ayudar  1.  to  help. 

Complacer,  2.  to  please. 

Consistir,  3.  to  consist. 

Gopiar,  1.  to  copy. 


Vocabulary. 

Bar  (1.)  un  paseo,  to  take  a  walk, 

Deber,  2.  must. 

Descansar,  1.  to  rest. 

Dibujar,  1.  to  draw. 

Encargar,  1.  to  charge. 

Entender,  2.  to  understand. 

Excusar,  1.  to  excuse. 

Esperar,  1.  to  expect. 

Gobernar,  1.  to  manage,  to  govern. 

Gritar,  1.  to  cry. 

Inducir,  3.  to  induce. 

Obligar,  1 .  to  compel. 

Osar,  1.  to  dare. 

Partir,  3.  to  leave. 

Pensar,  1.  to  intend. 

Eesolver,  2.  to  resolve. 

Soler  2.  to  be  in  the  habit. 

Visitar,  1.  to  visit. 

Volver  (2.)  £  hacer,  2.  to  do  again. 


Exercise  91. 

1.  Oreo  haher  visto  a  su  hermano  en  el  concierto,  pero  no  estoy 
seguro  si  era  el.  2.  j  Me  promete  V.  venir  manana  ?  3.  Yo  se  lo  pro- 
meto  d  V.  4.  Acostumbro  comer  y  dormir  poco.  5.  V.  no  me  deja 


INFINITIVE   MOOD.  253 

trabajar  con  su  mucho  hablar.  6.  No  podremos  salir  hoy,  porque 
tenemos  nmchisimo  que  hacer.  7.  Su  amigo  de  V.  debe  saber  a  que 
bora  llega  el  correo.  8.  i  Quien  le  ba  autorizado  a  V.  a  hacer  eso  ? 
9.  Nadie  me  ha  autorizado,  pero  yo  creia  poder  hacerlo  sin  autoriza- 
cion.  10.  No  estoy  acostumbrado  comer  tanto.  11.  Mi  amigo  vino 
a"  visitarrne  ayer,  pero  no  estdbamos  en  casa.  12.  El  comenzo  hablando 
bajo  y  acabo  gritando.  13.  Mi  padre  me  ha  encargado  de  decirle  a  V. 
que  sentia  mucho  no  poder  mandarle  el  dinero  hoy.  14.  Nunca  le 
excusare  de  haber  hablado  asi.  15.  Vengo  a  ver  si  ha  llegado  de  la 
Habana  el  senor  Alvarez.  16.  No  puedo  decirselo,  porque  no  lo  Be. 
17.  [  Porque  trabaja  V.  tan  tarde  ?  18.  Lo  hago  para  complacerle  a  mi 
padre.  19.  Este  hombre  no  entiende  gobernar  su  casa.  20.  He 
resuelto  no  salir  de  la  ciudad  este  verano.  21.  [A  donde  va  V.  ahora  1 

22.  Voy  a  visitar  a  algunos  amigos  que  ban   llegado  de  Francia. 

23.  La  dificultad  consiste  en  saber  donde  hallar  al  senor  Romero. 

24.  Anduve  todo  el  dia  para  ver  si  encontraba  una  casa  bastante 
grande  para  mi  familia.     25.  Preste  dos  libros  a  su  amigo  de  Y.,  pero 
el  no  ha  vuelto  a  traermelos.     26.  Acabo  de  ver  al  Senor  Juliano 
en  la  calle.     27.  Me  dijo  que  acababa  de  llegar  de  Europa.     28.  Mis 
hijas  aprenden  a  dibujar  con  el  Senor  Rondel.     29.  El  banquero 
nos  convido  a  comer,  pero  no  pudimos  ir.     30.  Aquel  profesor  fue  el 
que  me  enseii6  a  hablar  ingles. 

Exercise  92. 

1.  We  went  out  this  morning  to  see  the  procession,  but  we  did  not 
see  anything ;  for  we  arrived  too  late.  2.  My  brother  begins  to  speak 
Spanish  3.  I  went  to  see  your  brother  last  Sunday,  but  they  told 
me  that  he  was  not  in  (the)  town.  4.  I  am  working  now  to  rest  this 
evening.  5.  I  intend  to  leave  at  the  end  of  this  week.  6.  What  have 
you  resolved  to  do  ?  7.  I  have  resolved  to  sell  my  house,  and  to  buy 
a  larger  one.  8.  When  are  you  going  to  bring  me  my  books  ?  9.  I 
am  going  to  bring  them  to-morrow.  10.  The  physician  has  advised 
me  not  to  go  out  to-day.  11.  He  continued  to  sing  and  I  to  write. 
12.  I  am  in  the  habit  of  writing  every  week  to  my  family.  13.  If 
you  will  help  me  to  finish  my  translation,  I  will  help  you  to  copy 
these  pages.  14.  You  cannot  compel  me  to  do  this.  15.  I  am  dis- 
posed to  pay  what  is  right,  but  not  one  cent  more.  16.  Nothing  will 
induce  me  to  visit  him.  17.  He  thought  that  he  could  do  it  without 
me,  but  he  very  soon  saw  that  it  was  impossible.  18.  I  dared  to  tell 


254  LESSON   46. 

him  the  truth,  and  he  forgave  me.  19.  We  were  invited  to  go  to  the 
country,  but  we  could  not  leave  our  work.  20.  If  I  do  it,  it  is  only 
to  please  you.  21.  We  wish  to  nave  money  to  go  to  the  theater. 
22.  He  protests  that  he  never  had  such  an  intention.  23.  I  fear  not 
to  have  money  enough  for  my  journey.  24.  Will  you  promise  me 
never  to  do  that  again  1  25.  I  cannot  promise  that.  26.  Will  you 
tell  your  brother  that  we  expect  him  to-morrow  1  27.  We  are  going 
to  take  a  walk  this  evening,  will  you  come  with  us  ?  28.  We  cannot 
go,  we  have  too  much  to  do.  29.  Do  you  know  how  to  speak  French  ] 
30.  No,  sir,  I  only  speak  English.  31.  He  accuses  me  of  having  done 
that,  but  I  assure  you  that  I  am  innocent. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Some  Spanish  verbs  require  no  preposition  before  another 
verb  in  the  infinitive  mood.     Such  are    principally  the  verbs 
which  indicate   desire,  wish,  fear,   doubt,   need,   duty,   and  also 
those   which    express   a  thought   or  speech,    command,    advice, 
prohibition,  and  a  few  others  as  given  above.     Many  of  these 
verbs  may  also  be  used  with  the  present  indicative  and  the  con- 
junction que : 

l5l  cuenta  que  ha  ganado  mucho        He  says  that  he  has  earned  much 
dinero,  money. 

2.  Although  according  to  the  Spanish   Academy  the  verb 
decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell,  must  never  be  followed  by  an  infinitive, 
many  writers  do  not  adhere  to  this  rule  : 

Anadian   el   perjuicio   que   decian  They   added  the  prejudice  which 

recibir.  —  QUINTANA.  they  said  they  were  receiving. 

NOTE.  —  The  verb  decir  requires  the  preposition  &  before  a  person. 
Dije  a  mi  hermano  que  viniese,         /  told  my  brother  to  come. 

3*    Other  verbs  require  in  Spanish  the  preposition  a  before 
another  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood. 

Such  are   principally  those  which  express  a  destination,  en- 
couragement, habit,  propriety,  etc.,  and  others  given  above. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD.  255 

Verbs  which  indicate  motion,  as  venir,  3.  to  come  /  salir,  3. 
to  go  out ;  belong  to  tfre  same  category. 

4,  The  verb  comenzar,  1.  empezar,  1.  and  acabar,  1.  require 
the  preposition  por  in  the  sense  of  to  begin  with,  and  to  end  by  : 

La  diversion  comenzo  por  cantar,  y         The  amusement  began  with  singing 
acabo  por  llorar,  and  ended  with  crying. 

NOTE.  —  In  cases  like  the  above,  the  gerund  is  more  generally  used  : 

Comenzo  hablando  bajo  y   acabo        He  began  speaking  low  and  ended 
gritando,  by  shouting. 

5,  Those  verbs  which  govern  the  infinitive  with  the  prepo- 
sition de  are  principally  those  which  express  distance,  cessation, 
accusation,  discussion,  and  a  few  others  : 

6,  The  preposition  para  is  used  before  the  infinitive  to  ex- 
press more  forcibly  an  intention,    and    whenever   the   English 
preposition  to  may  be  rendered  by  in  order  to  : 

Trabajo  ahora  para  descansar  luego,         /  am  working  now  to  rest  later. 

7 1    Those  verbs  which  express  occupation  or  insistence  require 
the  preposition  en  before  the  infinitive : 

Me  ocupa  en  leer,  He  occupies  me  in  reading. 

Persiste  en  decirlo,  He  persists  in  saying  so. 

8.  The  preposition  con  governs  in  the  infinitive  those  verbs 
which  indicate  entertainment,  diversion,  amusement,  etc. : 

Le  entretengo  con  contarle  cuentos,         /  amuse  him  by  telling  him  stories. 
NOTE.  —  The  gerund  is  oftener  used,  however,  in  such  cases  : 
Le  divierto  tocando  el  piano,         /  amuse  him  by  playing  on  the  piano. 

9.  Some  verbs  may  take  or  omit  either  of  the  prepositions 
according  to  their  meaning  : 

Este  hombre  no  entiende  hacer  eso,         That  man  does  not  understand  how 

to  do  that. 
No  entiendo  de  meterme  en  negocios        /  dont  mean  to  meddle  with  other 

ajenos,  peoples  business. 

Acerte  a  verle  al  ir  a  su  casa,  /  succeeded  in  seeing  him  on  going 

to  his  house. 


256  LESSON   46. 

He  acertado  en  hablar  con  el,  /  have  done  right  in  speaking  to 

him. 

NOTE.  —  There  are  even  verbs  which  have  different  meanings  with  the 
same  preposition  : 

Dejo  de  escribir  cuando  entre,        He  ceased  writing  when  I  entered. 
No  deje  V.  de  escribirme,  Do  not  neglect  writing  to  me. 

10.  The  following  rules  -for  the  guidance  of  the  student  in 
the  use  of  prepositions  require  special  attention : 

1.  When  the  infinitive  occurs  in  the  sentence  as  subject  or 
object  of  the  determining  verb,  it  is  used  without  a  preposition 
when  the  question  who  ?  or  what  ?  may  be  asked  : 

He  resuelto  salir  hoy,         I  have  resolved  (what  ?)  to  go  out  to-day. 
El  ofrecio  ayudarme,          He  offered  (what  ?)  to  help  me. 

2.  When   the  question  to  what?    or  where  to?    may  be 

asked,  the  preposition  a  must  be  used  : 

Yo  le  animare  a  hacerle,        I  will  encourage  him  (to  what  ?)  to  do  it. 
Voy  a  visitar  mi  tio,  /  am  going  (where  to  ?)  to  visit  my  uncle. 

3.  The  preposition  de  is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions  of 
what?  from  what?  at  what?  from  where? 

Se  espanto  de  verle  tan  palido,  He  was  alarmed  (at  what  ?)  at  seeing 

him  so  pale. 
Su  pobreza  proviene  de  su  gastar,         His  poverty  is  the  result  (of  what  ?)  of 

his  expenses. 

4.  The  preposition  en  is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions  in 
what?  on  what? 

La  dificultad  consiste  en  hallarle,         The  difficulty  consists  (in  what  ?)  in 

finding  him. 
fel  insiste  en  salir,  He  insists  (on  what  ?)  on  going  out. 

5.  The  preposition  con  is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions 
with  what  ?  by  what  ? 

Este  hombre  ha  destruido  su  salud  This  man  has  destroyed  his  health 

con  mucho  beber,  (by  what  ?)  by  much  drinking. 

NOTE.  —  Although  there  are  many  cases  in  which  the  right  use  of  the 
preposition  cannot  be  indicated,  the  rules  given  above  may  be  followed  in 
most  cases. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD.  257 

11.  The  verb  acabar,   1.  to  end,  to  finish,  followed  by  the 
preposition  de  and  an  infinitive,  expresses  an  action  which  has 
just  taken  place  : 

Acabo  de  verle,  /  have  just  seen  him. 

Acababa  de  comer  cuando  yo  entre,         He  had  just  dined  when  I  entered. 

12,  The  verbs  mandar,  1.  to  send,  to  order,  and  hacer,  2.  to 
make,  to  do,  followed  by  an  infinitive,  have  the  meaning  of  the 
English  verbs  to  cause,  to  let,  to  have : 

Hago  hacer  un  sombrero,  /  have  a  hat  made. 

*     Mando  lavar  mi  ropa,  /  have  my  clothes  washed. 

Hace  tenir  el  pano,  He  has  the  cloth  dyed. 

NOTE.  —  In  such  cases  the  Spanish  active  infinitive  is  often  rendered 
in  English  by  the  passive. 

13,  The  infinitive  may  be  used  in  Spanish  as  a  substantive 
and  as  the  subject  or  object  of  the  verb.     It  may,  therefore,  be 
preceded  in  this  case  by  the  article  or  by  any  other  part  of 
speech : 

No  he  olvidado  el  insoportable  /  have  not  forgotten  the  insupport- 
hablar  de  este  hombre,  able  talking  of  that  man. 

Al  avanzar  nuestro  ejercito  se  re-  Our  army  having  advanced,  the 
tiraron  los  enemigos,  enemy  retired. 

No  ganara  V.  nada  con  ese  hablar,  You  will  gain  nothing  by  this  talk. 

14.  There  are  cases  where  the  infinitive  may  be  used  with  or 
without  the  article  : 

Esinjusto  acusar(or  el  acusar)  este  It  is  unjust  to  accuse  this  man  of 
hombre  de  este  crimen,  this  crime. 


258 


LESSON  47. 


Leccion  XLVII. 


Lesson  XLVII. 


Betides,  although. 


THE    INFINITIVE   GOVERNED   BY   PREPOSITIONS. 

A  mas  de, 

Ademas  de, 

Sobre, 

Tras  de, 

A  menos  de,  Unless. 

A  pesar  de,          \ 

Sin  embargo  de,  I 

No  obstante  de,  J 

Despues  de, 

Antes  de, 

Sin, 

En  cuanto  a, 

For, 

En  consecuencia  de, 


Notwithstanding,  however. 

After. 

Before. 

Without. 

As  for. 

On  account  of,  for,  instead  of. 

In  consequence  of. 


Ejemplos. 
mas  de     )  haberle    visto,    le    he 


e     ) 
de  ) 


Ademas   de  )  hablado, 
A  pesar  de          \  haberle  yo  pagado 
•  Sin  embargo  de  ?  no  estuvo  satisfe- 
No  obstante  de  '  cho, 
Antes  de  salir,  comio, 
Despue"s  de  haber  comido,  salio, 
Sail  sin  nadie  verme. 

No  file*  admitido  por  ser  estrangero, 
Tras  de  no  pagarme,  me  insulta, 

Sobre  ser  Ingles,  quiere  pasar  por 

Americano. 
En  cuanto  a  dar  dinero,  no  lo  hare. 

No  se  c6mo  acabar  eso. 


Examples. 

Besides  seeing  him,    I   spoke  to 

him. 
Notwithstanding  that  I  paid  him, 

he  was  not  pleased. 

He  dined  before  going  out. 

He  went  out  after  having  dined. 

I  went  out  without  anybody  see- 
ing me. 

He  was  not  admitted  (on  account 
of  his)  being  a  stranger. 

Besides  not  paying  me,  he  in- 
sults me. 

Although  he  is  an  Englishman,  he 
wishes  to  pass  for  an  American. 

As  for  giving  money,  I  shall  not 
do  it. 

I  don't  know  how  to  finish  that. 


THE  INFINITIVE   GOVERNED  BY  PREPOSITIONS. 


259 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  gasto,  the  expense. 
£1  obrero,  the  workman. 
El  vestido,  the  dress. 
La  colocacion,  the  situation. 
La  divinidad,  the  divinity. 
La  pregunta,  the  question. 
Generoso,  generous. 
Tal,  such  as. 


Atacar,  1.  to  attack . 
Castigar,  1.  to  punish. 
Consult ar,  1.  to  consult. 
Contestar,  1.  to  answer. 
Continuar,  1.  to  continue. 
Descansar,  1.  to  rest. 
Entrar,  1.  to  enter. 
Examinar,  1.  to  examine. 


Invooar,  1.  to  invoke. 
Obedecer,  2.  to  obey. 
Obtener,  2.  to  obtain. 
Of ender,  3.  t-o  offend. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Seguir,  3.  to  follow. 
Tr  aba  jar,  1.  to  work. 
Volver,  2,  to  return 


Exercise  93. 

1.  Despues  de  haber  yo  leido  el  libro,  se  lo  preste  £  mi  amigo, 
2.  A  pesar  de  no  bien  trabajar,  quiere  que  le  paguen  bien.  3.  Ademds 
de  ser  haragan,  gasta  mucho.  4.  Sin  embargo  de  ser  muy  pobre,  quiere 
pasar  por  rico.  5.  Antes  de  consentir  yo  a  lo  que  el  quiere,  debo 
examinar  si  el  tiene  razdn.  6.  Perdono  a  sus  enemigos,  antes  de 
morir.  7.  En  consecuencia  de  haberle  yo  dicho  que  viniera,  vino. 

8.  En  cuanto  a  tener  yo  que   haoer  todos  los  gastos,  lo  veremos. 

9.  i  Que  contestar  a  tal  pregunta  I     10.  i  Como  saber  si  mi  amigo  esta 
en  la  ciudad]     11.  j  A  donde  ir  para  encontrarle  1     12.  Este  hombre 
me  ha  ofendido  demasiado  por  poder  perdonarle  yo.    13.  El  muchacho 
tomo  el  libro  sin  darselo  yo.     14.  Sin  verme  nadie,    entre  en  mi 
cuarto.     15.  No  haga  V.  nada  antes  de  consultarine.     16.  [  Porque 
hizo  V.  eso  ?    17.  Lo  hize  sin  saber  lo  que  estaba  haciendo.    18.  Ade- 
mas  de  ser  el  mi  amigo,  lo  es  tambien  de  V«     19.  Quiero  hacerlo  sin 
decirselo  a  nadie.     20.  Le  di  la  carta  por  creer  que  era  para  61. 


Exercise  94. 

1.  After  having  written  his  letters,  he  went  out.  2.  You  cannot 
obtain  that  situation,  unless  you  speak  Spanish  and  English.  3.  DC 
not  go  out  without  seeing  me.  4.  Michael  (Miguel)  is  punished  foi 
having  spoken.  5.  Do  not  speak  without  knowing.  6.  Besides  being 
very  rich,  he  is  also  very  generous.  7.  Notwithstanding  that  I  told 
him  not  to  do  it,  he  would  not  obey  me.  8.  How  shall  I  do  that  ? 
9.  Where  shall  I  look  for  my  books  ?  10.  He  could  not  follow  us 
(on  account  of  his)  being  too  old.  11.  Before  going  away,  he  said  that 
he  would  not  return.  12.  Although  he  works  badly  (mat),  he  wishes 
to  be  paid  like  a  good  workman.  13.  After  he  had  rested,  he  con- 


260  LESSON  47. 

tinned  his  journey.  14.  Besides  his  not  reading  the  letter,  he  tore  it 
to  pieces  (la  hizo  pedazos).  15.  Besides  receiving  him  in  my  house, 
I  gave  him  money  and  clothes.  16.  They  invoked  their  divinities 
before  attacking  the  enemy.  17.  He  took  the  money  without  my 
giving  it  to  him.  18.  He  is  sick  on  account  of  having  eaten  too 
much.  19.  Besides  not  paying  us,  he  says  that  we  owe  him  money. 
20.  I  wish  you  to  do  it  without  saying  a  word  to  him. 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Some  of  the  prepositions  given  above  which  govern  the 
infinitive  have  different  meanings. 

For,  for  instance,  has  the  meaning  of  on  account  of  or  because 
in  the  following  sentence : 

No  me"  admitido  por  ser  estrangero,         He  was  not  admitted  on  account  of 

his  being  a  stranger, 

while  in  the  next  sentence  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  instead  of: 

Le  df  mi  libro  por  darle  el  suyo,         /  gave  him  my  book  instead  of  giving 

him  his  own. 

2,  The  infinitive  is  often  governed  also  by  the  conjunctions 
como,  how,  and  que,  that,  by  the  adverb  donde,  where,  and  by 
the  interrogative  pronouns : 

No  ee  c6mo  acahar  esto,  I  don't  know  how  to  finish  that. 

Le  traigo  que  comer,  /  bring  you  to  eat. 

j  C6ino  decir  lo  que  siento  !  How  shall  I  say  wtytt  I  feel ! 

i  No  sahe  V.  a  quien  vender  su  Do  you  not  know  to  whom  you  could 
caballo  ?  sell  your  horse  f 

NOTE.  —  The  above  examples  can  only  be  explained  by  an  ellipsis,  by 
which  the  natural  object  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted : 

No  se  como  (puedo)  acabar  esto,  I  don't  know  how  (lean)  finish  that. 

\  C6rao  (podre)  decir  lo  que  siento  !        How  (shall  I  be  able)  to  say  what  I 

feel! 

Le  traigo  (algo  que  V.  pueda)  co-        /  bring  you   (something  that  you 
mer,  can)  eat. 


THE   GERUND   AND   PRESENT   PARTICIPLE. 


261 


3.  The  infinitive  sentences  may  also  be  rendered  in  Spanish 
by  the  present  indicative  or  by  the  subjunctive  mood,  by 
adopting  a  different  construction  : 

Despues  de  haberle  dado  el  dinero  sa-  )  . 

_.,       _         ,  ,    ,    ,      ,    ,      .(After  I  had  given  him  the  money,  he 

ho  or  Despues  que  le  hube  dado  el  ( 

...  \      went  out. 

dinero,  saho, 


Tras  de  que  no  me  paga  no  me  saluda, 

Sail  sin  verme  el  or          ) 
~  ,  ,   .  „  f 

Sail  sin  que  el  me  viera,  ) 


salute  me. 
I  went  out  without  his  seeing  me. 


Leceidn  XLVIII. 


Lesson  XLVIIL 


THE    GERUND    AND    PRESENT    PARTICIPLE, 


1.  Amar,  1.  to  love; 
Causar,  1.  to  cause  ; 
Habit ar,  1.  to  inhabit  ; 
Participar ,  1 .  to  participate  ; 
Tocar,  1.  to  touch; 
Obedecer,  2.  to  obey  ; 
Pertenecer,  2.  to  belong; 
Segnir,  3.  to  follow; 


amando,  aniante,  loving. 
causando,  causante,  causing. 
habitando,  habitante,  inhabiting. 
participando,  participante,  participating. 
tocando,  tocante,  touching. 
obedeciendo,  obediente,  obeying.  ' 
perteneciendo,  perteneciente,   belonging. 
siguiendo,  siguiente,  following. 


Vocabulario. 


El  almirante,  the  admi- 
ral. 

El  capit&n,  the  captain. 

El  colegio,  the  college. 

El  enemigo,  the  enemy. 

El  estudio,  the  study. 

El  habitante,  the  inhab- 
itant. 

El  lado,  the  side. 

El  ojo,  the  eye. 

El  palacio,  the  palace. 

El  precepto,  the  precept. 

El  puente,  the  bridge. 

El  reino,  the  kingdom. 


La  capital,  the  capital. 

La  equivocaci6n,  the  mis- 
take. 

La  escuadra,  the  squad- 
ron. 

La  guerra,  the  war. 

La  bora,  the  time. 

La  imprenta,  the  press. 

La  posada,  the  inn. 

La  posesion,  the  posses- 
sion. 

La  Tartaria,  Tartary. 

La  victoria,  the  victory. 

Dentro  de,  within. 


Vocabulary. 
For,  through. 
Atravesar,  1.  to  cross 

over. 

Construir,  3.  to  construct. 
Desobedecer,  2.  to  disobey. 
Explicar,  1.  to  explain. 
Licenciar,  1.  to  disband. 
Montar,  1 .  to  mount. 
Eeir,  3.  to  laugh. 
Sacar,  1.  to  draw. 
Salir  (2)  de,  to  leave. 
Sublevar,  1 .  to  revolt. 
Suspender,  2.  to  suspend. 


262  LESSON  48. 

Exercise  95. 

1.  Los  muchachos  llegaron  liorando  de  la  escuela,  pues  habian 
sido  castigados.  2.  Hablando  de  otra  cosa,  como  esta  su  padre  de  V.  ? 
3.  Esta  muy  bien  hoy,  gracias.  4.  Pasando  el  otro  dia  por  la  calle 
nueva,  vi  a  su  amigo  de  V.  5.  Saliendo  yo  de  la  iglesia,  entraba  el. 
6.  No  sabiendo  que  hacer,  dormi  todo  el  dia.  7.  Los  estudiantes  de 
nuestro  colegio  acabaran  sus  estudios  dentro  de  pocos  dias.  8.  6l 
entro  riendo,  pero  salio  llorando.  9.  Diciendo  esto,  salio  del  cuarto. 

10.  Estando  el  padre  en  Francia,  murio  el  hijo  en  Nueva  York. 

11.  Habiendo    el    general  ganado    la    victoria,   tomo   la   fortaleza. 

12.  Temiendo  el  emperador  que  volviese  a  empezar  la  guerra,  licencio 
solo  una  parte  de  su  ejercito.     13.  Habiendo  el  rey  mandado  que 
suspendiesen  la  libertad  de  imprenta,  se  sublevo  el  pais.     14.  Habi- 
endo sabido  que  su  hermano  no  habia  venido,  mando  per  el.    15.  Los 
hombres    habiendo   de   temer  a   Dios,   desobedecen   sus   preceptos. 
16.  Los  habitantes  de  esta  ciudad  son  muy  industriosos.    17.  Creyendo 
yo  encontrar  a  mi  amigo,  fui  muy  temprano  a  su  casa.     18.  Los  hijos 
de  este  pobre  hombre  son  muy  obedientes.     19.  Habiendo  el  general 
hecho  construir  un  puente,  pas6  todo  el  ejercito  al  otro  lado  del  rio. 
20.  Cuando  entre,  estaba  el  durmiendo.     21.  j  Que  estaban  haciendo 
los  muchachos  en  el  cuarto  ?     22.  Algunos  estaban  jugando,  y  otros 
estudiando.    23.  Queriendo  sacar  su  reloj,  vi6  que  se  lo  habian  robado. 
24.  Siendo  capitan  el  almirante  Blake,  fue  mandado  con  una  pequefia 
escuadra  contra  las  posesiones  esparto! as.     25.  Yiajando  un  extranjero 
por  la  Tartaria  llego  a  la  capital  del  reino  y  por  equivocacidn  tomo  el 
palacio  del  rey  por  una  posada  piiblica. 

Exercise  96, 

1.  To  whom  were  you  writing  this  morning  ?  2.  I  was  writing  to 
my  brother  in  Paris.  3.  My  father  having  heard  that  you  were  in 
town,  has  sent  me  to  invite  you  to  his  house.  4.  As  we  were  passing 
through  your  street,  we  met  Miss  Mary.  5.  While  we  were  in  Paris, 
we  heard  that  your  father  was  very  sick.  6.  Not  knowing  what  to 
do,  we  wrote  to  our  friends.  7.  When  he  opened  his  eyes  he  saw  his 
brother  near  his  bed.  8.  I  have  been  reading  the  whole  morning. 
9.  I  saw  the  boys  stealing  the  apples  in  the  garden.  10.  If  you  ex- 
plain our  lesson  to  us,  we  shall  understand  it.  11.  To-morrow  at  this 
time,  we  shall  be  travelling.  12.  If  I  have  time,  I  will  do  it. 


THE   GERUND   AND   PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  263 

13.  The  general,  having  defeated  the  enemy,  was  received  by  the 
king.  14.  The  captain  having  mounted  his  horse,  left  the  city. 
15.  When  he  saw  the  soldiers  coining,  he  called  me.  16.  Hannibal 
having  crossed  the  Alps,  defeated  the  Romans.  17.  Having  studied 
the  English  language  for  several  years,  I  speak  it  well  now.  18.  My 
brother  is  a  student  in  that  college.  19.  When  my  father  gave  me  the 
money,  I  paid  all  my  debts.  20.  As  he  was  traveling  through  Eng- 
land, he  met  all  our  friends.  21.  Those  children  are  very  disobedi- 
ent. 22.  He  has  annoyed  us  by  talking  too  much.  23.  As  I  was  not 
able  to  do  it  alone,  I  told  my  brother  to  help  me.  24.  Why  are 
these  little  girls  crying  ?  25.  Because  they  have  lost  their  mother. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  In  Spanish  the  gerund  is  clearly  distinguished  both  in 
form  and  usage  from  the  present   participle.     The   latter  may 
now  be   considered  as  forming  no  part  of  the  verb,  and  the 
forms  which  remain  are  either  adjectives  or  nouns. 

The  present  participle  was  formed  by  the  addition  of  -ante 
or  -ente  to  the  verb  stem  : 

Diferente,  different.  (Diferir,  to  differ.) 

Obediente,  obedient.  (Obedecer,  to  obey.) 

El  amante,  the  lover.  (Amar,  to  love.) 

El  presidente,  the  president.  (Presidir,  to  preside.) 

NOTE.  —  This  form  may  be  found  taking  the  place  of  other  parts  of 
speech,  or  even  of  the  gerund  itself.     Such  are,  however,  rather  rare. 

2.  We  refer  the  student  to  Lesson  19  for  the  formation  of 
the  gerund  and  for  some  of  the  rules  relating  to  this  tense. 

3,  There  are  cases  when  the  gerund  and  the  infinitive  may 
be  used  alike : 

Le  vi  cazando  or  cazar,        I  saw  him  hunting  or  hunt. 

4.  When  a  motion  is  expressed,   either  the  gerund  of  the 
verb  ir,  3.  to  go,  or  that  of  andar,  1 .  to  walk,  may  precede  the 
other  verbs : 

Yendo  or  Andandome  paseando,  le         Going  to  take  a  walk,  I  met  him. 
encontre, 


264  LESSON  48. 

5.  The  gerund  is  also  used  : 

1st.    When  it  indicates  the  s*ate  of  the  subject : 

Habla  durmiendo,         He  speaks  while  he  sleeps. 

2d.    When  the  verb  expresses  the  cause  of  an  action : 

Temiendo  el  que  le  atacasen,  tomo        Fearing  that  they  would  attack  him, 
sus  pistolas,  he  took  his  pistols.      * 

NOTE.  —  In  sentences  like  the  above,  the  gerund  may  be  replaced  by 
the  infinitive  with  por :  Por  temer  el  que  le  atacasen,  etc. 

3d.   When  the  verb  expresses  means  or  instrumentality : 
Estudiando  se  aprende,         One  learns  by  studying. 

NOTE.  —  The  infinitive  preceded  by  con,  with,  may  be  used  in  the  above 
sentence  :  Con  estudiar  se  aprende. 

6.  The  compound  gerund  or  participio  de  preterite  is  of 

the  same  nature  as  the  gerund  and  is  used  in  the  same  way : 

Habiendo  el  hijo  perdido  a  su  padre,         The  son,  having  lost  his  father, 
volvio  a  su  pais,  returned  to  his  country. 

7.  The  gerund  is  often  used  in  Spanish  in  cases  where  the 
English  use  the  Conjunctions  as,  since,  if,  and  the  adverbs 
when,  while,  whilst : 

Siendo  asi,  no  saldre,  Since  it  is  so,  I  shall  not  go  out. 

No  teniendo  dinero,  no  puedo  ir  al  As  I  have  no  money,  I  cannot  go  to 

teatro,  the  theater. 

Viendome    tan    triste,    se    puso    a  When  he  saw  me  so  sad,  he  began 

llorar,                                                .  to  cry. 

Habiendo  el  de  venir  aca,  se  file"  al  While  he  was  to  come  here,  he  went 

teatro,  to  the  theater. 

NOTE.  —  Many  sentences  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  gerund  might, 
however,  be  used  as  in  English  with  the  tenses  of  the  indicative  or  of  the 
subjunctive  with  such  words  as  como,  as  ;  luego  que,  as  soon  as;  cuando, 
asi  que,  when,  etc. 

Viendome  or  Asi  que  me  vio,          When  he  saw  me. 


THE   GERUND  AND   PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  265 

8.  The  gerund  (simple  or  compound)  is  most  elegantly  used 
in  Spanish  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  especially  in  short 
narrations,  the  subject  being  sometimes  separated  from  its  verb : 

Paseando  un    dia    por    la    calle    el  As  President  Jefferson  was  one 

Presidente   Jefferson,   con  un   co-  day  walking  through  the  street 

merciante,   contesto  al  saludo  de  with^  merchant,  he  answered 

un  negro  que  pasaba.  —  i  Porque,  the  salutation  of  a  passing  ne- 

le  pregimto  el  comerciante,  se  presta  gro.  —  Why  does  your  Excel- 

V.    a    saludar    £    un    esolavo  ?  —  lency  deign  to  salute  a  slave  ? 

Sentiria  mucho,  contesto  el  Presi-  asked  the  merchant.  —  /  should 

dente,  que  un  esclavo  me  excediese  be  very  sorry,  answered  the  Presi' 

en  urbanidad.  dent,  that  a  slave  should  surpass 


9.  Verbs  of  the  3d  conjugation  ending  in  -chir,  -llir  and 
-nir  form  their  gerund  in  endo  and  not  in  iendo,  as  the  diph- 
thong ie  very  seldom  stands  after  ch,  11  and  n.  We  must  there- 
fore say  :  cinendo,  from  cenir,  3.  to  gird;  hinchendo,  from 
henchir,  3.  to  Jill;  riendo,  from  reir,  3.  to  laugh. 

The  i  is  also  omitted  for  the  same  reason  in  the  3d  persons  of 
the  preterit  of  the  indicative  and  in  all  the  persons  of  the 
subjunctive  of  the  same  verbs:  rino,  from  reiiir,  3.  to  quarrel; 
engulleres,  from  engullir,  3.  to  ingulf;  etc. 

The  verb  volver,  2.  followed  by  the  preposition  &  before  an 
infinitive,  expresses  the  repetition  of  the  action  indicated  by  the 
infinitive : 

Vuelvo  a  saUr,        /  go  out  again. 


266 


LESSON  49. 


Leccion  XLIX. 


Lesson  XLIX. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


Ejemplos. 

Este  libro  esta  bien  escrito. 

Estos  libros  estan  bien  escritos. 

La  casa  esta  acabada. 

Las  casas  estan  acabados. 

He  recibido  una  carta  de  Paris. 

Henios  visto  el  teatro  nuevo, 

Los  muchachos  han   coniido  las 

manzanas. 
Nuestros  soldados  han  derrotado 

al  enemigo. 
La  leccion  que  V.  nos  ha  dado,  es 

muy  dificil. 
El    enemigo    atacado    por    todas 

partes,  se  retir6. 
Bien  sabido  es,  que  este  hombre 

es  rico. 
Llamado  un  cirujano,  examine  la 

herida. 

Irregular 

Abrir,  3.  to  open ; 
Cubrir,  3.  to  cover  ; 
Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell ; 
Escribir,  3.  to  write  ; 
Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do ; 
Imprimir,  3.  to  print; 
Morir,  3.  to  die; 
Poner.  2.  to  put; 
Besolver,  2.  to  resolve; 
Ver,  2.  to  see  ; 
Volver,  to  return  ; 


Examples. 

This  book  is  well  written. 

These  books  are  well  written. 

The  house  is  finished. 

The  houses  are  finished. 

I  have  received  a  letter  from  Paris. 

We  have  seen  the  new  theater. 

The  boys  have  eaten  the  apples. 

Our  soldiers  have  defeated  the  enemy. 

The  lesson  which  you  have  given  us 

is  very  difficult. 
The  enemy,   being  attacked  on  all 

sides,  retired. 
It  is  well  known  that  this  man  is 

rich. 
A  surgeon  having  been  called,  he 

examined  the  wound. 

Participles. 

abierto,  opened. 
cubierto,  covered. 
dicho,  said,  told. 
escrito,  written. 
hecho,  made,  done. 
impreso,  printed. 
muerto,  died. 
puesto,  put. 
resuelto,  resolved. 
visto,  seen. 
vuelto,  returned. 


Participles  having  often  an  active  meaning. 

Acostumbrado,  accustomed.         Atrevido,  bold. 
Agradecido,  grateful.  Bien  hablado,  well  spoken. 


THE   PAST    PARTICIPLE. 


267 


Callado,  reserved. 
Cansado,  tiresome. 
Comedido,  well  behaved. 
Desesperado,  despairing. 
Disimulado,  dissimulated. 
Entendido,  experienced. 
Esforzado,  bold. 
Leido,  well  read. 
Medido,  prudent. 
Mirado,  considerate. 
Moderado,  moderate. 
Osado,  bold. 
Parado,  slow. 


Parecido,  resembling. 
Partido,  liberal. 
Pausado,  cautious. 
Porfiado,  obstinate. 
Precavido,  cautious. 
Preciado,  vain. 
Presumido,  conceited. 
Recatado,  wise. 
Sabido,  learned. 
Sentido,  sensible. 
Sufrido,  patient. 
Trascendido,  acute. 
Valido,  influential. 


Vocabulario 

El  Congreso,  the  Congress. 

El  cuadro,  the  picture. 

El  desuso,  the  desuetude. 

El  dia  festive,  the  holiday. 

El  grande,  the  grandee. 

El  Moro,  the  Moor. 

El  mundo,  the  world. 

El  refresco,  the  refreshment. 

La  atencion,  the  attention. 

La  cena,  the  supper. 

La  comida,  the  eating,  the  dinner. 

La  discordia,  the  discord. 

La  inocencia,  the  innocence. 

La  ley,  the  law. 

La  memoria,  the  memory. 

La  ociosidad,  the  idleness. 

La  palabra,  the  word. 

La  perdida,  the  loss. 

La  prerogativa,  the  prerogative. 

La  salida,  the  exit. 


Vocabulary. 

Agradable,  agreeable. 
Cierto,  certain. 
Enorme,  enormous. 
Fernando,  Ferdinand. 
Isabel,  Isabella. 
For  desgracia,  unfortunately, 
Porfiado,  obstinate. 
Presumido,  conceited. 
Atrasar,  1.  to  delay. 
Casar,  1.  to  marry. 
Concluir,  3.  to  conclude. 
Convencer,  2.  to  convince. 
Defender,  2.  to  defend. 
Establecer,  2.  to  establish. 
Ofrecer,  2.  to  offer. 
Pintar,  1.  to  depict. 
Reinar,  1.  to  reign. 
Beparar,  1.  to  compensate. 
Sufocar,  1.  to  suffocate. 
Volver,  2.  to  turn. 


Exercise  97. 

1.  Concluida  la  cena,  todo  el  mundo  salid.  2.  Sail  de  la  casa 
resuelto  a  verle.  3.  Derrotados  los  enemigos,  volvieron  a  pasar  el  rio. 
4.  i  Ha  recibido  V.  la  carta  que  yo  le  he  escrito  ?  5.  La  he  recibido 
esta  manana.  6.  Vi  a  su  amigo  de  V.  d  la  salida  del  teatro.  7.  La 


268  LESSON  49. 

coraida  es  muy  buena  en  esta  fonda.  8.  Debemos  considerar  conio 
perdidos  los  dias  que  pasamos  en  la  ociosidad.  9.  La  discordia  ha 
siernpre  reinado  en  el  uni verso.  10.  Las  puertas  estaban  abiertas  y 
entraban  todos  los  que  querian.  11.  j  ife.  oido  V.  cantar  aquella 
seiiora?  12.  La  oi  cantar  el  domingo  pasado  en  nuestra  iglesia. 
13.  [  Ha  visto  V.  los  cuadros  que  mi  hermano  ha  comprado  ?  14.  To- 
davia  no  los  he  visto.  15.  Esta  ley  ha  sido  establecida  por  el  Con- 
greso.  16.  Le  hemos  mandado  a  V.  todos  los  libros  que  V.  nos  ha 
pedido.  17.  Las  cartas  estaban  tan  mal  escritas  que  no  pudimos 
leerlas.  18.  Este  hombre  es  muy  honrado,  siempre  me  ha  devuelto 
el  dinero  que  le  he  prestado.  19.  i  Es  verdad  que  ha  muerto  Pedro  ? 
20.  Por  desgracia  es  cierto.  21.  [  Ha  padecido  mucho  ?  22.  No 
puede  V.  imaginar  lo  que  ha  padecido.  23.  Es  V.,  amigo  Pablo,  el 
hombre  mas  porfiado  del  mundo.  24.  No  podremos  comprar  hoy  lo 
que  necesitamos,  pues  los  dias  festivos  estan  cerrados  los  almacenes. 

25.  Tengo  uua  hermana  casada  en  Madrid,  con  un  medico  espanol ;  y 
coino  la  visite  el  ano  pasado,  he  aprendido  a  hablar  un  poco  espanol. 

26.  Me  habian  pintado  el  viaje  como  bastante  desagradable ;  pero 
fue  al  contrario  muy  agradable,  menos  el  habernos  atrasado  unas  ocho 
horas  en  el  camino.    27.  Don  Juan  ha  dado  el  brazo  a  mi  madre  hasta 
el  coche.     28.  No  se  como  reparar  la  enorme  perdida  que  he  hecho. 
29.  Las  prerogatives  de  los  grandes  de  Espana  ban  sido  muchas,  pero 
todas  han  caido  en  desuso.     30.  Estamos  sofocados  con  el  calor  que 
tenemos  aqui  desde  que  principio  el  verano. 

Exercise  98. 

1.  These  things  have  passed  from  my  memory.  2.  We  have  read 
all  the  books  you  have  lent  us  ;  have  you  received  any  others  ? 
3.  We  can  lend  you  those  we  bought  the  other  day.  4.  Where  have 
you  been  ?  5.  I  have  been  to  the  ball.  6.  Why  have  not  the  chil- 
dren gone  to  school  to-day  ?  7.  Because  one  of  their  teachers  has 
died.  8.  I  don 't  know  where  I  have  put  my  gk|ves  ;  will  you  do  me 
the  favor  to  look  for  them  for  me  ?  9.  I  believe  that  you  have  left 
them  in  your  room.  10.  Do  you  know  what  your  father  has  re- 
solved ?  11.  He  has  not  resolved  anything  yet.  12.  Whom  have 
you  seen  in  that  house  ?  13.  I  have  not  seen  anybody.  14.  You 
must  not  leave  your  windows  open  during  the  night.  15.  John  is 
loved  by  no  one,  because  he  is  too  conceited.  16.  My  friend  will 
come  after  (the)  dinner.  17.  The  war  with  Portugal  being  concluded, 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  269 

Ferdinand  and  Isabella  turned  their  attention  to  the  Moors  of  Gran- 
ada. 18.  I  have  lost  one  of  my  books,  I  don't  know  how.  19.  That 
soldier  has  lost  his  arm  while  defending  his  country.  -30.  Have  you 
heard  what  that  man  has  said  1  21.  I  have  heard  every  word. 
22.  Have  you  offered  anything  to  those  ladies  I  23.  Yes,  sir,  I  have 
offered  them  refreshments.  24.  Have  you  seen  our  new  theater  1 
25.  I  have  not  seen  anything  yet,  I  have  not  been  out  for  (desde)  three 
days.  26.  How  were  your  sisters  dressed  for  the  ball  ?  27.  They 
were  dressed  in  (de)  white.  28.  I  have  been  so  busy  this  morning, 
that  I  have  not  been  able  to  write  to  your  father.  29.  Our  friends 
arrived  this  morning,  but  we  have  not  seen  them  yet.  30.  Being 
convinced  of  his  innocence,  I  defended  him. 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  past  participle  of  the  verbs  of  the  1st  conjugation,  as 
has  been  already  said  (L.  17,  R.  5),  ends  in  ado;  and  those  of 
the  2d  and  3d  conjugations  end  in  ido,  the  irregular  participles 
being  given  above. 

2.  The  past  participle  as  well  as  the  gerund  is  at  the  same 
time  an  adjective,  being  derived  from  the  verb,  as  in  this  sen- 
tence : 

Una  carta  bien  escrita,         A  well  written  letter. 

3.  The  past  participle  is  not  limited  to  a  certain  definite 
time,  but  may  refer  to  any  past  time,  according  to  the  tense 
with  which  it  is  combined.     It  loses  its  passive  signification 
when  connected  with  the  verb  haber,  2.  to  have ;  to  form  the 
tenses  of  the  verbo  active,  active  verb. 

With  intransitive,  unipersonal,  and  reflexive  verbs,  it  can 
only  have  an  active  signification,  as  these  verbs  do  not  admit 
the  passive  form. 

4*  It  has  already  been  observed  (L.  18,  R.  1),  that  the  past 
participle  joined  to  the  verb  haber,  2.  to  have,  is  invariable, 
although  it  had  formerly  a  feminine  termination,  and  agreed 
with  its  object. 


270  LESSON  49. 

Joined  with  the  verbs  ser,  2.  to  be,  and  estar,  1.  to  be;  the 
past  participle  is  considered  as  an  adjective,  and  agrees  in  gen- 
der and  number  with  its  subject : 

La  casa  esta  acabada,  The  house  is  finished. 

Los  buenos  muchachos  son  amados,         Good  boys  are  loved. 

5.  The  past  participle  often  occurs  in  Spanish  in  an  absolute 
construction,  and  corresponds  then  to  the  Latin  ablative  absolute. 
In  such  cases  it  is  generally  placed  before  the  noun,  with  which 
it  agrees  in  gender  and  number : 

Aprovechadas  estas  ventajas  se  fa-         Through  profiting  by  these  advan- 
cilita  el  aprender,  tages,  learning  is  made  easier. 

NOTE.  —  The  subject  may,  however,  precede  the  participle,  when  both 
sentences  have  the  same  subject  : 
El  enemigo  atacado  de  todas  partes,         The  enemy,  being  attacked  on  all 

se  retire,  sides,  retired. 

6.  A  preposition  may  sometimes  precede  the  past  participle  : 

Despues  de  restablecida  la  paz  flo-        After  peace  is  reestablished  the  arts 
receran  las  artes,  will  flourish. 

NOTE.  —  As  seen  by  the  above  examples,  the  participle  is  in  one  case  in 
an  absolute  construction,  while  in  the  other  the  auxiliary  verb  is  omitted  : 
Siendo  aprovechadas  estas  ventajas,  etc.,  despues  de  ser  restablecida  la 
paz,  etc. 

7.  Past  participles  used  as  adjectives  may  govern  the  prepo- 
sition de  or  por,  the  preference  being  generally  given  to  de  : 

Es  un  hombre  despreciado  de  todos,         He  is  a  man  despised  by  all. 

8.  Those  participles  which  have  an  active  meaning,  have  also 
a  passive  one : 

Active  sense.  Passive  sense. 

Hombre  leido,  a  well  read  man.          Libro  leido,  a  book  read. 
Mujer  leida,  a  well  read  woman.         Carta  leida,  a  letter  read. 

9.  Many  past  participles  are  used  as  nouns  in  the  feminine 
form :  bebida,  drink,  beverage ;  entrada,  entrance,  salida,  exit, 
departure;  llegada,  arrival;  comida,  dinner,  eating;  medida, 
measure  ;  corrida,  race ;  mirada,  look ;  vista,  sight ;  etc. 


THE  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


271 


Leccion  L. 


Lesson  L. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE  (Continued). 
Principal  Spanish  Verbs  having  two  Participles. 


Abstraer,  2.  to  abstract; 
Aceptar,  1.  to  accept; 
Astriugir,  3.  to  contract; 
Atender,  2.  to  heed ; 
Bendecir,  3.  to  bless; 
Compeler,  2.  to  compel; 
Completar,  1 .  to  complete  ; 
Comprender,  2.  to  understand; 
Comprimir,  3.  to  compress; 
Concluir,  3.  to  conclude  ; 
Confesar,  1.  to  confess  ; 
Conf undir,  3.  to  confound ; 
Contentar,  1.  to  content; 
Contraer,  2.  to  contract ; 
Convencer,  2.  to  convince ; 
Convertir,  3.  to  convert ; 
Corregir,  3.  to  correct ; 
Corromper,  2.  to  corrupt; 
Cultivar,  1.  to  cultivate; 
Desertar,  1.  to  desert; 
Desnudar,  1.  to  lay  bare; 
Despertar,  1.  to  awake; 
Dif undir,  3.  to  diffuse; 
Dirigir,  3.  to  direct ; 
Dispersar,  1.  to  disperse; 
Distinguir,  3.  to  distinguish; 
Dividir,  3.  to  divide ; 
Eligir,  3.  to  elect; 
Enjugar,  1.  to  wipe; 
Erigir,  3.  to  erect ; 
Exceptuar,  1.  to  except; 
Excluir,  3,  to  exclude ; 
Exentar,  1,  to  exempt ; 
Expeler,  2.  to  expel; 
Expresar,  1.  to  express; 
Extender,  2.  to  extend; 


abstraido,  abstracto,  abstracted. 
aceptado,  acepto,  accepted. 
astringido,  astricto,  contracted. 
atendido,  atento,  heeded. 
bendecido,  bendito,  blessed. 
compelido,  compulso,  compelled. 
completado,  complete,  completed. 
comprendido,  comprenso,  understood. 
comprimido,  compreso,  compressed. 
concluido,  concluso,  concluded. 
confesado,  confeso,  confessed. 
confundido,  confuso,  confounded. 
contentado,  contento,  contented. 
contraido,  contracto,  contracted. 
convencido,  convicto,  convinced. 
convertido,  converse,  converted. 
corregido,  correcto,  corrected. 
corrompido,  corrupto,  corrupted. 
cultivado,  culto,  cultivated. 
desertado,  deserto,  deserted, 
desnudado,  desnudo,  laid  bare. 
despertado,  despierto,  awaked. 
difundido,  difuso,  diffused. 
dirigido,  directo,  directed. 
dispersado,  disperse,  dispersed. 
distinguido,  distinto,  distinguished. 
dividido,  diviso,  divided. 
elegido,  electo,  elected. 
enjngado,  enjnto,  wiped. 
erigido,  erecto,  erected. 
exceptuado,  excepto,  excepted. 
excluido,  excluso,  excluded. 
exentado,  exento,  exempted. 
expelido,  expulso,  expelled. 
expresado,  expreso,  expressed. 
extendido,  extenso,  extended. 


274  LESSON  50. 

18.  Fue  un  accidente  imprevisto,  y  a  nadie  podemos  culpar.  19.  To- 
das  las  mesas  en  la  casa  estaii  rotas.  20.  Estos  libros  han  sido 
impresos  en  Paris. 

Exercise  100. 

1.  My  friend  invited  me  to  dine  with  him,  but  I  could  not  accept 
his  invitation.  2.  I  was  awake  when  your  friends  arrived  in  the 
night.  3.  These  two  friends  are  always  together.  40  The  flowers 
you  bought  for  your  sister  are  already  faded.  5.  The  roads  are  not 
dry  yet,  and  we  will  have  to  take  a  carriage.  6.  Fill  the  empty 
glasses  with  (de)  wine.  7.  More  than  fifty  men  were  buried  under 
the  ruins  of  the  old  church.  8.  The  thieves  were  caught  and  taken 
to  (the)  prison.  9.  The  mob  has  been  dispersed  by  the  soldiers. 

10.  We  have  included  all  our  expenses  in  the  account  we  gave  you. 

11.  Do  you  know  if  the  fire  has  been  extinguished  ?     12.  It  was  ex- 
tinguished when  I  passed  through  the  street.     13.  This  young  man 
has  been  exempted  from  military  service.     14.  He  has  confessed  that 
he  has  spent  all  his  money  in  buying  trifles.     15.  The  inhabitants  of 
the  city  have  erected  a  statue  to  that  great  man.     16.  I  have  been 
obliged  to  sell  my  favorite  horse.     17.  All  these  maxims  were  in- 
scribed on  the  walls  of  our  school.     18.  These  men  have  been  expelled 
from  their  country  for  their  liberal  opinions. 


Gramatlca.  Grammar. 

1.  Many  verbs  have  in  Spanish  two  past  participles,  a  regu- 
lar and  an  irregular  one.     The  regular  participle  of  such  verbs 
must  be  used  in  compound   tenses  with  the  verb  haber,  2.  to 
have  ;  or  when  the  sentence  is  passive  : 

Le  hem os  convencido  de  su  error.         We  have  convinced  him  of  his  error. 
Fueexpulsado  del  pais,  He  was  expelled  from  the  country, 

The  irregular  participle  is  used  as  an  adjective  and  can  never 
be  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  haber,  2.  to  have. 

2,  The  irregular  past  participles  of  the  following  verbs  are 
perhaps  oftener  used  with  haber  than  are  the  regular : 

Freir,  to  fry,  freido,  Mto.  Proveer,  to  provide,  proveido,  provisto. 

Prender,  to  take,  prendido,  preso.       Romper,  to  break,  rompido,  roto. 


THE   PASSIVE    VERB. 


275 


Lcccion  LI. 


Lesson  LI, 


THE   PASSIVE   VERB    (TOZ  PA8IVA). 


INFINIT.  PRES.  : 
PRET.  PERF.  : 
FUTURO  : 

PART.  PAS.  : 
GERUNDIO  : 
PART.  PRET.  : 
PART.  FUTURO  : 
INDIC.  PRES.  : 

PRET.  IMPERF.  : 
PRET.  DEFINIDO: 
PRET.  INDEFIN.  : 
PRET.  ANTERIOR: 
PRET.  PLUSCUAMP. 
FUTURO  IMPERF. 
FUTURO  PERF.: 


Ser  alabado,  to 

Ser  alabad-o,  -a,  -os,  -as, 
haber  sido  alabad-o,  -a,  -os,  -as, 
haber  de  ser  alabad-o,  -a,  -os, 

-as, 

alabad-o,  -a,  -os  -as, 
siendo  alabado, 
habiendo  sido  alabado, 
habiendo  de  ser  alabado, 
yo  soy  alabado  (a), 
nosotros  (as)  somos  alabados  (as), 
yo  era  alabado, 
yo  fin  alabado, 
yo  he  sido  alabado, 
yo  hube  sido  alabado,  ) 
:  yo  habia  sido  alabado,  ) 
yo  sere  alabado, 
yo  habre  sido  alabado, 


to  be  praised. 


being  praised, 
having  been  praised, 
having  to  be  praised. 
I  am  praised. 


COND.  SIMP.  :  yo  seria  alabado, 


IMPERATIVE  : 
SUBJ.  PRES.  : 
SUBJ.  IMPERF.: 
PRET.  PERF.  : 

PLUSCUAMPERF.  : 
COND.  COMP.  : 

FUTURO  IMP.: 
FUTURO  COMP.: 


se  alabado, 

que  yo  sea  alabado, 

que  yo  fuere  or  fuese  alabado, 

que  yo  haya  sido  alabado, 

qtie  yo  hubiera  )    . 

...         >  sido  alabado, 
que  yo  hubiese   ) 

yo  habria  sido  alabado, 

yo  fuere  alabado, 

yo  hubiere  sido  alabado, 


/  was  praised. 

I  have  been  praised. 

I  had  been  praised. 

I  shall  or  will  be  praised. 
I  shall  or  will  have  been 

praised. 
I  should  or  would    be 

praised, 
be  praised. 

that  I  may  be  praised, 
that  I  might  be  praised, 
that  I  may  have   been 

praised, 
that  I  might  have  been 

praised. 
I  should  or  would  have 

been  praised. 
I  shall  be  praised. 


Ejemplos. 

La  casa  del  general  esta  vendida. 
Los  enemigos  han  sido  derrotados. 


Examples. 

The  general's  house  is  sold. 
The  enemy  has  been  defeated. 


272 


LESSON   50. 


Extinguir,  3.  to  extinguish  ; 
Extraer,  2.  to  extract; 
Favorecer,  2.  to  favor  ; 
Fijar,  1.  to  fix: 
Fingir,  3.  to  feign; 
Freir,  3.  to  fry  ; 
Hartar,  1.  to  satiate; 
Imprimir,  3.  to  impress;  to  print; 
Improvisar,  1.  to  extemporize  ; 
Incluir,  3.  to  include  ; 
Infectar,  1.  to  infect; 
Inscribir,  3.  to  inscribe  ; 

Inserir,  3.     ) 

T  ,    }  to  insert ; 

Insertar,  1.  J 

Invertir,  3.  to  invert  ; 
Juntar,  1.  to  join; 
Limpiar,  1.  to  clear; 
Maldecir,  3.  to  curse  ; 
Manifestar,  1.  to  manifest ; 
Marchitar,  1.  to  fade; 
Nacer,  2.  to  be  born  ; 
Ocultar,  1.  to  conceal ; 
Omitir,  3.  to  omit ; 
Oprimir,  3.  to  oppress ; 
Perfeccionar,  1.  to  perfect; 
Pervertir,  3.  to  pervert; 
Poseer.  2.  to  possess; 
Prender,  2.  to  catch  ; 
Prescribir,  3.  to  prescribe  ; 
Presumir,  3.  to  presume; 
Pretender,  2.  to  pretend; 
Profesar,  1.  to  prof  ess  ; 
Proscribir,  3.  to  proscribe; 
Proveer,  2.  to  provide  ; 
Repletar,  1.  to  fill; 
Komper,  2.  to  break ; 
Salvar,  1.  to  save; 
Secar,  1.  to  dry  ; 
Sepultar,  1.  to  bury ; 
Situar,  1.  to  place  ; 
Soltar,  1.  to  let  loose  ; 
Sujetar,  1.  to  subject; 


extinguido,  extinto,  extinguished. 
extraido,  extracto,  extracted. 
tavorecido,  favorite,  favored. 
fijado,  fijo,  fixed. 
fingido,  ficto,  feigned. 
freido,  f rito,  fried. 
hartado,  harto,  satiated. 
imprimido,  impreso,  impressed,  printed. 
improvisado,  improviso,  extemporized. 
incluido,  incluso,  included. 
infectado,  infecto,  infected. 
inscribido,  inscrito,  inscribed. 

inserido,  inserto,  inserted. 

invertido,  inverto,  inverted. 
juntado,  junto,  joined. 
limpiado,  limpio,  cleared. 
maldecido,  maldito,  cursed. 
manifestado,  manifesto,  manifested. 
marchitado,  marchito,  faded. 
nacido,  nato,  been  born. 
ocultado,  oculto,  concealed. 
omitido,  omiso,  omitted. 
oprimido,  opreso,  oppressed. 
perfeccionado,  perfecto,  perfected. 
pervertido,  perverse,  perverted. 
poseido,  poseso,  possessed. 
prendido,  preso,  caught. 
prescribido,  prescrito,  prescribed. 
presumido,  presunto,  presumed. 
pretendido,  pretense,  pretended. 
prof esado,  profeso,  professed. 
proscribido,  groscrito,  proscribed. 
proveido,  provisto,  provided. 
repletado,  repleto,  filled. 
rompido,  roto,  broken. 
salvado,  salvo,  saved. 
secado.  seco,  dried. 
sepultado,  sepulto,  buried. 
situado,  sito,  placed. 
soltado,  suelto,  let  loose. 
sujetado,  sujeto,  subjected. 


THE  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


273 


Suprimir,  3.  to  suppress; 
Suspender,  2.  to  suspend; 
Sustituir,  3.  to  substitute  ; 
Tender,  2.  to  spread  ; 
Tenir,  3.  to  dye  ; 
Torcer,  2.  to  twist; 
Vaciar,  1.  to  empty  ; 


suprimido,  supreso,  suppressed. 
suspendido,  suspense,  suspended. 
sustituido,  sustituto,  substituted. 
tendido,  tenso,  spread. 
tenido,  tinto,  dyed. 
torcido,  tuerto,  twisted. 
vaciado,  vacio,  emptied. 


Vocabulario. 

El  accidente,  the  accident. 

El  cielo,  the  heaven. 

El  colera,  the  cholera. 

El  monte,  the  mountain. 

El  monumento,  the  monument. 

El  muro,  the  wall. 

El  pescuezo,  the  neck. 

El  populacho,  the  mob. 

El  servicio,  the  service. 

La  bagatela,  the  trifle. 

La  carcel,  the  prison. 

La  cuenta,  the  account. 

La  estatua,  the  statue. 

La  invitation,  the  invitation. 


Vocabulary. 

La  liberalidad,  the  liberality. 

La  lista,  the  list. 

La  maxima,  tJie  maxim. 

La  opinion,  the  opinion. 

La  obra,  the  work. 

La  ruina,  the  ruin. 

La  silla,  the  chair. 

Bajo,  under. 

Delante,  before. 

Junto,  together. 

Liberal,  liberal. 

Militar,  military. 

Vacio,  empty. 


Exercise  99. 

1.  [Quien  ha  abierto  la  puerta  y  ha  puesto  una  silla  delante? 

2.  I  No  le  he  dicho  yo  a  V.  que  habia  visto  a  su  hermana  en  el  teatro  ] 

3.  He  escrito  todo  lo  que  V.  me  ha  prescrito.     4.  Estoy  convencido 
que    mi   amigo   llegara   hoy  mismo.     5.  El   colera  ha  infectado  a 
raucha  gente,  y  todavia  hay  muchos  que  estan  infectos.    6.  El  cocinero 
ha  torcido  el  pescuezo  de  la  gallina.    7.  El  buque  esta  provisto  de  todo 
lo  necesario.     8.  Los  ladrones  estaban  ocultos  en  el  monte,  pero  han 
sido  prendklos  por  los  soldados.     9.  Aunque  estuviese  yo  despierto, 
el  pretende  que  me  ha  despertado.     10.  El  cielo  ha  bendecido  sus 
obras.     11.  Estoy  tan   confuso  que  no   se  lo  que   estoy  haciendo. 
12.  No  me  han  permitido  salir  todavia.     13.  Este  cuadro  no  esta 
todavia  completo.     14.  Todavia  no  hemos  comprendido  lo  que   el 
queria  decir.     15.  Hemos  corregido  todos  los  ejercicios,y  ahora  estan 
correctos.     16.  Son  los  hombres  mas  corruptos  que  hemos  conocido. 
17.  No  comprendo  lo  que  esta  inscrito  en  (on)  este  monuinento. 

18 


276 


LESSON   61. 


El  puente  esta  construido. 
Mi  conducta  ha  sido  aprobada. 
La  carta  ha  sido  escrita  por  el. 
Los  muchachos  ban  sido  castigados. 
Mi  sombrero  esta  perdido. 
Hemos  sido  enganados. 
fil  es  estimado  y  amado. 
Queremos  ser  obedecidos. 


The  bridge  is  built. 

My  conduct  has  been  approved. 

The  letter  has  been  written  by  him. 

The  boys  have  been  punished. 

My  hat  is  lost. 

We  have  been  deceived. 

He  is  esteemed  and  loved. 

We  wish  to  be  obeyed. 


Examples  with  the  pronoun  se : 

Esto  se  ve  a  menudo. 

El  cafe  se  vende  Men. 

Se  ama  al  hombre  de  bien. 

Se  admira  la  sabiduria  de  Socrates. 

Esto  no  se  puede  hacer  asi. 

Aqui  se  habla  espanol. 


No  se  puede  ver  cosa  mas  mara- 
villosa. 

Vocabulario. 

El  diputado,  the  deputy. 

El  gobierno,  the  government. 

El  objeto,  the  object. 

El  retrato,  the  picture. 

El  terremoto,  the  earthquake. 

La  cantatriz,  the  singer. 

La  ciencia,  the  science. 

La  comedia,  the  comedy. 

La  conjuraci6n,  the  conspiracy. 

La  juventud,  the  youth. 

La  licencia,  the  license. 

La  muerte,  the  death. 

La  necesidad,  the  necessity. 

La  obra,  the  work. 

La  sentencia,  the  maxim. 


That  is  often  seen. 

Coffee  sells  well. 

The  honest  man  is  loved. 

The  wisdom  of  Socrates  is  admired. 

That  cannot  be  done  so. 

Spanish  is  spoken  here. 

Nothing  more  wonderful  can  be  seen. 


Vocabulary. 

La  tienda,  the  shop. 
Barato,  cheap. 
Escipidn,  Scipio. 
Alabar,  1.  to  praise. 
Alquilar,  1.  to  let. 
Arruinar,   1.  to  ruin. 
Componer,  2.  to  compose. 
Destruir,  3.  to  destroy. 
Escoger,  2.  to  select. 
Eligir,  3.  to  elect. 
Favorecer,  2.  to  favor. 
Reconocer,  2.  to  know. 
Eepresentar,  1.  to  play. 
Reprimir,  3.  to  repress. 
Restablecer,  2.  to  reestablish. 


Exercise  101. 

1.  Este  pano  se  vende  en  la  tienda  del  Senor  Palma.  2.  Se  ban 
admirado  mucho  las  sentencias  de  Seneca.  3.  Las  ciencias  ban 
siempre  sido  favorecidas  por  los  buenos  gobiernos.  4.  Este  principe 
no  sera  alabado  despu.es  de  su  muerte.  5.  La  cantatriz  ha  sido  muy 


THE   PASSIVE   VERB.  277 

aplaudida  anoche.  6.  Mi  aniigo  ha  sido  eligido  diputado  de  su 
ciudad.  7.  j  Que  se  dice  en  la  ciudad  ?  8.  Se  dice  que  el  azucar  se 
vendera  muy  bien  este  ano.  9.  Este  retrato  ha  sido  hecho  por  uiio 
de  nuestros  mejores  pintores.  10.  Esta  senora  es  amada  y  estimada 
de  todos  los  que  la  conocen.  11.  Se  ve  que  V.  esta  contento  hoy. 

12.  No  engaiiamos  a  nadie,  pero  somos  engauados  muy  a  menudo. 

13.  Estos  muchachos  han  sido  alabados  por  sus  maestros.     14.  No 
hemos  sido  convidados  por  su  hermano,  y  asi  no  hemos  ido  a  su  casa. 
15.  i  Se  hubiera  descubierto  la  conjuraci6n  de  Catilina,  si  Ciceron  no 
hubiese  sido  consul  ?    16.  Se  reconoce  al  verdadero  amigo  en  la  necesi- 
dad.     17.  i  Sabe  Y.  si  se  vende  esa  casa  ?     18.  No,  senor,  se  alquila. 
19.  Esta  obra  ha  sido  coinpuesta  por  mi  amigo.     20.  La  hacienda  ha 
sido  vendida  despues  de  la  muerte  del  dueno.     21.  La  licencia  fu^ 
reprimida  y  la  paz  restablecida  en  el  pais.     22.  Estas  cosas  han  sido 
escogidas  por  mi  hermano  cuando  estaba  en  Paris.     23.  No  se  puede 
saber  como  le  fue  posible  al  ladrdn  entrar  en  la  casa.    24.  Estoy  seguro 
que  esta  carta  no  ha  sido  escrita  por  el.    25.  Se  cree  que  el  Presidente 
llegara  esta  manana. 

Exercise  102. 

1.  These  goods  have  been  received  from  England.  2.  Where  have 
these  objects  been  found  ?  3.  They  have  been  found  in  a  carriage. 
4.  Those  glasses  have  been  broken  by  the  children.  5.  Those  houses 
have  been  sold  very  cheap.  6.  The  general  had  been  wounded  sev- 
eral times  in  his  youth.  7.  This  letter  has  been  written  by  one  of 
our  friends.  8.  What  would  you  have  done  if  you  had  known  that  ? 
9.  I  would  have  done  the  same  thing  that  I  have  done.  10.  If  you 
go  to  his  house,  you  will  be  very  well  received.  11.  This  comedy 
has  been  played  twice  at  (en)  the  large  theater.  12.  Have  the  thieves 
been  caught  ?  13.  Two  of  them  have  been  caught.  14.  If  I  had 
been  invited  to  the  ball,  I  would  have  gone  with  my  sister.  15.  It 
is  said  that  there  has  been  a  great  fire  in  the  city.  16.  It  was  said 
yesterday  that  the  general  had  died.  17.  That  city  has  been  de- 
stroyed by  an  earthquake.  18.  I  think  that  coffee  will  sell  very  wel] 
this  year.  19.  Such  things  are  often  seen.  20.  French  goods  are 
sold  in  that  store.  21.  Hannibal  was  conquered  by  Scipio.  22.  The 
beautiful  house  of  the  banker  will  be  sold  this  week.  23.  Youi 
orother  is  seen  every  afternoon  in  the  park.  24.  They  speak  oni)- 
French  in  that  school.  25.  Our  friends  have  been  ruined  by  the  war 


278  LESSON   51. 

26.  All  the  sugar  has  been  bought  by  that  merchant.  27-  I  have 
been  deceived  several  times  by  that  man.  28.  That  child  is  loved  by 
everybody. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  Passive  verbs  are  conjugated  in  all  their  tenses  with  the 
auxiliary  verb  ser,  2.  to  be.    To  this  auxiliary  the  past  participle 
of  active  or  transitive  verbs  is  added,  the  same  agreeing  in  gen- 
der and  number  with  the  subject : 

El  muchacho  es  amado,  The  boy  is  loved. 

La  muchacha  es  amada,  The  girl  is  loved. 

Los  muchachos  son  ainados,  The  boys  are  loved. 

Las  muchachas  son  amadas,  The  girls  are  loved. 

2.  Active  verbs  are  often  used  passively  with  the  pronoun  se 
in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural  (Of.  Lesson  LII.) : 

Estos  libros  se  venden  en  aquella  Those  books  are  sold  in  that  book- 

libreria,  store. 

No  se  puede  ver  nadar,  Nothing  can  be  seen. 

El  cafe  se  vende  bien,  Coffee  sells  well. 

3.  It  is  to  be  noticed,  however,  that  when  a  passive  sentence 
is  formed  with  the  pronoun  se,  this  sentence  may  preserve  the 
construction  of  the  active : 

Se  ama  al  hombre  de  bien,         The  honest  man  is  loved. 

4.  The  verb  remains  invariable  in  the  singular  when  the 
passive  subject  is  a  person,    and  the  acting  ablative   is    not 
expressed : 

Es  dolor  el  ver  como  se  aprecia  mas        It  is  painful  to  see  that  infamous 
a  los  in  fames  aduladores  que   a  flatterers  are  more  esteemed  than 

los  hombres  honrados.  honorable  men. 

5*    The  past  participle  remains  invariable  with  the  compound 
tense  of  the  verb  : 

Se  ha  amado  a  Maria  por  sus  vir-        Mary  has  been  loved  for  her  virtues. 
tudes, 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  . 

6.  When  the  object  of  the  sentence  is  a  thing,  or  when  the 
acting  ablative  is  expressed,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  object, 
although  the  past  participle  remains  invariable  : 

\  Oh  siglo  miserable,  en  el  cual  se  0  miserable  century,  in  which  virtue 

estiman  las  virtudes  por  bicocas,  is  considered  as  nothing  when  ac- 

cuando  las  acompana  la  pobreza  !  companied  by  poverty  ! 

Se  ban  admirado  mucho  las  senten-  The  maxims  of  Seneca  have  been 

cias  de  Seiieca  pqr  sus  proprios  much  admired,  even  by  his  ene- 

enemigos,  mies. 

7t    The  verbs  quedar,   1.  to  remain,  and  ir,  3.  to  go,  may 

sometimes  be  used  instead  of  ser  to  give  more  expression  to  the 
sentence  s 

Ha  quedado  verificado  que  eso  no  It  has  been  proved  that  this  is  not 

es  verdad,  true. 

Va  demostrado  que  la  tierra  rotura  It  is  proved  that  the  earth  revolves 

alrededor  del  sol,  around  the  sun. 


Leccion  III.  Lesson  III. 

REFLEXIVE    VERBS. 

Pronouns  accompanying  the  Reflexive  Terbg. 

Me,        myself. 

Te,         thyself. 

Se,         himself,   herself,    itself,    themselves,   yourself,   yourselves 

Nos,       ourselves. 

Os,         yourselves. 

Alabarse,  to  praise  onds  self. 

Infinitive. 
Alabarse,  to  praise  one's  self. 

Past. 

Haberse  alabado,  to  have  praised  one's  self, 

Past  Participle. 
Alabadose,  praised  one*s  self. 


280  LESSON  52. 

Gerund. 

Alabandose,  ^  praising  one's  self. 

Habiendose  alabado,  having  praised  one's  self. 

Indicative  Present. 

Me  alabo,  I  praise  myself. 

Te  alabas,  thou  praisest  thyself. 

g     j  ,  (  he  praises  himself. 
(  she  praises  herself. 

Nos  alabamos,  we  praise  ourselves. 

Os  alabais,  you  praise  yourselves* 

Se  alaban,  they  praise  themselves. 

V.  se  alaba  (sing. ),  you  praise  yo-urself. 

VV.  se  alabau  (pl.)t  you  praise  yourselves. 

etc.  etc. 

Past  Indefinite. 

Me  he  alabado,  I  have  praised  myself . 

Te  has  alabado,  thou  hast  praised  thyself. 

0    ,       ,  ,    ,  (he  has  praised  himself. 

Se  ha  alabado,  <    _ 

(  she  has  praised  Mrself. 

V.  se  ha  (sing.)  alabado,  you  have  praised  yourself. 

Nos  hemos  alabado,  we  have  praised  ourselves. 

Os  habeis  alabado,  you  have  praised  yourselves. 

Se  han  alabado,  they  have  praised  themselves. 

VV.  se  han  (pi.)  alabado,  you  have  praised  yourselves. 
etc.  etc. 

Imperative. 

Alabate,  praise  thyself. 

Alabaos, 


Present  Subjunctive. 

Me  alabe,  /  may  praise  myself. 

Te  alabes,  thou  mayest  praise  thyself. 

Se  alabe,  he  may  praise  himself. 

Nos  alabemos,  we  may  praise  ourselves. 

Os  alabeis,  you  may  praise  yourselves. 

Se  alaben,  they  may  praise  themselves. 


REFLEXIVE    VERBS. 


281 


Reflexive  verb  conjugated  with  another  verb. 


Yo  quiero  alabar-me, 

Tu  quieres  alabar-te, 

El  quiere  alabar-se, 

Ella  quiere  alabar-se, 

V.  quiere  (sing.)  alabar-se, 

Nosotros  queremos  alabar-nos, 

Vosotros  quereis  alabar-os, 

Ellos(m.) 

Ellas  (/.) 

VV.  quieren  (pi.)  alabar-se, 

Ejemplos. 

Llamarse,  1.     i  Como  se  llama  V.  ? 

—  Me  llamo  Jose . 
Equivocarse,  1.     V.  se  equivoca. 
Sentarse,  1.     Sientese  V.,  senora. 
Levantarse,  1.     i  A.  que  hora  se  le- 

vanta  V.  ?  —  Me  levanto  a  las  seis. 
Acostarse,  1.     j  Porque  no  se  acues- 

tan  los  muchachos  ?  —  Se  acostaran 

pronto. 
Pasearse,  1.     $  Quiere  V.   pasearse 

conmigo? — No  tengo  tieinpo  de 

pasearme. 
Divertirse,  3.    Me  divierto  mucho 

aqui. 
Enfadarse,  1.     No  se  enfade  V. 

Los  muchachos  se  han 


/  will  praise  myself, 
thou  wilt  praise  thyself, 
he  will  praise  himself, 
she  will  praise  herself, 
you  will  praise  yourself* 
we  will  praise  ourselves. 


they  will  praise  themselves, 
you  will  praise  yourselves. 

Examples. 

What  is  your  name  ?  —  My  name 

is  Joseph. 
You  are  mistaken. 
Sit  down,  madam. 
At  what  time  do  you  rise  ? —  I  rise 

at  six  o'clock. 
Why  do  not  the  boys  go  to  bed  ? 

—  They  will  soon  go  to  bed. 

Will  you  take  a  walk  with  me  ?  — 
I  have  no  time  to  walk. 

I  amuse  myself  very  much  here. 

Do  not  get  angry. 

The  boys  have  cut  themselves. 


Cortarse,  1. 

cortado. 
Vestirse,   3.      Nos  vestiremos  mas        We  will  dress  later. 

tarde. 

Caientarse,  1.     Calientese  V. 
Verse,   2.     No  puedo  verme  en  el 

espejo. 
Arrepentirse,  3.     El  se  arrepintio 

antes  de  inorir. 
Dirigirse,  3.     A   quien   debo  diri- 

girme  ?  —  V.  puede  dirigirse  a  mi. 


Warm  yourself. 

I  cannot  see  myself  in  the  looking- 

glass. 
He  repented  before  dying. 

To  whom  must  I  apply  ?  —  You 
may  apply  to  me. 


Ellas  se  ban  escrito. 
No  nos  hemos  hablado. 


They  have  written  to  each  other. 
We  have  not  spoken  to  each  other 


282 


LESSON   52. 


Vocabulario. 

El  mercader,  the  merchant. 
La  colocacion,  the  situation. 
La  Client  a,  the  account. 
La  miseria,  the  misery. 
Ligero,  quick. 
Parado,  standing. 
Acordarse,  1.  to  remember. 
Acostarse,  1.  to  go  to  bed. 
Apoderarse,  1.  to  take  possession. 
Banarse,  1.  to  bathe. 
Burlarse,  1.  to  laugh  at. 
Caerse,  2.  to  fall. 
Calentar,  1.  to  warm. 
Casarse,  1.  to  marry. 
Comportarse,  1.  to  behave. 


Vocabulary. 

Defender,  2.  to  defend. 
Desmayarse,  1.  to  faint. 
Despertarse,  1.  to  awake. 
Divertirse,  3.  to  amuse  one's  self. 
Dormirse,  3.  to  fall  asleep. 
Enfadarse,  1.  to  get  angry. 
Equivocarse,  1.  to  make  a  mistake. 
Llamarse,  1 .  to  be  called. 
Levantarse,  1.  to  rise. 
Pasearse,  1.  to  take  a  walk. 
Quedarse,  1.  to  remain. 
Que  j  arse,  1.  to  complain. 
Quemar,  1.  to  burn. 
Eendirse,  3.  to  surrender. 
Sent  arse.  1.  to  sit  down. 


Exercise  103. 

1.  i  Porque*  no  se  sienta  Y.  1  2.  No  estoy  cansado,  prefiero  que- 
darme  parado.  3.  [  Se  divierten  W.  en  el  campo  ?  4.  Nos  diverti- 
mos  muchisimo  ahi.  5.  [  No  se  equivoca  V.  cuando  V.  dice  eso  ? 
6.  No  me  equivoco.  7.  [  Porque  no  se  pasea  V.  todas  las  mananas  ? 
8>  Me  paseo  cuando  el  tiempo  esta  bueno.  9.  £  Se  levanta  V.  tem- 
prano  ?  10.  Me  levanto  tan  pronto  como  me  despierto.  11.  Si  V. 
tiene  frio,  calientese.  12.  No  se  queme  V.  ;  el  plato  esta  muy  ca- 
liente.  13.  No  se  lo  que  tengo,  pero  no  puedo  dormir  cuando  me 
acuesto  por  la  noche.  14.  Es  porque  V.  se  acuesta  dernasiado  tem- 
prano,  y  se  levanta  demasiado  tarde.  15.  £  Como  se  llama  su  amigo 
de  V.  ?  16.  Se  llama  Juan,  y  su  hermana  se  llama  Maria.  17.  j  Porque 
no  va  V.  al  jardin  a  divertirse  con  los  muchachos?  18.  No  me  siento 
bien,  quiero  ir  a  acostarme.  19.  Los  enemigos  se  apoderaron  de  una 
de  nuestras  fortalezas.  20.  Toda  la  familia  esta  en  el  campo  ;  yo  me 
he  quedado  solo  en  la  ciudad.  21.  £  Se  acuerda  V.  de  lo  que  dijo  este 
hombre  ?  22.  Me  acuerdo  de  todo  lo  que  dijo.  23.  Digale  V.  al 
mercader  que  se  equivoco  en  la  cuenta  que  nos  mando.  24.  [  Porque 
se  queja  V.  de  mi  ?  25.  Yo  no  me  quejo  de  nadie.  26.  j,  Se  han 
hablado  estas  senoras  1  27.  Oreo  que  no  se  han  hablado.  28.  £  Donde 
ha  conocido  V.  a  este  caballero  1  29.  Nos  hemos  conocido  en  Madrid. 
30.  i  Porque  se  burlan  W.  de  este  hombre  ?  31.  Porque  es  muy 
ridiculo.  32.  El  hijo  de  Juan  se  esta  muriendo.  33.  La  pobre  madre 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  283 

se  desmayd  cuando  le  hablaron  de  la  muerte  cle  an  hijo.  34.  Mi  her- 
niano  se  casara  cuando  tenga  una  buena  colocacion.  35.  Si  V.  no 
hubiese  corrido  tan  ligero,  no  se  habria  caido. 

Exercise  104. 

1 .  Why  do  not  the  children  go  to  bed  ?  2.  They  will  not  go  to 
bed.  3.  How  is  that  said  in  Spanish  1  4.  I  don't  know  how  it  is 
said.  5.  What  is  your  name,  my  friend  1  6.  My  name  is  Edward. 
7.  Why  does  not  your  brother  get  up  ;  is  he  sick  ?  8.  He  is  not  sick, 
but  he  always  gets  up  late.  9.  Sit  down ;  I  will  be  ready  in  a  moment. 
10.  Will  you  take  a  walk  with  us  1  11.  With  pleasure  ;  where  do  you 
wish  to  go  ?  12.  Let  us  go  to  the  park.  13.  Why  do  you  get  angry  so 
quickly  ?  14.  You  are  mistaken  ;  I  never  get  angry.  15.  Will  you  not 
go  to  the  concert  with  us  ?  16.  I  am  so  tired  that  I  am  afraid  to  fall 
asleep.  17.  When  I  was  in  the  country  I  rose  very  early,  but  since  I 
have  been  (am)  in  town  I  rise  very  late.  18.  Have  the  children 
taken  a  walk  ?  19.  Yes,  sir,  they  take  a  walk  every  morning  early. 
20.  What  did  you  say  when  he  complained  to  you  ?  21.1  did  not  say 
anything.  22.  He  believed  himself  rich,  but  he  was  far  from  being  so. 

23.  These  soldiers  defended  themselves  with  the  greatest  courage. 

24.  That  officer  covered  himself  with  glory.     25.  Where  have  you 
known  each  other  ?     26.    We  have  known   each  other  in  France. 
27.  The  enemy  has  surrendered.     28.  The  children  have  taken  a  bath 
in  the  river.     29.  Don't  laugh  at  that  man,  because  he  is  poor  and  old. 
30.  1  have  never  laughed  at  him.     31.  That  boy  has  behaved  very 
badly.     32.  She  fainted  on  hearing  that.     33.  You  have  made  a  mis- 
take in  saying  that.     34.  After  having  lost  his  fortune,  he  saw  him- 
self in  the  greatest  misery.     35.  My  sister  will  be  married  next  week. 

Oramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Reflexive  or  pronominal  verbs  are  conjugated  in  Spanish 
with  two  personal  pronouns  of  the  same  person,  i\\v  first  (ex- 
pressed or  understood)  being  the  subject,  and  the  second, 
according  to  the  active  or  neuter  meaning  of  the  verb,  the 
direct  or  indirect  object : 

Yo  me  divierto  or  me  divierto,         I  amuse  myself. 
Ill  se  alaba  or  se  alaba,  He  praises  himself. 


284  LESSON  52. 

NOTE.  —  The  indirect  pronoun  may  also  be  placed  after  the  verb  and 
form  but  one  word  with  the  same  : 

Divertimonos  muchisimo,         We  amuse  ourselves  much. 

2.  Eeflexive  verbs  are  either  essentially  reflexive,  that  is, 
they  cannot  be  used  without  the  two  personal  pronouns}  as  arre- 
pentirse,  3.  to  repent ;  acordarse,  1 .  to  remember,  etc.,  or  acci- 
dentally reflexive,  that  is,  they  may  be  formed  as  in  English, 
from  active  or  neuter  verbs:  quemarse,  1.  to  burn  one's  self, 
from  quemar,  1.  to  burn;  calentarse,  1.  to  warm  one's  self, 
from  calentar,  \.  to  warm,  etc. 

The  number  of  verbs  essentially  reflexive  is  limited,  but 
accidentally  reflexive  verbs  are  unlimited,  since  in  Spanish,  as 
well  as  in  English,  almost  any  verb  may  be  used  reflexively. 

3i  Many  verbs  which  are  reflexive  in  Spanish  are  not  so  in 
English.  Such  are,  among  others,  the  verbs  : 

Quejarse,  1.  to  complain.  Arrepentirse,  3.  to  repent. 

Acordarse,  1.  to  remember.  Apoderarse,  1.  to  take  possession. 

etc.  etc. 

4.    A  reflexive  verb,  conjugated  with  another  verb,  takes  the 
corresponding  personal  pronoun  with  the  infinitive  : 
Quiero  divertirme,          I  wish  to  amuse  myself. 
Vamos  a  banarnos,  We  are  going  to  take  a  bath. 

NOTE.  —  It  is  to  be  observed  that  in  this  case  also  the  indirect  pronoun 
may  precede  the  first  verb:  Me  quiero  divertir,  I  wish  to  amuse  myself; 
nos  vamos  a  banar,  we  are  going  to  take  a  bath,  etc.  This  is  not  the  better 
usage. 

5*  In  compound  tenses,  the  object  pronoun  is  placed  before 
the  auxiliary : 

Me  he  cortado,  /  have  cut  myself. 

Se  han  burlado  de  V.,  They  have  made  fun  of  you. 

]£l  se  ha  comprado  una  casa,         He  has  bought  himself  a  house. 

6*  Reflexive  verbs,  when  used  with  plural  persons,  also  ex- 
press in  Spanish  a  reciprocal  or  mutual  action.  When  the 
reciprocal  form  is  not  plainly  indicated  by  the  simple  reflexive, 
el  uno  ...  el  otro,  or  uno  .  .  .  otro  must  be  added  to  the  verb ; 


REFLEXIVE    VERBS  285 

Nos  alabamos,  We  praise  ourselves. 

Nos  alabamos  el  uno  al  otro,  We  praise  each  other. 

Se  vieron,  pero  no  se  hablaron,  They  saw  each  other,  but,  they  did 

not  speak  to  each  other. 
Se  han  escrito  muchas  cartas,  They  have  written  many  letters  to 

each  other. 

7.  The  d  of  the  second  person  is  dropped  in  the  imperative 
of  reflexive  verbs  : 

Amaos  instead  of  amadost  Love  each  other. 

8.  When  the  present  subjunctive  forms  are  used  for  the  im- 
perative, the  object  pronoun  follows  arid  is  united  to  the  verb. 
In  the  first  person  plural  the  final  s  is  then  dropped : 

Alabese,  let  him  praise  hignself. 

Alabese  V.,  praise  yourself. 

Alabense,  let  them  praise  themselves. 

Alabense  W.,  praise  yourselves. 

Alabemonos,  let  us  praise  ourselves. 

Amemonos,  let  us  love  each  other. 
NOTE.  —  For  further  details,  cf.  Lesson  XLII. 

9.  Accidentally  reflexive  verbs  have  often  a  different  mean- 
ing from  that  of  the  primitive  verb,  as  for  instance  : 

Burlarse  de  uno,  To  make  fun  of  some  one. 

Burlar  las  esperanzas  de  uno,  To  destroy  the  hopes  of  some  one. 

Dorarirse,  3.  to  fall  asleep.  Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 

Desmayarse,  1.  to  faint.  Desmayar,  1.  to  lose  courage. 

Caerse,  2.  to  fall.  Caer  en  una  falta,   to  commit  a 

fault. 

10.  There  are  many  Spanish  verbs  which  may  be  used  either 
reflexively  or  not,  without  altering  their  meaning : 

Fiarse  or  fiar  de  alguno,  To  trust  somebody. 

Chancearse  or  chancear  con  alguno,  To  joke  ivith  some  one. 

Beirse  or  reir  de  alguno,  To  laugh  at  some  one. 

Se  ha  muerto  or  Ha  rauerto,  He  has  died. 


286 


LESSON  sa 


leccion  LIIL 


Lesson  LIIL 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS   (Continued). 


Yo  me  voy, 

Tii  te  vas, 

El  se  va, 

Ella  se  va, 

V.  (sing. )  se  va, 

Nosotros  nos  vamos, 

Vosotros  os  vais, 

Ellos  (m.)  se  van, 

Ellas  (/.)  se  van, 

VV.  (pi.)  se  van, 


Irse,  3.  to  go  away. 

I  am  going  away. 
Thou  art  going  away. 
He  is  going  away. 
She  is  going  away. 
You  are  going  away. 
We  are  going  away. 
You  are  going  away. 


They  are  going  away. 
You  are  going  away. 


Reflexive  Verbs  referring:  to  parts  of  the  Body* 


Cortarse  la  mano, 

Yo  me  corto  la  mano 

Tii  te  cortas  la  mano, 

El  se  corta  la  mano, 

Ella  se  corta  la  mano, 

V.  (sing. )  se  corta  la  mano, 

Nosotros  nos  cortamos  la  mano, 

Vosotros  os  cortais  la  mauo, 

Ellos  (m.)  se  cortan  la  mano, 

Ellas  (/. )  se  cortan  la  mano, 

VV.  (pi.)  se  cortan  la  mano, 


Ponerse  el  sombrero, 

Yo  me  pongo  el  sombrero, 

Tu  te  pones  el  sombrero, 

fil  se  pone  el  sombrero, 

Ella  se  pone  el  sombrero, 

V.  (sing.)  se  pone  el  sombrero, 

Nosotros  nos  ponemos  el  sombrero, 

Vosotros  os  poneis  el  sombrero, 

Ellos  (m.)  se  ponen  el  sombrero,  1 

Ellas  (/.)  se  ponen  el  sombrero,   f 

VV.  ( pi. )  se  ponen  el  sombrero, 


To  cut  one's  hand. 
I  cut  my  hand. 
Thou  cuttest  thy  hand* 
He  cuts  his  hand. 
She  cuts  her  hand. 
You  cut  your  hand. 
We  cut  our  hand. 
You  cut  your  hand. 

They  cut  their  hand. 
You  cut  your  hand. 

To  put  on  one's  hat. 
1  put  on  my  hat. 
Thou  puttest  on  thy  hat0 
He  puts  on  his  hat. 
She  puts  on  her  hat. 
You  put  on  your  hat. 
We  put  on  our  hat. 
You  put  on  your  hat. 

They  put  on  their  hat. 
You  put  on  your  hat. 


REFLEXIVE    VERBS. 


287 


Ponerselo, 

Yo  me  lo  pongo, 

Tii  te  lo  pones, 

El  se  lo  pone, 

Ella  se  lo  pone, 

V.  (sing.)  se  lo  pone, 

Nosotros  nos  lo  ponemos, 

Vosotros  os  lo  poneis, 

Ellos  (m.)  se  lo  ponen,  ) 

Ellas  (/. )  se  lo  ponen,  ) 

VV.  (pi.}  se  lo  ponen, 


To  put  it  on, 
I  put  it  on. 
Thou  puttest  it  on. 
He  puts  it  on. 
She  puts  it  on. 
You  put  it  on. 
We  put  it  on. 
You  put  it  on. 

They  put  it  on. 
You  put  it  on. 


Compound  Tensesc 


Yo  me  he  cortado  la  mano, 

Tii  te  has  cortado  la  mano, 

131  se  ha  cortado  la  mano, 

Ella  se  ha  cortado  la  mano, 

V.  (sing. )  se  ha  cortado  la  mano, 

Nosotros  nos  hemos  cortado  la  mano, 

Vosotros  os  habeis  cortado  la  mano, 

Ellos  (m.)  se  han  cortado  la  mano,  ) 

Ellas  (/. )  se  han  cortado  la  mano,    j 

VV.  (pl»)  se  han  cortado  la  mano, 

Yo  me  he  puesto  el  sombrero, 

etc. 
Yo  me  lo  he  puesto, 

etc. 


/  have  cut  my  hand. 
Thou  hast  cut  thy  hand. 
He  has  cut  his  hand. 
She  has  cut  her  hand. 
You  have  cut  your  hand. 
We  have  cut  our  hand. 
You  have  cut  your  hand. 

They  have  cut  their  hand. 
You  have  cut  your  hand. 

I  have  put  on  my  hat. 

etc. 
I  have  put  it  on. 

etc. 


Ejemplos. 

Mateo  se  ensucio  los  dedos. 

Nos  hemos  quemado  la  mano. 

i  Se  ha  quitado  V.  los  zapatos  ? 

No  me  los  he  quitado. 

i  Se  pondra  V.  el  sombrero  nuevo  ? 

Me  pondre  el  viejo. 

i  Quien  le  corta  a  V.  las  unas  ? 

Mi  madre  me  las  corta. 

i  Cuando  se  va  V.  ? 

Me  voy  ahora. 


Examples. 

Matthew  soiled  his  fingers. 
We  have  burned  our  hand. 
Have  you  taken  off  your  shoes  ? 
I  have  not  taken  them  off. 
Will  you  put  on  your  new  hat  ? 
I  will  put  on  the  old  one. 
Who  cuts  your  nails  ? 
My  mother  cuts  them  for  me. 
When  are  you  going  away  ? 
I  am  going  away  now. 


288 


LESSON  53. 


Vocabulario. 

El  dedo,  the  finger. 
El  guante,  the  glove. 
La  bota,  the  loot. 
La  cama,  the  bed. 
La  camisa,  the  shirt. 
La  cara,  the  face. 
La  casaca,  the  coat. 
La  media,  the  stocking. 
La  pierna,  the  leg. 
La  una,  the  nail. 
Adi6s,  good-by. 


Vocabulary. 

Afuera,  out. 
Hinchado,  swollen. 
Pues,  well. 
Afeitar,  1.  to  shave. 
Lavar,  1.  to  wash. 
Marcharse,  1.  to  depart. 
Ponerse,  2.  to  put  on. 
Quitarse,  1.  to  take  off. 
Seguir,  3.  to  continue. 
Sentar,  1.  to  become. 


Exercise  105. 

1.  Vayase  Y.  de  aqui,  V.  hace  demasiado  ruido.  2.  Me  ire  en  un 
momento.  3.  [  Se  ha  lavado  V.  las  manos  1  4.  Me  he  lavado  las 
manos  y  la  cara.  5.  \,  Cuando  se  marcha  su  hermano  de  V.  ?  6.  Se 
marchara  est-a  noche  a  las  ocho.  7.  i  Porque  no  se  corta  V.  las  unas  ? 
8.  Me  las  corto  todas  las  semanas.  9.  Los  hombres  quieren  irse. 
10.  Pues,  que  se  vayan.  11.  i  Porque  no  se  quita  V.  las  medias  antes 
de  acostarse  1  12.  Yo  me  las  quito  en  la  cama.  13.  Quitese  V.  el 
sombrero  cuando  V.  entra  en  el  cuarto.  14.  Yo  siempre  me  lo  quito. 
15.  Vamonos,  ya  es  tarde.  16.  No  puedo  irme  ahora;  tengo  todavia 
demasiado  que  hacer.  17.  No  puedo  ponerme  los  zapatos,  tengo  los 
pies  hinchados.  18.  Ese  muchacho  se  va  a  cortar  los  dedos  si  sigue 
jugando  con  el  cuchillo.  19.  Pongase  V.  otra  camisa,  la  que  V.  tiene 
no  esta  limpia.  20.  El  pobre  Juan  se  rompio  la  pierna,  cuando  cayo 
de  su  caballo.  21.  j  Cuantas  veces  se  afeita  V.  1  22.  Me  afeito  todos 
los  dias.  23.  j  Porque  no  se  quita  V.  las  botas  ?  24.  No  puedo 
quitarmelas.  25.  Adios,  amigo,  me  voy. 


Exercise  106. 

1.  Why  do  you  go  away  so  soon  ]  2.  I  have  to  go  away,  it  is 
already  late.  3.  Johnny  is  a  bad  boy,  he  would  not  take  off  his  hat 
in  Mrs.  Riera's  house.  4.  Wash  that  child's  face  and  take  him  out. 
5.  I  cannot  write,  I  must  first  warm  my  hands.  6.  Do  not  go  away 
yet,  I  need  you.  7.  When  can  I  go  away  ?  8.  You  may  go  away  in 
half  an  hour.  9.  Would  you  go  away  if  you  could  remain  longer? 
10.  I  would  not  go  away  if  I  had  not  so  much  to  do.  11.  Wash  your 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS. 

hands  and  come  with  me.  12.  Do  not  take  off  your  hat,  you  have  to 
go  out  yet.  13.  I  cannot  put  on  these  gloves,  they  are  too  small  for 
me.  14.  Poor  Mr.  Castro  broke  his  arm  the  other  day.  15.  Which 
coat  will  you  put  on  ]  16.  1  will  put  my  blue  coat  on.  17.  Let  us 
go  away,  my  father  is  waiting  for  us.  18.  Which  of  your  brothers  is 
going  away  next  week  1  19.  They  are  both  going  away.  20.  Take 
off  that  hat,  it  does  not  become  you.  21.  Good-by,  sir,  we  are  going 
away.  22.  If  you  fall  down,  you  will  break  your  head.  23.  I  have 
burned  my  hand,  and  I  cannot  work  to-day.  24.  He  put  on  his 
hat  and  coat,  and  went  away  without  saying  a  word.  25.  Felipe 
will  not  put  on  his  shoes ;  he  says  that  he  has  sore  feet.  25.  Our 
friends  are  going  away  to-morrow.  27.  Why  do  you  not  go  with 
them?  28.  You  know  very  well  that  I  am  obliged  to  remain  in 
town. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  reflexive  pronoun  is  used  in  Spanish  when  the  object 
of  the  verb  is  a  part  of  the  body,  and  in  such  cases  the  article 
takes  the  place  of  the  possessive  adjective  before  the  noun : 

Yo  me  corto  el  dedo,  I  cut  my  finger. 

^1  se  lava  la  cara,  He  washes  his  face. 

NOTE.  —  Se  is  the  pronoun  which  refers  to  the  subject.     If  le  were 
used  the  reference  would  be  to  some  person  other  than  the  subject : 

Ella  le  lava  la  cara,  She  washes  his  face. 

2.  The  verbs  ponerse,  2.  to  put  on,  and  quitarse,  1.  to  take 
off,  follow  the  same  rule  as  above  when  referring  to  articles  of 
clothing  i 

Me  pongo  el  sombrero,  I  put  on  my  hat. 

Me  quito  los  guantes,  /  take  off  my  gloves. 


^90  LESSON   54. 


Leeeidn  LIV.  Lesson  LIY. 


PERIPHRASTIC    VERBS. 


Hacerse, 
Meterse  a, 
Ponerse, 
Volverse, 
Llegar  a  ser, 
Venir  a  ser 
Irse  haciendo, 
Venir  a  ser, 
Venir  a  parar, 


Haber  de, 

Tener  que, 

Haber  menester  de,    }-  must,  shall. 

Tener  menester  de 


to  become.  Deber  de, 


Placer,  2. 


Gustar,  1.       [•    to  like,  to  please. 
Agradar,  1. 


Conjugation. 
Hacerse,  2.  me  terse,  2.  ponerse,  2.  volverse,  2.  to  become. 

Present  Indicative. 

Yo  me  hago,  I  become. 

Tii  te  haces,  *  thou  becomest. 

El  se  hace,  he  becomes. 

Ella  se  hace,  she  becomes. 

V.  (sing.)  se  hace,  you  become. 

Nosotros  nos  hacemos,  we  become. 

Vosotros  os  haceis,  you  become. 

Ellos  (m.)  se  hacen.  ) 

_„      ) '    f      .          '  S  ^2/  become. 

Ellas  (/.)  se  hacen,    ) 

VV.  (pi.)  se  hacen,  you  become. 

• 

Preterit  Indefinite. 

Me  he  hecho,  /  have  become. 

Te  has  hecho,  thou  hast  become. 

131  se  ha  hecho,  he  has  become. 

Ella  se  ha  hecho,  she  has  become. 

V.  (sing.)  se  ha  hecho,  you  have  become. 

Nosotros  nos  heinos  hecho,  we  have  become. 

Vosotros  os  habeis  hecho,  you  have  become. 

Ellos  (m.)  se  han  hecho,  ) 

>  they  have  become. 

Ellas  (/.)  se  han  hecho,    } 

V  V.  ( pi. )  se  han  hecho,  you  have  become. 


PERIPHRASTIC    VERBS.  291 


Llegar,  1.  venir  a  ser. 

Present  Indicative. 
Yo  llego  a  ser, 


TT  (  I  become. 

Yo  vengo  a  ser, 

etc.  etc. 

Preterit  Indefinite. 

He  llegado  a  ser,  ) 

....          I  /  have  become. 

He  venido  a  ser,   ) 

Irse  haciendo. 

Present  Indicative. 

Yo  me  voy  haciendo,  /  am  becoming. 

Tii  te  vas  haciendo,  thou  art  becoming. 

El  se  va  haciendo,  he  is  becoming. 

Ella  se  va  haciendo,  she  is  becoming. 

V.  (sing.)  se  va  haciendo,  you  are  becoming. 

Nosotros  nos  vamos  haciendo,  we  are  becoming. 

Vosotros  os  vais  haciendo,  you  are  becoming. 

Ellos  (m. )  se  van  haciendo, 

_,..      }.'  ,      .      ,  they  are  becoming. 

Ellas  (/. )  se  van  haciendo, 

VV.  (pi.)  se  van  haciendo,  you  are  becoming. 

Preterit  Indefinite. 

Me  he  ido  haciendo,  I  have  become. 

Te  has  ido  haciendo,  thou  hast  become. 

Se  ha  ido  haciendo,  he  or  she  has  become. 

V.  (sing.)  se  ha  ido  haciendo,  you  have  become. 

Nos  hemos  ido  haciendo,  we  have  become. 

Os  habeis  ido  haciendo,  you  have  become. 

Se  han  ido  haciendo,  they  have  become. 

VV.  (pi. )  se  han  ido  haciendo,  you  have  become. 

Haber,  2.  tener  menester  de,  haber  de,  deber  de. 
Present  Indicative. 

Yo  he  menester  de  salir,  /  must  go  out. 

etc.  etc. 

Preterit  Indefinite. 

He  habido  menester  de  salir,  /  have  been  obliged  to  go  out. 

etc.  etc. 


292 


LESSON   54. 


Gustar,  1.  placer,  2.  agradar,  1.  to  like,  to  please. 
Present  Indicative  (affirmatively). 


Me  gusta  or  gustan, 

Te  gusta  or  gustan, 

Le  gusta  or  gustan, 

A  V.  le  gusta  or  gustan  (sing.), 

Nos  gusta  or  gustan, 

Os  gusta  or  gustan, 

Les  gusta  or  gustan, 

A  V  V.  les  gusta  or  gustan  (  pi.  ) 

Present  Indicative 

i  Me  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  mi  ? 

i  Te  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  ti  ? 

i  Le  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  el  ? 

i  Le  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  ella  ? 

i  Le  gusta  (or  gustan,  a  V.  (sing.  )  ? 

i  Nos  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  nosotros  ? 

i  Os  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  vosotros  ? 

i  Les  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  ellos  (ra.)  ?  ) 

i  Les  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  ellas  (/.)  ?   j 

j  Les  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  VV.  (pi.)  ? 


Vocabulario. 

El  chaleco,  the  vest. 

El  precio,  the  price. 

El  prisionero,  the  prisoner. 

El  sastre,  the  tailor. 

La  lluvia,  the  rain. 

Los  padres,  the  parents. 

Debil,  weak. 

De  repente,  suddenly. 

Despacio,  slowly. 

Honrado,  honest. 

Loco,  insane. 

Orgulloso,  proud. 


I  like  or  like  to. 
thou  likest  or  likest  to. 
he  or  she  likes  or  likes  to. 
you  like  or  like  to. 
we  like  or  like  to. 
you  like  or  like  to. 
they  like  or  like  to. 
you  like  or  like  to. 

( interrogatively ) . 

do  I  like  (or  do  I  like  to)  ? 
dost  thou-like  (or  like  to)  ? 
does  he  like  (or  like  to)  ? 
does  she  like  (or  like  to)  ? 
do  you  like  (or  like  to)  ? 
do  we  like  (or  like  to)  ? 
do  you  like  (or  like  to)  ? 

do  they  like  (or  like  to)  ? 
do  you  like  (or  like  to)  ? 

Vocabulary. 

Otra  cosa,  something  else. 
Sobre,  about. 
Fusilar,  1.  to  shoot. 
Concluirse,  3.  to  end. 
Construir,  3.  to  build. 
Correr,  2.  to  run. 
Echarse,  1.  to  begin. 
Gritar,  1.  to  scream. 
Llamar,  1.  to  call. 
Odiar,  1.  to  hate. 
Eespetar,  1.  to  respect. 
Seguir,  3.  to  continue. 


Exercise  107. 

1.  Mi  hermano  se  ha  hecho  negociante.     2.  Este  hombre  no  sabe 
nada,  y  se  ha   nietido  a  medico.     3.    Por  sus   talentos   llego  aquel 


PERIPHRASTIC    VERBS. 


293 


oficial  a  ser  general.  4.  El  tiempo  se  ha  puesto  tan  malo,  que  no 
hemos  podido  inarcharnos.  5.  Juan  se  puso  tau  malo,  que  creiamos 
que  se  iba  a  morir.  6.  Yo  no  se  en  que  vendra  a  parar  esta  disputa. 
7.  Me  es  precise  salir  maiiana  muy  temprano.  8.  Si  el  enfermo 
sigue  raalo,  habra  que  llamar  al  medico.  9.  El  hijo  debe  y  ha  de 
ispetar  a  sus  padres.  10.  El  general  maiido  fusilar  a  los  prisioneros. 
11.  Sobre  eao,  hay  mucho  que  decir.  12.  El  muchacho  se  echo  a 
correr  despues  de  haber  robado  las  manzahas.  13.  i  Le  gusta  a  Y.  la 
cerveza?  14.  No  me  gusta  mucho.  15.  jQue  se  hara  de  nosotros  si 
no  recibimos  dinero!  .  16.  Hemos  menester  de  salir  antes  de  las  tres. 

17.  Nuestro  amigo  Felipe  trabaja  mucho,  y  se  va  haciendo  rico. 

18.  Estando  en  la  calle,  se  puso  a  gritar.     19.  Muchos  de  mis  amigos 
i  han  hecho  ricos  en  America.     20.  No  me  gustan  estos  libros,  y  asf 

no  los  leo.  21.  Se  dice  que  el  padre  de  Enrique  se  ha  vuelto  loco. 
22.  Aquel  hombre  se  volvio  tan  orgulloso  que  era  odiado  de  todos. 
Tendremos  que  pagarle  a  este  hombre  el  precio  que  pide. 
24.  Mejor  quiero  ser  pobre  que  robar.  25.  El  ano  que  viene  me 
hare  construir  una  casa  mas  grande.  26.  No  me  agrada  la  conducta 
de  este  hombre.  27.  Yamos  mas  despacio,  a  mi  no  me  gusta  andar 
tan  ligero.  28.  i  A  que  ha  venido  a  parar  aquello  ?  29.  Todavia  no 
se  sabe.  30.  No  nos  place  que  YY.  hagan  eso.  31.  Deje  Y.  entrar 
i  este  hombre. 


Exercise  108. 

1.  My  brother  would  have  become  a  general  if  the  war  had  not 
nded.  2.  What  will  become  of  those  two  men  ?  3.  A  bad  prince 
eldom  becomes  a  good  king.  4.  Being  in  the  street,  he  became  very 
sick.  5.  The  poor  man  became  so  weak  that  he  could  not  walk. 
6.  John  is  getting  richer  every  day.  7.  I  do  not  like  this  man,  I 
don't  believe  he  is  honest.  8.  You  will  have  to  give  him  all  the 
money  he  asks.  9.  The  thief  began  to  run  when  he  saw  us.  10.  What 
will  become  of  those  poor  children  ?  11.  You  will  get  sick  if  yon  are 
not  more  prudent.  12.  When  iron  is  exposed  to  rain  it  becomes  rusty. 
13.  What  would  you  like  to  eat?  14.  I  should  like  to  eat  some 
chicken.  15.  T  believe  that  man  has  become  insane.  16.  He  has 
become  a  physician  after  having  studied  several  years  in  Paris. 
17.  You  will  have  to  speak  to  him,  if  he  comes  again.  18.  I  am 
having  a  new  vest  made  by  my  tailor.  19.  If  you  don't  like  this 
wine,  I  will  give  you  something  else.  20.  The  weather  has  suddenly 


294  LESSON   54. 

become  very  cold.  21.  I  don't  know  what  will  become  of  that  man. 
22.  Napoleon  the  First  became  great  by  his  victories.  23.  I  have  to 
stay  at  home  until  my  brother  returns.  24.  He  began  to  laugh  when 
I  told  him  that.  25.  Are  we  going  to  read  or  to  write  1  26.  You 
are  to  read  first.  27.  If  I  call  you,  come  immediately,  and  don't  keep 
me  waiting  (make  me  wait).  28.  Next  year  we  are  going  to  have  a 
house  built.  29.  Henry  has  become  rich  in  a  few  years.  30.  My 
sister  says  that  she  does  not  like  her  new  house. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  There  are  verbs  besides  the  auxiliary  verbs  already  men- 
tioned which  may   be  called  periphrastic  verbs,  because  they 
are  used  not  only  to  form  the  compound  tenses  of  other  verbs, 
but  also  to  circumscribe  the  sentence.     The  verbs  haber,  2.  and 
tener,  2.  followed  by  the  preposition  de,  belong  to  this  category, 
and  so  do  certain  active  and  neuter  verbs  taken  reflexively  or 
followed  by  the  preposition  a,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  list  above. 

2,  The  verb  to  become,  when  expressing  a  change  of  condi- 
tion or  profession  by  the  subject,   is  rendered  in  Spanish  by 
hacerse,  2.  ponerse,  2.  and  meterse,  2. : 

Se  ha  hecho  medico,        "j 

Se  ha  puesto  medico,       >         He  has  become  a  physician. 

Se  ha  metido  a  medico,  ) 

3,  When  the  change  of  condition  is  not  performed  by  the 
subject,  but  is  a  consequence  of  its  merits,  llegar  a  ser,  venir 
a  ser,  or  ser  hecho  are  then  used : 

For  sus  talentos  llego  a  ser  (vino  a  ser        By  his  talents  he  became  physician 

or  fue  hecho)  medico  de  camara,  of  the  court. 

NOTE.  — Irse  haciendo,  irse  poniendo,  and  ir  siendo,  are  used  to  express 
a  progressing  action. 

!•  To  become  or  to  get  is  translated  by  ponerse,  2.  to  ex- 
press a  change  in  health,  and  by  the  same  verb  and  by  vol- 
Verse,  2.  or  hacerse,  2.  if  we  express  a  change  in  the  physical 
or  moral  condition  of  a  person,  animal,  or  thing  : 

Se  ha  puesto  enfermo,         He  has  become  sick. 
Se  volvio  loco,  He  became  insane. 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 


295 


5.  To  result  is  best  translated  by  ser,  salir  de,  or  venir 
a  parar : 

Yo  no  se  en  que  vendra  a  parar  (que         /  dont  know  what  the  result  of  this 
saldra  or  que  sera)  de  esta  disputa,  dispute  will  be. 

6.  To  commence,  when  governing  an  infinitive  and  express- 
ing a  motion,  or  the  feeling  of  joy  and  sadness,  is  rendered  by 
empezar,  1.  ponerse,  2.  and  echarse,  1.  with  the  preposition  a  : 


Empezo  a  correr, 
Se  puso  a  reir, 
Se  echo  a  llorar, 


He  began  to  run. 
He  began  to  laugh. 
He  began  to  cry. 


Leccidn  LV. 


Lesson  LV. 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 


Llover,  2.  to  rain. 


Llueve, 

Llovia, 

Llovio, 

Llovera, 

Lloveria, 

Que  llueva, 

Que  lloviese  or  lloviera, 

Ha  llovido, 

Habia  llovido, 

Hubo  llovido, 

Habra  llovido, 

Habria  llovido, 

Que  haya  llovido, 

Que  hubiese  \ 

Que  hubiera  j 

Habiendo  llovido, 


,  i 

'  >  llovido, 

t ) 


Helar,  1.  to  freeze; 
Granizar,  1.  to  hail; 
Deshelar,  1 .  to  thaw ; 
Nevar,  1 .  to  snow  ,° 


It  rains. 

It  was  raining. 

It  did  rain. 

It  will  rain. 

It  should  or  would  rain. 

That  it  may  rain. 

That  it  might  rain. 

It  has  rained. 

It  had  been  raining. 

It  had  rained. 

It  will  have  rained. 

It  should  or  would  have  rained, 

That  it  may  have  rained. 

That  it  might  have  rained. 
Having  rained. 

hiela,  it  freezes. 
graniza,  it  hails. 
deshiela,  it  thaws. 
nieva,  it  snows. 


296 


LESSON  55. 


Tronar,  1.  to  thunder  ; 

Lloviznar,  1 .  to  drizzle  ; 

Relampaguear  1.  to  lighten  ; 

Ventear,  1.  to  blow  ; 

Amanecer,  2.  , 

Alborear,  1. 

Anochecer,  2.  to  grow  dark  ; 


to  dawn  ; 


truena,  it  founders. 
llovizna,  it  drizzles. 
relampagnea,  it  lightens, 
ventea,  it  blows. 

amanece,  ) 
„  >  it  dawns. 

alborea,     ) 

anochece,  it  grows  dark, 


Hacer,  2.  and  Haber,  2.  impersonally. 


i  Que  tiempo  hace  ? 

How  is  the  weather  ? 

Hace  buen  tiempo,         ) 
Hace  hermoso  tiempo,   ) 

It  is  fine  weather. 

Hace  mal  tiempo, 

It  is  bad  weather. 

Hace  calor, 

It  is  warm. 

Hace  frio, 

It  is  cold. 

Hace  viento, 

It  is  windy. 

Hace  sol    ) 

Hay  sol.    ) 

The  sun  shines. 

Hay  luna, 

The  moon  shines. 

Hace  lodo, 

It  is  muddy. 

Hay  polvo, 

It  is  dusty. 

Hace  dia, 

It  is  daylight. 

Hace  noche, 

It  is  night. 

Acaecer,  2.     ~\ 

Importar,  1.  to  be  important. 

Acontecer,  2,  ?  to  happen. 

Parecer,  2.  to  appear  t  to  seem. 

Suceder,  2.      ) 

Convenir,  3.  to  be  proper. 

etc. 

etc. 

Vocabulario. 

El  invierno,  the  winter. 
El  lodo,  the  mud. 
El  puerto,  the  port. 
El  quitasol,  the  sunshade. 
El  sobretodo,  the  overcoat. 
El  trineo,  the  sleigh. 
El  trueno,  the  thunder. 
La  carreta,  the  cart. 
La  estaci6n,  the  season. 
La  luna,  the  moon. 
La  milla,  the  mile. 


Vocabulary. 


La  sociedad,  . 
La  ventana,  the  window. 
Algo,  rather. 
A  menudo,  often. 
Comedido,  polite. 
Humedo,  damp. 
Oscuro,  dark. 
Preciso,  necessary. 
Singular,  singular. 
Alegrarse,  1.  to  rejoice. 
Vestirse,  3.  to  dress. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  297 

Exorcise  109. 

1.  j  Qu6  hermoso  tiempo  hace  hoy  !  [  no  es  verdad  ?  2.  Si,  hace  un 
tieinpo  de  primavera.  3.  [  Hace  calor  en  su  pais  de  V.?  4.  No  hace 
tanto  calor  como  aqui.  5.  Hoy  llueve  demasiado,  los  muchachos  no 
podran  salir.  6.  Esta  noche  habrd  luna,  podreinos  dar  un  paseo  en  el 
parque.  7.  Si  sigue  la  lluvia,  habra  mucho  lodo  en  las  calles. 
8.  i  Que  tierapo  hara  manana  ?  V.  puedo  estar  seguro  que  hard  mal 
tiempo.  9.  Hay  mucho  sol  ;  tome  V.  su  quitasol.  10.  Ayer  hizo 
bastante  frio.  11.  No  hizo  demasiado  frio.  12.  [  Que  fue*lo  que 
sucedio  ?  13.  Sucedio  que  nadie  tenia  dinero,  cuando  fue  preciso 
pagar.  14.  Si  hace  frio,  pdngase  V.  el  sobretodo.  15.  Nunca  hace 
demasiado  frio  para  mi.  16.  Ni  para  mi  tampoco.  17.  Ha  nevado 
muy  a  menudo  este  invierno.  18.  Abra  Y.  la  ventana,  y  vea  V.  que 
tiempo  hace.  19.  Esta  helando.  20.  Relampagueo  muchisimo 
anoche.  21.  Conviene  ser  comedido  en  la  sociedad.  22.  Importa 
que  salgamos  temprano  manana.  23.  Acaece  muchas  veces  que 
llueve  y  hiela  al  mismo  tiempo.  24.  Es  verdad  que  su  hermano  me 
ha  dicho  esto,  pero  yo  no  lo  creo.  25.  Yo  amaneci  en  Toledo  y 
anocheci  en  Madrid.  26.  Me  acaecieron  muchas  cosas  en  el  viaje 
27.  Anochece  muy  temprano  ahora.  28.  Esta  tronando  i  oye  V.  el 
trueno  ?  29.  No  es  el  trueno,  es  una  carreta  que  esta  pasando  en  la 
calle.  30.  Si  hace  buen  viento,  llegaremos  manana  temprano  al 
puerto. 

Exercise  110. 

1.  It  is  important  to  know  who  was  the  last  person  who  entered 
the  room.  2.  A  singular  thing  has  occurred.  3.  It  seems  as  if  you 
had  nothing  to  say.  4.  As  soon  as  it  dawns  we  will  dress  and  leave 
the  house.  5.  If  I  had  known  that  it  was  so  cold,  I  should  not  have 
gone  out.  6.  It  was  so  hot  here  last  summer  that  we  all  went  to 
the  country.  7.  It  hailed  last  night,  and  I  thought  that  it  would  also 
hail  to-day.  8.  It  thundered  and  lightened  the  whole  day,  but  it  did 
not  rain.  9.  Did  it  snow  this  morning?  10.  No,  but  it  will  either 
snow  or  rain  in  a  moment.  11.  It  dawns  very  early  in  this  season. 

12.  I  wish  it  would  snow  every  day,  that  we  might  go  in  a  sleigh. 

13.  How  many  miles  are  there  from  here  to  B.  ?     14.  It  is  too  late  to 
go  there  to-day.     15.  Dear  friend,  how  glad  I  am  to  see  you  again  ! 
16.  It  is  too  damp  to-day  to  go  out.     17.  It  is  very  dark  here,  open 
the  windows.     18.   It  is  not  daylight  yet.     19,   It  was  very  fine 


2^8  LESSON   65. 

weather  yesterday.  20.  It  was  rather  cold.  21.  Was  it  cold  when 
you  were  in  the  country  ?  22.  It  was  colder  there  than  last  year  at 
the  same  time.  23.  I  think  that  it  will  be  very  warm  this  summer. 
24.  Do  you  know  what  happened  to  my  brother  ?  25.  Yes,  John 
told  me  what  happened  to  him.  26.  It  is  very  muddy,  put  on  your 
other  shoes.  27.  If  it  rains,  I  will  lend  you  my  umbrella.  28.  It 
was  raining,  but  it  does  not  rain  now.  29.  It  is  very  windy. 
30.  They  say  that  it  is  just  as  warm  in  the  country  as  in  the  city. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

9 

\t   Impersonal  verbs  can  only  be  used  in  the  infinitive  or  in 
the  third  person  singular  without  any  pronoun  : 
Llueve,  it  rains  ;        graniza,  it  hails. 

2,  Impersonal  verbs  are  either  essentially  impersonal,  that 
is,  cannot  be  used  otherwise,  as  llover,  2.  to  rain;  nevar,  1.  to 
snow;  etc.,  or  they  are  accidentally  impersonal,  that  is,  they 
may  be  formed  from  any  active  or  neuter  verb. 

3,  The  verbs  amanecer,  1.  to  dawn,  and  anochecer,  2.  to 
grow  darky  when  used  as  neuter  verbs,  may  be  conjugated  with 
all  persons.     We  may  therefore  say : 

Amanecimos  en  Toledo,  y  anocheci-        It  was  daylight  when  we  reached  To- 
mos  en  Madrid.  ledo,  and  night  when  we  reached 

Madrid. 

4,  The  impersonal  verbs  acaecer,  2.  acontecer,  2.  convenir, 
3.  importar,  1.  parecer,  2.  suceder,  2.  admit  a  subject  and 
agree  with  the  same  when  accompanied  by  the  pronouns  me, 
te,  le,  etc. : 

Me  acaecieron  muchas  cosas,  Many  things  happened  to  me. 

Le  sucedieron  varias  desgracias,        Several  misfortunes  happened  to  him 


GOVERNMENT    OF    VERBS. 


299 


Leccion  LVI. 


Lesson  LYI. 


GOVERNMENT    OF    VERBS. 


Verbs  requiring  ^repositions  after  them. 
Ejemplos.  Examples. 


V.  abusa  de  nuestra  amistad. 
El  se  acerca  de  (a)  la  ventana. 
Yo  me  acuerdo  de  el. 
Me  alegro  de  ver  a  V. 
El  se  aleja  de  nosotros. 


You  abuse  our  friendship. 
He  approaches  the  window. 
I  remember  him. 
I  am  glad  to  see  you. 
He  goes  away  from  us. 


El  se  inclina  al  vicio. 

Yo  adhiero  d  mi  opinion. 

El  esta  acostumbrado  d  la  limpieza. 

Ha  sido  condenado  d  la  prision. 


He  inclines  towards  vice. 

I  adhere  to  my  opinion. 

He  is  accustomed  to  cleanliness. 

He  has  been  sentenced  to  prison. 


El  pais  abunda  en  hierro. 
£l  ha  caido  en  error. 
Yo  confio  en  V. 
Hemos  convenido  en  esto. 
Yo  no  creo  en  eso. 


The  country  is  abundant  in  iron. 

He  has  fallen  into  a  mistake. 

I  trust  to  you. 

We  have  agreed  to  that. 

I  do  not  believe  in  that. 


Se  caso  con  mi  hermana. 
Cumplo  con  mi  obligacion. 
Me  he  excusado  con  el. 
Me  molesta  con  sus  visitas. 


He  married  my  sister. 

I  do  my  duty. 

I  have  apologized  to  him. 

He  annoys  me  with  his  visits. 


El  calla  por  miedo. 
Me  doy  por  vencido. 
Estoy  por  el. 
Pecamos  por  orgullo. 


He  is  silent  through  fear. 

I  consider  myself  as  conquered. 

I  abide  by  him. 

We  sin  through  pride. 


300 


LESSON  56. 


Vocabulario. 

El  avaro,  the  miser. 
El  beneficio,  the  benefit. 
El  consejo,  the  advice. 
El  pleito,  the  lawsuit. 
El  reo,  the  culprit. 
La  costa,  the  expense. 
La  fiebre,  the  fever. 
La  friolera.  the  trifle. 
La  lagrima,  the  tear. 
La  sentencia,  the  judgment. 
La  yerba,  the  grass. 
Acostumbrado,  accustomed. 
Agradecido,  thankful. 
Bordado,  trimmed. 
Acercarse,  1.  to  approach. 


Vocabulary. 

Adherir,  3.  to  adhere. 
Ale j  arse,  1.  to  leave. 
Apartar,  1.  to  remove. 
Apelar,  1.    to  appeal. 
Censurar,  1.  to  censure. 
Colmar,  1.  to  overwhelm. 
Condenar,  1.  to  condemn. 
Dedicar,  1.  to  devote. 
Descoufiar,  1.  to  distrust. 
Embarcar,  1.  to  engage. 
Entender,  2.  to  understand. 
Formalizarse,  1.  to  get  vexed. 
Habituarse,  1.  to  accustom  one's  self. 
Interesarse,  1.  to  take  interest. 
Jactarse,  1.  to  boost. 


Exercise  111. 

1.  Si  V.  adhiere  a  mi  opinion,  adherire  yo  a  la  suya.  2.  El  reo  ha 
sido  condenado  a  muerte.  3.  Acuerdese  V.  de  mi.  4.  El  rey  colmo 
a  su  ministro  de  beneficios.  5.  Este  hombre  padece  de  fiebres. 
6.  Censuran  a  este  rico  de  avaro.  7.  Con  mis  consejos  le  be  apartado 
de  malas  compafiias.  8.  Mi  hermano  ha  sido  condenado  eri  las  costas 
del  pleito.  9.  No  se  acerque  V.  de  la  ventana,  pues  hace  frio. 
10.  Estoy  acostumbrado  a  estos  trabajos.  11.  V.  no  tiene  razon  de 
acusarme  de  esto.  12.  Estoy  agradecido  a  los  beneficios  que  he 
recibido.  13.  Me  aleje  de  aquella  tierra  con  las  lagrimas  en  los  ojos. 
14.  Me  alegro  de  verle  a  V.  bueno.  15.  El  negociante  ha  apelado  de 
la  sentencia.  16.  El  traje  de  la  reina  estaba  bordado  de  oro.  17.  V. 
no  deberia  burlarse  de  este  hombre.  18.  Yo  no  me  burlo  de  nadie. 
19.  He  cambiado  mi  caballo  por  otro.  20.  Nos  hemos  cansado  del 
viaje.  21.  6l  se  casara  con  aquella  senora  tan  rica.  22.  Aquel  joven 
dedica  todo  su  tiempo  al  estudio.  23.  Desconfio  de  este  hombre  sin 
conocerle.  24.  Temo  que  V.  se  embarque  en  malos  negocios  25.  No 
entendemos  nada  de  eso.  26.  VV.  se  ban  formalizado  por  una  frio- 
lera. 27.  No  tiene  V.  razon  de  gloriarse  de  esa  accion.  28.  No 
hemos  podido  habituarnos  a  ese  pais.  29.  Nos  hemos  interesado  en 
este  joven,  pero  el  nos  ha  engafiado.  30.  El  pobre  hombre  se  man- 
tenia  de  frutas  y  de  yerbas. 


GOVERNMENT   OF   VERBS.  301 

Exercise 


1.  If  yon  make  fun  of  me,  I  will  tell  it  to  your  father.  2.  Has  the 
soldier  been  sentenced  to  death  ?  3.  He  has  been  sentenced  to  (the) 
prison.  4.  He  boasts  of  a  thing  of  which  he  ought  to  be  ashamed. 
5.  Our  teacher  takes  great  interest  in  our  studies.  6.  Do  you  remem- 
ber my  brother  1  7.  I  remember  him  very  well,  but  I  don't  remem- 
ber your  cousin.  8.  I  am  doing  something  now  to  which  I  am  not 
accustomed.  9.  Why  do  you  not  come  near  the  fire  ?  10.  I  am  not 
cold,  I  am  very  well  here.  11.  I  am  very  glad  to  know  that  you 
have  not  lost  your  money  in  that  business.  12.  We  have  exchanged 
our  coffee  for  tea.  13.  I  do  not  understand  anything  about  this  mat- 
ter. 14.  You  are  wrong  to  distrust  that  man,  he  is  your  friend. 
15.  He  accuses  me  of  having  deceived  him,  but  he  does  not  tell  the 
truth.  16.  I  adhere  to  what  I  have  said.  17.  If  you  engage  in  that 
business  you  will  lose  all  your  money.  18.  That  young  man  sup- 
ports his  family  with  his  work.  19.  Remember  what  I  told  you 
when  you  see  your  brother.  20.  We  are  thankful  for  the  benefits  we 
have  received.  21.  Do  not  go  away  from  the  window.  22.  He  is 
very  glad  to  see  that  his  brother  studies  so  much.  23.  If  you  appeal 
from  the  judgment,  you  will  be  condemned  a  second  time.  24.  I 
have  become  tired  of  that  house.  25.  Do  you  think  that  Mr.  Mar- 
tinez will  marry  Miss  Ruiz  ?  26.  I  think  he  will  marry  her  next 
month. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Many  verbs  which  sometimes  in  English  are  not  followed 
by  any  preposition,  govern  in  Spanish  either  the  genitive,  the 
dative,  or  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  a  con,  por, 
para,  SObre,  etc.  Some  of  these  verbs  may  even,  without 
changing  their  meaning,  govern  different  prepositions,  as  : 

Instruir  a  alguno  de,  en  or  sobre  algo,        To  inform  some  one  of  something. 

Other  verbs  change  their  meaning  according  to  the  prepo- 
sition which  follows  them  : 

Creo  en  el,  7  believe  in  him. 

Me  creo  de  esta  cosa,  /  am  convinced  of  that  thing. 


302 


LESSON  57. 


2  Most  reflexive  verbs,  and  those  which  express  the  move- 
ments of  the  soul  or  mind,  want,  ^fulness,  separation,  accusation, 
blame,  etc.,  generally  govern  the  preposition  de. 

OBSERVATION.  —  It  would  be  difficult  to  give  definite  rules  for  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  other  prepositions.  The  Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Academy 
contains  a  long  list  of  verbs  with  their  corresponding  prepositions.  We 
have  omitted  the  same,  as  we  consider  that  the  student  will  have  to  de- 
pend principally  on  practice  and  reading  to  master  these  as  well  as  other 
difficulties. 


leccidn  LVII. 


lesson  LVII. 


GOVERNMENT   OF    ADJECTIVES. 


Ejemplos. 

Este  hombre  es  digno  de  su  posicion. 
Estoy  deseoso  de  verle. 
Mi  hermano  es  alto  de  cuerpo. 
Aquella  seiiora  es  palida  de  color. 
Nuestra    casa   esta    cercana   de    la 

ciudad. 
Estoy  cierto  de  su  venida. 


Examples. 

This  man  is  worthy  of  his  position. 
I  am  anxious  to  see  him. 
My  brother  is  tall  in  size. 
That  lady  has  a  pale  complexion. 
Our  house  is  near  the  city. 

I  am  sure  of  his  coming. 


Este  vino  es  agrio  al  gusto. 
El  es  amable  a  todos. 
Esto  es  benefico  a  la  salud. 
131  es  fiel  a  sus  amigos. 


This  wine  is  sour  to  the  taste. 
He  is  amiable  towards  everybody. 
This  is  good  for  the  health. 
He  is  faithful  to  his  friends. 


6l  esta  triste  por  la  muerte  de  su 

hermano. 
Estoy  alegre  con  la  llegada  de  mi 

hermano. 


He  is  sad  about  the  death  of  his 

brother. 
I  am  glad  at  the  arrival  of  my 

brother. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


303 


Vocabulario. 

El  companero,  the  companion. 
El  heroe,  the  hero. 
El  pesar,  the  grief. 
El  poder,  the  power. 
El  principio,  the  principle. 
El  temor,  the  fear. 
La  alabanza,  the  praise. 
La  botella,  the  bottle. 
La  costumbre,  the  manner. 
La  mina,  the  mine. 
La  naranja,  the  orange. 
La  raz6n,  the  reason. 
La  ruina,  the  ruin. 
La  siiplica,  the  entreaty. 
Aceptable,  acceptable. 
Ansioso,  eager. 
Codicioso,  greedy. 
Conforme,  conformably. 


Vocabulary. 

Despreciado,  despised* 
Digno,  worthy. 
Encendido,  red. 
Exento,  exempted. 
Favorable,  favorable. 
Incapaz,  incapable. 
Indigno,  unworthy. 
Inm6vil,  immovable, 
Lleuo,  full. 
Maduro,  ripe. 
Penoso,  hard,  painful. 
Poderoso,  poioerfuL 
Propenso,  inclined. 
Propicio,  propitious. 
Sorprendido,  surprised, 
Descascarar,  1.  to  peel. 
Obrar,  1.  to  act. 


Exercise  118. 

1.  Este  hombre  es  muy  codicioso  de  dinero.  2.  V.  esta  lleno  de 
soberbia,  y  Y.  no  tiene  motive  para  ello.  3.  Mi  hermano  ha  sido 
exento  del  servicio  militar.  4,  Es  una  cosa  facil  de  hacer,  y  sin 
embargo  V.  la  hace  muy  mal.  5.  Los  habitantes  de  aquella  is! a  son 
puros  de  costumbres.  6.  Es  penoso  de  ver  a  ese  hombre  correr  a  la 
ruina.  7.  Hemos  obrado  conforme  a  la  razon.  8.  Don  Pedro  es  un 
hombre  despreciado  de  todos  e  indigno  del  empleo  que  ocupa.  9.  Esta 
fruta  no  es  buena  para  comer.  10.  V.  es  incapaz  de  comprender 
nuestras  ideas.  11.  Estoy  contento  con  lo  que  tengo,  y  no  deseo  nada 
mas.  12.  La  proposition  que  V.  nos  hace  es  aceptable  para  todos. 
13.  La  pobre  mujer  se  quedo  inmovil  de  temor.  14.  La  action  de 
ese  hombre  es  digna  de  alabanza.  15.  La  vida  humana  esta  lleha  de 
pesares.  16.  El  heroe  esta  siempre  ansioso  de  gloria ;  y  el  avaro, 
codicioso  de  dinero.  17.  Este  muchacho  es  muy  bonito  de  cara. 
18.  Esta  lengua  es  facil  de  aprender.  19.  Aquel  pais  es  rico  en 
granos,  pero  pobre  en  minas.  20.  Estoy  cierto  de  mi  asercion. 
21.  El  hombre  verdaderamente  liberal  es  fiel  a  sus  principios.  22.  La 
libertad  es  propicia  a  las  ciencias  y  a  las  artes.  23.  [  Porque  esta  V. 
tan  encendido  de  cara  ?  24.  Porque  acabo  de  correr,  y  tengo  mucho 
calor.  25.  La  naranja  madura  es  facil  de  descascarar. 


304  LESSON  57. 

Exercise  114. 

1.  That  fruit  is  not  good  to  ea^,  jt  is  not  ripe  yet.  2.  If  you  act  in 
(de)  that  way  you  will  be  despised  by  everybody.  3.  You  ought  to 
be  satisfied  with  what  you  have.  4.  I  am  anxious  to  see  your  brother  ; 
when  does  he  arrive  1  5.  He  will  be  here  to-morrow.  6.  That  action 
is  unworthy  of  an  honest  man.  7.  The  mighty  are  inclined  to  abuse 
their  power.  8.  It  is  easy  to  say  that,  but  it  is  not  so  easy  to  do  as 
you  think.  9.  I  am  certain  of  what  I  say.  10.  The  weather  is  very 
favorable  for  our  journey.  11.  That  bottle  is  full  of  wine.  12.  That 
country  is  very  rich  in  gold  mines.  13.  We  are  most  anxious  to 
know  the  truth.  14.  I  knew  that  you  were  incapable  of  acting  thus. 
15.  That  child  is  beloved  by  all  his  companions.  16.  They  have 
acted  according  to  (the)  reason.  17.  Life  is  full  of  misery.  18.  I  am 
tired  of  the  conduct  of  this  man.  19.  We  are  not  accustomed  to  see 
so  many  people  in  our  small  town.  20.  I  am  surprised  at  what  that 
man  has  told  us.  21.  He  is  deaf  to  all  our  entreaties.  22.  Those 
men  are  poor  in  means,  but  rich  in  credit.  23.  They  are  very  sad 
about  the  death  of  their  father.  24.  Your  father's  proposition  is 
acceptable  to  everybody.  25.  The  poor  servant  was  all  his  life  faith- 
ful to  his  master. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,    Many  adjectives  have  in  Spanish   a  meaning  by  them- 
selves, while  others  require  a  complement  to  their  meaning,  as 
digno,  worthy;  propenso,   inclined;  comparable,  comparable; 
etc.  : 
Es  una  acci6n  digna  (of  what  ?)  de        It  is  an  action  worthy  of  praise. 

elogio, 
Los   poderosos  son  propensos  (to        The  mighty  are  inclined  to  abuse 

what  ?)  a  abusar  de  su  poder,  their  power. 

2»  An  adjective  may  govern  a  noun,  an  infinitive,  or  a  sen- 
tence in  the  subjunctive  mood : 

Fiel  a  sus  amigos,  Faithful  to  his  friends. 

Diestro  en  saltar,  Skillful  in  jumping. 

131  es  indigno  de  que  le  compadezcan,       He  is  unworthy  of  being  pitied. 

3,  Those  adjectives  which  express  worthiness,  unworthiness, 
facility,  difficulty,  fullness,  want,  scarcity,  eagerness,  anxiety,  de- 


GOVERNMENT   OF   ADJECTIVES.  305 

sire,  exception,  moral  or  physical  qualities,  moral  or  physical 
separation,  distance,  proximity,  certainty,  uncertainty,  danger, 
etc.,  are  generally  followed  by  the  preposition  de: 

Digno  de  recompensa,  Worthy  of  reward. 

Indigno  de  perdon,  Unworthy  of  pardon. 

Facil  de  hacer,  Easy  to  do. 

Penoso  de  hacer,  Difficult  to  do. 

Lleno  de  soberbia,  Full  of  pride. 

Escaso  de  conceptos,  Poor  in  ideas. 

Deseoso  de  trabajar,  Desirous  of  working. 

Codicioso  de  dinero,  Eager  for  money. 

Gordo  de  talle,  Stout  in  body. 

B  Ian  do  de  corazon,  Soft  in  heart. 

Inseparable  de  sus  amigos,  Inseparable  from  his  friends. 

Cercano  de  la  ciudad,  Near  the  city. 

Lejano  de  la  ciudad,  Far  from  the  city. 

Cierto  de  su  venida,  Certain  of  his  arrival. 

Seguro  de  peligro,  Sure  of  danger. 
etc.  etc. 

4,    Adjectives  expressing  the  feelings  of  the  soul  or  mind 
take  the  prepositions  de,  por,  or  con : 

Inm6vil  de  temor,  Immovable  with  fear. 

Triste  por  su  muerte,  •  Sad  at  his  death. 

Alegre  con  su  llegada,  Pleased  at  his  arrival. 

NOTE.  —  When  the  adjective  precedes  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive  mood,  the 
preposition  de  may  always  be  used  : 

Contento  de  ver,  Glad  to  see  you. 

5*    In  most  other  cases  the  adjectives  require  the  same  prep- 
ositions as  in  English. 

6.  Past  participles  used  as  adjectives  may  be  followed  by  de 
or  por : 

Es  un  hombre  despreciado  de  (por)        He  is  a  man  despised  by  all. 
todos, 

7.  There  are  also  adjectives  which  vary  in  meaning,  accord- 
ing to  the  preposition  which  follows  them  : 

Esta  fruta  es  buena  para  comer,  This  fruit  is  good  to  eat. 

Esta  naranja  es  buena  de  descascarar,.  This  orange  is  easy  to  peel. 

20 


306 


LESSON   58. 


Leccion  LVIII. 


Lesson  LVIII. 


THE   ADVERB. 


Adverbs  of  Place. 


Ahi,  there. 
Aqui,  aca,  here. 
Alii,  there. 
Alia,  yonder. 
Cerca  (de),  near. 
Lejos  (de),  far. 
Donde,  where. 
Adonde,  whereto. 
Dedonde,  wherefrom. 
Adentro,  within. 
etc. 


Dentro  (de),  in. 
Fuera  (de),  out. 
Arriba,  up. 
Abajo,  down. 
Adelante,  forward. 
Atras,  back. 
Delante  (de),  before. 
Detras  (de),  behind. 
Encima  (de),  upon. 

etc. 


Adverbs  of  Time. 

Hoy,  to-day.  Pronto,  soon. 

Mafiana,  to-morrow.  Siernpre,  always. 

Ahora,  now.  Nunca,  ) 

,      >  never. 
Jamas,    ) 


Luego,  afterwards. 
Tarde,  late. 
Temprano,  early. 
Presto,  quick. 
etc. 


Ya,  already. 
Mientras,  whilst. 
Aim,  yet,  still. 
etc. 


Adverbs  of  Manner. 

Bien,  well.  Recio,  loud. 

Mai,  badly.  Despacio,  slowly. 

Asi,  so,  thus.  De  prisa,  quickly. 

Bajo,  low.  Alto,  loud. 
etc.  etc. 

Adverbs  of  Quantity. 

Mucho,  much.  Muy,  very. 

Poco,  little.  Tan,  so,  as. 

Sobrado,    \  Tan  to,  so  much,  as  much. 

Harto,        \  enough.  Cuanto,  how  much. 

Bastante,   )  Demasiado,  too  much. 
etc.  etc. 


THE    ADVERB. 


307 


Adverbs  of  Comparison. 

Mas,  more.  Mejor,  better. 

Menos,  less.  Peor,  worse. 

etc.  etc. 


Adverbs  of  Order. 


Primeramente^rs^. 
tJltirnamente,  lastly. 


Sucesivamente,  successively. 
Antes  (de),  before. 


Despues  (de),  after. 
Adverbs  of  Affirmation. 


Si,  yes. 

Ciertamente,  certainly. 
etc. 


Verdaderamente,  verily. 
Indudableraente,  undoubtedly. 
etc. 


Adverbs  of  Negation. 

No,  no.  Nada,  nothing,  not  anything. 

Tampoco,  neither,  not  either.  De  niuguna  manera,  nowise. 


etc. 


Tal  vez, 
Quiza,     j 
Quizas,    • 
etc. 


etc. 
Adverbs  of  Uncertainty. 

Acaso, 

Por  ventura, 

Por  fortuna, 

etc. 


)  perhaps  (in  interro- 
{      gations). 


Adverbial  Expressions. 

Sobre  poco  mas  6  menos,  About,  more  or  less. 

A  lo  menos,  al  menos, 


A  diestra  y  siniestra, 
A  duras  pen  as, 
De  aqui  para  alii, 
De  aca  para  alia, 
Aqui  y  alii, 
Aca  y  alia,  aculla, 


At  least. 
Right  and  left. 
With  great  trouble. 


Here  and  there. 


Formation  of  Adverbs  with  mente  (ly). 

Facil,  facil  mente,  Easy,  easily. 

Constante,  constantemente,  Constant,  constantly. 

Triste,  tristemente,  Sad,  sadly. 

Alegre,  alegremente,  Joitful,  joyfully. 

Elegante,  elegantemente,  Elegant,  elegantly. 

Sabio,  sabiamente.  .            Wise,  wisely. 


308 


LESSON  58. 


Pelicado,  delicadamente, 
Claro,  claramente, 
Verdadero,  verdaderamente, 

Vocabulario. 

El  bast6n,  the  cane. 

La  desgracia,  the  misfortune. 

La  fuerza.  the  strength. 

La  groseria,  the  rudeness. 

La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 

Acaso,  perhaps. 

Afuera,  without. 

Amargo,  Utter. 

Bajo,  low. 

Callado,  silent. 

Ciego,  blind. 

Glaro,  clear. 

Concise,  concise. 

Cortes,  polite. 


Delicate,  delicately. 
Clear,  clearly. 
True,  truly. 

Vocabulary. 

Cruel,  cruel. 

Despues,  after,  afterward. 
Probable,  probable. 
Tal  vez,  perhaps. 
Acompanar,  1.  to  accompany 
Arrepentirse,  3.  to  repent. 
Conseguir,  3.  to  obtain. 
Escuchar,  1.  to  listen  to. 
Faltar,  1.  to  fail. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Provenir,  3.  to  result. 
Referir,  3.  to  relate. 
Besponder,  2.  to  answer. 


Exercise  115. 

1.  j  Comome  haenganado  este  hombre  !  2.  Hemos  siempre  sabido 
nuestra  leccion  desde  que  vamos  a  la  escuela.  3.  He  venido  aca  tem- 
prano  para  ver  a  su  hermano  de  V.  4.  Cicerdn  hablo  sabia  y  elo- 
cuentemente.  5.  Ce*sar  escribio  clara,  concisa  y  elegantemente.  6.  Yo 
le  hable  cortesmente  y  el  me  respondio  con  groseria.  7.  Los  mucha- 
chos  entraron  calladitamente,  pues  la  madre  estaba  muy  mala. 
8.  Jamas  vi  tal  cosa.  9.  Si  V.  quiere,  iremos  manana  al  teatro. 
10.  Le  referire  a  V.  la  historia,  si  ya  no  la  sabe  V.  11.  Yo  creo  que 
V.  podra  conseguir  facilmente  el  dinero  que  V.  necesita.  12.  Esta 
casa  debe  haber  costado  mucbo  dinero.  13.  Vengo  de  afuera,  y  he 
visto  una  cosa  muy  curiosa.  14.  Aqui  mataron  d  un  hombre,  segun 
he  oido.  15.  Primero  vino  su  hermano  de  V.  y  despues  los  otros 
amigos.  16.  [  Acaso  vendra  su  padre  hoy  1  17.  Vendra  tal  vez  esta 
noche  a  las  diez.  18.  iSl  anda  de  aqui  para  alii  sin  saber  donde  sen- 
tai-se.  19.  V.  ha  sido  muy  imprudente,  y  de  ahi  proviene  su  desgra- 
cia. 20.  i  A  que  hora  vendra  el  medico?  21.  Ya  viene.  22.  Lo 
hare  siya  no  me  faltan  las  fuerzas.  23.  No  ire*  alia,  pues  estoy  mejor 
donde  estoy.  24.  j  Que  tristisimamente  llora  esta  mnjer !  25.  Hable 
Y.  claro,  si  Y.  quiere  que  yo  le  comprenda.  26.  Nunca  volvere  a  ver 
a  mi  querido  amigo. 


THE   ADVERB.  309 

Exercise  116. 

1.  If  you  do  not  pay  him,  you  will  repent  it  bitterly.  2.  These 
two  friends  are  constantly  together.  3.  You  must  act  prudently  if 
you  do  not  wish  to  lose  your  money.  4.  Your  friend  has  treated  his 
sister  very  cruelly.  5.  Your  exercise  is  not  well  done ;  you  have 
written  it  badly.  6.  You  would  have  acted  more  wisely  if  you  had 
not  answered  that  man.  7.  I  could  not  listen  politely  to  all  he  said 
about  you.  8.  I  have  blindly  followed  your  instructions.  9.  Speak 
low,  iny  friend,  there  is  somebody  in  the  other  room.  10.  How  do 
you  do  to-day  1  11.  I  am  pretty  well,  thank  you.  12.  When  will 
your  sister  arrive  1  13.  She  will  probably  arrive  this  afternoon. 
14.  Look  for  my  cane,  I  wish  to  go  out  now.  15.  Shall  you  accom- 
pany your  friends  to  Paris  ?  16.  I  shall  perhaps  accompany  them. 
17.  If  you  come  to-morrow,  do  not  come  too  late.  18.  I  shall  not  be 
able  to  come  before  nine  o'clock.  19.  Our  house  is  already  finished. 

20.  They  walk  the  whole  day  here  and  there  without  doing  an}Tthing. 

21.  Do  not  speak  so  loud,  I  have  a  headache.     22.  I  was  near  him 
when  he  was  wounded.     23.  He  was  before  me,  and  my  brother  was 
behind  me.    24.  Come  quick,  I  have  something  to  tell  you.    25.  This 
author  writes  very  well.     26.  We  walked  very  slowly  and  arrived 
too  late. 

Oramatica.  Grammar. 

1 ,    Place  of  the  Adverb. 

1.  The  adverb  is  generally  placed  in  Spanish  after  the  verb. 
In  compound  tenses  it  is  placed  after  the  participle,  and  never 
between  the  same  and  the  auxiliary : 

El  discipulo  ha  estudiado  siempre         The  scholar  has  always  studied  his 
su  leccion,  lesson. 

Although,  according  to  tbe  rules  of  syntax,  we  may  deviate  from 
this  rule,  the  student  would  do  well  to  adhere  to  the  same,  and 
thus  avoid  the  mistakes  which  may  result  from  any  deviation. 

2.  A  few  adverbs  must  always  stand  before  the  verb,  as  no, 
etc.,  and  the  adverbs  of  exclamation  :  cuanto,  cuan,  como,  etc.  : 

j  Como  me  ha  enganado  !  How  he  has  deceived  me  ! 


310  LESSON   58. 

The  following  adverbs  also  precede  the  verb  :  apenas,  hardly  ; 
cuando,  when ;  luego  que,  us  soon  as ;  asi  que,  so  soon  as ; 
mientras  que,  whilst ;  donde,  where  ;  de  donde,  whence,  and  a 
few  others. 

2.    Formation  of  Adverbs. 

1.  Adverbs    are   formed   from   adjectives   in   two    different 
ways: 

Adjectives  having  the  same  termination  for  both  genders  add 
mente  (corresponding  to  the  English  termination  ly). 

Facil,  facilmente,  Easy,  easily. 

Dulce,  dulcemente,  Sweet,  sweetly. 

Feliz,  felizmente,  Happy,  happily. 

Igual,  igualmente,  Equal,  equally. 
NOTE.  —  If  an  adverb  is  formed  from  an  adjective  which  has  the  written 

accent,  this  accent  is  preserved,  even  though  it  does  not  indicate  the 
accented  syllable  of  the  adverb  : 

Facilmente.  Cortesmente. 

2.  Adjectives  having  a  different  form  for  the  masculine  and 
feminine  add  mente  to  the  feminine  form  : 

Sabio,  sabiamente,  Wise,  wisely. 

Claro,  claramente,  Clear,  clearly. 

Honrado,  honradamente,  Honest,  honestly. 

Rico,  ricamente,  Rich,  richly. 

3.  Superlatives  may  be  formed  from  all  adverbs  ending  in 
mente : 

Tristisimamente,  Most  sadly. 

Dulcisimamente,  Most  sweetly. 

4.  When  several  adverbs  follow  each  other  in  the  same  sen- 
tence, it  is  sufficient  to  add  the  termination  mente  to  the  last 
adverb,  while  all  the  preceding  adverbs  take  the  form  of  the 
feminine  of  the  adjective  : 

El  habla  sabia  y  elocuentemente,         He  speaks  wisely  and  eloquently. 
El  escribe  clara,  concisa  y  elegan-         He  writes  clearly,   concisely,  and 
temente,  elegantly. 

The  same  rule  is  to  be  observed  for  the  superlative. 


THE    ADVERB.  311 

5.  When  different  adverbs  in  mente  occur  in  the  same  sen- 
tence without  modifying  the  same  verb,  it  is  preferable,  for  the 
sake  of  euphony,  to  replace  one  of  the  adverbs  by  a  noun  con- 
nected with  the  preposition  con  : 

Hable  cortesmente  y  el  respondio         /  spoke    courteously   and    he   an- 
con  groseria,  swered  rudely  (with  rudeness). 

6.  Adverbs  ending  in  mente  govern  the  same  prepositions 
as  the  adjectives  from  which  they  are  formed  : 

Anteriormente  a,  etc.  Anterior  to,  etc. 

7.  Adverbs  cannot  be  formed  from  all  adjectives.     Such  are : 
verde,  green;  azul,  blue;  enfermo,  ill;  poco,  little;  mucho, 
much,  etc. 

8.  A  few  adverbs  may  be  used   diminutively  or  augmenta- 
tively,  but  only  in  a  familiar  way  : 

Se  entro  calladitamente  y  la  tomo        He  entered  very  quietly  and  took 
suavitamente  por  la  mano,  her  very  gently  by  the  hand. 

9.  Certain  adjectives  may  be  used  in  Spanish  as  adverbs,  and 
remain  then  invariable.     Such  are  the  adjectives:  claro,  clear, 
clearly ;  oscu.ro,  obscure,  obscurely ;  derecho,  straight;  torcido, 
twisted;  fuerte,  strong,  strongly,  etc. 

10.  The  adverb  ya,  which  is  generally  rendered  by  already, 
is  sometimes  rendered  by  indeed,  since,  now,  etc.  : 

Ya  ha  llegado,  He  has  already  arrived. 

Ya  de  dia,  ya  de  noche,  Now  in  daytime,  now  at  night. 

Ya  que  V.  lo  sabe,  Since  you  know  it. 

Ya  se  arrepentira  V.,  You  will  indeed  repent  it. 


312 


LESSON  59. 


Leccidn  LIX. 


Lesson  LIX. 


THE   PREPOSITION. 


A,  to,  at. 

Ante,  before. 

Con,  with. 

Contra,  against. 

De,  of,  from. 

Desde,  from,  since. 

En,  in. 

Entre,  between,  among. 


Hacia,  towards,  to. 

Hast  a,  as  far  as,  until,  till,  even. 

Para,  for,  in  order  to,  to. 

Por,  by,  through,  for. 

Begun,    according  to,  as. 

Sin,  without. 

Sobre,  on,  upon,  about,  above. 

Tras,  behind,  besides. 


Prepositions  and  Prepositional  Phrases  requiring  de  after  them. 

Dentro,  in. 
Despues,  after. 
Detras,  behind. 
Encima,  on,  upon. 
Enfrente,  opposite. 
Fuera,  out. 
Por  medio,  by  means. 


Ademas, 
Alrededor,  around. 
Antes,  before  (ref.  to  time). 
A  pesar,  notwithstanding. 
Cerca,  near. 
Debajo,  under. 
Delante,  before. 


Prepositions  followed  by  a. 
En  cuanto.  as  far.  Junto,  next. 


Ejemplos. 

Vendre  a  las  ocho. 

Comparecio  ante  el  juez. 

Estoy  con  mi  padre. 

Estamos  contra  V. 

Se  habla  de  V. 

Saldre  en  el  mes  de  Agosto. 

Eran  entre  quinze  a  veinte  hombres. 

Mire  V.  hacia  el  norte. 

Voy  hasta  mi  casa. 

Trabajo  para  ganar. 

Va  a  Madrid  por  un  ano. 

Lo  digo  seaun  me  lo  ban  dicho. 


Examples. 

I  will  come  at  eight  o'clock. 

He  appeared  before  the  judge. 

I  am  with  my  father. 

We  are  against  you. 

They  speak  of  you. 

I  shall  leave  in  the   month   of 

August. 
There  were  between  fifteen  and 

twenty  men. 
Look  towards  the  north. 
I  am  going  as  far  as  my  house. 
I  work  to  earn. 
He  goes  to  Madrid  for  a  year. 
I  tell  it  as  they  told  me. 


THE   PREPOSITION. 


313 


Vive  sin  trabajar. 

El  libro  esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

Voy  tras  V. 

Vendre  despues  de  las  tres. 

El  esta  detrds  de  mi. 

El  perro  esta  debajo  de  la  mesa. 

Vocabulario. 

£1  empleo,  the  employment,  situation. 

El  grito,  the  outcry. 

£1  marinero,  the  sailor. 

£1  ntimero,  the  number. 

El  principiante,  the  beginner. 

La  cadena,  the  chain. 

La  carcel,   the  prison. 

La  caridad,  the  charity. 

La  cera,  the  wax. 

La  comida,  the  dinner. 

La  gota,  the  drop. 

La  insolencia,  the  insolence. 

La  mascara,  the  mask. 

La  peseta,  the  shilling. 

La  prueba,  the  proof. 

La  vara,  the  yard. 

La  vela,  the  candle. 

Abundante,  abundant. 

Borracho,  intoxicated. 


He  lives  without  working. 

Tbe  book  is  on  the  table. 

I  go  behind  you. 

I  will  come  after  three  o'clock. 

He  is  behind  me. 

The  dog  is  under  the  table. 

Vocabulary. 

Corto,  short. 

Gulpado,  guilty. 

Derecho,  right. 

El  reo,  the  culprit. 

El  sueno,  the  drecm. 

El  verso,  the  verse. 

La  bondad,  the  kindness. 

Sentado,  seated. 

Co j  ear,  1.  to  limp,  to  be  lame. 

Comparecer,  2.  to  appear. 

Contar,  1.  to  count. 

Costar,  1.  to  cost. 

Dirigir,  3.  to  direct. 

Disputar,  1 .  to  dispute. 

Exceder,  2.  to  exceed. 

Mover,  2.  to  move,  to  turn. 

Pararse,  1.  to  stand. 

Preguntar,  1.  to  inquire. 

Suministrar,  1.  to  offer. 


Exercise  117. 

1.  Esta  carta  va  dirigida  a  mi  hermano.  2.  Andamos  de  calle  a 
calle  sin  saber  donde  vamos.  3.  Este  pano  se  vende  a  cinco  pesetas  la 
vara.  4.  He  tornado  el  dinero  a  tres  por  ciento.  5.  El  vino  se  per- 
dio  gota  a  gota.  6.  El  reo  comparecio  ante  el  juez,  y  fue  condenado  a 
la  carcel  por  veinte  anos.  7.  Con  ensenar  tambien  se  aprende,  8.  La 
vida  del  hombre  con  ser  tan  corta,  nos  suministra  abundantes  pruebas 
de  que  no  es  un  sueno.  9.  Esta  casa  esta  cerca  de  la  de  mi  hermano. 
10.  Esta  vela  es  de  cera.  11.  Mi  amigo  cojea  del  pie  derecho. 
12.  Nos  vestimos  de  marineros  para  ir  al  baile  de  mascaras.  13..  Yo 
hare  esto  para  V.,  pero  no  de  balde.  14.  Yo  iria  de  buena  gana  al 
cainpo  con  V.  15.  Tengo  un  empleo  y  gano  desde  ayer.  16.  Nadie 
le  excedia  a  este  hombre  en  bondad.  17.  Entre  otras  cosas  he  visto 
un  cuadro  muy  hermoso  en  la  casa  del  medico.  18.  Quintana  cuenta 


314  LESSON   59. 

con  razon  a  Herrera  entre  (or  en)  el  numero  de  los  primeros  autores 
espanoles.  19.  Este  hombre  hasta  tuvo  la  insolencia  de  venir  bor- 
racho  a  mi  casa.  20.  Para  principiante,  no  ha  hecho  V.  mal  este 
trabajo.  21.  La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  virtudes.  22.  Se  disputa 
sobre  el  sentido  de  este  verso.  23.  Moviose  la  conversacion  sobre 
vinos  franceses.  24.  Tras  ser  culpado,  es  61  que  m&s  levanta  el  grito. 
25.  Este  reloj  me  cuesta  cien  pesos  sin  la  cadena.  26.  Los  hornbres 
estaban  sentados  alrededor  de  la  mesa. 

Exercise  118. 

1.  That  lady  comes  from  Europe.  2.  She  used  to  live  at  our  house 
before  the  death  of  her  husband.  3.  What  were  you  doing  under  the 
table?  4.  I  was  looking  for  my  pen.  5.  We  can  do  nothing  without 
money.  6.  Will  you  go  as  far  as  the  church  for  me  ?  7.  I  will 
accompany  you  as  far  as  that  street.  8.  You  speak  without  knowing 
what  you  say.  9.  Here  are  some  apples  for  you.  10.  My  sister  lives 
far  from  us.  11.  Do  you  know  the  lady  who  lives  opposite  your 
house  ?  12.  Yes,  she  is  an  English  lady.  13.  Why  do  those  boys 
walk  behind  us  1  14.  They  are  going  to  the  school  next  to  our  house. 
15.  My  brother  will  come  first,  and  I  will  go  afterwards.  16.  My 
father  is  in  his  room  and  is  writing  to  my  mother.  17.  Do  nothing 
without  consulting  me.  18.  Come  and  (d)  see  us  this  evening  with 
your  friends.  19.  Do  not  stand  before  me,  I  cannot  see  anything. 
20.  His  sons  were  seated  around  the  table.  21.  Those  two  ladies 
live  opposite  the  church.  22.  Let  us  go  as  far  as  the  park.  23.  The 
dog  is  under  the  table.  24.  There  is  a  garden  behind  the  house,  and 
a  church  behind  the  garden.  25.  I  was  seated  next  to  my  brother, 
and  my  sister  next  to  him.  26.  Here  is  money  for  your  dinner. 
27.  I  received  these  goods  by  railroad.  28.  Has  anybody  inquired 
for  me?  29.  There  came  a  man  who  inquired  for  you,  and  who 
went  away  when  he  heard  that  you  were  not  at  home.  30.  We 
must  stay  here  until  to-morrow. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.    The  preposition  a  is  used  in  Spanish : 

1.   To  express  position  at,  or  direction  towards : 

Esta  a  izquierda,  He  is  on  the  left. 

Fue  a  bordo,  He  went  on  board. 

Ira  a  Sevilla,  He  will  go  to  Seville. 


THE   PREPOSITION.  315 

2.  In  expressions  of  time; 

A  mediodia,  At  midday. 

A  las  once  de  la  rnanana,  At  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Al  llegar,  Upon  his  arrival. 

3.  To  express  manner,  means : 

Va  a  pie,  He  goes  on  foot. 

Le  eche  a  palos,  /  drove  him  away  with  a  stick. 

Gota  a  gota,  Drop  by  drop. 

4.  To  express  price  or  rate  : 

i  A  cudnto  se  vende  ?  What  is  the  price  ? 

A  dos  duros  el  metro,  Two  dollars  a  meter. 

H  toda  fuerza  de  maquina,  At  full  speed. 

A  cuatro  por  ciento,  At  four  per  cent. 

5.  To  express  resemblance: 

L  la  inglesa,  In  the  English  style. 

A  lo  matador,  Like  a  bull-fighter. 

6.  After  verbs  requiring  or  implying  the  prepositions  to  or 
from : 

Dio  al  nino  un  perro  chico,         He  gave  the  child  a  cent. 

Ofrecio  al  juez  cien  duros,          He  offered  the  judge  a  hundred  dollars. 

Robaran  al  ciego  su  dinero,         They  stole  the  blind  man's  money. 

7.  To  form  a  great  number  of  adverbial  locutions  : 

A  la  verdad,  Truly. 

A  lo  men os,  At  least. 

2.    The  preposition  ante,  before,  means  in  the  presence  of : 
Ante  el  juez,  Before  the  judge. 

It  often  takes  the  place  of  antes  que  or  antes  de,  and  indi- 
cates the  preference  of  one  thing  or  action  over  another : 
Ante  todo  or  antes  de  todo,  Before  everything. 

3*    The  preposition  con,  with,  may  also  mean  although  or  by 

when  accompanied  by  the  Infinitive : 

Con  enseriar  tambie'n  se  aprende,  By  teaching  one  also  learns. 

La  vida  del  hombre,  con  ser  tan         The   life  of   man,    although  short, 
corta,  etc.  etc. 


316  LESSON   59. 

Con  is  also  used  to  form  certain  locutions : 

Con  que  V.  ha  llegado,  So  you  have  arrived. 

4.    The  preposition  de  is  used 

1.  To  express  time : 

De  dia,  In  daytime. 

De  noche,  By  night. 

De  sol  a  sol,  From,  morning  to  night 

2.  To  express  origin,  derivation,  separation : 

Viene  del  almacen  de  su  padre,        He  comes  from  his  father's  store. 
Bajo  del  tren,  He  got  out  of  the  train. 

Don  Quijote  de  la  Mancha,  Don  Quixote  o/(the  province  of)  La 

Mancha. 

3.  To  express  material  and  ownership  : 

Un  reloj  de  oro,  A  gold  watch. 

Una  vela  de  cera,  A  wax  candle. 

Los  primes  de  la  raujer  de  Juan,  Johns  wife's  cousins. 

El  techo  de  la  casa,  The  roof  of  the  house. 

4.  To  express  use  : 

Un  perro  de  caza,  A  hunting  dog. 

Una  cana  de  pescar,  A  fishing  rod. 

5.  To  express  contents: 

Un  vaso  de  agua,  A  glass  of  water. 

Una  jicara  de  chocolate,  A  cup  of  chocolate. 

6.  In  exclamations  of  sorrow  and  pity  : 

i  Pobre  de  mi  padre  !  My  poor  father  f 

7.  To  express  characteristic,  cause,  manner: 

La  moza  de  los  cabellos  rubios,  The  red-headed  girl. 

Morir  de  hambre,  To  die  of  hunger. 

8.  When  the  word  pedazo,  piece,  or  another  noun  is  under- 
stood : 

Probe  del  asado,  /  tasted  (a  piece  of)  the  roast  meat. 

Dame  de  vestir,  Give  me  (clothes)  to  dress. 

9.  To  form  many  adverbial  locutions  : 

De  balde,  for  nothing  ;  de  veras,  truly  ; 

De  modo  que,  so  that ;  de  buena  gana,  willingly. 


THE   PREPOSITION.  317 

10.   After  a  passive  verb  by  is  expressed  by  de,  if  the  action 
te  mental: 

Es  odiado  de  todos,  He  is  hated  by  all. 

Era  amado  de  los  ninos,         He  was  loved  by  the  children. 

NOTE.  —  If  the  action  be  physical,  por  is  used  : 
Era  castigado  por  el  maestro,        He  was  punished  by  the  teacher. 

5,  The  preposition  en,  in,  is  used 

1.  To  express  rest  in,  motion  into,  position  : 

Vivia  en  aquella  casa,  He  used  to  live  in  that  house. 

La  cena  esta  en  la  mesa,  Supper  is  on  the  table. 

Entro  en  el  coche,  He  got  into  the  carriage. 

Se  sento  en  la  cama,  He  sat  down  on  the  bed. 

2.  To  express  time : 

En  todo  el  dia,  During  the  whole  day. 

En  diciendo  eso,  While  saying  this. 

Lo  hizo  en  cuatro  horas,  He  did  it  in  four  hours. 

6,  The  preposition  para,  for,  to  (in  order  to),  also  expresses 
an  act  ready  to  be  performed : 

Estoy  para  partir,  /  am  about  leaving. 

7,  The  preposition  por,  for,  by,  though,  also  expresses : 

1.  Means,  etc. : 

Casarse  por  procurador,  To  marry  by  proxy. 

2.  Motive,  etc. : 

Lo  hace  por  fuerza,  He  does  it  by  force. 

3.  Price,  etc.  : 

Lo  compro  por  poco  dinero,        He  bought  it  for  little  money, 

4.  Time: 

Se  ausento  por  ocho  dias,  He  was  away  for  a  week. 

Por  mucho  tiempo,  For  a  long  while. 

5.  What  happens  in  favor  of  a  person  or  thing : 
Empenarse  por  el,       -  To  occupy  ones  self  for  him. 


318  LESSON  60. 

6.  What  is  done  in  place  of  a  person  or  thing : 
Trabajo  por  el,  /  work  in  his  place* 

4fct,:M, 

7.  Exchange : 

Le  doy  mi  sombrero  por  el  suyo,         I  give  you  my  hat  for  yours. 

8.  The  estimation  in  which  a  person  or  thing  is  held : 
Esta  tenido  por  bueno,  He  is  considered  as  a  good  man. 


Leccidn  LX.  Lesson  LX. 

DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 

1st  Conjugation. 
Auto  j  arse,  to  long  for  (only  used  in  the  third  person). 

2d  Conjugation. 

Pacer,  to  graze.  Boer,  to  gnaw. 

Placer,  to  please.  Soler,  to  be  accustomed. 

Baer,  to  rub  off.  Yacer,  to  lie. 
Beponer,  to  reply. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Pacer  is  not  used  in  the  first  person  singular  of  the  pres- 
ent indicative,  or  the  whole  of  the  present  subjunctive. 

2.  Placer  is  seldom  used  except  in  exclamations : 

j  Plegue  a  Dios  !  Please  God  ! 

\  Pluguiera  a  Dios  !  Would  to  God  ! 

NOTE.  —  In  its  other  forms  it  is  generally  replaced  by  querer,  gustar,  etc. 

3*    Raer  is  generally  replaced  by  borrar,  to  erase,  or  rayar, 
to  cross  out : 

NOTE.  —  When  used  it  is  conjugated  like  caer. 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


319 


4,  Reponer,  in  the  sense  of  to  reply,  is  only  used  in  the 
Preterito  definido  of  the  Indicative :  repuse,  repusiste,  repuso, 
etc. 

5,  Roer  is  generally  found  only  in  the  following  forms : 

PRES.  IND.         Roo,  roigo  or  royo,  roes,  roe,  roemos,  roels,  roen. 
PRES.  SUBJ.       Boa,  etc.,  roiga,  etc.,  roya,  etc. 

6,  Soler  is  generally  found  only  in  the  following  tenses  and 
persons : 

Suelo,  /  am  accustomed  to ;   sueles,  suele,  solemos,  soleis, 

melon. 

Solia,  /  was  accustomed  to ;  solias,  solia,  soliamos,  soliais, 
solian. 

NOTE. —  The  present  subjunctive  is  sometimes  formed:  suela,  suelas, 
suela,  solamos,  solais,  suelan. 

7,  Yacer,  2.  to  lie,  is  conjugated  thus: 


GERUNDIO  : 

INDICATIVO  PRESENTE  : 
IMPERFECTO  : 
FUTURO : 
CONDICIONAL  : 
IMPERATIVO  : 
PRESENTE  : 

IMPERFECTO  SUBJUNTIVO-. 
FUTURO  DE  SUBJUNTIVO  ; 


Yaciendo. 

Yazgo,  yazco,  yago. 

Yacia,  etc. 

Yacere",  etc. 

Yacer ia,  etc. 

Yace  or  yaz  tu,  yaced  vosotros. 

Yazga,  yazca,  or  yaga. 

Yaciera,  etc. 

Yaciere. 


320 


LESSON   61. 


Leccidn  LXL  Lesson  LXL 

AGREEMENT   OF    THE   VERB   WITH   ITS    SUBJECT. 


Vocabulario. 

El  creador,  the  creator. 

El  movimiento,  the  movement. 

El  padrino,  the  godfather. 

El  raton,  the  mouse. 

El  sol,  the  sun. 

La  causa,  the  cause,  the  case. 

La  especie,  the  species. 

La  fiesta,  the  feast. 

La  grandeza,  the  greatness. 

La  humanidad,  the  humanity. 

La  marcha,  the  march. 

La  mayor  parte,  the  most. 

La  mitad,  the  half. 

La  navegaci6n,  navigation. 

La  necesidad,  necessity. 

La  obra,  the  work. 


Vocabulary. 

Laplanta,  the  plant. 
Cesar,  Ccesar. 
Pompeyo,  Pompey. 
Distinto,  distinct. 
Supremo,  supreme. 
Aguardar,  1.  to  expect,  to  await 
Anunciar,  1.  to  announce. 
Arruinar,  1.  to  ruin. 
Couversar,  1.  to  converse. 
Decidir.  3.  to  decide. 
Divertir,  3.  to  amuse. 
Escapar,  1.  to  escape. 
Instruir,  3.  to  instruct. 
Interesar,  1.  to  interest. 
Juzgar,  to  judge. 
Sentir,  3.  to  feel. 


Exercise  121. 

1.  Pedro,  Juan  y  yo  heinos  estado  aqui  esta  mafiana.  2.  El  padre 
y  el  hijo  ban  salido  esta  mafiana.  3.  Ni  el  teatro  ni  la  musica  me 
divierten.  4.  El  ejercito  de  Francia  e  Inglaterra  estaban  en  marcha. 
5.  El  estudiar  y  conversar  con  los  sabios  instruye  al  hombre.  6.  Dar 
y  saber  dar  son  dos  cosas  muy  distintas.  7.  La  justicia,  la  religi6n  y 
la  humanidad  quieren  que  V.  obre  de  otro  modo.  8.  Los  cielos  y  la 
tierra,  el  sol  y  las  estrellas,  todo  nos  anuncia  la  grandeza  del  supremo 
creador.  9.  La  mitad  de  los  soldados  se  ha  ido.  10.  Es  la  obra  y  no 
la  persona  que  interesa  la  posteridad.  11.  Juzgar  y  sentir  no  son  la 
misma  cosa.  12.  Seran  W.,  senores,  quienes  decidiran  en  esta 
causa.  13.  Son  trenta  duros  que  V.  me  debe.  14.  El  mimero  de  las 
especies  de  animales  es  ma's  grande,  segtin  dicen,  que  el  mimero  de  las 
especies  de  plantas.  15.  Su  padre  de  V.  6  su  tio  sera  el  padrino  de 
mi  hermanito.  16.  El  padre  de  Juan  es  uno  de  los  que  ban  sido 
arruinados  por  la  ultima  guerra.  17.  Ni  V.  ni  el  lo  saben.  18.  De 


AGREEMENT    OF    THE    VERB    WITH   ITS    SUBJECT.         321 

mis  conocidos  no  todos  serian  mis  amigos.  19.  La  agricultura,  las 
artes,  el  comercio  y  la  navegacion,  todo  esta  perdido  en  aquel  pobre 
pais.  20.  La  mayor  parte  de  mis  amigos  esta  esta  noche  en  el  teatro. 

Exercise  122. 

1.  My  brother  and  I  will  leave  to-morrow  for  the  country.  2.  Have 
not  most  of  your  friends  left  for  Paris  ?  3.  Most  of  them  intend  to 
remain  in  town  this  summer.  4.  Neither  Caesar  nor  Pompey  was  to 
be  an  emperor.  5.  John  and  Henry  are  very  good  friends.  6.  Great, 
rich,  poor,  little,  no  one  escapes  death.  7.  Fear  or  necessity  are  the 
cause  of  all  the  movements  of  the  mouse.  8.  One  half  of  the  chil- 
dren of  that  school  are  Germans.  9.  It  is  we  who  are  responsible  for 
your  conduct.  10.  Your  brother  and  I  will  go  to  the  same  school 
next  year.  11.  I  am  sure  that  it  is  you  who  have  said  that.  12.  A 
great  number  of  strangers  were  present  at  that  feast.  13.  He  and  I 
are  brothers.  14.  Neither  you  nor  your  friend  will  arrive  in  time. 
15.  It  was  your  father  and  not  your  mother  who  was  here.  16.  He 
or  she  will  have  the  book.  17.  This  gentleman  and  I  have  traveled 
together.  18.  It  is  not  the  son  but  the  daughter  who  has  died. 
19.  There  are  three  gentlemen  at  the  door.  20.  It  is  they  we  are 
expecting.  21.  Charles  and  I  are  poor,  but  Peter  and  his  brother  are 
rich. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,    When  the  subject  is  composed  of  two  or  more  nouns 
joined  by  a  conjunction,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural  : 
El  padre  y  el  hijo  han  estado  aqui,        The  father  and  the  son  have  been  here. 

2i  When  the  subjects  are  connected  by  ni,  neither,  or  by  6, 
or,  the  verb  must  also  be  put  in  the  plural.  Usage  and  euphony 
allow,  however,  the  use  of  the  singular,  and  we  can  say : 

Ni  la  miisica  ni  el  teatro  le  divier-        Neither  music  nor  the  theater  amuse 
ten  or  divierte,  him. 

This  sentence  may  also  have  the  subjects  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  : 
No  le  divierte  ni  la  miisica  ni  el  teatro. 

3«  The  verb  must  likewise  be  in  the  plural  when  one  subject 
alone  is  expressed  and  the  other  or  others  are  understood  : 

El  ejercito  de  Valencia  y  Murcia         The  armies  of  Valencia  and  Mur- 
estaban  en  marcha,  da  were  on  their  march. 

21 


322  LESSON  61. 

4*  If  the  subjects  are  not  of  the  same  person,  the  verbs 
agree  with  the  person  which  has  the  priority.  The  first  person 
has  the  priority  of  the  second,  and  the  second  of  the  third : 

V.  y  yo  lo  sabemos,  You  and  I  know  it. 

V.  y  el  lo  saben,  You  and  he  know  it. 

5.  The  verb  is  put  in  the  singular  when  the  subject  is  com- 
posed of  two  infinitives : 

El  estudiar  y  conversar  con  los        Studying  and  conversing  with  wise 
sabios  instruye  al  hombre,  men  instruct  man. 

6.  When  a  verb  has  several  subjects  not  connected  by  any 
conjunction,  it  is  put  in  the  singular,  unless  the  sentence  begins 
with  the  verb.     In  this  case  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural : 

La  justicia,  la  religion,  la  humani-         Justice,   religion,   and  humanity 
dad,  lo  reclama,  or  Lo  reclaman  demand  it. 

la  justicia,  la  religion  y  la  hu- 
manidad, 

7«  When  a  word  occurs  in  the  sentence  which  embraces  all 
the  others,  the  verb  must  agree  with  this  word : 

Los  cielos  y  la  tierra,  el  sol  y  las         The  heavens  and  the  earth,  the  sun 
estrellas,  todo  nos  anuncia  la  and  the  stars,  all  announce  the 

grandeza  de  Dios,  greatness  of  God  to  us. 

8.  When  the  verb  has  for  its  subject  a  general  collective 
noun,  it  agrees  with  the  latter  : 

El  ejercito  esta  bien  organizado,  The  army  is  well  organized. 

If  the  collective  is  partitive,  the  verb  may  either  agree  with 
the  same,  or  with  the  noun  which  follows  it,  and  which  is 
governed  by  the  preposition  de  : 

La  mitad  de  los  soldados  se  ha  ido,        One  half  of  the  soldiers  have  gone 
or  se  ban  ido,  away. 


CONJUNCTIONS   AND    INTERJECTIONS.  323 


Leccion  LXII.  Lesson  LXIL 

CONJUNCTIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS. 
Conjunctions. 

The  Conjunctions  most  generally  used  are : 

Y,  and.  Porque,  because. 

Ni...ni,  neither... nor.  Ya  que,  since. 

0,  or.  Eespecto,  regarding. 

Ya . . .  ya,  now . . . now.  Por  consiguiente,  consequently 

Sea... sea,  either. ..or.  Por  eso,  therefore. 

Pero,  but.  Sobre,  thereupon. 

Sin  embargo,  however.  Algo,  somewhat. 

No  obstante,  notwithstanding.  Pues,  since. 

A  menos  que,  unless.  Mientras,  whilst. 

Si,  if,  whether,  so.  Conforme,  as. 

Con  tal  que,  provided.  Antes  que,  before. 

Para  que,  in  order  that.  Aun,  ever. 

Porque,  why.  Por  miedo,  for  fear. 

Interjections. 

Of  Joy. 
Ah,  ah  !    Ah,  ah!  Gracias  a  Dios !     Thank  God! 

Ah,  que  alegria !  )  TTri  Bendito  sea  Dios !  )  God  be 

>  What  a  joy !  ,  >        .    7  . 

Ay  que  gozo !        )  Alabado  sea  Dios !  )  praised  ! 

Bueno!     Good/  Vaya,  vaya !     Well,  now/ 

Of  Sadness. 

Ah,  ay !    Ah,  ay  !  Dios  mio !     Good  heavens ! 

Ay  que  pena  !     What  a  pain  /  Valgame  Dios !   May  God  help  me! 

Ay  de  mi !     Woe  to  me  !  Virgen  santisima !    Holy  Virgin  ! 

Ay  de  mi !    Poor  me  !  Ave  Maria !     God  forbid  / 

Of  Approbation  and  Surprise. 

Muy  bien  !     Very  well !  Caspita  ! 

Bien  hecho  !     Well  done  !  Chispas  ! 

Me  alegro  mucho !    /  am  very  glad  !  Cascaras  ! 

Grandemente  !    Splendid  !  Caracoles ! 

Excelente !    Excellent  !  Fuego  ! 

Es  un  pasmo !  )  _  Ascuas ! 

f    >  Beautiful! 


Zounds  I 


Es  una  maravilla !   )  Bravo  '     Bravo  ! 


324  LESSON  62. 

Esta  muy  bien  !    It  is  very  well !  Oiga  !  calle  !     You  don't  say  so  ! 

Es  milagro  !     Wonderful !  Hola !     Hallo  ! 

Guapo !     Magnificent  !  Mire  V. !    Do  you  see  ! 

Viva,  viva !    Hurrah,  hurrah  !  Caramba  !    Plague  ! 

Otra  vez  !     Another  time  !    Encore!  Toma !     Indeed!    (Ironically.) 

Of  Contempt,  Blame,  and  Disgust. 

Dios  mio  !     Good  heavens  !  Guapa  cosa  !    A  fine  thing  ! 

Eso  no  vale  nada  !     That  is  good  for  Qu6  verguenza !    What  a  shame  '> 

nothing  ! 

Eso  es  bueno  !     That  is  good  indeed  !  Quita  alia"  !     Get  away  I 

Vaya,  vaya !     Well,  now  /  Oxte  !    Shame  ! 

Que  asco  !    How  disgusting  !  Calle,  que  es  bueno  !  )  That  is  very 

Grande  hazana,  A  great  feat !  Vaya  en  gracia !       ]  fine  /  (Iron.) 

Of  Anger. 

Voto  &  \  si  me  enf ado  !    Don't  make  Diantre  !    Hang  it ! 

me  mad  ! 

Voto  a  chapiro !    /  tell  you,  sir  I  Anda  enhoramala  !   )  _ 

Par  diez  !  J  _     ,  Vaya  V.  a  pasear !    I  Get  away ' 

Caramba !  \  The  plague  take  you  '  Ascuas !     That  >s  too  bad  ! 

Of  Exhortation  and  Encouragement. 

Vaya,  vaya !    Bravely  !  Guarda,  guarda !    Look  out  J 

Vamos,  vamos  !     Gome  on  !  A  un  ladito !     Step  aside  ! 

Alerta !     Wide  awake  !  Cuidado !     Take  care  I 

Ea,  venga  alguien !    Somebody  here  !  Fuera,  fuera !     Out  with  him  ! 

Ea  pues  !     Well,  now  !  Fuego,  f  uego !     Fire ! 

Ea.  animo  !     Courage  !  Ay,  que  me  matan  !    Murder  ! 

Basta,  basta !    Enough  !  C6gele,  c%ele  !    Hold  him ) 

Quedo,  quedo !     Gently !  Acabdse  !    It  is  all  over  ! 

Of  Silence. 

Calla,  calla !    Be  silent  I  Silencio !    Silence  ! 

QuecaUen!     Quiet!  Chito,  vhiton !    Hush! 


326 


TABLE   OF 


TABULA  DE  LAS  TEP.MINACIONES 


DE  LAS  TEES  CONJUGACIONES  KEGULAKES 


EN  LOS  TIEMPOS  SIMPLES. 


o 

0 

PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

o 
o 

am-o 

ain-aba 

am-4 

ain-as 

am-abas 

am-aste 

1.   AR 

AM-AB 

am-ando 

ain-ado 

am-a 
am-amos 

am-aba 

am-abamos 

am-d 
am-amos 

nm-ais 

am-abais 

am-asteis 

am-an 

am-aban 

am-aron 

COIII-O 

com-ia 

coni-i 

com-eg 

com  -las 

com-iste 

2.    ER 

COM-BR 

com-lendo 

com-ido 

com-e 

com-emos 

com-la 
com-iamoa 

corn-id 
coTii-imos 

com-dis 

com-iaig 

com-isteis 

com  -en 

com-ian 

com-ieron 

recib-o 

recib-ia 

recib-i 

recib-es 

rerit)-ias 

recib-iste 

3.    IR 

RE  C  IB-IB 

recib-iendo 

recib-ido 

recib-e 
recib-Imoa 

recib-la 
recib-iamos 

recib-id 
recib-imos 

recib-is 

recib-lais 

recib-isteis 

recib-en 

recib-ian 

recib-ieroa 

TERMINATIONS. 


327 


TABLE   OF   TEKMINATIONS 


OF  THE  THREE   REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS 


IN  THEIR  SIMPLE  TENSES. 


FUTURE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPERATIVE. 

PKESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNC- 
TIVE. 

TERMINATION 

1.                     2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

amar-e* 

am  a  Ma 

arn-e 

am-ara                -ase 

am-are 

amar-as 

amar-laa 

niu-a 

am-ea 

am-araa             -aaea 

am  -area 

amar-a 

amar-ia 

ani-e 

am-ara               -ase 

ain-are 

amar-emoa 

aniar-iamos 

am-emoa 

am-aramoa        -aaemoa 

am-aremoa 

amar-e*ia 

amar-iaia 

am-ad 

ain-els 

am-araia             -aaeia 

am-areia 

amar-an 

amar-ian 

am-en 

am-aran            -asen 

am-aren 

comer-e* 

comer-la 

corn-a 

com-iera            -ieae 

com-iere 

comer-is 

comer-iaa 

coin-e 

coin-as 

com-ieraa          -ieaea 

com-ierea 

comer-a 

comer-la 

com-a 

com-iera            -ieae 

com-iere 

conier-emos 

comer-iamoa 

com-amoa 

com-i^ramoa      -iesemoa 

com-ie*remo8 

comer-els 

comer-iaia 

com-ed 

com-aia 

com-ieraia          -ieaeis 

com-iereia 

comer-an 

comer-ian 

com  -an 

com-ieran          -ieaen 

com-ieren 

recibir-< 

recibir-ia 

recib-a 

recib-iera          -ieae 

recib-iere 

recibir-as 

recibir-laa 

recib-« 

recib-aa 

recib-ieraa         -iesea 

recib-iereg 

recibir-a 

recibir-la 

recib-a 

recib-iera          -iese 

recib-iere 

recibir-emos 

recibir-lamoa 

recib-amoa 

recib-ilramoa    -iesemoa 

recib-ie'remoa 

recibir-e*is 

recibir-laia 

recib-id 

recib-aia 

recib-ieraia       -ieaeia 

recib-iereia 

recibir-an 

recibir-lan 

recib-an 

recib-ieran        -ieaen 

recib-ieren 

328  ALPHABETICAL    TABLE    OF    THE    PRINCIPAL 

TABULA   ALFABETICA   DE   LOS 
PRINCIPALES  VERBOS  IRREGULARES  6  DEFECTIVOS, 

NOTA.  —  El  numero  colocado  despues  del  Presente  del  Infinitive  de  cada  verbo  indica  la 
Conjugaci6n  a  la  que  pertenece  este  verbo. 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

Abolir,  3. 

to  abolish. 

aboliendo 

abolido 

abolimos 
abolis 

abolia 
abolias 
abolia 
aboliamos 
aboliais 
abolian 

aboli 
aboliste 
aboli6 
abolimos 
abolisteis 
abolieron 

Abrir,  3. 

to  open. 

Regular  in  all 
the  other 
tenses. 

abierto 

Absolver,  2. 

to  absolve. 

conjugated 
like  Mover. 

absuelto 

Abstraer,  2. 

to  abstract. 

conjugated 
like  Traer. 

Acertar,  1. 

to  hit  the  mark. 

conjugated 
like 
Acrecentar. 

Acordar,  1. 

to  agree* 

acordando 

acordado 

cuerdo 
cuerdas 
cuerda 
cordamos 
corddis 
cuerdan 

cordaba 
cordabas 
cordaba 
cordabamos 
cordabais 
cordaban 

acorde" 
acordaste 
acord6 
acordamos 
acordasteis 
acordaron 

Ac  os  tar,  1. 

to  lay  down. 

conjugated 
like  Acordar. 

Acrecentar,  1. 

to  increase. 

acrecentando 

acrecentado 

acreciento 
acrecientas 
acrecienta 
acrecentamos 

acrecentais 
acrecientan 

Hcrecentaba 
acrecentabas 
acrecentaba 
acrecentaba- 
mos 
acrecentabais 

Hcrecentaban 

acrecente" 
acrecentaste 
acrecent6 
acrecentamos 

acrecentas- 
teis 
acrecentaron 

Adestrar,  1. 

to  guide. 

conjugated 
like 
Acrecentar. 

Adherir,  3. 

to  adhere. 

conjugated 
like  Asentir. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


329 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE 
PRINCIPAL  IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS, 

NOTE.  —  The  number  put  after  the  Present  Infinitive  of  each  verb  indicates  the  Conjugation 
to  which  that  verb  belongs. 


FUTUEE. 

CON- 

IM- 

PKESENT 

SUB- 

IMPERFECT SUBJUNC- 
TIVE. 

FUTUEE 
SUB- 

DITIONAL. 

PERATIVE. 

JUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 

1.                    2. 

JUNCTIVE. 

abolire 

aboliria 

abol-iera            -iese 

aboliere 

abolirsis 

abolirias 

abol-ieras           -ieses 

abolieres 

abolird 

aboliria 

abol-iera            -iese 

aboliere 

aboliremos 

aboliriamos 

abol-ie"ramo8      -i6semos 

abolieremos 

abolir6is 

aboliria  is 

abolid 

abol-ierais         -ieseis 

aboliereis 

a  bo  lira  u 

abolirian 

abol-ieran          -iesen 

abolieren 

acordare' 

acordaria 

acuerde 

acord-ara            -ase 

acordare 

acordaraVs 

acordarias 

acuerda 

acuerdes 

acord-aras           -ases 

acordares 

acordara- 

acordaria 

acuerde 

acord-ara            -ase 

acordare 

acordaremos 

acordariamos 

acordenios 

acord-Aramos      -dsemos 

acorddremos 

acordar&s 

acordariais 

acordad 

acorde"is 

acord-arais          -aseis 

acordareis 

acordar&n 

acordarian 

ncuerden 

acord-aran          -asen 

acordaren 

j 

, 

,     , 

. 

tare 

acrecentards 

acrecentarias 

acrecienta 

acrecientes 

acrecent-aras      -ases 

acrecentares 

acrecentard 

acrecentaria 

acreciente 

acrecent-ara       -ase 

acrecentare 

acrecentare- 

acrec&ntaria- 

acrecente- 

acrecent-dramos-dsemos 

acrecentdre- 

mos 

mos 

mos 

mos 

acrecentare"is 

acrecentar- 

acrecentad 

acrecent^is 

acrecent-arais     -aseis 

acrecentareis 

iais 

acrecentar&n 

acrecentnrian 

acrecienten 

acrecent-aran      -asen 

arrecentaren 

330 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GEEUND. 

PAST 
PAETICIPLK. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PRETERIT. 

Adquirir,  3. 

to  acquire. 

adquiriendo 

adquirido 

adquiero 
adquieres 
adquiere 
adquirimos 
adquiris 
adquieren 

adquiria 
adquirias 
adqui7ia 
adquiriamos 
adquiriais 
ndquirfan 

adquirf 
adquiriste 
adquirio 
adquirimos 
adquiristeis 
adquirieron 

Aducir,  3. 

to  convey. 

See 
Conducir. 

Advertir,  3. 

to  advise. 

See 

Asentir. 

Agorar,  1. 

to  divine. 

See 
Acordar. 

Alentar,  1. 

to  encourage. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Almorzar,  1. 

to  breakfast. 

See 
Acordar. 

Andar,  1. 

to  walk. 

andando 

andado 

an  do 
andas 
anda 
andamos 
an  dais 
andan 

andaba 
andabas 
andaba 
anddbamos 
andabais 
andaban 

and  uve 
anduviste 
anduvo 
anduvimos 
anduvisteis 
anduvieron 

Apacentar,  I. 

to  graze. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Apostar,  1. 

to  bet. 

See 
Acordar. 

Aprobar,  1. 

to  approve. 

See 
Acordar. 

Apretar,  1. 

to  tighten. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Argiiir,  3. 

to  argue. 

See 
Instrulr. 

The  diaeresis  is  kept  in  all 
forms,  except  before  y. 

Arrecirse,  3. 

to  be  benumbed. 

See 
Abolir. 

Arrendar,  I. 
to  rent. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


331 


FUTURE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPERATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

TERMINATION 
1.                       2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

adquirire 
adquirirds 
adquirira 
adquiriremos 
adquirire  is 
adquirirdn 

adquiriria 
adquiririas 
adquiriria 
adquiririamos 
adquiririais 
adquiririan 

adquiere 
adquirid 

adquiera 
adquieras 
adquiera 
adquiramos 
adquirais 
adquieran 

adquir-iera            -iese 
adquir-ieras           -ieses 
adquir-iera            -iese 
adquir-ieramos     -ie'semos 
adquir-ierais         -ieseis 
adquir-ieran          -iesen 

adquiriere 
adquirieres 
adquiriere 
adquirie'remoe 
adquiriereis 
adquirieren 

an  dare 
andaras 
andara 
andaremos 
andare"is 
andaran 

andaria 
andarfas 
andaria 
andariamos 
andariais 
andarian 

anda 
andad 

ande 
andes 
ande 
andemos 
andeis 
anden 

and-uviera       -uviese 
«.nd-uvieras      -uvieses 
and-uviera       -uviese 
and-uvieramos-uviesemos 
and-uvierais    -uvieseis 
and-uvieran     -uviesen 

anduviere 
anduvieres 
anduviere 
anduvie"reinos 
anduviereis 
anduvieren 

332 


ALPHABETICAL    TABLE    OF    THE    PRINCIPAL 


E! 

PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

if 

"•  s 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PRETERIT. 

PH 

Arrepentirse,  3. 

See 

to  repent. 

Asentir. 

Ascender,  2. 

See 

to  ascend. 

Atender. 

Asentar,  1. 

See 

to  establish. 

Acrecentar. 

Asentir,  3. 

asintiendo 

asentido 

asiento 

asentia 

asenti 

to  acquiesce. 

asientes 

asentias 

asentiste 

asiente 

asentia 

asinti6 

asentimos 

asentiamos 

asentimos 

asentis 

asentiais 

asentisteis 

asienten 

as  en  t  inn 

asintieron 

Aserrar,  1. 

See 

to  saw. 

Acrecentar. 

Asestar,  1. 

See 

to  aim. 

Acrecentar. 

Asir,  3. 

asiendo 

asido 

asgo 

asia 

asi 

to  seize. 

ases 

asias 

asiste 

This   verb  is    used 

ase 

asia 

asi6 

only   in  a  meta- 

asimos 

asiamos 

asimos 

phorical  sense. 

asis 

asiais 

asisteis 

asen 

asian 

asieron 

Asolar,  1. 

See 

to  derastate. 

Acordar. 

Atender,  2. 

atendiendo 

ateudido 

atiendo 

atendia 

atendf 

to  mind. 

atiendes 

atendias 

atendiste 

atiende 

atendia 

atendio 

atendemos 

atendiamos 

atendimos 

atendeis 

atendiais 

atendisteis 

atienden 

atendian 

atendieron 

Atentar,  1. 

See 

to  attempt. 

Acrecentar. 

Aterrar,  1. 

See 

to  prostrate. 

Acrecentar. 

Atestar,  1. 

See 

to  crowd. 

Acrecentar, 

Atraer,  2. 

See 

to  attract. 

Traer. 

IRREGULAR    OR    DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


333 


~   '    J           |       fc. 

tit 

M 

FUTUBE. 

0 

•< 

H      > 
I      \ 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIV* 

If 

Q 

H 

rt    ^ 

S       S3 

R 

HH         ~ 

TERMINATION 

^      M 

0 
0 

D 

CO 

1.                        2. 

00 

asentire" 

asentiria 

asienta 

asint-iera           -iese 

asintiere 

asentirds 

asentirias 

asiente 

asientas 

asint-ieraa          -ieses 

asintieres 

asentird 

asentiria 

asienta 

asint-iera           -iese 

asintiere 

asentiremos 

asentiriamos 

asintamos 

asint-ieramos     -ie"semos 

asintieremos 

asentir&s 

asentiriais 

asentid 

asintdis 

asint-ierais         -ieseis 

asintiereis 

asentirdn 

asentirian 

asientan 

asint-ieran          -iesen 

asintieren 

asire 

asirfa 

asga 

asiera                 asiese 

asiere 

asirds 

asirias 

ase 

asgas 

asieras               asieses 

asieres 

asird 

asiria 

asga 

asiera                asiese 

asiere 

asiremos 

asiriamos 

asgamos 

asi6ramos          asiesemos 

asieremos 

asire  is 

asiriais 

asid 

asgdis 

asieraia              asieseis 

asiereis 

asirdn 

asirian 

asgan 

asierau              asiesen 

sieren 

atendere 

atenderia 

atienda 

atend-iera         -iese 

tendiere 

atenderds 

atenderias 

atiende 

atiendas 

atend-ieras        -ieses 

tendieres 

atenderd 

atenderia 

atienda 

atend-iera         -iese 

tendiere 

atenderemos 

atenderiarnos 

atendamos 

atend-i6ramos  -iesemoa 

tendteremos 

atendereis 

atenderiais 

atended 

atenddis 

atend-ierais       -ieseis 

tendiereis 

atenderdn 

atenderian 

atiendan 

atend-ieran       -iesen 

tendieren 

. 

334 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PEESENT 

PAST 

PRESENT 

IMPERFECT 

GEKUND. 

PRETERIT. 

INFINITIVE. 

PAKTICIPLE. 

INDICATIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 

Atravesar,  1. 

to  cross  over. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Aventar,  I. 

See 

to  fan.        , 

Acrecentar. 

Avergonzar,  1. 

See 

to  shame. 

Ac  or  dor. 

Bendecir,  3. 

bendiciendo 

bendito 

bendigo 

bendecia 

bendije 

to  bless. 

bendecido 

bendices 

bendecias 

bendijiste 

bendice 

bendecia 

bendijo 

bendecimos 

bendeciamos 

bendijimos 

bendecis 

bendeciais 

bendijisteis 

bendicen 

bendecian 

bendijeron 

Caber,  2. 

cabiendo 

cabido 

quepo 

cabia 

cupe 

to  be  contained. 

cabes 

cabias 

cupiste 

cabe 

cabfa 

cupo 

cabemos 

cabiamos 

cupimos 

cabe"is 

cabiais 

cupisteis 

caben 

cabian 

cupieron 

Caer,  2. 

cay  en  do 

caido 

caigo 

caia 

cai 

to  fall. 

caes 

caias 

caiste 

cae 

caia 

cay6 

caemos 

caiamos 

caimos 

ca6is 

caiais 

caisteia 

caen 

caian 

cayeron 

Calentar,  1. 

See 

to  warm. 

Acrecentar. 

Cegar,  1. 

See 

to  blind. 

Acrecentar. 

Cenir,  3. 

See 

to  ffird. 

Pedlr. 

Cerner,  2. 

See 

to  sift. 

Atender. 

Cerrar,  1. 

See 

to  close,  to  shut. 

Acrecentar. 

Cimentar,  1. 

See 

to  ground,  found. 

Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OR    DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


335 


J 

. 

rf 

£. 

H     > 

FUTUEE. 

0 

| 

H 

ri 

§  B 

1  I 

MPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

11 

CM 

£   3 

TERMINATION 

fa   3 

8 

^ 

cw 

1.                                  2. 

C/5 

bend- 

bend-              bend- 

bendecire" 

-eciria 

bendiga 

-ijera              -ijese 

bendijere 

bendecirds 

-ecirias 

bendice 

bendigas 

•ijeras             -ijeses 

bendijeres 

bendecird 

-eciria 

>endiga 

-ijera               -ijese 

bendijere 

bendeciremos 

-eciriamos 

)endigamos 

-ijerainos        -ijesemos 

bendijeremos 

bendecireis 

-eciriais 

bendecid 

bendigdis 

-ijerais            -ijeseis 

bendijereis 

bendecir&n 

-ecirian 

bendigan 

-ijeran             -ijesen 

bendijeren 

cab  re 

cabria 

quepa 

cupiera           cupiese 

cupiere 

cabras 

cabrias 

cabe 

quepas 

cupieras          cupieses 

cupieres 

cabra 

cabria 

quepa 

cupiera         .  cupiese 

cupiere 

cab  re  nio3 

cabriamos 

quepamos 

cupie"ramos     cupiesemos 

cupiereraos 

cabr6is 

cabriais 

cabed 

quepdis 

cupierais         cupieseis 

cupiereis 

cabran 

cabrian 

quepan 

cupieran         cupiesen 

cupieren 

caere* 

caeria 

caiga 

cayera            cayese 

cayere 

caerds 

caerias 

cae 

caigas 

cay  eras            cayeses 

cayerea 

caera" 

caeria 

caiga 

cayera            cayese 

cayere 

caeremos 

caeriamos 

caigamos 

cay6ramos      cayesemos 

cayeremos 

caereis 

caeriais 

caed 

caigais 

cayerais          cayeseis 

cayereis 

caerdn 

caerian 

caigan 

cayeran           cayesen 

cayeren 

336 


ALPHABETICAL    TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

Cocer,  2. 

to  boil. 

cociendo 

cocido 

cuezo 
cueces 
cuece 
cocemos 
coceis 
cuecen 

cocia 
cocias 
cocia 
cociamos 
cociais 
cocian 

COCl 

cociste 
coci6 
cocimos 
cocisteis 
cocieron 

Colar,  1. 

to  strain. 

See 
Acordar. 

Colegir,  3. 

to  collect. 

See 
Pedir. 

-Colgar,  1. 

to  hang. 

See 
Acordar. 

Comedirse,  3. 

to  govern  oneself. 

See 
Pedir. 

Comenzar,  I. 
to  commence. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Competir,  3. 

to  compete. 

See 
Pedir. 

Concebir,  3. 
to  conceive. 

See 
Pedir. 

Concernir,  3. 
to  concern. 

See 

Asentir. 

Concertar,  1. 

to  concert. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Concordar,  1. 
to  agree. 

See 
Acordar. 

Condescendftr,2. 
to  condescend. 

See 
Atender. 

Condolerse,  2. 

to  condole. 

See 
Mover. 

Conducir,  3. 

to  conduct. 

conduciendo 

conducido 

conduzco 
conduces 
conduce 
conducimos 
conducis 
conducen 

conducia 
conducias 
conducia 
conduclamos 
conduciais 
conducfan 

conduje 
condujiste 
condujo 
condujimos 
condujisteis 
condujeron 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


337 


FUTUEE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPERATIVE. 

PEESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1.                        2. 

FUTUEE 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

coceve 
cocerds 
cocera 
coceremos 
coeereis 
cocerdn 

cocerla 
cocerfas 
cocerfa 
cocerlamos 
cocerfais 
cocerian 

cuece 
coced 

cueza 
cuezas 
cueza 
cozamos 

cozais 
cuezan 

cociera              cociese 
cocieras            cocieses 
cociera              cociese 
coci6ramos        coci6semos 
cocierais           cocieseis 
cocieran            cociesen 

cociere 
cocieres 
cociere 
cocieremos 
cociereis 
cocieren 

conducir6 
conducir&s 
conducird 
conduciremos 
conducireMs 
conducir£n 

conduciria 
conducirfas 
conduciria 
conduciriamos 
conducirfais 
conducirlan 

conduce 
conducic 

conduzca 
conduzcas 
conduzca 
conduzcamos 
conduzcdis 
conduzcan 

condu-jera           -jese 
condu-jeras          -jesea 
condu-jera           -jese 
condu-j6ramos      -jesemos 
condu-jerais         -jeseis 
condu-jeran          -jesen 

condujere 
condujeres 
condujere 
condujeremos 
condujereis 
condujeren 

22 


338 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   1'EINCIPAL 


PRESENT 

INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PABTICI^^E. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

Coaferir,  3. 

to  confer 

See 
Asentir. 

Confesar,  1. 

to  confess. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Conocer,  2. 

to  knowt  to  be  ac- 
quainted with. 

couociendo 

conocido 

conozco 
conoces 
conoce 
conocemos 
conoc6is 
conocen 

conocla 
conocias 
conocla 
conociamos 
conoclais 
conocfan 

couool 
conociste 
conoci6 
conocimos 
conocisteis 
conocieron 

Conseguir,  3. 

to  obtain. 

See 
Pedlr. 

Consentir,  3. 

to  consent. 

See 
Aaentir. 

Con  solar,  1. 

to  comfort. 

See 
Acordar. 

Constrefiir,  3. 

to  constrain. 

See 
Pedir. 

Contar,  1. 

to  count. 

See 
Acordar. 

Contener,  2. 

to  contain. 

See 
Tener. 

Contender,  2. 

to  contend. 

See 
Atender. 

Contradecir,  3. 
to  contradict. 

See 
Decir. 

Controvertir,  3. 

to  controvert. 

See 

Asentir. 

Contraer,  2. 

to  contract. 

See 
Traer. 

Convertir,  3. 

to  convert. 

See 
Asentir. 

Corregir,  3. 

to  correct. 

See 
Pedir. 

Cnbrir,  3. 

to  cover. 

cubierto 

Regular  in 
all  other 
tenses. 

1 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE   VEBBS. 


339 


FUTURE. 

CON- 
DITIONAL. 

IMPER- 
ATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPEBFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

TERMINATION 
1.                      2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

conocere 
conoceras 
conocerd 
conoceremos' 
conocere"is 
conocerdn 

conoceria 
conocerias 
conoceria 
conoceriamos 
conocerlais 
conocerlan 

conoce 
conoced 

conozca 
conozcas 
conozca 
conozcamos 
eonozcais 
conozcan 

conoc-iera             -iese 
conoc-ieras           -ieses 
conoc-iera            -iese 
conoc-i6ramos      -i6semos 
conoc-ierais          -ieseis 
conoc-ieran           -ieseu 

conociere 
conocieres 
conociere 
conocieremos 
conociereis 
conocieren 

340 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 

PAST 

PKESENT 

IMPEKFECT 

INFINITIVE. 

GEEUND. 

PABTICIPLE. 

INDICATIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 

PKETEKIT. 

Bar,  1. 

to  give. 

dan  do 

dado 

doy 
das 

daba 
dabas 

df 

diste 

da 

daba 

di6 

damos 

ddbamos 

dimos 

dais 

dabais 

disteis 

dan 

daban 

dieron 

Decaer,  2. 

See 

to  decay. 

Caer. 

Decentar,  1. 

See 

to  commence  with. 

Acrecentar. 

Decir,  3. 

diciendo 

dicho 

digo 

decla 

dije 

to  tell,  to  say. 

dices 

decias 

dijiste 

dice 

decla 

dijo 

decimos 

deciamos 

dijimos 

decfs 

decfais 

dijisteis 

dicen 

declan 

dijeron 

Deducir, 

See 

to  deduct. 

Conducir. 

Defender,  2. 

See 

to  defend. 

Atender. 

Beferir,  3. 

See 

to  defer. 

Asentir. 

Degollar,  1. 

See 

to  behead. 

Acordar. 

Demoler,  2. 

See 

to  demolish. 

Mover. 

Demostrar,  1. 

See 

to  demonstrate. 

Acordar. 

Dene  gar,  1. 

See 

to  deny. 

Acrecentar. 

Denostar.  I, 

See 

to  abuse. 

Acordar. 

.  Derrengar,  1. 

See 

to  hate. 

Acrecentar. 

•  Derretir,  3. 

See 

to  melt. 

Fedir. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


341 


FUTUEE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPKEATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPEEFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
TERMINATION 

1.                                 2. 

FUTUEE 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

dare 
daras 
dari 
daremos 
dareis 
darin 

daria 
darlas 
daria 

darlamos 
dariais 
darfan 

da 
dad 

d« 

des 
fll 

demos 
deis 
den 

diera             diese 
dieras            dieses 
diera             diese 
dieramos       diesenios 
dierais           dieseis 
dieran           diesen 

die  re 
dieres 
diere 
die'remos 
diereis 
dieren 

• 

, 

dire" 
dirfe 
dird 
direraos 
dir6is 
diran 

diria 
dirias 
diria 
diriamos 
dirfais 
dirfan 

di 
decid 

diga 
digas 
diga 
digamos 

digais 
digan 

dijera            dijese 
dijeras           dijeses 
dijera            dijese 
dije'ramos     dije"semos 
dijerais          dijeseis 
dijeran          dijesen 

dijere 
dijeres 
dijere 
dijeremos 
dijereis 
dijeren 

842 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


- 

- 

PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPATE 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PRETERIT. 

Desavenir,  3. 

to  disagree. 

See 
Venir. 

Descender,  2. 

to  descend. 

See 
Atender. 

Descollar,  1. 
to  exceed. 

See 
Acordar. 

Descordar,  1. 

to  uncord  an  in- 
strument. 

See 
Acordar. 

Descomedirse,  3. 
to  be  rude. 

See 
Pedir. 

Describir,  3. 

to  describe. 

descrito 

Regular    in 
all  the  oth- 
er tenses. 

Desflocar,  1. 

to  remove  flakes. 

See 
Acordar. 

Deshacer,  2. 

to  undo. 

See 
Hacer. 

Deshelar,  1. 

to  thaw. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Desleir,  3. 

to  dilute. 

See 
Befr. 

Desolar,  1. 

to  desolate. 

See 
Acordar. 

Desollar,  1. 
toflay. 

See 
Acordar. 

Desovar,  1. 
to  spawn. 

See 
Acordar. 

Despedir,  3. 

to  dismiss. 

See 
Pedir. 

Despernar,  1. 

to  break  or  cut  off 
one's  legs. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Despertar,  1. 

to  awake. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

(Desterrar,  1. 
to  banish. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


343 


FUTUBE. 

CON- 
DITIONAL 

IMPERATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1.                         2. 

FUTUKE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

344 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

,   P 

OT          o 

*          § 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PRETERIT. 

Desplegar,  1. 
to  unfold. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Desvergonzarse, 

2.  to  act  impudently 

See 
Acordar. 

Dezmar,  1. 
to  tithe. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Diferir,  3. 

to  delay. 

See 
Asentir. 

Digerir,  3. 

to  digest. 

See 
Asentir. 

Discernir,  3. 

to  discern. 

See 
Aaentir. 

Discordar,  1. 

to  disagree. 

See 
Acordar. 

Disolver,  2. 

to  dissolve. 

See 
Mover. 

Divertir,  3. 

to  amuse. 

See 
Asentir. 

Doler,  2. 

to  ache. 

See 
Mover. 

Dormir,  3. 

to  sleep. 

durmiendo 

dormido 

duermo 
duermes 
duerine 
donnimos 
dorrnis 
duerrnen 

dorm  a 
dorm  as 
dorm  a 
dorm  anios 
dorm  ais 
dorm  an 

dormi 
dormiste 
durmi6 
donnimos 
dormisteis 
durmieron 

Elegir,  3. 

to  elect. 

See 
Pedlr. 

'Embestir,  3. 

to  attack,  to  assail. 

See 
Pedir. 

Empedrar,  1. 

to  pave. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Empezar,  1. 

to  begin. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Emporcar,  1. 

to  soil. 

See 
Acordar. 

IRREGULAR   OR  DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


345 


FUTURE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPERATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1.                        2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

dormire 
dormirds 
dormird 
dormiremos 
dornrireis 
dormi'-a'n 

dorrairfa 
dormirfas 
dorniiria 
dormfamos 
dormfais 
dorm  Ian 

duerme 
dormid 

duerma 
duermas 
duerma 
durmarnos 
durmdis 
duerman 

durm-iera           -iese 
durrn-ieras         -ieses 
durm-iera           -iese 
durm-ieramos    -i6seraos 
durin-ierais        -ieseis 
durm-ieran         -iesen 

durrniere 
durmieres 
durmiere 
durraiereinos 
durmiereis 
durmieren 

346 


ALPHABETICAL    TABLE    OF    THE    PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PRETERIT. 

Encender,  2. 

to  light. 

See 

Atender. 

-•Encensar,  1. 

to  perfume  (with  in- 
cense). 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Encerrar,  1. 

to  shut  in,  to  inclose. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Encomendar,  1. 
to  recommend. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Encontrar,  1. 
to  meet. 

See 

Acordar. 

Encordar,  1. 
to  put  strings  and 
cords  (to    an  in- 
strument). 

See 
Acordar. 

Engrefrse,  3. 

to  adorn  one's  self. 

See 

Rei'r. 

-Engrosar,  1. 

to  fatten. 

See 
Acordar. 

Enmendar,  1. 

to  correct. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Enrodar,  1. 

to  break  on  the  wheel 

See 
Acordar. 

Ensangrentar,  1. 

to  stain  with  blood. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Entender,  2. 

to  understand. 

See 
Atender. 

Enterrar,  1. 

to  bury. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Envestir,  3. 

to  invest. 

See 
Pedir. 

Erguir,  3. 

to  hold  up  the  head. 

irguiendo 

erguido 

yergo 

yergues 
yergue 
erguimos 
erguls 
yerguen 

ergula 
ergufas 
ergula 
ergula  mos 
erguiais 
ergulan 

ergul 
erguiste 
irgui6 
erguimos 
erguisteis 
irguieron 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


347 


FUTUEK. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPKKATIVE. 

PEESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

TERMINATION 
1.                        2. 

FUTUEE 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

erguire 
erguhis 
erguird 
erguiremos 
erguireis 
erguirdn 

erguirfa 
erguirfas 
erguirla 
erguilamos 
ergurlais 
ergurlnn 

vergue 
erguid 

yerga 
yergas 
yerga 
irgamos 
irgdis 
yergaa 

rgu-iera             -iese 
rgu-ieras            -ieses 
rgu-iera             -iese 
rgu-i6ramos       -i^semos 
rgu-ierais           -ieseis 
rgu-ieran            -iesen 

rguiere 
rguieres 
rguiere 
rguieremos 
rguiereia 
rguieren 

348 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PAETICTPLK 

PEE  SENT 
INDICATIVE 

IMPEEFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PEETERIT. 

Errar,  1. 

to  err. 

errando 

errado 

yerro 
yerras 
yerra 
erramoa 

erra  is 
yerran 

erraba 
errabas 
erraba 

errabaruos 
errabais 
erraban 

erre 
erraste 
err6 
erramos 
errasteis 
erraron 

Escarmentar,  1. 
to  correct. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Escocer,  2. 

to  irritate. 

See 
Cocer. 

Escribir,  3. 

to  write. 

Regular  in  al 
the    other 
tenses. 

escrito 

Esforzar,  1. 

to  strengthen. 

See 

Acordar. 

Estar,  1. 
to  be. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  152). 

Excluir,  3. 

to  exclude. 

See 

Instruir. 

Estrenir,  3. 

to  bind. 

See 
Pedlr. 

Extender,  2. 

to  extend. 

See 

Atender. 

Expedir,  3. 

to  expedite. 

See 
Pedlr. 

Forzar,  1. 

to  force. 

See 
Acordar. 

Fregar,  1. 

to  cleanse. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Freir,  3. 

to  fry. 

See 

Relr. 

frito 
freido 

Gemir,  3. 

to  groan. 

See 
Pedir. 

Gobernar,  1. 

to  govern. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


349 


FUTUHE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

| 

• 

3 

PEESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1.                        2. 

FUTUEE 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

errar6 
erraras 
errara 
erraremos 
errare"is 
erraran 

errarfa 
errarlas 
errarla 
errarfamos 
errariais 
errarian 

yerra 
errad 

yerre 
yerres 
yerre 
erremos 
erreis 
yerren 

errara             errase 
erraras           errases 
errara            errase 
erraramos       errasemos 
errarais           erraseis 
erraran          errasen 

errare 
errares 
errare 
erraremos 
errareis 
erraren 

350 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE    OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


^ 

PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 

IMPERFECT 

PRETERIT. 

Haber,  2. 

to  have. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  136.) 

Hacer,  2. 

to  make,  to  do. 

haciendo 

hecho 

ha  go 
haces 
hace 
hacemos 

naceis 
hacen 

hacla 
hacfas 
hacfa 
hacfamos 
haciais 
haclan 

hice 
hiciste 
hizo' 
hicimos 
hicisteis 
hicieron 

-Heder,  2. 

to  stink. 

See 

Atender. 

Helar,  1. 
to  freeze. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Henchir,  3. 

to  stuff. 

See 
Pedir. 

Render,  2. 

to  split. 

See 

Atender. 

Hefiir,  3. 

to  knead. 

See 
Pedir. 

Herir,  3. 

to  wound. 

See 

Asentir. 

Herrar,  1. 

to  shoe. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Hervir,  3. 

to  boil. 

See 

Asentir. 

Holgar,  1. 

to  rest. 

See 
Acordar. 

Hollar,  1. 

to  depress. 

See 
Acordar. 

Impedir,  3. 

to  impede. 

See 
Pedir. 

Imprimir,  3. 

to  print. 

See 
Instruir. 

irupreso 
irr,  part. 

Regular  in  all 
the    other 
tenses. 

Incensar,  1. 

to  incense. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


FUTUKK. 

CONDITIONAL 

PRESENT 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1                         2 

FUTUEB 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

hare1 
hards 
hara 
haremos 
har&s 
haian 

harfa 
harias 
harfa 
hariamos 
hariais 
harfan 

haz 
haced 

haga 
hagas 
haga 
hagamos 
hagdis 
hagan 

hiciera           hiciese 
hicieras          hicieses 
hiciera           hiciese 
hicieramos     hici6semos 
hicierais         hicieseis 
hicieran         hiciesen 

hiciere 
hicierea 
hiciere 
hicieremos 
hicierefs 
hicieren 

352 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 

PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE 

PRETERIT. 

Incluir,  3. 

to  include. 

See 
Instruir. 

Inducir,  3. 

to  induce. 

See 

Conducir. 

Inf  erir,  3. 

to  infer. 

See 

Asentir. 

Inquirir,  3. 

to  inquire. 

See 
Adqolrir. 

Instruir,  3. 

to  instruct. 

instruyendo 

instruido 

instruyo 
instruyes 
instruye 
instruimos 
mstrufs 
instruyen 

instrufa 
mstrufas 
instrufa 
instrufamos 
instrufais 
instrulan 

instruf 
instruiste 
mstruy6 
instruimos 

instruisteis 
instruyeron 

Introducir,  3. 
to  introduce. 

See 

Conducir. 

Invernar,  1. 
to  winter. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Invertir,  3. 

to  invert. 

See 

Asentir. 

Investir,  3. 
to  invest. 

See 
Pedir. 

Ingerir,  3. 
to  intermeddle. 

See 
Aaentir. 

Ir,3. 

to  go. 

yendo 

ido 

voy 
vas 
va 
vamos 

vais 
van 

iba 
ibas 
iba 

fbamos 
ibais 
iban 

ful 

fuiste 
fu6 
fuimos 
fuisteis 
fueron 

Jugar,  1. 
to  play. 

jugaudo 

jugado 

juego 
juegas 
juega 
jugamos 
jugdis 
juegan 

jugaba 
jugabas 
jugaba 
jug&bamos 
jugabaia 
.jugaban 

jugu6 
jugaste 
jugci 
jugamos 
jugasteis 
jugaron 

Llover,  2. 

to  rain. 

See 
Mover. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


353 


J 

. 

1 

H  . 

£    | 

FUTUEE 

FUTUEE. 

| 

0 

W         j5 

IMPEEFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Q 

H 

rt      ^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

• 

PH        m 

TERMINATION 

O 
CJ 

P 
to 

1.                                 2. 

instruire 

instruiria 

instruya 

instru-yera            -yese 

instruye  re 

instruirds 

iustruirias 

instruye 

instruvas 

instra-yeras          -yeses 

instruyeres 

instruira 

instruiria 

instruya 

instru-yera           -yese 

instruyere 

instruirenio.* 

instruiriamos 

instruyamos 

instru-yeramos     -ye"semos 

iustruyeremos 

instruire'is 

instruiriais 

instruid 

instruydis 

instru-yerais         -yeseis 

instruyereis 

instruiran 

instruirian 

instruyan 

mstru-yeran         -yesen 

instruyeren 

ir6 

irla 

vaya 

fuera                  fuese 

fuere 

iris 

irfas 

ve 

vayas 

fueras                 fueses 

fueres 

ir& 

irfa 

vaya 

fuera                  fuese 

fuere 

iremos 

iiiamos 

vayamos 

fue'ramos             fu6semos 

fue'remos 

ir6ia 

irlais 

id 

vay&is 

fuerais                fueseis 

fuereis 

Iran 

irian 

vayan 

fueran                fuesen 

fueren 

jugare" 

jugarla 

juege 

jugara                jugase 

jugare 

jugaras 

jugarfas 

juega 

juegues 

jugaras               jugases 

jugares 

jugara 

jugarla 

juege 

jugura                jugase 

iugare 

jugaremos 

jugariamos 

juguemos 

jugiramos          jugdsemos 

iugdremos 

jugar&s 

jugarfais 

jugad 

jugu&s 

jugarais              jugaseis 

jugareis 

jugaran 

jugaiian 

lueguen 

jugaran               jugasen 

jugaren 

354 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE    OF   THE    PRINCIPAL 


-„  . 

-  — 
-  -- 

- 

PEESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

B  i 

Q*3  H  «. 

1  « 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPEKFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PKETERIT. 

Maldecir,  3. 

to  detract. 

See 
Bendecir. 

Manifestar,  1. 

to  manifest. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Mantener,  2. 

to  support. 

See 
Tener. 

Medir,  1. 

to  measure. 

See 
Pedir. 

Mentar,  1. 

to  mention. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Mentir,  3. 

to  lie. 

See 

Asentir. 

Merendar,  1. 

to  take  a  collation. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

-Moler,  1. 

to  grind. 

See 
Mover. 

Morder,  3. 

to  bite. 

See 
Mover. 

Morir,  3. 

to  die. 

muriendo 

inuerio 

muero 
mueres 
muere 
nioriraos 
moils 
mueren 

moria 
niorlas 
moila 
nioriamos 
morlais 
morlan 

moil 
moriste 
muri6 
morimos 
moristeis 
murieron 

Mostrar,  1. 

t<>  show. 

See 
Acordar. 

Mover,  2. 

to  move. 

moviendo 

movido 

muevo 
ni  neves 
mueve 
movemos 
movers 
mueven 

rnovla 
movlas 
mo  via 
movfamos 
tno\fais 
mo\  Ian 

movl 
jioviste 
movi6 
movimos 
movisteis 
movieron 

Negar,  1. 

to  deny. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Nevar,  1. 

to  snow. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR    OK    DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


355 


FUTURE. 

CONDITIONAL 

IMPERATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1.                        2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJINCTIVK. 

- 

morire 
morirds 
niorirA 
rnoriremos 
morireis 
morir&n 

morirla 
moririas 
morirfa 
morirlamos 
mori  riais 
moririan 

inuere 
niorid 

inucra 
rnueras 
muera 
muramos 
nmrdis 
mueran 

nmr-iera            -iese 
nmr-ieras          -ieses 
mur-iera           -iese 
mur-ieramos     -iesemos 
rnur-ierais         -ieseis 
mur-ieran         -iesen 

muriere 
murieres 
muriere 
murieremos 
muriereis 
murieren 

mover  6 
moveris 
inoverd, 
nioveremos 
niovereis 
moverAn 

moveria 
moveria  s 
moveria 
moverlamos 
moverlais 
moveilan 

mueve 
moved 

mue\a 
muevas 
mueva 
movamos 
mov^is 
muevan 

mov-iera            -iese 
mov-ieras          -ieses 
mov-iera           -iese 
mov-ieramos     -iesemos 
mov-ierais         -ieseis 
mov-ieran          -iesen 

moviere 
movieres 
moviere 
movieremos 
moviereis 
movieren 

356 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 

H! 

PRESENT 

IMPERFECT 

GERUND. 

23   S 

PRETERIT. 

INFINITIVE. 

^    S 

INDICATIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pi 

Oir,  3. 

oyendo 

ofdo 

oigo 

ofa 

of 

tu  hear. 

oyea 

ofas 

oiste 

oye 

oia 

oy6 

ofnios 

ofamos 

ofmos 

ois 

oiais 

ofsteis 

oyen 

oian 

oyeron 

Oler,  2. 

to  smell. 

oliendo 

olido 

huelo 
hueles 

olla 
ollas 

oil 

oliste 

huele 

olfa 

olio 

olemos 

olfamos 

olimos 

oleis 

olfais 

olisteis 

huelen 

olian 

olieron 

Pedir,  3. 

to  ask  for. 

pidiendo 

pedido 

pido 
pides 

pedfa 
pedfas 

pedf 
pediste 

pide 

pedfa 

pidi6 

pedimos 

pedfamos 

pedimos 

pedfs 

pedfais 

pedisteis 

piden 

pedfan 

pidieron 

Pensar,  1. 

to  think. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Perder,  2. 

See 

to  lose. 

Atender. 

Pervertir,  3. 

See 

to  pervert. 

Asentir. 

Placer,  2. 

place 

placfa 

plugo  6  placio 

imp.,  to  please. 

Plegar,  1. 

to  plait  or  fold. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Poblar,  1. 

to  people. 

See 
Acordar. 

IRREUULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


857 


J 

2 

> 

o 

H 

PRESENT 

FUTUEE 

FUTURE. 

B 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

a 

3 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

§ 

TERMINATION 

5 

« 

1.                        2* 

oire* 

oirla 

oiga 

oyera               oyese 

oyere 

oiris 

oirias 

oye 

oigas 

oyeras              oyeses 

oyeres 

oird 

oirla 

oiga 

oyera              oyese 

oyere 

oiremos 

iriamos 

oigamos 

oy6ramos         oyesemos 

oye*remos 

oireis 

oirfais 

old 

oigais 

oyerais            oyeseis 

oyereis 

oirdn 

oirian 

oigau 

oyeran             oyesen 

oyeren 

olere" 
olerds 

oleria 
olerfas 

huele 

huela 
huelas 

oliera              oliese 
olieras             olieses 

oliere 
olieres 

oleri 

olerla 

huela 

oliera              oliese 

oliere 

oleremos 

olerlamos 

olamos 

olieramos        oli^semos 

olieremos 

oler^is 

pie  rials 

oled 

olais 

olierais           olieseis 

oliereis 

olerin 

olerian 

huelan 

olieran            oliesen 

olieren 

pedire 
pedirds 

pediria 
pedhias 

pide 

pi  da 
pidas 

pidiera          pidiese 
pidieras         pidieses 

pidiere 
pidieres 

pedirA 

pediria 

pida 

pidiera          pidiese 

pidiere 

pediremos 

pediiiamos 

pidamos 

pidieramos    pidi6semos 

pidiea-emos 

pedireis 

pedirlais 

pedid 

pidais 

pidierais        pidieseis 

pidiereis 

pedirin 

pedirian 

pidan 

pidieran        pidiesen 

pidieren 

placera 

placeria 

plegue 

plega 

pluguiera        pluguiese 

pluguiere 

plegue 

placiera           placiese 

placiere 

plazca 

358 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE    OF    THE    PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 

RJ 

PRESENT 

IMPEBFECT 

GERUND. 

<              hH 

PRETEBIT. 

INFINITIVE. 

£ 

INDICATIVE 

INDICATIVE 

Poder,  2. 

to  be  able. 

pudiendo 

podido 

puedo 
puedes 

podfa 
podias 

pude 
pudiste 

puede 

podia 

pudo 

podemos 

podlamos 

pudimos 

podeis 

podlais 

pudisteis 

pueden 

podian 

pudieron 

Podrir,  3. 

to  rot. 

pudriendo 

podrido 

pudro 
pudres 

pod  via 
podrlas 

podrl 
podriste 

pudre 

podrla 

pudri6 

podrimos 

podrlamos 

podrimos 

podris 

podriais 

podristeis 

pud  r  en 

podiian 

pudrieron 

Poner,  :B. 

to  put. 

poniendo 

puesto 

pongo 
pones 

ponie 
ponfas 

puse 
pusiste 

pone 

ponla 

puso 

ponemos 

ponfanios 

pusimos 

pone"is 

ponlais 

pusisteis 

poneu 

ponlan 

pusieron 

Pref  erir,  3. 

See 

to  prefer. 

Asentir. 

Prender,  2. 

to  take. 

legularinalJ 
the    other 

prendido 
preso 

tenses. 

Prescribir,  3. 

to  prescribe. 

prescrito 
irr.  part. 

Regular  in  all 
the    other 
tenses. 

Probar,  1. 

See 

to  try. 

Acordar. 

Producir,  3. 

See 

to  produce. 

Conducir. 

Proferir,  3. 

See 

to  proffer. 

Asentir. 

Proscribir,  3. 

to  proscribe. 

proscrito 
irr.  part. 

legular  in  all 
the    other 
tenses 

Quebrar,  1. 

See 

to  break. 

Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


359 


J 

pi 

>• 

0 

H 

PRESENT 

FUTURE 

EuruaE. 

B 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

B 

3 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

TERMINATION 

0 

o 

3 

1.                       2. 

pod  re 

podria 

pueda 

pudiera            pudiese 

pudiere 

podrds 

.  podrlas 

puedas 

pudieras           pudieses 

pudieres 

podra 

podria 

pueda 

pudiera            pudiese 

pudiere 

podremos 

podriamos 

podamos 

pudieramos      pudiesemos 

pudieremos 

podreis 

podriais 

poddis 

pudierais           pudieseis 

pudiereis 

podrdn 

podrian 

puedan 

pudieran           pudiesen 

pudieren 

podrire 
pod  ri  i  ds 

podriria 
podririhs 

pudre 

pudra 
pudras 

pudriera          pudriese 
pudrieras         pudrieses 

pudriere 
pudrieres 

podriid 

podriria 

pudra 

pudriera          pudriese 

pudriere 

podrircruos 

podririamos 

pudramos 

pudrieramos  pudriesemos 

pudrieremos 

podrireis 

podriria  is 

podrid 

pudrdis 

pudrierais       pudrieseis 

pudriereis 

podriidu 

podririan 

pudran 

pudrieran        pudriesen 

pudrieren 

pond  re 
pond  ids 

pondrfa 
pondifas 

pon 

ponga 
pongas 

pusiera              pusiese 
pusieras            pusieses 

pusiere 
pusieres 

pondrd 

pondrfa 

ponga 

pusiera              pusiese 

pusiere 

pondremos 

pondriamos 

pongamos 

pusieramos       pusiesemos 

pusieremos 

pondr6is 

pondrfais 

poned 

pongAis 

:>usierais            pusieseis 

pusiereis 

pondrdn 

pondrian 

pongan 

pusieran            pusiesen 

pusieren 

! 

1 

360 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE    OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

Querer,  2. 

to  will. 

queriendo 

querido 

quiero 
quieres 
quiere 
queremos 
quere"is 
quieren 

querfa 
querlas 
queiia 
querfamos 
querlais 
querlan 

quise 
quisiste 
quiso 
quisimos 
quisisteis 
quisieron 

Baer,  2. 

to  erase. 

See 
Caer. 

Eecomendar,  1. 

to  recommend. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Becordar,  1. 

to  remind. 

See 
Acordar. 

Eecostar,  1. 

to  recline. 

See 
Acordar. 

Beducir,  3. 

to  reduce. 

See 
Conducir. 

Kef  erir,  3. 

to  refer. 

See 

Asentir. 

-Begar,  1. 

to  water. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Begir,  3. 

to  rule. 

See 
Pedir. 

Begoldar,  1. 

to  belch. 

See 
Acordar. 

Beir,  3. 

to  laugh. 

rieudo 

reldo 

rlo 
rles 
rle 
relraos 
reis 
rlen 

rela 
reias 
rela 
relamos 
relais 
relan 

rei 
reiste 
ri6 
refmos 
relsteis 
rieron 

-Bemendar,  1. 

to  mend. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Bendir,  3. 

to  surrender. 

See 
Pedir. 

Benovar,  1. 

to  renew. 

See 
Acordar. 

IRREGULAR   OR    DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


361 


FUTURE. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPERATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVR 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 

1.                        2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

querr6 
querr&s 
querr& 
querremos 
querr&s 
querrin 

querrfa 
querrfas 
querrfa 
querrfamos 
querrfais 
querrfan 

quiere 
quered 

quiera 
quieras 
quiera 
queramos 
querdis 
quieran 

quisiera         quisiese 
quisieras        quisieses 
quisiera         quisiese 
quisieramos  quisiesemos 
quisierais       quisieseis 
quisieran       quisiesen 

quisiere 
quisieres 
quisiere 
quisieremos 
quisiereis 
quisieren 

reir6 
reir4s 
reird 
reiremos 
reirels 
reirAn 

reirla 
reirfas 
reirfa 
reirfamos 
reirfais 
reirfan 

rfe 
reid 

rfa 

rias 
rfa 

riamos 
riais 
rfan 

riera                   riese 
rieras                  rieaes 
riera                  riese 
rieramos             ri^semos 

rierais                  ricseis 
rieran                 riesen 

riere 
rieres 
riere 
rieremos 
riereis 
rieren 

362 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 

PARTICIPLE 

PRESENT 

INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

Kenir,  3. 

to  wrangle. 

See 
Pedir 

Kepetir,  3. 

to  repeat. 

See 
Pedir. 

Kequebrar,  1. 

to  court. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Eequerir,  3. 

to  uotify. 

See 

Asentir. 

Kescontrar,  1. 

to  compensate. 

See 
Acordar. 

Resollar,  1. 

to  respire. 

See 
Acordar. 

'Ueventar,  1. 

to  burst. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Bevolcar,  1. 

to  wallow. 

See 
Acordar. 

Kodar,  1. 

to  roll. 

See 
Acordar. 

Boer,  2. 

to  gnaw. 

See 
Caer. 

Ho  gar,  1. 

to  entreat. 

See 
Acordar. 

• 

Romper,  2. 

to  break. 

Regular  in  all 
the    other 

lenses. 

rompido 
roto 

Saber,  2. 

to  know. 

sabiendo 

sabido 

s6 
sabes 
sabe 
saberaos 
sab&s 
saben 

sabfa 
sabias 
sabfa 
sabfamos 
sabfais 
sabian 

supe 
supiste 
supo 

supinios 
supistcis 
supieron 

Salir,  3. 

to  go  out. 

saliendo 

salido 

salgo 
sales 
sale 
salimos 
salfs 
salen 

salfa 
sa'las 
salfa 
sallamos 
sa  If  His 
salfan 

salt 

saliste 
salio 
saliraos 
salisteis 
salieron 

Satisfacer,  2. 

to  satisfy. 

See 
Hacer. 

But  chang- 
ing the   / 
to/ 

IRKKGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


363 


r 

FUTUBK. 

CON- 
DITIONAL. 

IM- 

PKBAT1VE. 

PRESENT 
SUB- 
JUNCTIVE. 

IMPKEFECT  SUBJUNC- 
TIVE. 

TERMINATION 

1.                               2. 

Fl.'TUBB 
SUB- 
JUNCTIVE. 

sa  >re 
sa  jr4s 
sa  >r& 
sa  )remos 
sa  >reis 
sa  udn 

sabrla 
sabiias 
sabrfa 
sabrlamos 
sabrlais 
sabrian 

sabe 
sabed 

sepa 
sepas 
sepa 
sepamos 

si'!  Ais 
sepan 

supiera          supiese 
supieras         supieses 
supiera          supiese 
supieramos  supi6semos 
supierais        supieseis 
supieran        supiesen 

supiere 
supieres 
supiere 
supi6ramos 
supiereis 
supieren 

saldre" 
saldr&s 
saldrA 
saldremos 
saldreis 
saldrAn 

saldrfa 
saldrfas 
saldfla 
saldrla.mos 
saldil  us 
said  t  fin 

sal 
salid 

saiga 
saigas 
saiga 
salgamos 
sal«4is 
salgan 

saliera           saliese 
salieras          salieses 
saliera            saliese 
salieramos    saliesemos 
salierats         salieseis 
salieran         saliesen 

saliere 
salieres 
saliere 
salieremos 
saliereis 
salieren 

«atisf'ace  or 
^atisfay,  (-2(1 
pers.  sing.) 

364 


ALPHABETICAL    TABLE   OF    THE   PRINCIPAL 


- 

PEESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GEBUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PKESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPEKFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PEETEBIT. 

Segar,  1. 

to  reap. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Seguir,  3. 

to  follow. 

See 
Pedir. 

Sembrar,  1. 

to  sow. 

See 

Acrecentar. 

Sentar,  1. 
to  become. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Sentir,  3 

to  feel. 

See 
Aaentir. 

Ser,  2. 
to  be. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  136.) 

Servir,  3. 

to  serve. 

See 
Pedir. 

Serrar,  1. 

to  saw. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Soldar,  1. 

to  solder. 

See 
Acordar. 

-Soler,  2. 

to  be  accustomed. 

suelo 
sueles 
suele 

solemos 
soleis 
suelen 

solfa 

solfas 

solia 
solfamos 

soliais 
so  11  an 

Solver,  2. 

to  loosen. 

See 
Mover. 

suelto 
irr.  part. 

Soltar,  1. 

to  loosen. 

See 
Acordar. 

suelto 
irr.  part. 

Sonar,  1. 

to  sound. 

See 
Acordar. 

Sonar,  1. 

to  dream. 

See 
Acordar. 

Sosegar,  1. 

to  appease. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Soterrar,  1. 

to  bury. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Sugerir,  3. 

to  SUflffSt 

See 

Asentir. 

IRREGULAR  OK  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


365 


FUTUHE. 

CON- 
DITIONAL 

[MPKBATIVE. 

PEESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 

1.                          2. 

FUTUBE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

suela 
suelas 
suela 

solanios 
solais 
suelan 

366 


ALPHABETICAL    TABLE    OF    THE    PRINCIPAL 


-  - 
« 

PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 

GERUND. 

PAST 
PARTICIPLE. 

PRESKNT 
INDICATIVE. 

IMPERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 

PRETERIT. 

Temblar,  1. 

to  tremble. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Tender,  2. 

to  expand. 

See 
Atender. 

Tener,  2. 

to  have. 
See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  139.) 

Tefiir,  3. 

to  dye. 

See 
Pedir. 

Tentar,  1. 

to  touch. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Torcer,  2. 

to  twist. 

See 
Cocer. 

Tostar,  1. 

to  toast. 

See 
Acordar. 

Traducir,  3. 

to  translate. 

See 
Conducir. 

Traer,  2. 

to  bring. 

trayendo 

traldo 

traigo 
traes 
trae 
traemos 
traeis 
traen 

trala 
trafas 
trala 
traiamos 
traiais 
traian 

traje 
trajiste 
trajo 
irajiraos 
trajisteis 
trajeron 

Trascender,  2. 

to  transcrni. 

See 
Atender. 

Trascordarse,  1. 

to  forget. 

See 
Acordar. 

Trasegar,  1. 

to  upset. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Tronar,  1. 

to  thunder. 

See 
Acordar. 

Tropezar,  1. 

to  stumble. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR    OR    DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


FUTUKK. 

CONDITIONAL. 

IMPEHATIVE. 

PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIV 

IMPERFECT  SCBJUNCTIVE. 

TERMINATION 
1.                        2. 

FUTURE 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

I 

traere 
traer&s 
traeri 
traeremoa 
traereMa 
traerdn 

traeiia 
traerias 
traeria 
traeiiamos 
traerfais 
traeiia  11 

trae 
traed 

traiga 
traigas 
traiga 
traigamos 
tragdis 
traigau 

t  raj  era           trajese 
trajeras         trajeses 
trajera           trajese 
traj6ramos    trajesemos 
trajerais        trajeseis 
trajeran        trajesen 

trajere 
trajeres 
trajere 
trajeremos 
trajereis 
trajeren 

t 

I 

368 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


PEESENT 

a 

PEESENT 

IMPEEFECT 

GKRUND. 

W          0 

PEETEEIT. 

INFINITIVE. 

*    5 

INDICATIVE. 

INDICATIVE 

P-I 

Valer,  2. 

valiendo 

valido 

valgo 

valla 

vail 

to  be  worth. 

vales 

valfas 

valiste 

vale 

valla 

valid 

valemos 

valiamos 

valimos 

valeis 

valfais 

valisteis 

valen 

vallan 

v  aileron 

Venir,  3. 

to  corny. 

viniendo 

venido 

vengo 
vienes 

veufa 
venfas 

vine 
veniste 

viene 

venfa 

vino 

venimos 

veniamos 

venimos 

venfs 

venlais 

venisteis 

vienen 

venlan 

yinieron 

Ver,  2. 

to  see. 

viendo 

visto 

veo 
ves 

vela 
veias 

vl 

viste 

re 

vela 

vi<5 

vemos 

velamoa 

vimos 

veis 

velais 

visteis 

ven 

velan 

vieron 

Verter,  2. 

to  spill. 

See 
Atender. 

Vestir,  3. 

See 

to  dress. 

Pedir. 

JTolcar,  1. 

See 

to  overset. 

Acordar. 

Volar,  1. 

See 

tofly. 

Acordar. 

Volver,  2. 

legularinall 

vuelto 

to  return. 

the    other 

tenses. 

-Yacer,  2. 

to  lie  down. 

(See  Defective  Verbs, 

p.  320.) 

Zaherir,  3. 

See 

to  censure. 

Asentir. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


369 


J 

o 

B 

H 

PRESENT 

FUTUEK 

FUTUEK. 

| 

| 

IMPEEFECT  SUBJUWCTIVB. 

Q 

3 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

• 

TERMINATION 

§ 

t-H 

1.                        2. 

valdr6 

valdrfa 

valga 

valiera             valiese 

valiere 

valdras 

valdrias 

vale 

valgas 

valieras           valieses 

valieres 

valdra 

valdrfa 

valga 

valiera             valiese 

valiere 

valdremos 

valdriamos 

valgamos 

valie"ramoa       vali6semos 

vali6remos 

valdreis 

valdrfais 

valed 

valgais 

valierais           valieseis 

valiereis 

valdr&n 

valdrian 

valgan 

va  lie  ran           valiesen 

valieren 

vendre" 

vendrla 

venga 

viniera             viniese 

viniere 

vendras 

vendrfas 

ven 

vengas 

vinieras           vinieses 

vimeres 

vendriu 

veudrfa 

venga 

viniera             -aniese 

viniere 

vendremos 

vendrfamos 

vengamos 

vini^ramos       vini^semos 

vmieremos 

vendreis 

vendriais 

venid 

vengais 

vinierais          vinieseis 

vmiereis 

vendran 

vendrlan 

vengan 

vinieran           viniesen 

vinieren 

vere" 

verfa 

vea 

viera                viese 

viere 

vieres 

vera 

veria 

vea 

viera                viese 

viere 

veremos 

verlamoa 

veamos 

vie"ramos          vi^semos 

vieremos 

vere"is 

verfais 

ved 

veais 

vierais             vieseis 

viereis 

veran 

verlan 

vean 

vieran             viesen 

vieren 

24 


FORMAC10N   BE  LA  LENGUA 
CASTELLANA. 

La  lengua  castellana  consta  de 
palabras  fenicias,  griegas,  goticas, 
arabes,  y  de  otras  lenguas  de  las 
naciones  que  por  dominacion  6  por 
comercio  habitaron  6  frecuentaron 
estas  partes.  Pero  principalmente 
abunda  de  palabras  latinas  enteras 
6  adulteradas. 

LosRonianosestuvieronen  Espana 
600  anos  a  lo  menos,  aunque  no  se 
cuenten,  sino  desde  el  de  216  antes 
de  Cristo  en  que  vinieron  la  primera 
vez  con  ejercito,  hasta  el  416  despues 
de  Cristo  en  que  fue  la  entrada  de 
los  Godos  ;  y  si  esta  cuenta  se  hace 
hasta  el  ano  623  de  Cristo,  en  que 
los  Romanes  acabaron  de  perder  lo  • 
que  tenian  en  Espana,  saldra  que 
estuvieron  mas  de  800  anos. 

En  este  tiempo  introdujeron  aqui 
su  lengua  vulgar,  que  era  la  latina, 
como  lo  bicieron  en  todas  las  demas 
provincias  que  conquistaron. 

Con  la  decadencia  del  imperio  ro- 
mano  y  venida  de  los  Godos  se  fue 
adulterando  la  lengua  latina  6  ro- 
rnana  porque  como  los  vencidos 
necesitaban  acomodarse  a  la  lengua 
de  los  vencedores,  y  estos  deseaban 
y  procuraban  aprender  la  de  los 
vencidos,  contribuyeron  unos  y 
otros  a  estragar  la  lengua  latina. 


Los  Godos  hallaron  dificultad  en 
la  declinacion  de  los  nombres  latinos, 


FORMATION  OF  THE  SPANISH 
LANGUAGE. 

The  Castilian  (Spanish)  language 
is  composed  of  words  derived  from 
the  Phoenician,  Greek,  Gothic,  and 
Arabic,  and  also  from  the  languages 
of  other  nations  which  inhabited  or 
visited  Spain,  intent  on  conquest  or 
commerce.  It  abounds  principally, 
however,  in  Latin  words,  either  pure 
or  adulterated. 

The  Romans  occupied  Spain  for 
at  least  600  years,  if  we  date  their 
occupation  from  the  year  216  B.C., 
when  their  first  army  appeared  there, 
until  416  A.D.,  when  the  Goths  in- 
vaded the  country.  But  if  we  ex- 
tend our  calculation  to  the  year 
623  A.D.,  when  the  Romans  finally 
lost  what  they  still  possessed  in 
Spain,  the  time  of  their  occupation 
exceeds  800  years. 

They  introduced  their  language  in 
the  country,  namely,  the  Latin  lan- 
guage, as  they  did  in  all  the  other 
provinces  which  they  conquered. 

The  Latin  or  Roman  language  be- 
came adulterated  at  the  fall  of  the 
Roman  empire  and  at  the  time  of  the 
invasion  of  the  Goths,  as  the  con- 
quered nation  had  to  adapt  itself  to 
the  language  of  the  conquerors,  while 
the  latter  desired  and  endeavored  to 
learn  the  language  of  the  conquered. 
These  reasons  contributed  to  the  al- 
teration of  the  Latin  language. 

The  Goths  found  difficulty  in  the 
declension  of  the  Latin  nouns,  and 


370 


FORMATION  OF  THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 


371 


y  la  dejaron  enteramente,  supliendo 
los  casos  con  preposiciones.  En  los 
verbos  siguieron  en  parte  las  conju- 
gaciones  latinas,  pero  dejaron  del 
todo  la  voz  pasiva,  y  usaron  para 
suplirla,  de  los  participles  pasivos 
con  el  verbo  sustantivo  ser. 

Esta  lengua  latina,  asi  adulterada, 
se  empezo  a  llamar  romance  por  su 
derivacion  de  la  romana  6  latina, 
para  distinguirla  de  la  gotica. 

Con  la  irrupcion  de  los  Arabes  en 
el  ano  714  padecio  tambien  alteracion 
el  romance  ;  pero  como  los  Espanoles 
empezaron  desde  luego  a  sacudir  el 
nuevo  yugo,  a  proporcion  de  las 
ventajas  que  iban  consiguiendo,  iba 
tambien  la  lengua  cobrando  fuerza 
y  cultura. 

El  rey  Don  Alfonso  el  Sabio  mando 
que  cesase  el  uso  de  escribir  en  latin 
los  privilegios,  donaciones  reales  y 
escrituras  piiblicas.  Entre  varias 
obras  que  compuso,  6  hizo  componer 
en  romance,  merece  singular  aprecio 
y  elogio  la  de  las  Leyes  de  las  Parti- 
das,  en  la  cual  la  lengua  ostento 
toda  la  riqueza  y  majestad  que  habia 
adquirido  hasta  entonces,  y  en  que 
llevo  grandes  ventajas,  no  solo  a 
otras  obras  anteriores  y  contempora- 
neas,  sino  aun  a  muchas  posteriores. 

.  Siguieron  su  ejemplo  D.  Juan 
Manuel,  hijo  del  infante  D.  Manuel, 
y  el  rey  D.  Alfonso  XI.  El  pri- 
mero  compuso  el  libro  del  Conde 
Lucanor,  el  segundo  el  de  monteria, 
ambas  dignamente  estimados. 

Escribieronse  tambien  los  Croni- 
cas  del  Santo  Rey  Don  Fernando,  de 


abandoned  it,  supplying  the  cases 
with  prepositions.  They  partly  fol- 
lowed the  Latin  conjugations  of  the 
verbs,  but  entirely  rejected  the  pas- 
sive voice,  which  they  replaced  by 
passive  participles  accompanied  by 
the  substantive  verb  ser. 

The  Latin  language,  thus  adulter- 
ated, began  then  to  be  called  the 
Romance,  from  its  derivation  from 
the  Roman,  and  in  order  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  the  Gothic. 

The  Romance  underwent  some 
alteration  after  the  irruption  of  the 
Arabs  in  the  year  714,  but  as  the 
Spaniards  soon  began  to  shake  off 
the  new  yoke,  their  language  ac- 
quired strength  and  culture,  the 
latter  keeping  pace  with  the  advan- 
tages obtained  in  warfare. 

King  Don  Alfonso  the  Wise  or- 
dered that  the  Latin  language 
should  not  be  used  any  longer  for 
charters,  royal  grants,  and  public 
deeds.  Among  different  works 
which  he  composed  himself  or 
superintended  in  the  Romance  lan- 
guage, special  mention  and  praise  is 
due  to  the  Laws  of  Castile,  in  which 
the  richness  and  majesty  which  the 
language  had  acquired  are  shown  to 
greater  advantage  than  in  any  pre- 
vious or  contemporaneous,  or  even 
in  many  subsequent  works. 

D.  Juan  Manuel,  son  of  the  infante 
D.  Manuel,  and  king  D.  Alfonso  XI. 
followed  his  example.  The  former 
wrote  a  work  called  Count  Lucanor, 
and  the  latter  a  treatise  on  Hunting; 
both  works  are  greatly  esteemed. 

At  that  time  were  also  written  the 
Chronicles  of  the  Holy  King  D.  Fer- 


372 


FORMATION    OF   THE   SPANISH   LANGUAGE. 


Don  Alfonso  el  Sabio,  de  Don  Sancho 
IV.,  de  Don  Fernando  IV.,  y  de 
Don  Alfonso  XL 

Pedro  Lopez  de  Ayala,  ya  con 
estilo  mas  adornado,  escribio  las 
Crdnicas  del  rey  Don  Pedro,  de 
Don  Enrique  II. ,  y  de  Don  Juan  I. 
Alvar  Garcia  de  Santa  Maria,  y  Fer- 
nan  Perez  de  Guzman,  compusieron 
la  de  Don  Juan  II.  Juan  de  Mena, 
la  obra  de  las  Trescientas,  y  la 
Coronacidn.  El  Bachiller  Fern  an 
Gomez  de  Ciudad  Real,  el  Centon 
epistolario,  que  contiene  unas  ad- 
mirables  cartas  sobre  los  principales 
sucesos  del  reinado  de  D.  Juan  II. 
D.  Alonso  Tostado,  Obispo  de  Avila, 
publico  varias  obras  en  castellano  ; 
Hernando  del  Pulgar,  su  celebre 
Cronica  de  los  reyes  catdlicos,  y  algo 
mas  adelante,  el  doctor  Francisco 
de  Villalobos,  en  sus  Problemas,  y 
otros  tratados  que  compuso  en  ro- 
mance, di<5  a  conocer  la  gracia  y 
primor  de  que  la  lengua  castellana 
es  capaz. 

La  publicaci6n  de  estas  y  otras 
obras  semejantes,  y  la  particular 
atenci6n  con-  que  se  dedicaron  a 
cultivar  la  lengua  castellana  muchos 
escritores  insignes  que  han  norecido 
desde  el  reinado  de  los  Reyes  Catd- 
licos, la  fueron  puliendo  y  perfec- 
cionando,  hasta  ponerla  en  el  estado 
en  que  hoy  se  halla. 


nando,  of  D.  Alfonso  the  Wise,  ofD. 
Sancho  IV.,  of  D.  Fernando  IV., 
and  of  D.  Alfonso  XL 

Pedro  Lopez  de  Ayala,  in  a  more 
ornate  style,  wrote  the  Chronicles  of 
king  D.  Pedro,  of  D.  Enrique  II. , 
and  of  D.  Juan  I.  Alvar  Garcia  de 
Santa  Maria  and  Ferndn  Perez  de 
Guzman  composed  the  Chronicles  of 
D.  Juan  II. ;  Juan  de  Mena,  a 
work  on  the  Three  Hundred  and 
on  The  Coronation.  Fernan  Gomez 
de  Ciudad  Real  wrote  the  Epistolce 
Cento,  which  contains  admirable  let- 
ters on  the  principal  events  of  the 
reign  of  D.  Juan  II.  D.  Alonzo 
Tostado,  Bishop  of  Avila,  published 
several  works  in  the  Castilian  lan- 
guage ;  also  Hernando  del  Pulgar 
his  celebrated  Chronicle  of  the 
Catholic  Monarchs,  and  somewhat 
later,  Dr.  Francisco  de  Villalobos, 
in  his  Problems  and  other  treatises 
which  he  composed  in  the  Romance 
language,  showed  the  grace  and  ele- 
gance of  which  the  Castilian  lan- 
guage is  susceptible. 

The  publication  of  these  and 
other  works,  and  the  special  atten- 
tion paid  to  the  cultivation  of  the 
Castilian  language  by  many  eminent 
writers  who  have  nourished  since 
the  reigns  of  the  Catholic  Monarchs, 
have  polished  and  perfected  the 
language  to  the  point  at  which  it 
has  arrived  in  our  day. 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


INCLUDING  ALL  THE  WORDS  CONTAINED  IN  THE  PRECEDING  VOCABULARIES. 


I.  Spanish-English. 


abajo,  downstairs. 

abanico,  m.fan. 

abierto,  opened. 

abogado,  m.  lawyer. 
^/aborrecer,  2.  to  hate. 

abrir,  3.  to  open. 

abundante,  abundant. 

a  caballo,  on  horseback. 

acabar,  1.  to  finish. 

6.  casa ,  to  the  house,  home. 

acaso,  perhaps. 

accidente,  m.  accident. 

accidn,  f.  action. 

aceite,  m.  oil. 

aceptable,  acceptable. 

acercarse,     1.    to    ap- 
proach. 

acompanar,  1.  to  accom- 
pany. 

aconsejar,  1.  to  advise. 

acontecer,  2.  to  happen; 

acordarse,  1.  to  remem- 
ber. 

acostarse,  1.  to  go  to  bed.- 

acostumbrado,  accus- 
tomed. 

acostumbrar,  1.  to  ac- 
custom. 

&  cr£dito,  on  credit.     ^. 


acusar,  1.  to  accuse. 

adelantar,  1.  to  be  fast. 

adherir,  8.  to  adhere. 

adi6s,  good-by. 

admitido,  admitted. 

afable,  affable. 

afeitar,  1.  to  shave. 

afuera,  out,  without. 

agradable,  agreeable. 

agradecido,  thankful. 

agrio,  sour. 

agua,  f.  water. 

aguardar,  1.  to  expect,  to 
wait. 

ahora,  now. 

ahi,  there. 

aire,  m.  air. 

alabanza,  f.  praise. 

alabar,  J.  to  praise. 

alb  anil,  m.  mason. 

al  contrario,  on  the  con- 
trary. 

aldea,  f.  village. 

alegrarse,  1.  to  rejoice. 

alegre,  lively.  U 

^tfejarse,  1.  to  leave. 

Aleman,  m.  German. 

Alemania,  f.  Germany, 

algo,      something,     any- 

f  thing,  rather. 

algoddn,  m.  cotton. 

373 


alguien,  somebody,  any- 
body. 

alguna  parte,  some- 
where, anywhere. 

algunas  veces,  some- 
times. 

alguno,  some,  any,  some 
one,  any  one,  somebody, 
anybody. 

alii,  there. 

almacen,  m.  store. 

almirante,  m.  admiral. 

almorzar,  1.  to  break- 
fast. 

almuerzo,  m.  breakfast. 

alojamiento,  m.  lodg- 
ing. 

&  lo  menos,  at  least. 

al  punto  que,  as  soon 
as. 

alquilar,  1.  to  let. 

alto,  high,  tall,  loud. 

amado,  loved. 

amar,  1.  to  love. 

amargo,  bitter. 

I  ama  V.  ?  do  you  love. 

a  menos  que,  unless. 

£  menu  do,  often. 

Amejicano,  in.  Ameri- 
can. 

amigo ,  m .  friend. 


374 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


amis  tad,  f.  friendship. 

atacar,  1.  to  attack. 

aniistoso,  friendly. 

atencidn,  f.  attention. 

amo,  /  love. 

a^ento,  attentive. 

amo,  m.  master. 

a'trasar,  1.  to  delay. 

amor,  m.  love. 

,atravesar,   1.  to  cross 

andar,  1.  to  walk. 

over. 

animal,  m.  animal. 

aun,  even,  yet. 

anoche,  last  night. 

aunque,  although. 

ansioso,  eager. 

ausente,  absent. 

antes  de,  before. 

autor,  m.  author. 

anunciar,     1.     to     an- 

autorizar, 1.  to  author- 

nounce. 
afiadir,  3  to  add. 

ize. 
autorizaci6n,  f  .  author- 

aiio, m.  year. 

ization. 

4partar,  1.  to  remove.    \ 

avaro,  m.  miser. 

l/apelar,  1.  to  appeal. 

aventura,  f  .  adventure. 

apenas,      hardly,      no 

ayer,  yesterday. 

sooner. 

ayudar,  1.  to  help. 

a  pie,  on  foot. 

aziicar,  m.  sugar. 

apoderarse,  1.  to  take 

azul,  blue. 

possession. 

apostar,  1.  to  bet. 

aprender,  I.  to  learn. 

B. 

aprendido,  learned. 

aprobar,  1.  to  approve. 

bagatela,  f.  trifle. 

aquello,  that,  that  thing. 

bailar,  1.  to  dance. 

aqui,  here. 

baile,  m.  ball. 

aqul  tiene  V.  ,  here  is. 

bailo,  7  dance. 

Arabe,  m.  Arab. 

bajar,  1.  to  come  down. 

arbol,  m.  tree. 

bajo,  low,  under. 

arce,  m.  maple. 

banco,  m.  bank. 

armario,  m.  closet. 

banquero,  m.  banker.' 

articulo,  m.  article. 

bafiarse,  1.  to  bathe. 

arreglar,  1.  to  arrange. 

barato,  cheap. 

arrepentirse,  3.  to  re- 

bar co,  m.  vessel. 

pent. 

bastaiite,  enough. 

arriba,  upstairs. 

bast6n,m.  walkingstick, 

arruinar,  1.  to  ruin. 

cane. 

asegurar,  1.  to  assure. 

bastonazo,     m.     blow 

asi,  thus,  so,  therefore.           (with  a  stick). 

asi  que,  so  that,  as  soon  batalla,  f.  battle. 

as.                                    baiil,  m.  trunk. 

asolar,  1.  to  devastate,     bebo,  7  drink. 

asunto,  m.  matter,  busi-  bendecir,  3.  to  bless. 

ness.                               \  beiieficio,  m.  benefit. 

bene*fico,  benevolent. 

biblioteca,  f.  library 

bien,  good,  well. 

Jbillar,  m.  billiards. 

bianco,  white. 

boca,  f.  mouth. 

bocoy,  m.  hogshead. 

bodega,  f .  cellar. 

bollo,  m.  cake. 

bondad,  f.  kindness. 

bonito,  pretty. 

trordado,  trimmed. 

borracho,  intoxicated. 

bosque,  m.  wood. 

bota,  f.  boot. 

botella,  f.  bottle. 

boticario,  m.  druggist, 

botdn,  m.  button.    . 

bueiias  noches,  good 
night. 

bueno,  good,  well. 

buenos  dias, good  morn- 
ing, good  day. 

buey,  m.  ox. 

buque,  m.  ship,  vessel. 

burlarse,  1.  to  laugh  at 

buscar,  1.  to  look  for. 


C. 

caballerfa,  f.  cavalry. 
caballeriza,  f.  stable. 
caballero,    m.    gentle- 
man. 

caballo,  m.  horse. 
oada,  each. 
cadena,  f .  chain. 
caer,  2.  to  fall. 
caerse,  2.  to  fall. 
caf£,  m.  coffee. 
caja,  f.  safe,  box. 
cajdn,  m.  drawer. 
calentar,  1 .  to  warm. 
caliente,  warm. 


SPANIS 


,ISH. 


375 


callado,  silent. 

centavOJ»  cent. 

comparecer,  2.  to  ap- 

calle, f.  street. 

cerca,  J». 

pear. 

callejuela,  f.  lane. 

cerca^Sre,  nearly. 

complacer,  2.  to  please. 

cama,  f.  bed. 

cereza,  f.  rhern/. 

componer,  2.   to  com- 

cambiar, 1.  to  exchange. 

cerveza,  f.  beer. 

pose. 

camino,  m.  road. 

jfllKtado,  closed,  shut.   . 

c'omportamiento,   m. 

camisa,  f.  shirt. 

cerrar,  1.  to  shut. 

behavior. 

campo,  m.  country. 

Ce*sar,  Ccesar. 

comportarse,  1.  to  be- 

cancidn, f.  song. 

ciego,  blind. 

have. 

cansado,  tired. 

cielo,  m.  heaven. 

comprado,  bought. 

canta,  sings. 

ciencia,  science. 

^compra  V.?  do  you 

cantar,  1.  to  sing. 

cierto,  certain. 

buy? 

cantatriz,  f  .  singer. 

ciudad,  f  .  city. 

comprender,  2.  to  un- 

canto, m.  singing. 

claro,  clear. 

derstand. 

cana,  f.  cane. 

clase,  f.  class. 

compro,  7  buy. 

caoba,  f.  mahogany. 

clavel,  m.  pink. 

comtiii,  ordinary,  low. 

capital,  f  .  capital. 

clima,  m.  climate. 

con,  with. 

capital!  m.  captain. 

cocina,  f.  kitchen. 

concepto,  m.  opinion. 

capltulo,  m.  chapter. 

cocinera,  f.  cook. 

concierto,  m.  concert. 

cara,  f.face. 

cocinero,  m,  cook. 

conciso,  concise. 

carb6n,  m.  coal. 

coche,  m.  coach. 

concluir,  3.  to  conclude,, 

carcel,  f  .  prison. 

codicioso,  greedy. 

to  Jinish. 

caridad,  f.  charity. 

oojear,    1.    to    limp,  to 

concluirse,  3.  to  end. 

Carlos,  Charles. 

balance. 

conde,  m.  count. 

carne,  f.  meat. 

colegio,  m.  college. 

condenar,    I.    to    con- 

carne (f.)  de  vaca,  f. 

cdlera,  m.  cholera. 

demn. 

beef. 

^dolmar,  1.  to  overwhelm* 

<5ondesa,  f.  countess. 

carnicero,  m.  butcher. 

colocacidn,  f  .  situation. 

Cjondisclpulo,   m.  fel- 

carpintero,    m.     car- 

Coldn, Columbus. 

low-scholar. 

penter. 

Colorado,  red. 

conducir,  3.  to  conduct, 

cartero,  m.  postman. 

comedia,  f  .  comedy. 

to  take. 

caro,  dear. 

comedido,  polite. 

conducta,  f.  conduct. 

Carolina,  Caroline. 

comedor,    m.     dining- 

confesar,  1.  to  confess. 

carta,  f.  letter. 

room. 

conf  orme,  conformably. 

carreta,  f.  cart. 

comemos,  we  dine. 

congreso,  m.  congress. 

casa,  f.  house. 

1  come  V.?  do  you  dine  % 

fionjuracidn,     f.    con- 

casaca, f.  coat. 

comer,  2.  to  dine,  to  eat'. 

spiracy. 

casar,  1.  to  marry. 

comer  ciante,  m.  mer- 

conmigo, with  me. 

casarse,  1.  to  marry. 

chant. 

conocer,  2.  to  know. 

castigar,  1.  to  punish. 

comido,  eaten. 

^conoce  V.?   do  you 

causa,  f.  cause,  case. 

comida,  f.  eating,  dinner. 

know?     are     you     ac- 

cazador, m.  hunter. 

como,  since,  about. 

quainted  with  ? 

celebre,  celebrated. 

c6mo,  how. 

conocido,  m.  acquaint- 

cena, f  .  supper. 

companero,    m.    com- 

ance. 

censurar,  1.  to  censure. 

panion. 

coiiocido,  known. 

GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


conozco,  /  know,  I  am 
acquainted  with. 

conseguir,  3.  to  obtain. 

consejo,  m.  advice. 

consistir,  3.  to  consist. 

consolar,  1.  to  console 
to  comfort. 

construir,  3.  to  con 
struct,  to  build. 

consultado,  consulted. 

consultar,  1.  to  consult-. 

con  tal  que,  provided. 

contar,  1.  to  count. 

contener,  2.  to  contain. 

contento,  pleased,  sat- 
isfied. 

contestar,  1.  to  answer^ 

contiene,  contains. 

continual,  1.  to  con- 
tinue. 

con  tor  11  os,  m.  pi.  the 
suburbs. 

contrario,  contrary. 

convencer,  2.  to  con- 
vince. 

convenir,  3.  to  be  proper. 

conversar,  1.  to  con- 
verse. 

convidar,  1.  to  invite. 

copiar,  1.  to  copy. 

coronel,  m.  colonel. 

cortado,  cut. 

cortaplumas,  m.  pen- 
knife. 

cortar,  1.  to  cut. 

corte*s,  polite. 

corto,  short. 

correo,  m.  post,  mail, 
postoffice. 

correr,  2-  to  run. 

cosa,  f.  thing,  matter  of 
importance. 

costa,  f.  expense. 

costar,  I.  to  cost. 

costumbre,  f.  manner. 


creador,  m.  creator. 
credito,  m.  credit. 
creer,  2.  to  oelieve. 
creo,  /  believe. 
criada,  f .  servantgirl. 
criado,  m.  servant. 
crim en,  m.  crime. 
cruel,  cruel. 
cruz,  f.  cross. 
cuaderno,  m.  copybook 
cuadro,  m.  picture. 
cuaiido,  when. 
cuanto,  as  much. 
cuaiito,  how  much. 
cuarto,  m.  room. 
cuatro,/owr. 
cueiita,  f.  account. 
cuento,  m.  tale. 
cuchillo,  m.  knife. 
culpado,  guilty. 


CH. 

chaleco,  m.  vest. 
champaiia,     f.     cham- 
pagne. 
chiquito,  little. 


da,  gives. 

dado,  given. 

danza,  f .  dance. 

dar,  1.  to  give. 

dar  (1.)  un  paseo,  to 

take  a  walk. 
de,  of. 

debo,  /  owe. 
debe,  owes. 
deber,  2.  to  owe,  must. 
d<§bil,  weak. 
decidir,  3.  to  decide. 
decir,  3  to  tell,  to  say. 


dedicar,  1.  to  devote. 

dedo,  m.Jinger. 

de  este  modo,  in  this 
way. 

defender,  2.  to  defend. 

dejar,  1.  to  leave. 

delante,  before. 

demasiado,  too,  too 
much,  too  many. 

d&ne  V..  give  me. 

demolido,  pulled  down. 

dentro  de,  within. 

dependiente,  m.  clerk. 

I  de  quie'n  ?  whose  ? 

derecho,  right. 

de  repente,  suddenly. 

derribar,  1.  to  upset. 

derrotar,  1.  to  defeat. 

descansar,  1.  to  rest. 

descascarar,  1.  to  peel 

desconfiar,  1.  to  dis- 
trust. 

descubrir,  3.  to  dis- 
cover. 

desde,  since,  from. 

desde  que,  since. 

desea,  wishes. 

deseamos,  we  wish. 

desear,  1.  to  desire. 

desgracia,  f.  misfor- 
tune. 

desgraciado,  unfortu- 
nate. 

desmayarse,  1.  to  faint. 

desobedecer,  2.  to  dis- 
obey. 

desobediente,  disobe- 
dient. 

despacio,  slowly. 

despertarse,  1.  to 
awake. 

despreciado,  despised. 

despues,  afterwards, 
then,  after. 

despues  de,  after. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


377 


despu^s  que,  after. 
destruir,  3.  to  destroy.^ 
desuso,  m.  desuetude. 
deuda,  f.  debt. 
d£  V.,  give. 
devolver,  2.  to  return, 

give  back. 
dia,  m.  day. 
dfa  festive,  holiday. 
dibujar,  1.  to  draw. 
dibujo,  m.  drawing.  *- 
dice,  says,  tells. 
dicha,  f .  luck. 
dicho,  said. 
dichoso,  happy. 
diente,  m.  tooth. 
diferente,  different. 
dificil,  difficult. 
dificultad,  f.  difficulty. 
diga  V.,  say,  tell. 
digno,  worthy. 
dinero,  m.  money. 
Dios,  m.  God. 
diputado,  m.  deputy. 
dirigir,  3.  to  direct. 
discipulo,  m.  pupil, 

scholar. 

discordia,  f.  discord. 
disponer,  2.  to  dispose. 
dispuesto,  disposed. 
disputar,  1 .  to  dispute^ 
distinto,  distinct. 
divertir,  3.  to  amuse. 
divertirse,  3.  to 

one's  self. 

divinidad,  f.  divinity. 
docena,  f .  dozen 
dolor   de    cabeza,   f. 

headache. 
donde,  where. 
dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
dormirse,    3.    to   fall 


dudar,  1  to  doubt. 
duefio,  m.  owner. 
dulce,  sweet. 
durado,  lasted. 
durante,  during. 
duro,  dollar. 


E. 

^char  a  pique,  to  foun- 
der. 

echarse,  1.  to  begin. 

edad,  f .  age. 

Eduardo,  Edward. 

ejemplo,  example. 

eje'rcito,  m.  army. 
,  he. 

elegancia,  f.  elegance. 

eligir,  3.  to  elect. 

ella,  she. 

ello,  it. 

embajador,  m.  ambas- 
sador. 

embarcar,  1.  to  engage. 

emperador,  m. emperor. 

emplear,  1.  to  employ. 

empleo,  m.  employment, 


dos,  two. 
doy,Igive. 


amuse,  -encender, 


situation. 
en,  in. 
encargar,  1.  to  charge. 
en  casa,  at  home  (at  the 

house  of). 

•,  2.  to  light. 
encendido,  red. 
encerrar,  1.  to  lock  up. 
encontrar,  1,  to  find,  to 

meet. 

encontrara,  will  find. 
enfadado,  angry. 
enfadarse,    1.    to    get 

angry. 

enemigo,  m.  enemy. 
enfermo,  m.  patient. 
enfermo,  ill,  sick. 


engafiar,  1.  to  deceive. 

enorme,  enormous. 

Enrique,  Henry. 

enriquecer,  2.  to  enrich. 

en    seguida,     immedi- 
ately. 

ensena,  teaches. 

entender,  2.  to  under- 
stand. 

enterrar,  1.  to  bury. 

entrar,  1.  to  enter. 

entre,  between. 

*6htregar,  1.  to  hand. 

enviado,  sent. 

enviar,  1.  to  send. 

equivocacidn,  f.  mis- 
take. 

equivocarse,  1.  to  make 
a  mistake. 

era,  was. 

es,  is. 

escapar,  1.  to  escape. 

Escipidn,  Scipio. 

escoger,  2.  to  select. 

escribe,  writes. 

£  escribe  V.  ?  do  you 
write  ? 

escribir,  3.  to  write. 

escribo,  /  write. 

escritura,  f.  writing. 

escrito,  written. 

esc^itorio,  m.  office. 

/escuadra,  f.  squadron. 

escuchar,  1.  to  listen  to. 

escuela,  f .  school. 

ese,  that. 

Espana,  f.  Spain. 

Espanol,     Spanish, 
Spaniard. 

especie,  f .  species. 

especulacidn,  f .  specu- 
lation. 

espejo,  m.  mirror. 

esperar,  1.  to  expect ,  to 
wait,  to  hope. 


S78 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


esperanza,  f.  hope. 

favorecer,  2.  to  favor. 

estacidn,  f.  season. 

fe,  t  faith. 

establecer,  2.  to  estab 

Felipe,  Philip* 

lish. 

feliz,  happy. 

estado,  m.  state,  condfr 

-femenil,  effeminate. 

tion. 

feo,  ugly,  homely. 

estar,  1.  to  be. 

Fernando,  Ferdinand. 

estatua,  f.  statue. 

ferrocarril,    m.     rail- 

este, this. 

road. 

estrangero,m.  stranger. 

fiebre,  f  .  fever. 

estrella,  f.  star. 

fiel,  faithful. 

estudiado,  studied. 

fiesta,  f.  feast,  holy  day. 

estudiamos,  we  study. 

filial,  filial. 

estudiante,  m.  student. 

fin,  m.  end. 

i  estudian    VV.  ?    do 

flor,  f.  flower. 

you  study.                    \ 

fonda,  f.  hotel. 

estudiar,  1.  to  study. 

formalizarse,  1.  to  get 

estudio,  m.  study. 

vexed. 

estudioso,  studious. 

formar,  1.  to  form. 

eterno,  eternal. 

fortaleza,  f  .  fortress. 

Europa,  Europe. 

Fortuna,  f  .  fortune. 

examinar,  1.  to  exam- 

France's,    m.     French- 

ine. 

man. 

exceder,  2.  to  exceed. 

Francia,  f.  France. 

excepto,  except. 

Fresa,  f.  strawberry. 

excusar,  1.  to  excuse. 

fresco,  cool. 

exento,  exempted. 

frfo,  cold. 

experiencia,  f.  experi- 

ffiolera, f  .  trifle. 

ence. 

fruta,  t.  fruit. 

explicar,  1.  to  explain. 

Fuego,  m.fire. 

extinguidor,  m.  extin- 

fuerte, strong. 

guisher. 

fuerza,  f  .  strength. 

Funcidn,  f.  ceremony. 

[usil,  m.  gun. 

P. 

Fusilar,  to  shoot. 

fabric  ante,    m.    manu- 

facturer. 

G. 

fabricarr  1.  to  manufac- 

ture. 

Galileo,  Galileo. 

facil,  easy. 

gallina,  f.fowl,  chicken. 

f  altar,  1.  to  fail. 

gana,  earns. 

familia,  f.  family. 

*anar,  1.  to  earn. 

favor,  m.  favor. 

gas,  m.  gas. 

favorable,  favorable. 

gasta,  spends. 

gas  tar,  1.  to  spend. 

gas  to,  m.  expense. 

generalmente,  gener- 
ally. 

generoso,  generous. 

gente,  f .  people. 

gloriosamente,  glori- 
ously. 

gobernar,  1.  to  manage, 
to  govern. 

gobierno,  m.  govern- 
ment. 

gdta,  f .  drop. 

gracias,  thank  you. 

grande,  m.  grandee. 

grandeza,  f.  greatness. 

Griego,  Greek. 

gritar,  1.  to  cry,  to 
scream. 

grito,  m.  outcry. 

groserla,  rudeness. 

guante,  m.  glove. 

guardar,  1.  to  keep. 

guerra,  f .  war. 

Guillermo,  William. 

&  le  gusta  a  V.  ?  do  you 
like  ? 

me  gusta,  /  like,  I  am 
fond  of. 

gusto,  m.  pleasure. 


habil,  skillful. 

habitante,  m.  inhabi- 
tant. 

habit uarse,  1.  to  accus- 
tom one's  self. 

habla,  speaks. 

tiablado,  spoken. 

liablaii,  they  speak. 

I  habla  V.  ?       )  do  you 

ihablan  VV.?  \speak1 

hablo,  /  speak. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


379 


hacer,   2.    to    make,    to 
do. 

£  hace  V.  ?  do  you  do. 

hacienda,  f.  estate. 

hallado,/ownc?. 

hallar,  1.  to  find. 
^aragan,  lazy. 

hasta,  till,  until,  as  far 
as. 

hasta  que,  until. 

hay,  there  is. 

hecho,  done. 
1    helar,  1.  to  freeze. 
1  -heredar,  1.  to  inherit. 

heredero,  m.  heir. 

herido,  ivounded. 

hermana,  f.  sister. 

hermano,  m.  brother. 

hermoso,     handsome,* 
fine. 

h6roe,  m.  hero. 

hierro,  m.  iron. 

hija,  f.  daughter. 

hijo,  m.  son. 
I    hinchado,  swollen. 

historia,  f .  history. 

hombre,  m.  man. 

honrado,  honest. 

hora,  f.  hour,  time. 
-   hormiga,  f.  ant. 

hotel,  m.  hotel. 

hoy,  to-day. 

huevo,  m.  egg. 

humanidad,  f.  human- 
ity. 

inline  do,  damp. 

huracan,  m.  hurricane. 


idioma,  m.  language. 
iglesia,  f  church. 
ignorancia,     f.     igno. 


ignorante,  ignorant. 

impaciente,  impatient. 

J. 

importante,  important. 

imposible,  impossible.  \ 

jactarse,  1,  to  boast. 

imprenta,  f  .  press,  im- 

jamas, ever,  never. 

print. 

jamdn,  m.  ham. 

incapaz,  incapable.          jardln,  m.  garden. 

incendio,  m.  conflagra-  jardinero,  m.  gardener. 

tion.                                  joven,  young. 

indiferente,      indiffer^ 

i-fbyero,  m.  jeweler. 

ent. 

Juan,  John. 

indigno,  unworthy. 

jugar,  1.  to  play. 

indomable,     indomi- 

Julio, Julius. 

table. 

Junio,  m.  June. 

inducir,  3.  to  induce. 

junto,  together. 

industrioso,     industri- 

juventud, f.  youth. 

ous.                               > 

jtizgar,  1.  to  judge. 

infeliz,  unhappy. 

ingenio,  m.  genius. 

Inglaterra,  England. 

L. 

Ingle's,  m.  Englishman. 

inmdvil,  immovable. 

labrador,  m.  farmer. 

inocencia,  f  .  innocence 

lado,  m.  side. 

inocente,  innocent. 

Iadr6n,  m.  thief. 

insolencia,  f.  insolence. 

lagrima,  f  .  tear. 

instante,  m.  instant. 

lampara,  f  .  lamp. 

instruir,  3.  to  instruct. 

largo,  long. 

instrument©,  m.  instru- 

Latin, Latin. 

ment. 

lavandera,    f.   washer- 

inteligente, intelligent. 

woman. 

intencidn,  f.  intention. 

lapiz,  m.  pencil. 

inter  esante,      interest- 

lavar, 1.  to  wash. 

ing. 

leccidn,  f.  lesson. 

interesar,  1.  to  interest. 

leche,  f.  milk. 

interesarse,  1.  to  take 

leer,  2.  to  read. 

interest. 

legua,  f.  league. 

iniitil,  useless. 

legumbre,  f.  vegetable. 

invierno,  m.  winter. 

leido,  read. 

invitacidn,  f  .  invitation. 

le  jos,  far. 

invocar,  1.  to  invoke. 

lengua,  f.  language. 

ir,  3.  to  go. 

leiia,  f.  wood. 

irse,-  3.  to  go  away. 

Ie6u,  m.  lion. 

Isabel,  Isabella. 

levantarse,  1.  to  rise. 

isla,  f.  island. 

ley,  f  .  law. 

Italia,  f  .  Italy. 

liberal,  liberal, 

380 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


liberalidad,   f.  liberal- 

malo, bad,  ill,  unwell. 

ity. 

mandar,  1.  to  send,  to 

libertad,  f.  liberty. 

order. 

libra,  f  .  pound. 

mande  V.,  send. 

libro,  m.  book. 

mano,  f.  hand. 

licencia,  f.  license. 

maiitener,  2.  to  support. 

.^Jlcenciar,  1.  to  disband. 

manzana,  f  .  apple. 

ligero,  quick. 

manana,  f.  morning. 

limonada,  f  .  lemonade. 

mauaiia,  to-morrow. 

limpio,  clean. 

marcha,  f  .  march. 

vfista,  f  .  list. 

mar  char,    1.   to  go,  to 

listo,  ready. 

march. 

loco,  insane. 

mar  chars  e,  1.  to  depart. 

•Jtbdo,  m.  mud. 

marido,  m.  husband. 

Londres,  London. 

marinero,  m.  sailor. 

Luego  que,  as  soon  as. 

mas,  more. 

"mgar,  m.  place,  spot.    ,  - 

mascara,  f  .  mask. 

Luisa,  Louisa. 

matar,  1.  to  kill. 

luna,  f  .  moon. 

maxima,  f.  maxim. 

luz,  f  .  light. 

la    mayor    parte,  the 

most. 

media,  f.  stocking. 

LL. 

medico,  m.  physician. 

medio,  m.  means,  way. 

llamar,  1.  to  call. 

medir,  3.  to  measure. 

llamarse,  I.  to  be  called. 

memoria,  f  .  memory. 

Have,  f.  key. 

menester,  necessary. 

llega,  arrives. 

mentira,  f.  falsehood. 

llegar,  1.  to  arrive.       ^ 

tnercader,  m.  merchant. 

llegado,  arrived. 

mercancias,    f.    pi. 

lleno,full. 

goods. 

llevar,  1.  to  take. 

merecer,  2.  to  deserve. 

llora,  weeps. 

me*rito,  m.  merit. 

llorar,  1.  to  cry,  to  weep. 

mes,  m.  month. 

Hover,  2.  to  rain. 

mesa,  f  .  table. 

lluvia,  f.  rain. 

mi,  my. 

mill  tar,  military. 

milla,  f  .  mile. 

M. 

mina,  mine. 

minuto,  m.  minute. 

madre,  f.  mother. 

mirar,  1.  to  look  at. 

madrina,  f.  godmother. 

miseria,  f.  misery. 

maduro,  ripe.                   mismo,  same,  very,  self. 

maestro,  m.  teacher.        mitad,  f.  half. 

magnifico,  splendid.     finodo,  m.  way. 

molestar,  I.  to  trouble. 

momento,  m.  moment. 

montar,  1.  to  mount. 

monte,  ID.  mountain. 

monumento,  m.  monu- 
ment. 

morder,  2.  to  bite. 

morir,  3.  to  die. 

Moro,  m.  Moor. 

mostrar,  1.  to  show. 

motive,  m.  motive. 

mover,   2.   to   move,   to 
turn. 

movimiento,  m.  move- 
ment. 

muchacha,  f .  girl. 

muchacho,  m.  boy. 

muchas  gracias,  I  (or 
we]  thank  you. 

mucho,  mucha,  much. 

muchos,    muchas, 
many. 

mucho    tiempo,   long 
time. 

muerte,  f.  death. 

muerto,  died. 

mujer,  f.  woman,  wife. 

mundo,  m.  world. 

muneca,  f .  doll. 

murid,  died. 

muro,  m.  wall. 

musica,  f .  music. 

muy,  very. 


N. 

nacer,  2.  to  be  born. 

nacidn,  f .  nation. 

nada,  nothing,  not  any- 
thing. 

nadie,  nobody,  not  any- 
body, no  one. 

naranja,  f.  orange. 

natural,  natural. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


381 


navegacidn,  f.  n< 

tion. 

necesidad,  f.  necessity. 
necesita,  needs. 
i,necesita  V.?  do  you 

need? 

necesitar,  1.  to  need. 
necesito,  /  need. 
necesario,  necessary. 
negocio,  m.  business. 
negro,  black. 
ni,  neither,  nor. 
nieve,  f.  snow. 
ninguno,  not  any, 

no. 

nino,  m.  child. 
no,  no. 

noche,  f .  night. 
no. ..mas,  no. ..more. 
nombre,  m.  name. 
norte,  m.  north. 
nosotros,  we,  us. 
noticia,  f .  news. 
novela,  f .  novel. 
nuevo,  new. 
nuez,  f .  nut. 
mirnero,  m.  number. 
nunca,  never. 


,aviga*lf>€LisLr, 


o. 

obedecer,  2.  to  obey. 
obediente,  obedient. 
objeto,  m.  object. 
obligar,  1.  to  oblige,  to 

compel. 

obra,  f .  work. 
obrar,  1.  to  act. 
obrero,  m.  workman. 
obtener,  2.  to  obtain. 
ocasidn,  f.  occasion. 
ociosidad,  f.  idleness. 
ocupado,  busy. 
ocupar,  1.  to  occupy. 


,  1.  to  hate. 
ofender,  2.  to  offend. 
oficial,  m.  officer. 
ofrecer,  2.  to  offer. 
oir,  3.  to  hear. 
\  ojal£  !  would  to  God. 
ojo,  m.  eye. 
olor,  m.  smell. 
olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 
onza,  f.  ounce. 
opinidn,  f  .  opinion. 
orgulloso,  proud. 
oro,  m.  gold. 

,  1.  to  dare. 
oscuro,  dark. 

,  m.  bear. 
otra    cosa,     something 

else. 
otro,  other,  another. 


paciencia,  f .  patience. 
.jpadecer,  2.  to  suffer. 
padre,  m.  father. 
padres,  m.  pi.  parents. 
padrino,  m.  godfather. 
pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
pagina,  f.  page. 
pals,  m.  country. 
pajaro,  m.  bird. 
palabra,  f .  word. 
palacio,  m.  palace. 
pan,  m.  bread. 
panadero,  m.  baker. 
pafio,  m.  cloth. 
panuelo,    m.   handker- 
chief. 

papel,  m.  paper. 
paquete,  m.  package, 
par  a,  for. 
"fJarado,  standing. 
paraguas,  m.  umbrella. 
pararse,  1.  to  stand. 


parecen,  seem. 

parque,  m.  park. 

parte,  f .  part. 

partir,  3.  to  leave. 

pasado,  past,  last. 

pasado    maiiana,    the 
day  after  to-morrow. 

pasar,  1.  to  pass. 

pasearse,  1.  to  take  a 
walk. 

paseo,  m.  walk. 

paternal,  paternal. 

patio,  m.  yard. 

patria,  f .  country. 

pavo,  m.  turkey. 

paz,  f .  peace. 

pedazo,  m.  piece. 

pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 

Pedro,  Peter. 

pegar,  1.  to  strike. 

pelea,  f.  fight. 

-,  1.  to  fight. 

peligroso,  dangerous. 

pelo,  m.  hair. 

penoso,  hard,  painful. 

pensar,    1.   to  think,  to 

peor,  worse,      [intend. 

pequeno,  small,  little. 
.,  f .  pear. 

perder,  2.  to  lose. 

perdida,  f.  loss. 

perdido,  lost. 

perdonar,  1.  to  forgive. 

periddico,     m.     news- 
paper. 

permitir,  3.  to  allow. 

pero,  but. 

persona,  f .  person, 

pertenece,  belongs. 

perro,  m.  dog. 
;  m.  grief. 
i,  m.  neck. 

picaro,  m.  rogue. 

pide,  asks  for. 

pie,  m.foot. 


3*2 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


£  piensa  V.  ?  do  you  in- 
tend? 

pierna,  f.  leg. 

pieza,  f .  piece. 
.   pintar,  1.  to  depict. 

pintura,  f .  painting. 

pio,  pious. 

pizarra,  f.  slate. 

planta,  f .  plant. 

plata,  f .  silver. 
»,  pleito,  m.  lawsuit. 
,-  plomo,  in.  lead. 

poblar,  I.  to  people. 

pobre,  poor. 

poco,  adv.  little. 

pocos,few. 

poder,  m.  power. 

poderoso,  powerful. 
<-fJodrir,  3.  to  rot. 

polio,  m.  chicken. 

Pompeyo,  Pompey. 

ponerse,  2.  to  put  on. 
-  populacho,  m.  mob. 

por,  through,  by. 

por  cierto,  certainly. 

por  desgracia,  unfortu- 
nately. 

porfiado,  obstinate. 

por    mas... que,    how- 
ever. 

or  precisidn,  by  neces- 
sity. 

porque,  because. 

I  porque"  ?  why  f 

por  supuesto,  of  course. 
i  posada,  f .  inn. 

posesi6n,  f .  possession. 

posible,  possible. 

posteridad,  posterity. 
?  pozo,  m.  well. 

practicar,  1.  to  practise. 

precepto,  m.  precept.    ' 

precio,  m.  price. 

preciso,  necessary. 

pref erir,  3.  to  prefer. 


pregunta,  f.  question. 

preguntar,  1.  to  inquire, 
to  ask. 

preparar,  1.  to  prepare. 

prerogativa,  f.  preroga- 
tive. 

prescribir,  3.  to  pre- 
scribe. 

presentar,  1.  to  present, 
to  introduce. 

prestar,  1.  to  lend. 

presumido,  conceited. 

pretender,  2.  to  pretend. 

prima,  f.  cousin. 

primavera,  f .  spring. 

primero^rs*. 

primo,  m.  cousin. 

principe,  m.  prince. 

principiante,  m.  begin- 
ner. 

principio,  m.  principle. 

prisionero,  m.  prisoner. 

privilegio,  m.  privilege* 

probable,  probable. 

probablemente,  prob- 
ably. 

probar,  1.  to  prove. 

procesidii,  f.  proces- 
sion. 

profesor,  m.  professor. 

profundo,  deep. 

prometer,  2.  to  promise. 

pronto,  soon,  quickly. 

pronunciar,  1.  to  pro- 
nounce. 

propenso,  inclined. 

propicio,  propitious. 

propiedad,  f .  property. 

proponer,  2.  to  propose. 
^provenir,  3.  to  come 
from  (to  originate),  to 
result. 

pr6ximo,  next. 

prueba,  f.  proof. 

£  puede  V.  ?  can  you  ? 


puedo,  I  can. 
piiblico,  public. 
pueblo,  m.  town,  village. 
puente,  m.  bridge. 
puerta,  f .  door. 
puerto,  m.  port. 
pues,  as,  well,  for. 
puesto,  put. 
jpuipero,  m.  grocer. 
pufialada,  f.  stab  (with 
a  poniard). 


que,  that,  which. 

qu6,  which,  what. 

que*,  how. 

queclarse,  1.  to  remain. 

gtf&jarse,  1.  to  com- 
plain. 

quemar,  1.  to  burn. 

querer,  2.  to  grant. 

queso,  m.  cheese. 

quien,  who,  whom. 

quiere,  wishes. 

&  quiere  V.  ?  will  you 
have  ?  do  you  wish  ? 

quieren,  wish. 

quiero,  I  wish,  1  will 
have. 

quieto,  quiet. 

quitarse,  1.  to  take  off. 

quitasol,  ra.  sunshade. 


R. 

rarp,  rare. 
rat'6n,  m.  mouse. 
raz6n,  f.  reason. 
recibido,  received. 
recibir,  3.  to  receive. 
recomendar  1.  to  rec- 
ommend. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


883 


recompensa,  f.  recom- 
pense. 

reconocer,  2.  to  know. 

ref erir,  3.  to  relate. 

refresco,  m.  refresh 
ment. 

regimiento,  m.  regi- 
ment. 

reina,  f.  queen. 

reinar,  1.  to  reign. 

reino,  m.  kingdom. 

relr,  3.  to  laugh. 

rendirse,  3.  to  surren- 
der. 

reo,  in.  culprit. 

reparar,  1.  to  compen- 
sate. 

repetir,  3.  to  repeat. 

representar,  1.  to  play. 

reprimir,  3.  to  repress. 

residir,  3.  to  reside. 

resolver,  2.  to  resolve. 

respetar,  1.  to  respect. 

responder,  2.  to  answer. 

restablecer,  2.  to  rees- 
tablish. 

retrato,  m.  picture. 

rey,  m.  king. 

ricachdn,  m.  a  very  rich 
man. 

rico,  rich. 

rfe,  laughs. 

rienda,  f.  bridle. 

rincdn,  m.  corner. 

rio,  m.  river. 

robar,  1.  to  steal. 

Romano,  m.  Roman. 

Rdmulo,  Romulus. 

ropa,  f .  clothes. 

rosa,  f .  rose. 

rdbio,fair,  blond. 

ruido,  m.  noise. 

ruina,  f .  ruin. 

Rusia,  Russia. 

Ruso,  Russian. 


8. 

B&bana,  f .  sheet. 

sabe,  knows. 

^,sabe    V.?     do     you 

know  ? 

sabiamente,  wisely. 
sabio,  wise. 
sable,  m.  saber. 
sacar,  1.  to  draw. 
saco,  m.  bag. 
sagrado,  sacred. 


sale,  goes  out,  comes  out, 

leaves. 
^  sale   V.?   do  you  go 

out? 

salida,  f .  exit. 
salir,  3.  to  leave,  to 

out. 

salir  de,  to  leave. 
saltar,  1.  to  jump. 
salubre,  healthy. 
sastre,  m.  tailor. 
satisfecho,  satisfied. 
se,  I  know. 
seda,  f .  silk. 
en    seguida,    immedi- 
ately. 
seguir,  3.  to  continue, 

follow. 

segiiii,  according  to. 
seguro,  sure. 
semana,  f .  week. 
la  semana  que  viene, 

next  week. 

,Bembrar,  1.  to  sow. 
sentado,  seated. 
sentar,  1.  to  become. 
seiitarse,  1.  to  sit  down. 
sentencia,    f.    maxim, 

judgment. 
sentir,    3.    to  feel,    to 

regret. 
sefias,  f.  pi.  direction. 


sefior,  sir,  Mr. 

sefiora,  madam, 

ser,  to  be. 

servicio,  m.  service. 

servido,  served. 

si,  if. 

si,  yes. 

siempre,  always. 

lo  siento,  /  am  sorry 

for  it. 

siguen,  follow. 
silla,  f .  chair  9  saddle. 
sin,  without. 
sin  embargo,  however. 
singular,  singular. 
sino,  but. 

soberbio,  haughty. 
solpre,  on,  upon,  about. 
<7£,ar6bretodo,  m.  overcoat. 
sociedad,  f .  society. 

ro,  m-  assistance. 
sol,  m.  sun. 
solamente,  only. 

ler,  2.    to  be  in    the 

habit. 

solo,  alone. 
s6lo,  only. 

sombrerero,  m.  natter. 
sombrero,  m.  hat. 
to  someter,  2.  to  subdue. 
son,  are. 

sonar,  1.  to  dream. 
sopa,  f.  soup. 
sordo,  deaf. 
sorpien6Lido,surprised. 
su,  his,  her. 
sublevar,  1.  to  revolt. 
sucio,  dirty. 
sueno,  m.  dream. 
suerte,  f.fate. 
sufocar,  1.  to  suffocate. 
suministrar,  I.  to  of 

fer. 

siiplica,  f .  entreaty. 
suplicar,  1.  to  entreat. 


384 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


suponer,  2.  to  suppose. 

todavia,  yet. 

supremo,  supreme. 

todo,  all,  everything. 

suspender,  2.   to   sus- 

todo el  mun  Jo,  every- 

pend. 

body. 

tomar,  1.  to  take. 

tomo,  m.  volume. 

T. 

tonto,  foolish,  silly.      < 

torre,  f.  tower. 

tal,  such  as. 

trabaja,  works. 

talento,  m.  talent. 

trabajar,  1.  to  work. 

tal  vez,  perhaps. 

trabajo,  m.  work. 

tambien,  too,  also. 

traducci6n,  f.  transla- 

tampoco,   not     either, 

tion. 

neither. 

traducir,  3.  to  translate. 

tan,  so. 

traer,  2.  to  bring. 

tan  pronto  como,  as 

traido,  brought. 

soon  as. 

traiga  V.,  bring. 

tarde,  f.  afternoon. 

traje,  m.  dress. 

tarde,  late. 

trasparente,    transpar- 

Tartaria, f.  Tartary. 

ent. 

t6,  m.  tea. 

tratar,  1.  to  treat. 

teatro,  m.  theater. 

tres,  three. 

Telemaco,  Telemachus* 

trineo,  m.  sleigh. 

temblar,  1.  to  tremble.  , 

tripulacidn,  f.  crew. 

temer,  2.  to  fear. 

triste,  sac?. 

temor,  m.fear.              L 

trueno,  m.  thunder. 

temprano,  early. 

turbulento,  boisterous. 

tener,  2.  to  hold,  to  have. 

teologal,  theological. 

te6rico,  theoretical. 

U. 

terremoto,  earthquake. 

t£a,  f  .  aunt. 

ultimo,  last. 

tfo,  m.  uncle. 

unos  pocos,  a  few. 

tiempo,  m.  time. 

ufia,  f  .  nail. 

en  tiempo  pasado,/or- 

urbanidad,  f.  urbanity. 

merly. 

listed,  you  (sing.). 

tienda,  f  .  shop. 

Ustedes,  you  (pi.). 

tione,  has. 

dtil,  useful. 

tienen,  have. 

tierra,  f  .  earth. 

tigre,  m.  tiger. 

V. 

tijeras,  f.  pi.  scissors. 

tlmido,  timid. 

V.,  see  Usted. 

tintero,  m.  inkstand. 

va,  goes. 

to  car,  1.  to  play  on. 

vaca,  f  .  cow. 

vacio,  empty. 

valiente,  brave. 

valer,  2.  to  be  worth. 

valor,  m.  courage. 

vapor,     m.     steamt 
steamer. 

vara,  f .  yard. 

varios,  as,  several. 

vaso,  m.  glass  (to  drink 
in). 

V.?   are    you  go- 
ing? 

Vd.,  see  Usted. 

Vds.,  see  Ustedes. 

ve,  sees. 

veneer,  2.  to  conquer. 

vende,  sells. 

vender,  2.  to  sell. 

I  vende    V.?    do    you 
sell? 

vendido,  sold. 

vendo,  /  sell. 

veneno,  m.  poison. 

veo,  I  see. 

venir,  3.  to  come. 

ventajoso,  profitable. 

ventana,  f .  window. 

ver,  2.  to  see. 

verdad,  f .  truth. 

verde,  green. 

verso,  m.  verse. 

vestido,  m.  dress. 

vestidos,  m.  pi.  clothe* 

vestir,  3.  to  dress. 

vestirse,  3.  to  dress. 

&  ve  V.  ?  do  you  see  ? 

vez,  f .  time. 

viajar,  1.  to  travel. 

viaje,  m.  journey. 

victoria,  f .  victory. 

vida,  f .  life. 

vidrio,  m.  glass. 

viejo,  old. 

viene,  comes. 

viento,  m.  wind. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


385 


vigilante,  watchful. 

volver  a  hacer,  2.  to 

ya  no,  no  longer. 

vino,  m.  wine. 

do  again. 

yerba,  f  .  grass. 

virtud,  f.  virtue. 

voy,  /  am  going. 

yo,  /. 

visitar,  1.  to  visit. 

vuelva  V.,  return. 

visto,  seen. 

VV.,  see  Ustedes. 

vive,  lives. 

Z. 

vivir,  3.  to  live. 

Y. 

volar,  1.  to  fly. 

zapatero,     m.     shoe- 

volver, 2.  to  turn,  to  re- 

y, and. 

maker. 

turn. 

ya,  already. 

zapato,  m.  shoe. 

26 


386 


GENERAL    VOCABULARY. 


II.  English-Spanish. 


absent,  ausente. 
about,  sobre,  como. 
abundant,  abundante. 
acceptable,  aceptable. 
accident,  accidente,  m. 
to  accompany,  acom- 

panar,  1. 

according  to,  segiln. 
account,  cuenta,  f . 
to  accuse,  acwsw,  1. 
to  accustom,  acostum- 

brar,  1. 
accustomed,   acostum- 

brado,  1. 
to    accustom    one's 

self,  habituarse,  1. 
acquaintance,    conoci- 

do,  m. 
are  you  acquainted 

with  ?  conoce  V.  ? 
I      am      acquainted 

•with,  conozco. 
to  act,  obrar,  1. 
action,  accttfn,  f . 
to  add,  anadir,  3. 
to  adhere,  adherir,  3. 
admiral,  almirante,  m. 
admitted,  admitido. 
adventure,  aventura,  f . 
advice,  consejo,  m. 
to  advise,  aconsejar,  1. 
affable,  a/able. 
after,    despue's,  despue's 

de,  despue's  que. 
afternoon,  tarde,  f. 


afterward, 
afterwards,  despue's. 
age,  edad,  f. 
agreeable,  agradable. 
air,  aire,  m. 
all,  todo. 

to  allow,  permitir,  3. 
alone,  solo. 
already,  ya. 
also,  tambie'n. 
although,  aungue. 
always,  siempre. 
ambassador,    embaja- 

dor,  m. 
American,  Americano, 

m. 

to  amuse,  divertir,  3. 
to  amuse  one's  self, 

divertirse,  3. 
and,  ty,  e'. 
angry,  enfadado. 
animal,  animal,  m. 
to  announce,  anunciar, 

1. 

another,  otro. 
to  answer,  contestar,  1. 

responder,  2. 
ant,  hormiga,  f . 
any,  alguno. 
anybody,    alguienf  al- 
guno. 

any  one,  alguno. 
anything,  a/^o. 
anywhere,     alguna 

parte. 

to  appeal,  apelar,  1. 
to  appear,  comparecer^ 

2. 


apple,  manzana,  f. 

to  approach,  acercarse, 

1. 
to    approve,    aprobar, 

1. 

Arab,  Jra&e,  m. 
are,  son. 

to  arrange,  arreglar,  1. 
army,  ejercito,  m. 
to  arrive,  /%ar,  1. 
arrived,  llegado. 
arrives,  //e^ra. 
article,  articulo,  m. 


as  far,  Aasta. 
as  far  as,  hasta. 
to  ask,  preguntar,  1. 
to  ask  for,  pec?zr,  3. 
asks  for,  pide. 
assistance,  socorro,  m. 
as  soon  as,  tan  pronto 

como,    luego    que,    ast 

quet  al  punto  que. 
to  assure,  asegurar,  1. 
at   (the   house   of),  en 

casa. 

at  home,  en  casa. 
to  attack,  atacar,  1. 
attention,  atenci6n,f. 
attentive,  atento. 
aunt,  tia,  f  . 
author,  autor,  m. 
authorization,  autori- 

zacidn,  f  . 
to  authorize,  autorizart 

1. 
to  awake,  despertarse 

1. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


387 


B. 

bad,  malo. 
bag,  saco,  m. 
baker,  panadero,  m. 
to  balance,  pesar,  1. 
ball,  baile,  m. 
bank,  banco,  m. 
banker,  banquero,  m. 
bark,  barco,  m. 
to  bathe,  banarse,  1. 
battle,  batalla,  f. 
to  be,  estar,  1.  sert  2. 
bear,  oso,  m. 
because,  porque. 
to  become,  sentar,  1. 
bed,  cama,  f . 
beef,  carne  (f.)  c?e  vaca,t. 
beer,  cerveza,  f . 
before,  delante, antes  de. 
to  begin,  echarse,  1. 
beginner,  principiante, 

m. 
to  behave,  comportarse, 

2. 
behavior,      comporta- 

miento,  in. 

to  believe,  creer,  2. 
I  believe,  creo. 
belongs,  pertenece. 
benefit,  benefirio,  m. 
benevolent,  benefico. 
to  bet,  aposlar,  1. 
between,  enfre. 
billiard,  6i7/ar,  m. 
bird,  pdjaroy  m. 
to  bite,  morder,  2. 
bitter,  amargo. 
black,  ne^ro. 
to  bless,  bendecir,  3. 
blind,  ciego. 
blond,  rubio. 
blow  (with  a  stick),  6as 

tonazo,  m. 
blue,  azw/. 


to  boast,  jactarse,  1. 
boisterous,  turbulento. 
book,  libro,  m. 
bo'ot,  6o<a,  f. 
to  be  born,  nacer,  2. 
bottle,  botella,  f . 
bought,  comprado. 
box,  co/a,  f . 
boy,  muchacho,  m. 
brave,  valiente. 
bread,  pan,  m. 
breakfast,  almuerzo,  m. 
to  breakfast,  almorzar, 

1. 

bridge,  puente,  m. 
bridle,  rienda,  f. 
to  bring,  Zraer,  2. 
bring,  fraz'^a  V. 
brother,  hermano,  m. 
brought,  traido. 
to  build,  construir,  3. 
to  burn,  quemar,  1. 
to  bury,  enterrar,  1. 
business,  neyocio,  m. 

asunto,  m. 
busy,  ocupado. 
but,  pero,  szno. 
butcher,  carnicero,  m. 
button,  6<tfrfn,  m. 
do  you  buy  ?  ^  compra 

V.? 

I  buy,  compro. 
by,  por. 

C. 

Caesar,  Cesar. 
cake,  60^0,  m. 
to  call,  llamar,  1. 
to  be  called,  Uamarsc, 

1. 

can  you  ?  ^  puede  V.  9 
I  can,  puedo. 
cane,  cawa,  f .  bastdn,  m. 
capital,  capital,  f. 
captain,  capitdn,  m. 


Caroline,  Carolina. 
carpenter,  carpintero, 

m. 

carriage,  cocfte,  m. 
cart,  carreta,  f. 
case,  causa,  f. 
catch,  prender,  2. 
cause,  cawsa,  f. 
cavalry,  caballeria,  f. 
celebrated,  celebre. 
cellar,  bodega,  f. 
to  censure,  censurar,  1. 
cent,  centavo,  m. 
ceremony,  funcitfn,  f. 
certain,  c/erto. 
certainly,  por 
chain,  cadena,  f. 
chair,  s?7/a,  f. 
champagne,  champana, 

f. 

chapter,  capitulo,  m. 
to  charge,  encaryar,  1. 
charity,  caridad,  f. 
Charles,  Carlos. 
cheap,  barato. 
cheese,  g-weso,  m. 
cherry,  cereza,  f. 
chicken,  po//o,  m.  #a/« 

a,  f . 
child,  wmo,  m. 
cholera,  cdera,  m. 
church,  iglesia,  f . 
city,  ciudad,  f . 
class,  c/ase,  f. 
clean,  limpio. 
clear,  c/aro. 
clerk,  dependiente,  m. 
ch'mate,  c/zma,  m. 
closed,  cerrado. 
closet,  armario,  m. 
cloth,  joano,  m. 
clothes,  rojoa,  f .  vestidos, 

m.  pi. 

coach,  coche,  m. 
coal,  carbtin,  m. 


388 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY, 


coat,  casaca,  f. 

coffee,  cafe,  m. 

cold,  f  no. 

college,  colegio,  m. 

Columbus,  Coldn. 

colonel,  coronel,  m. 

to  come,  venir,  3. 

to  come  down,  bajar, 
1. 

comedy,  comedia,  f. 

to  come  from,  (to  ori- 
ginate), provenir,  3. 

comes,  viene. 

comes  out,  sale. 

to  comfort,  consolar,  1. 

companion,  compariero, 
m. 

to  compare,  comparar, 
2. 

to  compel,  obligar,  1. 

to  compensate,  repa- 
rar,  1. 

to  complain,  quejarse, 
1. 

conceited,  presumido. 

concert,  concierto,  m. 

concise,  conciso. 

to  conclude,  concluir, 
3. 

to  condemn,  condenar, 
I. 

condition,  estado,  ra. 

conduct,  conducta,  f. 

to  conduct,  conducir,  3. 

to  confess,  confesar,  I. 

conflagration,      incen- 
dio,  m. 

conformably,     con- 
forme. 

congress,  congreso,  m. 

to  conquer,  veneer,  2. 

to  consist,  consistir,  3. 

to  console,  consolar,  1. 

conspiracy,     conjura- 
citint  f . 


to  construct,  construir 

3. 

to  consult,  consultar,  1, 
consulted,  consultado. 
tc  contain,  c+ntener,  2. 
contains,  contiene. 
to  continue,  seguir,  3. 

continuar,  I. 
contrary,  contrario. 
on  the    contrary,   a/ 

contrario. 
to  converse,  conversar, 

I. 
to  convince,  convencer, 

2. 

cook,  cocinero,  m. 
cook,  cocinera,  f . 
cool,./resco. 
to  copy,  copiar,  1. 
copybook,     cuaderno, 

m. 

corner,  rincdn,  m. 
to  cost,  costar,  1. 
cotton,  algodtfn,  m. 
count,  conde,  m. 
to  count,  contar,  1. 
countess,  condesaf  f. 
country,      patria,      f. 

campo,  m.  joais,  m. 
courage,  va/or,  m. 
of  course,  /?or  supuesto. 
cousin,  primo,  m. 
cousin,  prima,  f. 
cow,  vaca,  f. 
creator,  creador,  m. 
credit,  cre'dito,  m. 
on  credit,  a  cre'dito. 
crew,  tripulaci(fn,  f. 
crime,  crimen,  m. 
cross,  crw0,  f . 
to  cross  over,  atrave- 

sar,  1. 
cruel, 
to  cry,  //orar,  1,  gritar, 

1. 


culprit,  reo,  m. 
to  cut,  cortar,  I. 
cut,  cortado. 


D. 

damp,  humedo. 
to  dance,  bailar,  1. 
I  dance,  fou'/o. 
dancing,  danza,  f. 
dangerous,  peligroso. 
to  dare,  osar,  1. 
dark,  oscuro. 
daughter,  A^/a,  f. 
day,  rfia,  m. 
the  day  after  to-mor- 
row, pasado  manana. 
deaf,  sordo. 
dear,  caro. 
death,  muerte,  f. 
debt,  ctewda,  f. 
to  deceive,  enganar,  1. 
to  decide,  decidir,  3. 
deep,  profundo. 
to  defeat,  derrotar,  I. 
to  defend,  defender,  2. 
to  delay,  atrasar,  1. 
to  depart,  mar  char  se,  1. 
to  depict,  pintar,  I. 
deputy,  diputado,  m. 
to  deserve,  merecer,  2. 
to  desire,  desear,  I. 
despised,  despreciado. 
to  destroy,  destruir,  3. 
desuetude,  desuso,  m. 
to  devastate,  asolar,  1. 
to  devote,  dedicar,  1. 
to  die,  morir,  3. 
died,  murid,  muerto. 
different,  diferente. 
difficult,  c?//Ycz7. 
difficulty,  dificultad,  f. 
to  dine,  comer,  2. 
do  you  dine  ?  ^  come  K? 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


389 


we  dine,  comemos. 
dining-room,  comedor, 

m. 

dinner,  comida,  f. 
to  direct,  dirigir,  3. 
direction,  senast  f.  pi. 
dirty,  sucio. 
to    disband,   licenciar, 

1. 

discord,  discordia,  f. 
to  discover,  descubrir, 

3. 
disobedient,  desobedi- 

ente. 
to    disobey, 

decer,  2. 

to  dispose,  disponer,  2. 
disposed,  dispuesto. 
to  dispute,  disputar,  1. 
distinct,  distinto. 
to  distrust,  desconfiar, 

1. 

divinity,  divinidad,  f . 
to  do,  Aacer,  2. 
do  you  do  ?  6  Aace  F.  ? 
to   do  again,  volver  d 

hacer. 

dog,  perro,  m. 
doll,  muneca,  f . 
dollar,  rfwro,  m. 
done,  AecAo. 
door,  puerta,  f . 
to  doubt,  dudar,  1. 
downstairs,  a&o/o. 
dozen,  docena,  f. 
to  draw,  sacar,  1. 

jar,  1. 

drawer,  cajdn,  m. 
drawing,  dibujo,  m. 
dream,  sueho,  m. 
to  dream,  softar,  1. 
dress,  frcy'e,  m.  vestido, 

m. 

to  dress,  vestirse,  3. 
I  drink,  6e6o, 


drop,  <7<tfa,  f . 
druggist,  boticario,  m. 
during,  durante. 


each,  cac/a. 
eager,  ansioso. 
early,  temprano. 
to  earn,  ganar,  I. 
earns,  gana. 
earth,  tierra,  f . 
earthquake,  terremoto, 

m. 

easy,/acz7. 
to  eat,  comer,  2. 
eaten,  comido. 
eating,  comida,  f . 
Edward,  Eduardo. 
effeminate,  femenil. 
egg,  huevo,  m. 
elegance,  elegancia,  f. 
to  elect,  e%ir,  3. 
emperor,  emperador,  m. 
to  employ,  emplear,  1. 
employment,    empleo, 

m. 
empty,  vacib. 

d,^w,  m. 
to  end,  concluirse,  3. 
enemy,  enemigo,  m. 
to  engage,  embarcar,  1. 
England,  Inglaterra,  f. 
Englishman,  Ingles,  m. 
enormous,  enorme. 
enough,  bastante. 
to  enrich,  enriquecer,  2. 
to  enter,  entrar,  1. 
to  entreat,  suplicar,  1. 
entreaty,  suplica,  f. 
to- escape,  escapar,  1. 
to  establish,  establecer, 

2. 
estate,  hacienda,  f. 


eternal,  eterno. 
Europe,  Europa,  f. 
even,  aun. 
ever,  jamas. 
everybody,    forfo    e/ 

munofo. 

everything,  ioc?o. 
example,  ejemplo,  m. 
to  examine,  examinar, 

1. 

to  exceed,  exceder,  2. 
excellent,  excelente. 
except,  excepto. 
to  exchange,  cambiar, 

1. 

to  excuse,  excusar,  1. 
exempted,  exento. 
exit,  salida,  f . 
to   expect,  esperar,  1. 

aguardar,  1. 
expense,  costo,  f .  yasto, 

m. 
experience,    experi- 

encia,  f. 

to  explain,  explicar,  1. 
extinguisher,  extingui- 

dor,  m. 
eye,  ojo,  m. 

P. 

face,  cam,  f. 

to  fail,  /aZtar,  1. 

to  faint,  desmayarse,  1. 

fair,  rubio. 

faith,  /e,  f. 

faithful,  ./zeZ. 

to  fall,  caer,  2.  caerse,  2. 

to  fall  asleep,  dormirse, 

3. 

falsehood,  mentira,  f. 
family,  familia,  f . 
fan,  abanico,  m. 
far,  ?ejos. 
farmer,  labrador,  m. 


390 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


fast,  aprisa. 

to  be  fast,  adelantar,  1. 

fate,  suerte,  f. 

father,  padre,  m. 

favor,  favor,  m. 

to  favor,  fauorecer,  2. 

favorable,  favorable. 

fear,  temor,  m. 

to  fear,  temer,  2. 

feast,  fiesta. 

to  feel,  sentir,  3. 

fellow-scholar,  condi- 

sctpulo,  m. 

Ferdinand,  Fernando. 
fever,jiebre,  f. 
few,  pocos. 
a  few,  wnos  pocos. 
fight,  pelea,  f. 
to  fight,  pelear,  1. 
filial,  yz/m/. 
to  find,  hallar,  1.  encow- 

frar,  1. 

fine,  hermoso. 
finger,  aWo,  m. 
to    finish,    concluir,  3. 

acabar,  1. 
fLie,fuego,  m. 
first,  pr inter o. 
flower,  ^or,  f. 
to  fly,  vo/ar,  1. 
to  follow,  seguir,  3. 
follow,  siguen. 
I  am  fond  of,  me  <7wsta. 
foolish,  tonto. 
foot,  p/e,  m. 
on  foot,  d  pie. 
for,  para,  pwes. 
to  forget,  olvidar,  1. 
to  forgive,  perdonar,  1. 
to  form,/ormar,  1. 
formerly,  en  tiempo  pa- 

sado. 

fortress,  fortaleza,  f. 
fortune,/br£wwa,  f. 
found,  hallado. 


to    founder,   ecAar   a 


four,  cuatro. 
fowl,  gallina,  f. 
France,  Francia,  f. 
to  freeze,  Ae/ar,  1. 
Frenchman,    Frances, 

m. 

friend,  amigo,  m. 
friendly,  amistoso. 
friendship,  amistad,  f. 
fruit,  fruta,  f. 
full,  //ewo. 

G. 


Galileo, 
garden,  jardm,  m. 
gardener,  jardinero,  m. 
gas,  aas,  m. 

generally,  generalmente. 
generous,  generoso. 
genius,  ingenio,  m. 
gentleman,    caballero, 

m. 

German,  Alemdn,  m. 
Germany,  Alemania,  f. 
to  get  angry,  enfadarse, 

1. 
to  get  vexed,  formali- 

zarse,  1. 

girl,  muchacha,  f. 
to  give,  o7ar,  1. 
I  give,  a7o.y. 
to  give  back,  devolver, 

2. 

give,  oV  F. 
give  me,  o7e'me  F. 
given,  oWo. 
gives,  da. 
glass,  vidrio,  m. 
glass  (to  drink  in),  vaso, 

m. 
gloriously,    gloriosa- 

mente. 


glove,  guante,  m. 

to  go,  ir,  3.  marchar,  1, 

to  go  away,  irse,  3. 

God,  Dios,  m. 

godfather,  padrino,  m. 

godmother,  madrina,  f. 

goes,  va. 

goes  out,  sa£e. 

are  you  going  ?  ^  va  F.  ? 

I  am  going,  voy. 

gold,  oro,  m. 

good,  bueno,  bien. 

good-by,  aditis. 

good  day,  buenos  dias. 

good  morning,  buenos 

dias. 
good    night,    buenas 

noches. 

goods,  mercancfas,  f.  pi. 
to  go  out,  salir,  3. 
do  you  go  out  ?  &  sale 

F.? 
to  go  to  bed,  acostarse, 

I. 

to  govern,  gobernar,  1. 
government,  gobierno, 

m. 

to  grant,  querer,  2. 
grandee,  grande,  m. 
grass,  yerba,  f. 
greatness,  grandeza,  f. 
greedy,  codicioso. 
Greek,  griego. .. 
green,  verde. 
grief,  pesar,  m. 
grocer,  pulpero,  m. 
guilty,  culpado. 
gun,  fusil,  m. 


H. 

to    be  in  the  habit, 

soler,  2. 
hair,  pelo,  m. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


391 


half,  mitad,  t 

ham,  jamtin,  m. 

hand,  mano,  f. 

to  hand,  entregar,  1. 

handkerchief,  panuelo, 

m. 

handsome,  hermoso. 
to  happen,  acontecer,  2. 
happy,  dichoso,  feliz. 
hard,  penoso. 
hardly,  apenas. 
has,  tiene. 
hat,  sombrero,  m. 
to  hate,  odiar,  1. 

recer,  2. 

hatter,  sombrerero,  m. 
haughty,  soberbio. 
to  have,  fewer,  2. 
have,  tienen. 
headache,  el  dolor  de 

cabeza. 

healthy,  salubre. 
to  hear,  ofr,  3. 
heaven,  cielo,  m. 
heir,  heredero,  m. 
to  help,  ayudar,  1. 
Henry,  Enrique. 
her,  SM. 
here,  a^wf. 
here  is,  a^wf  ta'ene  V. 
hero,  Aeroe,  m. 
high,  alto. 
his,  SM. 

history,  historia,  f. 
hogshead,  6ocoy,  m. 
to  hold,  tener,  2. 
holiday,  diafestivo. 
holy  day,jiesta,  f. 
home,  tf  casa. 
at  home,  en  casa. 
homely,  feo. 
honest,  honrado. 
hope,  esperanza,  f. 
to  hope,  esperar,  1. 
horse,  caballo,  m. 


on  horseback,  dcaba-  to  inquire,  preguntartl. 


llo. 


hour,  hora,  f. 
house,  casa,  f. 
how,  como. 
how  much,  cuanto. 
however,joor  mds...que, 

sin  embargo. 
humanity,  humanidad, 

f. 

hunter,  cazador,  m. 
hurricane,  huracdn,  m. 
husband,  man' do,  m. 


idleness,  ociosidad,  f  . 

if,  Si. 

ignorance,   ignorancia 

t 

ignorant,  ignorante. 
ill,  en/ermo,  malo. 
immediately,  en  segui- 

da. 

immovable,  inmtivil. 
impatient,  impaciente. 
important,  importante. 
impossible,  imposible. 
in,  en. 

incapable,  incapaz. 
inclined,  propenso. 
indifferent,  indiferente. 
indomitable,    indom- 

able. 

to  induce,  inducir,  3. 
industrious,   industri- 

oso. 
inhabitant,   habitante, 

m. 

to  inherit,  heredar,  1. 
inkstand,  tinier  -o,  m. 
inn,  posada,  f. 
innocence,  inocencia,  f. 


insane,  /oco. 
insolence,  insolencia,  f. 
instant,  instante,  m. 
to  instruct,  instruir,  3. 
instrument,  instrumen- 

to,  m. 

to  intend,  pensart  1. 
do  you  intend?  ^^t'en- 

sa  F.? 

intelligent,  inteligente. 
intention,  intencitfn,  f. 
interesting,  interesante. 
in  this   way,  de   este 

modo. 

to  interest,  interesart  1. 
intoxicated,  borracho. 
to  mtroduce,/>resentafi 

1. 
invitation,    invitacidn, 

f. 

to  invite,  convidar,  1. 
to  invoke,  invocar,  1. 
iron,  hierro,  m. 
is,  es. 

Isabella,  Isabel. 
island,  /s/a,  f . 
Italy,  Italia,  f. 


J. 

jeweler,  joyero,  m. 
John,  Juan. 
journey,  viaje,  m. 
judgment,  sentencia,  f. 
to  judge,  juzgart  1. 
Julius,  ,/M^'O. 
to  jump,  saltar,  1. 
June,  Junto,  m. 


to  keep,  guardar,  1. 


key,  //are,  f. 


innocent,  inocente.         \  to  kill,  matar,  1. 


392 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


kindness,  bondad,  f. 

king,  rey,  m. 

kingdom,  reino,  m. 

kitchen,  cocina,  f . 

knife,  cuchillo,  m. 

to  know,  conocer,  2.  sa- 
ber, 2.  reconocer,  2. 

do  you  know  ?  ^  sabe 
V.?  iconoce  V.  ? 

I  know,  conozco,  yo  s€. 

known,  conocido. 

knows,  sabe. 


lamp,  Jdmpara,  f. 
language,    idioma,    m. 

lengua,  f. 

lane,  callejuela,f. 
last,  ultimo,  pasado. 
lasted,  durado. 
last  night,  anoche. 
late,  tarde. 
Latin,  Latin. 
to  laugh,  reir,  3. 
to  laugh  at,  burlarse,  1. 
laughs,  rfe. 
law,  ley,  f. 
lawsuit,  />Zei£o,  m. 
lawyer,  abogado,  m. 
lazy,  haragdn. 
lead,  plomo,  m. 
league,  legua,  f. 
to  learn,  aprender,  2. 
learned,  aprendido. 
at  least,  a  Zo  menos. 
to  leave,  saZzr,  3.  saZir 

a*e,  dejar,  1.  alejarse, 

1.  partir,  3. 
leaves,  sa/e. 
leg,  pterna,  f. 
lemonade,  li  monad  a,  f . 
to  lend,  prestar,  1. 
lesson,  leccidn,  f. 


to  let,  alquilar,  I 
letter,  carta,  f. 
liberal,  liberal* 
liberality,    liberalidad, 

f. 

liberty,  llbertad,  f. 
library,  biblioteca,  f. 
license,  licencia,  f . 
life,  wWa,  f. 
light,  Zu2,  f . 
to  light,  encender,  2. 
do  you  like  ?  ^  Ze  ^us/a 

a  F.? 
I  like,  me  gusta. 
to  limp,  cojear,  1. 
lion,  Zerfn,  m. 
list,  Zt'sfa,  f . 

to  listen  to,  escuchar,  1. 
little,  pequeno,  chiquito. 
little,  /?oco,  adv. 
to  live,  tJivzV,  3. 
lively,  alegre. 
lives,  w've. 
to   lock    up,   encerrar, 

I. 

lodging,  alojamiento,  m. 
London,  Londres. 
long,  largo. 
long  time,  mucho  tiem- 

po. 

to  look  at,  mirar,  I. 
to  look  for,  buscar,  1. 
to  lose,  perder,  2. 
loss,  perdidat  f . 
lost,  perdido. 
loud,  aZfo. 
Louisa,  Luisa 
love,  awior,  m. 
to  love,  amar,  \. 
do  you  love  ?   ^  awia 

F.? 

I  love,  amo. 
loved,  amado. 
lo"W,  bajo,  cojnun. 
i  luck,  cZtVAa,  f . 


madam,  senora. 

mahogany,  caoba,  f. 

mail,  correo.  m. 

to  make,  hacer,  2. 

to  make  a  mistake, 
equivocarse,  1. 

man,  hombre,  m. 

to  manage,  gobernar,  1. 

manner,  costumbre,  f . 

manufacturer,  /a&n- 
can^e. 

to  manufacture,  ^fin- 
car,  1. 

many,  muchos,  muchas. 

maple,  arce,  m. 

march,  marcha,  f. 

to  march,  marchar,  1. 

to  marry,  casar,  1.  ca- 
sarse,  1. 

mask,  mascara,  f. 

mason,  albanil,  m. 

master,  amo,  m. 

matter,  asunto,  m. 

matter  of  import- 
ance, cosa,  f . 

maxim,  maxima,  f .  sen- 
tencia,  f. 

means,  medio,  m. 

to  measure,  medir,  3. 

meat,  carne,  f . 

to  meet,  encontrar,  1. 

memory,  memoria,  f. 

merchant,  comerciante, 
m.  mercader,  m. 

merit,  merito,  m. 

mile,  /m'ZZa,  f. 

military,  militar. 

milk,  ZecAe,  f . 

mine,  mma,  f. 

minute,  minuto,  m. 

mirror,  espejo,  m. 

miser,  ayaro,  m. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


393 


misery,  miseria,  f. 
misfortune,  desgracia, 

f. 

mistake,  equivocacidn,f. 
mob,  populacho,  m. 
moment,  momento,  m. 
money,  dinero,  m. 
month,  mesy  m. 
monument,  monumento, 

m. 

moon,  luna,  f. 
Moor,  moro,  m. 
more,  mds. 
morning,  manana,  f. 
the    most,   la    mayor 

parte. 

mother,  madre,  f. 
motive,  motivo,  m. 
to  mount,  montar,  1. 
mountain,  monte,  m. 
mouse,  rattin,  m. 
mouth,  boca,  f. 
to  move,  mover,  2. 
movement,  movimiento, 

m. 

Mr.,  SeEor. 
Mrs.,  Senora. 
much,  mucho,  mucha. 
mud,  lodo,  m. 
music,  musica,  f. 
must,  de&er,  2. 
my,  mi. 

N. 

nail,  twa,  f. 
name,  nombre,  m. 
nation,  nacidn,  f. 
natural,  natural. 
navigation,  navegacidny 

f. 

near,  cerca. 
nearly,  cerca  c?e. 
necessary,  precise,  me- 

nester,  necesario. 


necessity,  necesidad,  f . 

by  necessity,  por  pre- 
cision. 

neck,  pescuezo,  m. 

to  need,  necesitart  1. 

do  you  need?  &nece- 
sita  F.:? 

I  need,  necesito. 

needs,  necesita. 

neither,  tampoco,  ni. 

never,  nunca,  jamas. 

new,  nuevo. 

news,  noticia,  f. 

newspaper,  perMico, 
m. 

next,  proximo. 

next  week,  la  semana 
que  viene. 

night,  noche,  f . 

no,  no,  ninguno. 

nobody,  nadie. 

noise,  ruido,  m. 

no  longer,  ya  no. 

no... more,  no... mds. 

none,  ninguno. 

no  one,  nadie. 

nor,  ni. 

north,  norte,  m. 

no  sooner,  apenas. 

not  any,  ninguno. 

not  anybody,  nadie. 

not  anything,  nada. 

not  either,  tampoco. 

nothing,  nada. 

novel,  novela,  f . 

now,  ahora. 

number,  numerot  m. 

nut,  nuez,  f. 


O. 

obedient,  obediente. 
to  obey,  obedecer,  2. 
object,  objeto,  m. 


to  oblige,  obligar,  1. 
obstinate,  porftado. 
to  obtain,  obtenert  2. 

conseguir,  3. 
occasion,  ocastin,  f. 
to  occupy,  ocupar,  I. 
of,  c?e. 

to  offend,  ofender,  2. 
to  offer,  o/reccr,  2.  sw- 

ministrar,  1. 
officer,  oficial,  m. 
office,  escritorio,  m. 
often,  a  menudo. 
oil,  aceiYe,  m. 
old,  we/o. 
on,  so6re. 
only,  solamente. 
to  open,  a6n'r,  3. 
opened,  abierto. 
opinion,  opinion,  f.  con- 

cejoto,  m. 

orange,  naranja,  f. 
to  order,  mandarf  I. 
ordinary,  comtin. 
other,  o^ro. 
ounce,  onza,  f. 
out,  afuera. 
outcry,  grito,  m. 
overcoat,  sobretodo,  m. 
to  overwhelm,  co/mar, 

1. 

to  owe,  de&er,  2. 
I  owe,  debo. 
owes,  rfe&e. 
owner,  dueno,  m. 
ox,  6wej/,  m. 


package,  paquete,  m. 
page,  pdgina,  f. 
painful,  penoso. 
painting,  pinturat  f. 
palace,  palaciot  m. 


394 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


paper,  papel,  m. 
parents,  padres,  m.  pi. 
park,  parjue,  m. 
part,  parte,  f . 
to  pass,  pasar,  1. 
past,  pasado. 
paternal,  paternal. 
patience,  paciencia,  f . 
patient  (sick  person), 

enfermo,  m. 
to  pay,  pagar,  1. 
peace,  paz,  f. 
pear,  pera,  f. 
to  peel,  descascarar,  1. 
pencil,  /rfpz'z,  m. 
penknife,   cortaplumas, 

m. 

people,  genie,  f . 
to  people,  poblar,  1. 
perhaps,  acaso,  to/  vez. 
person,  persona,  f . 
Peter,  Pedro. 
Philip,  Felipe. 
physician,  medico,  m. 
picture,  retrato,  m.  cwa- 

rfro. 
piece,  pieza,  f.  pedazo, 

m. 

pink,  c/ave/,  m. 
pious,  joio. 
place,  lugar,  m. 
plant,  planta,  f. 
to  play,  jugar,  1.  repre- 

sentar,  1. 

to  play  on,  tocar,  1. 
to  please,  complacer,  2. 
pleased,  contento. 
pleasure,  gusto,  111. 
poison,  veneno,  m. 
polite,  corte's,  comedido. 
Pompey,  Pompeyo. 
poor,  pobre. 
port,  puerto,  m. 
possession,  posesion,  f . 
possible,  posible. 


post,  correo,  m. 
posterity,  posteridad,f 
postman,  ca/tero,  m. 
postoffice,  correo,  m. 
pound,  /z'6ra,  f . 
power,  poder,  m. 
powerful,  poderoso. 
to  practise,  practicar 

1. 

praise,  alabanza,  f. 
to  praise,  alabar,  1. 
precept,  precepto,  m. 
to  prefer,  preferir,  3. 
to  prepare,  preparar,  1, 
prerogative,   preroga- 

tiva,  f . 
to  prescribe, 

3. 

to  present,  presentar,  1. 
press,  imprenta,  f. 
to  pretend,  pretender,  2 
pretty,  6ontYo. 
price,  precio,  m. 
prince,  prfncipe,  m. 
principle,  principio,  m. 
prison,  car  eel,  f . 
prisoner,  prisionero,  m 
privilege,  privilegio,  m 
probable,  probable. 
probably,    probable- 

mente. 
procession,   procesidn, 

f. 

professor,  profesor. 
profitable,  ventajoso. 
to  promise,  prometer,  2. 
to  pronounce,  pronun 

ciar,  1. 

proof,  prueba,  f. 
to  be  proper,  convenir, 

3. 

property,  propiedad,  f. 
propitious,  propicio. 
to  propose,  proponer,  2. 
proud,  orgulloso. 


to  prove,  probar,  1. 
provided,  con  to/  ^we. 
public,  publico. 
pulled  down,demolido 
to  punish,  castigar,  1. 
pupil,  discipulo,  m. 
to  put  on,  ponerse,  2. 
put,  puesto. 


Q 

queen,  m'na,  f. 
question,  pregunta,  f. 
quick,  %ero. 
quickly,  pronto. 
quiet,  g-wi'eto. 


R. 

railroad,    ferrocarril, 

m. 

rain,  Z/uw'a,  f. 
to  rain,  //over,  2. 
rare,  raro. 
rather,  a/^o. 
to  read,  /eer,  2. 
read,  letdo. 
ready,  /ts^o. 
reason,  raztfn,  f . 
to  receive,  recibir,  3. 
received,  recibido. 
to    recommend,  reco- 

mendar,  1. 
recompense,   recom- 

pensa,  f . 

red,  Colorado,  encendido. 
to  reestablish,  restable- 

cer,  2. 
refreshment,    refresco, 

m. 
regiment,      regimiento, 

m. 
to  regret,  senfir,  3. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


395 


to  reign,  re  war,  1. 
to  rejoice,  alegrarse,  1. 
to  relate,  referir,  3. 
to  remain,  quedarse,  1. 
to    remember,    acor- 

darse,  1. 

to  remove,  apartar,  1. 
to  repeat,  repetir,  3. 
to  repent,  arrepentirse. 

3. 

to  repress,  reprimir,  3. 
to  reside,  residir,  3. 
to  resolve,  resolver,  2. 
to  rest,  descansar,  1. 
to  respect,  respetar,  1. 
to  result,  provenir,  3. 
to  return,  volver,  2.  de- 

volver,  2. 

return,  vuelva  V. 
to  revolt,  sublevar,  1. 
rich,  rico. 
a  very  rich  man,  rica- 

chdn,  m. 
right,  derecho. 
ripe,  maduro. 
to  rise,  levantarse,  1. 
river,  rib,  m. 
road,  camino,  m. 
rogue,  picaro,  m. 
Roman,  Romano,  m. 
Romulus,  Rdmulo. 
room,  cuarto,  m. 
rose,  rosa,  f . 
to  rot,  podrir,  3. 
rudeness,  groseria,  f . 
ruin,  rwwa,  f . 
to  ruin,  arruinar,  1. 
to  run,  correr,  2. 
Russia, 
Russian, 


saber,  sa6/e,  m. 
sacred,  sagrado. 


sad, 

saddle,  silla,  f. 

safe,  cq/a,  f. 

said,  dicho. 

sailor,  marinero,  m. 

same,  mismo. 

satisfied,  satisfecho,  con 
tento. 

to  say,  decir,  3. 

say,  diga  V. 

says,  oVce. 

scholar,  discfpulo,  m. 

school,  escuela,  f . 

science,  ciencia,  f. 

Scipio,  Escipitin. 

to  scream,  gritar,  I. 

season,  estacidn,  f. 

seated,  sentado. 

scissors,  tijeras,  f.  pi. 

to  see,  ver,  2. 

do  you  see  ?  ^  ve  F.  ? 

I  see,  veo. 

seem,  parecen. 

seen,  vzs^o. 

sees,  re. 

to  select,  escoger,  2. 

self,  mismo. 

to  sell,  vender,  2. 

do  you  sell?  &vende 
V.? 

I  sell,  vendo. 

sells,  vende. 

to  send,  mandar,  1.  en- 
war,  1. 

send,  mande  V, 

sent,  enviado. 

servant,  criado,  m. 

servantgirl,  criada,  f. 

served,  servido. 

service,  servido,  m. 

several,  varios,  m.  va 
rzas,  f. 

to  shave,  afeitar,  1. 

sheet,  sdbana,  f . 

shilling,  peseta,  f. 


ship,  buque,  m. 

shirt,  camisa,  f . 

shoe,  zapato,  m. 

shoemaker,  zapatero, 
m. 

to  shoot,  fusilar,  1. 

shop,  tienda,  f . 

short,  cor^o. 

to  show,  mostrar,  I. 

to  shut,  cerrar,  I. 

shut,  cerrado. 

sick,  enfermo. 

side,  Zacfo,  m. 

silent,  callado. 

silk,  serfa,  f . 

silly,  Zonto. 

silver,  jt?/afa,  f . 

since,  desde,  desde  que. 

to  sing,  cantar,  1. 

singer,  cantatriz,  f . 

singing,  canto,  m. 

sings,  cemta. 

singular,  singular. 

Sir,  .serior. 

sister,  hermana,  f . 

to  sit  down,  sentarse, 
I. 

situation,  empleo,  m. 
colocacidn,  f . 

skiUful,  ^a6zl 

slate,  pizarra,  f. 

to  sleep,  dormir,  3. 

sleigh,  trineo,  m. 

slowly,  despacio. 

small,  pequeno. 

smell,  ofor,  m. 

sno"w,  nieve,  f. 

so,  asf,  ton. 

society,  sociedad,  f. 

sold,  vendido. 

some,  alguno. 

somebody,  alguien,  al- 
guno. 

some  one,  alguno. 

something,  algo. 


396 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


something  else,  otra 

cos  a. 
sometimes,    algunas 

veces. 
somewhere,  alguna 

parte. 

son,  hijo,  m. 
song,  cancidn,  f . 
soon,  pronto. 
I  am  sorry  for  it,  lo 

siento. 

SO  that,  a  si  que. 
soup,  sopa,  f. 
sour,  agrio. 
to  sow,  sembrar,  1. 
Spain,  Espana,  f . 
Spaniard,  Espanol,  m. 
Spanish,  espaTiol. 
do  you  speak? 

ihdbla  V.f  sing. 

i  hablan  VV.  ?  pi. 
I  speak,  hablo. 
they  speak,  hablan. 
speaks,  habla. 
species,  especie,  f . 
speculation,  especula- 

cidn,  f. 

to  spend,  gastar,  1. 
spends,  gasta. 
splendid,  magntfico. 
spoken,  hablado. 
spot,  lugar,  m. 
spring,  primavera,  f. 
squadron,  escuadra,  f . 
stab  (with  a  poniard), 

punalada,  f. 
stable,  caballeriza,  f. 
to  stand,  pararse,  1. 
standing,  parado. 
star,  estrella,  f . 
state,  estado,  m. 
statue,  estatua,  f. 
to  steal,  rofcar,  1. 
steam,  vajoor,  m. 
steamer,  vapor ,  m. 


stocking,  media,  f . 
store,  almacen,  m. 
stranger,  estrangero,  m. 
strawberry,  fresa,  f. 
street,  calle,  f. 
strength,  fuerza,  f. 
to  strike,  pegar,  1. 
strong,  fuerte. 
student,  estudiante,  m. 
studied,  estudiado. 
studious,  estudioso. 
study,  estudio,  m. 
to  study,  estudiar,  1. 
do  you  study  ?  ^  estu- 

dian,  W.  ? 
we  study,  estudiamos. 
to  subdue,  someter,  2. 
suburbs,  contornos,  m. 

such  as,  tal. 
suddenly,  de  repente. 
to  suffer,  padecer,  2. 
to  suffocate,  sufocar,  1. 
sugar,  azucar,  m. 
sun,  sol,  m. 
sunshade,  quitasol,  m. 
supper,  cena,  f. 
to  support,  mantener,  2. 
to  suppose,  suponer,  2. 
supreme,  supremo. 
sure,  seguro. 
surprised,  sorprendido. 
to  surrender,  rendirse, 

3. 
to  suspend,  suspender, 

2. 

sweet,  dulce. 
swollen,  hinchado. 

T. 

table,  mesa,  f. 
tailor,  sastre,  m. 
to  take,  tomar,  1.  llevar 
1.  conducir,  3. 


to  take  a  walk,  c?ar 

MW  paseo,  pasearse,  1. 
to  take  interest,  int ere- 

sarse,  1. 

to  take  off,  quilarse,  1. 
to  take  possession, 

apoderarse,  1. 
tale,  cuento,  m. 
talent,  talento,  m. 
tall,  afro. 

Tartary,  Tartar  la,  f. 
tea,  £ef,  m. 

teacher,  maestro,  m. 
teaches,  ensena. 
tear,  idgrima,  f . 
Telemachus,     7W£ 

maco. 

to  tell,  dectV,  3. 
teU,  c/i>a  F. 
tells,  cftce. 

thankful,  agradecido. 
thank  you,  gracias. 
I  (or  we)  thank  you, 

muchas  gracias. 
that,  aquello,  ese. 
that,  que. 

that  thing,  aquello,  eso. 
theater,  teatro,  m. 
then,  despues. 
theological,  teologal. 
theoretical,  tedrico. 
there,  ahf,  alii. 
therefore,  asi. 
there  is,  hay. 
thief,  ladrdn,  m. 
thing,  cosa,  f . 
to  think,  pensar,  1. 
this,  este. 
this  thing,  esto. 
three,  tres. 
through,  por. 
thunder,  trueno,  m. 
thus,  asi. 
tiger,  tigre,  m. 
till,  hasta. 


ENGLISH- SPANISH. 


time,  tiempo,  m.  kora,  f. 

vez,  f . 

timid,  ttmido. 
tired,  cansado. 
to-day,  hoy. 
together,  junto. 
to-morrow,  manana. 
too,  demasiado,  tambie'n. 
too  many,  demasiados. 
too  much,  demasiado. 
tooth,  diente,  m. 
tower,  torre,  f . 
town,  pueblo,  m. 
to  translate,  traducir, 

3. 
translation,  traduccio'n, 

f. 
transparent,    traspa- 

rente. 

to  travel,  viajar,  \. 
to  treat,  tratar,  1. 
tree,  rfr&o/,  m. 
to  tremble,  temblar,  1. 
trifle,  bagatela,  f .  ^'o- 

/era,  f . 

trimmed  bordado. 
to  trouble,  molestar,  1. 
trunk,  6aw/,  m. 
truth,  verdad,  f. 
turkey,  pavo,  m. 
to   turn,  mover,  2.  vo/- 

ver,  2. 
two,  dos. 


U. 


umbrella,  paraguas,  m. 
uncle,  tio,  m. 
under,  bajo. 
to  understand,  enten 

der,  2.  comprender,  2. 
unfortunate,    desgra- 

ciado. 


unfortunately,    por 

iesgracia. 
unhappy,  infeliz. 
unless,  d  menos  que. 
until,  hasta,  hasta  que. 
un'well,  malo. 
unworthy,  indigno. 
upon,  sobre. 
to  upset,  derribar,  1. 
upstairs,  arriba. 
urbanity,   urbanidad, 

f. 

us,  nosotros. 
useful,  titil. 
useless,  inutil 


vegetable,  legumbre,  f . 
verse,  verso,  m. 
very,  mwy,  mismo. 
vessel,  buque,  ra.  barco, 

m. 

vest,  chaleco,  m. 
victory,  victoria,  f. 
village,  pueblo,  m.  aldea. 

f. 

virtue,  virtud,  f. 
to  visit,  visitar,  I. 
volume,  tomo,  m. 


W. 

to  wait,  esperar,  1. 

aguardar,  1. 
walk,  paseo,  m. 
to  walk,  andar,  1. 
walkingstick,  bast6n, 

m. 

wall,  rwwro,  m. 
war,  guerra,  f. 
warm,  caliente. 
to  warm,  calentar,  1. 


was,  era. 

to  wash,  favar,  1. 

washerwoman,  / 

rfera,  f . 

watchful,  vigilante. 
water,  a^rwa,  f . 
way,  modo,  m.  medio. 
weak,  c?e6i7. 
week,  semana,  f. 
to  weep,  llorar,  I. 
weeps,  llora. 
well,  pozo,  m. 
well,  bien,  pues,  bueno. 
w^hat,  que'. 
when,  cuando. 
where,  donde. 
which,  que. 
white,  bianco. 
who,  quien. 
•whom,  d  quien. 
whose  ?  ^  de  qui€n  ? 
why?  iporque"? 
wife,  mujer,  f . 
will  find,  encontrard. 
I  will  have,  quiero. 
"William,  Guillermo. 
will  you  have  ?  ^  quiere 

V.? 

•wind,  viento,  m. 
window,  ventana,  f. 
wine,  vino,  m. 
winter,  invierno,  m. 
•wise,  sabio. 
•wisely,  sdbiamente. 
•wish,  quieren. 
do  you  wish  ?  i  quiere 

V.? 

I  -wish,  quiero. 
we  wish,  deseamos. 
wishes,  quiere,  desea. 
with,  con. 
within,  dentro  de. 
•with  me,  conmigo. 
•without,  afuera,  sin. 
woman,  mujer t  f. 


398 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


•wood,  basque,  m.  Una, 

f. 

word,  palabra,  f . 
•work,  trabajo,  m.  obra, 

f. 

to  work,  trabajar,  1. 
workman,  obrero,  m. 
works,  trabaja. 
world,  mundo,  m. 
to  be  worth,  valer,  2. 


worthy,  digno. 
would  to  God!  Ojald! 
wounded,  herido. 
to  write,  escribir,  3. 
do  you  write  ?  &  escribe 

V.? 

I  write,  escribo. 
writes,  escribe. 
writing,  escritura,  f. 
written,  escrito. 


yard,  patio,  m.  vara,  f. 
year,  ano,  m. 
yes,  st. 

yesterday,  ayer. 
yet,  todavfa,  aun. 
young,  j  oven. 
youth,  juventud,  f . 


SPANISH     TEXTS 


ALARCON.      El  Capitan  Veneno  (Brownell)    .      .      .    $0.50 

El  Nifio  de  la  Bola  (Schevill) 90 

AVELLANEDA.      Baltasai  (Bransby) 65 

BRETON.      ^Quien  es  Ella?     (Garner) 70 

CALDERON.      La  Vida  es  Sueno  (Comfort)      ...        .70 

FONTAINE.      Flores  de  Espana 45 

GALDOS.      Dona  Perfecta  (Lewis) i.oo 

Electra  (Bunnell) 70 

Marianela  (Gray) 90 

JOHNSON.      Cuentos  Modernos 60 

LARRA.      Partir  a  Tiempo  (Nichols) 40 

MORATIN.      El  Si  de  las  Ninas  (Geddes  &  Josselyn),        .50 

TURRELL.      Spanish  Reader 80 

VALERA.      El  Comendador  Mendoza  (Schevill)    .      .        .85 
Pepita  Jimenez  (Cusachs)       . 90 

WORMAN'S     SPANISH     BOOKS - 
REVISED 


First  Spanish  Book     .      .   $0.40 


Second  Spanish  Book     .  $0.40. 


IN  their  new  form  these  books  offer  a  satisfactory  course  in 
spoken  Spanish.      The  FIRST  BOOK  teaches  directly 
by   illustration,   contrast,   association,    and   natural  infer- 
ence.      The    exercises    grow  out    of   pictured    objects   and 
actions,  and  the  words  are  kept  so  constantly  in  mind  that 
no  translation  or  use  of  English  is  required  to  fix  their  mean- 
ing.      In   the   SECOND    BOOK   the   accentuation   agrees 
with  the  latest  rules  of  the  language. 


AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 

(233) 


A  PRACTICAL  COURSE 

IN  SPANISH 

$1.25 

By  H.  M.  MONSANTO,  A.M.,  and  LOUIS  A. 
LANGUELLIER,  LL.D.  Revised  by  FREEMAN 
M.  JOSSELYN,  JR.,  formerly  Assistant  Professor  of 
Romance  Languages  in  Boston  University 


THIS  popular  text-book   makes  the  basic  principles  of 
Spanish  grammar  familiar  to  the  student  by  constant 
practice  and  by  repetition  in  Spanish.      In  the  revision 
the  editor  has  preserved  the  original  form  of  the  work,  recast- 
ing only  such  grammatical  statements  as  seemed  to  demand 
it.       His  special  care  has  been  to  present  the  Spanish  text  in 
accordance  with  the  latest  rules  for  orthography  and  accent. 
^|  The  lessons  contain : 

1.  EXAMPLES,  accompanied    by  their  nearest  English 
equivalents,  and  made  to  illustrate  the  grammatical  and  idio- 
matic principles  which  are  involved  in  the  lessons. 

2.  VOCABULARIES  placed    before  the  exercises,  the 
masculine  and  feminine  names  being  grouped  separately,  and 
other  parts  of  speech  arranged  alphabetically. 

3.  SPANISH  EXERCISES.     The  sentences  in  Spanish 
require  only  the  application  of  instructions  contained  in  the 
lesson,  or  in  the  preceding  ones,  for  translation  into  English. 

4.  ENGLISH  EXERCISES.     The  analogous  sentences 
in  English  are  presented  in  immediate  connection  with  the 
preceding  ones  in  Spanish.      The  principles  applied  in  the 
Spanish  exercises  are  thus  made  an  effective  auxiliary  in  the 
work  of  translating  English  into  Spanish. 

5.  GRAMMATICAL   AND    IDIOMATIC    PRIN- 
CIPLES.    This  division  may  be  employed  by  means  of  the 
references,  either  in  connection  with  the  preceding  instructions, 
or  as  a  review. 


AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CZNTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


MAY   %  1935 

FtB    7    Ujo 

1936 

\    ;    LS39 

APR  11  1941  M 

MAY  JA  1941M 

J 

JUN  25  1941 

F(       ..     1944 

LD  21-100m-8,'34 

PH959 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


